i \ 






. 






■>. 


















$j**<z-u,j^tf, &*: /*jr 







(> 



RECOMMENDATIONS. 



Mount Pleasant, Ohio, April 1Uh, 1846. 

I hate carefully examined Mr. James E. Carroll's MS. Key to Mitchell's 
Geography. The design of the work is well conceived and ably executed. 
The author, who is a practical teacher, has not only answered the questions 
demanded by the Geography, but, with great research, he has added much 
additional information, from the most authentic sources. 

Important changes have been made in some countries, and interesting dis- 
coveries in others, since Mitchell's Geography was compiled ; but, both in 
that work, and this Key, these changes are very properly noticed. 

In view both of the plan and of the manner in which that plan is carried 
out, I think the Key before us will be a valuable acquisition to teachers, to 
private students, and to families generally. ELISHA BATES. 

I cordially concur in the above recommendation. 

B. MITCHELL, 
Pastor of the Presbyterian Church, Mt. Pleasant, Ohio. 

I most cheerfully concur in the above recommendations. 

I. BARNES, 
Minister of M. P. Church, Mt. Pleasant, Ohio. 



Wheeling, Va., April 24, 1846. 

This may certify, that having carefully examined (in manuscript) Mr. 
Carroll's Key to Mitchell's School Geography, I am much pleased with it. 

This Key is one of those happy " hits" which come " once in a thousand," 
and astonish us in no way but by its extreme simplicity, the beauty of its 
arrangement, and its amazing utility. The remarkable accuracy of- this 
Key, and the unquestionable authority of the works chiefly consulted in its 
compilation, speak highly for the zeal and discretion of its author, and com- 
mend his work as a safe and infallible guide. It strikes me that this Key is 
a work which will be extensively introduced, and sought after by teachers, 
and that it is to be regarded as a valuable accession to the catalogue of books 
for Common Schools. J. P. STUART, A. M. 



West Alexander, Pa., April 27, 1846. 

On a careful examination of the submitted manuscript copy of the Key to 
Mitchell's School Geography, by Mr. James E. Carroll, I am fully satisfied 
that it is a work worthy of extensive patronage. It is admirably adapted to 
the wants of all, either studying or teaching the important branch of Geo- 
graphical science. 

The plan of the work greatly facilitates the teacher, and gives interest to 
the pupil in acquiring a knowledge of his lesson, and confidence in himself 
at the time of recitation. We know of no work that is more needed in this 
day, as an academic, family, or Common School book, than this ; nothing 

(1) 



RECOMMENDATIONS. 



of the kind having ever been published. From its design, pian and execu- 
tion, I judge it truly worthy, and cordially wish it a wide circulation. 

JOHN McCLUSKY, A. M., 
Principal of the West Alexander Academy, and pastor of the 
Presbyterian Church. 



Bethany College, Va., April 25, 1846. 
Having in rather a cursory way examined the design and execution of 
Mr. J. E. Carroll's Key to Mitchell's Geography, still I cannot withhold my 

commendation of it as a work of very considerable merit, as a valuable 

compilation of a great variety and amount of information, an accurate know- 
ledge on the subjects of which it treats, and as greatly facilitating the labours 
of school teachers in the communication of instruction in this most useful 
science. We cannot but desire for this valuable work an extensive circu- 
lation amongst the amateurs of the science of Geography, as the teachers of 
the book whose Key of interpretation, and statement of accurate responses it 
is. A. CAMPBELL, Pres. Bethany College. 

Bethany College, 28th April, 1846. 
I consider the Key to Mitchell's Geography, by Mr. J. E. Carroll, a work 
deserving encouragement. J. P. MASON, A. M., 

Prof, of Mathematics and Mechanics. 



To those who desire to avail themselves of the aid of such a work, I have 
no hesitation in recommending Mr. Jas. E. Carroll's « Key to Mitchell's 
Geography," as containing a large amount of valuable Geographical and 
statistical information, compiled with much care and arranged in a perspi- 
cuous manner. R. RICHARDSON, M. D., 

April 29th, 1846. Prof Chem. in Bethany College. 



I have examined with some attention a portion of a work, in manuscript, 
by Mr. James E. Carroll, entitled, « A Key to Mitchell's School Geography," 
&c, and have formed a very favourable impression with regard to the design 
and execution of the work. It presents the subject with about that degree 
of amplification necessary for an instructor who employs Mitchell's work as a 
text-book for his classes, and furnishes additional matter in the proper place, 
compiled from the latest and best authorities, which is thus rendered at once 
available to the teacher for the purposes of recitation. The undersigned is 
strongly impressed with the belief that much additional interest would be 
given to the study of Geography, by the use of Such a work by teachers, and 
that it would likewise form a convenient manual for parents, in giving in- 
struction to their children in this branch of useful knowledge, and with these 
impressions he would recommend the work to public patronage. 

A. F. ROSS, A. M., 

29th April, 1846, Prof Languages of Bethany College, Va. 



Washington College, April 30th, 1846. 
From a partial examination of Mr. James E. Carroll's Key to « Mitchell's 
School Geography," I am persuaded that it is precisely what its title-page 



RECOMMENDATIONS. Ill 

imports: « A complete Key to S. Augustus Mitchell's School Geography, 
containing full answers to all the questions on the maps, with much addi- 
tional information from the most recent and authentic sources." 

I cheerfully recommend it to all private students, as a valuable aid in ac- 
quiring an accurate knowledge of this most useful science. 

ROBERT MILLIGAN, A. M„ 
Prof. ofEng. Literature, in Washington College, Pa. 

I can concur in the above recommendation. 

RICHARD H. LEE, A. M., 
Prof, of Belles Lettres and Biblical Economy in Washington College, Pa. 

I also concur in the above recommendation. 

W. P. ALRICH, A. M., 
Prof, of Math., Chem., and Nat. Phil., Washington College, Pa. 

I also cheerfully concur in the foregoing recommendation. 

N. MURRAY, A. M., 
Prof, of Languages, Washington College, Pa. 



May 1st, 1846. 
Having examined a considerable portion of Mr. J. E. Carroll's " Key to 
Mitchell's School Geography," I am fully satisfied that it is peculiarly adapt- 
ed to the use of teachers of private students of Geography, and of parents 
giving instruction to their children at home. It contains a vast amount of 
information in a small compass, is well arranged, accurate, and brings up 
the science to the present time. 

Great care has evidently been bestowed on its preparation, and the author 
has, in my opinion, happily succeeded in producing an invaluable aid to that 
class of persons for whom the work is designed. 

S. R. WILLIAMS, A. M., 
Prof. Nat. Philos., Astron., and Chemistry, in Jefferson College, 
Canonsburg, Penna. 

I cheerfully concur in the above recommendation. 

A. B. BROWN, A. M., 

Prof. Rhetoric, Logic, and General History, Jeff'n College. 

From a brief examination of some parts of the aforementioned work, I 
concur in the preceding recommendations. 

T. BEVERIDGE, D. D., 
Professor of Eccl. Hist, and Biblical Criticism, Ass. TheoL 
Seminary, Canonsburg, Pa. 



June 3d, 1846. 
Having cursorily examined Mr. Carroll's Geographical Key, (in manu- 
script), I have no hesitation in saying that I regard it as a valuable work. 
The materials have been drawn from sources of the highest authority, and 
arranged with much care. 

To parents desirous of examining the progress of their children, to private 
students, and to young and inexperienced teachers, this work will be found 
of great value. ' I feel assured its publication will aid very much in promot- 
ing the study of Geography. JOSEPH RAY, M. D., 

Professor of Mathematics and Natural Philosophy, Woodward 
j * College, Cincinnati. 



1 V RECOMMEN DATIONS. 

Franklin College, June 25th, 1846. 
From a cursory examination of the subjoined « Key," I am satisfied it is 
all it imports. It is a valuable contribution to the science of Geography, 
affording ample facilities to all engaged in the study, of acquiring a full and 
accurate knowledge of the elements of Geographical science. It gives evi- 
dence of careful and extended research on the part of the author 5 and is 
cordially recommended to the patronage of all friends of Literature. 

JOSEPH GORDON, A. M., 
Prof, of Math, and Nat. Phil., Franklin College, New Athens, Ohio. 

We concur in the above recommendation most cheerfully. 

A. M. BLACK, A. M., 

Professor of Languages. 
A. D. CLARK, A. M., 
Pres. of Franklin College, New Athens, Ohio. 



Mt. Pleasant, Jeff. Co., 0., August 3d, 1846. 
Having with considerable care examined (in manuscript,) the Key to 
Mitchell's Geography, compiled by Mr. Jas. E. Carroll, I am fully satisfied 
it is not only all that its title imports, a " Complete Key to Mitchell's Geo- 
graphy," but in addition, contains a large amount of Geographical informa- 
tion, drawn from the most unquestionable sources, and so arranged and in- 
terspersed throughout the body of the work, as to become a valuable acces- 
sory, not only to private students and teachers generally, but also to parents, 
desirous of examining the progress of their children in this most necessary 
and interesting branch of Education. 

As a valuable and cheap reference, also, this Key will doubtless find its 
way to many private libraries. 

GEO. R. JENKINS, A. M., 
Principal of the Mt. Pleasant High School. 



Philadelphia, Sept. 7th, 1846. 

From a copious examination of the Key to Mitchell's School Geography 
and Atlas, by Mr. James E. Carroll, of Mount Pleasant, Ohio, I am satisfied 
that it is compiled with much care, in strict conformity with the work from 
which it is derived, and that it is a valuable adjunct thereto. In its general 
arrangement, it is eminently characterised by that quality so valuable in all 
elementary works, viz., simplicity and distinctness, and I have no doubt that 
it will be found to be a useful assistant, in attaining such a knowledge of 
the earth as may be acquired by an attentive study of our best geographies. 

I observe that all the recent discoveries noticed in the Geography and 
Atlas, have also been carefully noted in the Key ; and the latest political 
changes in our own, as well as in other parts of the globe, are correctly 
embodied in it. The various additional facts in statistics appear to be derived 
from the latest sources, and are calculated to increase the utility of the work. 

In conclusion, I feel satisfied that Mr. Carroll's treatise will be found, in 
conjunction with the work with which it is connected, one of the best prac- 
tical books in the science of Geography, for the use of teachers, heads of 
families, and private pupils, yet published in the United States, and trust 
that it may be justly appreciated and liberally patronized. 

S. AUGUSTUS MITCHELL. 



COMPLETE KEY 

TO 

MITCHELL'S 
SCHOOL GEOGRAPHY, 



CONTAIN INS 



FULL ANSWERS TO ALL THE QUESTIONS 
ON THE MAPS; 

WITH MUCH ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, 

FROM THE MOST 

RECENT AND AUTHENTIC SOURCES. 

PRINCIPALLY DESIGNED AS AN AID TO TEACHERS IN HEARING THE 

RECITATIONS, BUT EQUALLY ADAPTED TO THE USE 

OF PRIVATE STUDENTS AND FAMILIES, 



BY JAMES E. CARROL. 

i j i 



W 



PHILADELPHIA: 
THOMAS, COWPERTHWAIT & CO. 

1847. 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, by 

JAMES E. CARROLL, 

in the clerk's office of the District Court of the United States for the 
District of Ohio. 



i 






STEREOTYPED BY J. FAGAN. 
PRINTED BY SMITH AND PETERS. 






%w 



m 



PREFACE 



There are perhaps few stronger tokens of the growth of edu- 
cation in the United States, than the increased demand for element- 
ary works, especially those which treat of Geography. The study 
of this science has, in fact, become almost universal throughout our 
country ; and its importance is so generally felt, that we seldom 
find a youth, of even a common education, who has not made it 
more or less a study. A thorough knowledge of geography is 
doubtless, to a considerable degree, a substitute for extensive 
travelling, and personal observation of the various countries of the 
earth. He that would become acquainted with the world, with 
the endless variety of human character and condition, with the 
manners, customs, laws, and institutions of every nation, and the 
productions, whether animal, vegetable, or mineral, of every land 
and every clime, finds his quickest and surest method to be the 
study of this science. 

We shall now briefly state the Design of the present Work. 
It is intended chiefly for the aid of teachers, but it may be con- 
sulted with profit by private students of geography, and also by 
parents giving instruction to their children at home. Not that we 
consider the usual questions of geography of difficult solution, from 
any particular abstruseness, and that therefore a key is necessary. 
But the difficulty experienced in teaching this science is of a rather 
peculiar nature. Geography, as now taught, abounds in an end- 
less variety of details, having seldom any logical relation to 
each other ; and the successful teacher should have a ready and 
accurate answer to each of these ten thousand questions; or 
else, on the other hand, be embarrassed and impeded in the midst 
of his recitation. And in order to this, he should have an ade- 
quate Key, or otherwise devote an amount of time to the lessons 
of his classes, which few teachers can spare. In fact, no one 
can expect to retain in his memory every one of the details of 
the ordinary lessons in geography ; any more than he could the 

vii 



V111 PREFACE, 

answers to a number of pages of problems in common arithmetic. 
It is, therefore, as reasonable that the teacher should be supplied 
with a Key in the one case as in the other ; and yet we believe no 
work of the kind has, hitherto, appeared in our country. This desi- 
deratum has been mentioned to the author, by many teachers ; and 
a desire manifested that it should, at an early day, be supplied. 

Impressed with this view, he has been induced to prepare the 
present work and offer it to the public. He believes that it con- 
tains a complete answer to every question in the most approved 
school geography of our country, and that it will at once relieve 
the teacher from embarrassment and perplexity, in teaching or 
reviewing his classes. This leads us to speak of the Plan of 
the Work. 

The plan is simple, and may be briefly stated. It is adapted to 
the last edition of Mitchell's School Geography, but it will answer 
any edition of that work, inasmuch as no material changes have 
been made in it from the first. Mitchell's Geography is chosen, 
because, after comparing all the school geographies in common use 
with one another, and with several of the best and most recent 
authorities, both American and European, his work was thought 
to be more accurate than any other; and also better arranged, 
and better adapted for teaching. The Key, however, will be 
valuable to those who use any of the school geographies extant ; 
although teachers who have it, would do well to procure Mit- 
chell's work also, as the former is designed to be used in connexion 
with the latter. It is, at the same time, so arranged that it may 
be used by itself with profit and convenience. 

The Key, as will be seen, is printed in type of different sizes. 
Full answers to all Mitchell's questions will be found in the larger 
type. In the smaller type, there is an amplification of the same 
matter from the other authorities which have been consulted. 
Condensed views of the various countries of the earth, drawn 
from the most respectable authors, with copious details of their 
statistics, are thus thrown before the eye of the teacher, at the 
very point where such aid will be the most welcome and useful. 
In this part of the work, there is a large amount of valuable matter, 
which the teacher can easily make available in oral instruction, 
and in occasional remarks to his classes. 



PREFACE. ix 

There are here given the boundaries, extent, latitude, longitude, 
and population of all the Empires, Countries, Kingdoms, Repub- 
lics, States, Provinces and Islands ; the boundaries, latitude, lon- 
gitude, and extent of the principal Peninsulas ; a description of 
the principal Capes and Promontories ; the latitude, longitude, and 
extent of the principal Oceans, Seas, Archipelagoes, Bays, Gulfs? 
Sounds, Straits, Channels, and Lakes ; a description of the prin- 
cipal Rivers and Mountains ; and the population of many of the 
principal Cities and Towns in the World. Also the boundaries, 
latitude, longitude, length, breadth, extent in square miles and in 
acres, and the population of every state in the Union are added. 
Likewise, an aggregate of the population of each state, for every 
ten years, since 1790 ; with the number of white males and 
females, of colored males and females, and of slaves ; of those 
engaged in the learned professions ; in agriculture ; in commerce ; 
in manufactures and trades ; in navigating the ocean, lakes, 
rivers, and canals, in each state, district, and territory ; and also 
the name and population of each county, parish, district, town- 
ship, town, &c, in the United States. 

The boundaries are first given, as far as indicated by the initials 
of the same, appended to Mitchell's questions ; and afterwards 
more fully and in greater detail by the author. 

The area and population also, of countries imperfectly known, 
and whose statistics depend on calculation, are frequently given, 
in addition to the statements made in Mitchell's work. 

In fact, without in any way diminishing the utility of this 
work as a Key, there has been added a great amount of statistical 
information, which will render it valuable, as a cheap and conve- 
nient book of reference. 

We are thus led to speak of the Uses of the Work. But 
little need be said on that point, as its utility, we think, is evident. 

If teaching were pursued generally as a profession in our coun- 
try ; if teachers looked forward to no other business, a treatise of 
this kind would be less necessary than at present. But with most 
instructors, teaching is but an occasional or temporary business. 
While giving instruction in a variety of branches, the majority of 
teachers are preparing themselves for other pursuits, and have but 
little time for studying the very branches which they are teaching ; 



X P REF ACE. 

consequently, they need every aid of this kind which they can 
command. 

This Key, we believe, surmounts every material difficulty in 
teaching geography, and makes it a pleasure rather than a task. 
This abundantly appears from the fact, that it contains a full 
answer to every question on the maps of Mitchell's Atlas, with 
much additional instruction ; all of which is so arranged that the 
teacher need not be at any loss in conducting the most difficult 
recitation. By its means, also, parents may ascertain the progress 
of their children at school, and may give them correct instruction 
at home. It will likewise be useful to persons advanced in life, 
who may wish to refresh their memoiy in geography, as well as 
for those who, under any circumstances, wish to study this sci- 
ence without the aid of an instructor. 

The information, statistical, &c, contained in this Key, has 
been drawn from the most authentic sources, and nothing has been 
allowed to pass without the most careful revision and comparison 
of from eight to ten authors. The corroboration of such a variety 
of authorities will very much lessen the probability of error. 

The works chiefly consulted are the following : — " Encyclopae- 
dia of Geography," by Hugh Murray, F.R.S.E., (London, 1840.) 
Balbi's " Abrege de Geographie," (last edition, 1842.) " Penny 
Cyclopaedia." McCulloch's "Universal Gazetteer," (New 
York, 1845.) "Descriptive and Statistical Gazetteer of 
the United States of America*" by Haskel and Smith, (New 
York, 1845,) and the " Universal Pronouncing Gazetteer," by 
Thomas Baldwin, (Philadelphia, 1845.) 

Believing, as he does, that few branches of common education 
are better calculated to expand the mental powers, and to lay the 
foundation for higher attainments, and for a mature and well- 
balanced mind, than the study of Geography ; he hopes that this 
humble offering to the cause may not be in vain ; and that the 
work may meet his expectation in becoming the means of abating, 
in some measure, the toils and perplexities of Teachers. 



TO TEACHERS. 



Teachers will observe, that the figures at the beginning of the lessons in 
the Key, refer to the page, lesson, and map, in Mitchell's Geography and 
Atlas. 

Also in describing Rivers, Lakes, Mountains, Boundaries, &c, on the 
Maps of N. America and the U. States, frequent reference is made to the 
various other Maps in the Atlas, where those countries are exhibited on a 
larger scale. 

The same course is pursued in regard to the Map of Europe, from which 
frequent reference is made to the Maps exhibiting the countries under con- 
sideration, on a larger scale; as, for example, to Map No. 19, of Great Bri- 
tain ; to Map No. 20, of Germany, Switzerland, and Northern Italy. 

In " Descriptive Geography" the Key has been arranged to correspond 
with Mitchell's « Observations on the Questions," which see on pages 84 
and 85 of his « School Geography." 



(xi) 



EXPLANATION 

OF THE 

ABBREVIATIONS EMPLOYED IN THIS WORK. 



There are several abbreviations used throughout this work, in order that 
a greater amount of matter may be reduced to a small compass. The fol- 
lowing are the principal, — and will, by a little attention, become familiar. 



Ala Alabama. 

Anc Anciently. 

Arab Arabic. 

Ark Arkansas. 

C. H Court House. 

cap capital. 

co county. 

Conn Connecticut. 

cr. creek. 

Del Delaware. 

dep department. 

E East or Eastern. 

Flor Florida. 

Fr French. 

ft feet. 

Ga Georgia. 

Ger German. 

gov government. 

Gr Greek. 

Hung Hungarian. 

Ill Illinois. 

la Indiana. 

Io Iowa. 

Ky Kentucky. 

La Louisiana. 

lat Latitude, Latin. 

long longitude. 

m. ms mile, miles. 

M. A Mitchell's Atlas. 

M. G Mitchell's Geography. 

Me Maine. 

Mass Massachusetts. 

Md Maryland. 

Mich Michigan. 

Miss Mississippi. 

Mo Missouri. 



mt., mts Mount, Mountains. 

N North or Northern. 

N. C North Carolina. 

nat native. 

N. H New Hampshire. 

N. J New Jersey. 

N. Y. ....... New York. 

Oo Ohio. 

Pa.. Pennsylvania. 

pop population. 

Port Portuguese. 

prov. provs.. . province, provinces. 

pron pronunciation. 

R. r River, river. 

R. I Rhode Island. 

Russ Russian. 

S South or Southern. 

sq. ms square miles. 

S. C South Carolina. 

Sp Spanish. 

Sw Swedish. 

Tenn Tennessee. 

Ter Territory. 

Turk Turkish. 

U. S United States. 

Va Virginia. 

Vt Vermont. 

W West or Western. 

Wis Wisconsin. 

C Following a num- 
^ ber, Washington 
( City. 

f North, South, East 
I West, and so of 
j other points of the 
I compass. 



W 



N. S. E. W. 



(xii) 



CONTENTS 



To Teachers Page xi 

Explanation of the Abbreviations xii 

PART FIRST. 

GEOGRAPHICAL EXERCISES. 

EASTERN AND WESTERN HEMISPHERES. 

Questions on the different zones 21 

Questions on the Map of the World, No. 1 23 

Northern and Southern Hemispheres 25 

NORTH AMERICA 26 

Oceans, Seas, Gulfs, Bays 26 

Straits, Sounds 27 

Lakes, Rivers 28 

Peninsulas, Islands 29 

Capes, Mountains 30 

Deserts, Divisions 31 

Capitals, Tropics, Circles, and Zones 32 

United States 33 

Gulfs, Lakes, Rivers 33 

Capes, Bays, Sounds 34 

Islands, Mountains, States 35 

States continued , , , , , 37 

2 (xiii) 



XIV CONTENTS. 

SOUTH AMERICA 38 

Mountains, Rivers, Capes 39 

Gulfs and Bays, Islands 40 

Lakes, Grassy Plains 41 

Divisions 41 

Capitals 42 

Equator, Tropics and Zones 42 

Latitude and Longitude 43 

EUROPE 43 

Seas 43 

Islands 44 

Gulfs, Channels 45 

Straits 45 

Mountains, Capes 46 

Rivers, Peninsulas 47 

Divisions, Capitals 48 

Latitude, Longitude, &c 49 

ASIA , 50 

Seas .50 

Mountains, Gulfs , .51 

Capes, Rivers 52 

Islands, Straits 53 

Peninsulas 53 

Isthmuses, Lakes 54 

Divisions 54 

Capitals 55 

Circles, Zones 56 

Latitude, &c 56 

AFRICA 57 

Straits, Gulfs, Bays 57 

Channels, Capes 57 

Rivers 58 

Lakes, Islands 59 

Mountains 60 

Divisions 60 



CONTENTS. XV 

Deserts, Oases 61 

Capitals 62 

Tropics, Zones 63 

Latitude, &c 63 

OCEANICA 64 

Malaysia — Divisions . . , 64 

[slands, Straits, &c 64 

Australasia 64 

Colonies, Straits, Gulfs, Islands, &c 65 

Polynesia — Archipelagoes, and islands 66 

Tropics, Zones, &c 67 



PART SECOND. 

DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 

NORTH AMERICA 68 

Divisions 68 

Gulfs 71 

Bays 72 

Sounds 74 

Straits, Lakes 75 

Peninsulas 78 

Capes 80 

[slands 81 

Mountains 86 

Rivers 88 

Distances 91 

Population of Cities 91 

Russian America 92 

Greenland 92 

British America 93 

New Britain 94 

Canada West 95 



XVI CONTENTS. 

Canada East 96 

New Brunswick 97 

Nova Scotia 98 

Newfoundland 99 

United States 99 

Lakes 100 

Bays 103 

Sounds, Rivers 106 

Capes 117 

Islands 118 

Mountains 120 

Population of Cities 122 

Distances, &c 122 

Eastern or New England States 122 

Maine 124 

New Hampshire 1 27 

Vermont 128 

Massachusetts 129 

Rhode Island 132 

Connecticut 133 

Middle States 136 

New York 137 

New Jersey 1 40 

Pennsylvania 142 

Delaware 145 

Southern States 146 

Maryland 146 

District of Columbia 148 

Virginia . 149 

North Carolina 153 

South Carolina 156 

Georgia 158 

Florida 160 

Alabama 162 

Mississippi 164 

Louisiana 167 

Texas 169 



CONTENTS. XV11 

Western States 170 

Ohio 171 

Kentucky 175 

Tennessee 177 

Michigan 179 

Indiana 181 

Illinois 184 

Missouri 187 

Arkansas 189 

Wisconsin 191 

Iowa 193 

Indian Territory 195 

Missouri Territory 1 96 

Oregon Territory 197 

Upper or New California 199 

Mexico 201 

Guatimala or Central America 202 

West Indies 203 

SOUTH AMERICA '. 204 

Divisions 204 

Rivers -. 208 

Gulfs, Bays 209 

Islands 210 

Straits 211 

Cities, Capes 212 

Distances 213 

New Grenada 213 

Venezuela 214 

Ecuador 215 

Guiana, Peru • • 216 

Bolivia 217 

Chili 218 

Brazil 219 

Buenos Ayres 220 

Paraguay 222 

Uruguay 222 

Patagonia 223 

2* 



XV111 CONTENTS. 

EUROPE 224 

Divisions 224 

Seas 242 

Gulfs 245 

Channels 246 

Straits, Rivers 247 

Lakes 256 

Peninsulas 258 

Capes, Islands 259 

Mountains 272 

Distances 274 

Norway J 274 

Sweden 275 

Russia 276 

Denmark \ 278 

Holland 279 

Belgium 279 

England 280 

Wales 286 

Scotland 287 

Ireland 296 

France 306 

Spain 308 

Portugal 310 

Germany 311 

German Provinces of Austria 316 

German Provinces of Prussia 319 

Germanic Confederation 329 

Switzerland 330 

Italy 332 

Kingdom of Sardinia 334 

Monaco 335 

Lombardy and Venice, or Austrian Italy 336 

Parma, Modena , 337 

Lucca, Tuscany, States of the Church 338 

San Marino 339 

Kingdom of Naples , 340 



CONTENTS. XIX 

Greece 341 

Turkey in Europe 342 

ASIA 344 

Divisions 344 

Seas , 354 

Gulfs 359 

Straits 361 

Capes, Rivers 362 

Islands 370 

Lakes 377 

Mountains 378 

Peninsulas 381 

Deserts 383 

Latitude, Longitude, &c 384 

Siberia 384 

Turkey in Asia 386 

Syria 387 

Palestine 388 

Arabia 389 

Persia 399 

Afghanistan 400 

Beloochistan 401 

Independent Tartary 402 

Chinese Tartary 403 

Hindoostan 409 

Chin India, or Farther India 412 

China 413 

Thibet and Corea 415 

Empire of Japan 416 

AFRICA 418 

Divisions : . 418 

Gulfs, Bays, Straits, &c 430 

Capes 431 

Rivers 432 

Mountains 436 

Islands 437 



XX CONTENTS, 

Deserts 440 

Tropics, Zones, &c 441 

Morocco 441 

Algiers, or Algeria 442 

Tunis 442 

Tripoli 443 

Barca 443 

Beled-el-Jerid 444 

Egypt 444 

Nubia, &c 445 

Abyssinia 446 

Senegambia 447 

Liberia 448 

Upper and Lower Guinea 448 

Southern Africa 449 

Eastern Africa 450 

Soudan 451 

African Islands 451 

OCEANICA 452 

Malaysia 452 

Australasia 454 

Polynesia 455 



PART FIRST. 

GEOGRAPHICAL EXERCISES. 
EASTERN AND WESTERN HEMISPHERES. 

QUESTIONS ON THE DIFFERENT ZONES. 

Pages 34-5. — Lesson 21s/. — Map of the World, No. 1. 

Question. On map of the World No. 1 , Western Hemisphere, 
point out the countries that are in the Torrid Zone. 

Answer. They are part of Mexico, the whole of Guatimala, 
Colombia, Guiana, Peru, and Brazil. 

Q. Point out the islands in the Torrid Zone, beginning at the 
left-hand side of the map. 

A. They are the Sandwich, the Mulgrave, the Navigator's, the 
Friendly, the Fejee, New Caledonia, the Society, the Georgian, 
the Marquesas, the Gallapagos, the West Indies, and the Cape 
Verde. 

Q. Point out the countries in the Torrid Zone, on the map of 
the Eastern Hemisphere. 

A. They are part of the Great Desert, the whole of Senegambia, 
Guinea, Lower Guinea, Soudan, Ethiopia, Zanguebar, part of 
Arabia, part of Hindoostan, Siam, and part of China. 

Q. Point out the islands in the Torrid Zone, in the Eastern 
Hemisphere, beginning at the left hand. 

A. They are St. Helena, part of Madagascar, the Mascarenha, 
Ceylon, Sumatra, Java, part of Formosa, Hainan, the Philippine, 
the Ladrone, the Caroline, Borneo, Celebes, the Spice, Timor, New 
Guinea, New Ireland, New Britain, Louisiade, and part of Australia. 

Q. Point out the countries in the North Temperate Zone of the 
Western Hemisphere. 

A. They are a part of Asia, part of New Britain, Labrador, 
part of Greenland, Canada, United States, and part of Mexico. 

Q. Point out the Islands in the North Temperate Zone of the 
Western Hemisphere. 

A. They are the Aleutian, Vancouver's, Newfoundland, and 
the Azores. 
121) 



22 EASTERN AND WESTERN HEMISPHERES. 

Q. Point out the countries in the North Temperate Zone, of 
the Eastern Hemisphere. 

A. They are a part of Siberia, France, Spain, Barbary, part of 
the Great Desert, Egypt, Austria, Italy, Turkey, Persia, part of 
Arabia, Tartary, part of Hindoostan, Thibet, and part of China. 

Q. Point out the Islands in the North Temperate Zone of the 
Eastern Hemisphere. 

A. They are Iceland, the British Islands, Seghalien, Jesso, 
Niphon, Kiusiu, the Loochoo, and part of Formosa. 

Q. Point out the countries in the South Temperate Zone, of 
the Western Hemisphere. 

A. They are Chili, Buenos Ayres, and Patagonia. 

Q. Point out the Islands in the South Temperate Zone, of the 
Western Hemisphere. 

A. They are New Zealand, Chiloe, Falkland, Terra del Fuego, 
South Shetland, South Orkney, Sandwich Land, and part of 
Graham's Land. 

Q. Point out the countries in the South Temperate Zone, of 
the Eastern ^Hemisphere. 

A. They are Cape Colony, and CafFraria. 

Q. Point out the Islands in the South Temperate Zone, of the 
Eastern Hemisphere. 

A. They are Tristan d'Acunha, Marian and Crozet's, Kergue- 
len's Land, part of Madagascar, part of Australia, and Van Die- 
men's Land. 

The countries in the North Frigid Zone of the Western Hemi- 
sphere, are part of Asia, part of New Britain, and part of Green- 
land. 

The countries in the North Frigid Zone of the Eastern Hemi- 
sphere, are Lapland, part of Asia, with the Islands of Spitzbergen, 
Nova Zembla, and New Siberia. 

The only land in the South Frigid Zone of the Western Hemi- 
sphere, is a part of Graham's Land, and Victoria Land ; and in 
the South Frigid Zone of the Eastern Hemisphere, there is 
Enderby's Land, and the Antarctic Continent. 

Q. In what Zone does the United States He ? 

A. North Temperate. 

Q. What Zone contains the largest animals ? 

A. Torrid. 

Q. Which Zones contain the most useful animals ? 

A. Temperate. 

Q. Which Zones produce the most hardy animals ? 

A. Frigid. 

Q. Which Zone is most subject to violent storms of wind ? 

A. Torrid. 



EASTERN AND WESTERN HEMISPHERES. 23 

Q. In which Zone are the people the most industrious ? 
A. North Temperate. 

Q. Which Zone is the most subject to earthquakes ? 
A. Torrid. 

Q. In which Zones is the climate most healthy ? 
A. Temperate. 

Q. Which of the Temperate Zones contains the most powerful 
and civilized nations ? 
A. North Temperate. 



EASTERN AND WESTERN HEMISPHERE. 
Page 50.— Lesson 33.— Map of the World, No. 1. 

Q. Of what Hemispheres does this map consist ? 

A. Eastern and Western. 

Q. What does the Eastern Hemisphere comprise ? 

A. All that part of the earth lying east of longitude 20 degrees 
west from Greenwich. 

Hemisphere signifies half a globe. 

Q. What great divisions does the Eastern Hemisphere contain ? 

A. Europe, Asia, and Africa. 

These divisions form the Eastern Continent, or Old World. 

Q. What does the Western Continent comprise ? 

A. All that part of the earth lying west of longitude 20 degrees 
west from Greenwich. 

Q. What great divisions does the Western Hemisphere 
contain ? 

A. North America, and South America. 

These divisions form the Western Continent, or the New 
World. 

Q. What is a continent 1 

A. A great extent of land, containing many countries. Ame- 
rica is a continent. (M. G. p. 14.) 

Q. What great division lies partly in the Eastern and partly 
in the Western Hemisphere ? 

A. Oceanica. 

This division is composed chiefly of Islands. (M. G. p. 50.) 

Q. Which Hemisphere contains the greatest amount of land ? 

A. Eastern. 

Q. Which Hemisphere contains the greatest amount of water ? 

A. Western. 

Q. Which Hemisphere contains the largest Islands ? 

A. Eastern. 

Q. Which is the largest Island in the world ? 

A. Australia, or New Holland. 



24 EASTERN AND WESTERN HEMISPHERES. 

Q. Which are the two next largest ? 
A. Borneo, and New Guinea. 

Q. Which is the largest division of the Eastern Hemisphere ? 
A. Asia. 

Q. Which is the smallest division of the Eastern Hemisphere ? 
A. Europe. 

Q. Which division of the Eastern Hemisphere extends farthest 
south ? 
A. Africa. 

Q. Which extends farthest to the north? 
A. Asia. 

Q. Which extends farthest south, Europe or Asia? 
A. Asia. 

Q. Which extends farthest west? 
A. Africa. 

Q. Which extends farthest east ? 
A. Asia. 



Pages 50-1.— Lesson 34. — Map of the World No. 1. 

Q. Which is the most southern land in the Eastern Hemisphere ? 

A. Enderby's Land, and Antarctic Continent. 

Q. Which is the most southern land in the Western Hemi- 
sphere ? 

A. Victoria Land, and Graham's Land. 

Q. What is an Ocean ? 

A. It is a vast body of salt water. (M. G. p. 51.) 

Q. What five Oceans are in the Eastern Hemisphere ? 

A. Northern, Southern, Pacific, Atlantic, and Indian ? 

Q. What four Oceans are in the Western Hemisphere ? 

A. Northern, Southern, Pacific, and Atlantic. There are only 
five Oceans, of which four extend into both Hemispheres. The 
Indian, is the only Ocean that is wholly in one Hemisphere. 
(M. G. p. 51.) 

Q. Which is the largest Ocean? 

A. Pacific. 

Q. Which is the second in extent? 

A. Atlantic. 

Q. Which is the third in extent? 

A. Indian. 

Q. Which is the fourth in extent? 

A. Southern, or Antarctic. 

Q. Which is the fifth in extent? 

A. Northern, or Arctic. 

Q. Which is the largest division of the Western Hemisphere ? 

A. North America. 



NORTHERN AND SOUTHERN HEMISPHERES. 25 

Q. Which extends farthest east? 

A. South America. 

Q. Which extends farthest west? 

A. North America. 

Q. Is North America in north or south latitude ? 

A. North latitude. 

Q. Why is it in north latitude ? 

A. Because it is north of the Equator. (M. G. p. 24.) 

Q. Is South America mostly in north or in south latitude ? 

A. It is mostly in south latitude. 

Q. Why is it mostly in south latitude? 

A. Because it is mostly south of the Equator. (M. G. p. 24.) 

Q. In what direction does South America He from North 
America ? 

A. South, or more strictly, S. S. E. 

Q. What regions lie south and south-east of South America ? 

A. South Shetland, South Orkney, Sandwich Land, and Gra- 
ham's Land. 

Q. What region lies south-west of South America ? 

A. Victoria Land. 



NORTHERN AND SOUTHERN HEMISPHERES. 
Pages 51-2.— Lesson m.—Map of the World No. 2. 

Q. What Hemispheres does this map comprise ? 

A. Northern and Southern. 

Q. Which Hemisphere contains the greatest quantity of land ? 

A. Northern. 

Q. Which Hemisphere contains the greatest quantity of water ? 

A. Southern. 

Q. What great divisions are wholly in the Northern Hemi- 
sphere ? 

A. Asia, Europe, and North America. 

Q. What great divisions are partly in the Northern Hemisphere ? 

A. Africa, South America, and Oceanica. 

Q. What does the Northern Hemisphere comprise ? 

A. All that part of the earth north of the Equator. ' 

Q. What does the Southern Hemisphere comprise? 

A. All that part of the earth south of the Equator. 

Q. What great divisions are partly in the Southern Hemisphere ? 

A. Asia, South America, and Oceanica. 

Q. What four regions lie nearest the North Pole ? 

A. New Siberia, Nova Zembla, Spitzbergen, and Greenland. 

Q. What four regions lie nearest the South Pole ? 

A. Victoria Land, Antarctic Continent, Graham's Land, and 
Enderby's Land. 
3 



26 NORTH AMERICA. 

Q. What navigator has sailed nearest the South Pole ? 
A. Captain James C. Ross, in 1840. (M. G. p. 52.) 
Q. What other navigator sailed nearly as far south ? 
A. Captain James Weddell, in 1823. (M. G. p. 52.) 



NORTH AMERICA. 
Pages 5&-3.— Lesson 36.— Map No. 4. 

OCEANS. 

Q. What Ocean bounds North America on the east ? 

A. Atlantic. 

Q. What Ocean bounds it on the west? 

A. Pacific. 

Q. What Ocean bounds it on the north? 

A. Arctic, or Northern. 

An Ocean is a vast body of salt water. (M. G. p. 52.) 

SEAS. 

Q, What sea is north of British and Russian America ? 

A. Polar. 

Q. What sea between the West Indies and South America ? 

A. Caribbean. 

Q. Tell what a Sea is. 

A. It is a collection of water smaller than an Ocean, and sur- 
rounded by land, as the Mediterranean Sea, the Black Sea, &c. 
(M. G. p. 9.) 

GULFS. 

Q. What great Gulf lies" east of Mexico ? 

A. Gulf of Mexico. 

Q. What Gulf between Mexico and California? 

A. Gulf of California. 

Q. What Gulf west of Newfoundland? 

A. Gulf of St. Lawrence. 

Q. What Gulf south-east of Boothia Felix ? 

A. Gulf of Boothia. 

BAYS. 

Q. What great Bay separates Prince William's Land from 
Greenland ? 

A. Baffin's Bay. 

Q. What great Bay is south-west of Prince William's Land ? 

A. Hudson's Bay. 

Q. What Bay south of Hudson's Bay ? 

A. James' Bay. 



NORTH AMERICA. *Z l 

Q. What Bay between Nova Scotia and New Brunswick ? 
A. Bay of Fundy. 

Q. What two Bays on the east coast of the United States ? 
A. Delaware and Chesapeake. 
Q. What Bay east of Yucatan? 
A. Bay of Honduras. 
Q. What Bay west of Yucatan? 
A. Bay of Campeche. 
Q. What Bay east of Guatimala? 
A. Bay of Guatimala. 
Q. What Bay west of Alaska ? 
A. Bristol Bay. 
Q. Describe a Bay. 

A. It is a part of the sea extending into the land, as the Gulf 
of Mexico, Hudson's Bay. (M. G. p. 10.) 

STRAITS. 

Q. What Straits between America and Asia? 

A. Bhering's. 

Q. What Strait west of Greenland? 

A. Davis'. 

Q. What does it connect? 

A. Baffin's Bay and the Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. What three Straits north of Labrador? 

A. Hudson's, Frobisher's, and Cumberland. 

Q. What Strait separates Newfoundland from Labrador ? 

A. Strait of Belle Isle. 

Q. What is a Strait? 

A. It is a narrow passage connecting different bodies of water, 
as the Strait of Gibraltar, &c. (M. G. p. 10.) 

SOUNDS. 

Q. What two Sounds in Baffin's Bay? 

A. Smith's and Lancaster's. 

Q. What Sound on the east coast of Greenland ? 

A. Davy's. 

Q. What two Sounds in Russian America? 

A. Norton and Prince William's. 

Q. What Sound between Washington or Queen Charlotte's, 
and Quadra and Vancouver's Island ? 

A. Queen Charlotte's. 

Q. What Sound north of Cape Hatteras ? 

A. Albemarle. 

Q. Describe a Sound. 

A. It is a small or narrow sea, so shallow that its depth may be 
measured by a line dropped from the surface to the bottom, as Long 
Island Sound, Pamlico Sound. (M. G. p. 10.) 



NORTH AMERICA. 



LAKES. 



Q. What five Lakes are in the northern part of the United 
States ? 

A. Superior, Michigan, Huron, Erie, and Ontario. 

Q. What river do they all flow into ? 

A. St. Lawrence. 

Q. Name the principal Lakes in British America. 

A. Winnipeg, Athabasca, Great Slave, and Great Bear. 

Q. What Lake in the northern part of California ? 

A. Great Salt Lake. 

Q. What Lake is in the southern part of Guatimala ? 

A. Lake Nicaragua. 

Q. Tell what a Lake is. 

A. It is a collection of water surrounded by land, as Lake 
Superior, Lake Winnipeg, or the Lake of Geneva, in Switzer- 
land. (M. G. p. 10-11.) 



Pages 53-4. — Lesson 37. — Map No. 4. 

RIVERS. 

Q. What River flows into the Polar Sea ? 

A. Mackenzie's. 

Q. Which are the two chief Rivers that flow into Hudson's 
Bay? 

A. Nelson, and Churchill. 

Q. What River of the United States flows into the Pacific 
Ocean ? 

A. Columbia. 

Q. What River flows into the Gulf of California ? 

A. Colorado. 

Q. Which two large Rivers flow into the Gulf of Mexico ? 

A. Mississippi, and Rio del Norte. 

Q. What River flows into the Gulf of St. Lawrence ? 

A. St. Lawrence. 

Q. What River flows into the Gulf of Georgia ? 

A. Frazer's. 

Q. What River flows into Ungava Bay ? 

A. Koksah. 

Q. What River flows from Lake Chapala ? 

A. Grande, or Rio Grande de Santiago. 

Q. What River flows from Lake Nicaragua ? 

A. San Juan. 

Q. Describe a River. 

A. It is a stream of fresh water, running from springs or from 



NORTH AMERICA. 29 

lakes, into the Ocean, as the Mississippi, the Amazon, &c. (M. G. 

P. HO 

Q. How are Rivers shown on Maps ? 

A. By black lines, winding according to their course, (M. G. 
p. 38.) 

PENINSULAS. 

Q. What Peninsula is in the south part of Russian America ? 

A. Alaska. 

Q. What Peninsula north of Hudson's Bay ? 

A. Melville. 

Q. What Peninsula in the southern part of British America ? 

A. Nova Scotia. 

Q. What Peninsula in the southern part of the United States ? 

A. Florida. 

Q. What Peninsula in the western part of Mexico ? 

A. California. 

Q. What Peninsula in the eastern part of Mexico ? 

A. Yucatan. 

Q. What is a Peninsula ! 

A. It 'is a portion of land, nearly surrounded by water. Africa 
and South America are Peninsulas. (M. G. p. 14.) 

ISLANDS. 

Q. What Island lies east of Greenland ? 

A. Iceland. 

Q. What Island west of Greenland? 

A. Disco. 

Q. What Island in Hudson's Bay? 

A. Southampton. 

Q. What four Islands in the Gulf of St. Lawrence ? 

A. Newfoundland, Anticosti, Cape Breton, and Prince Ed- 
ward's. 

Q. What Islands east of Savannah? 

A. Bermudas. 

Q. What Islands south-east from Florida? 

A. Bahamas. 

Q. What Islands between North and South America? 

A. West Indies. 

Q. Which are the four largest of the West India Islands ? 

A. Cuba, Hayti, Jamaica, and Porto Rico. These are called 
the Great Antilles. 

Q. Which are the two chief Islands on the west coast of Bri- 
tish America ? 

A. Quadra and Vancouver's, and Washington or Q,ueen Char- 
lotte's. 

3* 



31) NORTH AMERICA. 

Q. Tell what Islands are. 

A. They are portions of land, entirely surrounded by water, 
as the British Islands, or Newfoundland. (M. G. p. 14.) 

CAPES. 

Q. Which is the most western Cape of North America ? 
A. Prince of Wales. 
Q. Which is the most eastern Cape? 
A. Race. 

Q. Which is the most southern Cape? 
A. Gorda. 

Q. Which is the most southern Cape of Greenland ? 
A. Farewell. 

Q. What three Capes on the east coast of the United States ? 
A. Cod, Hatteras, and Cannaveral. 

Q. Which is the most southern Cape of the United States ? 
A. Sable. 

Q. The most southern Cape of California ? 
A. St. Lucas. 

Q. The most eastern Cape of Guatimala ? 
A. Gracias a Dios. 
Q. What is a Cape? 

A. It is a point of land extending into the sea, as the Cape of 
Good Hope, Cape Horn, &c. (M. G. p. 14.) 



Pages 54-5-6. — Lesson 38. — Map No. 4. 

MOUNTAINS. 

Q. What Mountains extend through the whole of North Ame- 
rica ? 

A. Rocky. 

Q. What are they called in Mexico ? 

A. Mexican Cordilleras. 

Q. What Mountains extend along the west coast of Upper 
California ? 

A. The coast range, and the Sierra Nevada. 

Q. What Mountains extend through the eastern part of the 
United States ? 

A. Alleghany. 

Q. What two Mountains are in the southern part of Russian 
America ? 

A. St. Elias and Fairweather. 

Q. What two Mountains are in the western part of British 
America ? 

A. Brown and Hooker. 



NORTH AMERICA. 31 

Q. What is a Mountain? 

A. It is a portion of land, raised up to a great height. 

Q. What Highlands are in the northern part of Greenland ? 

A. Arctic Highlands. 

Mountains and Hills are often called Highlands. (M. G. p. 55.) 

Q. What two Peaks are in the western part of the United 
States ? 

A. Fremont's,* Long's, and Pike's. 

Mountains that are higher than those around them are some- 
times called Peaks. (M. G. p. 55.) 

Q. What Peaks are in the northern part of Mexico ? 

A. Spanish. 

Q. What Volcano is in the southern part of Mexico ? 

A. Popocatepetl. 

Q. What two Volcanoes are in Guatimala ? 

A. Water and Consiguina. 

Q. What is a Volcano? 

A. It is a burning mountain, with an opening at the top, which 
is called a crater. (M. G. p. 15.) 

DESERTS. 

Q. What Desert lies in the western part of the United States ? 

A. Great American. 

Q. What Desert lies west of the Colorado River ? 

A. Sandy. 

Q. What is a Desert? 

A. Plains covered with sand are denominated deserts ; some 
are also covered with stones and gravel. Deserts are generally- 
destitute of water. (M. G. p. 17.) 

DIVISIONS. 

Q. Which is the most south-western division of North America? 

A. Russian America. 

This is called Russian America because it belongs to Russia. 

Q. Which is the most eastern division of North America ? 

A. Greenland. 

This is sometimes called Danish America because it belongs to 
Denmark. 

Q. Which is the largest division in the North ? 

A. British America. 

This is called British America because it belongs to Great 
Britain. 

Q. Which is the largest division in the centre ? 

A. United States. 

* Fremont's Peak is named after Captain Fremont of the U. S. army. In 
the year 1842 that officer ascended to its summit, and ascertained its height. 
(M. G. p. 55.) 



32 NORTH AMERICA. 

Q. Which is the largest division in the south ? 

A. Mexico. 

Q. Which division lies south of Mexico ? 

A. Guatimala. 

This division is likewise called Central America. 

Q. What small division lies north of Guatimala ? 

A. Balize. 

Q. What great Archipelago lies east of Mexico and Guatimala? 

A. West Indies. 

Q. What is an Archipelago? 

A. It is a sea filled with Islands, as the Grecian Archipelago, 
east of Greece, or the West Indies, which is sometimes called the 
Colombian Archipelago. (M. G. p. 10.) 

CAPITALS. 

Q. What is the capital of British America ? 

A. Montreal. (Quebec was formerly the capital.) 

Q. What is the capital of the United States ? 

A. Washington. 

Q. What is the capital of Mexico ? 

A. Mexico. 

. Q. What is the capital of Guatimala ? 

A. San Salvador. 

TROPICS, CIRCLES, AND ZONES. 

Q. What part of North America is crossed by the Tropic of 
Cancer ? 

A. Mexico. 

Q. What parts are crossed by the Arctic Circle ? 

A. Greenland, British America, and Russian America. 

Q. In what Zone is the middle part of North America ? 

A. North Temperate. 

Q. In what Zone is the southern part ? 

A. Torrid. 

Q. In what Zone is the northern part ? 

A. North Frigid. 

Q. What countries of North America are in the North Frigid 
Zone? 

A. Greenland, British America, and Russian America. 

Q. What countries are in the North Temperate Zone ? 

A. British America, United States, and Mexico. 

Q. What countries are in the Torrid Zone ? 

A. Mexico, Guatimala, and the West Indies. 

Q. In what Zone is the largest part of North America ? 

A. North Temperate. 



UNITED STATES. 3*5 

UNITED STATES. 

Page 56. — Lesson 39. — Map No. 5. 

Q. What country bounds the United States on the north ? 

A. British America. 

Q. What Ocean bounds it on the east ? 

A. Atlantic. 

Q. What Ocean bounds it on the west ? 

A. Pacific. 

Q. What Gulf bounds it on the South ? 

A. Gulf of Mexico. 

GULFS, &C. 

Q. What Gulf separates Gluadra and Vancouver's Island from 
Oregon ? 

A. Gulf of Georgia. 

Q. What Republic lies south-west of the United States ? 

A. Mexico. 

LAKES. 

Q. What five great Lakes are in the northern part of the United 
States. 

A. Superior, Huron, Michigan, Erie, and Ontario. 

Q. What is the name of the eastern part of Lake Huron ? 

A. Manatouline Lake. — (In some maps Georgian Bay.) 

Q. What Lake lies east of Lake Ontario ? 

A. Champlain. 

Q. What Lake lies north-west of Lake Superior ? 

A, Lake of the Woods. 

RIVERS. 

Q. What great River extends through the middle of the United 
States? 

A. Mississippi. 

Q. Which are its three great western branches ? 

A. Missouri, Arkansas, and Red. 

Q. Which is its principal eastern branch ? 

A. Ohio. 

Q. Into what Gulf does the Mississippi flow 1 

A. Gulf of Mexico. 

Q. What River with two names m the western part of the 
United States? 

A. Oregon, or Columbia. 

Q. What are its two principal branches ? 

A. Lewis, and Clarke's. 

Q. What three Rivers flow into the Atlantic Ocean north of 
Cape Cod ? 

A. Penobscot, Kennebec, and Merrimack, 



34 UNITED STATES. 

Q. What three between Cape Cod and Cape Charles ? 

A. Connecticut, Hudson, and Delaware. 

Q. What three flow into Chesapeake Bay ? 

A. Susquehanna, Potomac, and James. 

Q. What River flows into Albemarle Sound ? 

A. Roanoke. 

Q. What two flow into Pamlico Sound ? 

A. Tar, and Neuse. 

Q. What seven Rivers flow into the Atlantic between Cape 
Lookout and Cape Cannaveral ? 

A. Cape Fear, Great Pedee, Santee, Savannah, Alatamaha, St. 
Mary's, and St. John's. 

Q. What three Rivers flow into the Gulf of Mexico east of the 
mouth of the Mississippi ? 

A. Pearl, Pascagoula, and Apalachicola. 



Pages 56-7. — Lesson 40. — Map No. 5. 

CAPES. 

There are eight Capes on the Atlantic coast of the United States. 
Q. What are they ? 

A. Cod, Malabar, Charles, Henry, Hatteras, Lookout, Fear, 
and Cannaveral. 

Q. What two Capes are on the west side of Florida ? 

A. Romans, and Sable. 

Q. What Cape west of Apalachee Bay ? 

A. St. Bias. 

Q. What four Capes are on the Pacific coast of the United States ? 

A. Flattery, Foulweather, Orford, and Mendocino. 

BAYS. 

Q. What Bays between Cape Cod and Cape Hatteras. 
A. New York, Delaware, and Chesapeake. 
Q. Wjiat four Bays are on the west coast of Florida ? 
A. Chatham, Tampa, Vacassar, and Apalachee. 
Q. What three bays between Cape St. Bias and the mouths of 
the Mississippi River ? 

A. Pensacola, Mobile, and Black. 

Q. What Bays on the coast of Texas ? 

A. Galveston, Matagorda, Espiritu Santo, and Nueces. 



Q. What Sounds between Cape Lookout and Cape Cod ? 
A. Pamlico, Albemarle, and Long Island. 
Q. What sound on the coast of Quadra and Vancouver's Island ? 
A. Nootka. 



UNITED STATES. 35 

ISLANDS. 

Q. What Island is there on the coast of Maine ? 

A. Mount Desert. 

Q. What two Islands lie south of Massachusetts ? 

A. Nantucket and Martha's Vineyard. 

Q. What Island lies south of Rhode Island? 

A. Block. 

Q. What Island lies south of Connecticut ? 

A. Long Island. 

Q. What Islands He south of Florida ? 

A. Florida Reefs, and Tortugas Islands. 

Q. What Island is separated from Oregon Territory by the 
Gulf of Georgia ? 

A. Q,uadra and Vancouver's. 

MOUNTAINS. 

Q. What range of Mountains is in the western part of the 
United States ? 

A. Rocky. 

Q. What range near the coast of the Pacific ? 

A. Cascade range. 

Q. What three ranges of Mountains are in the eastern part of 
the United States ? 

A. Cumberland, Alleghany, and Blue Ridge. 

These three ranges are called sometimes the Apalachian 
Mountains. (M. G. p. 57.) 

Q. In what state is the Black Mountain ? 

A. North Carolina. 

This is the highest mountain in the eastern part of the United 
States. (M. G. p. 57.) 

Q. What Mountains are in Pennsylvania and New Jersey ? 

A. Blue. 

Q. What Mountains are in Vermont and New Hampshire ? 

A. Green, and White. 

The White Mountains are the highest in New England. (M. 
G. p. 57.) 

Q. What Mountains are in Arkansas and Missouri ? 

A. Ozark. 



Pages 57-8. — Lesson 41. — Map No. 5. 

STATES. 

Q. How many States are there in the United States ? 

A. Thirty. » 

Q. How many Territories ? 

A. Five. (Wisconsin, Iowa, Indian, Missouri, and Oregon.) 



36 UNITED STATES. 

The first two comprise what remains of the late Territories of 
the same names, after the formation of the new States of Wisconsin 
and Iowa, in 1846. They are not yet organized, but will doubt- 
1 less be known by their old appellations. 

There is also a District, called the District of Columbia, which 
you will see on Map No. 11. It contains Washington City, the 
Capital of the United States. Thus the United States contain 
36 separate divisions. (M. G. p. 57.) 

There are 14 States lying along the Atlantic Ocean, between 
New Brunswick and the Florida Reef. 

Q. What are they ? 

A. Me., N. H., Mass., R. I., Conn., N. Y., N. J., Del., Md., 
Va., N. C, S. C, Ga., and Flor. 

Q. What State lies north of Long Island Sound ? 

A. Conn. 

Q. To what State does Long Island belong ? 

A, To N. Y. 

Q. What five States lie on the Gulf of Mexico ? 

A. Texas, La., Miss., Ala., and Flor. 

Q. What two States lie west of the Mississippi River ? 

A. Ark., and Mo. 

Q. What Territories between the Mississippi and the Rocky 
Mountains? 

A. la., Mo., and Indian. 

Q. What Territory lies north-west of the State of Wisconsin ? 

A. Wis. 

Q. What five States lie directly east of the Mississippi River ? 

A. Miss., Tenn., Ky., 111., and Wis. 

Q. What State lies on both sides of the Mississippi ? 

A. La. 

Q. What State is bounded in part by Lakes Huron, Michigan, 
and Superior ? 

A. Mich. 

Q. What three States are bounded in part by Lake Erie ? 

A. N. Y., Pa., and Oo. 

Q. What State is bounded in part by Lake Ontario ? 

A. N. Y. 

Q. What two States does Lake Champlain separate ? 

A. N. Y., and Vt. 

Q. What two States are separated by the Connecticut River ? 

A. N. H., and Vt. 

Q. What two States are separated by the Delaware River ? 

A. Pa., and N. J. 

Q. What two States are separated by the Potomac River ? 

A. Va., and Md. 



UNITED STATES. 37 

Q. What two States are separated by the Savannah River ? 

A. S. C., and Ga. 

Q. What two States are separated by the Chattahoochee 
River ? 

A, Ga., and Ala. 

Q. What five States are bounded in part by the Ohio River ? 

A. la., 111., Oo., Ky., and Va. 

Q. What two States are separated in part by the Cumberland 
Mountains ? 

A. Va., and Ky. 

Q. What two States are separated by the Alleghany Mountains ? 

A. N. C, and Tenn. 



Pages 58-9. — Lesson 42. — Map No. 5. 

STATES, &C. 

Q. Which is the largest State ? 

A. Texas. 

Q. The smallest? 

A. R. I. 

Q. What is the Capital of the United States ? 

A. Washington. 

Q. Which of the Eastern States have each two Capitals ? 

A. Conn., and R. I. 

The six Eastern States are Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, 
Massachusetts, Rhode Island, and Connecticut. 

Q. What is the Capital of each ? 

A. Me., Augusta ; N. H., Concord ; Vt., Montpelier ; Mass., 
Boston ; R. I., Newport and Providence ; Conn., Hartford and 
New Haven. 

The four Middle States are New York, New Jersey, Pennsyl- 
vania, and Delaware. 

Q. What is the Capital of each ? 

A. N. Y., Albany ; N. J., Trenton ; Pa., Harrisburg ; Del., 
Dover. 

The ten Southern States are Maryland, Virginia, North Caro- 
lina, South Carolina, Georgia, Florida, Alabama, Mississippi, 
Louisiana, and Texas. 

Q. What is the Capital of each ? 

A. Md., Annapolis ; Va., Richmond ; N. C, Raleigh ; S. C, 
Columbia ; Ga., Milledgeville ; Flor., Tallahassee ; Ala., Tusca- 
loosa ; Miss., Jackson ; La., New Orleans ; Texas, Austin. 

The ten Western States are Ohio, Kentucky, Tennessee, 
Michigan, Indiana, Illinois, Missouri, Arkansas, Wisconsin, and 
Iowa. 

4 



38 SOUTH AMERICA. 

Q. What is the Capital of each ? , 

A. Oo., Columbus ; Ky., Frankfort ; Term., Nashville ; Mich., 
Detroit ; la., Indianapolis ; 111., Springfield ; Mo., Jefferson City ; 
Ark., Little Rock ; Wisconsin, Madison ; Iowa, Iowa City. 

Q. Through what States does the 40th parallel of latitude pass ? 

A. N. J., Pa., Va., Oo., la., 111., and Mo. 

Q. Through what Territory does it pass ? 

A. Indian. 

Q. Through or near what Cities and Towns does it pass ? 

A. Philadelphia, Lancaster, Bedford, Wheeling, Zanesville, 
Columbus, Beardstown, and Gluincy. These places have all the 
same, or very nearly the same latitude. 

Q. What six places have nearly the same latitude as Washington 
City? 

A. Woodstock, Portsmouth, Madison, Vincennes, Vandalia, and 
St. Charles. 

By placing a ruler on the map directly on the place named, 
keeping it parallel with the lines that cross the map from east to 
west, the learner will see at once all those places that have the 
same latitude. (M. G. p. 59.) 

Q. What places have the same latitude as the City of New 
York? 

«#. Newark, Beaver, Bolivar, Peru, Logansport, Peoria, and 
Burlington. 

Q. What places have the same latitude as Boston ? 

A. Worcester, Detroit, St. Joseph, and Galena. 

Q. Through what States does the meridian of Washington pass ? 

A. N. Y., Pa., Md., Va., and N. C. 

Q. Through or near what Cities or Towns does it pass ? 

A. Elmira and Geneva. 

These places therefore have the same longitude as Washington 
City. (M. G. p. 59.) 

Q. What four places have about the same longitude as Boston ? 

A. Salem, Newburyport, Portsmouth, and Dover. 



SOUTH AMERICA. 

Pages 59-60.— Lesson 43.— Map No. 17. 

Q. What Ocean bounds South America on the east ? 

A. Atlantic. 

Q. What on the west? 

A. Pacific. 

Q. What Sea bounds it on the north ? 

A. Caribbean. 



SOUTH AMERICA. 39 

MOUNTAINS. 

Q. What are the principal Mountains of South America ? 
A. Andes. 

Q. What is their length? 
A. 4,800 miles. (See map No. 17.) 

The highest peak, Mount Sorato, is nearly 5 miles high. It is 
the highest .Mountain in America. (M. G. p. 59.) 
Q. What is the next highest Mountain ? 
A. Illimani. 

Q. On what side of South America are the Andes ? 
A. West. 

Q. What Mountains are on the east? 
A. Brazilian. 
Q. How long are they? 
A. 2,100 miles. (See map No. 17.) 
Q. What Mountains are in the west part of Brazil ? 
A. Geral. 

Q. What Mountains are between Brazil and Guiana? 
A. Acary. 

RIVERS. 

Q. Which is the largest River in South America ? 

A. Amazon. 

Q. Which is its largest branch? 

A. Madeira. 

Q. Which is the second River in length? 

A. Rio de la Plata. 

Q. Which is the third ? 

A. Orinoco. 

Q. Which is the fourth? 

A. St. Francisco. 

Q. Into what Ocean do these flow? 

A. Atlantic. 

Q. What River flows into the Caribbean Sea? 

A. Magdalena. 

CAPES. 

Q. Which is the most northern Cape of South America ? 

A, Gallinas. 

Q. Which is the most southern Cape? 

A. Horn. 

Q. Which is the most eastern? 

A. St. Roque. 

Q. Which is the most western? 

A. Blanco. 



40 SOUTH AMERICA. 

GULFS AND BAYS. 

Q. What two Gulfs are on the Caribbean Sea ? 

A. Darien and Venezuela. 

Q. What two are on the west coast? 

A. Guayaquil and Penas. 

Q. What are the principal Bays on the west coast ? 

A. Panama and Choco. 

Q. What are the principal Bays on the east coast ? 

A. All Saints, St. Matthias, and St George. 

ISLANDS. 

Q. What Islands are in the Caribbean Sea ? 

A. Buen Ayre and Margarita. 

These are a part of the Little Antilles, which form the southern 
division of the West Indies. Margarita belongs to Venezuela, 
and is the only West Indian Island that is owned by a South 
American power. (M. G. p. 60.) 

Q. What five Islands north of South America ? 

A. Trinidad, Tobago, Grenada, Barbadoes, and St. Vincent. 

These form a part of the Caribbee Islands. (M. G. p. 60.) 

Q. What Island lies between the Amazon and Para Rivers ? 

A. Joannes. 

Q. What Islands on the coast of Brazil, south of the Equator ? 

A. Itamaraca, Abrolhos, St. Sebastian, Cananea, St. Catharina, 
and Taramandi. 

Q. What Islands east of Patagonia ? 

A. Falkland. 

Q. What Island south of Patagonia ? 

A. Terra del Fuego. 

Q. What Island east of Terra del Fuego 1 

A. Staten Land. 

Q. What Island east of Staten Land ? 

A. South Georgia, 

Q. What Islands south of Terra del Fuego ? 

A. Camden. 

Q. What Island south of Chili ? 

A. Chiloe. 

Q. What three Archipelagoes south of Chiloe ? 

A. Chonos, Madre de Dios, and Glueen Adelaide's. 

Q. What Island south of the Gulf of Penas ? 

A. Wellington. 

Q. What Islands west of Chili? 

A. Juan Fernandez and St. Felix. 

Q. What Island in the Gulf of Guayaquil ? 

A, Puno. 



SOUTH AMERICA. 41 

Pages 61-2. — Lesson 44. — Map No. 17. 

LAKES. 

Q. What Lake lies in the north-west part of Venezuela ? 
A. Maracaybo. 

Q. What Lake forms part 6f the boundary between Peru and 
Bolivia ? 

A. Titicaca. 

Q. What two Lakes are in Bolivia ? 

A. Ubahy and Xarayes. 

Q. What three Lakes are in Buenos Ayres ? 

A. Del Valle, Porongos, and Ibera. 

Q. What two Lakes are in the southern part of Brazil ? 

A. Dos Patos and Mi rim. 

Q. What Lake in Peru forms the source of the Amazon River ? 

A. Reyes. 

GRASSY PLAINS. 

Q. What are the extensive grassy plains in the east part of 
Brazil called ? 

A. The Sert'am. 

Q. What are the elevated plains in the west part of Brazil 
called ? 

A. Campos Parexis. 

Point out in Venezuela the word Llanos, and in Buenos Ayres 
the word Pampas. These are the names given to extensive plains 
in those parts of South. America. They are, like the Sertam in 
Brazil, the Prairies in North America, and the Steppes of Asia, 
covered with grass, on which vast herds of cattle roam and feed. 
(M. G. p. 61.) 

DIVISIONS. 

The three most northern divisions on the west side of South 
America are called the Colombian States. 

Q. Which are they? 

A. Venezuela, New Grenada, and Ecuador. 

The next two lying immediately south of these are called the 
Peruvian States. 

Q. What are their names ? 

A. Peru, and Bolivia. 

Q. Which is the largest division of South America ? 

A. Brazil. 

Q. Which is the smallest division ? 

A. Paraguay. 

Q. Which division belongs to the British, Dutch, and French? 

A. Guiana. 

Q. Which is the most northern division of South America ? 

A. New Grenada ? 
4* 



42 SOUTH AMERICA. 

Q. Which is the most western division ? 

A. Ecuador. 

Q. Which is the most eastern division ? 

A. Brazil. 

Q. W T hich is the most southern division ? 

A. Patagonia. 

Q. Which two divisions are separated by the Andes ? 

A. Buenos Ayres, and Chili. 

CAPITALS. 

Q. What is the Capital of New Grenada ? 

A. Bogota. 

Q. What is the Capital of Venezuela 1 

A. . Caraccas. 

Q. What is the Capital of Ecuador ? 

A, Quito. 

Q. What is the Capital of Peru ? 

A. Lima. 

Q. What is the Capital of Bolivia ? 

A. Chuquisaca. 

Q. What is the Capital of Brazil ? 

A. Rio Janeiro. 

Q. Of Paraguay ? 

A. Assumption. • 

Q* Of Uruguay ? 

A. Montevideo. 

Q. Of Buenos Ayres ? 

A. Buenos Ayres. 

Q. Of Chili ? 

A. Santiago. 

EQUATOR, TROPIC, AND ZONES. 

Q. What States does the Equator pass through 1 

A. Brazil, Venezuela, New Grenada, and Ecuador. 

Q. What is the Equator ? 

A. It is an imaginary great circle, extending from east to west 
round the globe, at an equal distance from each pole. (M. G. p. 22.) 

Q. What States does the Tropic of Capricorn pass through ? 

A. Brazil, Paraguay, Buenos Ayres, and Bolivia. 

Q. In what Zone is that part of South America, that lies north 
of the Tropic of Capricorn ? 

A. Torrid. 

Q. In what Zone is that part south of the Tropic of Capricorn? 

A. South Temperate. 

Q. What portion of South America is in the Torrid Zone, the 
. largest or smallest ? 

A. Largest. 



EUROPE. 43 

Q. How do you know it is in the Torrid Zone 1 
A. Because it lies on both sides of the Equator, and between 
the Tropic of Cancer and the Tropic of Capricorn. (M. G. p. 29.) 

LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE. 

Q. In what Latitude is the greatest part of South America ? 

A. South Latitude. 

Q. Why is it in South Latitude ? 

A. Because it is mostly south of the Equator. (M. G. p. 24.) 

Q. What is Latitude ? 

A. It is distance from the Equator either north or south. (M. 
G. p. 24.) 

Q. In what Longitude is South America, reckoning from 
Greenwich ? 

A. West Longitude. 

Q. How do you know it is in West Longitude ? 

A. Because the numbers increase towards the left hand. (M. 
G. p. 26.) 

Q. What is Longitude ? 

A. It is distance east or west from an established meridian. 
(M. G. p. 25.) 

EUROPE. 

Pages 62-3.— Lesson 45.— Map No. 18. 

Q. What Ocean bounds Europe on the West ? 

A. Atlantic. 

Q. What Ocean bounds it on the North ? 

A. Arctic. 

Q. What Sea bounds it on the south ? 

Jl. Mediterranean. 

Q. What Mountains bound it on the east ? 

A. Ural. 

SEAS. 

There are eight Seas in Europe. 
Q. What are they ? 

A. White, Baltic, North, Irish, Mediterranean, Marmora, Black, 
and Azov. 

Q. What Sea is on the north of Russia ? 

A. White. 

Q. What Sea between Russia and Sweden 1 

A. Baltic. 

Q. What Sea between Scotland and Denmark ? 

A. North. 

Q. What Sea between England and Ireland ? 

A. Irish. 



44 EUROPE. 

Q. What Sea between Europe and Africa ? 

A. Mediterranean. 

Q. What Sea south of Turkey ? 

A. Marmora. 

Q. What two Seas south of Russia ? 

A. Black, and Azov. 

Q. What is the name of the Sea between Greece and Asia ? 

A. Archipelago. 

Q. What is an Archipelago 1 

A. It is a sea filled with Islands, as the Grecian Archipelago, 
east of Greece ; or the West Indies, which is sometimes called the 
Colombian Archipelago. (M. G. p. 10.) 

ISLANDS. 

Q. What large Islands lie west of Europe ? 

A. British. 

The Island containing England, Scotland, and Wales, is called 
Great Britain. 

Q. What Island lies west of Great Britain ? 

A. Ireland. 

Q. What four groups of Islands are west and north of the 
British Isles ? 

A. Hebrides or Western, Orkney, Shetland, and Faroe? 

Q. What large Island lies west of Norway ? 

A. Iceland. 

Q. What Islands are in the Baltic Sea ? 

A. Aland, Dago, Oesel, Gothland, Oland^Rugen, Zealand, and 
Funen. 

Q. What Islands in the Mediterranean belong to Spain ? 

A. Balearic. 

Q. What Island belongs to France ? 

A. Corsica. 

Q. What Islands belong to Great Britain ? 

A. Malta, and Ionian. 

Q. What Island belongs to Egypt ? 

A. Candia. 

Q. What Island south of Italy ? 

A. Sicily. 

Q. What Mountain do you observe on it ? 

A. Etna. 

Q. What Island east of Greece ? 

A. Negropont. 

Q. What small Island between Tuscany and Corsica ? 

A. Elba. 

This Island is remarkable for being the place to which Napo- 
leon Buonaparte was banished in 1814. (M. G. p. 63.) 



EUROPE. 45 

Q. What Island bears the same name as a kingdom in Italy ? 

A. Sardinia. 

Q. What small Island between England and Ireland ? 

A. Isle of Man. 

GULFS. 

Q. What gulf between Sweden and Russia ? 

A. Bothnia. 

Q. What two Gulfs in the Baltic Sea ? 

A. Finland, and Riga. 

Q. What Gulf south of France ? 

A. Lyons. 

Q. What Gulf south of the Kingdom of Sardinia ? 

A. Genoa. 

Q. What Gulf east of Italy 1 

A. Venice. 

Q. What Gulf in the Black Sea ? 

A. Burgas. 

Q. What Bay north of Spain ? 

A. Biscay. 

Pages 63-4. — Lesson 46.— Map No. 18. 

CHANNELS. 

Q. What Channel between France and England ? 

A. English. 

Q. What Channel between Wales and Ireland ? 

A. St. George's. 

Q. What Channel between Ireland and Scotland ? 

A. North. 

Q. What Channel between Denmark and Norway ? 

A. Skager Rack. 

Q. What Channel between Denmark and Sweden 1 

A. Cattegat. 

Q. What Channel between the Marmora and Black Seas ? 

A. Constantinople. 

STRAITS. 

Q. What Strait between France and England ? 
A. Dover. 

Q. What Strait between Europe and Africa? 
A. Gibraltar. 

Q. What Strait between Corsica and Sardinia ? 
A. Bonifacio. 

Q. What Strait between the Mediterranean and the Sea of 
Marmora ? 

A. Dardanelles. 



46 EUROPE, 

Q. What Strait between the Black Sea and the Sea of Azov ? 

A. Enikale. 

Q. What Strait between Italy and Turkey ? 

A. Otranto. 

MOUNTAINS. 

Q. What Mountains form the boundary between Europe and 
Asia ? 

A. Ural. 

Q. What Mountains divide Sweden and Norway ? 

A. Dofrafield. 

Q. What Mountains divide France and Spain ? 

A. Pyrenees. 

Q. What Mountains in France ? 

A. Cevennes and Auvergne. 

Q. What Mountains in the north of Spain ? 

A. Cantabrian. 

Q. What Mountains in the south of Spain ? 

A. Sierra Morena and Sierra Nevada. 

Q. What Mountains in Switzerland ? 

A. Alps. 

These are the highest in Europe. Mt. Blanc is the highest of 
the Alps, being nearly three miles high. (M. G. p. 64.) 

Q. What Mountains extend through Italy ? 

A. Apennine. 

Q. What Mountains in the jeast of Austria ? 

A. Carpathian. 

Q. What Mountains extend through Turkey ? 

A. Balkan. 

CAPES. 

Q. Which is the most northern Cape of Europe? 
A. North Cape. 

Q. Which is the most southern ? 
A. Matapan. 

Q. Which is the most southern Cape of Norway ? 
A. The Naze. 

Q. Which is the most southern Cape of England ? 
A. Lizard Point. 

Q. Which is the most southern Cape of Ireland ? 
A. Cape Clear. 

Q. Which is the most northern Cape of Spain ? 
A. Ortegal. 

Q. Which is the most western Cape of Spain ? 
A. Finisterre. (The name is from the Latin finis terrse, 
which is equivalent to the English "Land's-end.") 



EUROPE. 47 

Q. Which is the most southern cape of Portugal ? 

A. St. Vincent. 

Q. Which is the most southern cape of Greece ? 

A. Matapan. 

RIVERS. 

Q. What Rivers flow into the White Sea ? 

A. Onega, Dwina, and Mezene. 

Q. What Rivers flow into the Gulf of Bothnia ? 

A. Umea, Tornea Kalix, Lulea, Skelleftea, Indal, Lutsna and 
Dal. 

Q. What Rivers flow into the Baltic Sea ? 

A. Duna, Niemen, Vistula, and Oder. 

Q. What Rivers flow into the North Sea ? 

A. Elbe, Weser, Ems, and Rhine. 

Q. What Rivers flow into the Atlantic Ocean ? 

A. Shannon, Seine, Loire, Gironde, Minho, Douro, Tagus, 
Guadiana, and Guadalquivir. 

Q. What Rivers flow into the Mediterranean Sea ? 

A. Ebro, Rhone, and Tiber. 

Q. What River flows into the Gulf of Venice ? 

A. Po. 

Q. What Rivers flow into the Black Sea ? 

A, Danube, Dniester, Bog, and Dnieper. 

Q. What River flows into the Sea of Azov ? 

A. Don. 



EUROPE. 
Pages 64-5. — Lesson 47.~-Map No. 18. 

PENINSULAS. 

Q. What Peninsula lies west of the Baltic Sea and the Gulf 
of Bothnia ? 

A. Sweden and Norway.* 

Q. What Peninsula lies south of Norway ? 

A. Denmark. ~ 

Q. What Peninsula lies south of France ? 

A. Spain and Portugal. 

Q. What Peninsula lies west of the Gulf of Venice ? 

A. Italy. 

Q. What Peninsula lies south of Turkey ? 

A. Greece. 

Q. What Peninsula lies west of the sea of Azov ? 

A. Crimea. 



* Called the Scandinavian Peninsula. 



48 EUROPE. 



DIVISIONS. 

Q. What grand division of the earth lies east of Europe ? 

A. Asia. 

Q. What country lies east of the Urai Mountains ? 

A, Siberia. 

Q. Which is the largest division in Europe ? 

A. Russia. 

Q. What divisions lie west of the Baltic Sea and the Gulf of 
Bothnia ? 

A. Sweden and Norway. 

Q. What division lies south of the Baltic Sea ? 

A. Prussia. 

Q. What division lies west of the Black Sea? 

A. Turkey. 

Q. What division lies west of the Archipelago ? 

A. Greece. 

Q. What division lies west of the Gulf of Venice ? 

A. Italy. 

Q. What division lies north of the Gulf of Venice ? 

A. Austria. 

Q. What division lies north of the Mediterranean Sea ? 

A. France. 

Q. What divisions lie west of the Mediterranean Sea ? 

A. Spain and Portugal. 

Q. What divisions lie on the Black Sea ? 

A. Turkey and Russia. 

Q. What seven divisions he on the North Sea ? 

A. Norway, Scotland, England, Denmark, Hanover, Holland, 
and Belgium. 

Q. What divisions lie on the Baltic Sea ? 

A. Sweden, Denmark, Russia, and Prussia. 

Q. What divisions lie on the Atlantic Ocean ? 

A. Norway, Scotland, Ireland, France, Spain, and Portugal. 

Q. What divisions lie on the Mediterranean Sea ? 

A. Spain, France, Italy, and Greece. 

CAPITALS. 

Q. What is the Capital of Sweden ? 

A. Stockholm. 

Q. Of Russia? 

A. St. Petersburg. 

Q. Of Denmark ? 

A. Copenhagen. 

Q. Of Hanover ? 

A. Hanover. 



EUROPE. 49 

Q. Of England ? 

A. London. 

Q. Of Holland ? 

A. Hague. 

Q. Of Belgium? 

A. Brussels. 

Q. Of Prussia? 

A. Berlin. 

Q. Of Saxony? 

A. Dresden. 

Q. Of Wirtemburg ? 

A. Stuttgard. 

Q. Of Bavaria ? 

*#. Munich. 

Q. Of Switzerland ? 

.#. Berne.* 

Q. Of France ? 

A. Paris. 

#. Of Spain? 

A. Madrid. 

#. Of Portugal? 

w5. Lisbon. 

Q. Of Sardinia? 

A. Turin. 

Q. Of Tuscany? 

A. Florence? 

Q. Of the Popedom ? 

«/?. Rome. 

Q. Of Naples? 

A. Naples. 

Q. Of Austria? 

A. Vienna. 

Q. Of Turkey? 

A. Constantinople. 

Q. Of Greece? 

A. Athens. 

LATITUDE, LONGITUDE, &C. 

Q. In what Latitude is Europe ? 

A. North Latitude. 

Q. How do you know it is in North Latitude ? 

A. Because it is north of the Equator. 

Q. In what Longitude is it mostly ? 

A. East Longitude. 

* Berne is usually considered the capital of Switzerland ; but Zurich and 
Lucerne share with it that honour, each being alternately the seat of govern- 
ment for two years at a time. (M. G.) 
5 



50 ASIA. 

Q. How do you know it is in East Longitude ? 

A. Because the numbers increase towards the right hand. 

Q. What parts of Europe are in West Longitude ? 

A. Portugal, Spain, France, England, Scotland, and Ireland. 

Q. Which is the most northern country of Europe 1 

A. Norway. 

Q. Which is the most southern ? 

A. Greece? 

Q. Which is the most eastern ? 

A. Russia. 

Q. Which is the most western ? 

A. Ireland. 

ASIA. 
Pages 65-6-7.— Lesson 48.— Map No. 23. 
Q. What great division bounds Asia on the west ? 
A, Europe. 

Q. What great division bounds Asia on the North-east ? 
A, North America.* 

Q What great division bounds it on the South-west ? 
A. Africa. 

Q. What Ocean bounds it on the north ? 
A. Arctic, or Northern. 
Q. What Ocean bounds it on the south ? 
A. Indian. 

Q. What Ocean bounds it on the east ? 
A. Pacific. 

SEAS. 

Q. What Sea divides Asia from Africa ? 

A. Red. 

Q. What Sea separates Hindostan from Arabia ? 

A. Arabian. 

Q. What Sea lies west of Syria ? 

A. Mediterranean. 

Q. What two Seas lie north of Turkey ? 

A. Marmora, and Black. 

Q. What Sea lies east of Nova Zembla ? 

A. Kara. 

Q. What Sea lies east of Kamtschatka ? 

A. Kamtschatka. 

Q. What Sea lies west of Kamtschatka ? 

A. Ochotsk. 

Q. What Sea lies west of the Kurile Islands ? 

A. Jesso. 

* Separated from Asia by Bhcring's Strait, 40 ms. wide. 






ASIA. 51 

Q. What Sea lies between Niphon and Corea ? 

A. Japan. 

Q. What Sea lies west of Gorea ? 

A. Yellow. 

Q. What Sea lies east of Cochin China ? 

A. China. 

Asia contains three interior seas : 

Q. Which are they ? 

A. Caspian, Aral, and Dead. 

MOUNTAINS. 

Q. What Mountains separate Europe from Asia ? 

A. Ural. 

Q. What Mountains bound Siberia on the south ? 

A. Little Altai, and Great Altai. 

Q. What Mountains extend through Mongolia ? 

A. Thian-Chan. 

Q. What Mountains bound Thibet on the north ? 

A. Kuen-lun. 

Q. What Mountains bound Hindoostan on the north-east ? 

A. Himmaleh. (Spelled also Himala and Himalaya.) 

Q. Which is the highest of the mountains, and its height ? 

A. Choumalarie, 29,000 feet high.* (M. A.) 

Q. What Mountains in the southern part of Hindoostan ? 

A, Ghaut. 

Q. W T hat Mountains are in Turkey ? 

A. Taurus. 

Q. What Mountains are in Persia ? 

A. Elborz. 

Q. What Mountains bound Independent Tartary on the south ? 

A. Hindoo Koosh. 

Q. What Mountains are in China ? 

A. Peling, and Meling. 

Q. What Mountains separate Circassia from Georgia ? 

A. Caucasus. 

GULFS. 

Q. What three Gulfs are in the north part of Siberia ? 

A. Obi, Yenisei, and Lena. 

Q. What two Gulfs between Persia and Arabia? 

A. Persian, and Ormus. 

Q. What two Gulfs on the west coast of Hindoostan ? 

A. Cutch, and Cambay. 

Q. What Gulf separates Hindoostan from Ceylon 1 

A. Manaar. 

* This is the highest mountain in the world ; it is 5$ ms. high. (M. A.) 



52 ASIA 

Q. What Gulf south of Birmah ? 

A, Martaban. 

Q. What Gulf between Siam and Cambodia 1 

A. Siam. 

Q. What Gulf east of Anam? 

A. Tonquin. 

Q. What Gulf near the Yellow Sea ? 

A. Petchelee. 

Q. What Gulf north of Kamtschatka? 

A. Anadir. 

CAPES. 

Q. Which is the most northern Cape of Asia ? 
A. Cevero Vostochnoi. 
Q. Which is the most southern Cape ? 
A. Romania. 

Q. Which is the most eastern Cape ? 
A. East Cape. 

Q. Which are the most southern capes of Hindoostan and Birmah ? 
A. The most southern Cape of Hindoostan is Comorin ; of 
Birmah, Negrais. 



Pages 67-8.— Lesson 49.— Map No. 23. 

RIVERS. 

Q. What three great Rivers flow into the Northern Ocean ? 

A. Obi, Yenisei, and Lena. 

Q. What River flows into the channel of Tartary ? 

A. Amoor. 

Q. What two large Rivers flow through China ? 

A. Hoang-Ho, and Yang-tse-Kiang. 

Q. What River separates Cochin China from Cambodia ? 

A. Cambodia. 

Q. What River flows into the Gulf of Martaban ? 

A. Irrawaddy. 

Q. What two Rivers flow into the Bay of Bengal ? 

A. Ganges, and Burrampooter.* 

Q. What River bounds Hindoostan on the west ? 

A. Indus. 

Q. What two Rivers unite and flow into the Persian Gulf? 

A. Euphrates, and Tigris. 

Q. What Rivers flow into the Caspian Sea ? 

A. Volga, and Ural. 

Q. What two Rivers flow into the Sea of Aral ? 

A. Amoo and Sihon. 

* This river is also sometimes spelled Brahmapootra, and sometimes 
Brahmaputra. 



ASIA. 53 

Q. What River flows through Little Bokhara ? 
A. Cashgar. 

ISLANDS. 

Q. What Island west of Syria ? 

A, Cyprus. 

Q. What Island south of Hindoostan ? 

A. Ceylon. 

Q. What Islands in the Bay of Bengal ? 

A. Andaman, and Nicobar. 

Q. What Island west of Malacca ? 

A. Pulo Pinang. 

Q. What Island south of China? 

A. Hainan. 

Q. What Islands east of China ? 

A, Formosa, and Loo-choo. 

Q. What Islands form the Empire of Japan ? 

A. Jesso, Niphon, Sikoke, and Kiusiu. 

Q. What Island east of Mantchooria ? * 

A. Saghaiien. 

Q. What Islands south of Kamtschatka ? 

A. Kurile. 

Q. What range of Islands east of Kamtschatka ? 

A. Aleutian, or Fox. 

Q. What three Islands north of Siberia ? 

A. Kotelnoi, LiaghofF, and New Siberia. 

STRAITS. 

Q. What Strait separates Asia from North America ? 

A. Bhering's. 

Q. What Strait between the Islands of Jesso and Niphon ? 

A. Matsmay. 

Q. What Strait between Corea and Japan ? 

A. Corea. 

Q. What Strait between China and Formosa ? 

A. Formosa. 

Q. What Strait between Malacca and Sumatra ? 

A. Malacca. 

Q. What Strait between Arabia and Abyssinia ? 

A. Babelmandeb. 

Q. What two great divisions does this Strait separate ? 

A. Asia and Africa. 

PENINSULAS. 

Q. What Peninsula lies between the Persian Gulf and the 
Bed Sea? 
A. Arabia, 

5* 



54 ASIA. 

Q. What Peninsula south of Siam ? 

A. Malacca. 

Q. What Peninsula between the Yellow Sea and the Sea of 
Japan ? 

A. Corea. 

Q. What Peninsula between the seas of Ochotsk and Kamt- 
schatka ? 

A. Kamtschatka. 

ISTHMUSES. 

Q. What Isthmus between the Red Sea and the Mediterranean 
Sea? 

A. Suez. 

Q. What two great divisions does it unite ? 

A. Asia and Africa. 

Q. What Isthmus west of the Gulf of Siam ? 

A. Kraw. 



Pages 68-9.— Lesson bO.—Map No. 23. 

LAKES. 

Q. What three Lakes are in the southern part of Siberia? 

A. Tchany, Altyn, and Baikal. 

Q. What two are in Soongaria ? 

A. Balcash and Zaizan Nor. 

The w r ord Nor, in Central or Middle Asia, appears to mean 
IjBke. (M. G. p. 68.) 

Q. What Lake is in Little Bokhara ? 

A. Lop-Nor. 

Q. What three Lakes in China ? 

A. Koko-Nor, Yonting, and Poyang. 

Q. What Lake in Afghanistan ? 

A. Zurrah. 

The Caspian, Aral, and Dead Seas, are in fact Lakes, but have 
been called Seas, because their waters are salt. (M. G. p. 68.) 

DIVISIONS. 

Q. To what Empire do the northern parts of Asia belong ? 

A. Russian. 

Q. What Empire in the middle and eastern parts of Asia ? 

A, Chinese. 

Q. What great division in the south of Asia ? 

A. India. 

Q. What country north of the Altai Mountains ? 

A. Siberia. 

Q. What great division south of the Altai Mountains ? 

A. Chinese Tartary. 



ASIA. 55 

Q. What great division east of the Caspian Sea ? 

A. Independent Tartary. 

Q. What country south of the Black Sea ? 

A. Turkey. 

Q. What country east of the Mediterranean Sea ? 

A. Syria. 

Q. What country east of the Red Sea ? 

A. Arabia. 

Q. What country south of the Caspian Sea ? 

A, Persia. 

Q. What countries east of Persia ? 

A. Afghanistan and Beloochistan. 

Q. What country between the Arabian Sea and the Bay of 
Bengal ? 

A. Hindoostan. (This is often written Hindostan.) 

Q. What countries east of the Bay of Bengal ? 

A. Birmah and Siam. 

Q. What division east of the Cambodia River ? 

A. Anam. 

Q. What countries are included in Anam ? 

A. Cambodia, Cochin China, Tonquin, and part of Laos. 

Q. What country north of Anam ? 

A. China. 

The Chinese Empire includes nine different countries. 

Q. What are they ? 

A. Soongaria, Mongolia, Mantchooria, Little Bokhara, Little 
Thibet, Thibet, Bootan, Corea, and China. 

Independent Tartary includes six different countries. 

Q. What are they ? 

A. Kirguis, Turcomania, Khiva, Khokan, Bokhara, and Koon- 
dooz. 

Afghanistan includes two different States. 

Q. What are they? 

A. Herat and Cabul. 

Q. What Empire lies east of the Chinese Empire ? 

A. Japan. 

CAPITALS. 

Q. What is the capital of Siberia ? 

A. Tobolsk. 

Q. Of the Tartar States, Khokan, Khiva, and Bokhara? 

A. Khokan, Khiva, and Bokhara. 

Q. Of Persia? 

A. Teheran. 






56 ASIA. 

Q. Of the Arabian States, Hedjaz, Yemen, Nedsjed, and 
Oman ? 

A. Hedjaz, Mecca ; Yemen, Sana ; Nedsjed, Deraia ; Oman, 
Muscat. 

Q. Of Herat? 

A. Herat. 

Q. Of Cabul ? 

A. Cabul. 

Q. Of Lahore ? 

A. Lahore. 

Q. Of Hindoostan ? 

A. Calcutta. 

This city is more properly the capital of British India. There 
are several capitals of native states, but Calcutta is the seat of the 
ruling power in Hindoostan. 

Q. Of Thibet? 

A. Lassa. 

Q. Of Birmah? 

A. Ava. 

Q. Of Siam ? 

A. Bankok. 

Q. Of Anam ? 

A. Hue. 

Q. Of China? 

A. Pekin. 

Q. Of Corea? 

A. Kingkitao. 

Q. Of Japan? 

A. Jedo. 

CIRCLES, ZONES, LATITUDE, &C. 

Q. What country in Asia does the Arctic Circle pass through? 
A. Siberia. 

Q. What countries does the Tropic of Cancer pass through ? 
A, Arabia, Hindoostan, Birmah, and China. 
Q. In what zone is the northern part of Asia ? 
A. North Frigid. 

Q. In what zone is the central part of Asia ? 
A. North Temperate. 

Q. In what zone is the southern part of Asia ? 
A. Torrid. 

Q. In what Latitude is Asia wholly ? 
A. North Latitude. 

Q. How do you know it is in North Latitude ? 
A. Because the numbers increase from the bottom towards the 
top of the Map. (M. G. p. 24-5.) 



AFRICA. 57 

Q. In what Longitude is Asia from Greenwich 1 
A. East Longitude. 

Q. How do you know it is in East Longitude ? 
A. Because the numbers increase towards the right hand. (M 
G. p. 26.) 



AFRICA. 

Pages 69-70.— Lesson 51. — Map No. 25. 

Q. What Sea bounds Africa on the north ? 
A. Mediterranean. 
Q. What Sea bounds it on the east ? 
.tf.-Red. 

Q. What Ocean bounds it on the east 1 
A. Indian. 
t Q. What Ocean bounds it on the West ? 
A. Atlantic; 

STRAITS. 

Q. What Strait separates Morocco from Spain ? 
A. Gibraltar. 

Q. What Strait separates Abyssinia from Arabia ? 
A. Babelmandeb. 

GULFS. 

Q. What Gulf between Tripoli and Barca ? 

A. Sidra. 

Q. What Gulf between Berbera and Arabia ? 

A. Aden. 

Q. What Gulf south of Upper Guinea ? 

A. Gulf of Guinea. 

BAYS. 

Q. What Bays on the southern part of the west coast ? 
A. Great Fish, Walwisch, Santa Cruz, and St. Helena. 
Q. What Bay on the east coast north of CafFraria ? 
A. Delagoa. 

CHANNELS. 

Q. What Channel between Madagascar and Mozambique ? 
A. Mozambique. 

CAPES. 

Q. Which is the most northern Cape of Africa ? 

A, Bon. (Sometimes written Bona.) 

Q. Which is the most southern Cape ? 

A. Agulhas. 

Q. Which is the most eastern Cape ? 

A. Guardafui, 









58 AFRICA. 

Q. Which is the most western Cape ? 
A. Verde. 

Q. What celebrated Cape near the southern extremity of 
Africa? 

A. Cape of Good Hope. 

Q. What two Capes on the Desert coast 1 

A. Bojador, and Blanco. 

Q. What Cape at the southern extremity of Liberia ? 

A. Palmas. 

Q. What Cape at the northern extremity of Mozambique ? 

A. Delgado. 

Q. What Cape at the northern extremity of Zanguebar ? 

A. Bassas. 

RIVERS. 

Q. Which is the principal River in Africa ? 

A. Nile. 

The Nile is remarkable for flowing 1600 miles without receiv- 
ing the smallest tributary. (M. G. p. 70.) 

Q. Into what Sea does the Nile empty ? 

A. Mediterranean. 

Q. What are its three chief branches ? 

A. El Abiad, Bahr el Azrek or Abawi, and Tacazze. 

Q. What three Rivers empty into the Atlantic Ocean on the 
west coast of Africa ? 

A. Senegal, Gambia, and Rio Grande. 

Q. What River in Liberia ? 

A. St. Paul's. 

Q. What River empties into the Gulf of Guinea ? 

A. Niger. 

This is a very remarkable river ; though heard of 20 centuries 
ago, its source and mouth were discovered only a few years since. 
(M. G. p. 70.) 

Q. What River between Angola and Benguela ? 

A. Coanza. 

Q. What River between Loango and Congo ? 

A. Congo. 

Q. What River south of Benguela ? 

A. Bembaroughe. 

Q. What River runs through the country of the Hottentots ? 

A. Orange. 

Q. What River flows into Delagoa Bay ? 

A. Manice. 

Q. What River flows into the Mozambique Channel ? 

A. Zambeze. 

Q. What Rivers run through Zanguebar ? 

A, Ozee and Webbe. 



AFRICA. 

Q. What Rivers flow into Lake Tchad ? 
A. Yeou and Shary. 

LAKES. 

Q. What two Lakes in Soudan ? 

A. Tchad and Fittre. 

Q. What Lake north of Bambarra ? 

A. Dibbie. 

Q. What Lake in Abyssinia ? 

«#. Dembea. 

#. What Lake in Barbary ? 

.#. Lowdeah. 

Q. What Lake west of Zanguebar and Mozambique 

A. Maravi. (Salt.) 

Pages 70-1.— Lesson 52.— Map No. 25. 

ISLANDS. 



59 






Q. What three groups of Islands in the Atlantic Ocean belong 
to Portugal ? 

A. Azore, Madeira, and Cape Verde. 

Q. What group of Islands belong to Spain 1 

A. Canary. 

Q. What "three Islands in the Gulf of Guinea belong to Portugal ? 

A. Prince's, St. Thomas's, and Annobon. 

Q. Which is the most northern Island in the Gulf of Guinea ? 

A. Fernando Po. 

Q. What two Islands south of the Equator belong to Great 
Britain ? 

A. Ascension and St. Helena. 

St. Helena is remarkable for being the place of imprisonment 
and burial of Napoleon Buonaparte. He died here in 1821, after 
a residence of six years. In the year 1840 his remairJs were 
taken to France. (M. G. p. 70.) 

Q. What great Archipelago in the Indian Ocean ? 

A. Ethiopian. 

Q. Which are its principal Islands and groups ? 

A. Madagascar, Comoro, Seychelle, Almirante and Masca- 
renha. 

Q. Which are the Mascarenha Islands ? 

A. Bourbon and Mauritius. 

The latter is often called the Isle of France. 

Q. What Islands belong to Great Britain ? 

A. Mauritius, Seychelle, and Almirante. 

Q. What Island belongs to France ? 

A. Bourbon. 



GO AFRICA. 

Q. What Islands belong to Muscat ? 
A. Pemba, Zanzibar, and Monfia. 

Q. What Islands between Madagascar and Mozambique ? 
A. Comoro. 

Q. What Islands north-east of Cape Gardafui ? 
A. Socotra, and Abd' el Curia. 
Q. To what power does Socotra belong ? 
A. To Keshin. (This is a petty state on the southern coast of 
Arabia.) 

MOUNTAINS. 

Q. What Mountains extend through Barbary? 

A. Atlas. 

Q. Which is the highest Peak of the Atlas Mountains ? 

A. Mt. Miltsin. 

Q. How high is it? 

A. 11,900 feet. (M. A.) 

Q. What Mountains between Soudan and Guinea ? 

A. Kong. 

Q. What Mountains between Soudan and Ethiopia ? 

A. Mountains of the Moon, or Jibbel el Kumri. 

Q. What Mountains in Congo ? 

A, Crystal. 

Q. What Mountains in Cape Colony ? 

A. Snow, or Sneeuw Bergen. 

Q. What Mountains west of Mozambique ? 

A. Lupata. 

These Mountains have been called by Geographers the Back- 
Bone of the world, but their very existence is now considered 
doubtful. (M. G. p. 7i.) 

Q. What Mountains in Madagascar ? 

A. Radama, and Red. 

DIVISIONS. 

Q. What great division occupies the northern part of Africa ? 

A. Barbary. 

Q. What States does Barbary include ? 

A. Morocco, Algiers, Tunis, Tripoli, and Beled-el-Jerid. 

Q. What great division lies south of Barbary ? 

A. Great Desert. 

Q. What great divisions lie south of the Great Desert ? 

A. Soudan, and Senegambia. 

Q. What great divisions lie south of Soudan ? 

A. Upper Guinea, Lower Guinea, and Ethiopia. 

Q. What great division lies west of Soudan ? 

A, Senegambia. 



AFRICA. 61 

Q. What great division on the west coast, on both sides of the 
Equator ? 

A. Lower Guinea. 

Q. What great division on the east coast, on both sides of the 
Equator ? 

A. Zanguebar. 

Q. What great division lies south of the Mountains of the Moon ? 

A. Ethiopia. 

Q. What colony occupies the southern extremity of Africa ? 

A, Cape Colony. 

Q. What two races of men inhabit the country north of Cape 
Colony ? 

A. Hottentots, and Boshuanas. 



Pages 71-2.— Lesson 53.— Map No. 25. 

Q. What countries lie on the Red Sea ? 

A. Egypt, Nubia, and Abyssinia. 

Q. In what country are the mouths of the river Nile situated ? 

A. Egypt. 

Q. What is the district comprised between the outlets of the 
river Nile called ? 

A. Delta. 

Q. What is a Delta ? 

A. It is a term applied to those districts embraced by the out- 
lets of rivers. The Nile, Niger, Ganges, Mississippi, and other 
great streams, have each their respective deltas. (M. G. p. 72.) 

DESERTS. 

Q. What Desert occupies a large portion of the north of Africa ? 

A. Great Desert. 

Q. What Desert between the river Nile and the Red Sea ? 

A. Nubian. 

A. What Desert is crossed by the Tropic of Capricorn ? 

A. Challahengah. 

Q. How long and wide is the Great Desert ? 

A. It is 3,000 miles long, and 1,000 wide. (M. A.) 

This is the largest Desert in the world ; and though extremely 
hot, and in most places destitute of water, yet contains a number 
of fertile spots called Oases, all of which are inhabited. (M. G. p. 72.) 

OASES. 

Q Which are the five principal Oases ? 
A. Fezzan, Tuat, Agdass, Bilmah, and Tibesty. 
There are four other Oases. 
Q. Which are they ? 

A. Augela, Siwah, El Dakhel, and El Khargeh. 
6 



KyZ AFRICA. 

Q. What is the western part of the Great Desert called ? 
A. Sahara. 

CAPITALS. 

Q. What is the Capital of Morocco ? 

A. Morocco. 

Q. Of Algiers ? (Called Algeria by the French. The name 
is now becoming familiar with us.) 

A. Algiers. 

Q. Of Tunis ? 

A. Tunis. 

Q. Of Tripoli? 

A. Tripoli. 

q. Of Fezzan ? 

A. Mourzuk. 

q. Of Egypt? 

A. Cairo. 

q. Of Nubia? 

A. New Dongola. 

q. Of Foota Jallon ? 

A. Timboo. 

q. Of Ashantee? 

A. Coomassie. 

q. Of Dahomey ? 

A. Abomey? 

q. Of Benin ? 

*#. Benin. 

q. Of Kaarta? 

.#. Kemmoo. 

q. Of Timbuctoo ? 

A, Timbuctoo. 

q. Of Bambarra ? « . 

.#. Sego. 

q. Of Houssa ? 

.#. Kashna. 

Soccatoo, or Sackatoo, the chief city of the Fellatahs, the 
ruling people "in Soudan, is perhaps more properly the capital of 
Houssa. 

q. Of Yaribba? 

A. Eyeo. 

q. Of Bornou ? 

A. Kouka. 

q. Of Bergoo ? 

A. W~ara. 

q. Of Darfur ? 

A. Cobbc. 



AFRICA. 03 

Q. Of Kordofan ? 
A. Ibeit. 

Q. Of Abyssinia? 
A, Gondar. 
Q. Of Congo ? 
.#. St. Salvador. 
Q. Of Angola ? 
.#. St. Paul de Loando. 
#. Of Benguela ? 
.#. St. Felipe de Benguela. 
Q. Of Cazembe ? 
A. Cazembe. 
Q. Of Monomotapa ? 
♦ ./?. Zimbao. 
Q. Of Mozambique? 
.#. Mozambique. 
Q. Of Cape Colony ? 
A. Cape Town. 
#. Of Imerina ? 
.#. Tananarivou. 

TROPICS, ZONES, LATITUDE, &C. 

Q. What parts of Africa are crossed by the Tropic of Cancer ? 

A. The Great Desert, and Egypt. 

Q. What parts by the Equator ? 

A. Lower Guinea, Ethiopia, and Zanguebar. 

Q. What parts by the Tropic of Capricorn ? 

A. Hottentot country, Desert of Challahengari, Boshuana 
country, and Mozambique. 

Q. In what Zone is Africa mostly ? 

A. Torrid. 

Q. In what Zone is that part of it north of the Tropic of 
Cancer? 

A. North Temperate. 

Q. In what Zone is that part of it south of the Tropic of 
Capricorn ? 

A. South Temperate. 

Africa comprises about 37 degrees of North Latitude, and 35 
degrees of South Latitude. 

Q. In what Latitude then is it mostly situated ? 

A. North Latitude. 

Africa comprises more than 50 degrees of East Longitude, and 
about 18 degrees of West Longitude. 

Q. It what Longitude is it then mostly ? 

A, East Longitude, 



64 OCEANIC A. 

OCEAMCA. 
Pages 72-3.— Lesson ZA.—Map No, 28. 

DIVISIONS. 

Q. Which are the three grand divisions of Oceanica ? 

A. Malaysia, Australasia, and Polynesia. 

Q. Which is the largest division of Oceanica ? 

A. Polynesia. 

Q. Which is the smallest division of Oceanica ? 

A. Malaysia. 

ISLANDS. 

Q. What three considerable Islands does the Equator pass 
through in Malaysia ? 

A, Sumatra, Borneo, and Celebes. • 

Q. What Island lies south-east of Sumatra ? 

A. Java. 

Q. What five Islands east of Java ? 

A. Bally, Sumbawa, Jeendana, Floris, and Timor. 

Q. What Islands east of Celebes ? 

A. Spice. 

Q. What Islands east of the China Sea ? 

A. Philippine. 

Q. Which are the the two largest of the Philippine Islands ? 

A. Luzon, and Mindanao. 

STRAITS. 

Q. What Strait separates Sumatra from Malacca ? 
A. Malacca. 

Q. What Strait separates Sumatra from Java ? 
A. Sunda. 

American vessels generally pass through the Straits of Sunda, 
on going to or returning from China. (M. G. p. 73.) 
Q. What Strait between Borneo and Celebes ? 
A, Macassar. 

ISLANDS. 

Q. What Islands between Borneo and Mindanao ? 
A. Sooloo. 

MOUNTAIN. 

Q. What Mountain in Sumatra directly under the Equator ? 
A. Mount Ophir. 

ISLANDS. 

Q. Which is the largest Island of Australasia 1 
A. Australia, or New Holland. 
Q. What are its divisions? 

A. North Australia, South Australia, West Australia, and New 
Be uth Wales. 



OCEANICA. 65 

COLONIES. 

Q. What Colony on the east coast of Australia ? 

A. Botany Bay. 

Q. What Colony on the west coast ? 

A. Swan River. 

Q. W T hat Colony on the South ? 

A, South Australia. 

ISLAND. 

Q. What Island south of Australia ? 
A, Van Diemen's Land or Tasmania. 

STRAITS. 

Q. What Strait separates Australia from Van Diemen's Land ? 
A. Bass'. 

Q.. What Strait separates Australia from Papua or New Guinea? 
A. Torres'. 

GULFS. 

Q. What two Gulfs on opposite sides of Australia? 
A. Carpentaria, and Spencer's. 

river, &c. 
Q. Which is the principal River in Australia ? 
A. Murray. 

Q. Which are the principal Mountains in Australia ? 
A. Blue, and Berkeley's. (The southern part of the Blue 
Mountains is called the Australian Alps.) 
Q. Which is the principal town ? 
A. Sydney; 

ISLANDS, &c. 

Q. What large Island north of Australia ? 

A. Papua or New Guinea. 

Q. What Islands north-east of Australia ? 

A. Solomon's Archipelago, New Georgia, New Ireland, New 
Britain, and Louisiade. 

Q. What Islands east of Australia ? 

A. New Hebrides, New Caledonia, and Norfolk. 

Q. What Sea between Australia and New Hebrides ? 

A. Coral. 

Q. What Islands south-east of Australia? 

A. New Zealand. 

Q. What Strait between the two largest Islands of New Zea- 
land ? 

A. Cook's. 

Q. What Strait between the middle and southernmost Islands 
of New Zealand ? 

A. Foveaux. 
6* 



66 OCEANICA. 



Q. What Bays in the northern part of New Zealand ? 
A. Bay of Islands and Bay of Plenty. 



Page 74.— Lesson 55.— Map No. 28. 

ARCHIPELAGOES AND ISLANDS. 

Q. Which Archipelago of Polynesia does the Equator pass 
through ? 

A. Central. 

Q. Which are the principal Archipelagoes and Islands of Poly- 
nesia, north of the Equator ? 

A. Magellan's Archipelago, Anson's Archipelago, Caroline 
Islands, Ladrone Islands, Sandwich Islands, and America Islands. 

Q. What Archipelago lies on the 140th meridian of Longitude 
west from Greenwich ? 

A. Mendana's. 

Q. What groups of Islands does it contain ? 

A. Washington Islands, and Marquesas Islands. 

Q. Which are the principal Islands east of the 160th meridian 
of Longitude west from Greenwich, and south of the Equator. 

A. Society Islands, Georgian Islands, Cook's or Hervey's 
Islands, Austral Islands, Palliser's Islands, Paumotu or Pearl 
Islands, Gambier Islands, Prince of Wales Islands, and King 
George's Islands. 

Q. Which are the principal Islands that lie west of the 160th 
meridian of Longitude west from Greenwich, and south of the 
Equator ? 

A. Navigator's Islands, Friendly Islands, Fejee Islands, Habaii 
Islands, Tonga Islands, and Kermadec Isles. 

Q. Which is the most northern Island of Polynesia ? 

A. Mellishes. 

Q. Which are the most southern Isles of Polynesia ? 

A. Kermadec. 

Q. Which is the most eastern Island of Polynesia ? 

A. Easter. 

Q. Which are the most western Islands of Polynesia ? 

A. St. Andrew's. 

The most important group of Islands belonging to Polynesia is 
on the 20th parallel of North Latitude. 

Q. Which is it ? 

A. Sandwich. 

Q. Which is the principal of the Sandwich Islands ? 

A. Hawaii or Owhyhee. 

Q. What high mountain is on the Island of Hawaii and its 
height ? 

A. Mouna Roah, Mt., 16,000 feet high. (M. A.) 



OCEANICA. 67 

Q. What distinguished personage was killed here in the year 
1779? 
A. Captain Cook. 

TROPICS, ZONES, &C. 

Q. What Tropic crosses the northern part of Oceanica ? 

A. Tropic of Cancer. 

Q. What Tropic crosses the southern part ? 

A. Tropic of Capricorn ? 

Q. What great circle crosses the central or middle part ? 

A. Equator. 

Q. In what Zone is the northern part of Oceanica ? 

A. North Temperate. 

Q. In what Zone is the middle part ? 

A, Torrid. 

Q. In what Zone is the southern part ? 

A. South Temperate. 

Oceanica comprises 50 degrees of South Latitude, and 40 
North Latitude. 

Q. In what Latitude, then, is it mostly ? 

A. South Latitude. 

Oceanica comprises about 85 degrees of east, and 72 of west 
longitude from Greenwich. 

Q. In what Longitude, then, is it mostly ? 

A. East. 



PART SECOND. 
DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 

NORTH AMERICA. 
Pages 85-6. — Lesson 62. — Map No. 4. 

DIVISIONS. 

Q. How is Russian America bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Arctic Ocean, E. by British Ame- 
rica, from which it is separated by the 141° of longitude W. from 
Greenwich ; S. by the Pacific Ocean and British America ; and 
W. by Bhering's Strait and the Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. New Archangel. (This is merely a fortified trading post, on 
Sitcha island, with a small village attached to it.) 

Russian America comprehends the N. W. part of N. America, being 
that part of it adjacent to Asia, between 54° 40' and 71° 20' N. lat., and 
130° and 168° W. long. Area estimated at 500,000 sq. ms., including the 
Aleutian islands and several other groups. Pop., according to Balbi, 
60,000. 

Q. How is British America bounded ? 

A. This country, taken in its full extent, is bounded N. by the 
Arctic Ocean, N. E. and E. by Baffin's Bay, Davis' Strait, and 
the Atlantic Ocean ; S. by the U. S. and the Atlantic Ocean ; and 
W. by Russian America and the Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Montreal. 

That part of America now belonging to Great Britain, is an assemblage 
of vast, ill-defined, and straggling territories, the remnant of that mighty 
empire of which the American revolution deprived her. Their great extent 
and resources will, however, one day enable them to equal some of the most 
potent of the now existing states. 

Area, 2,310,000 sq. ms.— Pop. 1,690,000. (M. A.) 

Q. How are the United States bounded ? 

A. They occupy the middle division of N. America, and are 
bounded N. by British America, E. by New Brunswick and the 
Atlantic Ocean, S. by the Gulf of Mexico, Mexico, and Upper 
California, and W. by the Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? V J 

A. Washington. 

(68) 



NORTH AMERICA. 69 

The territory of the United States lies between 25° and 49° of N. lat., 
and between 66° 50' and 125° W. long, from Greenwich; or between 9° 
35' E., and 48° 20' W. long, from Washington. Its greatest length is 
3000 ms., and its greatest breadth is 1700 rns., containing, exclusive of 
Texas, about 2,300,000 sq. ms. It has a frontier line of about 10,000 ms.; 
a sea-coast of 3600 ; and a lake coast of 1200 ms. It contains about 
one-twentieth of the habitable land of the whole earth. The population in 
1790 was 3,929,328; in 1800, 5,309,758; in 1810, 7,239,903; in 1820, 
9,638,166 ; in 1830, 12,856.165 ; in 1840, 17,062,666; of which 2,487,116 
were slaves. Employed in agriculture, 3,717,756 ; in commerce, 117,575 ; 
in manufactures and tradesj 791,545; navigating the ocean, 56,025; 
navigating rivers, lakes, canals, &c, 33,067 ; in mining, 15,203 ; learned 
professions, 65,236. 

The foregoing statement excludes the Indians, who are never reckoned in 
the population of the U. S. It excludes Texas also, the latest census being 
that of 1840. The population of the U. S. is now (1846) estimated at 20 
millions. 

Q. How is Mexico bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Upper California and the U. States ; E. 
by the U. S. and the Gulf of Mexico ; S. E. by the Caribbean 
Sea ; S. by Guatimala ; and S. W. and W. by the Pacific Ocean. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A, Mexico. 

Mexico was until recently an extensive territory, but of late years it has 
been much abridged. Texas has been separated from it since 1836, and 
Upper California was taken possession of by the United States in 1846. 
Originally it was a native empire ; afterwards it became the principal of the 
Spanish viceroyalties ; it was for some time a federal, but is now a central 
republic of North America, situated chiefly in the southern part. When 
entire, it lay between 16° 40' and 42° N. lat., and 86° 40' and 124° 30' 
W. long. Extreme length from S. E. to N. W., about 2700 ms. ; greatest 
breadth, from E. to W., near 1000 ms. The area was estimated at 
about 1,656,000 sq. ms., but now it is reduced to from 920,000 to 980,000 
sq. ms., or four and a half times the extent of France. The best authorities 
reckon the population at about 7,000,000. 

Q. How is Guatimala bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Mexico, Yucatan, Balize, and the Bay 
of Honduras ; E. by the Caribbean Sea ; S. E. by the Colombian 
province of the Isthmus ; and S. and S. W. by the Pacific. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. San Salvador. 

Guatimala, or Central America. Under this term is included the 
long and comparatively narrow tract of country connecting the continents 
of N. and S. America, lying between lat. 8° 5' and 16° 60' N., and long. 
80° 50' and 94° 12' W. Length N. W. to S. E., about 1000 ms., breadth 
varying from 90 to 250 ms. The area has been estimated at 200,500 sq. 
ms. Pop. 2,000,000. As in all the Spanish American States, the proportion 
of whites to the entire population is small ; the native Indians and the half- 
breeds form a great majority. 



70 NORTH AMERICA. 

Q. How is Balize bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. and E. by the Bay of Honduras ; S. by 
Guatimala ; and W. and N. W. by Yucatan. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital ? 

A. Balize. 

Baxize or British Honduras, is a settlement belonging to Great Britain, 
on the E. side of the peninsula of Yucatan, chiefly between 16° and 18° 
25' N. lat. and 88° 15' and 89° 35' W. long. It is extensive, for its popu- 
lation, the latter is about 4000, of whom only 300 are whites. The felling 
and exporting of mahogany and logwood are the chief pursuits. 

A. How is North America bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Arctic Ocean ; E. by the Atlantic 
Ocean, which separates it from Europe and Africa ; S. and W. 
by the Pacific Ocean, which separates it from Asia, Australasia, 
and Polynesia. (M. A.) 

North America comprises that portion of the New World extending 
northward from the Isthmus of Darien. The area of this vast region is 
estimated at from 7,400,000, to 7,950,000 sq. ms. Its sea-coast has an extent 
of about 9500 ms. on the eastern and somewhat less on the western side, ex- 
clusive of that on the frozen shores of the northern borders. 

America, or the New World, is one of the great divisions of the globe, 
surpassing all the others in magnitude, with the exception of Asia, to which, 
however, it is but little inferior. This vast continent stretches N. and S. a 
distance of about 9000 ms., or from about 71° N. lat., to Cape Horn, in 
about 56° S. lat., and from 35° to 168' W. long, from Greenwich. Where 
broadest, N. America, excluding Greenland, is about 3200 ms. across, and 
S. America is about the same width. It is very irregularly shaped, being 
divided by the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea into the two enormous 
peninsulas of N. and S. America, united by the Isthmus of Darien, not more 
than 36 ms. across. The estimates that have been formed of the area of 
America differ widely. Balbi supposes it to amount to 14,790,000 sq. ms., 
and Hassel, about 16,500,000 sq. ms. The following estimate, which is that 
given in the article America in the new edition of the Encyclopaedia Bri- 
tannica, does not differ materially from Balbi's ; and the ability with which 
the article referred to is written, renders its statements of the highest 
authority. 

sq. Eng. ms. 

North America 7,400,000 

South America 6,500,000 

Islands 150,000 

Greenland and the islands connected ~> Qnft ftnf 

with it N. of Hudson's Straits. $ * yuu ' uuu 

Total 14,950,000 

In Mitchell's Atlas, the area of America is estimated at 15 millions sq. 
ms., which seems to be about a fair average of the different authorities. 

In 1838, the population was estimated by McCulloch at 46,931,000. 
Some authors of the same period do not carry it beyond 40,000,000, though 
this is obviously a low calculation. (In 1846, according to M. A., the popu- 
lation is 50,465,000 ; this is estimating the U. S. at 20,000,000.) 



NORTH AMERICA. 71 

GULFS. 

Q. Where is Coronation Gulf? 

A. It is on the N. coast of British America, and leads into the 
Polar Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Boothia ? 

A. It is in the N. part of British America; having Prince 
William's Land on the N., Melville Peninsula on the E M Boothia 
Felix on the N. W., and leads into Prince Regent's Inlet, and the 
Polar Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gulf of St. Lawrence ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Canada East and Labrador, S. by Nova 
Scotia and Cape Breton Island, E. by Newfoundland, and W. by 
New Brunswick and the peninsula of Gaspe (Canada East), and 
leads into the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

This gulf lies chiefly between the 46th and 51st degs. of N. lat., and the 
57th and 65th of W. long. At its N. W. extremity it receives the River St. 
Lawrence ; and it communicates with the Atlantic on the N. E. by the Strait 
of Belleisle, between Labrador and Newfoundland; on the S. E. by its 
principal outlet, the Channel called St. Paul's, between Newfoundland and 
Cape Breton ; and on the S. by the Gut of Canso, between Cape Breton 
and Nova Scotia. It contains the large Islands of Anticosti and Prince 
Edward ; and the Magdalen Islands, a group about lat. 47° 30', and between 
long. 61° 27' and 62° W., inhabited by perhaps 1000 Canadian, French, 
English, and Irish settlers, who carry on a profitable fishery. The Is. of St. 
Pierre and Miquelon, which lie E. of the Magdalen group, belong to France. 

Q. Where is Welcome Gulf? 

A. It is in the N. part of Hudson's Bay ; having N. Melville 
Peninsula, E. Southampton Island, and leads into Fox Channel. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Georgia ? 

A. It separates Quadra and Vancouver's Island from Oregon 
Territory, and leads into the Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 

This gulf is about 120 ms. in length from'N. to S., but the breadth varies 
from 6 to 20 ms. It contains several clusters of islands, and branches ofFinto a 
great number of canals, most of which were examined by Captain Van- 
couver and his officers. On the N. it is connected with the Pacific by Queen 
Charlotte's Sound, and on the S. by the Straits of Juan de Fuca. 

Q, Where is the Gulf of California ? 

A. It is on the W. Coast of Mexico, between Mexico and the 
Peninsula of Old California, and leads into the Pacific Ocean. 
(M. A.) 

This gulf extends from about 23° 30' to 32° N. lat. Its length is above 
700 ms, ; its breadth varies from about 40 to 150 ms. It is sometimes called 
Vermillion Sea, also the Sea of Cortez. 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Mexico ? 

A. It is S. of the U. S., and E. of Mexico ; bounded N. W., 
N., and N. E. by the U. S., E. by Cuba, S. E. by the Peninsula 



72 NORTH AMERICA. 

of Yucatan, and S. and W. by Mexico, and leads into the Atlantic 
Ocean. (M. A.) 

This is a large inland sea, on the S. E. coast of N. America, connected 
by the Florida channel with the Atlantic Ocean, and by the channel of 
Yucatan with the Caribbean Sea, situated between lat. 18° 10' and 30° 20' 
N., and between long. 81° and 98° W. Length from E. to W. 1000 ms., 
breadth 800 ms., area about 800,000 sq. ms. 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Tehuantepec ? 

A. It is a semi-elliptical indentation of that part of the Pacific 
Ocean, stretching between Guatimala and the state of Oaxaca in 
Mexico. (M. A.) 

Q. WhaUsaGulf or Bay? 

A. It is a part of the sea extending into the land, as the Gulf 
of Mexico, Hudson's Bay, &c. (M. G. p. 10.) 

BAYS. 

Q. Where is Bristol Bay? 

A. It is W. of the Peninsula of Alaska, and leads into tho 
Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Melville Bay ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Greenland, and leads into Baffin'* 
Bay. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Hudson's Bay? 

A. It is a large bay, extending from the Atlantic Ocean west 
ward nearly into the centre of British America, having East Maine 
on the E., James' Bay on the S., and New South Wales and New 
North Wales on the S. W. and W., and leads into the Atlantic 
Ocean. (M. A.) 

This is a large Bay or inland sea, extending between 51° and 64° N. lat., 
and 76° and 95° 30' W. long., and surrounded on all sides by the partially 
explored British territories. Its length from S. S. E. to N. N. W. is nearly 
1200 ms.; greatest breadth estimated at 600 ms.; area, probably near 350,000 
sq. ms. It is connected with the Atlantic by Hudson's Straits, a sea about 
500 ms. in length, and generally upwards of 100 ms. in breadth. The 
southern part, extending from about 51° to 55° N. lat., is called James' 
Bay. 

Q. Where is Musquito Bay? 

A. It is in the E. part of Hudson's Bay. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Ungava Bay? 

A. It is on the N. coast of Labrador, and leads by Hudson's 
Strait into the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is James' Bay ? 

A. It is the southern extension of Hudson's Bay, lying N. of 
Canada West. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is San Francisco Bay ? 

A. It is on the coast of Upper California, and leads into tho 
Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 






NORTH AMERICA. 73 

Q. Where is the Bay of Fundy ? 

A. It is between Nova Scotia and New Brunswick, and leads 
into the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

This bay sets up between Cape Sable, the S. point of Nova Scotia, and 
Mount Desert Island, in Me., a distance of 150 ras. From Eastport to St. 
Johns, New Brunswick, is 60 ras. The Bay is divided, in its N. E. part, 
into 2 branches, the N. W. called Chignecto Bay, the head of which is 170 
ms. from Eastport. The S. E. part is called the Basin of Mines, 150 ms. 
from Eastport. 

Q. Where is Delaware Bay? 

A. It is on the E. coast of the U. S., situated between the 
States of N. J. and Del., and leads into the Atlantic Ocean. 
(M. A.) 

This is a large arm of the sea, at the mouth of Delaware r., 65 ms. long, and 
18 ms. across at its mouth, between Cape May on the N., and Cape Henlopen 
on the S. In the middle it is 30 ms. across. At the mouth of the Bay is the Dela- 
ware Breakwater, a fine artificial harbour, erected by the General Government. 

Q. Where is Chesapeake Bay? 

A. It is on the E. coast of the U. S., situated in the E. part 
of Md. and Va., and leads into the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

This bay has. its entrance wholly in Va., between Cape Charles on the 
N., and Cape Henry on the S., which are about 12 ms. apart. But the Bay 
lies mostly # in Md., dividing the State into two parts, called the Eastern and 
the Western shore. It is about 200 ms. long,* and from 7 to 20 broad, and 
generally 9 fathoms deep, being the largest bay in the U. S. The Susque- 
hanna r. at its N. extremity, the Potomac r. on the W., and James r. near 
its mouth, are the largest rivers which flow into it. The entire surface of 
country drained by the rivers which flow into the Chesapeake Bay, is estimated 
at 70,000 sq. ms. 

Q. Where is Tampa Bay ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Flor., and leads into the Gulf of 
Mexico. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Galveston Bay ? 

A. It is in the S. E. part of Texas, lying N. of the island of 
Galveston, setting up, from the Gulf of Mexico, inland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Bay of Campeche ? 

A. It is the southern extension of the Gulf of Mexico, having 
the Mexican State of Yucatan on the E., and those of Tabasco 
and Vera Cruz on the S. and W. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Bay of Honduras ? 

A. It is in the W. part of the Caribbean Sea, having Guati 
mala on the S., and Balize and Yucatan on the W. (M. A.) 

This bay is situated on the E. coast of Central America, between the 
Cape of Honduras, near 1 6° N. lat., and 86° W. long., and Cape Catoche, 



•According to Mitchell it is 190 ms. long. 



74 NORTH AMERICA. 

in about 21° 35' N. lat., and 87° W. long. The approach to the coasts of 
this Bay is very dangerous, especially during the prevalence of the northerly 
winds. 

Q. Where is the Bay of Guatimala ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Guatimala, and leads into the Ca- 
ribbean Sea. (M. A.) 

SOUNDS. 

Q. Where is Norton's Sound ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Russian America, and leads into 
the Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Prince William's Sound ? 

A. It is on the S. coast of Russian America, and leads into the 
Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Smith's Sound? 

A. It is in the N. part of Baffin's Bay, between Greenland, 
and the North Georgian Islands. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Lancaster's Sound ? 

A. It separates N. Devon from Prince William's Land, and 
connects Baffin's Bay and the Polar Sea. (M. A.) 

This sound was by Parry called Barrow's Strait. It is the Sir James Lan- 
caster's Sound of Baffin, and is the connecting channel between Baffin's 
Bay on the E. and the Polar Sea on the W. It lies in a direction parallel 
to the Equator, between the latitudes of 73° 45' and 74° 40' N., its mouth 
in Baffin's Bay, being nearly on the 80th meridian. It is therefore, about 
200 ms. in length from E. to W., and between 60 and 70 ms. in average 
width. Both shores are broken by a great number of Inlets, and that .of the 
Prince Regent, on the S., is of very considerable extent. The latter was 
found by Ross to terminate in a great Gulf, which he called Boothia. Its 
shores are desolate and barren, and are covered with ice and snow. 

Q. Where is Davy's Sound ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Greenland, and leads into the Atlan- 
tic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Queen Charlotte's Sound ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of British America, between Wash- 
ington or Glueen Charlotte's, and Quadra and Vancouver Island, 
and leads into the Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Albemarle Sound ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of the U. S., on the coast of N. C, in 
the N. E. part of the State, and leads into the Atlantic Ocean. 
(M. A.) 

This is a large Inlet from the Ocean, extending 60 ms. from E. to W., 
and is from 4 to 15 ms. wide. It communicates with Pamlico Sound on the 
S., and the Ocean E., by several narrow Inlets ; and with Chesapeake Bay 
by a canal through the Dismal Swamp. It receives the waters of the Roa- 
noke, Chowan, and some smaller rivers. 

Q. What is a Sound ? 

A. It is a narrow sea, so shallow that its depth may be mea- 



NORTH AMERICA. 75 

sured by a line dropped from the surface to the bottom, as Long 
Island Sound, Pamlico Sound. (M. G. p. 40.) 

STRAITS. 

Q. Where is Bhering's Strait ? 

A. It separates America from Asia, and connects the Pacific 
with the Arctic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Davis' Strait ? 

A. It separates Greenland on the E. from Prince William's 
Land on the W., and connects Baffin's Bay with the Atlantic 
Ocean. (M. A.) 

This strait stretches N. N. W. and S. S. E., and where narrowest under 
.the Arctic Circle, it is from 150 to 160 ms. across ; but its length is not 
accurately determined. It derives its name from John Davis, an English 
navigator, by whom it was discovered between 1585 and 15S7. 

Q. Where are Cumberland, Frobisher's and Hudson's Straits ? 

A. They separate Prince William's Land from Labrador, and 
connect Hudson's Bay with the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Strait of Belleisle ? 

A. It separates Labrador from Newfoundland, and connects the 
Gulf of St. Lawrence, on the N. E., with the Atlantic Ocean. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gut or Strait of Canso ? 

A. It separates Cape Breton Island from the peninsula of Nova 
Scotia, and connects the Gulf of St. Lawrence on the S. with the 
Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Strait of Juan de Fuca? 

A. It separates Quadra and Vancouver's Island on the S. from 
Oregon Ter., and connects the Gulf of Georgia with the Pacific 
Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. How wide is Bhering's Strait ? 

A. Forty miles. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Prince Regent's Inlet ? 

A. It separates Boothia Felix from Prince William's Land, and 
connects the Gulf of Boothia with Barrow's Strait. (M. A.) 

Q. What is a Strait ? 

A. It is a narrow passage connecting different bodies of water, 
as the Strait of Gibraltar, &c. (M. G. p, 10.) 

LAKES. 

Q. Where is Great Bear Lake ? 

A. It is in the N. W. part of British America, and flows by the 
Bear Lake R. into Mackenzie's R. (M. A.) 

This is a very irregularly shaped and extensive sheet of fresh water ; be- 
tween about 65° and 67° N. Iat.,and under the 120th deg. of W. long. It 
is 1 60 ms. in length. 



76 NORTH AMERICA. 

Q. Where is Great Slave Lake ? 

A. It is in British America, S. E. of Great Bear Lake, and flows 
into Mackenzie's R. (M. A.) 

This Lake is 300 ms. in length from E. to W. and from 60 to 100 ms. 
in width. It is full of wooded islands, and its outlet at the W. extremity, 
in long. 119° 30' W. lat. 61° 30' N., flows N. W. into the Polar Sea. 

Q. Where is Athabasca Lake ? 

A. It is in British America, S. E. of Great Slave Lake, and 
flows by the Slave R. into Great Slave Lake. (M. A.) 

This is an extensive Lake, being about 200 ms. in length, and from 14 to 
15 ms. in average width. Fort Chippewyan, at its W.S.W. extremity, is 
in lat. 58° 42' N. long. 111° 18' W. It receives the Athabasca R. • and 
the Slave R. flows from it into Great Slave Lake, lying about 170 ms. N. E. 
Its N. shore is high and rocky, whence it is sometimes called the Lake of 
the Hills. 

Q. Where is Winnipeg Lake ? 

A. It is in the S. part of British America, S. E. of Athabasca 
Lake, and N. W. of Lake Superior, and flows by Nelson R. into 
Hudson's Bay. (M. A.) 

This Lake is between 50° 30' and 54° N. lat., and 95° 30' and 99° 30' 
W. long. Length about 250 ms. ; greatest breadth 70 ms. It receives the 
waters of several small lakes in every direction, and contains a number of 
small islands. 

Q. Where is Lake Superior ? 

A. It is between the U. S. and Canada West, and flows by St. 
Mary's Strait or River into Lake Huron. (M. A.) 

This is the largest and most westerly of the five great lakes, which are 
connected with the St. Lawrence R., and supposed to be the largest body of 
fresh water in the world. It lies between 46° 35' and 49° N. lat. and 84° 
30' and 92° 20' W. long. Its length, following the bend of the lake, is 
about 430 ms. ; greatest breadth, above 160 ms. It is about 1200 or 
1500 ms. in circumference., 900 ft. deep, and 641 ft. above the level of the 
Ocean. Area estimated at 28,000 sq. ms. The boundary between the U. S. 
and Canada passes through its central part. It contains many considerable 
islands, one of the largest of which, Isle Royal, is about 100 ms. long, and 
40 ms. broad. 

Q. Where is Lake Huron 1 

A. It lies on the boundary between the U. S. and Canada West, 
and between Lake Superior on the N. W., Lake Michigan on the 
N. W. and W., and Lakes Erie and Ontario on the S. and S.E., 
and flows by St. Clair River into Lake St. Clair, whence it flows 
by Detroit River into Lake Erie. (M. A.) 

This is one of the five great lakes of N. America, and its shape is so 
irregular that it is difficult accurately to determine its exact dimensions. It 
lies between 43° 5' and 46° 15' N. lat. and 80° and 84° 50' W. long. Its 
length, from S. S. E. to N.N. W., following the curve, is about 280 ms. ; 
its greatest breadth from E. to W. exclusive of Manitouline Lake, or 



NORTH AMERICA. 77 

Georgian Bay, is near 100 ms. Area estimated at about 19,000 sq. ms. 
The greatest depth is at least 1000 ft. Lake Huron is divided into two un- 
equal portions by a long peninsula and the Manitouline chain of islands ; 
the parts to the N. and E. are called North Channel and Georgian Bay. 
The islands of Lake Huron are said to amount to 32,000. The bound- 
ary between the U. S. and Canada passes along the middle of the main 
Huron 225 ms. and between lesser Manitouline and Drummond's islands, 
by what is called the middle passage, and curves round to the N. and W. 
25 ms. to the entrance of St. Mary's River. 

Q. Where is Lake Michigan ? 

Ji. It is in the N. part of the U. S., and the N.E. extremity 
communicates with the N. W. end of Lake Huron, by the Strait 
of Michilimacinac, or Mackinaw, by which, and its N. part, it 
separates the two peninsulas of the state of Michigan. (M. A.) 

This is one of the five great lakes of N. America connected with the R. 
St. Lawrence, and is the third in size, being inferior only to Lake Superior 
and Lake Huron. It lies wholly in the U, S., between 41° 38' 58" and 
I C° N. lat., and between 85° 50' and 88° W. long. Its length, about 320, 
but following the curve of the lake, is near 350 ms. ; its greatest breadth, 
about 90 ms. ; containing about 16,9SL sq. ms. The principal bays are 
Green Bay, on the N. W., and Great and Little Traverse Bays, on the 
E. It contains several islands in its N. part. The surface of this lake is 
about 600 ft. above the level of the sea ; its depth is stated to be 900 ft. 

Q. Where is Lake Erie ? 

A. It lies between the U. S. and Canada West ; it has the 
peninsula of Canada West on the N., and the States of Oo., Pa., 
and N.Y., on the S. and S.E., and flows, by Niagara R., into 
Lake Ontario. (M. A.) 

This is one of the five great lakes of N. America, between 41° 25' and 
42° 55' N. lat., and between 78° 55' and 83° 34' W. long. It constitutes 
part of the boundary between the U. S. and Canada, has an elliptical shape, 
and is about 250 ms. long, and varies in its breadth from 10 to 63 ms. It 
receives at its W. end, through Detroit R., the discharge of water from the 
great upper lakes, and discharges its own waters through Niagara R., cele- 
brated for its stupendous water-fall, into Lake Ontario. Its surface is ele- 
vated 565 ft. above tide-water at Albany, 52 ft. below Lakes Michigan and 
Huron, and 322 ft. above the level of Lake Ontario. Its waters are more 
shallow than those of the other great lakes. The greatest depth which has 
been obtained by sounding, is 270 ft. Its mean depth is not over 120 ft. A 
little N. W. of the mouth of Sandusky Bay, is a group of Islands, called 
North, Middle and South Bass Islands. In the N. part of the S. Island, is 
Put-in Bay, which has 12 ft. of water, and affords the best harbour on the 
Lake, and is easily accessible. Into this harbour Commodore Perry brought 
his prizes, after the battle of Lake Erie. The battle was fought a little to 
the N.W. of this, Sept. 10th, 1813. 

Q. Where is Lake Ontario ? 

A. It is between the State of N. Y. and Canada West, and 
flows into the R. St. Lawrence, (M. A.) 



78 NORTH AMERICA. 

This is the smallest and most easterly of the five great lakes of N. Ame- 
rica, which communicate with the R. St. Lawrence, situated between 43° 
10' and 44° 10' N. lat., and 76° and 80° W. long. It receives Niagara R., 
the great outlet of the upper lakes, in its S.W. part, and has its outlet by 
St. Lawrence R. in its N. E. part ; in which, immediately below the lake, is 
the cluster denominated " the Thousand Islands." Its shape approaches to 
a long and narrow ellipse, being 190 ms. long, and 55 ms. wide in its 
widest part, and about 480 ms. in circumference. Area estimated at 5400 
sq. ms. The boundary between the U. S. and Canada passes through the 
middle of the lake. The surface is about 334 ft. below that of Lake Erie, 
and 231 ft. above the tide-water in the St. Lawrence and Hudson. The 
greatest depth is upwards of 600 ft., so that its bottom is considerably below 
the level of the Atlantic. Lake Ontario is nearly 1000 ms. distant from 
the Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. Where is Lake Chapala ? 

A. It is in the S. part of Mexico, and flows by the River Grande 
into the Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 

This lake is 90 ms. in length and 30 in breadth, and its E. end is about 
200 ms. N.W. of the city of Mexico. 

Q. Where is Lake Nicaragua ? 

A. It is in the S. part of Guatimala, or Central America, and 
flows by the R. St. Juan into the Caribbean Sea. (M. A.) 

This is the most considerable lake of Central America, comprised within 
the State of Nicaragua, and extending principally between the 11th and 
12th degs. of N. lat., and the 84th and 86th of W. long., about 12 ms. in a 
direct line from the Pacific, and 90 ms. from the Caribbean Sea. It is of an 
oval shape : length, N.W. to S. E., about 120 ms. ; average breadth, per- 
haps, about 40 ms. It has numerous creeks and harbours, and several 
islands. The surface of the lake is about 134 ft. and its bottom 42^ ft. 
(Eng.) above the level of the Pacific. At its W. extremity, the Lake cf 
Nicaragua is connected by a small r. with the Lake of Leon. The latter is 
40 ms. in length by 20 in breadth, and is but 13 ms. from the Pacific, and 
5 from the R. Tosta, which enters that ocean. 

Q. What are the lengths of the first four and of the last Lake ? 

Jl. According to Mitchell's Atlas, — Great Bear Lake is 160 ms. 
long ; Great Slave, 300 ; Athabasca, 200 ; Winnipeg, 300 ; Ni- 
caragua, 120. 

Q. What is a Lake? 

Jl. It is a collection of water, surrounded by land, as Lake 
Superior, Lake Winnipeg, or the Lake of Geneva, in Switzer- 
land. (M. G., p. 10.) 

PENINSULAS. 

Q. Where is the Peninsula of Alaska ? 

Jl. It is in the S. part of Russian America, and is surrounded 
by the Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Melville Peninsula? 
A. It is in the N. part of British America, N. of Hudson's 



NORTH AMERICA. 79 

Bay ; having Fox Channel on the S. E., Fury and Hecla Strait 
on the N., and the Gulf of Boothia on the W. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Peninsula of Greenland ? 

A. It is in the N. E. part of N. America, having S. and E. the 
Atlantic Ocean, and W. Baffin's Bay and Davis' Strait. (M. A.) 

Various concurrent accounts render it probable that Greenland is not, as 
was formerly supposed, a peninsula of the new continent, but an insular group, 
consisting of two or three large islands, surrounded by several other smaller 
ones. That portion which is best known is situated between Iceland and the 
American continent. The most southern point is Cape Farewell, in lat. 59° 
49' N., long. 43° 54' W. A large portion of the eastern, as well as the 
whole northern coast, is still unexplored. The whole country may be re- 
garded as one enormous mass of rocks ; in many places it rises close to the 
water's edge into precipitous and lofty mountains, crowned with inaccessible 
cliffs. The climate is extremely cold, but very healthy. Pop. variously 
estimated at from 6000 to 20,000, all Esquimaux, except about 150 Euro- 
peans. Greenland belongs to Denmark. 

Q. Where is the Peninsula of Nova Scotia ? 

A. It is in the S. part of British America, having the Bay of 
Fundy and the Gulf of St. Lawrence on the N., and the Atlantic 
Ocean on the S. (M. A.) 

Nova Scotia (or New Scotland) is one of the British colonies of N. 
America, consisting of an oblong-shaped peninsula, between 43° 20' N. lat., 
and 61° and 66° 20' W. long. ; connected with New Brunswick by a low 
sandy isthmus, only 9 ms. across, and separated from Cape Breton by the 
narrow strait called the Gut of Canso. Its length, from Cape Canso on the 
E. to Cape St. Mary on the W., is above 260 ms. ; its greatest breadth, 
measuring on a line at right angles with the preceding, is about 100 ms. 
Area estimated at 15,620 sq. ms., about l-5th part of which consists of lakes, 
rivers, and salt-water inlets. Pop. in 1838, 155,000, now about 180,000. 
The government of Nova Scotia comprehends, in addition to the above 
peninsula, the island of Cape Breton. 

Q. Where is the Peninsula of Florida ? 

A. It is in the S. part of the U. S., having the Atlantic on the 
E., and the Gulf of Mexico on the S. and W. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Florida, Lesson 109, Maps No. 
5 and 12, — Key, pages 161-2. 

Q. Where is the Peninsula of Yucatan ? 

A. It forms the most E. part of Mexico, having the Caribbean 
Sea and the Bay of Honduras on the E., and the Gulf of Mexico 
and the Bay of Campeche on the N. and W. (M. A.) 

This Peninsula is principally included in the Mexican state of Yucatan, 
between 16° and 21° 40' N. lat., and 86° 45' and 91° W. long. 

Q. Where is the Peninsula of California ? 

A. It extends along the W. coast of N. America, having the 
Gulf of California on the E., and the Pacific Ocean on the S. and 
W. (M. A.) 



80 NORTH AMERICA. 

This Peninsula is called Lower California. Upper California extend* 
from the extremity of the Gulf to the 42d parallel of N. lat. 

Q. Where is the Peninsula of Boothia Felix ? 

A. It is in the N. part of British America, having Prince Re- 
gent's Inlet on the E., the Gulf of Boothia on the S. E. and S., 
and the Polar Sea on the W. (M. A.) 

From the exploration of Messrs. Simpson and Dease, of the Hudson's 
Bay Company, it seems highly probable that Boothia Felix is an island, and 
not a peninsula. During the summer of 1839, these gentlemen traversed 
the unexplored coast of the Arctic Ocean, extending from Cape Turnagain, 
the eastern cape of Bathurst Inlet, and the easternmost point reached by 
Captain Franklin in 1821, to the Gulf of Boothia, an extent of about 400 
miles. This exploration, with those previously made by Franklin, Beechey, 
and Ross, added to the earlier efforts of Hearne, Cook, and Mackenzie, has 
served to make known the continental shores of North America lying on the 
Arctic Ocean, stretching from Bhering's Straits to the Gulf of Boothia, a 
distance of 2500 miles. All these coasts are rugged and irregular, and are 
broken into innumerable bays and inlets. The climate is of the most rigorous 
character; the seas are thickly coated with ice, except during the three or 
four months of the short summer, during which time also the waters are filled 
with icy fragments, tossed about. The musk-ox, the wolf, and the fox, are 
the only animals which endure the rigour of winter in these regions ; the 
deer take their flight into milder climates. The shores, however, are often 
crowded with the walrus and the seal. A few scattered families of Esqui- 
maux wander along the shores and islands, constantly employed in providing 
for their wants, and defending themselves against the rigour of the climate, 
in which they display no small degree of industry, and even ingenuity. 

Q. What is a Peninsula ? 

A. It is a portion of land nearly surrounded by water. Africa 
and South America are Peninsulas. (M. G. p. 14.) 

CAPES. 

Q. Where is Cape Prince of Wales ? 

A. It is the W. extremity of America, on the E. side of Bhe- 
ring's Strait, opposite East Cape, on the shore of Asia. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Bathurst •? 

A. It is on the N. coast of British America. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Brewster ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Greenland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Farewell? 

A. It is the S. extremity of Greenland, at the entrance of Davis' 
Strait. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape St. Lewis ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Labrador, in British America. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Race ? 

A. It is the E. extremity of Newfoundland, and of N. Ame- 
rica. (M. A.) 



NORTH AMERICA. . 81 

Q. Where is Cape Sable ? 

A. It is the S. extremity of Nova Scotia. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Cape Cod ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of the U. S., being a Peninsula of 
Mass., on the S. side of Mass. Bay. (M. A.) 

This Cape lies S. and E. of a bay of the same name. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Cape Hatteras 1 
A. It is on the E. coast of the U. S. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Cape Sable ? 
A. It is on the W. coast of Fa. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Cape St. Antonio ? 
A. It is the W. extremity of Cuba. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Cape Gracias a Dios ?* 
A. It is the most E. point of Guatimala. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Cape Mendocino ? 
A. It is on the coast of Upper California. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Moro Hermoso ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Lower, or Old California. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Cape St. Lucas? 

A. It is the most S. point of Lower, or Old California. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Cape Gorda ? 

A. It is the most S. point of N. America. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Point De Witt Clinton ? 
A. It is on the N. coast of British America. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Point Beechy ? 

A. It is on the N. coast of Russian America. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Point Barrow ? 

A. It is the N. extremity of Russian America. (M. A.) 
Capes are frequently called Points. (M. G., p. 86.) 
Q. What is a Cape or Point ? 

A. It is a point of land extending into the sea, as the Cape of 
Good Hope, Cape Horn, &c. (M. G., p. 14.) 

ISLANDS. 

Q. Where is Nunnivack Island ? 

A. It is in the Pacific Ocean, off the W. coast of Russian 
America. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Kodiak Island ? 

A. It. is in the Pacific Ocean, off the S. coast of Russian Ame- 
rica, and E. of the Peninsula of Alaska. (M. A.) 

Q. W'here is Sitcha Island ? 

A. It is in the Archipelago of George III., which lies W. of 
the S. E. part of Russian America. (M. A.) 

* That is, « Grace of God." 



82 NORTH AMERICA. 

Q. Where is Washington. or Queen Charlotte's Island? 

A. It is in the Pacific Ocean, off the W. coast of British Ame- 
rica. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Quadra and Vancouver's Island ? 

A. It is in the Pacific Ocean, on the W. coast of British Ame- 
rica, separated from the mainland by the Gulf of Georgia, and 
from the U. S. by the Strait of Juan de Fuca. (M. A.) 
This island is 300 ms. in length, and 80 in its greatest breadth. 

Q. Where are the North Georgian Islands ? 

A. They are in the Arctic Ocean, lying to the N. of British 
America. (M. A.) 

Melville Island, the most westerly of these, upwards of 100 ms. both in 
length and breadth, and in lat. 75° N., is memorable as containing the spot 
where Captain Parry spent two years, and braved with success the extremest 
rigour of an arctic winter. The sun disappeared on the 4th of November, 
and was not seen till the 3d of February following. 

A succession of islands extends eastward from the one now described ; 
first the small one of Byam Martin, then that of Bathurst, almost equal to 
Melville; and nextCornwallis, also of considerable size. Only the southern 
coasts were seen by Captain Parry, (their discoverer,) as he sailed along ; 
and their aspect appears closely to resemble Melville Island. Cornwallis is 
separated by Wellington Channel from an extensive coast, which received 
the name of North Devon, and reaches to the shores of Baffin's Bay ; hut 
whether it forms a continuous tract with Greenland, or is composed of one 
or more islands, remains yet to be discovered. 

Q. Where is Southampton Island ? 

A. It is in the N. part of Hudson's Bay. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Disco Island ? 

A. It is in Disco Bay, on the W. coast of Greenland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Island of Newfoundland? 

A. It is situated in the Atlantic Ocean, S. E. of Labrador, from 
which it is separated by the narrow Strait of Belleisle. 

This is a large island of British America, between lat. 46° 40' and 51° 
37' N., and long. 52° 25' and 59° 15' W. Its form approaches that of a 
triangle. Length of a curved line passing through its centre, 420 ms. ; 
greatest breadth, near 300 ms. Area estimated at 56,000 sq. ms. Pop. fluc- 
tuating, in consequence of many persons, who visit the island in the fishing 
season, leaving it during winter: according to the census of 1836, it amounted 
to 73,705, but is now estimated at 82,000. 

Q. Where is Anticosti Island ? 

A. It is in the mouth of the St. Lawrence R. ; N. of Prince 
Edward's Island, and W. of Newfoundland. (M. A.) 

This Island is about 130 ms. long, and 30 broad. It is uncultivated and 
uninhabited, with the exception of two families, who have been established 
here for the purpose of assisting persons cast away on the coast. 

Q. Where is Prince Edward's Island ? 

A. It is in the S. W. part of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, lying 



NORTH AMERICA. 83 

N. of the Peninsula of Nova Scotia, S. of Anticosti Island, W. 
of Cape Breton Island, and E. of New Brunswick. (M. A.) 

This Island belongs to Great Britain, and lies between 45° 56' and 47° 5' 
N. lat., and 62° and 64° 25' W. long. Length from east to west about 100 
ms., and of a curved line passing through its centre, 140 ms.; greatest breadth, 
37 ms. Pop. about 35,000. 

Q. Where is Cape Breton Island ? 

A. It is in the S. extremity of the Gulf of St. Lawrence ; lying 
E. of Prince Edward's Island, and between the N. end of Nova 
Scotia, from which it is separated by the Gut of Canso, and the 
S. W. point of Newfoundland, from which it is separated by the 
principal entrance into the Gulf of St. Lawrence. (M. A.) 

This island lies between 45° 27' and 47° 4' N. lat. and 59° 45' and 
61° 38' W. long. Its length is about 110 ms., its greatest breadth, 85 ms. 
The area is probably about 4000 sq. ms. Pop. in 1827, 18,700; now, 
20,000. It extends in a N. by E. direction, forming a barrier between the 
Atlantic Ocean and the Gulf, which it completely landlocks, and forms into a 
large inland sea. It belongs to Great Britain. 

Q. Where are the Bermudas Islands ? 

A. They are in the Atlantic Ocean, lying E. of the U. S. (M. A.) 

The Bermudas or Somers' Islands, are a group in the Atlantic Ocean, 
belonging to Great Britain, said to be above 350 in number ; in about lat. 
32° 20' N., and long. 04° 50' W. ; 645 ms. N. E. of Atwood's Keys, the 
nearest of the W. India Islands, and 580 ms. from Cape Hatteras, in N. C, 
and 900 ms. E. of Savannah. The principal islands are St. George's, St. 
David's, Long Island (or Bermuda), Somerset, and Ireland. The Bermudas 
are estimated to contain about 20 sq. ms. or from 12,000 to 13,000 acres. 
White pop. in 1837, 4033 ; coloured and free blacks, 4422, the whole now 
estimated at 9000. The climate of the Bermudas is that of perpetual spring. 
The name is derived from the supposed discoverer, Bermudez, a Spaniard, 
who is said to have touched here in 1522. 

Q. Where are the Bahama Islands? 

A. The Bahamas, or Lueayos, are a chain of low islands in 
the Atlantic Ocean, extending in a S. E. and N. W. direction, 
between the N. side of Hayti in the W. Indies, and the coast of 
E. Fa., in the U. S. and are the most N. group of the W. Indies. 
(M. A.) 

The Bahamas consist of several hundred islands, of various magnitudes, 
extending nearly 600 ms. from Turk's Island, in 21° 23', to the Mautanilla 
reef, in 27° 50' N. lat., and from 71° 5' to 79° 5' W. long. Some of the 
largest islands, as the Great Bahama, and Lucayo (now called Abaco), with 
many smaller ones, remain without inhabitants. They belong to Great 
Britain. Guanahani, St. Salvador, or Cat, one of these islands, was the first 
land discovered by Columbus, on the 1 2th of Oct., 1492. Like the neigh- 
bouring islands, it was densely peopled by Indians, who were harmless and 
inoffensive. The total number of sq. ms. in the Bahamas, including all the 
islands from New Providence to Key Sal and Anguilla, is, according to Porter's 



84 NORTH AMERICA. 

Tables, 5424. The pop. in 1832, was 4674 whites, 4069 colored and free 
blacks, and 9765 slaves. In 1837 the total pop. was 19,943 ; it is now about 
22,000. 

Q. Where are the West Indies ? 

A, They are situated in the wide interval of sea between N. 
and S. America, extending in a curve from the shore of Fa., on 
the N. peninsula of America, to the shores of Venezuela on the 
southern. On the E. and N. they are bounded by the Atlantic ; 
on the S. the Caribbean Sea separates them from the coast of 
Colombia ; on the W. the broad expanse of the Gulf of Mexico 
is interposed between them and that part of the continent. (M. A.) 

West Indies is the name given to the Archipelago which separates the 
Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea from the Atlantic, situated between 
10° and 27° N. lat. and 59° 30' and 85° W. long. The W. Indian 
Archipelago is divided into three principal groups, the Bahamas, the Great 
Antilles, and the Little Antilles. The individual islands, with the excep- 
tion of Hayti (which is independent), are owned by different European 
powers. The Spanish possessions are the largest, comprehending more than 
half the area of the archipelago. They are Cuba, Porto Rico, with the little 
island of Culebra, and the Isle of Pines. The French possess Guadaloupe, 
Martinique, and Mariegalante, with a few adjacent islets, and part of St. 
Martin's ; to the Danes belong St. John, St. Thomas, and Santa Cruz ; to 
the Dutch, the three little islands of St. Eustatia, Saba, and St. Martin's ;* 
to the Swedes, the small island of St. Bartholomew. The English possess 
the Bahamas, Jamaica, Anguilla, Barbuda, Antigua, St. Christopher, Nevis, 
Montserrat, Dominica, St. Lucia, Barbadoes, St. Vincent, Grenada, Tcbago, 
and Trinidad, besides some smaller islands. 

Q. Where is the Island of Cuba 1 

Ji. It is in the West Indies, lying S. of the U. S., E. of Mexico, 
and N. of Jamaica, being the largest of the Great Antilles. (M. A.) 

Cuba is an island belonging to Spain, being the largest, most flourishing 
and important of the W. Indian Isles. Its figure is long and narrow, approach- 
ing to that of a crescent, with its convex side looking towards the Arctic 
Pole ; its W. portion, lying between Fa. and the peninsula of Yucatan, leaves 
two entrances into the Gulf of Mexico. It is situated between 19° 47' and 
23° 9' N. Iat., and 74° and 85° W. long. Length, following the curve of 
the island, about 760 ms. ; its breadth, which is very irregular, varies from 
130 to 25 ms. The area is computed at 42,212 sq. ms. Pop. in 1831, 
830,000; estimated in 1846 at 1,128,000. Cuba was discovered by Colum- 
bus, on his first voyage, in 1492 ; in 1511 the Spauiards made their first 
settlement, since which time it has remained in their possession. Havana 
is the chief town, and seat of government. 

Q. Where is the Island of Hayti ? 

A. It is in the W. Indies, and next to Cuba, the largest of the 
Great Antilles ; having N. the Atlantic Ocean, E. the Mona 
passage, separating it from Porto Rico; S. the Caribbean Sea, 

* St. Martin's belongs jointly to the Dutch and French. 



NORTH AMERICA. 85 

and W. the Windward passage, which lies between it and Cuba 
and Jamaica. (M. A.) 

Hatti, or Haiti, called also St. Domingo and Hispaniola, next to Cuba 
the largest of the W. India Islands, is situated between 17° 41' and 19° 59' 
N. lat., and 68° 25' and 74° 34' W. long. Its shape is somewhat triangu- 
lar, the apex directed eastward ; but it has several considerable peninsulas 
and promontories, which render its outline very irregular. Its extreme 
length, from E. to W., is about 400 ms. ; its breadth varies from 40 ms., 
near its E. extremity, to 155 ms. about its centre. The area is computed at 
about 25,000 sq. ms. The pop., in 1826, was, according to Balbi, 800,000, 
but some others estimate it considerably higher. This island was discovered 
by Columbus, in his first voyage, and from him received the name of His- 
paiiola, that is, « Little Spain." It was called, afterwards, St. Domingo, 
from the town of this name, which was one of the first settlements made on 
the island. The name of Haiti was given to it by Dessalines, the first Hay- 
tien emperor, after he had expelled the French, in 1803. It is said to be 
the original Indian name of the island, and to signify « mountainous." 
Hayti forms a Republic, with a President, chosen for life, and assisted by a 
legislature, consisting of two houses, a senate and a house of representatives. 
On the expulsion of the late president, Boyer, the eastern, or Spanish portion 
of the island, separated itself from the former government, and now consti- 
tutes the Independent Republic of St. Domingo. Port au Prince is the 
capital of the old, and St. Domingo of the new Republic. 

Q. Where is the Island of Jamaica ? 

A. It is in the West Indies, and the third in point of size of the 
Great Antilles; lying S. of Cuba, W. of Hayti, and N. E. of 
Guatimala. (M.*A.) 

Jamaica (Nat. Xaymdcd) is the largest of the British W. India Islands. 
It lies in the Caribbean Sea, between lat. 17° 44' and 18° 30' N., and long. 
76° 12' and 78° 25' W. ; about 100 ms. S. of Cuba, and 120 ms. W. of 
Hayti, from which it is separated by the Windward Channel. Shape nearly 
oval ; greatest length, E. to W., 150 ms. ; average breadth, nearly 40 ms. 
Area estimated at 6250 sq. ms. As no complete census has ever been 
taken, the pop. is not accurately known ; it is, however, estimated at 375,000. 
In 1834, there were 297,186 negro slaves, all of whom were set free on the 
1st of August, 1838. Spanish Town is the capital. 

Q. Where is the Island of Porto Rico ? 

A. It is in the W. Indies, being the smallest and most easterly 
of the Great Antilles ; having N. the Atlantic Ocean, and S. the 
Caribbean Sea, separated on the E. from the Virgin Islands by 
the Virgin Passage, and from Hayti on the W. by Mona Passage, 
80 ms. across. (M. A.) 

Porto Rico (Span. Puerto Rico, i. e. "rich port,") is one of the W. 
India islands, belonging to Spain, and deriving its name from its chief town, 
St. Johns, or San Juan de Porto Rico, situated between 17° 50' and 18° 
32' N. lat., and 65° 43' and 67° 20' W. long. Its form is almost a paral- 
lelogram, the N. and S. coast-lines running nearly due E. and W. Length, 
E. to W., 100 ms. ; greatest breadth about 40 ms. Area, 3700 sq.ms. Un- 
der the old colonial system of Spain, in 1788, the pop. did not exceed 
8 



OD NORTH AMERICA. 

80,650; whereas'it amounted, in 1836, according to the official returns, to 
357,086, of whom only 41,818 were slaves. It has doubtless increased in 
pop. since that time, but we have no information in regard to the amount. 

Q. Where are the Caribbee Islands ? 

A. They are a series of small islands, being the most eastern 
group of the W. Indies, situated in the Caribbean Sea, and ex- 
tending from Porto Rico to Trinidad, which is included. (M. A.) 

Caribbee Islands is the name of that portion of the W. Indies that 
includes the vast chain of islands which extends, in a circular sweep, from 
Porto Rico on the N. to Trinidad on the S. They comprise the Windward 
and Leeward Islands. The principal islands, reckoning from the N., are 
Santa Cruz, St. Christopher's * Antigua, Guadeloupe, Dominica, Martinico 
or Martinique, St. Lucia, Barbadoes, St. Vincent, Grenada, Tobago, and Trini- 
dad. The name is derived from the Caribs, or Caribbees, a tribe of S. Ame- 
rican aborigines, who, when Columbus discovered America, were in posses- 
sion of the smaller W. India Islands ; from which, however, they have been 
nearly extirpated by the Europeans. 

The Caribbee Islands are divided into the Leeward and Windward groups ; 
the first consists of the islands that lie between Porto Rico and Martinico, 
the latter included. The Windward Islands comprise the remainder of the 
Caribbees. The most northern of the Leeward Islands, viz. Anegada, Virgin 
Gorda, Tortola, St. Thomas', St. John's, Culebra, and Bicque, are called the 
Virgin Islands. 

Q. Where are the Islands of Curacoa, Margarita, Buen Ayre, 
Oruba, Tortuga, and Orchilla ? 

A. They are situated in the Caribbean Sea ; lying off the 
N. coast of S. America, being the islands that form the Little 
Antilles. (M. A.) 

Clhacoa is situated in the Caribbean Sea, in about lat. 12° 6' N., and 
long. 69° W. Its length is 35 ms. ; its greatest breadth 6 ms. It was ori- 
ginally settled by the Spaniards, but at present it belongs to Holland. 

Margabtta is in the Caribbean Sea, off the N. coast of S. America, 
and belongs to Venezuela. Lat. about 11° N., long. 64° W. Length about 
45 ms. ; greatest breadth above 20 ms. 

Q. What are Islands 1 

A. They are portions of land, entirely surrounded by water, as 
the British Islands, or Newfoundland. (M. G. p. 14.) 



NORTH AMERICA. 

Page 87. — Lesson 63. —Map No. 4. 

MOUNTAINS. 

Q. Where are the Rocky Mts., and what is their length?. 
A. The Rocky Mts., called also Chippewyan Mts., is a chain 
in the W. part of N. America, which commences in the N. part 

* Called by sailors, familiarly, St. Kitt's. 



NORTH AMERICA. 87 

of Mexico, and runs, nearly N. N. W., through the whole extent 
of the continent ; or, in other words, they extend through Russian 
America, British America, and the U. States, and are 4000 ms. 
in length. (M. A.) 

This chain, though forming a part of the vast mountain system, which 
extends through the whole length of America, is not, as was formerly sup- 
posed, continuous with the Cordilleras of Mexico. With a large part of the 
Rocky Mountains we are but very imperfectly acquainted. Mount Brown 
and Mount Hooker, situated near 53° N. lat., and between 115° and 117° 
W. long., are the highest of this chain that have yet been measured, the for- 
mer having an elevation of near 16,000 ft., the latter of 15,700 ft. Between 
42° and 42° 40' N. lat., and near 110° W. long., there is a break in this 
mountain chain, called the South Pass, or Fremont's Pass, through which 
there is an easy road, the ascent and descent being so gradual that it is 
scarcely perceptible. 

Q. Where is the Sierra Nevada or Snowy Range ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Upper or New California. (M. A.) 

This range of mountains was first explored by Captain, now Colonel 
Fremont, U. S. A. During the winter of 1843-4, he travelled along its base 
for a distance of 1000 miles : he estimates its loftiest peaks at 15,500 feet in 
height. It is constantly covered with snow, hence its name. 

Q. Where are the Alleghany Mts. ? and what is their length ? 

A. They are in the E. part of the U. S., extending from the 
Catskill Mts. in N. Y., in a S. W. direction to Ga. and Ala., 
where they sink to elevated hills ; they separate Tenn. and N. C, 
and are 900 miles long. 

They run in separate and somewhat parallel ridges, with a breadth of 
from 50 to 200 ms., and at a distance from the Atlantic of from 50 to 130 
ms., and terminate in the Catskill Mts. E. of the Hudson R., though some 
choose to extend them much farther to the N. E., reaching to the White 
Mts. in N. H., and even farther. But N. E. of the Catskill the range is not 
continuous and well defined. They are also sometimes called the Appala- 
chian Mts. They consist of a number of ridges, denominated the Blue 
Ridge, North Mountain, Jackson's Mountain, Laurel Mountain, Cumber- 
land Mountain, &c. This great chain divides the waters which flow into 
the Atlantic on the E., from those which flow into the Mississippi and the 
Lakes to the N. and W. 

Q. Where are the Arctic Highlands ? 

A. They are in the N. part of Greenland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Mexican Cordilleras ? 

A. They extend through the central part of Mexico. (M. A.) 

This is the name given to the Mexican portion of the great mountain chain 
which traverses the American continent from N. to S. The highest sum- 
mits are Popocatepetl and the peak of Orizaba. 

Q. Where is Mount St. Elias ? 

A. It is in the S. E. part of Russian America. (M. A.) 



£8 NORTH AMERICA. 

Q. Where is Mount Brown ? 

A. It is the highest Peak in the Rocky Mts. that has yet been 
measured, in the W. part of British America. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Mount Hooker ? 

A. It is in the W. part of British America, S. of Mount Brown, 
being, next to it, the highest peak of the Rocky Mts. that has yet 
been measured. (M. A.) 

Q. Tell the heights of the last three Mts. 

A. Mount St. Elias is 17,900ft. ; Mount Brown, 16,000; Mt. 
Hooker, 15,700. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Fremont's Peak ? 

A. It is on the boundary between Missouri, and Oregon terri- 
tories. (M. A.) 

This mountain, which is elevated 13,570 feet above the Gulf of Mexico, 
is named after Captain, now Colonel. Fremont, U. S. A., who ascended to its 
summit, August 15th, 1842, and determined its height and character. 

Q. Where is Long's Peak ? 

A. It is in the W. part of the U. States. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Pike's Peak? 

A. It is in the W. part of the U. States, S. E. of Long's. 

Q. Where are the Spanish Peaks ? 

A. They are in the N. W. part of Texas. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Volcano of Popocatpetl ? 

A. It is in the S. part of Mexico. (M. A.) 

This is the most elevated mountain summit in N. America, among those 
which have been measured with any accuracy. Height 17,723 ft. Lat.- 
about 19° N., long. 98° 33' W. 

Q. Where is the Water Volcano ? 
A. It is in the N. W. part of Guatimala. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is the Volcano of Consiguina 1 
A. It is in the S. part of Guatimala. (M. A.) 
Q. What is a Volcano ? 

A. It is a burning mountain, with an opening at the top, called 
a crater. (M. G. p. 15.) 

RIVERS. 

Q. Where is Mackenzie's River ? 

A. It is in British America. It originates in the Great Slave 
Lake, and, flowing north-westerly, empties itself into the Polar 
Sea, in about 69° N. lat., and 135° W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Great Fish River ? 

A. It is in British America, rises N. E. of Great Slave Lake, 
flows first E., then N. E., and empties into the Gulf of Boothia. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is Churchill River ? 

A. It is in British America, rises S. of Athabasca Lake, flows 
in a general course N. E., and empties into Hudson's Bay. (M. A. ) 



NORTH AMERICA. 89 

Q. Where is Nelson River ? 

A. It is in British America ; it forms the outlet of Lake Win- 
nipeg, flows N. E., and empties into Hudson's Bay. (M. A.) 

Nelson R. may be regarded as the lower portion of the Saskatchawan, 
which rises in the Rocky Mts. and flows into Lake Winnipeg. 

Q. Where is the St. Lawrence River ? 

A. It issues from Lake Ontario, in about 44° 10' N. lat., and 
78° 30' W. long., and flowing north-easterly, falls into the Gulf 
of St. Lawrence, in about 49° 30' N. lat., and 64° W. long. (M. A.) 

During a part of its course it forms the boundary line between the British 
N. American territories and those of the U. S. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, pages 114, 115. 

Q. Where is Frazer's River ? 

A. It is in British America, rises in the Rocky Mts., flows 
first N. W., then S. and W., and empties into Howe's Sound, a 
tributary of the Gulf of Georgia, in 49° 7' N. lat. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Columbia River ? 

A. It is chiefly in Oregon territory ; its N. branch rises in the 
Rocky Mts., in 50° N. lat., and 116° W. long., and thence pursues 
a northern route to near McGillivray's pass in the Rocky Mts. It 
then turns S. and proceeds to Fort Colville. To the S. of this it 
tends to the W. Thence it pursues a westerly course for 60 ms. 
It thence passes to the southward until it reaches Wallawalla, in 
45° N. lat. It now takes its last turn to the westward, and 
empties into the Pacific Ocean between Cape Disappointment 
and Point Adams. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Sacramento River ? (Rio Sacramento.) 

A. It is in the N. W. part of Upper or New California ; rises 
in Winter Range, in the S. part of Oregon, and flows first S. W., 
and afterwards E. of S., and empties itself into S. Francisco Bay. 

Q. Where is Colorado River ? 

A. It is in Upper or New California ; rises in the Mexican 
Cordilleras, flows S. S. W., and empties into the Gulf of Cali- 
fornia. (M. A.) 

It is called Rio Colorado, or Red River, because, owing to the fall of rains 
upon the red clayey soil of which its banks consist, its waters assume that 
colour. 

Q. Where is the Rio Grande del Norte ? 

A. Through the whole of its course, it forms the boundary 
between the U. S. and Mexico ; rises in the Mexican Cordilleras, 
and, flowing in a general south-easterly direction, falls into the 
Gulf of Mexico, near 28° N. lat. and 97° 20' W, long. (M. A.) 

This river is also called the Rio Bravo, or Rio Bravo Del Norte, that is, 
the « rapid river of the North," but is now best known as the Rio Grande. 

8* 



90 NORTH AMERICA. 

Q. Where is the Brazos River ? 

A. It is in Texas, rises in about lat. 33° N., flows in a general 
course nearly S. E., and empties into the Gulf of Mexico, in 
about 28° 50' N. lat., and 95° 20' W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Mississippi River ? 

A. It extends through the middle of the U. S., and forms, with 
the Missouri, its principal affluent, the longest river in the world. 
It rises from two small lakes, in about 47° 10' N. lat., and 95° 
54' W. long., and, after pursuing a S. E. course of about 600 ms., 
reaches the falls of St. Anthony, where it descends perpendicu- 
larly 16 ft., and where are 58 ft. of rapids. Thence it flows a 
south-easterly, and then southerly direction; and, after forming 
the boundary between Mo., Ark., and La., on the.W., and 111., 
Ky., Tenn., and Miss., on the E., discharges its waters, through 
many mouths,* into the Gulf of Mexico. (M. A.) 

This is the largest river in the U. S., and it is undoubtedly also one of 
the noblest in the world; whether we consider its great length, its vast 
tributaries, the extent of country which it drains, and the distance to which 
it is navigable, it well deserves the title, which the Indians give it, of the 
" father of waters." The import in the Algonquin Indian language, which 
prevails in its upper parts, of Missi Sepe, the name by which it is desig- 
nated, is Great River. It drains a country of over 1,000,000 sq. ms. in 
extent, eminently fertile, sending through it to its destined market a vast 
amount of produce, and receiving in return the productions of other parts 
of the world. Its reputed source was discovered by Schoolcraft, July 13th, 
1832, to be Itasca Lake, in 47° 10' N. lat., and 95° 54' W. long., at an 
elevation of 1500 ft. above the ocean, and 2800 ms.f from its entrance into 
the Gulf of Mexico. J. N. Nicollet, in his map and report of the Basin of 
the Upper Mississippi river, published by order of the U. S. Senate, 1843, 
lays down the actual source in a small lake about 5 ms. S. S.W. of lake 
Itasca. About half-way from its source, it receives the Missouri, a river 
much longer than itself, and which ought clearly to be considered as the 
main stream ; for our capricious nomenclature cannot alter the relations of 
nature. But the Mississippi, having been first discovered and explored, has 
retained its name to the Gulf of Mexico. This error being now past remedy, 
the Missouri must be considered as a tributary of the Mississippi. 

Q. Give the lengths of all these rivers, and the parts of the 
Ocean into which they flow. 

A. Mackenzie's R. is 2500 ms. long, and flows into the S. part 
of the Polar Sea : — Great Fish R. is 600, and flows into tiie W. 
part of the Gulf of Boothia : — Churchill R. is 900, and flows into 
the W. part of Hudson's Bay: — Nelson R. is 1600, and flows 

* The principal of which are called the Balize, or North-east Pass, in 29° 
7' N. lat., and 89° 10' W. long., and the South-west Pass, in 29° N. lat., 
and 89° 25' W. long. 

\ Or, if we measure from the head of the Missouri, which may be regarded 
as its true source, it will amount to 4100 ms. 



NORTH AMERICA. 91 

into the S.W. part of Hudson's Bay : — St. Lawrence R. is 2200 
(including the lakes), and flows into the N. W. part of the Gulf of 
St. Lawrence : — Frazer's R. is 750, and flows into the E. part of 
the Gulf of Georgia : — Columbia R. is 1200, and flows into the 
North Pacific Ocean : — Rio Sacramento R. is 400, and flows into 
the N. E. part of S. Francisco Bay : — Colorado R. is 1100, and 
flows into the N. part of the Gulf of California : — Rio Grande is 
1800, and flows into the W. part of the Gulf of Mexico : — Brazos 
R. is 650, and flows into the N. W. part of the Gulf of Mexico : — 
Mississippi R., including the Missouri, is 4100, and flows into the 
N. part of the Gulf of Mexico. (M. A.) 

Q. What is a River ? 

A. It is a stream of fresh water, running from springs or from 
lakes, into the ocean, as the Mississippi, the Amazon, &c. (M. 

a, P . ii.) 

Q. What stream do you observe extending along the east coast 
of the U. States from Florida to the Grand Bank of Newfoundland ? 
A. Gulf Stream. (M. A.) 

DISTANCES. 

Q. How many miles is it from Labrador to Russia ? 

A. 3400. (M. A.) 

Q. From Labrador to Denmark ? 

A. 2600. (M. A.) 

Q. From Quadra and Vancouver's island to Mongolia ? 

A. 4100. (M. A.) 

Q. From California to Corea ? 

A. 5200. (M. A.) 

Q. From California to Thibet? 

A. 9500. (M. A.) 

Q. From California to Hindostan ? 

A. 10,600. (M. A.) 

Q. From the U. States to Greece ? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. From the Bermudas to Madeira ? 

A. 2800. (M. A.) 

Q. From the U. States to Egypt ? 

A. 6600. (M. A.) 

Q. From Guatimala to Hindostan ? 

A. 12,200. (M.A.) 

POPULATION OF CITIES. 

Q. Which are the seven largest cities in North America? The 
population of these is 80,000 and upwards. 

A. Boston, New York, Philadelphia, Baltimore, New-Orleans, 
Havana, and Mexico. (M. A.) 



92 RUSSIAN AMERICA. 

There are ten cities that contain between 40,000 and 60,000 
inhabitants each. 

Q. "Which are they ? 

A. Montreal, Cincinnati, San Luis Potosi, Guadalaxara, Oaxaca, 
and Guanaxuato, Queretaro, La Puebla, New Guatimala, and 
Puerto Principe. (M. A.) 

There are seventeen cities that contain between 20,000 and 
38,000 inhabitants each. 

Q. Which are they ? 

A. Quebec, St. John's, N. B., Albany, Washington, Richmond, 
Pittsburg, Louisville, Charleston, Zacetecas, Durango, Valladolid, 
Leon, Cartago, St. Jago, Kingston, St. John's, P. R., and Mata- 
moras. (M. A.) 

Q. What is a city ? 

A. It is a large collection of houses and inhabitants. (M. G. 
p. 37.) 



RUSSIAN AMERICA. 

Page 88.— Lesson 64.— Map No. 4. 

Q. What Sea bounds Russian America on the north ? 

A. Polar. 

Q. What Ocean on the south ? 

A. Pacific. 

Q. What country on the east ? 

A. British America. 

Q. What is the most northern point ? 

A. Point Barrow. 

Q. The most western cape ? 

A. Prince of Wales. 

Q. What peninsula in the south ? 

A. Alaska. 

Q. What two mountains in the south-east ? 

A. Mount St. Elias, and Mount Fairweather. 

Q. On what island is New Archangel situated ? 

A. Sitcha. 

For a further description see Key, page 81. 



GREENLAND. 
Page 89. — Lesson 65. — Map No. 4. 

Q. What Bay bounds Greenland on the west ? 
A. Baffin's. 



BRITISH AMERICA. 93 

Q. What Ocean on the east ? 

A. Atlantic. 

Q. What is its southern Cape ? 

A. Farewell. 

Q. What missionary stations on the west coast ? 

A. Holsteinborg, Sukkertop, New Hernhut, Lichtenfels, Julian- 
shaab, and Lichtenau. 

Q. What land on the east coast ? 

A. Scoresby's. 

Q. Does the largest or smallest part of Greenland lie north of 
the Arctic circle ? 

A. Largest. 
• Q. What Zone then is it in ? 

A. North Frigid. 

For a further description see Key, page 32. 



BRITISH AMERICA. 
Page 90.— Lesson 66.— Map No. 4. 

Q. What bounds' British America on the north ? 
A. Polar Sea. 
Q. On the west 1 
A. Russian America. 
Q. On the south ? 
A. U. S. 
Q. On the east ? 
A. Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. What separates it from Greenland ? 
A. Baffin's Bay. 

Q. In what continent is British America ? 
A. Western. 

Q. What circle extends through the north part ? 
A. Arctic. 

Q. In what zone is that part of it which lies north of the Arctic 
Circle ? 

A. North Frigid. 

Q. In what zone is the southern part ? 

A. North Temperate. 

Q. In what latitude is British America ? 

A. North Latitude. 

Q. In what longitude from Greenwich ? 

A. West Longitude. 

For a further description see Key, page 68. 



94 NEW BRITAIN. 

NEW BRITAIN. 

Pages 91-2. — Lesson 67. — Map No. 4. 

Q. What territory on the east coast ? 
A. Labrador. 
Q. On the west ? 
A. New Caledonia. 
Q. East side of Hudson's Bay ? 
A. East Main. 
Q. West side ? 

.#. New North Wales, and New South Wales. 
Q. On the coast of Baffin's Bay ? 
A. Prince William's Land. 
Q. West of the Gulf of Boothia? 
A. Boothia Felix. 
Q. East of Bathurst Inlet ? 
A. Victoriana. 

Q. What large bay in New Britain ? 
A. Hudson's. 

Q. How long and wide is it ? 
A. 1200 ms. long, and 600 wide. (M. A.) 
Q. Between New Britain and Greenland ? 
A. Baffin's. 
Q. How wide is it ? 
A. 350 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Name the four largest lakes in New Britain. 
A. Great Bear, Great Slave, Athabasca, and Winnipeg. 
Q. The length of each. 

A. Great Bear, 160 ms. ; Great Slave, 300 ; Athabasca, 200 ; 
Winnipeg, 300. (M. A.) 

Q. What large river flows into the Polar Sea ? 

A. Mackenzie's. 

Q. Its length? 

A. 2500 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What two rivers flow into Lake Athabasca ? 

A. Peace, and Athabasca. 

Q. Their lengths ? 

A. Peace, 800 ; Athabasca, 600. (M. A.) 

Q. What river flows into Lake Winnipeg ? 

A. Saskatchawan. 

Q. Its length ? 

A. 1200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What river connects Lake Winnipeg with Hudson's Bay ? 

A. Nelson. 



CANADA WEST. ' 95 

Q. Which are the principal forts ? 

A. York, Reliance, Resolution, Churchill, Severn, Albany, and 
Moose. 

Fort York is the chief station of the Hudson's Bay Company, and the 
residence of the Governor. 

Q. The principal Indian tribes ? 

A. Copper Indians, Dog Rib, Chipewayans, Knistineaux, 
Black Feet, and Abbitibbes. 

Q. What mountains are in the west part of New Britain ? 

A. Rocky. 

Q. Their length ? 

A. 4000 ms. 

Q. Which are the two highest ? 

A. Mt. Brown, and Mt. Hooker. 

Q. The height of each ? 

A. Mt. Brown, 16,000 ft. ; Mt. Hooker, 15,700. (M. A.) 

Area of New Britain in sq. ms. 1,852,000.— Pop., 40,000. 



CANADA WEST. 
Page 93.— Lesson 68.— Map No. 5. 

Q. What lakes separate Canada West from the U. States ? 

A. Ontario, Erie, Huron, and Superior. 

Q. What river, in part, from New York ? 

A. St. Lawrence. 

Q. What river from Canada East ? 

A. Ottawa. 

Q. What is the eastern part of Lake Huron called ? 

A. Manitouline Lake, or Georgian Bay. 

Q. What isles in the north part? 

A. Manitouline. 

Q. What island in the western part of Lake Superior? 

A. Royale. 

Q. What is the length of Lakes Superior, Huron, Erie, and 
Ontario ? 

A. Superior, 430 ms. ; Huron, 280; Erie, 250; Ontario, 190. 
(M. A.) 

Q. On Map No. 14, tell who was defeated on the River Thames, 
in 1813. 

A. Proctor, (a British General). 

Q. Who was killed there ? 

A. Tecumseh. 

He was a celebrated Indian chief. 



96 CANADA EAST. 

Q. On Map No. 11, tell what battles were fought in 1814, near 
the Falls of Niagara. 

A. Fort Erie, and Chippewa. (M. A.) 



CANADA EAST. 
Page 95.— Lesson 69. — Map No, 5. 

Q. What country lies west of Canada East ? 

A. Canada West. 

Q. What two States lie south ? 

A. N. Y., and Vt. 

Q. What State lies east ? 

A. Me. 

Q. The principal river ? 

A. St. Lawrence. 

Q. Its length ? 

A. 2200 ms. {This includes the lakes.) (M. A.) 

Q. What Lake does the Saguenay flow from ? 

A. St. John's. 

Q. The length of the Saguenay ? 

^. 400 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. The Ottawa? 

A. 600 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What River unites Lakes Champlain and St. Peter's ? 

A. Sorelle. 

This river is known also by the names of the Chambly and Richelieu. 

Q. The population of Quebec ? 

A. 30,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Montreal ? 

A. 40,000. (M. A.) 

Q. What three Lakes are in Lower Canada (Canada East) ? 

A. St. John's, St. Peter's, and Temiscanning. 

Canada is a vast territory of N. America, belonging to Great Britain, 
lying principally in a N. E. and S. W. direction, along the N. side of 
the St. Lawrence, and the N. and E. sides of Lakes Ontario, Erie, Huron, 
and Superior, extending from 64° 15' to near 91° W. long., and from 41° 
45' to 52° N. lat. The other portion of Canada, or that on the S. side of 
the St. Lawrence, is of comparatively limited dimensions : it stretches along 
the river from near Montreal to point Gaspe, at its embouchure, having on 
the S. the territory of the U. S. and New Brunswick. On the N., Canada 
has Labrador and the inhospitable territories belonging to the Hudson's Bay 
Company, the boundary in this direction being the elevated ground, or 
water-shed, separating the rivers which run S. to the St. Lawrence and tho 
great lakes from those which run N. to Davis's Strait and Hudson's Bay.* 



* Or, it is bounded N. by the British possessions round Hudson's Bay 
and by Labrador, E. by the Gulf of St. Lawrence, S.. by New Brunswick 



NEW BRUNSWICK. 97 

Canada was formerly divided into Upper and Lower, or, as they might have 
been designated, English and French Canada, but the two provinces were 
united under one government in 1841, by act of the British parliament. At 
the same time the name of the Upper Province was changed to Canada West, 
and of the Lower to Canada East, without, however, any change of boundaries. 
The Ottowa or Grand R., which has its sources in about 48° 30' N. lat., and 
80' W. long., and flows in an E. S. E. direction till it unites with the St. Law- 
rence, near Montreal, forms, nearly in its whole extent, the line of demarcation 
between the two provinces ; Lower Canada (Canada East) comprises the 
whole territory lying N. E. of the Ottowa, on both sides of the St. Lawrence, 
to its mouth, in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Area estimated at 200,000 sq. ms. 
Pop. in 1830, 511,917, in 1846, 694,000. Upper Canada (Canada West) 
comprises all the territory lying S. and W. of the Ottawa R., and extends 
westward along the chain of the great lakes. Area vaguely estimated at 
145,000 sq. ms. Pop. in 1835, 336,461, in 1846, 515,000. Chief town, 
Toronto. Canada West is entirely an inland province ; but, from its having 
the great lakes and a part of the St. Lawrence for its boundary, it has a vast 
command of internal navigation, and by means of the Welland and Rideau 
Canals, a ready access to the ocean. More than three-fourths of the inhabit- 
ants of Canada East are of French descent, and French is the prevailing lan- 
guage. Quebec was formerly the capital of this province and of all the 
British possessions in N. America. The entire pop. of Canada is now, 1846, 
about 1,200,000. Montreal is now the seat of government 



NEW BRUNSWICK. 

Page 95. — Lesson 70. — Map No. 7. 

Q. Which is the chief River ? 

A. St. John's. 

Q. What Island lies near New Brunswick ? 

A. Prince Edward's. 

Q. What Gulf to the eastward ? 

A. St. Lawrence. 

Q. What two Bays north-east? 

A. Chaleurs and Miramichi. 

Q. What Bay on the south ? 

A. Fundy. 

Q. What Peninsula south-east? 

A. Nova Scotia. 

Q. What is the population of St. John's ? 

A. 25,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Frederickton ? 

A. 3000. (M. A.) 

and the U. States, and W. by the British territories, between which and 
Canada the limits do not appear to be accurately defined. 
9 



UO NOVA SCOTIA. 

Q. Of St. Andrew's ? 

A. 4000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Chatham ? 

A. 2000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of New Castle ? 

A. 2000. (M. A.) 

#. On what River is the city of St. John's ? 

A. St. John's. 

New Brunswick is a province of British America, lying on the W. side 
of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, between lat. 45° 5' and 48° 5' N., and long. 
63° 47' and 67° 53' W., bounded N. by Lower Canada, S. by Nova Scotia 
and the Bay of Fundy, and W. by the state of Me. Extreme length, from 
N. to S., 180 ms. : average breadth, 150 ms. : probable area, 28,000 sq. ms. 
Pop. in 1834, 119,557; estimated in 1846 at 130,000. 



NOVA SCOTIA. 

Page 96. — Lesson 71. — Map No. 7. 

Q. What Islands lie east and south-east of Nova Scotia ? 

A. Cape Breton, and Sable. 

Q. What Island north? 

A. Prince Edward's. 

Q. What separates Nova Scotia and Cape Breton ? 

A. Gut of Canso. 

Q. What Ocean on the south-east ? 

A. Atlantic. 

Q. What Bay on the north-west ? 

A. Fundy. 

Q. What is the population of Halifax ? 

A. 18,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Lunenburg ? 

A. 4000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Liverpool? 

A. 3000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Arechat? 

A. 2000. 

Q. Of Yarmouth? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. The southern Cape of Nova Scotia ? 

A. Sable. 

For a further description, see Key, page 79. 






NEWFOUNDLAND — UNITED STATES. 99 

NEWFOUNDLAND. 
Page 97.— Lesson 72.— Map No. 7. 

Q. What separates Prince Edward's Island from New Bruns- 
wick? 

A. Northumberland Strait. 

Q. What bounds Newfoundland on the east ? 

A. Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. On the west? 

A. Gulf of St. Lawrence ? 

Q. What Strait separates it from Labrador ? 

A. Bellisle. 

Q. What banks are near the Island ? 

A. Grand Bank, and Green Bank. 

Q. How long and wide is the Grand Bank ? 

A. It is 600 ms. long, and 200 wide. (M. A.) 

Q. Newfoundland? 

A. It is 420 ms. long, and from 45 to 300 wide. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of St. John's ? 

A. 11,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Harbour Grace ? 

A. 6000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Placentia? 

Q. 2000. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 82. 



UNITED STATES. 
Page 104. — Lesson 77. — Map No. 5. 

Q. How are the United States bounded ? 

A. They occupy the middle division of N. America, and are 
bounded N. by British America, E. by New Brunswick and the 
Atlantic Ocean, S. by the Gulf of Mexico, Mexico, and Upper or 
New California, and W. by the Pacific Ocean. 

Q. What is the capital of the United States ? 

A. Washington. 

For the extent, fyc., of the United States, see Key, pages 68- 9. 

The capitals of countries, the scholar will perceive by the ex- 
planation on the map, are made 03^ a large dot with eight small 
ones around it; and the capitals of states on maps No. 4 and 5, 
are made by a small ring or circle with a dot in the middle of it. 
(M. G.) 

Q. Which are the six Eastern States ? 

A. They are Me., N. H., Vt., Mass., R. I., and Conn. 



100 UNITED STATES. 

Q. Point out their capitals. 

A. Me., Augusta ; N. H., Concord ; Vt., Montpelier ; Mass., 
Boston ; R. I., Newport and Providence ; Conn., Hartford and 
New Haven. 

Q. Which are the four Middle States ? 

A. They are N. Y., N. J., Pa., and Del. 

Q. Point out their capitals. 

A. N. Y., Albany ; N. J., Trenton ; Pa., Harrisburg ; Del., 
Dover. 

Q. Which are the ten Southern States ? 

A, They are xMd., Va., N.C., S. C, Ga., Flor., Ala., Miss., 
La., and Texas. 

Q. Point out their capitals. 

A. Md., Annapolis ; Va., Richmond ; N. C, Raleigh ; S. C, 
"Columbia ; Ga., Milledgeville ; Flor., Tallahassee ; Ala., Tusca- 
loosa ; Miss., Jackson ; La., New Orleans ; Texas, Austin. 

Q. Which are the ten Western States ? 

A. They are, Ark., Tenn., Ky., Mo., 111., la., Oo., Mich., 
Wis., and Io. 

Q. Point out their capitals. 

A. Ark., Little Rock ; Tenn., Nashville ; Ky., Frankfort ; Mo., 
Jefferson City ; 111., Springfield ; la., Indianapolis ; Oo., Columbus ; 
Mich., Detroit ; Wis., Madison ; Iowa, Iowa City. 

Q. Which are the Territories of the U. States ? 

A. They are, Wis., Io., Indian, Mo., and Oregon. 

Q. How many States are there ? 

A. Thirty. 

Q. How many Territories? 

A. Five. 

Q. How many States and Territories are there altogether 1 

A. Thirty-five. 

Besides these, the District of Columbia contains the seat of 
government ; so that the whole of the divisions of the U. S. are 
thirty-six in number. (M. G. p. 104.) 

LAKES. 

Q. Where is Lake Superior ? 

A. It is between the U. S. and Canada West, and flows by 
St. Mary's Strait or River into Lake Huron. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 76. 

Q. Where is Lake Huron ? 

A. It lies on the boundary between the U. S. and Canada West, 
and between Lake Superior on the N.W., Lake Michigan on the 
N.W. and W., and Lakes Erie and Ontario on the S. and S. E., 
and flows by St. Clair River into Lake St. Clair, whence it is 
conducted by Detroit River into Lake Erie. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, pages 70-7, 



UNITED STATES. 101 

Q Where is Lake Michigan ? 

A. It is in the N. part of the U. S., and the N. E. extremity 
communicates with the N.W. end of Lake Huron, by the Strait 
of Michilimackinac, or Mackinaw, by which, and its N. part, it 
separates the two peninsulas of the state of Mich. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 77. 

Q. Where is Lake Erie ? 

A. It lies between the U. S. and Canada West; it has the 
Peninsula of Canada West on the N., and the States of Oo., Pa., 
and N. Y. on the S. and S. E., and flows by Niagara R. into 
Lake Ontario. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page T7. 

Q. Where is Lake Ontario ? 

A. It is between N. Y. and Canada West, and flows into the 
R. St. Lawrence. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, pages 77-78. 

Q. Where is Lake Champlain ? 

A. It lies between the states of N. Y. and Vt., and flows into 
the Sorelle or Richelieu R., by which it discharges its waters into 
the St. Lawrence. (M. A.) 

This lake extends from the town of Whitehall, N. Y., to the 45° N. lat. 
116 ms. and extends about four miles further into Canada, making its whole 
length 120 ms. It is navigated to St. John's, Canada, 20 ms. from the line. 
The breadth is from half a mile to 10 ms. ; but including the expanse which 
contains its large islands, it is 15 ms. wide. Its broadest part unobstructed 
by islands, is opposite to Burlington, Vermont. Its chief islands are North 
Hero, South Hero, and La Motte, which, with some smaller islands, and the 
peninsula of Alburg, constitute Grand Isle county, Vermont. The super- 
ficial extent is between 600 and 700 sq. ms. This lake was discovered by 
Champlain, a French navigator, in 1609. It was the theatre of many im- 
portant military operations, in the French, the Revolutionary, and our last 
war with Great Britain. 

Q. Where is the Lake of the Woods ? 

A. It lies between Lake Winnipeg and Lake Superior, chiefly 
in Canada West, but the S. part extends into the N. part of Wis. 
Territory, and flows by a small stream into Rainy Lake. (M. A.) 

Q. Tell the length of each lake. 

A. Superior is 430 ms. long ; Huron, 280 ; Michigan, 320 ; 
Erie, 250 ; Ontario, 190 ; Champlain, 120 ; Lake of the Woods, 
100. (M. A.) 

Q. Which two are wholly in the U. States ? 

A. Michigan, and Champlain. 

Q. Where is Manitouline Lake ? 

A. It is in Canada West, being- the E. part of Lake Huron, 
(M. A.) 
9* 



102 UNITED STATES. 

Q. Where is Moosehead Lake 1 

A. It is in the W. part of Me., and is the source of the E. 
branch of the Kennebec R. (M. A.) 

This is the largest lake in Me., situated between the counties of Somerset 
and Piscataquis. Its form is very irregular. The length is about 35 ms. ; 
the breadth varies from about 10 to 15 ms., and it contains 100,000 acres. 

Q. Where is Chesuncook Lake 1 

A. It is in the W. part of Me,, 10 ms. N. E. of Moosehead 
Lake. The Penobscot R. passes through it. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Timiscouata Lake ? 

A. It is in the N. part of Me., and flows into Madawaska R., 
by which it discharges its waters into the St. John's. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Lake Memphramagog ? 

A. It is in the N. part of Vt., and S. part of Canada East, but 
lies mostly in Canada, and flows into the R. St. Francis. (M. A.) 

This Lake is about 30 ms. long, and from 2 to 3 broad, and lies mostly 
in Canada. About 7 or 8 ms. of the S. part extend into Vt. It contains 
about 15 sq. ms. in Vt., and receives Clyde, Barton, and Black Rivers. 
It discharges its waters through St. Francis R. into Lake St. Peter's, an 
expansion of St. Lawrence R., 15 ms. below the mouth of Sorelle or 
Richelieu R. 

Q. Where is Lake George ? 

A. It is in the E.N.E. part of N. Y., situated between the 
counties of Washington and Warren, and has its outlet into Lake 
Champlain. (M. A.) 

Lake George, or Horicon, is 230 ft. above the Hudson R.: it is 33 ms. long, 
from 2 to 3 wide, and is said to have as many islands as there are days in 
the year. One of them, called twelve-mile island, it being that distance from 
Caldwell, situated in the middle of the lake, contains 20 acres, elevated 30 
or 40 ft. above its surface. In picturesque scenery it is unsurpassed in the 
U. S., perhaps in the world. On account of the purity of its waters, the 
French colled this lake Lac Sacrament, the bottom being visible to the depth 
of 30 or 40 feet. Its shores contain the remains of several old forts, memo- 
rable in the revolutionary wars. Its outlet, which is 3 ms. long, connects 
with Lake Champlain. 

Q. Where is Lake Okee-cho-bee ? 
A. It is in the S. part of Flor. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Lake Pontchartrain ? 

A. It is in the S. E. part of La., communicating, by several 
outlets, called the Rigolets, with Lake Borgne. (M. A.) 

This Lake is 45 ms. long, and 25 ms. broad : it communicates with Lake 
Maurepas on the W., and Lake Borgne, through the Rigolets on the E., 
and with New Orleans through St. John's bayou, and a canal. It receives 
several rivers on the N., and is the outlet of considerable commerce from New 
Orleans. 



UNITED STATES. 103 

Q. Where is Lake Pepin ? 

A. It is an expansion of the Mississippi R., between Wis. and 
Io. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Itasca Lake ? 

A. It is in the N. E. part of Io., and is the source of the 
Mississippi R. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Rainy Lake ? 

A. It lies between Wis. and British America, N.W. of Lake 
Superior, S. E. of Lake of the Woods, and flows into Lake Supe- 
rior. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Red Lake ? 

A. It is between Io. and Wis., lying S. W. of the Lake of 
the Woods, and flows into Red R. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is St. Croix Lake ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Wis., and flows into the Missis- 
sippi R. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Winnebago Lake ? 

A. It is in Wis., between Fond du Lac and Calumet counties, 
and flows into Fox R., by which it discharges its waters into 
Green Bay. (M. A.) 

This lake is 24 ms. long and 10 broad. The water is clear. Its outlet, 
in the N.W. part, is Fox R., which also enters it on the W. side, and is a 
large stream, flowing into Green Bay. 

Q. Where is Flat Bow Lake ? 

A. It is in the S. part of British America, and flows into McGil- 
livray's R. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Kulluspelm Lake ? 

A. It is in the N. E. part of Oregon, S. of Flat Bow Lake, 
formed by Clark's or Flathead R. (M. A.) 



Page 105. — Lesson 78. — Map No, 5. 

BAYS. 

Q. Where is Passamaquoddy Bay ? 

A. It lies partly in the State of Me., and partly in the British 
province of New Brunswick, and leads into the Atlantic Ocean. 
(M. A.) 

The entrance of this bay is about 6 ms. wide from N. to S., and its 
length is about 12 ms. Campobello Island divides the entrance into two 
passages. It also contains Deer Island. The bay is well sheltered, has 
everywhere a sufficient depth of water for the largest vessels, and is never 
closed by ice. The boundary of the U. S. passes on the W. side of Cam- 
pobello Island, into the St. Croix R., which enters the N.W. part of this 
bay. 

Q. Where is Penobscot Bay ? 

A, It is on the S. coast of Me., and leads into the Atlantic 
Ocean. (M. A.) 



104 UNITED STATES. 

Penobscot Bay is a fine body of water, extending from the ocean at Owl's 
Head, 20 ms. to Belfast Bay ; and across the mouth of the bay, from Owl's 
Head to Burnt Coat Island, it is about 30 ms. wide. It embosoms a num- 
ber of islands, the principal of which are Deer Island, Fox Islands, Isle au 
Haut, Long Island, and others. From an elevated summit back of Camden, 
and from other points, this bay, with its beautiful islands, and numerous 
vessels under sail, presents a delightful prospect. The bay and Penobscot 
R. contain many fine harbours, the principal of which are those of Castine, 
Belfast, Frankfort, Bucksport, Bangor, and others. The total tonnage of 
the district above Belfast, in 1840, was 37,130 ; of Belfast, 38,218. 

Q. Where is Casco Bay ? 

A. It is in Cumberland county, on the S. coast of Me., and 
leads into the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

This bay sets up from the Atlantic Ocean, between Cape Elizabeth and 
Cape Small Point, 20 ms. apart, and affords fine anchorage. It contains 
300 islands, mostly small, but generally very productive. 

Q. Where is New York Bay ? 

A. It is between N. J. and Long Island, and leads into the 
Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Delaware Bay ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of the U. S., situated between the 
States of New Jersey and Delaware, and leads into the Atlantic 
Ocean. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 73. 

Q. Where is Chesapeake Bay ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of the U. S., situated in the E. part 
of Md. and Virginia, and leads into the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 73. 

Q. Where is Chatham Bay ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Flor., and leads into the Gulf of 
Mexico. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Tampa Bay ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Flor., and leads into the Gulf of 
Mexico. (M. A.) 

This is a large bay in the Gulf of Mexico, and is called by the Spaniards 
Espiritu Santo. It is 40 ms. long, and in one place 35 ms. wide, with from 
15 to 20 ft. of water on the bar. It is easy of access, and affords a safe 
anchorage for any number of vessels. Little Tampa Bay, in its N. part, is 
an elliptical basin, 10 ms. in diameter, but very shallow. There are nume- 
rous islands at the mouth of Tampa Bay, and it abounds with fish and 
water-fowls. 

Q. Where is Apalachee Bay ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Flor., and leads into the Gulf of 
Mexico. (M. A.) 

Through this bay is a passage 10 ft. deep, which is gradually reduced to 



UNITED STATES. 105 

8 ft., by which St. Mark's is reached. It furnishes the best anchorage ground 
along the coast for the distance of 230 ms. 

Q. Where is Pensacola Bay ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Flor., and leads into the Gulf of 
Mexico. (M. A.) 

This bay sets up from the Gulf of Mexico about 1 1 ms. from the Gulf, 
and is divided into three parts. The W. arm, called Escambia Bay, is 
11 ms. long and 4 broad, and receives Escambia R. from the N. The middle 
arm is called Yellow Water Bay, of about the size of Escambia, and receives 
Yellow Water R., through several mouths. Black Water Bay, 7 ms. long 
and 2 broad, is attached to the N.W. end of Yellow Water Bay, is full of 
islands, and receives Black Water R. and Cedar Creek. East Bay is 7 ms. 
long, where it tapers to a small r., near St. Rosa's Sound. This admits fri- 
gates of the largest class, and is entirely sheltered from all winds. Its 
entrance, between Fort Barancas and the W. end of St. Rosa Island, is 
about three-fourths of a mile wide, and is well defended. This harbour has 
22 ft. water on the bar at low tide, is completely land-locked, and is the best 
on the Gulf of Mexico, 

q. Where is Mobile Bay ? 

A. It is on the coast of Ala., and leads into the Gulf of Mexico. 
(M. A.) 

This bay sets up from the Gulf of Mexico, and is 30 ms. long, and, on 
an average, 12 ms. broad. It communicates with the gulf by two straits, 
one on each side of Dauphin Island. The strait on the W. side will not 
admit of vessels drawing more than 5 ft. water ; that on the E. side, between 
the island and Mobile Point, has 18 ft. water, and the channel passes within 
a few yards of the point. There is a bar across the bay, near its upper end, 
which has only 11 ft. water. 

Q. Where is Black Bay ? 

A. It is in the parish of Plaquemine, in the S. E. part of La., 
and leads into the Gulf of Mexico. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Barataria Bay ? 

A. It is on the S. coast of Louisiana, and leads into the Gulf of 
Mexico. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Galveston Bay ? 

A. It is in the S. E. part of Texas, lying N. of the island of 
Galveston, setting up from the Gulf of Mexico, and penetrating 
inland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Matagorda Bay ? 

A. It is in the S. part of Texas, formed by the Gulf of Mexico. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is Espiritu Santo Bay ? 

A. It is in the S. part of Texas, setting up from the Gulf of 
Mexico inland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Nueces Bay 1 

A. It is in the S. part of Texas, and leads into the Gulf of 
Mexico. (M. A.) 



106 UNITED STATES. 

Q. On the great lakes, where is Saginaw Bay ? 

A. It is in the state of Michigan, and is a branch of Lake Huron, 
situated about the centre of the N.W. side. (M. A.) 

This Bay is 60 ms. long, and 30 wide, containing a number of islands, the 
largest of which is Shawangunk Island, near the centre. It is navigable for 
vessels of any burden, and numerous coves, protected by islands, afford some 
of the best harbours on the lake. It receives Saginaw R. 

Q. Where is Thunder Bay ? 

A. It is in the state of Mich., on the N.W. side of Lake Huron, 
N. of Saginaw Bay. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Green Bay ? 

A. It is partly in Wis. and partly in Mich., lies N.W. of Lake 
Michigan, and connected with it by a broad opening, and running 
parallel with it. (M. A.) 

This bay is 100 ms. long, and from 15 to 30 broad. At its entrance is a 
string of islands, called Grand Traverse Islands, extending for 30 ms. It is 
navigable for vessels of 200 tons to its head, and receives Fox and Menno- 
monie Rivers. 

SOUNDS. 

Q. Where is Long Island Sound ? 

A. It extends the entire length of Long Island, and separates it 
from Conn. It communicates with the Atlantic on the E. by a 
rapid strait, and W. by East R. and New York Bay. (M. A.) 

It is 120 ms. long, and from 2 to 20 ms. broad. 

Q. Where is Albemarle Sound? 

A. It is on the E. coast of the U. S., on the coast of N. C, in 
the N. E. part of the state, and leads into the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, p. 74. 

Q. Where is Pamlico Sound ? 

A. It is in the E. part of N. C, and communicates with the 
Atlantic Ocean by New, Ocracock, and Cedar Inlets, and is con- 
nected with Albemarle Sound in its N. part. (M. A.) 

This is a shallow body of water 80 ms. long, and from 8 to 30 ms. wide. 
It is separated from the ocean by long sandy islands, scarcely one mile wide, 
covered with bushes, the outer point of one of which is Cape Hatteras. The 
principal entrance to it is Ocracock inlet. The land around it is low, and 
in some places marshy. It receives Tar and Neuse Rivers. 

Q. How many miles long are each of these ? ( See Map No. 1 1 . ) 
A. Long Island Sound is 120 ms. ; Albemarle, 60 ; Pamlico, 
80. (M. A.) 

Q. How long is Chesapeake Bay 1 

A. It is 190 ms. (See Map No. 11.) (M. A.) 



Q. Where is the Mississippi River ? 

A. It extends through the middle of the U. S. 



UNITED STATES. 107 

Q. Where does it rise ? 

A. In Itasca Lake. (M. A.) 

Q. Where does it empty ? 

A. Into the Gulf of Mexico. 

Q. How many miles long is it ? 

A. The Mississippi proper is 2800 ms., but from the source of 
the Missouri to the sea it is 4100 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What are its chief tributaries and their length ? 

A. Missouri, 2900 ; Arkansas, 2000 ; Red, 1200 ; (these are 
its three great W. branches) ; Ohio, 1300 ; (this is its principal 
E. branch). (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, p. 90. 

Q. Where is the Missouri River ? 

A. It is in the N.W. part of the Mississippi valley,* and is 
formed of three principal branches, denominated the Jefferson, 
Madison, and Gallatin, which take their rise from the Rocky Mts. 
Its course is northerly to the Great Falls ; thence easterly to the 
White Earth R.; thence it runs first S., and then S. E., and enters 
the Mississippi R. 18 ms. above St. Louis, in about 38° 50' N. lat., 
and 90° 10' W.long. (M. A.) 

The waters of this r. are remarkably turbid, from which circumstance, it 
is said, the name, signifying " mud river," is derived. 

Q. Where is Yellow Stone River ? 

A. It is in Mo. Territory, rises from Sublettes Lake in the Rocky 
Mts., and, flowing in a general north-easterly course, falls into the 
Missouri, near 48° N. lat., and 104° W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Big Horn River ? 

A. It is in Mo. Territory, rises at the eastern base of Fremont's 
Peak, flows N. N. E., and empties into Yellow Stone R. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Platte or Nebraska River ? 

A. It is in Indian Territory, and is one of the large tributaries 
of the Missouri R. ; rises by two branches called the North and 
South Forks, on the E. declivity of the Rocky Mts., which unite 
about 520 ms. from the source of the N. Fork. Flowing east- 
wardly it empties into the Missouri R., 700 ms. from the Missis- 
sippi, near 41° N. lat., and 95° 40' W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Kanzas River ? 

A. It is in Indian Territory, rises between the Platte and the 
Arkansas rivers, near the Rocky Mts., flows E. across the Indian 
Territory, and enters Missouri R. at the W. boundary of the State 
of Missouri. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Arkansas River ? 

A. It is in the State of Ark. and the Indian Territory, and is, next 
to the Missouri, the largest affluent of the Mississippi. It rises in 

* The Mississippi Valley comprises all the country that is watered by the 
Mississippi river and its branches. 
/ 



108 UNITED STATES. 

the Rocky Mts., near the sources of the Rio Grande, and near the 
boundary between the U. S. and Mexico, and for some distance 
forms the boundary in part between the Indian Territory and 
Texas. It flows in a general course, E. S. E., through the Indian 
Territory and the central part of Ark., and empties into the Mis- 
sissippi, in lat 33° 54' N., long. 91° 10' W.* (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Canadian River ? 

A. It is in the Indian Territory and Texas, and is the great 
south-western branch of Arkansas R., rises by two large branches 
in the Mts. of New Mexico, which unite at lat. 35° N., and long. 
18° W. from Washington. It thence flows E. and empties into 
the Arkansas R. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Red River 1 

A. It is in La. and Ark., and is one of the large affluents of the 
Mississippi, and the first large r. which enters it above its mouth. 
It rises at the base of the range of the Rocky Mts., near Santa Fe 
in Mexico. The south bank of it forms, for a distance of about 
350 ms., the boundary between the Indian Territory and Texas, 
and, flowing at first easterly and afterwards south-easterly, joins 
the "Great River" (Mississippi) in Louisiana, in about 31° N. 
lat., and 91° 50' W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Osage River 1 

A. It is principally in Mo., rises in the Indian Territory, and 
flows into the State of Mo., and after a winding easterly course, 
joins the Missouri R., 133 ms. above the Mississippi. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Des Moines River ? 

A. It is in Io., rises in the Coteau des Prairies, and flows in a 
S. E. direction through the S. part of the state, and, forming a part 
of the S. E. boundary, enters Mississippi R., at the foot of Des 
Moines rapids, on the boundary between Io. and Mo. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is St. Peter's River ? 

A. It is in Io., rises near the sources of Red R., flows first S. E., 
then N. E., and enters the Mississippi R. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Wisconsin River? (Formerly written Ouisconsin.) 

A. It rises in and flows through Wis., first S., then W. S. W., 
and enters the Mississippi R. near 43° N. lat., and 91° W. long. 
(M. AJ 

Q. Where is Rock River ? 

A. It is in Wis. and 111. Its principal head is in a region of 
lakes and swamps, towards Fox K. of Green Bay. Another head 
is Catfish R.,a stream in Wisconsin, that connects the " Fourlakes" 
the head waters of which commence in a swamp, a few miles S. 
of Fort Winnebago. Its course is first S. and then S. W. through 
the N. W. part of 111., and falls into the Mississippi R., near 41° 
30 / N. lat., and 90° 30' W . long. (M. A.) 

* The source of this river has not yet been expl^- 



UNITED STATES. 109 

Q. Where is Illinois River ? 

A. It is in 111., formed by the union of Kankakee and Des 
Plaines Rivers, and flowing in a general S. W. and S. direction, 
unites with the Mississippi R., in 38° 58' 23" N. lat.; and 90° 18' 
W. long., 20 ms. above the entrance of the Missouri. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Wabash River ? 

A. It is in la., rises in Darke county, Oo., and flowing into 
la., pursues a N. W. course to Huntington county, la., thence it 
crosses the state in a W. and S. W. direction, and a little below 
Terre Haute it becomes the boundary between la. and 111., to its 
entrance into the Ohio R., 127 ms. above the Mississippi, and 68 
ms. above the mouth of Cumberland R., near 37° 50' N. lat., and 
88° W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Maumee River ? 

A. It is in Oo., and first assumes this name in the N. E. part 
of la., and flowing through the N. W. part of Oo., in a N. E. 
direction, enters Lake Erie, through Maumee Bay. It is formed 
by the junction of Little St. Joseph's, St. Mary's, and Great and 
Little Auglaize Rivers. (M. A.) 

Q, Where is Ohio River ? 

A. It is in the eastern part of the Mississippi Valley, and is 
formed by the confluence of the Alleghany from the N. and the 
Monongahela from the S. at Pittsburg, in the W. part of Pa., in 
lat. 40° 28' N., and long. 80° 8' W. It flows in a direction W. S. W., 
separating the states of Va. and Ky., on the S., from Oo., la., and 
111., on the N., and enters the Mississippi in 37° N. lat. and about 
89° 10' W. long. (M. A.) 

This river (" La Belle Riviere" of the French, the beautiful Ohio,) if 
we take into view its length, the richness and populousness, present and pros- 
pective, of the vast country which it drains, and the extent of its navigation, 
is second only to the Mississippi. The great valley drained by this river and 
its tributaries contains over 200,000 sq. ms., and has 5000 ms. of navigable 
rivers, with a population of over 3,000,000, which is rapidly increasing. 

Q. Where is the Alleghany River ? 

A. It rises in McKean and Potter counties, Pa., and after the 
union of its head branches, passes N. W. into the state of N. Y., 
and thence, by a considerable bend, it returns again into Pa., and 
proceeds in a S. W. course until it unites with the Monongahela 
R. at Pittsburg, to form the Ohio. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Monongahela River ? 

A. It is in Va. and Pa., rises in Randolph co., Va., at the foot 
of the Laurel Mts., and after a course, in a N. direction, of 300 
ms., unites with the Alleghany R. at Pittsburg, to form the Ohio R. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is Kanawha River ? 

A. It is chiefly in Va., rises in the N. W. part of N. C, and, 
10 



110 UNITED STATES. 

flowing N. and N. W., falls into the Ohio R. 252 ms. below Pitts- 
burg, in about 38° 50' N. lat. In the upper part of its course it 
is called New River. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cumberland River ? 

A. It is a large river of Ky. and Tenn., rises in Cumberland 
Mts., near the boundary between Va. and Ky., and pursuing a 
westerly and south-westerly course, enters the state of Tenn., and 
after an extensive sweep to the S. it turns north-westwardly and 
northerly, and flowing through the western part of Ky., enters the 
Ohio R. 11! ms. above the mouth of the Tennessee R., and 59 
ms. above the mouth of the Ohio. (M.A.) 

Q. Where is Tennessee River ? 

A. It is a large river of Tenn., and is the largest tributary of 
the Ohio. Its most remote sources are Clinch R. and Holston R., 
which rise in the Alleghany Mts. in Va., and unite about 45 ms. 
S. of W. from Knoxville, forming the Tennessee proper, which 
then pursues a S. W. direction across the state, and enters the state 
of Ala., in which it pursues a westerly course for 200 ms., and 
then turns N. and crosses the state of Tenn., and the western 
part of Ky., and enters the Ohio R. \\\ ms. below the mouth of 
Cumberland R. and 47 i ms. above the entrance of the Ohio into 
the Mississippi, by the course of the R., near 37° N. lat. and 88° 
35' W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is White River ? 

A. It is in Ark., rises by the Buffalo fork in Washington 
county, Ark., and flows N. E. into Mo., and by a broad sweep to 
the N. and E. it turns southwardly and again enters Ark. Its 
course is thence S. E. to its junction with Big Black R., which 
proceeds from the N. in Mo. The junction takes place on the 
W. border of Jackson county. It then flows S. by E., and enters 
Mississippi R. about 20 ms. above the mouth of the Arkansas R. 
(M. A.) 

Five miles from the mouth of White R. there is a bayou or branch which 
connects it with the Arkansas R., 25 ms. from its mouth, in which the current 
sets alternately from the one r. to the other/ as the flood in either pre- 
dominates. 

Q. Where is Washita River ? 

A. It is in Ark. and La., rises in the W. part of the former, 
and flows nearly E. as far as Hot Springs, where it turns S. and 
flows S. by E. till it enters La. in lat. 33° N., and thence flows 
S. by E. to its junction with Tensas R. to form Black R., which 
flows into Red R. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Yazoo River ? 

A. It is in Miss., formed by the junction of Tallahatchie and 
Yalabusha Rivers in Carroll co., and flows S.S. W. into the 
Mississippi R., 12 ms. above Vicksburg. (M. A.) 



UNITED STATES. Ill 

Q. Where is Rio Grande ? 

A. Through a great part of its course, it forms the boundary 
between Texas and Mexico, rises in the Mexican Cordilleras, and, 
flowing in a general south-easterly direction, falls into the Gulf 
of Mexico, near 26° N. lat., and 97° 20' W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Nueces River ? 

A. It is in Texas, rises in Lake de las Yuntas, flows in a gene- 
ral course S. E., and empties into Nueces Bay. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Colorado River? 

A. It is in the central part of Texas, rises by several branches 
in the Guadalupe Mts., and flows a S. E. course into Matagorda 
Bay, which connects with the Gulf of Mexico. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Brazos River ? 

A. It is in Texas, rises in about lat. 33° N., flows in a general 
course nearly S. E. and empties into the Gulf of Mexico, in about 
28° 59' N. lat., and 95° 20' W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Trinity River ? 

A. It is in, and rises in Texas, flows first S. E., then S., and 
empties into Galveston Bay. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Sabine River ? 

A. It rises in Texas, and, flowing at first south-easterly, then 
southerly, forms, from lat. 32° N. to the Gulf of Mexico, the boun- 
dary between Texas and La. It discharges its waters into Sabine 
Lake. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Pearl River ? 

A. It is in Miss, and La., rises, by several branches, in the N. 
E. central part of Miss., and, flowing S., it joins, by several 
mouths, the Rigolets, which form a communication between Lakes 
Pontchartrain and Borgne. From lat. 31° N., it forms the divid- 
ing line between the States of Miss, and La. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Tombigbee River ? 

A. It is in Miss, and Ala., rises in several sources in Tisho- 
mingo co., in the N. E. part of Miss., and flowing S., passes Co- 
lumbus, Miss., in Lowndes co., and in the lower part of the co. it 
passes into Ala. ; and proceeding in a winding course S., it joins 
the Alabama R. to form Mobile R., 45 ms. above the head of 
Mobile Bay, and about 70 ms. from the Gulf of Mexico. 
(M.A.) 

Q. Where is Alabama River ? 

A. It is in Ala., formed by the junction of the Coosa and the 
Tallapoosa, and flowing S. S.W., it unites with the Tombigbee R., 
45 ms. above Mobile Bay, and, after the junction, has the name 
of Mobile R. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Chattahoochee River ? 

A. It is in Ga. and Ala., rises in the Apalachian Mts., in Ha- 
bersham co., Ga., and, flowing S. W., it reaches the border of Ala. 



112 UNITED STATES. 

at Miller's bend, from which it flows nearly S., forming, for 200 
ms., the boundary between Ga. and Ala., to its junction with 
Flint R., to form Apalachicola R. • (M. A.) 

Q. Where is St. John's River ? 

A. This r. which is in Flor., rises in an immense marsh, and 
flows northwardly nearly parallel with the Atlantic, until it turns 
suddenly to the E. and flows into the Atlantic. (M.A.) 

This river receives, in the upper part of its course, the Ocklawaha, a 
large branch, previous to which it passes through Lake George. Its whole 
course is about 250 ms. It often spreads from 3 to 5 ms. in width, though 
in other places it is not more than one-fourth of a mile wide. Vessels draw- 
ing 8 ft. water enter Lake George and Dunn's Lake, 150 ms. from its mouth. 
At its entrance there is 12 ft. water on the bar, and it is here only 1 m. 
wide. There is a light-house on the S. side of the r. at its entrance. 

Q. Where is Aiatamaha River ? 

A. It is in Ga., and is formed by the union of the Ocmulgee 
and the Oconee. After the junction, the Aiatamaha becomes a 
large r., flowing S. E., with a gentle current, through forests and 
plains, upwards of 100 ms., and enters, by several outlets, into 
Altamaha Sound, through which it passes into the Atlantic, 60 ms. 
S. S.W. of Savannah. This river is sometimes called the Alta- 
maha. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Savannah River 1 

A. It is in Ga., and forms the N. E. boundary of the State, 
separating it from S. C. It is formed by the union of Tugaloo 
and Seneca Rivers, near the S. E. corner of Franklin co., Ga., 
and flowing S. E., it enters the Atlantic through Tybee Sound, 
near 32° N. lat., and 81° W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Santee River ? 

A. It is in S. C, is one of the largest rivers of the State, and 
is formed by the union of Congaree and Wateree Rivers, about 
25 ms. S. E. of Columbia. Both these branches rise by different 
names, in N. C, where the main branch of the Wateree is called 
Catawba R., and of the Congaree,* Broad R. It flows S. E., and 
enters the Atlantic by two mouths, about 20 ms. below George- 
town, in about 33° 6' N. lat., and 79° 20' W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Great Pedee River ? 

A. It is in N. C. and S. C, rises chiefly in Wilkes co., in the 
N.W. part of N. C, where it bears, for a great distance, the 
name of Yadkin R. After it enters S. C, it is called the Great 
Pedee R., and it flows in a general south-easterly direction until, 
uniting with Waccamaw R., it enters and forms Winyaw Bay, a 
little below Georgetown, and communicates with the Atlantic 12 
ms. below Georgetown, near 33° 1C N. lat. (M. A.) 

*The Congaree is formed by the Saluda and Broad. 



UNITED STATES. 113 

Q. Where is Cape Fear River ? 

A. It is N. C, and is the largest and most important r. in the 
State ; it is formed by the union of Deep and Haw Rivers ; the 
former rises in Guilford co., and the latter in Rockingham co. 
After their junction in the S. E. part of Chatham co., the united 
stream flows in a general south-easterly direction, and empties 
into the Atlantic through a broad estuary by two channels, one 
on each side of Smith's Island, in about 33° 55' N. lat., and 78° 
5' W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Neuse River ? 

A. It is in N. C, rises in Person co., and flowing S. S. E., 
through Orange, Granville, Wake, and Johnson, enters Wayne 
co. Here it turns S. E. by E. through Wayne, Lenoir, and Cra- 
ven counties, and opens by a wide estuary into Pamlico Sound. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is Tar River 1 

A. It is in N. C, rises in Granville co., and flowing in a gene- 
ral course, S. E. by E., below Washington it expands into a wide 
estuary, which is denominated Pamlico R., until it enters Pam- 
lico Sound, near 35° 15' N. lat., and 76° 3(K W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Roanoke River ? 

A. It is in Va. and N. C, formed by the junction of Staunton 
and Dan Rivers, near the S. boundary of Va., and flowing in a 
general south-easterly direction, passes into N. C, and falls into 
the head of Albemarle Sound, near 36° N. lat., and 76° 40' W. 
long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is James River ? 

A. It is in Va., formed by the union of Jackson's and Cowpas- 
ture Rivers, in the Alleghany Mts., and flowing in a general course 
easterly, enters Hampton Roads near the mouth of Chesapeake 
Bay, a little S. of the 37th parallel of N. lat. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Potomac River ? 

A. It is in Md. and Va., rises in two branches, the N. and the 
S., in and near the Alleghany Mts., and, flowing at first north- 
easterly, and afterwards in a general south-easterly direction, forms, 
in its whole course, the boundary between Md. and Va. It enters 
Chesapeake Bay between Point Lookout and Smith's Point, by a 
mouth 10 ms. wide, in about 38° N. lat., and 76° 10' W. long. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Susquehanna River? 

A. It is the largest R. in Pa., and among the largest of the 
Atlantic rivers of the U. S., and is formed by two main branches, 
the North Branch and the West Branch. The northern branch 
rises in Otsego co., in the S. E. central part of N. Y., and one of 
its sources constitutes the outlet of Otsego Lake. Proceeding W. 
and S. W., it crosses into Pa., and 7 ms. below the line it turns 
10* 



114 UNITED STATES. 

and flows S. E. and then S.W., until, at Northumberland, it 
receives the W. branch, its largest tributary, which rises in Cam- 
bria co., Pa. : their united waters then flow S. to the junction of 
the Juniata R. from the W. ; its direction is then S. E. until its 
entrance into the N. extremity of Chesapeake Bay, in the N. E. 
corner of Maryland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Delaware River ? 

Ji. It rises by two principal branches on the W. side of the 
Catskill Mts., N. Y. The Oquago branch flows S. W. across 
Delaware Co., and turning S. E., it reaches the Pa. line in lat. 
42° N., and proceeding 7 ms. on the line between that state and 
N. Y., it receives the Popachton branch, which also proceeds from 
the Catskill Mts., in a S. W. direction, to its junction. After the 
union of these streams, the river pursues a winding course to the 
S. E., till it touches the N. W. corner of N. J., and then turns to 
the S. W., till it passes through the Kittatinny or Blue Mts. 
Thence it flows, first S. E., then S. W., till near Delaware Bay, 
which it enters in a S. E. direction, forming the boundaries of the 
States of N. Y. and N. J. on one side, and Pa. and Del. on the 
other. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Hudson River ? 

Ji. It is in the State of N. Y., being one of the finest and most 
important rivers in the U. S. It rises by two main branches, in 
the mountainous regions of Hamilton and Essex Counties, W. of 
Lakes Champlain and George. The E. branch from the N. 
passes through Schroon Lake, and is sometimes called Schroon 
branch ; and the W. branch rises farther W. in Hamilton co., 
by various branches, and is considered as the main branch or 
Hudson. About 40 ms. from the source of each, they unite in 
the S. part of Warren Co. It thence flows 15 ms. S., then E. 
of S. 15 ms. to Had ley's Falls, thence it flows 20 ms. N. by E. 
to Glen's Falls. It then flows S. 40 ms., and receives from the 
W. its principal tributary, Mohawk R. Thence running a little 
W. of S. 156 ms., it enters the Atlantic Ocean at Sandy-Hook, 
at the mouth of New York Bay. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Mohawk River ? 

Ji. It is in the State of N. Y., rises in Lewis co., and, after a 
course, first S. and then E. by S., it enters the Hudson R. by 
several mouths, at Waterford, 8 or 10 ms. above Albany. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the St. Lawrence River ?* 

Ji. It issues from Lake Ontario, in about 44° 10' N. lat., and 
76° 30' W. long., and flowing north-easterly, falls into the Gulf 
of St. Lawrence, in about 49° 30' N. lat., and 64° W. long. 
(M. A.) 

* Length of the St. Lawrence from Ontario to the sea, nearly 1000 ms. 



UNITED STATES. 115 

St. Lawrence, the principal river of N. America, and when considered, as 
it should be, in connexion with the chain of lakes or inland seas, of which 
it is the outlet, is one of the largest rivers in the world, extending from W. 
to E., through about 27° of long., and about 8° of lat. Regarding then the 
St. Lawrence in this point of view, or as a general name for the connecting 
link of that great river, or water system, that unites with the Atlantic in the 
Gulf of St. Lawrence, its most remote source will probably be found to be 
the St. Louis, an affluent of Lake Superior, rising in the table-land of the 
Huron country, near the sources of the Mississippi, flowing S., and of the 
Red R., flowing N. It receives different names in different parts of its 
course, being, as already seen, at first the St. Louis ; between Lake Superior 
and Lake Huron, the St. Mary ; between Lakes Huron and Erie, the St. 
Clair and Detroit ; between Lakes Erie and Ontario, the Niagara ; and from 
Ontario to Montreal it is sometimes called the Cataraqui or Iroquois; and 
from Montreal to the sea, being the St. Lawrence, properly so called. But 
it is now usually called the St. Lawrence from Lake Ontario to the sea. 
Considered in this point of view, its entire course, from its source to its 
mouth in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, in about lat. 49° 30' N., long. 64° W., 
may be estimated at 2200 ms. Besides traversing Lakes Superior, Huron, 
Erie, and Ontario, the Lake St. Clair, and some similar sheets of water, are 
merely enlargements of its bed. Lake Michigan, also, is included within its 
basin $ the whole is roughly estimated by Darby to comprise an area of about 
18,000 sq. ms., including the largest collection of fresh water to be found on 
the surface of the globe. 

The basin of the St. Lawrence is supposed by Darby to contain " more 
than half of all the fresh water on this planet !" Taking the area, mean depth 
of the lakes, &c, their solid contents will amount to 1,547,011,792,360,000 
cubic feet of water, being sufficient to envelope the entire earth with a watery 
covering not less than three inches in depth. 

Q. Where is Connecticut River ? 

A. It is the largest r. in New England, has its source in the 
highlands on the N. border of N. H., and its W. branch forms the 
boundary, by treaty, between the U. S. and Canada, to the 45° of 
N. lat. Its general course is S. by W. ; and, dividing N. H. and 
Vt., it passes through the western part of Mass. and the central 
part of Conn. ; and below Middletown, proceeding in a S. S. E. 
direction, it enters Long Island Sound, between Saybrooke and 
Lyme. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Merrimack River ? 

A. It is in N. H., and is one of the large rivers of New Eng- 
land. It is formed by the union of Pemigewasset R., which rises 
near the Notch in the White Mts., with Winnipiseogee R., which 
proceeds from Winnipiseogee Lake. The junction takes place 
near Sanbornton, 70 ms. below the source of the former, which is 
the main stream. Its general course is S. by E. until it enters 
the state of Mass., where it curves to a general course of nearly 
N. E. and E., until it falls into the Atlantic, a little below New- 
buryport. (M. A.) 



116 UNITED STATES. 

Q. Where is Kennebec River ? 

A. It is in Me., and next to the Penobscot the most important 
r. in the state ; has its principal source in the outlet of Moosehead 
Lake ; but 20 ms. below it receives Dead R., which is a longer 
branch, and rises within 5 ms. of the Chaudiere, which flows into 
the St. Lawrence. Its general course is S. by E., with several 
considerable curves, until it empties into the Atlantic Ocean, about 
25 ms. E. of Portland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Penobscot River? 

A. It is the largest r. of Me., and rises by two main branches. 
The larger or western branch rises in the highlands, in the western 
part of Me., and divides it from Canada. After flowing a con- 
siderable distance E. and N., it enters and passes through 
Chesuncook Lake, whence flowing S. E., and through Bame- 
dumpkok and other Lakes, it unites with the eastern branch. This 
branch, called the Seboois, rises in some small lakes near the head 
waters of the Aroostook R., and flows nearly S. to the junction. 
After the junction the river proceeds in a S. E. direction until it 
receives the Mattawamkeag R. from the N. E. Its direction is 
then S. S. W., until the entrance of the Piscataquis, and thence 
S. by W. to its entrance into Penobscot Bay, at Owl's Head, in 
about 44° N. lat., and 69° W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is St. John's River ?* 

A. It is in Me. and New Brunswick, and is the principal 
stream in the latter, and, after the St. Lawrence, perhaps the finest 
in British America. It rises by several branches, some of which 
are in Somerset co. Me., and others in Canada East ; its head 
waters approach near to those of the Chaudiere in Canada, and 
the Penobscot in Me. ; by a broad sweep it passes through the N. 
part of Me., and below the entrance of St. Francis R. it forms the 
N. boundary of Me. until it crosses the U. S. boundary into New 
Brunswick, in about lat. 47° N., where it pursues a S. and S. E. 
course until it enters the Bay of Fundy, in about 45° 10' N. lat., 
and 66° 3' W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Columbia or Oregon River ? 

A. It is in Oregon Territory ; its N. branch rises in the Rocky 
Mts. in 50° N. lat., and 116° W. long., and thence pursues a 
northern route to near McGillivray's pass in the Rocky Mts. It then 
turns S. and proceeds to Fort Colville. To the S. of this it tends 
to the W. Thence it pursues a westerly course for 60 ms. It 
thence passes to the southward until it reaches Wallawalla in 
46° N. lat. It now takes its last turn to the westward, and empties 
into the Pacific Ocean between Cape Disappointment and Point 
Adams. (M. A.) 

* Called by the Indians Looshtook, or the " long river." 



UNITED STATES. 117 

Q. Where is Lewis or Snake River ? 

A. It is in Oregon Ter., has its source in the Rocky Mts., in 
the S. E. part, whence it flows in a general course first S. W., 
then N. W., and empties into Oregon or Columbia R. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Clarke's River ? 

A. It is in Oregon Ter., rises near the Rocky Mts., flows first 
S. E., then N.,and afterwards N.W., passing through Kuiluspelm 
Lake, and empties into Oregon or Columbia R. *(M. A.) 

Q. Where is Frazer's River ? 

A. It is in British America, rises in the Rocky Mts., flows 
first N. W., then S. and W., and empties into Howe's Sound, a 
tributary of the Gulf of Georgia, in 49° 7 N. lat. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Klamet River ? 

A, It is in Oregon Territory and Upper or New California ; 
rises in Klamet Lake, in the S. W. part of Oregon, flows first S., 
then a little N. of W., and empties into the Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Tell how long each of these Rivers is. 

A. Mississippi Proper is 2800 ms., with, the Missouri, 4100 
ms. ; Missouri, 2900 ; Yellow Stone, 800 ; Big Horn, 600 ; Platte 
or Nebraska, 1000 ; Kanzas, 700 ; Arkansas, 2000 ; Canadian, 
900; Red, 1200; Osajje, 450; Des Moines, 450; St. Peter's, 
300; Wisconsin, 400 TRock, 300 ; Illinois, 500 ; Wabash, 500 -, 
Maumee, 300 ; Ohio, 1300 ; Alleghany, 350 ; Monongahela, 300 ; 
Kanawha, 400 ; Cumberland, 600 ; Tennessee, 900 ; White, 600 ; 
Washita, 500 ; Yazoo, 400 ; Rio Grande, 1800 ; Nueces, 350 ; 
Colorado, 700 ; Brazos, 650 ; Trinity, 450 ; Sabine, 350 ; Pearl, 
350 ; Tombigbee, 500 ; Alabama, 600 ; Chattahoochee, 450 ; St. 
John's (Florida), 250 ; Alatamaha, 400 ; Savannah, 500 ; Santee, 
450; Great Pedee, 450; Cape Fear, 350; Neuse, 300; Tar, 
200 ; Roanoke, 500 ; James, 500 ; Potomac, 500 ; Susquehanna, 
500; Delaware, 400; Hudson, 350; Mohawk, 200; St. Lawrence 
(including the lakes), 2200 ;* Connecticut, 450 ; Merrimack, 200 ; 
Kennebec, 300 ; Penobscot, 350; St. John's (Maine), 450 ; Oregon 
or Columbia, 1200; Lewis, 800; Clarke's, 600 ; Frazer's, 750 ; 
Klamet, 250. (M. A.) 

CAPES. 

Q. Where is Cape Cod ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of the U. S., being a Peninsula of 
Mass., on the S. side of Mass. Bay. (M. A.) 

The whole peninsula comprises Barnstable co., and projects from the S. 
shores of Mass., curving inward, something in the shape of the arm of a 
man, bent inward at the elbow and the wrist. It is 65 ms. long, and from 
1 to 20 broad. 

* The St. Lawrence R., from Lake Ontario to the Atlantic, is nearly 1000 
miles long. 



118 UNITED STATES. 

Q. Where is Cape Malabar ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of the U. S., lying S. of Cape Cod, 
on the S. shore of the peninsula of Barnstable co., Mass. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Charles ? 

A. It is on the coast of Va., situated on the N. side of the en- 
trance into Chesapeake Bay, 12 ms. N. of Cape Henry, opposite, 
in about 37° 12' N. lat., and 75° 58' W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Henry ? 

A. It is on the coast of Va., being the point on the S. side of 
the entrance of Chesapeake Bay, 12 ms. of Cape Charles, oppo- 
site. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Hatteras ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of N. C, on the S. E. point of an 
island, composed of sand and rock, which encloses Pamlico Sound. 
(M. A.) 

This Cape is the dread of Navigators, and has occasioned many ship- 
wrecks. Lat. 35° 15' N. ; long. 75° 30' W. 

Q. Where is Cape Fear ? 

A. It is on the S. E. coast of N.C., on the S. point of Smith's 
Island, near the mouth of Cape Fear R. (M. A.) 

This Cape has a dangerous shoal, called, from its form, the frying-pan. 
The Cape is in lat. 33° 48' N., and long. 78° 9' W. 

Q. Where is Cape Lookout 1 

A. It is on the S. E. coast of N. C, on the S. point of an 
Island which encloses Core Sound, in 34° 42' N. lat., and 76° 37' 
W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Cannaveral ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Flor., N. lat. 28° 22'. (M. A.) 

It was off this Cape, April 29th, 1814, that the British brig Epervier, of 
22 guns, and 128 men, was captured by the U. S. sloop Peacock, Captain 
Warrington, after an action of 42 minutes. 

Q. Where is Cape Sable ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Flor. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Romans? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Flor. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape St. Bias ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Flor. (M. A.) 

ISLANDS. 

Q. Where is Mt. Desert Island ? 

A. It is in Hancock co., on the coast of Me., situated between 
Frenchman's and Blue Hill Bays. (M. A.) 

This Island is 15 ms. long, and 12 broad, and has a number of excellent 
harbors. It contains two townships, Eden, and Mount Desert. 

Q. Where is Nantucket Island ? 

A. It is an Island and co. of Mass., situated in the Atlantic 



UNITED STATES. 119 

Ocean, 10 ms. E. of Martha's Vineyard, 30 ms. S. of Cape Cod. 
(M. A.) 

This Island is 15 ms. long, with an average breadth of 4 ms., containing 
50 sq. ms. 

Q. Where is Martha's Vineyard ? 

A. It is an Island of Mass., lying in the Atlantic Ocean, off 
the S. coast ; it is S. of Falmouth on the mainland, and W.N. W. 
of Nantucket Island. (M. A.) 

This Island is 21 ms. long, and from 2 to 5 ms. broad. With several small 
Islands in the vicinity, it constitutes Duke's co., which contains 120 sq, ms. 

Q. Where is Long Island ? 

A. It is situated in the S. E. part of the State of N. Y., lying 
between the Atlantic on the S., and Long Island Sound on the 
N., by which it is separated from the State of Conn. (M. A.) 

This Island forms a part of the State of N. Y., situated between 40° 33' 
and 41° 6' N. lat., and 72° and 74° 2' W. long. Its length is about 120 
ms. ; its greatest breadth near 20 ms., and contains 1500 sq. ms., having 3 
counties, King's, on the W. end, Queen's, in the middle, and Suffolk, on 
the E. end of the Island. 

Q. Where are the Florida Reefs ? 

A. They are a cluster of low, sandy Islands, near the S. 
extremity of Flor., extending, in a curved form, 200 ms. inward 
to the Gulf of Mexico. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Tortugas Islands ? 

A. They are in the Gulf of Mexico, lying W. of Florida 
Reefs. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Manitouline Isles ? 

A. They extend along the N. part of Lake Huron, from E. to 
W. (M.A.) 

Q. Where is Grand Island ? 

A. It is in the S. part of Lake Superior. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Island Royale ? 

A. It is in the N. W. part of Lake Superior. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Apostles 1 

A. They are in the W. part of Lake Superior. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Quadra and Vancouver's Island ? 

A. It is in the Pacific Ocean, on the W. coast of British 
America, separated from the mainland by the Gulf of Georgia, 
and from the U. S. by the Strait of Juan de Fuca. (M. A.) 

Q. How long is it ? 

Q. It is 300 ms. long. (M. A.) 



120 UNITED STATES. 

Page 106.— Lesson Id.— Map No. 5. 

MOUNTAINS. 

Q. Where is Mt. Rainier ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Oregon Ter. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Mt. St. Helens ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Oregon. 

Q. Where is Mt. Hood ? 

A. It is* in the W. part of Oregon Ter. 'M. A.) 

Q. Where is Mt. Jefferson ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Oregon Ter. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Mt. Olympus ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Oregon Ter. (M. A.) 

Q. How high are the first two ? 

A. Mt. Rainier is 12,000 ft. ; Mt. St. Helens, 13,300 ft. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Rocky Mts. ? 

A. They are in the W. part of N. America ; they extend 
through Russian America, British America, and the U. S. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, pages 86-87. 

Q. How long are they ? 

A. They are 4000 ms. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Fremont's Peak ? 

A. It is on the boundary between Missouri and Oregon Terri- 
tories. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Long's Peak ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Indian Ter. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Pike's Peak ? 
• A. It is in the S.W. part of Indian Ter. (M. A.) 

Q. How high are they 1 

A. Fremont's Peak is 13,570 ft. ; Long's Peak, 12,500 ft. ; 
Pike's, 12,000 ft. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Ozark Mts., and what is their height ? 

A. They extend from the lead-mine region of Mo., in a south- 
westerly direction across the State, the N.W. part of Ark., and 
the S. E. part of Indian Territory to Texas, and are 2000 ft. in 
height. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Cumberland Mts. ? 

A. They extend along the S. E. border of Ky., forming a part 
of the boundary between that State and Va., and afterwards run- 
ning across Tenn. in a south-westerly direction, terminate in 
Northern Ala. They divide the State of Tenn. into two sections, 
called E. and W. Tenn. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Alleghany Mts. ? 

A. They are in the E. part of the U. S., extending from the 
N. parts of Ala. and Ga., in a N. E. direction, and passing through 



UNITED STATES. 121 

Tenn., Va., and Pa., terminate in the Catskill Mts., E. of the 
Hudson R., in the S. E. part of N. Y. In their course they sepa- 
rate Tenn. and N. C. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 87. 

Q. What is their length and height ? 

A. They are 900 ms. long, and | m. high. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Blue Ridge ? 

A. It is in the E. part of the U. S., and runs in a north-easterly 
direction from the N. part of Ga., through N.C., Va., and Md., 
to the S. part of Pa., separating S. C, on the N.W., from Ga. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Blue Mts. ? 

A. They are a continuation of the Blue Ridge and the E. range 
of the Alleghanies. They commence at the termination of the 
Blue Ridge in Pa., and extending in a N. E. direction through 
Pa., and the N.W. part of N. J., they terminate in the S. E. part 
ofN. Y. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Green Mts. ? 

A. They are in the W. part of New England, extending from 
Conn, through the W. part of Mass., and the middle of Vt., 
between Lake Champlain and Connecticut R. In Washington 
co., Vt., they throw off a branch of inferior height to the N. E., 
which extends to the borders of Canada, while the main branch 
continues N. (J\£. A.) 

Q. Where are the White Mts. ? 

A. They are in the N. part of N. H. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Black Hills ? . 

A. They commence in the S. part of Mo. Ter., through which 
they extend in a N. E. direction. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Black Mountain ? 

A. It is in the N.W. part of N. C. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the three Butes ? 

A. They are in the S. E. part of Oregon Ter. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the three Tetons ? 

A. They are in the S. E. part of Oregon Ter., E. of the three 
Paps. (M. A.) 

The last are said by some to be the highest mountains in the U. S. ; but 
this is uncertain. Fremont's Peak is the highest known. (M. G. p. 106.) 

Q. Where is the South Pass ? 

A, It is situated between Wind River Mts. and Sweetwater 
Mts. (see Map, No. 15), in about 42° 30' N. lat., and near 109° 
W. long. (M. A.) 

This remarkable Pass is a gap of about 20 ms. wide in the Rocky Mts. 
It forms a most convenient passage for travellers to and from Oregon. (M. 
G. p. 106.) 
11 



122 EASTERN STATES. 

POPULATION OF CITIES. 

Q. What eight cities in the U. States number 30,000 inha- 
bitants and upwards ? 

A. Boston, New York, Brooklyn* Albany, Philadelphia, Bal- 
timore, Cincinnati, and New Orleans. (M. A.) 

Q. What eight cities number from 20,000 to 30,000? 

A. Lowell, Providence, Rochester, Washington, Louisville, 
Richmond, Pittsburg, and Charleston. (M. A.) 

Q. What twelve cities have from 10,000 to 20,000? 

A. Portland, Salem, New Haven, Troy, Utica, Buffalo, Nor- 
folk, St. Louis, Newark, Petersburg, Savannah, and Mobile. 
(M. A.) 

DISTANCES, ETC. 

Q. How far is it from New Jersey to Portugal ? 
A. 3400 ms. (M. A.) 
Q. From New Jersey to the Azores ? 
A. 2500 ms. . (M. A.) 
Q. From Chesapeake Bay to Portugal ? 
A. 3700 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From Cape Hatteras to the Strait of Gibraltar ? 
A. 3900 ms. (M. A.) 
Q. From Charleston to Madeira ? 
A. 3600 ms. (M. A.) 
Q. From Savannah to Bermuda ? 
A. 900 ms. (M. A.) 
Q. From Florida to Morocco ? 
A. 4200 ms. (M. A.) ♦ 
Q. From Florida to the Canary Islands ? 
A. 3800 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. How long and wide is the Atlantic Ocean ? 
A. It is 8500 ms. long, and from 2000 to 5000 ms. wide. 
(M. A.) 

Q. How long and wide is the Gulf of Mexico ? 
A. It is 1000 ms. long, and 800 wide. (M. A.) 
Q. How long and wide is the Pacific Ocean ? 
A. It is 11,000 ms. long, and 7000 wide. (M. A.) 
For the last two, see Map No. 6. 



EASTERN, OR NEW ENGLAND STATES. 
Page 109.— Lesson 81.— Map No. 8. 
Q. Which are the New England States ? 
A. Vt., Me., N. H., Mass., R. I., and Conn. 
Q. Which extends farthest north and east ? 
A. Me. 



For the position of this city, see Map No. 1 1 , 



EASTERN STATES. 123 

Q. Which farthest south and west ? 

A. Conn. 

Q. Which is the largest State ? 

A. Me. 

Q. The second in extent ? 

A. Vt. 

Q. Third? 

A. N. H. 

Q. Fourth? 

A. Mass. 

Q. Fifth? 

A. Conn. 

£. Smallest? 

.#. R.I. 

These states extend from latitude 41° to 48°. (M. A.) 

Q. How many degrees of latitude then do they include ? 

A. Seven. 

They extend east and west from 3|° to 10° east longitude from 
Washington. (M. A.) 

Q. How many degrees then of longitude do they include ? 

A. 6f. 

Q. Which is the largest river in New England ? 

A. Connecticut. 

Q. The next ? 

A. Penobscot. 

Q. What river is partly in Maine and partly in New Bruns- 
wick ? 

A. St. John's. 

Q. How long are these rivers ? 

A. Connecticut, 450 ; Penobscot, 350 ; St. John's, 450. (M. A.) 

Q. Which is the largest lake wholly in the Eastern States ? 

A. Moosehead. 

Q. How long is it ? 

A. 35 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What Jake is partly in New England, and partly in the 
state lying west of it ? 

A. Lake Champlain. 

Q. How long is this lake ? 

A. 120 ms. (M. A.) 

Lake Champlain is navigable for vessels of large burthen. During the 
war of the Revolution, and that of 1812, naval battles were fought upon it. 
Commodore M'Donough's victory, in which the whole British fleet was 
captured, took place September 11th, 1814. (M. G. p. 109.) 

Q. Which is the highest mountain in New England ? 

A. Mt. Washington. 

Q. Which is the next highest ? 

A. Mt. Katahdin 



124 MAINE. 

Q. The next? 
A. Mansfield Mt. 

Q. How high are each of these mountains ? 
A. Mt. Washington, 6234 ft. ; Mt. Katahdin, 5000 ; Mansfield 
Mt., 4280. (M. A.) 

Q. Which are the three principal Islands in New England ? 

A. Mount Desert, Nantucket, and Martha's Vineyard. 

Q. Which state has the greatest extent of sea-coast ? 

A. Me. 

Q. Which has the smallest ? 

A. N.H. 

Q. Which has no sea-coast ? 

A. Vt. 

Q. How many miles is it from Maine to Nova Scotia ? 

A. 250. (M. A.) 

Q. To Spain? 

A. 3100. (M. A.) 

Q. To Circassk ? 

A. 5600. (M. A.) 

Q. From Massachusetts to Italy ? 

A. 4100. (M. A.) 

Q. To Turkey ? 

A. 4500. (M. A.) 

Q. From Long Island to Greece ? 

A. 4800. (M. A.) 

Q. In what year did the Pilgrims emigrate to New England ? 

A. In 1620/ (M. A.) 

Q. What was the name of the vessel ? 

A. Mayflower. 

Q. How many miles is it from Boston to Halifax ? 

A. 450. (M. A.) 

Q. From Halifax to Liverpool ? 

A. 2100. (M. A.) 

Q. Total distance from Boston to Liverpool ? 

A. 2550. (M. A.) 



MAINE. 
Page 111.— Lesson 82.— Map No. 8. 



Q. What country bounds Maine on the east ? 

A. New Brunswick. 

Q. On the west ? 

A. Canada East and N. H. 

Q. What ocean on the south ? 

A. Atlantic? 



MAINE. 125 

Q, Which are the five principal rivers that flow into the At- 
lantic Ocean ? 

A. St. Croix, Penobscot, Kennebec, Androscoggin, and Saco. 

Q. How long are they ? 

A. St. Croix, 100 ; Penobscot, 350 ; Kennebec, 300 ; Andro- 
scoggin, 250 ; Saco, 100. (M. A.) 

Q. What river rises in the centre of Maine, and flows into New 
Brunswick ? 

A. St. John's. 

Q. How long is it ? 

A. 450 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Which are the three principal lakes ? 

A. Moosehead, Chesuncook, and Grand. 

Q. How long are the first two ? 

A. Moosehead, 35 ms. ; Chesuncook, 24 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. The principal mountain, and its height ? 

A. Mt. Katahdin, 5000 ft. high. (M. A.) 

Q. The largest Island ? 

A. Mount Desert. 

Q. Which is the most eastern county ? 

A. Washington. 

Q. The most western ? 

A. Oxford. 

Q. The most southern ? 

A. York. 

Q. In what county, and on what river, is the capital situated ? 

A. Augusta,* the capital, is situated in Kennebec co., on the 
Kennebec River. 

A. Which are the four largest towns, and their population ? 

A. Portland, 15,000; Bangor, 8500; Augusta, 5250 ; Thomas- 
town, 6250. (M. A.) 

Q. How many miles is it from Maine to Nova Scotia ? 

A. 250. (M. A.) 

Q. To Spain? 

A. 3100. (M. A.) 

Q. To Circassia ? 

A. 5600. (M.A.) 

Q. What boundary in the northern part of the state ? 

A. St. John's River, and St. Francois. 

Q. What in the middle ? 

A. The boundary fine claimed by Great Britain until 1842. 

Q. What boundary formerly separated the state from Canada 
East? 

A. The boundary line according to the Treaty of 1783. 

* It is situated at the head of sloop navigation on the Kennebec R., 50 ras. 
from its mouth. 
11* 



126 MAINE. 

Q. What boundary extends from Lake Pohenagamook to the 
N. W. branch of the St. John's ? 

A. The boundary line of 1842. 

Maine, the north-easternmost of the New England States, is bounded N. 
by Canada East, E. by New Brunswick, from which it is separated by the St. 
Croix River, and a line due N. from the monument, at the source of the St. 
Croix River, as designated and agreed toby the commissioners, under the 5th 
article in the treaty of 1794, between the governments of the U.S., and 
Great Britain ; thence N., following the exploring line run and marked by 
the surveyors of the two governments, in the years 1817 and 1818, under 
the 5th article of the treaty of Ghent, to its intersection with the St. John's 
River, and to the middle of the channel thereof; thence up the middle of the 
main channel of said River St. John's, to the mouth of the River St. Francis, 
and through the lakes through which it flows to the outlet of the lake 
Pohenagamook ; thence southwesterly, in a straight line to a point in the 
N. W. branch of the River St. John's, which point shall be 1 miles distant 
from the main branch of the St. John's, in a straight line, and in the nearest 
direction ; but if the said point shall be found to be less than 7 miles from 
the nearest point or crest of the highlands, that divide the rivers which empty 
themselves into the River St. Lawrence from those which fall into the River 
St. John, to a point 7 miles in a straight line from the said summit or crest ; 
thence in a straight line in a course about S. 8° W. to the point where 
the parallel of lat. 46° 25' N. intersects the S. W. branch of the St. John's ; 
thence southerly by the said branch to the source thereof in the highlands 
at the Metiarmette portage ; thence down along the said highlands which 
divide the waters which empty themselves into the St. Lawrence from 
those which fall into the Atlantic Ocean, to the head of Hall's stream ; 
thence down the middle of said stream till the line thus run intersects the old 
line of boundary surveyed and marked by Valentine and Collins previously 
to the year 1774, as the 45° of N. lat., and which has been known and 
understood to be the line of actual division between the states of N. Y. and 
Vt. on the one side, and the British province of Canada East on the other ; 
and from the said point of intersection W. along said dividing line, as here- 
tofore known and understood, to the Iroquois, or St. Lawrence River. Such 
are the terms of the late treaty, now ratified by both governments, and which 
has happily settled a controversy of a quarter of a century. The line desig- 
nated as the old line, run as the 45° of N. lat., is found to be about 1 mile 
N. of the true line of 45° N. lat. Maine is bounded S. by the Atlantic 
Ocean. This state lies between 43° 5' and 47° 20' N. lat., and between 
66° 50' and 70° 55' W. long. It is computed to contain 35,000 sq.ms., or 
22,400,000 acres. It was under the jurisdiction of Mass. until 1820, when 
it was made an independent state. The population in 1790, was 96,540 ; 
in 1800, 151,719 ; in 1810, 228,705 ; in 1820, 298,335 ; in 1830, 399,955 : 
in 1840, 501,793. Of these 252,989 were free white males ; 247,449 do^ 
females ; free coloured males, 720 ; do. females, 635. Employed in agricul- 
ture, 101,630 ; in commerce, 2921 ; manufactures, 21,879 ; navigating the 
ocean, 10,091 ; learned professions, 1889. Augusta, at the head of sloop 
navigation on the Kennebec river, 50 miles from its mouth, is the seat of 
government. 

This state is divided into 13 counties, which, with their population and 
capitals, are as follows : Yoke, 54,034, Alfred j Cumberland, 68,658, 



NEW HAMPSHIRE. 127 

Portland ; Lincoln, 63,517, Wiscasset ; Hancock, 28,605, Ellsworth ; 
Washington, 28,327, Machias ; Kennebec, 55,823, Augusta ; Oxford, 
38,351, Paris; Somerset, 33,912, Norridgewock ; Penobscot, 45,705, 
Bangor; Waldo, 41,509, Belfast; Piscataquis, 13,138, Dover; Frank- 
xin, 20,801, Farmington; Aroostook, 9,413, Houlton. These counties 
contain about 498 townships, or settlements, some of which have but few 
inhabitants. 



NEW HAMPSHIRE. 

Page US.— Lesson 83.— Map No. 8. 

Q. What river separates New Hampshire from Vermont ? 

A. Connecticut. 

Q. How long is it ? 

A. 450 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What river runs through the centre of the state ? 

A. Merrimac. 

Q. How long is it ? 

A. 200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What lake flows into it ? 

A. Winnipiseogee. 

Q. How long is it ? 

A. 22 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What mountains are in Coos county ? 

A. White. 

Q. Which is the principal ? 

A. Mt. Washington. 

Q. How high is it ? 

A. 6234 feet. (M. A.) 

Q. Which is the principal town and its population ? 

A. Portsmouth, 8000. (M. A.) 

Q. The Capital and its population ? 

A. Concord, 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. On what river is Concord ?* 

A. Merrimac. 

Q. Which is the most northern county 1 

A. Coos. 

Q. The three most southern counties ? 

A. Cheshire, Hillsborough, and Rockingham. 

Q. In what county is the capital ? 

A. Merrimac. 

* Concord, the cap. of Merrimac co., and of the state of N. H„ lies on both 
sides of the Merrimac r., in 43° 12' 29" N. lat., and 71° 29' W. long., 65 
ms. N. N. W. of Boston, Mass. ; 1 46 ms. S. W. of Augusta, Me. ; 97 ms. S. 
E. of Montpelier, Vt. ; 153 ms. N. E. of Albany, N. Y. ; and 481 ms. from W. 



128 ^VERMONT. 

Q. What counties contain each two county towns ? 
A. Rockingham, Strafford, and Grafton. 

County towns are distinguished by a ring with a dot in it. (M. 
G., p. 113.) 

New Hampshire, one of the Northern or New England States, is bounded 
N. by Canada East ; E. by Me. ; S. E. by the Atlantic, S. by Mass. ; and 
W. by Vt., from which it is separated by the western bank of Connecticut r. 
It is between 42° 41' and 45° 11' N. lat., and 70° 40' and 72° 28' W. long. 
It is 160 ms. long, and from 19 to 90 broad, containing 9491 sq. ms., or 
6,074,240 acres. The pop. in 1790 was 141,885; in 1800, 138,858; in 
1810, 214,460 ; in 1820, 244,161 ; in 1830, 269,328 ; in 1840, 284,574. 
Of these, 139,004 were free white males ; 145,032, do. females; 248 free 
coloured males; 290 do. females. Engaged in agriculture, 77,949 ; in com- 
merce, 1379; in manufactures and trades, 17,826; navigating the ocean, 
455 ; do. lakes and rivers, 198 ; learned professions, 1640. 

Concord is the seat of government, situated on the Merrimack r., 65 ms. 
N. N. W. from Boston, with which it has a boatable communication by 
means of the river and the Middlesex canal. 

The state is divided into 10 counties, which, with their population and 
capitals, are as follows: Kockingham, 45,771, Portsmouth and Exeter; 
Merrimac, 36,253, Concord ; Hillsborough, 42,494, Amherst ; Che- 
shire, 26,429, Keene; Sullivan, 20,340, Newport ; Strafford, 23,166, 
Dover and Rochester ; Belknap, 17,988, Guilford ; Carroll, 19,973, 
Ossipee ; Grafton, 42,311, Haverhill and Plymouth; Coos, 9849, Lan- 
caster. These contain about 323 townships. 



VERMONT. 

Page 114. — Lesson 84. — Map No. 8. 
Q. What river bounds Vermont on the east ? 
A. Connecticut. 

' Q. What state does it separate from Vermont ? 
A. N. H. 

Q. What Lake bounds Vermont on the west ? 
A. Champlain. 

Q. What state does it separate from Vermont ? 
A. N. Y. 

Q. What country lies north of Vermont ? 
A. Canada. 

Q. What state lies south ? 
A. Mass. 

Q. What four streams flow into Lake Champlain? 
A. Missisque, Lamoille, Onion, and Otter. (The first three 
are rivers, — the last is a creek.) 

Q. What two Islands are in Lake Champlain? 
A. North Hero, and South Hero. 

These, with a small peninsula lying north of them, form the county of 
Grand Isle. (M. G. p. 114.) 



MASSACHUSETTS. 129 

Q. What Lake is partly in this state and partly in Canada ? 

A. Memphramagog. 
* Q. What mountains extend through the state ? 

A. Green. 

Q. Which is the highest peak 1 

A. Mansfield Mt. 

Q. How high is it ? 

A. 4280 ft. (M. A.) 

Q. What other peaks? 

A. Camel's Rump, and Killington. 

Q. When was the battle of Bennington fought ? 

A. In 1777. « 

In August, 1777, 800 Americans under Gen. Stark, defeated a superior 
British force, on the W. border of this town. 

Q. What rivers flow into the Connecticut ? 

A. The principal are, in New Hampshire, the Upper and 
Lower Ammonoosuc, Sugar, and Ashuelot rs. ; in Vermont, 
Pasumpsic, Wells, White, Q,uechee, Black, Williams, and West 
rs. ; in Massachusetts, Miller's, Deerfield, Chickopee and West- 
field rs. ; and in Connecticut, Farmington r. 

Vermont, one of the Northern or New England States, is bounded N. 
by Canada East; E. by N. H. • S. by Mass.; and W. by N. Y. ; from 
which it is chiefly separated by Lake Champlain. It lies between 42° 44' 
and 45° N. lat., and between 71° 38' and 73° 26' W. long. It is 157 ms. 
long from N. to S., and 90 ms. broad on the N. boundary, and 40 on the 
southern, and contains 8000 sq. ms., or 5,120,000 acres. The pop. in 
1790, was 85,589 ; in 1800, 154,465 ; in 1810, 217,895 ; in 1820, 235,764 ; 
in 1830, 280,679 ; in 1840, 291,948. Of these 146,378 were white males ; 
144,840 do. females ; 364 coloured males ; 366 do. females. Employed in 
agriculture, 73,150; in commerce, 1303; in manufactures and trades, 
13,174; navigating the ocean, rivers, &c, 187 ; learned professions, &c, 
1563. 

The state is divided into 14 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, were as follows: Addison, 23,583, Middlebury ; 
Bennington, 16,872, Bennington and Manchester; Caledonia, 21,891, 
Danville; Chittenden, 22,977, Burlington; Essex, 4226, Guildhall; 
Franklin, 24,531, St. Albans; Grand Isle, 3883, North Hero; Lat.ioille, 
10,475, Hyde Park ; Orange, 27,873, Chelsea ; Orleans, 13,634, Irasburg ; 
Rutland, 30,699, Rutland ; Washington, 23,506, Montpelier ; Windham, 
27,445, Newfane; Windsor, 40,356, Windsor and Woodstock. Mont- 
pelier, on Winooski or Onion River, 38 ms. E. S. E. from Burlington, is the 
capital. 

MASSACHUSETTS. 
Page 117.— Lesson 86.— Map No. 8. 

Q. What states bound Massachusetts on the north ? 
A. N. H. and Vt. 



130 MASSACHUSETTS. 

Q. On the south ? 

A. R. I. and Conn. 

Q. On the west ? • 

A. N. Y. 

Q. What ocean on the east and south ? 
A. Atlantic. 

Q. What three mountains in Massachusetts ? 
A. Wachusett Mt., Mt. Holyoke, and Mt. Tom. 
The range west of the Connecticut River, is called the Housatonic Mts. ; 
it is a continuation of the Green Mts. (M. G. p. 117.) 

Q. Which are the principal rivers ? 

A. Connecticut, |md Merrimac. 

Q. How long are they ? 

A. Connecticut, 450 ms. ; Merrimac, 200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. The other rivers ? 

A. Blackstone, Housatonic, Deerfield, Westfield, Miller's, 
Chickopee, Nashua, and Concord. 

Q. What capes on the coast ? 

A. Ann, Cod, and Malabar. 

Q. What bays?- 

A. Massachusetts, Cape Cod, and Buzzard's. 

Q. What Islands? 

A. Nantucket and Martha's Vineyard. 

Q. What counties do these Islands form ? 

A. Nantucket, and Duke's. 

Q. Which is the most northern county ? 

A. Essex. 

Q. The most southern ? 

A. Nantucket. 

Q. The most eastern ? 

A. Barnstable. 

Q. The most western ? 

A. Berkshire. 

Q. What is the capital ? 

A. Boston. 

Q. Its population ? 

A. 93,000. (M. A.) 

Q. In what county is it ? 

A. Suffolk. (For the position of this county see Map No. 9.) 

Q. What four places have each a population of upwards of 
10,000? 

A. Lowell, Salem, New Bedford, and Charlestown ? 

Q. In what year was the battle of Lexington fouo-ht ? 

A. In 1775. 

Here the first blood was shed in the revolutionary war, April 19th, 1775. 
A monument, with an appropriate inscription, has been erected by the leg is- 



MASSACHUSETTS. 131 

lature of Mass., on the spot near which 8 men were killed by the British. 
This event aroused the country to arms. Major Pitcairn, the British com- 
mander, who was engaged in the above transaction, was afterwards killed at 
the battle of Bunker Hill. 

Q. Bunker's Hill? 

A. In 1775. (The flag denoting this battle is near Charlestown. ) 
Breed's Hill, commonly called Bunker's Hill, is immediately in the rear of 
Charlestown, where a bloody battle was fought at the commencement of the 
revolution, June 17, 1775, in which the Americans lost, killed and wounded, 
449, and the British 1005. To commemorate this important event, a granite 
obelisk has been erected on the spot, which is 30 feet square at the base, 220 
feet high, and 15 feet square at the top, ascended within by a winding stair- 
case, estimated to have cost about §100,000. 

Q. What rail-roads centre in Boston ? 

A. Eastern ; Boston & Maine ; Boston, Lowell, & Concord ; 
Boston & Worcester, and Western ; Boston & Providence, and 
Providence & Stonington ; Boston & Fitchburg ; Old Colony, 
Taunton & New Bedford ; this is connected with Boston by the 
Boston & Providence Road. (See M. A., Table No. 5.) 

Q. Tell by the scale what capital lies about 90 ms. from Boston. 

A. Hartford. (M. A.) 

Q. What county town in Maine lies a few miles farther ? 

A. Portland. (M. A.) (This is the most important place in 
the state, and was formerly the capital.) (M. G. p. 117.) 

Q. What county towns in Connecticut are about the same dis- 
tance from Boston as Portland ? 

A. Middletown, Haddam, and New London. (M. A.) 

Q. What Island belonging to Rhode Island is not quite so far ? 

A. Block. (M. A.) 

Q. What Island in Massachusetts is about the same distance ? 

A. Nantucket. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the name of the county and county town ? 

A. Nantucket is the name of each. 

Q. What does this island carry on to a great extent ? 

A. The whale-fishing. 

Q. How far is Providence from Boston ? 

A. 42 miles, S. S. W. 

Q. Worcester? 

A. 42 miles, W. by S. 

Q. Amherst? 

A. 87 miles W. 

Q. Exeter ? (Rockingham co., N. H.) 

A. 47 miles, N. by E. 

Q.Augusta? (The cap. of Maine.) 

A. 163 miles, N. N. E. 

Q. Montpelier? (The cap. of Vermont.) 

A. 160 miles N. N. W. 



132 RHODE ISLAND. 

Q. In what states are the last two ? 

A. Augusta is in Maine ;* Montpelier, in Vermont.! 

Q. What towns on Massachusetts Bay ? 

A. Salem, Marblehead, Charlestown, Boston, Hull, and Hingham. 

Massachusetts, one of the Eastern States, is bounded N. by Vt. and N. 
H. ; E. by the Atlantic ; S. by the Atlantic, R. I., and Conn. ; and W. by 
N.Y. It lies between 41° 23' and 43° 52' N. lat., and 69° 50' and 73° 
10' W. long. It is 190 miles long and 90 broad, containing about 7800 sq. 
ms,, or 4,992,000 acres. The population in 1790 was 388,727; in 1800, 
422,845; in 1810,472,040 ; in 1820,523,287 ; in 1830, 610,408 ; in 1840, 
737,699. Of these 360,679 were free white males ; 368,351 do. females ; 
4654 free coloured males; 4015 do. females. Employed in mining, 499 ; in 
agriculture, 87,837 ; in commerce, 8063 ; in manufactures and trades, 
85,176 ; navigating the ocean, 27,153 ; do. rivers, &c, 372 ; learned pro- 
fessions, 3804. 

The capital, and the largest town in New England, is Boston, situated on 
a small peninsula in Boston bay. 

This state is divided into 14 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and capitals, are as follows : Suffolk, 95,773, Boston ; Essex, 
94,987, Salem, Newburyport, and Ipswich; Middlesex, 106,611, Cam- 
bridge, Concord, and Lowell; Worcester, 95,313, Worcester; Hamp- 
shire, 30,897, Northampton ; Hampden, 37,366, Springfield ; Fra^kltx, 
28,812, Greenfield; Berkshire, 41,745, Lenox; Bristol, 60,164, New 
Bedford and Taunton ; Plymouth, 47,373, Plymouth ; Barnstable, 
32,548, Barnstable; Dukes, 3958, Edgartown; Nantucket, 9012, Nan- 
tucket ; Norfolk, 53,140, Dedham, 



RHODE ISLAND. 

Page 118.— Lesson 87.— Map No. 8. 

Q. What state bounds Rhode Island on the north and east ? 

A. Mass. 

Q. On the west? 

A. Conn. 

Q. What ocean on the south ? 

A. Atlantic. 

Q. What is the principal bay? 

A, Narragansett. 

Q. Which are the two principal islands ? 

A. Rhode Island, and Block. 

Q. What county do they belong to ? 

A. Newport. 

* Augusta, the capital of Kennebec co., and of the state of Me., is situated 
on both sides of the Kennebec r., 43 ms. from the ocean, at the head of sloop 
navigation. 

f Montpelier, the cap. of Washington co., and the state of Vt., is situated 
on an alluvial plain of moderate extent, at the junction of the N. and S. 
branches of Winooski or Onion r. 



CONNECTICUT. 133 

Q. Which are the capitals ? 

A. Providence and Newport. 

Q. Their population ? 

A. Providence, 23,000; Newport, 8250. (M. A.) 

Q. In what county is Providence ? 

A. Providence. 

Q. In which is Newport? 

A. Newport. 

Rhode Island, or, according to its original name, Rhode Island and Pro- 
vidence Plantations, one of the Northern or New England States, is situated 
between 41° 22' and 42° 3' N. lat., and between 71° 6' and 71° 38' W. 
long., and between 5° 1' and 5° 54' E. from Washington. It is about 49 
ms. long and 29 broad, containing 1225 square miles, of which Narraganset 
bay includes 130, or, in the whole, 784,000 acres, and is the smallest state 
in the Union. 

The population in 1790 was 58,825; in 1800, 69,122; in 1810, 76,931; 
in 1820, 83,059 ; in 1830, 97,212; in 1840, 108,830. Of these, 51,362 
were white males; 54,225 do. females; coloured free males, 1413; do. fe- 
males, 1825. Employed in agriculture, 16,617; in commerce, 1348; 
manufactures and trades, 21,271 ; navigating the ocean, 1717 ; learned pro- 
fessions, &c, 457. 

It is divided into 5 counties, which, with their population in 1840, and 
their capitals, were as follows : Providence, 58,073, Providence ; New- 
port, 16,874, Newport; Bristol, 6476, Bristol; Kent, 13,083, East 
Greenwich ; Washington, 14,324, South Kingston. 

Newport and Providence are the principal seats of government ; but the 
legislature meets annually at the former in May, and of the latter, alternately 
with South Kingston, in October. 



CONNECTICUT. 

Page 120.— Lesson 89.— Map No. 8. 

Q, What state bounds Connecticut on the north ? 

A. Mass. 

Q. On the east? 

A. R. I. 

Q. West? 

A. N. Y. 

Q. What bounds it on the south ? 

A. Long Island Sound. 

Q. How long is Long Island Sound ? 

A. 120 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. To what State does Lonff Island belong ? 

A. N. Y. . 

Q. What rivers flow into the Sound ? 

A. Connecticut, Thames, and Housatonic. 
12 



134 CONNECTICUT. 

Q. The length of each? 

A. Connecticut, 450ms. ; Thames, 100 ms ; Housatonic, 150 ms. 
(M. A.) 

Q. How far is the Connecticut navigable ? 

A. 60 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. For what kind of vessels ? 

A. Steam-boats. 

Q. The Housatonic ? 

A. 12 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Point out the other rivers. 

A. Naugatuck, Farmington, Shetucket, and Gluinebaugh. 

Q. What is the population of New Haven ? 

A. 13,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Hartford? 

A. 9500. (M. A.) 

Q. Which are the four next largest towns and their population ? 

A. New London, 5500; Danbury, 1500; Norwich, 7250; 
and Litchfield, 4000. (M. A.) 

Q. On what river is New London ?* 

A. On the Thames. 

Q. Norwich?! 

A. On the Thames. 

Q. Middletown?^ 

A. On the Connecticut. 

Q. Haddam?§ 

A. On the Connecticut. 

Q. Hartford? || 

A. On the Connecticut. 

*New London is a city, port of entry, and semi-capital of New London 
co., Conn. It is situated on the Thames, 3 ms. from its entrance into Long 
Island Sound, and is in 41° 24' N. lat., and 72° 30' W. long, from Green- 
wich, and 4° 0' 48" E. long, from W. It is 44 ms. S. E. from Hartford, 
52 ms. E. from New Haven, 55 ms. S.W. from Providence, and 353 ms. 
from W. 

f Norwich city, and semi-capital of New London co., Conn., is situated 
at the head of navigation on Thames r., in 41° 33' N. lat., and 72° 7' W. 
long., 13 ms. N. of New London, 39 ms. S.E. of Hartford, 38 ms. S.W. 
of Providence, R. L, 50 ms. N. E. of New Haven, and 357 from W. 

J Middletown city, port of entry and semi-capital of Middlesex co., Conn., 
is pleasantly situated on the W. bank of Connecticut r., 34 ms. above its 
mouth, in 44° 33' 8" N. lat., and 72° 39' W. long., 14 ms. S. of Hartford, 
24 ms. N. E. of New Haven, 35 ms. N.W. of New London, and 326 ms. 
from W. 

§ Haddam, semi-capital of Middlesex co., Conn., is situated on both sides 
of Connecticut r., 23 ms. S. of Hartford, 334 ms. from W. 

|| Hartford city, capital of Hartford co., Conn., and the semi-capital of the 
State, is situated on the W. side of Connecticut r., 50 ms. from its mouth, 



CONNECTICUT. 135 

Q. How many miles is it by the scale from New Haven to 
Hartford? 

A. 34.— (Hartford is 34 ms. N. N. E. from New Haven.) 

Q. What county town is about the same distance ? 

A. Litchfield.— (It is 32 ms. W. of Hartford.) 
The city of New York, Northampton on the Connecticut river, and Block 
Island, are all about the same distance from New Haven. 

Q. How many miles is it ? 

A. 76. 

Hartford is nearly half-way between New-York and Boston. 

Q. How many miles is it from each 1 

A. It is 123 N. E. from New-York ; 100 W. S. W. from Bos- 
ton. (100 from New York ; 90 from Boston, by measurement on 
Mitchell's Atlas.) 

New Haven is about the same distance from Newport, Providence, and 
Worcester. 

Q. How many miles is it ? 
A. 85. (M. A.) 

Hartford is situated very nearly half-way between the eastern and western 
extremities of the State. 

Q. How many miles is it from each ? 
A. 40 from the eastern, and 42 from the western. (M. A.) 
Hartford is about the same distance from Providence and Poughkeepsie. 
Q. How many miles is it from each ? 

A. It is 70 W. from Providence ; 72 E. from Poughkeepsie. 
(M.A.) 

Q. How far is New Haven from the north line of the State ? 

A. 50 miles. (M. A.) 

Q. From the north-east corner of the State ? 

A. 75 miles. (M. A.) 

Q. From the north-west corner ? 

A. 57 miles. (M. A.) 

Connecticut, the southernmost of the Eastern States, is bounded N. by 
Mass,, E. by R. L, S. by Long Island Sound, and W. by N. Y. It is be- 
tween 41° and 42° 2' N. lat., and 71° 20' and 73° 15' W. long., and be- 
tween 3° 16' and 5° 11' E. long, from Washington. It contains 4764 sq. 
ins., or 3,048,960 acres. 

The population in 1790 was 237,946; in 1800, 251,002; in 1810, 
261,942; in 1820, 275,248; in 1830, 297,711; in 1840,300,015. Of 
these 148,300 were white males ; 153,556 do. females; 3881 free coloured 

at the head of sloop navigation ; and is in 41° 45' N. lat., and 70° 50' W. 
long., from Greenwich, and 4° 15' E. long, from W. It is 34 ms. N.N.E. 
from New Haven ; 44 ms. N.W. from New London ; 70 ms. W. from Pro- 
vidence ; 100 ms. W. S. W. from Boston ; 97 ms. S.E. from Albany ; 123 
ms. N. E. from New York; and 336 ms. from W. 



136 MIDDLE STATES. 

males; 4214 do. females. Employed in agriculture, 56,955 ; in commerce, 
2743 ; manufactures and trades, 27,932 ; navigating the ocean, 2700 ; do. 
rivers, &c, 431 ; learned professions and engineers, 1697. 

The capitals are Hartford, on the Connecticut r., at the head of sloop 
navigation, 50 miles from its mouth ; and New Haven, on a bay which sets 
up 4 ms. from Long Island Sound. 

The State is divided into 8 counties, which, with their population in 1840, 
and their capitals, were as follows : Fairfield, 49,917, Fairfield and Dan- 
bury ; Hartford, 55,629, Hartford; Litchfield, 40,448, Litchfield ; Mid- 
dlesex, 24,879, Middletown; New Haven, 48,619, New Haven ; New 
London, 44,463, New London and Norwich ; Tolland, 17,955, Tolland ; 
Windham, 28,080, Brooklyn. These counties are divided into 144 cities 
and towns. 



MIDDLE STATES. 
Page 123.— Lesson 91.— Map No. 11. 

Q. Which is the largest of the Middle States ? 

A. N. Y. 

Q. The second in extent ? 

A. Pa. 

Q. Third? 

A. N. J. 

Q. Fourth? 

A. Del. 

Q. Which extends farthest north and east ? 

A. N. Y. 

Q. South? 

A. Del. 

Q. W T est? 

A. Pa. 

Q. Which state has the greatest extent of sea-coast ? 

A. N. Y. 

Q. Which has no sea-coast ? 

A. Pa. 

The Middle States extend from latitude 38s to 45 decrees. 
(M. A.) 

Q. How many degrees of latitude, then, do they include ? 

A. 6^°. 

They extend from longitude 5 degrees east of Washington, to 
about 3£ west. (M. A.) 

Q. How many degrees of longitude do they include ? 

A. 8a. 

Q. Which is the largest Island belonging to the Middle States ? 

A. Long Island. 

Q. What is its length ? 

A. 120 miles. (M. A.) 



NEW YORK. 137 

Q. The next in size ? 

A. Staten Island. (This Island forms Richmond county, in N. Y. 
Q. Which are the principal mountains ? 
A. Alleghany, Blue, Catskill, and Mohegan* 
Q. Which is the highest mountain ? 
A. Mt. Marcy. 
Q. How high is it ? 
A. 5300 feet. (M. A.) 

Q. Which are the chief rivers that flow into the Ocean ? 
A. Hudson, Delaware, and Susquehanna. 
Q. Which two form the Ohio ? 
A. Alleghany, and Monongahela. 
Q. How long are all these rivers ? 

A. Hudson, 350 ; Delaware, 400 ; Susquehanna, 500 ; Alle- 
ghany, 350 ; Monongahela, 300. (M. A.) 

Q. Which state has the greatest extent of lake-coast ? 

A. N. Y. 

Q. The next ? 

A, Pa. 

Q. How long is each of these lakes ? 

A. Ontario, 190 ; Erie, 250. (M. A.) 

Q. For what are they navigable ? 

A. For the largest vessels. (M. A.) 

Q. How far is it from New York to Bristol, England ? 

A. 3200 miles. (M. A.) 

Q. From New Jersey to Italy ? 

A. 4700 miles. (M. A.) 

Q. From Delaware to Turkey, in Asia ? 

A. 5700 miles. (M. A.) 

Q. From Philadelphia to Norfolk? (Va.) 

A. 320 miles. (M. A.) 



NEW YORK. 

Page 127. — Lesson 94. — Map No. 11. 

Q. What provinces bound New York on the north ? 

A. Canada West, and Canada East ? 

Q. What states on the south ? 

A. Pa. and N. J. 

Q. On the east ? 

A. Vt.,Mass. and Conn. 

Q. What are the three most northern counties ? 

A. St. Lawrence, Franklin, and Clinton. 

* These are also called the Adondirack Mts. 
12* 



138 NEW YORK. 

Q. Most southern ? 

A. Richmond. 

Q. Most Eastern ? 

A. Suffolk. 

Q. Most western ? 

.#. Chautauque. 

Q. What two great lakes separate New York from Canada 
West ? 

A. Erie, and Ontario. 

Q. How long are they ? 

e2. Erie, 270; Ontario, 190. (M. A.) 

Q. What river forms part of the boundary between this state 
and Canada West ? 

A. St. Lawrence. 

Q. How long is it ? 

A. 2200 miles,* — including the lakes. (M. A.) 

Q. How long is Lake Champlain ? 



A. 120 miles. 


(M. A, 


Q. George? 




A. 33 miles. 


(M. A.) 


Q. Oneidsu 




A. 21 miles. 


(M. A.) 


Q. Skaneateles? 


A. 15 miles. 


(M. A.) 


Q. Cayuga? 




A. 36 miles. 


(ML A.) 


Q. Seneca? 




A. 35 miles. 


(M. A.) 



Q. Canandaigua? 

A. 14 miles. (M. A.) 

Q. Crooked and Black Lakes ? 

A. 18 miles each. (M. A.) 

Q. What three rivers flow into Lake Ontario ? 

A. Genesee, Oswego, and Black. 

Q. What four flow into the St. Lawrence River ? 

A. St. Regis, Racket, Grass, and Oswegatchie. 

Q. What river flows into the Atlantic Ocean ? 

A. Hudson. 

Q. Which is the largest branch of the Hudson River ? 

A. Mohawk. 

Q. Tell the lengths of all the foregoing rivers. 

A. Genesee, 150 ; Oswego, 150 ; Black, 150 ; St. Regis, 150 ; 
Racket, 200; Grass, 150; Oswegatchie, 150: Hudson, 350; 
Mohawk, 200. (M. A.) 

* 1000 ms. long from lake Ontario to the sea. 



NEW YORK. 139 

Q. How many miles is the Hudson River navigable for steam- 
boats ? 

A. 160. (M. A.) 

Q. For sloops ? 

A. 150. (M.A.) 

Q. For ships ? 

A. 120. (M.A.) 

Q. What river unites Lakes Erie and Ontario ? 

A. Niagara. 

Q. How high is Mt. Marcy ? 

A. 5300 feet. (M. A.) 

Q. The Catskill Mts. ? 

.#. 3800 ft. (M. A.) 

Q. What island is in Niagara River 1 

A. Grand. 

Q. What celebrated falls on the Niagara River ? 

A. Niagara. 

Q. W T hat island forms one of the counties of the State ? 

A. Staten. 

Q. What island contains three counties ? 

A. Long Island. 

Q. What is the length of Long Island ? 

A. 120 miles. (M. A.) 

Q. What Sound separates it from Connecticut ? 

.#. Long Island Sound. 

Q. Point out the different places at which battles were fought 
and their dates. 

A. Flatbush, 1776 ; White Plains, 1776 ; Stillwater, 1777 ; 
Stony Point, 1779; Fort Schuyler, 1780; Sacketts Harbour, 
1813; Plattsburg, 1814; Oswego, 1814. (M. A.) 

New York, the most northern of the Middle States, and the most popu- 
lous State in the Union, is bounded N. by Lake Ontario, the River St. Law- 
rence, and Canada East ; E. by Vt., Mass., and Conn. ; S. by the Atlantic, 
N. J., and Pa. ; and W. by Pa., Lake Erie, and Niagara River. It lies 
between 39° 45' and 45° N. lat., and between 73° and 79° 55' W. long., 
and between 2° 51' W., and 5° E. long, from Washington. It is about 316 
miles long, and 314 broad; containing 47,000 square miles, or 30,080,000 
acres. The population in 1790, was 340,120 ; in 1800, 586,050 ; in 1810, 
959,049; in 1820, 1,372,812; in 1830, 1,913,508; in 1840, 2,428,921. 
Of these, 853,929 were white males; 816,276 do. females; 6435 free 
coloured males; 6428 do. females. Employed in mining, 1898 ; in agricul- 
ture, 455,954 ; in commerce, 28,468; manufactures and trades, 173,193; 
navigating the ocean, 5511 ; do. lakes and canals, 10,167; learned profes- 
sions, 14,111. 

This State is divided into 58 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, are as follows: Albany, 68,593, Albany; Alle- 
ghany, 40,975, Angelica ; Broome, 22,338, Binghamton ; Cattaraugus, 
28,872, Ellicottsville ; Cayuga, 50,338, Auburn ; Chautauo.ue, 47,975, 



140 NEW JERSEY. 

Mayville ; Chemung, 20,732, Elmira ; Chenango, 40,785, Norwich ; Clin- 
ton, 28,157, Plattsburg; Cortland, 24,607, Cortland ville ; Delaware, 
35,396, Delhi; Erie, 62,465, Buffalo; Essex, 23,634, Elizabethtown ; 
Franklin, 16,518, Malone; Fulton, 18,049, Johnstown; Genesee, 
59,587, Batavia; Hamilton, 1907, Lake Pleasant; Herkimer, 37,477, 
Herkimer; Jefferson, 60,984, Watertown ; Lewis, 17,830, Martinsburg* 
Livingston, 35,140, Geneseo ; Madison, 40,008, Morrisville ; Monroe, 
64,902, Rochester ; Montgomery, 35,818, Canajoharie ; Niagara, 31,132, 
Lockport ; Oneida, 85,310, Utica, Rome, Whitestown ; Onondaga, 67,91 1, 
Syracuse; Ontario, 43,501, Canandaigua ; Orleans, 25,127, Albion; 
Oswego, 43,619, Oswego, Pulaski; Otsego, 49,628, Cooperstown ; Ren- 
sellaer, 60,259, Troy; Saratoga, 40,553, Ballston; Schenectady, 17,387, 
Schenectady ; Schoharie, 32,358, Schoharie ; Seneca, 24,874, Ovid, Wa- 
terloo ; St. Lawrence, 56,706, Canton ; Steuben, 46,138, Bath; Tioga, 
20,527, Owego; Tompkins, 37,948, Ithaca; Warren, 13,422, Caldwell; 
Washington, 41,080, Salem, Sandyhill ; Wayne, 42,057, Lyons ; Yates, 
20,444, Penn Yan ; Columbia, 43,252, Hudson; Dutchess, 52,398, 
Poughkeepsie ; Greene, 30,446, Catskill ; Kings, 47,613, Brooklyn ; New 
York, 312,710, New York ; Orange, 50,739, Goshen, Newburg ; Put- 
nam, 12,825, Carmel ; Queens, 30,324, North Hempstead; Richmond, 
10,965, Richmond ; Rockland, 11,975, Clarkstown ; Suffolk, 32,469, 
Riverhead ; Sullivan, 15,629, Monticello ; Ulster, 45,822, Kingston; 
Westchesteb, 48,686, Bedford, White Plains. These counties are divided 
into 807 townships, including 9 cities and 125 incorporated villages. 

The capital of the State is Albany, on the W. bank of the Hudson R., 
145 ins. N. of New York. 



NEW JERSEY. 
Pages 128-9.— Lesson 9o.~Map No. 11. 
Q. What bounds New Jersey on the north ? 
A. N. Y. 

Q. What on the east 1 
A. Atlantic Ocean, and N. Y. 
Q. West? 
A. Pa., and Del. 

Q. What river separates New Jersey from Pennsylvania and 
Delaware ? 
A. Delaware. 

Q. What river separates it from New York ? 
A. Hudson. 

Q. Which are the three principal rivers of New Jersey ? 
A. Passaic, Raritan, and Maurice. 
Q. Which is the most northern county ? 
A. Sussex. 

Q. The most southern ? 
A. Cape May. 
Q. The most eastern ? 
A. Bergen. 



NEW JERSEY. 141 

Q. The most western ? 

A. Salem. 

Q. What Cape at the southern extremity of New Jersey ? 

A. May. 

Q. What Bay on the south-west ? 

A. Delaware. 

Q. When were the battles of Trenton, Princeton, Monmouth, 
and Red Bank, fought ? 

A. Trenton, in 1776 ; Princeton, Monmouth, and Red Bank, 
in 1777. (M. A.) 

Q. In which county is Trenton ? 

A. Mercer. 

Q. Newark ? 

A. Essex. 

Q. Paterson 1 

A. Passaic. 

Q. New Brunswick ? 

A. Middlesex. 

Q. What is the population of each of these towns 1 

A. Trenton, 4000 ; Newark, 17,000; Paterson, 7500; New 
Brunswick, 8500. (M. A.) 

Q. On what river is Newark !* 

A. On the Passaic. 

Q. Burlington ?t 

A. On the Delaware. 

Q. Camden ?± 

A. On the Delaware. 

New Jersey, one of the Middle States, is bounded N. by N. Y., E. by 
the Hudson r. and the Atlantic ; S. by the Atlantic ; and W. by Delaware 
bay and river, which separate it from the states of Del. and Pa. It is be- 
tween 39° and 41° 24' N. lat., and between 74° and 75° 29' W. long., and 
between 1° 26' and 3° 9' E. long, from W. It is 163 ms. long and 52 

* Newark is a city, port of entry, and capital of Essex co., N. J., 9 ms. 
W. from N. York, 49 ms. N. E. from Trenton, and 215 ms. from W. It is 
situated on the W. side of Passaic r., 3 ms. from its entrance into New York 
bay, and is the most populous and flourishing place in the state. 

f Burlington is a city, and port of entry, Burlington co., N. J., 12 ms. S. 
from Trenton, 17 ms. N. E. from Philadelphia, 156 ms.from W., 40° 5' 10" 
N. lat. and 72° 52' 37" W. long. It is pleasantly located on the E. bank 
of the Delaware. Encircled on the S. and E. by a small stream, so as to 
form an island, 1A m. long and £ m. wide, connected with the main land by 
4 bridges and causeways. 

+ Camden is a city, and port of entry, Camden co., N. J., 29 ms. S. S. 
W. from Trenton, 139 ms. from W. It is situated on the E. side of Dela- 
ware r., opposite to Philadelphia. The city consists of three parts, a central 
or principal part, and a northern and southern village or suburb, from each 
of which is a ferry to Philadelphia. 



142 PENNSYLVANIA. 

broad, containing 8320 sq. ms., or 5,324,800 acres. The population in 1790 
was 184,189; in 1800, 211,149 ; in 1810, 245,592 ; in 1820, 277,575 
in 1830, 320,779 ; in 1840, 373,306. Of these 177,055 were white males 
174,533 do. females; 10,780 were free colored males ; 10,264 do. females 
303 male, and 371 female slaves. Employed in mining, 266 ; agriculture, 
56,701; commerce, 2283; manufactures and trades, 27,004; navigating 
the ocean, 1143; do. canals, lakes, and rivers, 1625; learned professions, 
&c, 1627. 

This state is divided into 18 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, are as follows : Atlantic, 8726, May's Landing; 
Bergen, 13,223, Hackensack ; Burlington, 32,831, Mount Holly ; Capk 
Mat, 5324, Cape May C. H. ; Cumberland, 14,374, Bridgetown ; Essex, 
44,621, Newark; Gloucester, 25,438, Woodbury ; Hudson, 9483, North 
Bergen; Hunterdon, 24,789, Flemington ; Mercer, 21,502, Trenton; 
Middlesex, 21,893, New Brunswick ; Monmouth, 32,909, Freehold ; 
Morris, 25,844, Morristown ; Passaic, 16,734, Patterson; Salem, 16,624, 
Salem; Somerset, 17,455, Somerville ; Sussex, 21,770, Newton ; War- 
ren, 20,366, Belvidere. 

The seat of government is Trenton, at the head of sloop navigation on the 
Delaware, 30 miles above Philadelphia. 



PENNSYLVANIA. 
Page 132.— Lesson 98.— Map No. 11. 

Q. What bounds Pennsylvania on the north ? 

A. N. Y. 

Q. On the south ? 

A. Del, Md., and Va. 

Q. East? 

A. N. Y., and N. J. 

Q. West? 

A. Oo., and Va. 

Q. What river separates Pennsylvania from New Jersey ? 

A. Delaware. 

Q. What river flows into Chesapeake Bay ? 

A. Susquehanna. 

Q. Which are its two chief branches ? 

A. North Branch, and West Branch. 

Q. What rivers unite at Pittsburg ? 

A, Alleghany, and Monongahela. 

Q. What river do they form ? 

A. Ohio. 

Q. What river flows into the Susquehanna above Harrisburg ? 

A. Juniata. 

Q. Tell the lengths of the foregoing rivers. 

A. Delaware, 400 ; Susquehanna, 500 ; North Branch of the 
Susquehanna, 350 ; West Branch, 200 ; Alleghany, 350 ; Monon- 
gahela, 300 ; Ohio, 1300 ; Juniata, 200. (M. A.) 



PENNSYLVANIA. 143 

Q. What two rivers flow into the Delaware ? 

A. Lehigh, and Schuylkill. 

Q. What river flows into the Ohio helow Pittsburg ? 

A. Beaver. „ 

Q. How many miles is the Delaware navigable for steamboats ? 

A. 150. (M. A.) 

Q. What mountains extend between Berks and Schuylkill 
counties ? 

A. Blue. 

Q, What mountains in the centre of the state ? 

A. Alleghany. 

Q. What two ridges in the western part ? 

A. Laurel, and Chesnut. 

Q. In which county is Philadelphia ? 

A. Philadelphia. 

Q. Harrisburg? 

A. Dauphin. 

Q. Lancaster? 

A. Lancaster. 

Q. Pittsburg? 

A. Alleghany. 

Q. What is the population of Philadelphia ? 

A. 228,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Lancaster ? 

A. 8500. (M. A.) 

Q. Harrisburg? 

A. 6000. (M.A.) 

Q. Reading? 

A. 8250. (M. A.) 

Q. Easton? 

A. 4750. (M. A.) 

Q. Erie? 

A. 3250. (M. A.) 

Q. Beaver ? 

A. 551. 

Q. Pittsburg? 

.#.21,000. ~(M.A.) 

Q. What lake forms the N. W. boundary of the state ? 

A. Erie. 

Q. What town on the lake ? 

A. Erie. 

Q. When was Braddock defeated ? 

A. In 1755. (M. A.) 

Q. When were the battles of Brandywine and Germantowh 
fought ? 

A. In 1777. (M. A.) 



144 PENNSYLVANIA. 

Q. When did the massacre of Wyoming take place ? 

A. In 1778. (M. A.) 

Q. On what river is Reading ?* 

A. Schuylkill. 

Q. Easton ?t 

A. Delaware. 

Q. PottsvilleTJ 

A. Schuylkill. 

Q. Wilkesbarre ?§ 

A. On the N. branch of the Susquehanna. 

Q. Beaver ?|) 

A. On the Ohio. 

Pennsylvania, one of the Middle States, is bounded N. by N. Y. and 
Lake Erie ; E. by N. J., from which it is separated by Delaware R. ; S. by 
Del., Md., and Va. ; and W. by Va. and Oo. It is between 39° 43' and 42° 
N. lat., and between 74° and 80° 40' W. long. ; and between 3° 31' W. and 
2° 18' E. from W. It is 307 ms. long, and 160 broad, containing 46,000 
sq. ms., or 29,440,000 acres. The population in 1790. was 434,373 ; in 
1800, 602,545 ; in 1810, 810,091 ; in 1820, 1,049,313 ; in 1830, 1,347,672 ; 
in 1840, 1,724,033. Of these 844,770 were white males; 831,345 do. 
females; 22,752 free coloured males; 25,102 do. females; employed in 
agriculture, 207,533; in commerce, 15,338; in manufactures and trades, 
105,883 ; in mining, 4603 ; navigating the ocean, 1815 ; do. lakes, rivers, 
&c, 3951 ; learned professions, &c, 6706. 

The state is divided into 54 counties, which, with their population in 1840, 
and their capitals, are as follows : Eastern District. — Adams, 23,044, 
Gettysburg; Berks, 64,569, Reading; Bucks, 48,107, Doylestown and 
Bristol ; Chester, 57,515, West Chester ; Cumberland, 30,953, Carlisle ; 
Dauphin, 30,118, Harrisburg; Delaware, 19,791, Chester ; Franklin, 
37,793, Chambersburg ; Lancaster, 84,203, Lancaster; Lebanon, 21,872, 
Lebanon ; Lehigh, 25,787, Allentown ; Monroe, 9879, Stroudsburg, 
Montgomery, 47,241, Norristown ; Northampton, 40,996, Easton; Perry, 

* Reading is the cap. of Berks co. Pa., 57 ms. N. W. from Philadelphia, 
52 ms. E. from Harrisburg, and 145 ms. from W. It is situated on the E. 
bank of Schuylkill R., 1 m. below^lhe mouth of Tulpehocken creek. 

f Easton is the cap. of Northampton co. Pa, It is situated on the W. side 
of Delaware R., at the junction of the Lehigh, 58 ms. N. from Philadelphia, 
106 ms. E.N. E. from Harrisburg, 199 ms. from W. 

* Pottsville is in Schuylkill co. Pa., 98 ms. N. W. from Philadelphia, 62 
ms. E. from Harrisburg, and 172 ms.from W. It is situated on one of the 
head branches of the Schuylkill R., at the termination of the Schuylkill 
Canal. 

§ Wilkesbarre is the cap. of Luzerne co. Pa., 127 ms. N.E. from Harris- 
burg, 231 from W. It is situated on the E. side of the North Branch of the 
Susquehanna R. 

|| Beaver is the cap. of Beaver co. Pa., on the N. bank of the Ohio R., a 
little below the mouth of Big Beaver R., 30 ms. below Pittsburg, by the 
course of the R., 227 ms. N. by W. from Harrisburg, and 253 ms. from W. 



DELAWARE. 145 

17,096, Bloomfield ; Philadelphia, 258,037, Philadelphia; Pike, 3832, 
Milford ; Schuylkill, 29,053, Orwigsburg ; Wayite, 11,848, Honesdale ; 
York, 47,010, York. Western District — Alleghany, 81,235, Pittsburg ; 
Armstrong, 28,365, Kittaning ; Beaver, 29,368, Beaver ; Bedford, 
29,335, Bedford ; Bradford, 32,769, Towanda ; Butler, 22,378, Butler; 
Cambria, 11,256, Edensburg ; Centre, 20,492, Bellefonte ; Clearfield, 
7834, Clearfield ; Clinton, 8323, Lock Haven ; Columbia, 24,267, 
Danville; Crawford, 31,724, Mead ville; Erie, 31,344, Erie ; Fayette, 
33,574, Union; Greene, 19,147, Waynesburg ; Huntingdon, 35,484, 
Huntingdon; Indiana, 20,782, Indiana; Jefferson, 7253, Brookville ; 
Juniata, 11,080, Mifflintown ; Luzerne, 44,006, Wilkesbarre ; Lycoming, 
22,649, Williarasport ; McKean, 2975, Smithport ; Mercer, 32,783, 
Mercer ; Mifflin, 13,092, Lewistown ; Northumberland, 20,027, Sun- 
bury ; Potter, 3371, Cowdersport ; Somerset, 19,650, Somerset; Sus- 
quehanna, 21,195, Montrose ; Tioga, 15,498, Wellsborough ; Union, 
22,787, New Berlin ; Venango, 17,900, Franklin ; Warren, 9278, 
Warren ; Washington, 41,279, Washington ; Westmoreland, 42,699, 
Greensburg. 

Harrisburg is the seat of government, on the E. bank of the Susquehanna 
River, 97 miles W. N. W. from Philadelphia. 



DELAWARE. 
Page 133.— Lesson 99.— Map No. 11. 

Q. What state bounds Delaware on the north ? 

A. Pa. 

Q. On the south and west 1 

A. Md. 

Q. On the east ? 

A. N.J. 

Q. What river and bay separate Delaware from New Jersey ? 

A. Delaware River and Bay. 

Q. What Cape in the south part of the state ? 

A. Henlopen. 

Q. Which is the most northern county ? 

A. New Castle. 

Q. What is the population of the principal town 1 

A. Wilmington is the principal town, population, 8250. 
(M.A.) 

Delaware, one of the Middle States, and, next to R. I., the least in the 
Union, is bounded N. by Pa., E. by Delaware River and Bay ; S. and W. 
by Md. It is between 38° 29' and 39° 47' N. lat., and between 74° 56' 
and 75° 40' W. long., and between 1° 13' and 1° 57' E. from W. It is 92 
miles long, arid 23 broad, and contains 2100 sq. ms., or 1,344,000 acres. 
The population in 1790, was 59,094; in 1800, 64,272 ; in 1810, 72,674 ; 
in 1820, 72,749; in 1830, 76,739 ■ in 1840, 78,085 : of which 2605 were 
slaves; 29,259 were white males; 29,302 do. females; 8626 free coloured 
males • 8239 do. females. Employed in agriculture, 16,015; in commerce, 
13 



146 SOUTHERN STATES. 

467; in manufactures and trades, 4060; navigating the ocean, 401 ; do 
canals and rivers, 235 ; learned professions and engineers, 199. 

This State is divided into three counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, are as follows : Kent, 1 9,872, Dover ; New Castxe, 
33,120, Wilmington and New Castle; Sussex, 25,093, Georgetown 
These counties are divided into 24 hundreds. 

Dover, situated on Jones' Creek, 7 miles from its entrance into Delaware 
Bay, is the seat of government. 



SOUTHERN STATES. 

Pages 135-6.— Lesson 101.— Map No. 5. 

Q. Which is the largest division of the Southern States ? 
A. Texas. 
Q. The smallest? 
A. S. C. 

Q. Which is the most northern ? 
A. Md. 
Q. Southern? 
A, Flor. 
Q. Eastern? 
A. N. C. 
Q. Western ? 
A. Texas. 

Q. Which divisions border on the Atlantic Ocean ? 
A. Va., N. C, S. C, Ga., and Flor. 
Q. Which border on the Gulf of Mexico ? 
A. Flor., Ala., Miss., La., and Texas. 

Q. What State is divided by Chesapeake Bay into two parts ? 
A. Md. 

The Southern States extend from latitude 41 nearly to 24 degrees. 
(M. A.) 

Q. How many degrees of latitude, then, do they comprise ? 
A. 17°. ' 

They extend from longitude l£ degrees east from Washington, to 30$ 
west. (M. A.) 

Q. What amount of longitude do they include ? 
A. 29 degrees. 



MARYLAND. 

Page 137.— Lesson 102.— Ma j i No 11. 

Q. What bounds Maryland on the north ? 
A. Pa. 



MARYLAND. 147 

Q. South and west ? 
A. Va. 

#. East? 

A. Del., and the Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. What bay and river divide Maryland into two separate 
parts? 

A. Chesapeake Bay and Susquehanna River. 

Q. What river separates it from Virginia ? 

A. Potomac. 

Q. What rivers flow into Chesapeake Bay on the east side ? 

A. Choptank, Nanticoke, and Poconoke. 

Q. What rivers on the west side ? 

A. Patuxent and Potomac. 

Q. Which is the most eastern county ? 

A. Worcester. 

Q. The most western ? 

A. Alleghany. 

Q. On what river is Havre de Grace ? * 

A. On the Susquehanna. 

Q. Cumberland ? t 

A. On the Potomac. 

Q. Upper Marlboro' ? ± 

A. It is situated a little W. of Patuxent River. 

Q. What is the population of Baltimore ? 

A. 102,000. (M.A.) 

Q. Of Frederick City ? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Hagerstown? 

A. 4000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Annapolis? 

A. 3000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Easton? 

A. 2000. (M. A.) 

_ __ 

* Havre de Grace is a sea-port, Harford co., Md., 64 ms. N. E. from An- 
napolis, 74 ms. from W. It is situated on the W. bank of Susquehanna R., 
at its entrance into Chesapeake Bay. The Wilmington and Baltimore Rail- 
road passes through the place, and crosses the Susquehanna River by a steam- 
ferry. The Susquehanna Canal terminates here, and connects the Chesa- 
peake with the canals of Pa. 

t Cumberland is the cap. of Alleghany co., Md., 166 dif. W.N.W. from 
Annapolis, 134 ms. from W. It is situated on the N. bank of Potomac R., 
at the mouth of Will's Creek. 

$ Upper Marlboro' is the capital of Prince George's co., Md., 23 ms. S.W. 
from Annapolis, 17 ms. from W. It is situated a little W. of Patuxent R., 
and contains a court-house, jail, a church, and about 800 inhabitants. 



148 DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 

Q. In what year was the battle of North Point fought ? 

A. In 1814. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Bladensburg ? 

A. In 1814. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Havre de Grace ? 

A. In 1814. (M. A.) 

Q. What mountains extend through the western part of the 
State ? 

A. Alleghany. 

Maryland, the most northern of the Southern States, is bounded N. by 
Pa. ; E. by Del. and the Atlantic ; and S. and W. by Va. It is between 
38° and 39° 44' N. lat., and between 75° 10' and 79° 20' W. long., and 
between 2° 31' W. and 1° 58' E. from W. It is 196 ms. long, and 120 
broad, containing, exclusive of the water surface, 9356 sq. ms., or 5,987,840 
acres. Chesapeake Bay extends nearly through the State from S. to N„ 
dividing it into two parts, one of which is called the Eastern Shore, and the 
other the Western Shore. 

The population in 1790 was 319,728; in 1800, 345,824; in 1810, 
380,546 ; in 1820, 407,350 ; in 1830, 446,913 ; in 1840, 469,232, of which 
89,737 were slaves. Of the free population, 158,636 were white males ; 
159,081 do. females; 29,173 were coloured males; 32,847 do. females. 
Employed in agriculture, 69,851 ; in commerce, 3249; in manufactures and 
trades, 21,325; navigating the ocean, 721; do. canals, lakes, and rivers, 
1519 ; learned professions, 1647. 

This state is divided into 20 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, are as follows: Western Shore. — Alleghany, 
15,690, Cumberland; Ame Aetjnbel, 29,532, Annapolis; Baltimore, 
134,379, Baltimore; Calyert, 9229, Prince Frederick ; Carroll, 17,241, 
Westminster; Charles, 16,023, Port Tobacco: Frederick, 36,405, 
Frederick; Harford, 17,120, Belair; Montgomery, 15,456, Rockville ; 
Prince George's, 19,539, Upper Marlboro' ; St. Mary's, 13,224, Leonard- 
town ; Washington, 28,850, Hagerstown. Eastern Shore. — Caroline, 
7806, Denton ; Cecil, 17,232, Elkton; Dorchester, 18,843, Cambridge; 
Kent, 10,842, Chestertown ; Queen Anne's, 12,633, Centreville ; Somer- 
set, 19,508, Princess Anne; Talbot, 12,090, Easton; Worcester, 
18,377, Snowhill. 

Annapolis^on the western shore of the Chesapeake, and on Severn river, 
is the seat of government. 



DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 
Page 139.— Lesson 103.— Map No. 11. 

Q. On what river is Washington ? 

A. Potomac. 

Q. On which side is it ? 

A. East. 

Q. On which side is Georgetown ? 

A. On the N. E. bank. 



DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 149 

Q. Alexandria? 
A. West. 

Q. What is the population of each of these places ? 
A. Washington, 23,000 ; Georgetown, 7250 ; Alexandria, 
8500. (M. A.) 

The District of Columbia is a tract of country which, until the year 
1846, was 10 miles square, on both sides of the Potomac river, and about 
120 miles from its mouth. In 1790 it was ceded to the U. S. by Va. and Md., 
for the purpose of being made the seat of government. It included the 
cities of Washington, Alexandria and Georgetown, and is under the imme- 
diate government of Congress. In 1800 the population was 14,093 ; in 
1810, 24,023; in 1820, 33,039; in 1830, 39,858; in 1840, 43,712, of 
which 30,557 were whites; 8361 were free coloured persons, and 4694 
were slaves. Employed in agriculture, 384 ; in commerce, 240 ; in manu- 
factures and trades, 2278 ; navigating the ocean, 126 ; do. canals and rivers, 
80 ; learned professions and engineers, 203. 

The District was divided into two counties ; the county of Washington on 
the N. side of the Potomac, and the county of Alexandria on the S. side. 
m the former, the laws of Md. are continued in force ; in the latter those of 
Va. The district, although under the legislation of Congress, was never 
represented in that body. Congress meets annually at Washington, on 
the first Monday of December, unless otherwise provided by law. The Pre- 
sident of the U. S. and the other chief officers of the government, reside at 
Washington. The Supreme Court of the U. S. sits here annually, on the 
second Monday in January. 

In the year 1846, the county and city of Alexandria, D. C, i.e. all that 
part of the District of Columbia which lay on the Virginia side of the 
Potomac river, was retroceded by act of Congress to the state of Virginia. 
By this act, the District is confined to the Maryland side of the Potomac, 
and is reduced from an area of 100 to 64 square miles. Its population, which 
amounted according to the 6th census to 46,712, is only 33,745. 

Washington city, the capital of the U. S., is situated on the E. side of the 
Potomac, 295 ms. from the ocean, by the course of the river and bay, and is 
in 38° 32' 54" N. lat, and 77° V 48" W. long, from Greenwich. It is 38 
miles S. W. from Baltimore ; 136 from Philadelphia ; 225 from New York ; 
440 from Boston ; 808 from St. Louis ; 540 from Charleston, S. C. ; 662 
from Savannah, Ga. ; 1172 from New Orleans. 



VIRGINIA. 

. Page 142. — Lesson 105. — Maps No. 5 and 11. 

Map No. 5. — Q. What bounds Virginia on the North ? 
A. Pa. and Md. 
Q. On the south ? 
A. N. C. 
Q. East? 

A. Atlantic Ocean. 
Q. West? 
A. Oo. and Ky, 
13* 



150 VIRGINIA. 

Q. What river separates Virginia from Ohio I 

A. Ohio. 

Q. Which from Maryland ? 

A. Potomac. 

Q. What river and mountains from Kentucky ? 

A. Big Sandy river, and Cumberland Mts. 

Q. What two ranges of mountains extend through Virginia ? 

A. Alleghany, and Blue Ridge. 

Q. How long and high are the Alleghany Mts. ? 

A. 900 ms. long, and half a mile high. (M. A.) 

Map No. 11. — Q. What Bay separates the two eastern coun- 
ties from the rest of the state ? 

Ji. Chesapeake. 

Q. What two capes at the entrance of Chesapeake Bay ? 

A. Charles and Henry. 

Q. In what county is Richmond ? 

A. Henrico. 

Q. In which is Norfolk ? 

A. Norfolk. 

Q. Lynchburg? 

A. Campbell. 

Q. Wheeling? 

A. Ohio. 

Q. Petersburg? 

A. Dinwiddie. 

Q. In which county is Washington's birth-place ? 

A. Westmoreland. 

Q. Mount Vernon ? 

A. Fairfax. 

Q. The University of Virginia ? ' 

A. Albemarle. 

Q. In what year did Cornwallis surrender ? 

A. In 1781/ (M. A.) 

Q. What four rivers flow into Chesapeake Bay ? 

A. Potomac, Rappahannock, York, and James. 

*£. Tell the length of each. 

A. Potomac, 500 ms.; Rappahannock, 200; York, 200; James, 
500. (M. A.) 

Q. On what river is Richmond ?* 

A. On James river. 

* Richmond city, port of entry, and capital of Henrico co., and of the 
State of Va., is situated on James R., at the lower falls, at the head of tide- 
water, and is in 37° 30' N. lat., and 77° 31' W. long, from Greenwich, and 
0° 27' W. long, from W. It is 23 ms. N. from Petersburg ; and 117 ms. 
S. by W. from W. 



VIRGINIA, 151 

Q. Petersburg?* 

A. On the Appomattox. 

Q. Lynchburg ? t 

A. 0a James R. 

Q. Yorktown?t 

A. On York R. 

Q. Fredericksburg ? § 

A. On Rappahannock R. 

Q. Wheeling? || 

A. On the Ohio. 

Q. Charleston ?H (See Map No. 14.) 

A. On the Great Kanawha R. — Salt is extensively manu- 
factured at this place. 

Q. What streams form James River ? 

A. It is formed by the union of Jackson's and Cowpasture 
rivers, which rise in the Alleghany Mts. 

Q. Roanoke River ? 

A. It is formed by the junction of Staunton and Dan rivers, 
near the S. boundary of Va. 

Q. York River? 

A. It is formed by the junction of Pamunky and Mattapony 
rivers. 

Virginia, the largest of the original thirteen States, is bounded N. by 
Pa. and Md., from which it is separated by the Potomac R. ; E. by the At- 
lantic ; S. by N. C. and Tenn. ; W. by *Ky. ; and N.W. by Oo. It lies 
between 36° 33' and 40° 43' N. lat., and between 75° 25' and 83° 40' W. 

* Petersburg is a port of entry, Dinwiddie co., Va., on the S. bank of 
Appomattox R., 12 ms. above its entrance into James R., at City Point, in 
37° 13' 54" N. lat., and 77° 20' W. long., 23 ms. S. by E. from 'Richmond, 
140 ms. from W_ 

f Lynchburg, Campbell co., Va., 116 ms. W. by S. from Richmond, 191 
from W. Situated on the S. bank of James R., 20 ms. below its passage 
through the Blue Ridge. 

t Yorktown is a port of entry and capital of York co., Va., 70 ms. E. S. E. 
from Richmond, 185 ms. from W. It is situated on the S. side of York R., 
opposite to Gloucester. 

§ Fredericksburg city, Spottsylvania co., Va., is situated on the S.W. side 
of Rappahannock R., 110 ms. above the Chesapeake, in 38° 44' N. lat., and 
77° 38' W, long. It lies 62 ms. E. of N. from Richmond, 56 ms. S.S.W. 
from W. 

|| Wheeling is a city, port of entry, and cap. of Ohio co., Va., 351 ms. 
N.W. from Richmond, 266 ms. from W. It is situated on the E. bank of 
Ohio R.. at the mouth of Wheeling Creek. 

^ Charleston, or Kanawha C. H., cap. of Kanawha co., Va., is 313 ms. 
W. N.W. from Richmond, 350 ms. from W. It is situated on the N. bank 
of Great Kanawha R., 60 ms. above its mouth, in the Ohio, at the junction 
of Elk R. 



152 VIRGINIA. 

long. ; and between 6° 34' W., and 1° 20' E. long, from W. It is 370 ms. 
long, and 200 broad at its greatest width, containing 70,000 sq. rns., or 
44,800,000 acres. The population in 1790, was 747,610; in 1800, 886,149; 
in 1810, 974,622; in 1820, 1,065,366; in 1830, 1,211,272; in 1840, 
1,239,797; of which 448,987 were slaves. Of the free white population 
371,223 were white males; 369,745 do. females; 23,814 were coloured 
males; 26,020 do. females. Employed in agriculture, 318,771 ; in com- 
merce, 6361 ; in manufactures and trades, 54,147; navigating the ocean, 
582 ; do. canals, rivers, and lakes, 2952 ; learned professions, &c, 3866. 

This State is divided into 119 counties, and two districts, Eastern and 
Western. The following are the counties of the Eastern District, with their 
population in 1840, and their capitals. Accomac, 17,096, Accomac C. H. ; 
Albemarle, 22,924, Charlottesville; Amelta, 10,320, Amelia C. H. ; Am- 
herst, 12,576, Amherst C. H. ; Bedford, 20,203, Liberty; Brunswick, 
14,346, Lawrenceville ; Buckingham, 18,7S6, Buckingham C. H. ; Camp- 
bell, 21,030, Campbell C. H.; Caroline, 17,813, Bowling Green ; Charles 
Citt, 4774, Charles City C. H.; Charlotte, 14,595, Charlotte C. H. ; 
Chesterfield, 17,148, Chesterfield C. H.; Culpepper, 1 1,393, Culpepper 
C. H. ; Cumberland, 10,399, Cumberland C. H. ; Dinwiddie, 22,558, 
Dinwiddie C. H. ; Elizabeth Citt, 3706, Hampton; Essex, 11,309, 
Tappahannock; Fairfax, 9370, Fairfax C. H.; Faucuier, 21,897, War- 
renton ; Fluvanna, 8812, Palmyra; Frankltn, 15,832, Rocky Mount ; 
Gloucester, 10,715, Gloucester C. H. ; Goochland, 9760, Goochland C. 
H. ; Greensville, 6366, Hicksford ; Greene, 4232, Stannardsville ; Hali- 
fax, 25,936, Halifax C. H.; Hanover, 14,968, Hanover C. H. ; Henrico, 
33,076, Richmond ; Henry, 7335, Martinsville ; Isle of Wight, 9972, 
Smithfield ; James Citt, 3779, Williamsburg; King George, 5927, King 
George C. H. ; Ktng William, 9258, King William C. H. ; King and 
Queen, 10,862, King and Queen C. H. ; Lancaster, 4628, Lancaster C. 
H. ; Loudoun, 20,431, Leesburg; Louisa, 15,433, Louisa C. H. ; Lunen- 
burg, 11,055, Lunenburg C. H. ; Madison, 8107, Madison ; Matthews, 
7442, Matthews C. H. ; Mecklenburg, 20,724, Boydton ; Middlesex, 
4392, Urbanna ; Nansemond, 10,798, Suffolk; Nelson, 12,287, Living- 
ston ; New Kent, 6230, New Kent C. H.; Norfolk, 21,092, Norfolk; 
Northampton, 7715, Eastville ; Northumberland, 7924, Northumber- 
land C. H. ; Nottoway, 9719, Nottoway C. H. ; Orange, 9125, Orangp, 
C. H. ; Patrick, 8032, Patrick C. H. ; Pittsylvania, 26,398, Pittsyl- 
vania C. H. ; Powhatan, 7924, Scottsville ; Princess Anne, 7285, Prin- 
cess Anne C. H.; Prince Edward, 14,069, Prince Edward C. H.; Prince 
George, 7175, City Point; Prince William, 8144, Brentsvillc ; Rappa- 
hannock, 9257, Washington ; Richmond, 5965, Richmond C. H.; South- 
ampton, 14,525, Jerusalem; Spottsyltania, 15,161,Spottsylvania C-H.: 
Stafford, 8454, Falmouth ; Surry, 6480, Surry C. H. ; Sussex, 11,229, 
Sussex C. H. ; Warwick, 1456, Warwick C.H. ; Westmoreland, 8019, 
Westmoreland C. H. ; York, 4720, Yorktown : — 369,398 whites, 42,294 
free coloured, 395,250 slaves; total, 806,942. Western District — Alle- 
ghany, 2749, Covington ■ Augusta, 19,628, Staunton ; Bath, 4300, Bath ; 
Berkley, 10,972, Martinsburg ; Botetourt, 11,679, Fincastle; Brax- 
ton, 2575, Braxton C. H. ; Brooke, 7948, Wellsburg ; Cabell, 8163, 
Cabell C. H. ; Clarke, 6353, Berry ville ; Fayette, 3924, Fayetteville ; 
Flotd, 4453, Floyd C.H. ; Frederick, 14,242, Winchester; Giles, 5307, 



NORTH CAROLINA. 153 

Giles C. H. ; Grayson, 9087, Greensville ; Greenbrier, 8695, Lewisburg; 
Hampshire, 12,295, Romney ; Hardt, 7622, Moorfield ; Harrison, 
17,669, Clarksburg ; Jackson, 4890, Ripley ; Jefferson, 14,082, Charles- 
town ; Kanawha, 13,567, Charleston; Lee, 8441, Jonesville ; Lewis, 
8151, Weston ; Logan, 4309, Logan C. H. ; Marshall, 6937, Elizabeth- 
town ; Mason, 6777, Point Pleasant ; Mercer, 2233, Princeton ; Monon- 
galia, 17,368, Morgantown ; Monroe, 8422, Union ; Montgomery, 7405, 
Christiansburg ; Morgan, 4253, Bath ; Nicholas, 2515, Summersville; 
Ohio, 13,357, Wheeling; Page, 6194, Surry; Pendleton, 6940, Frank- 
lin; Pocahontas, 2922, Huntersville ; Preston, 6866, Kingwood ; 
Pulaski, 3739, Newbern ; Randolph, 6208, Beverly; Roanoke, 5499, 
Salem; Rockbridge, 14,284, Lexington; Rockingham, 17,344, Har- 
risonburg ; Russell, 7878, Lebanon ; Scott, 7303,Estillville; Shenandoah, 
11,618, Woodstock; Smith, 6522, Marion ; Tazewell, 6290, Jefferson- 
ville ; Tyler, 6954, Middlebourne ; Warren, 5627, Front Royal ; Wash- 
ington, 13,001, Abingdon; Wood, 7923, Parkersburg ; Wythe, 9375, 
Wytheville. Western District, whites, 371,570 ; free coloured 7548 ; slaves 
53,737 ; total, 432,855. 

Richmond is the capital of the State, situated on the N. side of James R-, 
at the head of tide-water, and just below its lower falls. 



NORTH CAROLINA. 

Pages 143-4.— Lesson 108. — Maps No. 5 and 11. 

Map No. 5. — Q. What bounds North Carolina on the north ? 
A. Va. 

Q. On the south ? 
A. S. C, and Ga. 
Q. East? 

A. Atlantic Ocean. 
Q. West? 
A. Tenn. 

Q. What mountains extend through the western part of North 
Carolina ? 

A. Alleghany, and Blue Ridge. 

Q. Which is the highest mountain ? 

A. Black. 

Q. How high is it ? 

A. 6476 feet. (M. A.) 

Q. What three capes on the coast ? 

A. Hatteras, Lookout, and Fear. 

Map No. 11. — Q. What two sounds in North Carolina ? 

A. Albemarle, and Pamlico. 

Q. How long are they? 

A. Albemarle, 60 ms. ; Pamlico, 80. (M. A.) 

Q. What two rivers flow into Albemarle Souna ? 

A. Roanoke, and Chowan, 



154 NORTH CAROLINA. 

Q. Which two into Pamlico Sound ? 

A. Tar, and Neuse. 

Q. In what direction do the Cape Fear, Lumber, Yadkin, and 
Catawba Rivers flow ? 

A. Cape Fear River. Its N. W. branch is formed by the 
union of Deep and Haw Rs., the former rising in Guilford, the 
latter in Rockingham co., whence it pursues a S. S. E. course, 
until, 34 ms. below Wilmington, it enters the Atlantic by two 
channels, one on each side of Smith's Island. (M. A.) 

Lumber River rises in Moore co., flows first S. E., then W. 
of S., and enters Little Pedee R. on the boundary between Marion 
and Horry districts, in S. C. (M. A.) 

Yadkin River rises in the Blue Ridge, on the E. side, and 
flows E. and S. E. into S.C., and in its lower part it takes the 
name of Great Pedee, until it falls into Winyaw T Bay, near George- 
town. (M. A.) 

Catawba River, in N. and S. Carolina, rises by numerous 
branches in the Blue Ridge, in Burke co., N. C, and flowing E. 
and then curving to the S., it flows into S. C, and in its lower 
part is called the Wateree R., until it unites with Congaree R. 
to form Santee R. (M. A.) 

Q. How long are they ? 

A. Cape Fear, 350 ms. ; Lumber, 110; Yadkin, 200; and 
Catawba, 250. (M. A.) 

Q. How far are Chowan, Roanoke, Tar, and Cape Fear Rivers 
navigable, and for what kind of vessels ? 

A. Chowan, 75 ms. for steamboats ; Roanoke, 120 for sloops ; 
Tar, 100. for steam boats ; Cape Fear, 120 for steamboats. 
(M. A.) 

Q. How many inhabitants have Wilmington, Newbern, Fayette- 
ville, Raleigh, Charlotte, and Edenton ? 

A. Wilmington, 4750 ; Newbem, 3500 ; Fayetteville, 4250 ; 
Raleigh, 2250 ; Charlotte, 2000 ; Edenton, 2000. (M. A.) 

Q. On what river is Halifax ?* 

A. On the Roanoke R. 

Q. Edenton ? t 

A. On the Chowan R. 

* Halifax, port of entry, and capital of Halifax co., N. C, is pleasantly 
situated on the W. bank of Roanoke R., 7 ms. below the great falls, at the 
head of sloop navigation \ 87 ms. N. E. from Raleigh, 211 ms. from W. 

•j- Edenton, cap. of Chowan co., N. C, is situated near the mouth of 
Chowan R., at the head of Edenton Bay, which sets up from Albemarle 
Sound : 66 ms. S. from Norfolk, 182 ms. E. by N. from Raleigh, 274 ms. 
from W. 



NORTH CAROLINA. 155 

Q. Tarboro'?* 
A. On the Tar R. 
Q. Louisburg ?t 
A. On the Tar R. 

Q. In what county is the University of North Carolina ? 

A. Orange. 

Q. In what year was the battle of Guilford Court-House fought ? 

A. In 1780. (M. A.) 

North Carolina, one of the Southern States, is bounded N. by Va., E. 
and S.E. by the Atlantic; S. by S. C. and Ga. ; and W. by Tenn. It is 
between 33° 50' and 36° 30' N. lat, and between 75° 45' and 84° W. long. ; 
and between 6° 20' W. and 1° 33' E. from W. It is 430 ms. long, and ISO 
broad, containing 50,000 sq. ms., or 32,000.000 acres. 

The pop. in 1790, was 393,754 ; in 1800, 478,103 ; in 1810, 555,500 ; 
in 1S20, 638,829 ; in 1830, 738,470 ; in 1840, 753,419 ; of which, 245,817 
were slaves. Of the free pop., 240,047 were white males ; 244.S23 do. 
females; 11,226 were coloured males; 11,505 do. females. Employed in 
agriculture, there were 217,095 ; in commerce, 1734 ; in manufactures 
and trades, 14,322 ; navigating the ocean, 327 ; do. canals, rivers, &c, 
379 ; learned professions, 1086. 

This state is divided into 68 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, were as follows : Anson, 15,077, Wadesborough ; 
Ashe, 7467, Jeffersonton ; Beaufort, 12,225, Washington; Bertie, 
12,175, Windsor; Bladen, 8022, Elizabeth; Bho-swick, 5265, Smith- 
ville ; Buncombe, 10,084, Ashville : Burke, 15,799, Morganton ; Cabar- 
rus, 9259, Concord ; Camden, 5663, Jonesboro' ; Carteret, 6591, Beau- 
fort; Caswell, 14,693, Yanceyville ; Chatham, 16,242, Pittsboro' ; 
Cherokee, 3427, Murphy ; Chowan, 6690, Edenton ; Columbus, 3941, 
Whitesville ; Craven, 13,438, Newbern ; Cumberland, 15,284, Fayette- 
ville ; Currituck, 6703, Currituck C. H. ; Davidson, 14,606, Lexington ; 
Dayie, 7574, Mocksville ; Duplin, 11,1S2, Kenansville ; Edgecombe, 
15,708, Tarboro'; Franklin, 10,980, Louisburg ; Gates, 8161, Gates- 
ville ; Grantille, 18,817, Oxford ; Greene, 6595, Snow Hill ; Guilford, 
19,175, Greensboro'; Halifax, 16,865, Halifax; Haywood, 4975, 
Waynesville ; Henderson, 5129, Hendersonville ; Hertford, 7484, Win- 
ton ; Htde, 6458, Lake Landing ; Iredell, 15,685, Statesville ; Johnson, 
10,599, Smithfield ; Jones, 4945, Trenton ; Lenoir, 7605, Kingston ; 
Lincoln, 25,160, Lincolnton ; Macon, 4869, Franklin; Martin, 7637, 
Williamston ; Mecklenburg, 18,273, Charlotte ; Montgomert, 10,780, 
Lawrenceville ; Moore, 7988, Carthage; Nash, 9047, Nashville; New 
Hanover, 13,312, Wilmington ; Northampton, 13,369, Jackson ; Onslow, 
7527, Onslow C. H. 5 Orange, 24,356, Hillsboro' ; Pascuotank, 8514, 
Elizabeth City ; Perq.uimans, 7246, Hertford ; Person, 9790, Roxboro' ; 
Pitt, 11,806, Greenville ; Randolph, 12,875, Ashboro' ; Richmond, 8909, 

* Tarboro', cap. of Edgecombe co., N. C, is situated on the W. side of 
Tar R., at the head of steamboat navigation, 85 ms. above its mouth, in 
Pamlico Sound j 76 ms. E. by N. from Raleigh, 262 ms. from W. 

j- Louisburg, capital of Franklin co., N. C, is situated on the N. side of 
Tar R., 36 ms. N. E. from Raleigh, 262 ms. from W. 



15G SOUTH CAROLINA. 

Rockingham ; Robeson, 10,370, Lumbcrton ; Rockingham, 13,422, W«?nU 
worth ; Rowan, 12,109, Salisbury ; Rutherford, 19,202, Ruthcrfonlton ; 
Sampson, 12,157, Clinton ; Stokes, 16,265, Gcrmanton ; Suhhv, 16,079, 
Rockford ; Tyrrel, 4657, Columbia ; Wakk, 21,118, Raleigh ; Wahiii;v, 
12,919, Warrenton; Washington, 4525, Plymouth; Wayne, 10,891, 
Waynesboro'; Wilkes, 12,577, Wilkesboro' ; Yancey, 5962, Burnsville. 
Raleigh, situated near the centre of the state, 6 miles, W. of the Neusc 
River, is the seat of government. 



SOUTH CAROLINA. 
Page 145. — Lesson 107. — Map No. 12. 

Q. What bounds South Carolina on the north ? 

A. N. C. 

Q. On the west ? 

A. Ga. 

Q. East? 

A. Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. What river separates it from Georgia ? 

A. Savannah. 

Q. What rivers flow into Winyaw Bay ? 

A. Great Pedee, and Waccamaw. 

Q. What river south of Winyaw Bay ? 

A. Santee. 

Q. What rivers form the Santee ? 

A. Wateree and Congaree. 

Q. The Congaree ? 

A. Saluda, and Broad. 

Q. What rivers flow into St. Helena sound ? 

A. Edisto, and Combahee. 

Q. What are the lengths of all the foregoing rivers ? 

A. Savannah, 500 ms. ; Great Pedee, 450 ; Waccamaw, 150 ; 
Santee, 450 ; Wateree, 275 ; Congaree, 40 ; Saluda, 150 ; Broad, 
200; Edisto, 200; Combahee, 100. (M.A.) 

Q. How many miles, and for what kinds of vessels, are the 
Waccamaw, Great Pedee, Wateree, and Congaree rivers navigable ? 

A. Waccamaw is navigable 80 ms., for steamboats ; Great 
Pedee, 200, for steamboats ; Wateree, 200, for steamboats ; Con- 
garee, 200, for steamboats. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Charleston ? 

A. 29,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Columbia? 

A. 4250. (M. A.) 

Q. Camden and Georgetown I 

A. 2000 each. (M. A.) 

Q. In what year was the battle of Fort Moultrie fought ? 

A. In 1770. (M. A.) 



SOUTH CAROLINA. 157 

Q. Charleston? 

A. 1780. (M. A.) 

Q. Monk's Corner ? 

A. 1780. (M. A.) 

Q. Gates defeated ? 

A. 1780. (M. A.) 

Q. King's Mountain ? 

A. 1780. (M. A.) 

Q. Cowpens? 

A. 1781. (M. A.) 

Q. Hobkirk's Hill and Eutaw Springs ? 

A. 1781. (M. A.) 

Q. In what district is Charleston ? 

A. Charleston. 

Q. Columbia ? 

A. Richland. 

Q. Camden ? 

A. Kershaw. 

Q. Which is the most northern district ? 

A. Spartanburg. 

Q. Most southern? 

A. Beaufort. 

Q. Eastern ? 

A. Horry. 

Q. Western? 

A. Pickens. 

Q. Near the junction of what rivers is Columbia ?* 

A. Saluda and Broad. 

South Cajiolina, one of the Southern States, is bounded N. by N. C. ; 
S. E. by the Atlantic ; and S. W. by Ga., from which it is separated by tho 
Savannah R. It is between 32° 2' and 35° 10' N. lat., and between 78° 
24' and 83° 30' W. long., and between 1° 45' and 6° 15' W. from W. It 
is 200 miles long and 125 broad, containing about 33,000 square miles, or 
21,120,000 acres. The population in 1790 was 240,000 ; in 1800, 345,591 ; 
in 1810, 415,115 ; in 1820, 502,741 ; in 1830, 581,458 ; in 1840, 594,398, 
including 327,038 slaves. Of the free population, 130,496 were white 
males; 128,588 do. females ; 3864 were coloured males; 4412 do. females. 
Employed in agriculture, 198,364; in commerce, 1958; manufactures and 
trades, 10,325 ; navigating the ocean, 381 ; canals, rivers, &c, 348 ; learned 
professions, &c, 1481. 

This state is divided into 29 districts, which, with their population in 1840, 
* 

* Columbia, capital of Richland district, S. C, and of the state, is situated 
in 33° 57' N. lat., and 81° 7' W. long., and 4° W. long, from W. ; 35 ms. 
S. W. from Camden, 73 ms. N.E. from Augusta, 120 ms. N. N. W. from 
Charleston, 506 ms. from W. It is situated on tho E. side of Congaree R., 
immediately below the junction of Broad and Saluda Rivers to form the 
Congaree. 
14 



158 GEORGIA. 

and their capitals, were as follow : Abbeville, 29,351, Abbeville; Ander- 
son, 18,493, Anderson C. H. ; Barnwell, 21,471, Barnwell C. H. ; Beau- 
fort, 35,794, Coosawhatchie ; Charleston, 82,661, Charleston ; Chester, 
17,747, Chester C. H. ; Chesterfield, 8574, Chesterfieldville ; Colleton, 
25,548, Walterborough ; Darlington, 14,822, Darlington C. H. ; Edge- 
field, 32,852, Edgefield C. H. ; Fairfield, 20,165, Winnsborough ; 
Georgetown, 18,274, Georgetown; Greenville, 17,839, Greenville; 
Horrt, 5755, Conwayborough ; Kershaw, 12,281, Camden; Lancaster, 
9907, Lancaster C. H. ; Laurens, 21,584, Laurensville ; Lexington, 
12,111, Lexington ; Marion, 13,932, Marion ; Marlborough, 8408, Ben- 
nettsville; Newberry, 18,350, Newberry C. H. ; Orangeburg, 18,519, 
Orangeburg C. H. ; Pickens, 14,356, Pickens C. H. ; Richland, 16,397, 
Columbia ; Spartanburg, 23,699, Spartanburg ; Sumter, 27,892, Sumter- 
ville ; Union, 18,936, Unionville ; Williamsburg, 10,327, Kingstree ; 
York, 18,383, Yorkville. 

Columbia, on the left bank of the Congaree, immediately below the con- 
fluence of Broad and Saluda Rivers, is the seat of government. 



GEORGIA. 

Page 147.— Lesson 108.— Map No. 12. 

Q. What bounds Georgia on the north ? 

A. N. C. and Tenn. 

Q. On the south? 

A. Flor. 

Q. East? 

A. S. C. and the Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. West? 

A. Ala. 

Q. What river separates Georgia from South Carolina ? 

A. Savannah. 

Q. What river separates it in part from Alabama ? 

A. Chattahoochee. 

Q. What river in part from Florida ? 

A. St. Mary's. 

Q. What five rivers flow into the Atlantic Ocean ? 

A. Savannah, Ogeechee, Alatamaha, Satilla, and St. Mary's. 

Q. What rivers form the Alatamaha ? 

A. Ocmulgee, and Oconee. 

Q. What rivers form the Apalachicola ? 

A. Chattahoochee, and Flint. 

Q. What is the population of Savannah ? 

A. 11,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Augusta ? 

A. 6000. (M. A.) 

Q. Columbus? 

A. 3000. (M. A.) 



GEORGIA. 159 

Q. Macon? 

A. 4000. (M. A.) 

Q. In what counties are these towns ? 

A. Savannah is in Chatham co. ; Augusta, in Richmond ; Co- 
lumbus, in Muscogee ; Macon, in Bibb. 

Q. In what county is Milledgeville ? 

A. Baldwin. 

Q. To what town, and how far from the sea, do steamboats 
ascend the Savannah ? 

A. To Augusta, 200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Oconee ? 

A. To Milledgeville, 200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Ocmulgee? 

A. To Macon, 220 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Chattahoochee? 

A. To Columbus, 300 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Flint? 

A. To Bainbridge, 130 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Which is the largest island ? 

A. Cumberland. 

Q. What extensive swamp in Ware county ? 

A. Okefinokee. 

Q. When was the battle of Savannah fought ? 

A. In 1778. (M. A.) 

Georgia, one of the Southern States, is bounded N. by Tenn. and N. C; 
N.E. by S. C; E. by the Atlantic ; S. by Flor. ; and W. by Ala. It is 
between 30° 30' and 35° N. lat., and between 80° 50' and 85° 40' W. long., 
and between 3° 52' and 8° 47' W. from W. It is 300 miles long from N. 
to S., and 240 broad from E. to W., containing 68,000 sq. ms., or 43,520,000 
acres. The population in 1790, was 82,584; in 1800, 162,686 ; in 1810, 
252,433; in 1820,348,989; in 1830, 516,567; in 1840, 691,392, of which 
280,944 were slaves. Employed in agriculture, 209,383 ; in commerce, 
2428; in manufactures and trades, 7984; mining, 574; navigating the 
ocean, 262 ; do. canals, rivers, &c, 352 ; learned professions, 1250. 

This State is divided into 93 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, were as follow: Appling, 2052, Homesville ; Ba- 
ker, 4226, Newton; Baldwin, 7250, Milledgeville ; Bibb, 9802, Macon ; 
Bryan, 3182, Bryan C.H.; Bulloch, 3102, Statesborough ; Burke, 13,176, 
Waynesborough; Butts, 5308, Jackson; Camden, 6075, JefTersonton; Cajip- 
bell, 5370, Campbellton ; Carroll, 5252, Carrollton ; Cass, 9390, Cass- 
ville ; Chatham, 18,801, Savannah; Chattooga, 3438, Summerville ; Che- 
rokee, 5895, Canton; Clarke, 10,522, Athens; Cobb, 7539, Marietta; 
Columbia, 11,356, Applington ; Coweta, 10,364, Newnan ; Crawford, 
7981, Knoxville ; Dade, 1364, Trenton \ Decatur, 5872, Bainbridge; De 
Kalb, 10,467, Decatur; Dooly, 4427, Vienna; Early, 5444, Blakeley ; 
Effingham, 3075, Springfield; Elbert, 1 1,125, Elberton ; Emanuel, 3129, 
Swainsborough ; Fayette, 6191, Fayefteville ; Floyd, 4441, Rome ; For- 
syth, 5619, Cumming; Franklin, 9886, Carnesville ; Gilmer, 2536, 



160 FLORIDA. 

Ellejay ; Glynn, 5302, Brunswick; Greene, 11,690, Greensborough ; 
Gwinnett, 10,804, Lawreneeville ; Habersham, 7961, Clarksville ; Hale, 
7875, Gainesville; Hancock, 9659, Sparta; Harris, 13,933, Hamilton; 
Heard, 5329, Franklin ; Henry, 11,756, McDonough ; Houston, 9711, 
Perry ; Irwin, 2038, Irwinville ; Jackson, 8522, Jefferson ; Jasper, 11,111, 
Monticello; Jefferson, 7254, Louisville; Jones, 10,065, Clinton; Lau- 
rens, 5585, Dublin; Lee, 4520, Starkeville ; Liberty, 7241, Hinesville ; 
Lincoen, 5895, Lincolnton ; Lowndes, 5574, Troupsville ; Lumpkin, 
5671, Dahlonega; Macon, 5045, Lanier; Madison, 4510, Danielsville ; 
Marion, 4812, Tazewell; McIntosh, 5360, Darien ; Merriwether, 
14,132, Greeneville; Monroe, 16,275, Forsyth; Montgomery, 1616, 
Mount Vernon; Morgan, 9121, Madison; Murray, 4695, Spring Place; 
Muscogee, 11,699, Columbus; Newton, 1 1,628, Covington ; Oglethorpe, 
10,868, Lexington ; Paulding, 2556, Van Wert ; Pike, 9176, Zebulon ; 
Pulaski, 5389, Hawkinsville ; Putnam, 10,260, Eatonton ; Rabun, 1912, 
Clayton; Randolph, 8276, Cuthbert; Richmond, 11,932, Augusta ; Scri- 
ven, 4794, Jacksonboro'; Stewart, 12,933, Lumpkin; Sumpter, 5759, 
Americus; Talbot, 15,627, Talbotton; Talliaferro, 5190, Crawfords- 
ville ; Tatnall, 2724, Reidsville ; Telfair, 2763, Jacksonville ; Thomas, 
6766, Thomasville ; Troup, 15,733, Lagrange ; Twiggs, 8,422, Marion ; 
Union, 3152, Blairsville; Upson, 9408, Thomaston ; Walker, 6572, La- 
fayette ; Walton, 10,209, Monroe; Ware, 2323, Waresboro'; Warren, 
9789, Warrenton ; Washington, 10,565, Sandersville; Wayne, 1258, 
Wayne C. H.; Wilkes, 10,148, Washington ; Wilkinson, 6842, Irwinton. 
Milledgeville, situated on the W. bank of the Oconee R., at the head of 
steamboat navigation, *and at the junction of Fishing Cr., is the seat of 
government. 



FLORIDA. 

Page 148.— Lesson 109.— Maps No. 5 and 12. 

Map No. 5. — Q. What bounds Florida on the north ? 
A. Ga., and Ala. 
Q. On the east ? 
A. Atlantic Ocean. 
Q. West and south ? 
A. Gulf of Mexico. 
Q. What Cape is on the east coast ? 
A. Cannaveral. 
Q. What Capes on the west ? 
A. St. Bias, Romans, and Sable. 
Q. What Bays on the west ? 

A. Pensacola, Apalachee, Vacassar, Tampa, and Chatham. 
Q. What are the two chief lakes ? 
A. George, and Okee-cho-bee. 

Map No. 12.— Q. What river separates Florida from Ala- 
bama 1 

A. Perdido. 



FLORIDA. 1G1 

#. What from Georgia ? 

A. St. Mary's. 

Q. What rivers flow into Pensacola Bay ? 

A. Escambia, Black Water, and Yellow Water. 

Q. What into Choctawhatchie Bay ? 

A. Choctawhatchie. 

Q. Into Apalachee Bay 1 

A. Ocklockony, and Oscilla. 

Q. Into Vacassar Bay ? 

A. Suwanee. 

Q. What river flows into the Atlantic Ocean north of St. Au- 
gustine ? 

A. St. John's. 

Q. What into the Gulf of Mexico at Apalachicola ? 

A. Apalachicola. 

Q. Tell the lengths of the seven rivers that have figures 
attached to them. 

A. Escambia, 250 ms. ; Choctawhatchie, 200 ; Apalachicola, 
550; Ocklockony, 200 ; Oscilla, 100; Suwanee, 300; St. John's, 
250. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Tallahassee ? 

A. 1500. (M. A.) 

Q. St. Augustine ? 

A. 2500. (M. A.) 

Q. Pensacola? 

A. 3000. (M. A.) 

Q. In what counties are these towns? 

A. Tallahassee is in Leon ; St. Augustine, in St. John ; Pen- 
sacola, in Escambia. 

Florida, the southernmost of the Southern States (having been recently 
admitted into the Union), is bounded N. by Ala. and Ga. ; E. by the Atlan- 
tic ; S. and W. by the Gulf of Mexico ; and W. by a small part of Ala. 
It lies between 25° and 31° N. lat., and between 80° and 87° 44' W. long., 
and between 3° and 10° 44' W. from W. It is 385 ms. long, and from 50 
to 200 wide, containing 55,000 sq. ms., or 35,200,000 acres. The popula- 
tion in 1830, was 34,723; in 1840, 54,477; of which 16,456 were white 
males, 11,487 females; free coloured persons, males 398, females 419; 
slaves, males 13,038, females 12,679. Employed in agriculture, 12,117; 
in commerce, 481 ; in manufactures and trades, 1177 ; navigating the ocean, 
435 ; do. canals and rivers, 118 ; learned professions and engineers, 204. 

This state is divided into 20 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, were as follow: West Florida. — Escambia, 3993, 
Pensacola 5 Walton, 1461, Euchee Anna. Middle Florida. — Gadsden, 
5992, Quincy ; Hamilton, 1464, Jasper; Jefferson, 5713, Monticello ; 
Leon, 10,713, Tallahassee; Madison, 2644, Madison. East Florida. — 
Alachua, 2282, Newnansville ; Columbia, 2102, Lancaster; Duvall, 
4156, Jacksonville; Hillsborough, 452, Fort Brooks; Mosq.uito, 73, 
New Smyrna ; Nassau, 1892, Nassau C. H. ; St. John's, 2694, St. Augus- 

14* 



162 ALABAMA. 

tine : South Florida. — Dade, 446, Key Biscayune ; Monroe, J588, Key 

West: Apalachicola District Caxhoun, 1142, St. Joseph ; Frankxin, 

1030, Apalachicola ; Jackson, 4681, Marianna ; Washington, 859, 
Roche's Bluff. 

Tallahassee, in Leon county, 22 miles N. of St. Mark's, is the seat of 
government. 



ALABAMA. 
Page 150.— Lesson 110.— Map No. 12. 

Q. What bounds Alabama on the north ? 
A. Tenn. 
Q. The east ? 
A. Ga. 
Q. The west? 
A. Miss. 

Q. What state and gulf on the south ? 
A. Flor., and the Gulf of Mexico. 
Q. What river separates Alabama from Florida ? 
A. Perdido. 

Q. What river flows into Mobile Bay ? 
. A. Mobile. 

Q. What two rivers form Mobile River ? 

A. Tombigbee and Alabama. 

Q. What rivers form the Alabama ? 

A, Coosa, and Tallapoosa. 

Q. What river flows through the northern part of the state ? 

A. Tennessee. 

Q. On what river is Tuscaloosa ?* 

A. On the Black Warrior or Tuscaloosa. 

Q. How long is the Tombigbee ? 

A. 500 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Alabama ? 

A. 600 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Coosa. 

A. 300 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Tallapoosa? 

A. 200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Mobile ? 

A. 12,500. (M. A.) 

Q. Wetumpka? 

A. 3000. (M. A.) 

* Tuscaloosa, cap. of Tuscaloosa co., Ala., and of the state, is situated on 
the S. E. side of Black Warrior or Tuscaloosa R., at the lower falls, on an 
elevated plain, at the head of steamboat navigation on the R. ; 160 ms. 
S. S. W. from Huntsville, 355 ms. N. from Mobile, by course of river, 256 
ms. N. from Mobile by land, 818 ms. from W. 



ALABAMA. 163 

Q. Huntsvillle? 

A. 2500. (M. A.) 

Q. Tuscaloosa? 

A. 2000. (M. A.) 

Q. Florence? 

A. 2000. (M. A.) 

Q. Montgomery? 

A. 2000. (M. A.) 

Q. In what county is Mobile ? 

A. Mobile. 

Q. Tuscaloosa? 

A. Tuscaloosa. 

Q. Florence ? 

A. Lauderdale. 

Q. Huntsville? 

A. Madison. 

Q. Wetumpka? 

A. Coosa. 

Q. How many miles are the following rivers navigable for 
steamboats from the sea : viz., Tennessee ? 

A. 1500. (M. A.) 

Q. Tombigbee ? 

A, 460. (M. A.) 

Q. Black Warrior ? 

A. 400. (M. A.) 

Q. Alabama ? 

A. 460. (M. A.) 

Q. In what year was the battle of Tohopeka fought ? 

A. In 1814. (M. A.) 

Q. On what river is Florence ? * 

A. On the Tennessee. 

Q. Decatur ?t 

A. On the Tennessee. 

Alabama, one of the Southern States, is bounded on the N. by Tenn. ; 
E. by Ga. ; S. by Flor., and the Gulf of Mexico ; and W. by Miss. It is 
between 30° 10' and 35° N. lat., and between 85° and 88° 30 7 W. long., 
and between 8° and 11° 30' W. long, from W. It is 317 ms. long from N. 
to S., and 174 broad from E. to W. It contains 51,770 sq. ms., or 33,140,800 
acres. The pop. in 1810 was less than 10,000 ; in 1816, 29,683 ; in 1818, 
70,544 ; in 1820, 127,901 ;.in 1727, 244,041 ; in 1830, 308,997 ; in 1840, 

* Florence, cap. of Lauderdale co., Ala., is situated on the N. side of 
Tennessee R., 1 m. above the mouth of Cypress Cr., and immediately below 
the Muscle Shoals; 135 ms. N. by W. from Tuscaloosa, 780 ms. from W. 

j- Decatur, Morgan co., Ala., is situated on the S. side of Tennessee R., 
at the E. termination of the Tuscumbia and Decatur railroad : 139 ms. 
N. N. E. from Tuscaloosa, 739 ms. from W. 



1G4 Mississippi. 

590,756, of whom 253,532 were slaves. Free white males, 176,692 ; do. 
females, 158,493; free coloured males, 1030; do. females, 1009. Em- 
ployed in agriculture, 177,439; in commerce, 2212; in manufactures and 
trades, 7195 ; navigating the ocean, 256 ; do. canals, rivers, &c, 758; 
mining 96 ; learned professions, 1514. It is divided into 49 counties, which, 
with their population in 1840, and their capitals, were as follows : Northern 

District Benton, 14,260, Jacksonville; Blount, 5570, Blountsville ; 

Cherokee, 8773, Jefferson ; De Kalb, 5929, Lebanon ; Fayette, 6942, 
Fayette C. H. ; Franklin, 14,270, Russelville ; Jackson, 15,715, Belle- 
fonte ; Lauderdale, 14,485, Florence; Lawrence, 13,313, Moulton ; 
Limestone, 14,374, Athens; Madison, 25,706, Huntsville ; Marion, 
5847, Pikeville; Marshall, 7553, Warrenton; Morgan, 9841, Somer- 
ville ; Randolph, 4973, McDonald; St. Clair, 5638, Ashville ; Talladega, 
12,587, Talladega. Southern District. — Autauga, 14,342, Kingston; 
Baldwin, 2951, Blakeley ; Barbour, 12,024, Clayton; Bibb, 8284, 
Centreville ; Butler, 8685, Greenville ; Chambers, 17,333, Lafayette ; 
Clarke, 8640, Macon ; Conecuh, 8197, Sparta ; Coosa, 6995, Rockford ; 
Covington, 2435, Montezuma ; Dale, 7397, Daleville • Dallas, 25,199, 
Cahawba ; Greene, 24,024, Erie ; Henry, 5787, Abbeville ; Jefferson, 
7131, Elyton; Lowndes, 19,539, Haynesville; Macon, 11,247, Tuskegee ; 
Marengo, 17,264, Linden; Mobile, 18,741, Mobile; Monroe, 10,680, 
Monroeville; Montgomery, 24,574, Montgomery ; Perry, 19,086, Marion ; 
Pickens, 17,118, Carrolton ; Pike, 10,108, Troy; Russell, 13,513, 
Crocketsville ; Shelby, 6112, Columbiana; Sumter, 29,937, Livingston ; 
Tallapoosa, 6444, Dadeville ; Tuscaloosa, 16,583, Tuscaloosa ; Walker, 
4032, Jasper; Washington, 5300, Barryton ; Wilcox, 15,278, Barbours- 
ville. 

Tuscaloosa, the seat of government, is situated on the S. E. side of Black 
Warrior or Tuscaloosa r.: on an elevated plain, at the head of steamboat 
navigation on the r., it is 217 ms. N. of Mobile by land, and 818 miles S. W. 
from Washington City. 



MISSISSIPPI. 
Page 152.— Lesson 111.— Map No. 12. 

Q. What state bounds Mississippi on the north ? 

A. Tenn. 

Q. On the south? 

A. La., and the Gulf of Mexico. 

Q. On the east? 

A. Ala. 

Q. On the west? 

A. Ark., and La. 

Q. What river separates it from Louisiana and Arkansas ? 

A. Mississippi. 

Q. On what river is Natchez ?* 

A. On the Mississippi. 

* Natchez, city, and cap. of Adams co., Miss., is situated on the E. bank 
of the Mississippi r., mostly on a bluff, elevated 1 50 ft. above the level of the 



Mississippi. 165 

Q. Jackson?* 

A. On Pearl r. 

q. Grand Gulf?t 

A. On the Mississippi. 

Q. Vicksburg?;}; 

A. On the Mississippi r. 

Q. Manchester, or Yazoo City ?§ 

A. On Yazoo r. 

q. Grenada ?[| 

A. On Yalabusha r. 

q. Columbus ?H 

A. On the Tombigbee r. 

q. What is the population of each of these towns ? 

A. Natchez, 5000 ; Jackson, 1500; Grand Gulf, 1500; Vicks- 
burg, 3000 ; Manchester, or Yazoo City, 1000 ; Grenada, 1000 ; 
Columbus, 3000. (M. A.) 

q. How many miles from the sea do steamboats ascend the 
Tombigbee ? 

A. 460 ms. (M. A.) 

q. Tallahatchie? 

A. 900 ms. (M. A.) 

q. Yalabusha? 

A. 800 ms. (M.A.) 

q. Big Black? 

A. 550 ms. (M. A.) 

river ; 100 ms. S. W. from Jackson, 155 ms. from New Orleans by land, and 
292 ms. by the course of the river ; 1110 ms. from W. 

* Jackson is the cap. of Hinds co., and of the state of Miss., 1010 ms. S. 
W. from W. It is situated on the W. bank of Pearl rY, which is navigable 
for boats to this place. 

-{- Grand Gulf, Claiborne co., Miss., is situated on Grand Gulf, a remark- 
able bend in the Mississippi r., 65 ms. S. by W. from Jackson ; 1075 ms. 
from W. ; 50 ms. by road above Natchez, and 360 ms. by the river above 
New Orleans. 

| Vicksburg, city, and cap. of Warren co., Miss., is 41 ms. W. by N. from 
Jackson, 1051 ms. from W. It is situated on the E. side of Mississippi r., 
400 ras. above New Orleans, and though of recent origin, it has become a 
large and flourishing place. 

§ Yazoo City, in Yazoo co., Miss., 60 ms. N. W. from Jackson, 1029 ms. 
from W. It is situated on the E. side of Yazoo r. 

[| Grenada, in Yalabusha co., Miss., 113 ms. N. from Jackson, 958 ms. 
from W. Situated on the S. side of Yalabusha r. It contains a U. S. land 
office, and several stores and dwellings. 

If Columbus, city, and cap. of Lowndes co., Miss., 141 ms. N. E. from 
Jackson, 885 ms. from W. Situated on the E. bank of Tombigbee r., 120 
ft. above the r., and at the head of steamboat navigation. 



166 Mississippi. 

Q. Pearl ? 

A. 220 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. How far is Vicksburg from the sea ? 

A. 520 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What kind of vessels ascend to it ? 

A. Ships. 

Q. In what county is Natchez ? 

A. Adams. 

Q. Vicksburg? 

A. Warren. 

Q. Jackson? 

A. Hinds. 

Q. Columbus? 

A. Lowndes. 

Q. Grand Gulf? 

A. Claiborne. 

Mississippi, one of the Southern States, is bounded N. by Tenn., E. by 
Ala. ; S. by the Gulf of Mexico and La. ; and W. by Pearl and Mississippi 
rivers, which separate it from the states of La. and Ark. It is between 30° 
10' and 35° N. lat., and between 88° 30' and 91° 35' W. long. ; and between 
1 1° 5' and 14° 26' W. long, from W. It is 339 ms. long from N. to S., and 
150 broad from E. to W., containing 48,000 sq. ms., or 30,720,000 acres. 

The population in 1816 was 45,929 j in 1820, 75,448 ; in 1830, 136,806; 
in 1840, 375,651 ; of which, 195,211 were slaves. Of the free population 
97,256 were white males ; 81,818 do. females ; 715 were coloured males ; 
654 do. females. Employed in agriculture, 139,724; in commerce, 1303 ; 
in manufactures and trades, 4151 ; navigating the ocean, 33 ; do. rivers, 
canals, &c, 100 ; learned professions, 1506. 

This state is divided into 56 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, were as follow: Northern District. — Attala, 
4303, Kosciusko; Bolivar, 1356, Bolivar; Carroll, 10,481, Carrollton ; 
Chickasaw, 2955, Houston ; Choctaw, 6010, Greensboro ; Coahoma, 
1290, Coahoma C.H. ; De Soto, 7002, Hernando; Itawamba, 5375, Ful- 
ton; Lafayette, 6531, Oxford ; Lowndes, 14,513, Columbus; Marshall, 
17,526, Holly Springs ; Monroe, 9250, Athens; Noxubee, 9975, Macon; 
Oktibbeha, 4276, Starkville ; Ponola, 4657, Ponola; Pontotoc, 4491, 
Pontotoc ; Taeeahatchie, 2985, Charleston ; Tippah, 9444, Ripley ; 
Tishamingo, 6681, Jacinto; Tunica, 821, Peyton; Winston, 4650, 
Louisville; Yaeabusha, 12,248, Coffeeville. Southern District — Adams, 
19,434, Natchez : Amite, 951 1, Liberty ; Claiborne, 13,078, Port Gibson; 
Clarke, 2986, Quitman; Copiah, 8954, Gallatin; Covington, 2717, 
Williamsburg; Franklin, 4775, Meadville ; Greene, 1636, Leakesville ; 
Hancock, 3367, Shieldsborough ; Hinds, 19,098, Raymond; Holmes, 
9452, Lexington; Jackson, 1965, Jackson C. H. ; Jasper, 3958, Pauld- 
ing; Jefferson, 11,650, Fayette; Jones, 1258, Ellisville; Kemper, 7663, 
De Kalb ; Lauderdale, 5358, Marion ; Lawrence, 5920, Monticello ; 
Leake, 2162, Carthage ; Madison, 15,530, Canton; Neshoba, 2437, 
Philadelphia; Newton, 2527, Decatur; Perry, 1899, Augusta; Pike, 
6151, Holmesville ; Rankin, 4631, Brandon ; Scott, 1653, Hillsborough; 



LOUISIANA. 167 

Simpson, 3380, Westville ; Smith, 1961, Raleigh ; Warren, 15,820, Vicks- 
burg; Washington, 7287, Princeton ; Watxe, 2120, Winchester ; Wil- 
kinson, 14,193, Woodville; Yazoo, 10,480, Benton. 

Jackson, situated on the W. bank of Pearl River, 1010 ms. S. W. from 
Washington City, is the seat of government. 



LOUISIANA. 

Page 154. — Lesson 112.— Map No. 12. 

Q. By what is Louisiana bounded on the north ? 

A. Ark. and Miss. 

Q. On the east ? 

A. Miss. 

Q. South? 

A. Gulf of Mexico. 

Q. West? 

A. Texas. 

Q. What rivers separate Louisiana from Mississippi ? 

A. Mississippi and Pearl. 

Q. What river from Texas ? 

A. Sabine. 

Q. What two lakes are in the eastern part of the state ? 

A. Pontchartrain, and Borgne. 

Q. What two in the southern part ? 

A. Calcasieu, and Mermentau. 

Q. How long is the Mississippi ? 

A. 4100 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Red River ? 

A. 1200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Washita? 

A. 500 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Sabine? 

A. 400 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Calcasieu ? 

A. 250 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Bayou Macon? 

A. 200 ms. (M. A.) 

Some rivers are termed Bayous in Louisiana. (M. G. p. 154.) 

Q. What is the population of New Orleans ? 

A. 102,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Donaldsonville ? 

A. 1000. (M. A.) 

Q. Baton Rouge ? 

A. 1500. (M. A.) 



168 LOUISIANA. 

Q. Alexandria? 

A. 1500. (M. A.) 

Q. Natchitoches ? 

A. 2500. (M. A.) 

Q. In what parishes are these situated 1 

A. New Orleans, in New Orleans ; Donaldsonville, in Ascen- 
sion ; Baton Rouge, in East Baton Rouge ; Alexandria, in Rapides ; 
Natchitoches, in Natchitoches. 

Q. When was the battle of New Orleans fought ? 

A. In 1815. (M.A.) 

Louisiana, one of the Southern States, is bounded N. by Ark. and Miss.; 
E. by Miss., from which it is separated by the Mississippi River, to the 31° 
N. lat., thence E. on that parallel to Pearl River, and down that river to its 
mouth ; E. and S. by the Gulf of Mexico ; and W. by Texas, from which 
it is separated by the Sabine River to 32° N. lat., and thence due N. to lat. 
33° N., the S. boundary of Arkansas. It is 240 miles long from N. to S., 
and 210 broad from E. to W., containing 48,320 sq. ms., or 30,934,800 
acres. The population in 1810, was 76,556 ; in 1820, 153,407; in 1830, 
215,575; in 1840, 352,411, of which 168,452 were slaves. Of the free 
population 89,747 were white males ; 68,710 do. females ; 11,526 coloured 
males ; 13,976 do. females. Employed in agriculture, 79,289 ; in commerce, 
8549; in manufactures and trades, 7565; navigating the ocean, 1322; canals, 
lakes, &c, 662 ; learned professions, 1018. 

This State is divided into 38 parishes, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, were as follow. Eastern District. — Ascension, 
6951, Donaldsonville; Assumption, 7141,Napoleonville; E. Baton Rouge, 
8138, Baton Rouge; W. Baton Rouge, 4638, W. Baton Rouge C.H.; 
Carroll, 4237, Providence; Concordia, 9414, Vidalia; E. Feliciana, 
11,893, Clinton; W. Feliciana, 10,910, St. Francisville ; Iberville, 
8495, Plaquemine; Jefferson, 10,470, Lafayette ; Lafourche Interior, 
7303, Thibodeaux ; Livingston, 2315, Springfield; Madison, 5142, 
Richmond; Orleans, 102,193, New Orleans; Plaq.uemine, 5060, Fort 
Jackson ; Point Coupee, 7898, Point Coupee; St. Bernard, 3237, St. 
Bernard C. H.; St. Charles, 4700, St. Charles C.H.; St. Helena, 3525, 
Greensburg ; St. James, 8548, Bringiers ; St. John Baptist, 5776, Bonnet 
Carre; St. Tammany, 4598, Covington ; Terre Bonne, 4410, Houma; 
Washington, 2649, Franklinton. Western District. — Avoyelles, 6616, 
Marksville ; Caddo, 5282, Shreveport ; Calcasieu, 2057, Lisbon ; Cald- 
well, 2017, Columbia; Catahoola, 4955, Harrisonburg; Claiborne, 
6185, Overton; La Fayette, 7841, Vermilionvilie ; Natchitoches, 
14,350, Natchitoches; Rapides, 14,132, Alexandria; St. Landry, 15,233, 
Opelousas; St. Martin's, 8676, St. Martinsville; St. Mart's, 8950, 
Franklin ; Union, 1838, Farmersville ; Washita, 4640, Monroe. 

New Orleans, the capital, is on the N. bank of the Mississippi R., 105 ms. 
from its mouth, and 1172 S. W. from Washington City. 

In the year 1699, the settlement of Louisiana was commenced by the 
French; in 1762 they ceded the whole region to Spain, which power, in the 
year 1800, reconveyed it to France ; three years afterwards it was purchased 
from the latter by the United States, for §15,000,000. This purchase in- 
cluded all the territory belonging to the U. S. which lies between the Missis- 
sippi River and the Rocky Mts., with the exception of Texas. 



TEXAS. 169 

TEXAS. 
Page 155.^Zessorc 113.— Map No. 13. 

Q. What bounds Texas on the north ? 

A. Indian Ter. 

Q. South? 

A. Gulf of Mexico. 

Q. East? 

A. La., and Indian Ter. 

Q. West? 

A. Mexico. 

Q. What river forms the north boundary ? 

A. Red. 

#. East? 

«#. Sabine. 

Q. West? 

.#. Rio Grande. 

Q. Which are the other chief rivers of Texas ? 

A. Colorado, Brazos, Trinity, and Neuces. 

Q. How long are they ? 

A. Colorado is 700 ms. long ; Brazos, 650 ; Trinity, 450 ; 
Neuces, 350. (M. A.) 

Q. From what lake does the Brazos River flow ? 

A. Saline Lake. 

Q. On what river is Austin ? 

A. Colorado. 

Q. Into what bay does it flow ? 

A. Matagorda. 

Q. How far do steamboats ascend the Brazos River ? 

A. To the Falls. 

Q. When, and where, was the battle of San Jacinto fought ? 

A. In 1836, near the river San Jacinto. (M. A.) 

Q. Point out the Cross Timbers. This is a remarkable forest 
in the midst of the prairies : it extends northward from the Brazos 
River, for a distance of a hundred miles. (M. G. p. 155.) 

Q. What Indian tribes are there in Texas ? 

A. Apaches, Comanches, Lipans, and Kioways. (M. A.) 
Texas is bounded N. by the Indian Ter. ; E. by Ark. and La. ; S. E. by 
the Gulf of Mexico ; and S. W. and W. by Mexico, from which it is sepa- 
rated by the Rio Grande. (M. A.) 

Austin, the capital, is on the left bank of the Colorado River, 1681 miles 
S. W. from Washington City. 

This state lies between 26° and 40° N. lat, and 93° 40' and 107° 
W. long. It is separated from Mexico on the W. and S. W. by the Rio 
Grande ; on the N., the Red River, and the Arkansas chiefly separate it from 
the Indian Ter. ; on the E. the River Sabine divides it from La.; and S. E. it 
borders the Gulf of Mexico. Length, from its S. to its N. W. extremity, 
15 



170 WESTERN STATES. 

about 1000 ms.; greatest breadth, from E. to W., near 750 ms. Area esti- 
mated at 320,000 sq. ms. Pop. at 250,000, of whom about 25,000 are 
slaves. 



WESTERN STATES. 
Pages 158-9.— Lesson 115.— Map No. 5. 

Q. Which is the largest Western State ? 

A. Mo. 

Q. The smallest? 

A. la. 

Q. Which is the most northern? 

A. Mich. 

Q. Southern? 

A. Ark. 

Q. Eastern? 

A. Oo. 

Q. Western? 

A. Mo. 

Q. Which is the largest western territory ? 

A. Oregon. 

Q. The most northern and western ? 

A. Oregon. 

Q. The most eastern ? 

A. Wis. 

Q. Most southern ? 

A. Indian. 

The western states and territories extend from N. latitude 33 
degrees to 49. (M. A.) 

Q. How much latitude then do they include ? 

A. 16°. 

They extend from about 4 degrees of longitude to 56 degrees 
west from Washington. (M. A.) 

Q. How much longitude do they include ? 

A. 52°. 

Q. What states have the Mississippi River for their western 
boundarv ? 

A. Tenn., Ky., 111., and Wis. 

Q. Which have the Mississippi for their eastern boundary ? 

A. Ark., Mo., and Io. 

Q. Which states have the Ohio for their southern boundary? 

A. Oo., la., and 111. 

Q. What state has the Ohio for its northern boundary ? 

A. Ky. 

Q. Which has the Ohio for its western boundary ? 

A. Va. 



onio. 171 

Q. How many miles is it by the scale from the mouth of 
Columbia River eastward to the Rocky Mts. ? 

A. About 560. (M. A.) 

Q. How many miles is it from the Rocky Mts. to Lake Michi- 
gan, measured on the parallel of 44 degrees ? 

A. About 1120. (M.A.) 

Q. How many miles is it from the head of the Arkansas to the 
head of the Alleghany river ? 

A, About 1550. (M. A.) 

This is about the greatest extent that can be measured through 
the centre of the Mississippi valley E. and W. (M. G., p. 159.) 

Q. How far is it from the head to the mouth of the Mississippi 
river in a straight line ? 

A. About 1320 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. How far is it from the mouth of the Ohio R. to the northern 
boundary of Illinois ? 

A. About 370 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. How far is it from the same point to the east boundary of 
Kentucky ? 

A. About 373 ms. (M. A.) 

The states of Missouri and Indiana are about the same extent 
from north to south. 

Q. What is the number of miles ? 

A. About 287. (M. A.) 







OHIO. 










Page 161.- 


-Lesson 116.— 


-Map 


No. 


14, 


Q. 


What bounds Ohi 


;o on the north 


t 






A. 


Mich., and Lake Erie. 








Q- 


South? 










A. 


Ky., and Va. 










Q- 


East ? 










A. 


Va., and Pa. 










Q- 


West? 










A. 


la. 











Q. What river forms its south boundary ? 

A. Ohio. 

Q. What rivers flow into Lake Erie ? 

A. Maumee, Sandusky, Huron, and Cuyahoga. 

Q. Which flow into the Ohio River ? 

A. Miami, Little Miami, Scioto, and Muskingum. 

Q. What is the population of Cincinnati ? 

A. 46,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Zanesville? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 



17:2 omo. 

Q. Cleveland ? 

A. 6000. (M. A.) 

Q. Steubenville ? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. Columbus? 

A. 6000. (M. A.) 

q. Chillicothe? 

A. 4000. (M. A.) 

Q. Dayton? 

A. 6000. (M. A.) 

Q. Portsmouth? 

A. 1500. (M. A.) 

Q. In what counties are these places ? 

A. Cincinnati is in Hamilton ; Zanesville, in Muskingum ; 
Cleveland, in Cuyahoga ; Steubenville, in Jefferson ; Columbus, 
in Franklin ; ChkMicothe, in Ross ; Dayton, in Montgomery ; 
Portsmouth, in Scioto. 

Q. How long is the Ohio River ? 

A. 1300 miles. (M. A.) 

Q. Maumee ? 

A. 300. (M. A.) 

Q. Miami? 

A. 100. (M. A.) 

Q. Scioto? 

A. 250. (M. A.) 

Q. Muskingum? 

A. 250. (M. A.) 

Q. What road extends through the state from east to west ? 

A. National. 

Q. On what rivers are Zanesville, Dayton, and the other chief 
towns 1 

A. Zanesville is on the Muskingum ;* Dayton, on the Great 
Miami ;t Cincinnati, on the Ohio -,\ Cleveland, on the Cuyahoga, 

* Zanesville, capital of Muskingum co., Oo., 54 ms. E. from Columbus, 
339 ms. from W. The village is situated on the E. side of Muskingum R., 
opposite to the mouth of Licking R., on the national road. 

j- Dayton, city, and cap. of Montgomery co., Oo ., 68 ms. W. by S. from 
Columbus, 52 ms. N. from Cincinnati, 461 ms. from W. It is in 39° 46' 
N. lat., and 84° 3' W. long., beautifully situated on the E. bank of Great 
Miami R., immediately below the confluence of Mad R., its main eastern 
branch, and 1 m. below the mouth of Stillwater, its pi-incipal western tribu- 
tary. 

t Cincinnati, city, port of entry, and capital of Hamilton co., Oo., is situ- 
ated in the S. W. part of the state, 116 ms. S. W. from Columbus; 120 ms. 
S. E. from Indianapolis, la.; 90 ms. N. N.W. from Lexington, Ky. ; 270 ms. 
N. N. E. from Nashville, Tenn. ; 455 ms. below Pittsburg, Pa., by the course 



oino. 173 

at its mouth;* Steubenville, on the Ohio;! Columbus, on the 
Scioto ;X Chillicothe, on the Scioto ;§ Portsmouth, on the Scioto ;|| 
Marietta,on the Muskingum ;^[ Gallipolis, on the Ohio ;** Huron, 
on the Huron, at its mouth ;tt Toledo, on the Maumee.|| 

of the river; 132 ms. above Louisville, Ky. ; 494 ms. above the mouth of 
Ohio R. ; and 1447 ms. above New Orleans, La., by the Mississippi and Ohio 
rivers ; 518 ms., by post route, W. from Baltimore ; 617 ms. W. by S. from 
Philadelphia; 650 ms. from New York, by lake Erie, the Erie canal, and 
Hudson River ; and 492 ms. from Washington city. It is in 39° 6' 30" 
N. lat., and 7° 24' 25" W. long. It is the largest city of the West N. of 
New Orleans, and the sixth in pop. in the U. S. Situated on the N. bank 
of Ohio R., opposite to the mouth of Licking R., which enters the Ohio be- 
tween Newport and Covington, Ky. 

* Cleveland, city, port of entry, and the capital of Cuyahoga co., Oo., 146 
ms. N. E. by N. from Columbus, 395 ms. from W. Cleveland, the emporium 
of northern Ohio, and, next to Cincinnati, the most important town in the 
"tate, possesses a commanding situation on Lake Erie, at the mouth of the 
Cuyahoga R., and the northern termination of the Ohio canal, by which it 
is connected with Ohio R., and is in 41° 31' N. lat., and 81° 46' W. long, 
from Greenwich, or 4° 44' W. long, from W. It is 130 ms. N.W. from 
Pittsburg, 146 ms. N. E. from Columbus, 200 by water from Buffalo, 130 
ms. from Detroit, 359 ms. from W. 

f Steubenville, cap. of Jefferson co., Oo., 141 ms. E. N. E. from Colum- 
bus, 264 ms. from W. Situated on the W. bank of Ohio R. 

| Columbus, city, and cap. of Franklin co., Oo., and of the state, 139 ms. 
S. W. by S. from Cleveland, 110 ms. N. E. from Cincinnati, 1 75 ms. S. from 
Detroit, Mich. ; 184 ms. S.W. from Pittsburg, Pa. ; 393 ms. from W. It is 
in 39° 47' N. lat., and 83° 3' W. long., and 6° W. long, from W. It is 
situated on the E. bank of Scioto R., immediately below the confluence of 
Whetstone R. When this place was fixed on as the seat of the legislature, 
in 1812, it was an entire wilderness. 

§ Chillicothe, city, cap. of Ross co., Oo., 45 ms. S. from Columbus, 400 
ms. from W. It is handsomely situated on the W. bank of Scioto R., in 
Scioto township. Its plan has been thought to resemble that of Philadelphia. 

|| Portsmouth, cap. of Scioto co., Oo., 90 ms. S. from Columbus, 424 ms. 
from W. Situated on the E. bank of the Scioto R., at its entrance into Ohio 
R., and at the termination of the Ohio canal. 

f Marietta, cap. of Washington co., Oo., 104 ms. E. S. E. from Colum- 
bus, 300 ms. from W. Situated on both sides of Muskingum R,, at its en- 
trance into the Ohio R. 

** Gallipolis, cap. of Gallia co., Oo., 100 ms. S. S. E. from Columbus, 358 
ms. from W. It is pleasantly situated on the W. bank of Ohio R. 

■j-j- Huron is in Erie co., Oo., 113 ms. N. by E. from Columbus, 399 ms. 
from W. The village is situated at the mouth of Huron R., on Lake Erie, 
where is a good harbor. 

\l Toledo, cap. of Lucas co.,Oo., 134 ms. N, N. W. from Columbus, 
464 ms. from W. Situated on the W. bank of Maumee R. near its entrance 
into Maumee Bay. 
15* 



174 oiiio. 

Ohio, the northeastern of the Western States, is bounded N. by Mich, 
and Lake Erie; E. by Pa. and Va. ; S. by the Ohio R., which separates it 
from Va, and Ky. ; and W. by la. It is between 38° 30' and 42° N. lat., 
and between 80° 35' and 84° 47' W. long., and between 3° 31' and 7° 41' 
W. long from W. It is 210 ms. long from N. to S., and 200 ms. broad 
from E. to W., containing 44,000 sq. ms., or 28,160,000 acres. The 
population in 1790, was 3000 ; in 1800, 45,365 ; in 1810, 230,760 ; in 
1820, 581,434; in 1830, 937,637; in 1840, 1,519,467; being the third in 
population in the U. S. Of these, 775,360 were white males ; 726,762 do. 
females ; 8740 were free coloured males ; 8602 do. females. Employed in 
agriculture, 272,579 ; in commerce, 9201 ; in manufactures and trades, 
66,265 ; in mining, 704; navigating the ocean, 212 ; do. rivers, canals, and 
lakes, 3323 ; learned professions, 5663. 

This state is divided into 79 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, are as follow: Adams, 13,183, West Union; 
Allen, 9079, Lima; Ashtabula, 23,724, Jefferson; Athens, 19,109, 
Athens; Belmont, 30,901, St. Clairsville ; Brown, 22,715, Georgetown; 
Butler, 28,173, Hamilton ; Carroll, 18,108, Carrollton ; Champaign, 
16,721, Urbanna; Clark, 16,882, Springfield; Clermont, 23,106, Ba- 
tavia ; Clinton, 15,719, Wilmington; Columbiana, 40,378, New Lisbon; 
Coshocton, 21,590, Coshocton ; Crawford, 13,152, Bucyrus ; Cuyahoga, 
26,506, Cleveland; Darke, 13,282, Greenville; Delaware, 22,060, Dela- 
ware; Erie, 12,599, Sandusky City; Fairfield, 31,924, Lancaster; 
Fayette, 10,984, Washington ; Franklin, 25,049, Columbus; Gallia, 
13,444, Gallipolis; Geauga, 16,297, Chardon ; Greene, 17,528, Xenia ; 
Guernsey, 27,748, Cambridge; Hamilton, 80,148, Cincinnati; Han- 
cock, 9986, Findlay ; Hardin, 4598, Kenton ; Harrison, 20,099, Cadiz; 
Henry, 2503, Napoleon ; Highland, 22,269, Hillsboro' ; Hocking, 9741, 
Logan; Holmes, 18,088, Millersburg ; Huron, 23,933, Norwalk; Jack- 
son, 9744, Jackson ; Jefferson, 25,030, Steubenville ; Knox, 29,579, 
Mount Vernon ; Lake, 13,719, Painesville; Lawrence, 9738, Burlington ; 
Licking, 35,096, Newark; Logan, 14,015, Belle Fontaine; Lorain, 
18,467, Elyria ; Lucas, 9382, Toledo ; Madison, 9025, London ; Marion, 
14,765, Marion; Medina, 18,352, Medina; Meigs, 11,452, Chester; 
Mercer, 8277, Celina ; Miami, 19,688, Troy; Monroe, 18,521, Wood- 
field; Montgomery, 31,938, Dayton ; Morgan, 20,852, McConnelsville ; 
Muskingum, 38,749, Zanesville ; Ottawa, 2148, Port Clinton ; Pauld- 
ing, 1034, Charloe; Perrt, 19,344, Somerset; Pickaway, 19,725, Cir- 
cleville ; Pike, 7626, Piketon ; Preble, 19,482, Eaton ; Portage, 22,965, 
Ravenna; Putnam, 5189, Putnam ; Richland, 44,532, Mansfield ; Ross, 
27,460, Chillicothe; Sandusky, 10,182, Lower Sandusky; Scioto, 11,192, 
Portsmouth; Seneca, 18,128, Tiffin ; Shelby, 12,154, Sidney; Stark, 
34,603, Canton ; Summit, 22,560, Akron ; Trumbull, 38,107, Warren ; 
Tuscarawas, 25,631, New Philadelphia; Union, 8422, Marysville ; Van 
Wert, 1577, Van Wert; Warren, 23,141, Lebanon; Washington, 
20,823, Marietta; Wayne, 35,808, Wooster ; Williams, 4465, Bryan; 
Woon, 5357, Perrysburg. 

Columbus, on the Scioto, just below the confluence of the Whetstone, is 
the seat of government. This city is in 39° 47' N. lat., and 83° 3' W. 
long., and 6° W. long, from Washington ; 110 ms. N. E. of Cincinnati, 139 
S. W. of Cleveland, 393 W. by N. from Washington city. 



KENTUCKY. 175 

KENTUCKY. 

Page 162.— Lesson 111.— Map No. 14. 

Q. What states bound Kentucky on the north ? 
A. TIL, la., and Oo. 
Q. South? 
A. Tenn. 
Q. East? 
A. Va. 
Q. West? 
A. Mo., and Ark. 

Q. What river forms its northern boundary ? 
«#. Ohio. 
Q. Its western ? 
A. Mississippi. 

Q. What river and mountains are its eastern boundary ? 
A. Big Sandy River, and Cumberland Mts. 
Q. Which are the principal rivers in the state ? ' 
A. Tennessee, Cumberland, Green, Kentucky, and Licking. 
Q. Tell the lengths of all these. 

A. Tennessee is 900 ms. ; Cumberland, 600 ; Greene, 300 ; 
Kentucky, 350; Licking, 300. (M. A.) 
Q. On what river is Frankfort ?* 
A. On Kentucky R. 
Q. Louisville?! 
A. On the Ohio R. 
Q. Maysville ?{ 
A. On the Ohio R. 
Q. Covington ?§ 
A. On the Ohio R. 

* Frankfort, capital of Franklin co., Ky., and also of the state, is 22 ms. 
W. N. W. of Lexington, 54 ms. E. of Louisville, 102 ms. S. S. W. of 
Cincinnati, 542 ms. W. by S. from W. In 38° 14' N. lat., and 84° 40' W. 
long. Situated on the E. side of Kentucky R., 60 ms. above its entrance 
into Ohio R., on a semicircular alluvial plain, from 150 to 200 ft. lower than 
the table-land in the rear. 

■{• Louisville city, port of entry, and cap. of Jefferson co., Ky., 54 ms. W. 
of Frankfort, 596 ms. from W. Situated on the S. side of Ohio R., at the 
head of the rapids, in 38° 8' N. Iat., and 85° 26' W. long., 120 ms. below 
Cincinnati. 

* Maysville city, Mason co., Ky., 81 ms. N. E. of Frankfort, 461 ms. 
from W. It is situated on the S. side of Ohio R., on a narrow bottom 
between the R. and the high hills which rise in its rear. 

§ Covington city, Kenton co., Ky., S5 ms. N. by E. of Frankfort, 493 ms. 
from W. It is situated on the Ohio R., at the mouth of Licking cr., on its 



176 • KENTUCKY. 

Q. What is the population of each of these towns ? 
A. Frankfort, 2000; Louisville, 21,000; Maysville, 2750; 
Covington, 2000. (M. A.) 
Q. Of Lexington ? 
A. 7000. (M. A.) 

Q. Which is the most northern county ? 
A. Boone. 
Q. Eastern? 
A. Floyd. 
Q. Western? 
A. Hickman. 

Kentucky, one of the Western States, is bounded N. by Oo., la., and 
111., from which it is separated by the Ohio River ; E. by Va.; S, by Tenn.; 
and W. by the Mississippi R. which separates it from Mo. It is between 
36° 30' and 39° 10' N. Iat., and between 81° 50' and 89° 20' W. long., 
and between 5° and 10° W. long, from W. Its greatest length is about 
400 ms., and breadth 170 ms., containing 40,000 sq. ms., or 25,600,000 
acres. The population in 1790, was 73,677; in 1800, 220,959; in 1810, 
406,511 ; in 1820, 564,317 ; in 1830, 688,844; in 1840, 779,828, of which 
182,258 were slaves. Of the free population, 305,323 were white males; 
284,930 do. females ; 3761 were coloured males; 3556 do. females. Em- 
ployed in agriculture, 197,738; in commerce, 3448; in manufactures and 
trades, 23,217; navigating the ocean, 44; canals, lakes, and rivers, 968; in 
mining, 331 ; learned professions, 2487. 

There are 90 counties in this state, which, with their pop. in 1840, and their 
caps., were as follow: Adair, 8466, Columbia ; Alien, 7329, Scottsville; 
Anderson, 5452, Lawrenceburg; Barren, 17,288, Glasgow; Bath, 9763, 
Owingsville; Boone, 10,034, Burlington ; Bourbon, 14,478, Paris; Brea- 
thitt, 2195, Breathitt; Bracken, 7053, Augusta; Breckenridge, 8944, 
Hardinsburg; Bullitt, 6334, Shepherdsville; Butler, 3898,Morgantown ; 
Caldwell, 10,365, Princeton; Calloway, 9794, Wadesborough ; C.orr- 
bell, 52 14, Newport ; Carroll, 3966, Carrollton; Carter, 2905, Grayson ; 
Caset, 4939, Liberty ; Christian, 15,587, Hopkinsville ; Clarke, 10,802, 
Winchester; Clay, 4607, Manchester ; Clinton, 3863, Albany ; Cumber- 
land, 6090, Burkesville; Daviess, 8331, Owensborough; Edmonson, 2914, 
Brownsville ; Estill, 5535, Irvine ; Fayette, 22,194, Lexington ; Flem- 
ing, 13,268, Flemingsburg ; Floyd, 6302, Prestonburg; Franklin, 9420, 
Frankfort; Gallatin, 4003, Warsaw; Garrard, 10,480, Lancaster; 
Grant, 4192, Williamstown ; Graves, 7465, Mayfield ; Grayson, 4461, 
Litchfield ; Greene, 14,212, Greensburg; Greenup, 6297, Greenupsburg; 
Hancock, 2581, Hawesville ; Hardin, 16,357, Elizabethtown ; Harlan, 
3015, Mt. Pleasant; Harrison, 12,472, Cynthiana; Hart, 7031, Mum- 
fordsville; Henderson,. 9548, Henderson; Henry, 10,115, New Castle; 
Hickman, 8968, Clinton; Hopkins, 9170, Madisonville ; Jefferson, 
36,346, Louisville; Jessamine, 9391, Nicholasville ; Kenton, 7816, 

W. side, directly opposite to Cincinnati, of which, from the arrangement of 
the streets, it appears like a continuation. Newport lies on the opposite side 
of the Licking. 



TENNESSEE. • 177 

Independence; Knox, 5722, Barbourville ; Laurel, 3079, London; Law- 
rence, 4730, Louisa; Lewis, 6306, Clarksburg; Lincoln, 10,187, Stan- 
ford; Livingston, 9025, Smithland; Logan, 13,615, Russellville; Madison, 
16,355, Richmond; Marion, 11,032, Lebanon; Mason, 15,719, Maysville; 
McCracken, 4745, Paducah ; Meade, 5786, Brandenburg; Mercer, 
18,720, Harrodsburg ; Monroe, 6526, Tompkinsville ; Montgomery, 9332, 
Mount Sterling; Morgan, 4603, West Liberty ; Muhlesbog, 6964, Green- 
ville ; Nelson, L3,637, Bardstown ; Nicholas, 8745, Carlisle ; Ohio, 6592, 
Hartford ; Oldham, 7380, La Grange ; Owen, 8232, Owen ton ; Pendleton, 
4455, Falmouth ; Perry, 3089, Hazard ; Pike, 3567, Pikeville ; Pulaskt, 
9620, Somerset ; Rockcastle, 3409, Mount Vernon ; Russell, 4238, 
Jamestown; Scott, 13,668, Georgetown; Shelby, 17,768, Shelby ville ; 
Simpson, 6537, Franklin; Spencer, 6581, Taylorsville ; Todd, 9991, Elk- 
ton; Trigg, 7716, Cadiz; Trtmble, 4480, Bedford; Union, 6673, 
Morganfield ; Warren, 15,446, Bowling Green; Washington, 10,596, 
Springfield ; Wayne, 7399, Monticello ; Whitley, 4673, Williamsburg ; 
Woodford, 11,740, Versailles. 

Frankfort, on the E. bank of the Kentucky R., 60 ms. above its entrance 
into the Ohio, is the seat of government. 



TENNESSEE. 
Page 164.— Lesson US.— Map No. 12. 

Q. What state bounds Tennessee on the north ? 

A. Ky. 

Q. On the south ? * 

A. Miss., Ala., and Ga. 

Q. East? 

A. N. C. 

Q. West? 

A. Ark. 

Q. What river separates this state from Arkansas ? 

A. Mississippi. 

Q. Which are the two principal rivers ? 

A. Tennessee and Cumberland. 

Q. Name the head branches of the Tennessee. 

A. Powell's, Clinch, Holston, and French Broad. 

Q. Tell how long all these rivers are. 

A. Mississippi is 4100 ms. ; Tennessee, 900 ; Cumberland, 
600; Powell's, 150; Clinch, 250; Holston, 300; French Broad, 
176. (M. A.) 

Q. How many miles from the sea do steamboats navigate the 
Hatchee, Cumberland, and Holston Rivers ? 

A. Hatchee, 1050 ; Cumberland, 1500 ; Holston, 2000. (M. A.) 

Q. To what towns do they ascend ? 

A. They ascend the Hatchee R. to Bolivar ; the Cumberland to 
Carthage ; and the Holston to Knoxville. (M. A.) 



178 TENNESSEE. 

Q. What mountains separate Tennessee from North Carolina ? 

A. Alleghany. 

The Alleghany mountains in this part, are distinguished by the 
local names of Stone Mt., Smoky Mt., &c. (M. G. p. 164.) 

Q. What mountains between the Tennessee and Cumberland 
Rivers ? 

A. Cumberland. 

Q. How high are they ? 

A. 2000 ft. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Nashville? 

A. 7000. (M. A.) 

Q. Memphis? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. Knoxville? 

A. 2000. (M. A.) 

Q. Columbia? 

A. 1500. (M. A.) 

Q. In what counties are each of these towns ? 

A. Nashville is in Davidson ; Memphis in Shelby ; Knoxville 
in Knox ; Columbia in Maury. 

Tennessee, one of the Western States, is bounded N. by Ky. ; E. by 
N. C. ; S. by Ga., Ala., and Miss. ; and W. by the Mississippi River, which 
separates it from Ark. and Mo. It lies between 35° and 36° 30' N. lat., 
and between 81° 30' and 90° 10' W. long., and between 4° 39' and 13° 
14' Wrfrom W. It is at its mean length 400 miles, and its mean breadth 
114 miles, containing 45,000 sq. ms„ or 28,800,000 acres. The population 
in 1790, was 35,691; in 1800, 105,602; in 1810, 261,727; in 1820, 
422,813; in 1830, 681,904; in 1840, 829,210; of which 183,059 were 
slaves. Of the free population, 325,434 were white males; 315,193 do. 
females ; 2796 free coloured males ; 2728 do. females. Employed in agri- 
culture, 227,739 ; in commerce, 2217; in manufactures and trades, 17,815; 
navigating the ocean, rivers, &c„ 302 ; learned professions, 2042. 

This state is divided into 72 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, were as follow: Eastern District. — Anderson, 
5688, Clinton; Bledsoe, 5676, Pikeville ; Blount, 11,745, Marysville; 
Bradley, 7385, Cleveland; Campbell, 6149, Jacksborough ; Carter, 
5372, Elizabethtown ; Claiborne, 9474, Tazewell ; Cocke, 6992, New- 
port; Grainger, 10,572, Rutledge ; Greene, 16,076, Greenville; Hamil- 
ton, 8175, Dallas; Hawkins, 15,038, Rogersville ; Jefferson, 12,076, 
Dandridge ; Johnson, 2658, Taylorsville ; Knox, 15,485, Knoxville; 
Marion, 6070, Jasper; McMinn, 12,719, Athens; Meigs, 4794, Decatur; 
Monroe, 12,056, Madisonville ; Morgan, 2660, Montgomery ; Polk, 3570, 
Bentonville ; Rhea, 3985, Washington ; Roane, 10,948, Kingston ; Sevier, 
6442, Sevierville ; Sullivan, 10,736, Blountville; Washington, 11,751, 
Jonesborough. Middle District. — Bedford, 20,546, Shelby ville ; Cannov, 
7193, Woodbury; Coffee, 8184, Manchester ; Davidson, 30,509, Nash- 
ville; De Kalb, 5868, Smithville; Dickson, 7074, Charlotte; Fentress, 
3550, Jamestown ; Franklin, 12,033, Winchester ; Giles, 21,494, 
Pulaski; Hickman, 8618, Centreville ; Humphreys, 5195, Reynoldsburg ; 



MICHIGAN. 179 

Jackson, 12,872, Gamesborough ; Lawrence, 7121, Lawrenceburg ; Lin- 
coln, 21,493, Fayetteville ; Marshall, 14,555, Lewisburg ; Mauri, 28,186, 
Columbia; Montgomery, 16,927, Clarksville ; Overtox, 9279, Monroe; 
Robertson, 13,801, Springfield; Rutherford, 24,280, Murfreesborough ; 
Smith, 21,179, Carthage ; Sumner, 22,445, Gallatin ; Stewart, 8587, 
Dover; Warren, 10,803, McMinnville; Watxe, 7705, Waynesborough; 
White, 10,747, Sparta ; Williamson, 27,006, Franklin ; Wilson, 24,460, 
Lebanon. Western District. — Bextox, 4772, Camden ; Carroll, 12,362, 
Huntingdon; Dyer, 4484, Dyersburg; Fayette, 21,501, Somerville; 
Gibson, 13,689, Trenton; Hardiman, 14,563, Bolivar; Hardix, 8245, 
Savannah; Haywood, 13,870, Brownsville; Hexderson, 11,875, Lex- 
ington ; Hexry, 14,906, Paris; Lauderdale, 3435, Ripley; Madisox, 
16,530, Jackson; McNairy, 9385, Purdy ; Obiox, 4814, Troy ; Perry, 
7419, Perryville; Shelby, 14,721, Raleigh; Tipton, 6800, Covington; 
Weakley, 9870, Dresden. 

Nashville, on the S. bank of Cumberland River, 200 ms. from its mouth, 
and 684 S. W. by W. from Washington city, is the seat of government 



MICHIGAN. 
Pages 165-6. — Lesson 119. — Maps No. 5 and 14. 

Map No. 5. — Q. What lake bounds Michigan on the north ? 

A. Superior. 

Q. On the east ? 

A. Huron. 

Q. West? 

A. Michigan. 

Q. What states on the south ? 

A. la. and Oo. 

Q. What rivers separate Michigan from Wisconsin ? 

A. Montreal and Mennomonie. 

Q. What country east of Michigan ? 

A. Canada West. 

Q. What territory on the west ? 

A. Wisconsin. 

Q. Where is Mackinaw? 

A. It is on the S. E. extremity of an island at the entrance to 
Lake Michigan, in the Straits of Michillimackinac, or Mackinaw, 
300 ms. N. N. W. of Detroit ; 821 from W. 

Q. Fort Brady ? 

A. It is situated on the S. side of the rapids of St. Mary's 
Strait, a little below Lake Superior, 400 ms. N. of Detroit-; 921 
ms. from W. 

Map No. 14. — Q. What lake lies between Lakes Huron and 
Erie? 

A. St. Clair. 



180 MICHIGAN. 

Q. What river unites it to Lake Huron ? 

A. St. Clair. 

Q. Which to Lake Erie ? 

A. Detroit. 

Q. What is the population of Detroit ? 

A. 9000. (M. A.) 

Q. Monroe? 

A. 1750. (M. A.) 

Q. NiJes? 

A. 1500. (M. A.) 

Q. To what place on the St. Joseph's River do steamboats 
ascend ? 

A. To Niles. (M. A.) 

Q. How far from the sea is it ? 

A. 2000 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. On what river is Grand Haven ?* 

A. On the Grand. 

Q. Palmer?! 

A. On St. Clair. 

Q. Saginaw?| 

A. On the Saginaw. ( Called Shiawassee in its upper course. 
M. A.) 

Michigan, one of the Western States, consists of two peninsulas? the 
principal of which, or Mich, proper, is bounded N. by the Straits of Michil- 
limackinac, which connect Lake Michigan to Lake Huron ; E. by Lake 
Huron, St. Clair River, Lake St. Clair, Detroit River, and Lake Erie, which 
separate it from Canada West; S. by Oo. and la.; and W. by Lake Michi- 
gan. This main portion of the state is 288 miles long, and, at a medium, 
190 miles broad, containing 36,000 sq. ms., or 23,040,000 acres. The 
northern or upper peninsula lies N. W. of the former : it is bounded N. by 
Lake Superior ; E. by St. Mary's River ; S. by Lake Michigan, Green Bay, 
and Menomonee River; and W. by Montreal River, which enters Lake 
Superior. This portion of the state is about 320 miles long, and from 30 to 
160 broad, containing about 24,000 sq. ms. ; making the whole territory of 
the state about 60,000 sq. ms. To this should be added 36,324 sq. ms. of 
water surface. It lies between 41° 30' and 47° 20' N. lat., and between 
82o 25' and 90° 30' W. long., and between 5° 23' and 13° 32' W. long. 

* Grand Haven, cap. of Ottowa co., Mich., 213 ms, W. by N. from 
Detroit, 694 ms. from W. It is situated on the S. bank of Grand R., one- 
fourth of a mile from its entrance into Lake Michigan, between which and 
the lake are sand-hills. 

f Palmer, cap. of St. Clair co., Mich., 48 ms. N. E. from Detroit, 572 ms. 
from W. It is bounded E. by St. Clair Strait, or R., and is more generally 
called St. Clair. 

* Saginaw, cap. of Saginaw co., Mich., 97 ms. N. by W. from Detroit, 621 
ms. from W. The village is situated on the W. bank of Saginaw R., 23 ms. 
from its mouth. 



INDIANA. 181 

from W. In 1810, the population was 4528 ; in 1820, 9048 ; in 1830, 
31,639 ; in 1840, 212,267. Of these, 113,395 were white males ; 98,165 
do. females ; 393 coloured males ; 314 do. females. Employed in agri- 
culture, 56,521 ; in commerce, 728 ; in manufactures and trades, 6890 ; 
navigating the ocean, 24 ; do. canals, lakes, and rivers, 166 ; mining, 40 ; 
learned professions, 904. 

There were in 1840, 32 organized counties, which, with their population 
and capitals, were as follow : Allegan, 1783, Allegan ; Barry, 1078, 
Hastings ; Berrien, 5011, St. Joseph ; Branch, 5715, Branch ; Calhoun, 
10,599, Marshall; Cass, 5710, Cassopolis; Chippewa, 534, Sault St. 
Mary; Clinton, 1614, De Witt; Eaton, 2379, Charlotte; Genesee, 
4268, Flint ; Hillsdaee, 7240, Jonesville ; Ingham, 2498, Vevay ; Ionia, 
1923, Ionia ; Jackson, 13,130, Jackson ; Kalamazoo, 7380, Kalamazoo ; 
Kent, 2587, Grand Rapids ; Lapeer, 4265, Lapeer ; Lenawee, 17,889, 
Adrian; Livingston, 7430, Howell; Macomb, 971 6, Mt. Clemens; Michil- 
limackinac, 923, Mackinac ; Monroe, 9922, Monroe ; Oakland, 23,646, 
Pontiac ; Oceana, 496, Oceana C. H. ; Ottawa, 208, Grand Haven; 
Saginaw, 892, Saginaw; St. Clair, 4606, St. Clair; St. Joseph, 7068, 
Centreville ; Shiawassee, 2103, Corunna ; Van Buren, 1910, Pawpaw; 
Washtenaw, 23,571, Ann Arbor ; Wayne, 24,173, Detroit. 

There are a number of new counties unorganized. Detroit, situated on 
the W. side of the Detroit R., and 524 ms. N. W. from Washington city, is 
the seat of government. 



INDIANA. 

Page 167.— Lesson 120.— Map No. 14. 

Q. What state on the north ? 
A. Mich. 
Q. On the south ? 
A. Ky. 
Q. East? 
A. Oo. 
Q. West? 
A. II. 

Q. Which river on the south ? 
A. Ohio. 
Q. On the west ? 
A. W T abash. 

Q. What river flows into Lake Erie ? 
A. Maumee. 

Q. What rivers flow into the Wabash ? 
A. Eel, Salamanie, Mississineway, Tippecanoe, and White. 
Q. How long are the foregoing rivers ? 

A. Eel is 88 ms. ; Salamanie, 100; Mississineway, 100; 
Tippecanoe, 150; Wliite, 300. (M. A.) 

Q. How far from the sea do steamboats navigate the Wabash ? 
A. 1620 ms. (M. A.) 
16 



182 INDIANA. 

Q. East fork of White River? 

A. 1580 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of New Albany ? 

A. 4250. (M. A.) 

Q. Madison? 

A. 3750. (M. A.) 

Q. Rushville? 

A. 2000. (M. A.) 

Q. Indianapolis ? 

A. 2500. (M. A.) 

Q. Vincennes? 

A. 2000. (M. A.) 

Q. Terre Haute? 

A. 2000 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Lafayette? 

A. 1500. (M. A.) 

Q. Losfansport? 

A. 1500. (M. A.) 

Q. In what counties are all these towns ? 

A. New Albany is in Floyd; Madison, in Jefferson; Rush- 
ville, in Rush ; Indianapolis, in Marion ; Vincennes, in Knox ; 
Terre Haute, in Vigo ; Lafayette, in Tippecanoe ; Logansport, in 



Q. When was the battle of Tippecanoe fought ? 
A. In 1811. (M.A.) 
Q. On what rivers are the chief towns ? 

A, Indianapolis is on White R. ;* Lawrenceburg, on the Ohio ;t 
Madison, on the Ohio ;£ Jeffersonville, on the Ohio ;§ New Albany, 

* Indianapolis, near the centre of Indiana, is the cap. of Marion co., and 
also of the state. Lat. 39° 55' N., long. 85° 5' W., 571 miles W. by N. 
from Washington City. It is situated in Centre township, on the E. side of 
White R., which is navigable to this place for small steamboats in time of 
high water. The national road passes through the town; and the most 
important roads in the state centre in it. 

f Lawrenceburg, cap. of Dearborn co., la., 86 ms. S. from Indianapolis, 
514 ms. from W. Situated on the N. bank of the Ohio R., 1 m. below the 
entrance of the Great Miami R., and at the entrance of the Whitewater 
canal into the Ohio R. 

$ Madison, city, and cap. of Jefferson co., la., 88 ms. S. S. E. from Indiana- 
polis, 560 ms. from W. Situated on the N. shore of the Ohio R., at an 
elevation which secures it from the highest floods. 

§ Jeffersonville, Clark co., la., 117 ms. S. by E. from Indianapolis, 597 ms. 
from W. It is situated on a high bank, on N. side of the Ohio R., opposite 
Louisville, Ky., and just above the rapids of the Ohio. 



INDIANA. 183 

on the Ohio ;* New Harmony, on the Wabash ;t Vincennes, on 
the Wabash ;J Terre Haute, on the Wabash ;§ Lafayette, on the 
Wabash ;|| Logansport, on the Wabash.^f 

Indiana, one of the Western States, is bounded N. by Michigan Lake 
and state ; E. by Oo. ; S. by Ky., from which it is separated by the Ohio 
R. ; and W. by 111. It is between 37° 45' and 41° 52' N. lat., and between 
84° 42' and 87° 49' W. long., and between 7° 45' and 1 1° W. long, from 
W. It has a mean length of 260 ms., and a mean breadth of 140 ms., con- 
taining 36,000 sq. ms., or 23,040,000 acres. The pop. in 1800 was 5641 ; 
in 1810, 24,520; in 1820, 147,178 ; in 1830, 341,582; in 1840, 685,866. 
White males, 352,773; do. females, 325,925; coloured males, 3731; do. 
females, 3434. Employed in agriculture, 148,806 ; in commerce, 3076 ; in 
manufactures and trades, 20,590 ; in mining, 233 ; navigating the ocean, 89 ; 
do. canals, rivers, and lakes, 677 ; learned professions, 2257. 

There are in this state 87 counties, which, with their population in 1840, 
and their capitals, were as follow : Adams, 2264, Decatur ; Allen, 5942, 
Fort Wayne ; Blackford, 1226, Hartford; Bartholomew, 10,042, Co- 
lumbus ; Boone, 8121, Lebanon ; Brown, 2364, Nashville ; Carroll, 
7819, Delphi; Cass, 5480, Logansport; Clark, 14,595, Charlestown ; 
Clay, 5567, Bowling Green; Clinton, 7508, Frankfort; Crawford, 

* New Albany, city, and cap. of Floyd co., la., 121 ms. S. by E. from 
Indianapolis, 600 ms. from W. Situated on the N. bank of the Ohio R., 
2 ms. below the foot of the falls, where the Ohio descends 32 ft. in one 
mile. 

-j- New Harmony, Posey co., la., is situated on the E. bank of W T abash 
R., 172 ms. S. W. from Indianapolis, 742 ms. from W. It was founded in 
1814, by a society of Germans, from Swabia, called "Harmonists," who 
removed from Butler co., Pa., under their minister George Rapp. Their 
society was founded on the principle of a community of goods; but the cli- 
mate proving unfavourable, they returned to Pa., and settled at Economy, 
Ohio township, Beaver co., 18 ms. below Pittsburg, on the Ohio R. 

| Vincennes, cap. of Knox co., la., 118 ms. S. W. from Indianapolis, 
688 ms. from W. Situated on the E. bank of Wabash R., 100 ms. above 
its entrance into the Ohio, with a fine prairie of several thousand acres, on 
the N. E. and S. It is the oldest town in the state, having been established 
by the French in 1730 as a trading post. 

§ Terre Haute, cap. of Vigo co., la., 73 ms. W. from Indianapolis, 644 
ms. from W. Pleasantly situated on elevated ground, on the E. bank of 
Wabash R. The national road crosses the river here on a fine bridge. 

|| Lafayette, cap. of Tippecanoe co., la., 70 ms. N. W. from Indianapolis, 
628 ms. from W. It is situated on the E. side of Wabash R., 10 ms. below 
the mouth of the Tippecanoe R., at the head of steamboat navigation of the 
Wabash. 

1 Logansport, capital of Cass co., la., 72 ms. N. from Indianapolis, 610 
ms. from W. It is situated on Wabash R., at the junction of Eel R., at 
the head of steamboat navigation on the Wabash, and at the junction of 
the Wabash and Erie canal. There are two fine bridges here, one crossing 
the Wabash, and the other across Eel R. 



184 ILLINOIS. 

5282, Fredonia; Daviess, 6720, Washington; Dearborn, 19,327, Law- 
renceburg; Decatub, 12,171, Greensburg ; De Kalb, 1968, Auburn; 
Delaware, 8843, Muncytown ; Dubois, 3632, Jasper; Elkhart, 6660, 
Goshen ; Fayette, 9837, Connersville ; FlOyd^ 9454, New Albany ; 
Fountain, 11,218, Covington ; Franklin, 13,349, Brookville ; Fulton, 
1993, Rochester; Gibson, 8977, Princeton; Grant, 4875, Marion; 
Greene, 8321, Bloomfield ; Hamilton, 9855, Noblesville ; Hancock, 
7535, Greenfield ; Harrison, 12,459, Corydon ; Hendricks, 11,264, Dan- 
ville ; Henrt, 15,128, New Castle; Huntington, 1579, Huntington; 
Jackson, 8961, Brownston ; Jasper, 1267, Rensselaer; Jat, 3863, Port- 
land ; Jefferson, 16,614, Madison ; Jennings, 8829, Vernon ; Johnson, 
9352, Franklin ; Knox, 10,657, Vincennes; Kosciusko, 4170, Warsaw ; 
La Grange, 3664, Lima; Lake, 1468, Crown Point; La Porte, 8184, 
La Porte ; Lawrence, 11,782, Bedford; Madison, 8874, Andersontown ; 
Marshall, 1651, Plymouth; Marion, 16,080, Indianapolis ; Martin, 
3875, Mt. Pleasant; Miami, 3048, Peru ; Monroe, 10,143, Bloomington ; 
Montgomery, 14,438, Crawfordsville ; Morgan, 10,741, Martinsville; 
Noble, 2702, Augusta; Orange, 9602, Paoli; Owen, 8359, Spencer; 
Parke, 13,499, Rockville ; Perry, 4655, Rome; Pike, 4769, Petersburg; 
Porter, 2162, Valparaiso; Posey, 9683, Mt. Vernon; Pulaski, 561, 
Winnimac; Putnam, 16,843, Green Castle; Randolph, 10,684, Win- 
chester; Ripley, 10,392, Versailles; Rush, 16,456, Rushville ; Scott, 
4242, Lexington ; Shelby, 12,005, Shelbyville ; Spencer, 6305, Rockport; 
St. Joseph, 6425, South Bend ; Stark, 149, Stark C. H. ; Steuben, 
2578, Angola; Sullivan, 8315, Benton; Switzerland, 9920, Vevay ; 
Tippecanoe, 13,724, Lafayette; Union, 8117, Liberty; Vanderburg, 
6250, Evansville; Vermilion, 8274, Newport; Vigo, 12,076, Terre 
Haute; Wabash, 2756, Wabash ; Warren, 5656, Williamsport; War- 
wick, 6321, Booneville ; Washington, 15,269, Salem ; Wayne, 23,290, 
Centreville ; Wells, 1822, Bluffton ; White, 1832, Monticello ; Whitley, 
1237, Columbia. 

Indianapolis, near the centre of the state, on the E. side of White R., is 
the seat of government. 



ILLINOIS. 
Pages 168-9.— Lesson 121.— Map No. 14. 

Q. What bounds Illinois on the north ? 

A. Wis. 

Q. On the south? 

A. Ky. 

q. East? 

A. la. 

Q. West? 

A. Mo. and Io. 

Q. What river on the west? 

A. Mississippi. 

Q. On the south? 

A. Ohio. 



ILLINOIS. 185 

Q. On the east? 

A. Wabash. 

Q. What rivers flow into the Mississippi? 

A. Rock, Illinois, and Kaskaskia. 

Q. What rivers into the Illinois ? 

A. Kankakee, Des Plaines, Fox, Vermillion, Mackinaw, Spoon, 
and Sangamon. 

Q. What rivers flow into the Wabash ? 

A. Big Vermillion, Embarras, and Little Wabash. 

Q. How long is each of the foregoing rivers ? 

A. Mississippi, 4100 ; Ohio, 1300 ; Wabash, 500 ; Rock, 300; 
Illinois, 500; Kaskaskia, 300; Kankakee, 150; Des Plaines, 
125; Fox, 200; Vermillion, 75; Mackinaw, 100; Spoon, 150; 
Sangamon, 200; Big Vermillion, 75; Embarras, 200; Little 
Wabash, 150. (M. A.) 

Q. What lake on the north-east? 

A. Michigan. 

Q. How many inhabitants has Chicago ? 

A. 4500. (M. A.) 

Q. Galena? 

A. 1750. (M. A.) 

Q. Peoria? 

A. 1500. (M. A.) 

Q. Ghiincy? 

A. 2250. (M. A.) 

Q. Springfield? 

A. 2500. (M. A.) 

Q. Jacksonville? 

A. 2000. (M. A.) 

Q. Alton? 

A. 2250. (M. A.) 

Q. In what counties are these towns ? 

A. Chicago is in Cook ; Galena, in Jo Daviess ; Peoria, in 
Peoria ; Gluincy, in Adams ; Springfield, in Sangamon ; Jackson- 
ville, in Morgan ; Alton, in Madison. 

Q. How far from the sea do steamboats ascend the Illinois ? 

A. 1600 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Rock? 

A. 1800 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Sangamon? 

A. 1456 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. On what lake is Chicago ? 

A. Michigan. 

Illinois, one of the Western States, is bounded N. by Wis. ; E. by Lake 
Michigan and la. ; S. by the Ohio River, which separates it from Ky. ; and 
W. by Mo. and Io., from which it is separated by the Mississippi River. It 
16* 



186 ILLINOIS. 

is between 37© and 42° 30' N. lat., and between 87° 17' and 91° 50' W. 
long., and between 10° 20' and 14° 21' W. long, from W. It is 350 ms. 
long by 180 broad, containing 50,000 sq. ms., or 32,000,000 acres. The 
population in 1810, was 12,282; in 1820, 55,211; in 1830, 157,575; in 
1840, 476,183 ; of which, 255,235 were white males ; 217,019 do. females; 
1876 were coloured males; 1722 do. females. Employed in agriculture, 
105,337; in commerce, 2506; in manufactures and trades, 13,185; in 
mining, 782 ; navigating the ocean, 63; do. lakes, rivers, and canals, 310 ; 
learned professions, 2021. 

This state is divided into 87 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, were as follow : Adams, 14,476, Quincy : Alex- 
ander, 3313, Unity ; Bond, 5060, Greenville; Boone, 1705, Belvidere ; 
Brown, 4183, Mount Sterling ; Bureau, 3067, Princeton ; Calhoun, 1741, 
Gilead ; Carroll, 1023, Savannah; Cass, 2981, Virginia; Champaign, 
1475, Urbana; Christian, 1878, Edinburg; Clarke, 7453, Marshall; 
Clay, 3228, Lewisville ; Clinton, 3718, Carlyle ; Coles, 9616, Charles- 
ton ; Cook, 10,201, Chicago; Crawford, 4422, Palestine; De Kalb, 
1697, Sycamore ; De Witt, 3247, Clinton ; Du Page, 3535, Napierville ; 
Edgar, 8225, Paris; Edwards, 3070, Albion; Effingham, 1675, Ewing- 
ton ; Fayette, 6328, Vandalia ; Franklin, 3682, Benton ; Fulton, 
13,142, Lewiston; Gallatin, 10,760, Equality; Greene, 11,951, Car- 
rollton ; Hamilton, 3945, McLeansboro' ; Hancock, 9946, Carthage ; 
Hardin, 1378, Elizabethtown ; Henry, 1260, Morristown ; Iroq.uois, 
1695, Montgomery ; Jackson, 3566, Brownsville ; Jasper, 1472, Newton ; 
Jefferson, 5762, Mt. Vernon ; Jersey, 4535, Jerseyville ; Jo Daviess, 
6180, Galena; Johnson, 3026, Vienna; Kane, 6501, Geneva; Knox, 
7060, Knoxville ; Lake, 2634, Little Fort ; La Salle, 9348, Ottawa ; 
Lawrence, 7092, Lawrenceville ; Lee, 2035, Dixon; Livingston, 759, 
Pontiac; Logan, 2333, Postville; Macon, 3039, Decatur; Macoupin, 
7826, Carlinville ; Madison, 14,433, Edwardsville ; Marion, 4742, Salem ; 
Marshall, 1849, Lacon ; McDonough, 5308, Macomb; McHenry, 2578, 
McHenry ; McLean, 6565, Bloomington ; Menard, 4431, Petersburg; 
Mercer, 2352, Millersburg; Monroe, 4481, Waterloo; Montgomery, 
4490, Hillsboro'; Morgan, 19,547, Jacksonville; Ogle, 3479, Oregon 
City ; Peoria, 6153, Peoria; Perry, 3222, Pinckney ville ; Pike, 11,728, 
Pittsfield ; Pope, 4094, Golconda ; Putnam, 2131, Hennepin; Randolph, 
7944, Kaskaskia; Rock Island, 2610, Rock Island; Sangamon, 14,716, 
Springfield; Schuyler, 6972, Rushville; Scott, 6215, Winchester; 
Shelby, 6659, Shelbyville ; Stark, 1573, Toulon ; Stephenson, 2800, 
Freeport; St. Clatr, 13,631, Belleville; Tazewell, 7221, Tremont ; 
Union, 5524, Jonesboro' ; Vermillion, 9303, Danville ; Wabash, 4240, 
Mt. Carmel ; Warren, 6739, Monmouth ; Washington, 4810, Nashville; 
Wayne, 5133, Fairfield; White, 7919, Carmi ; Whiteside, 2514, 
Sterling; Will, 10,167, Juliet; Williamson, 4457, Bainbridge ; Winne- 
bago, 4609, Rockford. 

Springfield, near the centre of the state, is the seat of government. 

In the year 1778, the legislature of Virginia organized the county of Illi- 
nois, which was afterwards ceded to the U.S. In 1800, what is now the 
state of Illinois, contained about 3000 inhabitants; 12 years afterwards it 
was formed into a territory, and was for the first time represented in the 
U. S. Congress. In 1818, a state constitution was adopted, and Illinois was 
admitted into the Union, as the 22d state. 



MISSOURI. 1S7 

MISSOURI. 
Page 170.— Lesson 122.— Map No. 14. 

Q. What territory on the north ? 
A. Io. 

Q. On the west ? 
^. Indian Ter. 
Q. What states on the east ? 
^. 111. and Ky. 
Q. South? 
A. Ark. 

$. What river on the east ? 
«#. Mississippi. 

Q. On the west, and in the centre ? 
A. Missouri. 

Q. What rivers flow into the Missouri ? 
A. Little Platte, Grand, Chariton, Osage, and Gasconade. 
Q. Into the Mississippi ? 
i#. Salt, Missouri, and Maramec. 
Q. What rivers flow into Arkansas ? 
A. Whitewater, Big Black, Current, and White. 
Q. What mountains in the south-west ? 
A. Ozark. 

Q. How high are they ? 
A. 2000 ft. (M. A.) 
Q. What mines in Washington county ? 
.0. Lead. 

Q. What mountains? 
.#. Iron Mt., and Pilot Knob. 
Q. How many inhabitants has St. Louis ? 
A. 16,000. (M. A.) 
Q. St. Charles ? 
^. 2750. (M. A.) 
Q. Palmyra? 
A. 2000. 

#. In what counties are these towns ? 

A. St. Louis is in St. Louis ; St. Charles, in St. Charles ; Pal- 
myra, in Marion. 

Q. In which county is Jefferson City ? 

A. Cole. 

Q. Boonville? 

A. Cooper. 

Q. Lexington? 

A. La Fayette. 

Q. Liberty? 

A. Clay. 



188 MISSOURI. 

Q. On what rivers are the other principal towns ? 

A. St. Louis is on the Mississippi ;* St. Charles, on the Mis- 
souri ;t Jefferson City, on the Missouri \\ Franklin, on the Mis- 
souri ;§ Boonville, on the Missouri. || 

Missouri, one of the Western States, is bounded N. by Io. ; E. by 111., 
Ky., and Tenn., from which it is separated by the Mississippi River ; S. by 
Arkansas ; and W. by the Indian Territory. It is between 36° and 40° 
36' N. lat, and between 89° and 95° 30' W. long., and between 12° 17' 
and 17° 28' W. long, from W. It is 287 ms. long, and 230 ms. broad, 
containing 64,000 sq. ms., or 40,960,000 acres. The pop. in 1810, was 
19,833; in 1820, 66,586; in 1830, 140,074; in 1840, 383,702, of which 
68,240 were slaves. Of the free pop., 173,470 were white males ; 150,418 do. 
females ; 883 were coloured males ; 691 do. females. Employed in agricul- 
ture, 92,408; in commerce, 2522; in manufactures and trades, 11,100 ; in 
mining, 742 ; navigating the ocean, 39; do. canals, rivers, &c, 1885 ; learned 
professions, 1469. 

This State is divided into 62 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, were as follow: Audrain, 1949, Mexico ; Barky, 
4795, McDonald ; Benton, 4205, Warsaw ; Boone, 13,561, Columbia ; 
Buchanan, 6237, Sparta ; Caldwell, 1458, Far West ; Callaway, 
11,765, Fulton ; Cape Girardeau, 9359, Jacks n ; Carroll, 2433, Car- 
rollton ; Chariton, 4746, Keytesville ; Clark, 2846, Waterloo ; Clay, 
8282, Liberty ; Clinton, 2724, Plattsburg ; Cole, 9286, Jefferson City ; 
Cooper, 10,484, Booneville ; Crawford, 3561, Steelville ; Daviess, 2736, 
Gallatin; Franklin, 7515, Union ; Gasconade, 5330, Herman ; Greene, 
5372, Springfield; Howard, 13,108, Fayette; Jackson, 7612, Indepen- 
dence; Jefferson, 4296, Hillsboro'; Johnson, 4471, Warrensburg ; La 
Fayette, 6815, Lexington; Lewis, 6040, Monticello; Lincoln, 7449, 
Troy; Linn, 2245, Linneus ; Livingston, 4325, Chillicothe; Macon, 

* St. Louis, city, and cap. of St. Louis co., Mo., is the largest place in the 
state, and is situated on the W. bank of the Mississippi, 18 ms. by water be- 
low the junction of the Missouri. It is in 38° 36' N. lat., and 89° 96' W. 
long, from Greenwich, and 13° 14' W. long, from W. ; 30 ms. below the 
junction of the Illinois; 200 ms. above that of the Ohio; 1132 ms. by the 
course of the river, above New Orleans ; 1100 ms. below the Falls of St. 
Anthony ; 120 ms. E. from Jefferson City ; 808 ms. from W. 

t St. Charles, cap. of St. Charles co., Mo., 20 ms. N. W. from St. Louis, 
110 ms. E. from Jefferson City; 828 ms. from W. It has an elevated and 
handsome situation, on the N. bank of the Missouri R., and is the first ele- 
vated land on the river above its mouth. 

* Jefferson City, cap. of Cole co., and of the state of Mo., 936 ms. W. 
from Washington City. Situated on the S. bank of the Missouri R., on ele- 
vated and uneven ground. 

§ Franklin, Howard co., Mo., 53 ms. N. W. from Jefferson City, 967 ms. 
from W. The village is pleasantly situated on the N. side of the Missouri 
R., at the mouth of Bonne Femme R. 

|| Booneville, city, and cap. of Cooper co., Mo., 50 ms. N.W. from Jeffer- 
son City, 964 ms. from W. It is situated on the S. bank of Missouri R. 
Its foundation is limestone rock. 



ARKANSAS. 189 

6034, Bloomington ; Madison, 3395, Fredericktown ; Marion, 9623, Pal- 
myra ; Miller, 2282, Tuscumbia ; Monroe, 9505, Paris ; Morgan, 4407, 
Versailles; Montgomery, 4371, Danville; New Madrid, 4554, New 
Madrid; Newton, 3790, Neosho; Perry, 5760, Perry ville ; Pettis, 
2930, Georgetown ; Platte, 8913, Platte City ; Pike, 10,646, Bowling 
Green ; Polk, 8449, Bolivar ; Pulaski, 6529, Waynesville ; Ralls, 5670, 
New London; Randolph, 7198, Huntsville ; Ray, 6553, Richmond ; Rip. 
let, 2856, Van Buren ; Rives, (name changed to Henry,) 4726, Clinton; 
St. Charles, 7911, St. Charles ; St. Francis, 3211, Farmington ; St. 
Genevieve, 3148, St. Genevieve; St. Louis, 35,979, St. Louis; Saline, 
5258, Marshall ; Scott, 5974, Benton ; Shelby, 3056, Shelbyville; Stod- 
dard, 3153, Bloomfield ; Taney, 3264, Forsyth ; Van Buren, 4693, Har- 
risonville; Warren, 4253, Warrenton ; Washington, 7213, Potosi ; 
Wayne, 3403, Greenville. There have been several new counties erected 
since 1840. 

Jefferson City, on the S. bank of the Missouri River, 15 ms. above the 
mouth of the Osage R., is the seat of government. 



ARKANSAS. 
Page 111.— Lesson 123.— Map No. 12. 

Q. What bounds Arkansas on the north ? 

A. Mo. 

Q. On the south? 

A. La. 

Q. East? 

A. Tenn. and Miss. 

Q. West? 

A. Indian Ter. 

Q. What river separates Arkansas from Tenn. and Miss. ? 

A. Mississippi. 

Q. What three rivers flow into the Mississippi ? 

A. Arkansas, White, and St. Francis. 

Q. What are the two principal rivers that flow into Louisiana ? 

A. Red, and Washita. 

Q. Tell the lengths of the foregoing rivers. 

A. Mississippi, 4100; Arkansas, 2000; White, 600; St. 
Francis, 400; Red, 1200; Washita, 500. (M. A.) 

Q. How far are the Arkansas, White, Washita, and Red rivers, 
navigable for steamboats from the sea ? 

A. Arkansas, 1400 ms. ; White, 900 ; Washita, 700 ; Red, 
800. (M. A.) 

Q. Name the places where the navigation ends. 

A. Fort Gibson, on the Arkansas ; Batesville, on White ; Camden, 
on Washita; Jonesboro', on Red. (M. A.) 

Q. In what county is Little Rock ? 

A. Pulaski. 



190 ARKANSAS. 

Q. Fort Smith? 

A. Crawford. 

Q. Fulton? 

A. Hempstead. 

Q. Fayetteville ? 

A. Washington. 

Q. Batesville? 

A. Independence. 

Q. On what rivers are the chief towns ? 

A. Little Rock is on Arkansas R. ;* Lewisburg, on Arkansas ;f 
Ozark, on Arkansas ;| Batesville, on White ;§ Greenock, on Missis- 
sippi ;|j Helena, on Mississippi ;^[ Columbia, on Mississippi,** 
Fulton, on Red.tt These are the most important towns, but they 
are as yet mere villages. 

Arkansas, one of the Western States, is bounded N. by Mo. ; E. by the 
Mississippi R., which separates it from Tenn. and Miss. ; S. by La. ; and 
W. by the Indian Ter. It is between 33° and 36° 30' N. lat., and between 
89° 30' and 94° 30' W. long., and between 12° 30' and 17° 30' W. long, 
from W. It is 240 ms. long, and 228 ms. wide, containing 55,000 sq. ms. ; 
or 35,200,000 acres. The pop. in 1830 was 30,388 ; in 1840, 97,574, of 
which 19,935 were slaves. Of the free population, 42,211 were white 
males; 34,963 do. females; 248 were coloured males; 217 do. females. 
Employed in agriculture, 26,355 ; in commerce, 215 ; in manufactures and 
trades, 1173 ; navigating the ocean, 3; do. rivers, canals, &c, 39 5 learned 
professions, 301. 

This state is divided into 40 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals,, were as follow : Arkansas, 1346, Arkansas Post ; 
Benton, 2228, Bentonville ; Carroll, 2844, Carrolton ; Chicot, 3806, 
Columbia ; Clarke, 2309, Greenville ; Conway, 2892, Lewisburg ; Chaw- 

* Little Rock, city, and cap. of Pulaski co., and of the state of Ark., 
1065 ms. from Washington city. Situated on the S. bank of Arkansas R., 
300 ms. above its mouth by the course of the river. 

-j- Lewisburg, cap. of Conway co., Ark., 45 ms. N. W. from Little Rock, 
1110 ms. from W. Situated on the N. side of Arkansas R. 

i Ozark, cap. of Franklin co., Ark., 121 ms. N. W. from Little Rock, 
1186 ms. from W. Situated on the N. side of Arkansas R. 

§ Batesville, post village, and cap. of Independence co., Ark., is situated 
on the N. side of White R., 90 ms. N. N. E. from Little Rock, 1036 ms. 
from W. 

|| Greenock, post village, Crittenden co., Ark., 148 ms. N. E. from Little 
Rock, 933 ms. from W. It is situated on the W. bank of the Mississippi R. 

IT Helena, cap. of Philips co., Ark., 122 ms. E. from Little Rock, 1011 
ms. from W. Situated on the W. bank of the Mississippi R. 

** Columbia, capital of Chicot co., Ark., 142 ms. S. E. from Little Rock, 
1152 ms. from W. Situated on the W. side of the Mississippi R. 

■J-f Fulton, Hempstead co., Ark., 126 ms. S.W. from Little Rock, 1191 
ms. from W. Situated on the N. side of Red R. 



WISCONSIN. 191 

ford, 4266, Van Buren; Crittenden, 1561, Marion ; Desha, 1598, Belle- 
ville ; Frankein, 2665, Ozark ; Greene, 1586, Gainesville ; Hempstead, 
4921, Washington; Hot Springs, 1907, Hot Springs; Independence, 
3669, Batesville ; Izard, 2244, Athens ; Jackson, 1540, Elizabeth ; 
Jefferson, 2566, Pine Bluff; Johnson, 3433, Clarkesville ; Lafayette, 
2200, Lewisville ; Lawrence, 2835, Smith ville ; Madison, 2775, Hunts- 
ville; Marion, 1325, Yellville; Mississippi, 1410, Osceola; Monroe, 
936, Lawrenceville ; Phillips, 3547, Helena ; Pike, 969, Murfreesboro' ; 
Poinsett, 1320, Bolivar; Pope, 2850, Dover; Pueaski, 5350, Little 
Rock ; Randolph, 2196, Pocahontas ; St. Francis, 2499, Mount Vernon; 
Saline, 2061, Benton ; Scott, 1694, Booneville ; Searcy, 936, Lebanon ; 
Sevier, 2810, Paraclifta; Union, 2889, Union C.H. ; Van Buren, 1518, 
Clinton; Washington, 7148, Fay etteville ; White, 929, Searcy ; several 
new counties have been organized since the year 1 840. 

Little Rock, on the S. bank of the Arkansas River, and not far from the 
centre of the state, is the seat of government. 



WISCONSIN. 

Page 172. — Lesson 124. — Maps No. 5 and 14. 

Map No. 5. — Q. What bounds Wisconsin on the north? 
A. British America. 
Q. South? 
A. 111. 
Q. East? 
A. Mich. 
Q. West? 
A. Io. 

Q. What river forms nearly the whole of the western boundary ? 
A. Mississippi. 

Q. What rivers flow into Lake Superior ? 
A. St. Louis, and Montreal. 
Q. Into Green Bay ? 
A. Mennomonie. 
Q. Into the Mississippi River ? 
A. Wisconsin, and Rum. 
Q. What lakes in Wisconsin ? 
A. Red, Spirit, Pepin, and Winnebago. 
Q. What lakes on the east ? 
A. Superior, and Michigan. 

Q. What lakes form part of the north and eastern boundary ? 
A. Woods, Rainy, Superior, and Michigan. * 
Q. How far from the sea can steamboats ascend the Mississippi 
River ? 

A. 2200 ms. (M. A.) 

Map No. 14. — Q. In what county is the capital ? 

A. Dane. 



192 WISCONSIN. 

Q. Milwaukie? 

A. Milwaukie. 

Q. Cassville? 

A. Grant. 

Q. Prairie du Chien ? 

A. Crawford. 

Q. How far from the sea do steamboats ascend the Wisconsin ? 

A. 1900 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Rock River? 

A. 1800 ms. (M. A.) 

Wisconsin * is bounded N. by the British possessions ; N. E. by Mont- 
real and Mennomonie Rivers, and a line connecting their sources, separating 
it from northern Mich. 5 E. by Lake Michigan, separating it from Mich, 
proper ; S. by 111. ; and W. by Mississippi River, and a line due N. from its 
source, to the British possessions, separating it from Io. It is between 42° 
30' and 49° 30' N. lat., and between 87° and 95° 54' W. long. ; being 600 
miles long and 150 broad. It contains probably 100,000 sq. ms., or 64,000,000 
acres. It contained in 1840, 30,945 inhabitants : of these 18,757 were 
white males ; 11,992 do. females; 101 were coloured males ; 84 do. females. 
Employed in agriculture, 7047 ; in commerce, 479 5 in manufactures and 
trades, 1814 ; in mining, 794; navigating the ocean, rivers, lakes, &c, 223 5 
learned professions, &c, 259. 

It is divided into 22 counties, which, with their population in 1840, and 
their capitals, were as follow : Brown, 2107, Green Bay ; Calumet, 275, 
Calumet ; Crawford, 1502, Prairie du Chien ; Dane, 314, Madison ; 
Dodge, 67, Dodge C. H. ; Fond du Lac, 139, Fond du Lac; Grant, 
3926, Lancaster; Greene, 933, Monroe; Iowa, 3978, Mineral Point; Jef- 
ferson, 914, Jefferson; Manitouwoc, 235, Manitouwoc ; Marquette, 
18, Marquette; Milwaukie, 5605, Milwaukie; Portage, 1623, Fort 
Winnebago; Racine, 3475, Racine 5 Rock, 1701, Rockport ; St. Croix, 
809, St. Croix C. H.; Sauk, 102, Prairie du Sac; Sheboygan, 133, She- 
boygan; Walworth, 2611, Elkhorn ; Washington, 343, Washington; 
Winnebago, 135, Oshkosh. 

Madison, the seat of government, is in Dane co. : it is situated between the 
3d and 4th lake of the chain called the Four Lakes, which discharge their waters 
into Rock R. It is 847 ms. N. W. by W. from Washington city, 90 W. of 
Milwaukie, on lake Michigan, and about the same distance N. E. of Galena. 

* In 1846, Congress passed an act providing for the admission of Wisconsin 
into the Union as a State, stipulating at the same time that, until another 
census is taken, it shall have two representatives in the National Legislature. 
It includes | the area of the late territory, and comprises about 62,000 sq. 
ms. The remainder is unorganized : it has an area of 35,000 sq. ms. The 
line which separates it from the State of Wisconsin, commences at the mouth 
of the St. Louis r. of L. Superior, extends thence up the channel of said 
stream to the first fall thereof, thence by a due S. line to the main branch of 
the St. Croix r., and thence down the channel of that river to the Mississippi. 
The country N. W. of this line is not much known : it is usually described 
as a cold, rugged region, and ill suited for settlement. Its most valuable 
product, at present, is white pine lumber, great quantities of which are annu- 
ally rafted down the Mississippi river. 



iowa. 193 

IOWA. 

Page 174. — Lesson 125. — Maps No. 5 and 14. 

Map No. 5. — Q. What bounds Iowa on the north ? 

A. British America. 

Q. South? 

A. Mo. 

Q. East? 

A. Wis., and 111. 

#. West? 

A. Mo. Ter., and Indian Ter. 

Q. What river forms the east boundary ? 

A. Mississippi. 

Q. The west? 

A. Missouri. 

Q. What rivers flow north ? 

A. Red, and Moose. 

Q. Into the Missouri River ? 

A. James, and Sioux. 

Q. Which flows into the Mississippi ? 

Ji. St. Peter's, Iowa, and Des Moines. 

Q. How long are the Missouri, Mississippi, Red, St. Peter's, 
Iowa, and Des Moines Rivers ? 

Ji. Missouri, 2900 ms. ; Mississippi, 4100; Red, 500; St. 
Peter's, 300 ; Iowa, 350 ; Des Moines, 450. (M. A.) 

Q. From what lake does the Mississippi River flow ? 

Ji. Itasca. 

Q. What Indian tribes in Iowa ? 

A. Assiniboines, Sioux, WinnebagoeSjPottawatomies, Sacs, and 
Foxes. 

Map No. 9. — Q. On what river is Iowa city ? 

A. On Iowa R. 

Q. The other chief towns ? 

Ji. Burlington is on the Mississippi;* Dubuque, on the 
Mississippi;! Peru, on Little Makoqueta;J Davenport, on Mis- 

* Burlington, cap. of Des Moines co., Io., 871 ms. from W. It is hand- 
somely situated on the W. bank of the Mississippi, 1429 ms. above New 
Orleans, and 248 ms. above St. Louis. 

\ Dubuque co., Io., is situated on the W. bank of the Mississippi R., 1605 
«^ns. above New Orleans, 424 ms. above St. Louis, 324 ms. below the Falls 
of St. Anthony, 900 ms. from W. 

\ Peru, Dubuque co., Io., 5 ms. N. of Dubuque. Situated on the S. side 
of Little Makoqueta R., a short distance above its entrance into Mississippi R. 
17 



194 iowa. 

sissippi ;* Bloomington, on Mississippi ;t Fort Madison, on Mis- 
sissippi.^: 

Q. To what distance from the sea do steamboats ascend the 
Des Moines River ? 

A. 1550 ms. (M. A.) 

Iowa§ is bounded on the N. by the British Ter. of the Hudson Bay Com- 
pany ; E. by Wis. and 111., from which it is separated by the Mississippi R., 
and a line due N. from its source in Itasca Lake to the British possessions ; 
S. by the state of Mo. ; and W. by the Missouri R, to the entrance of White- 
earth R., and following this N. to the British possessions. It lies between 
40° 30' and 49° N. lat., and between 90° and 102° W. long., and between 
14° and 26° W. long, from W. it is about 600 ms. long, and, at a medium, 
250 ms. broad, containing about 150,000 sq. ms., or 96,000,000 acres. To 
a considerable portion of this territory the Indian title has not yet been ex- 
tinguished. The pop. in 1840, was 43,112. Employed in agriculture, 
10,469 ; in commerce, 355 ; in manufactures and trades, 1629 ; in mining, 
217; navigating the ocean, rivers, and canals, 91 ; learned professions, 365. 

This territory is divided into 18 counties, which, with their population in 
1840, and their capitals, were as follow : Cedar, 1253, Tipton ; Clayton, 
1101, Prairie la Porte; Ceinton, 821, Comanche; Delaware, 168, Dela- 
ware C. H. ; Desmoids, 5577, Burlington ; Dubuq.ue, 3059, Du- 
buque ; Hexrt, 3772, Mt. Pleasant; Jackson, 1411, Bellevue ; Jeffer- 
son, 2773, Fairfield ; Johnson, 1491, Iowa city ; Jones, 471, Edinburgh; 
Lee, 6093, Ft. Madison; Linn, 1373, Marion; Louisa, 1927, Wappello ; 
Muscatine, 1942, Bloomington; Scott, 2140, Davenport ; Van Buren, 
6146, Keosagua ; Washington, 1594, Washington. 

Iowa city, on Iowa R., 33 ms. W. N. W. of Bloomington, and 943 msi N. 
N. W. of Washington city, is the cap. of Johnson co., and also of the state. 

* Davenport, cap. of Scott co., Io., 350 ms. above St. Louis, by water, 80 
ms. above Burlington. This place is pleasantly situated on the N. side of 
the Mississippi R. 

| Bloomington, cap. of Muscatine co., Io., 320 ms. above St. Louis, 910 
ms. from W. It is pleasantly situated on the W. bank of the Mississippi. 
Established in 1836. 

t Fort Madison, cap. of Lee co., Io., is situated on the W. bank of the 
Mississippi R. A fort was established here in 1808, as a defence against 
the Indians, who obliged the garrison in 1813 to abandon, and to burn it ; 
only a few remains are now to be seen. It has become the site of a beauti- 
ful village, founded in 1835. 

§ Iowa was admitted into the Union as an independent State, by act of 
Congress, passed during the session of 1845-6, subject to the approval or 
disapproval of the people at the next ensuing election : this was held imme- 
diately, when it was found that a majority of about 600 were in favour of 
the acceptance of the act. The State of Iowa comprises the southern part 
of the territory, and about one-third of its surface ; the area is probably not 
far from 52,000 sq. ms. The parallel of 43° 30' N. lat., extending fron^ 
the Mississippi to the Big Sioux river, is the N. boundary of the state. Tne 
region north of that line is but little known, being still occupied by tribes of 
Indians, chiefly Sioux- It is remarkable for the number of its lakes and 
ponds, some of which are salt. 



INDIAN TERRITORY. 195 

INDIAN TERRITORY. 
Page lib.— Lesson 126.— Map No. 5. 

Q. How is the Indian Territory bounded on the north ? 

A. By Mo. Ter. 

Q. South? 

A. By Texas, and, New Mexico. 

Q. East? 

A. By lo., Mo., and Ark. 

Q. West? 

A. By Mexico. 

Q. What are the principal rivers that flow through it ? 

A. Platte, Kanzas, Arkansas, Canadian, and Red. 

Q. How long are these rivers ? 

A. Platte, 1000 ; Kanzas, 700 ; Arkansas, 2000 ; Canadian, 
900; Red, 1200. (M. A.) 

Q. What United States' forts are in this territory ? 

A. Leavenworth, Gibson, and Towson. 

Q. On what river is the Council Bluffs ? 

A. Missouri. 

Q. What desert in the western part of the territory ? 

A. Great American. 

Q. What mountains form part of its western boundary ? 

A. Rocky. 

Q. Where is Long's Peak ? 

A. In the western part of Indian Territory. 

Q. Pike's Peak? 

A. In the western part of Indian Territory. 

Q. How high are they ? 

A. Long's Peak, 12,500 ft. high ; Pike's, 12,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Name the Indian tribes wholly resident in the Indian Ter- 
ritory. 

A. Omahas, Otoes, Kickapoos, Delawares, Shawnees, Kanzas, 
Osages, Cherokees, Creeks, and Choctaws. 

Q. Name those that are partly so. Of the latter there are 
three tribes. 

A. Pawnees, Kioways, and Pawnee Picts. 

The Lvdiax or Western Territories a tract of country west of the 
settled portions of the U. S., which has been set apart by the general govern- 
ment, for the permanent residence of those Indian tribes that have been re- 
moved, chiefly from the southwestern states of the Union. Here they are 
to be secured in governments of their own choice, subject to no other control 
from the United States, than such as may be necessary to preserve peace on 
the frontier, and between the several tribes. It is about 600 miles long from 
N. to S., and from 300 to 600 miles in breadth, from E. to W. It has the 
Platte River on the N„ the states of Missouri and Arkansas on the E., the 



196 MISSOURI TERRITORY. 

Red river on the S., and a desert country on the W. This country contains, 
within the habitable district, an area of 120,000 sq. ms., or 76,800,000 acres. 
The number of the different tribes now occupying this territory, is about 
70,000, exclusive of the wild tribes of the prairies. The whole number of 
Indians E. of the Rocky Mountains is nearly 300,000. The principal tribes 
in the Indian Ter. are the Chickasaws, Choctaws, Creeks, Seminoles, and 
Cherokees, besides some indigenous tribes. These tribes are advancing in 
civilization, improvement, and the enjoyment of the comforts of settled life ; 
and promise yet to redeem the Indian character from the opprobrium which 
has been cast upon it, by demonstrating that they are capable of civilization. 
Their condition, in the opinion of their best friends, and oFthemselves, has 
been improved by their removal ; and it is to be hoped that they will never 
be disturbed in their present possessions. They receive considerable annui- 
ties from the Federal government, in compensation for the country which they 
left, and have ceded to the U. S. 



MISSOURI TERRITORY. 
Page 177. — Lesson 127. — Map No. 5. 

Q. What bounds this territory on the north ? 

A. British America. 

Q. South? 

A. Indian Ter. 

Q. East? 

A. Io. 

Q. West? 

A. Oregon Ter. 

Q. What mountains separate it from Oregon ? 

A. Rocky. 

Q. What river from Iowa ? 

A. Missouri. 

Q, From the Indian territory ? 

A. Platte, or Nebraska. 

Q. How long are the Missouri, Platte, Yellow Stone, Big Horn, 
Tongue, and Running- Water rivers ? 

A. Missouri, 2900 ; Platte, 1000 ; Yellow Stone, 800 ; Big 
Horn, 600; Tongue, 400; Running-Water, 400. (M. A.) 

Q. What hills west of the Missouri River ? 

A. Black. 

Q. Where is Fremont's Peak ? 

A. On the boundary between Missouri and Oregon territories. 

Q. Its height? 

A. 13,570 ft. 

Q. What tribes inhabit this territory ? 

A. Blackfeet, Crows, Minnetarees, Riccarees, Sioux, Staetans, 
or Kites, Shiennes, Puncahs, and Pawnees. 



OREGON TERRITORY. 197 

Missouri, or, as it has been proposed to call it, Nebraska Territory, is a 
portion of the U. S. included between the British Possessions on the N., Io. 
on the E., the Indian Ter. on the S., of which the N. fork of Platte or Ne- 
braska R. may be considered the boundary, and the Rocky Mts., separating 
it from Oregon Ter. on the W. It contains about 300,000 sq. ms., being 
about 520 ms. from N. to S., and 600 from E. to W. This extensive region 
has been but imperfectly explored. Its most important natural feature is the 
Missouri R., which, with its branches, drains the whole region. This great 
river rises in the Rocky Mountains, by many branches : the remotest head is 
in about N. lat. 45°, 2900 ms. from where it joins the Mississippi, and not 
more than a mile from the source of some of the tributaries of Lewis' River, 
the chief branch of the Columbia. At a distance of about 520 ms. from its 
source, the Great Falls of the Missouri occur; the river descends 357 feet 
in 18 ms., by a succession of falls and rapids : the greatest fall is 87 feet 
perpendicular; the next is 47: the breadth of the river is about 350 yards. 
These falls, next to Niagara, rank among the grandest in the world. The 
Yellow Stone River enters the Missouri from the S., 1880 ms. from its 
entrance into the Mississippi : it rises in Sublette's Lake, not far from the 
eastern base of Fremont's Peak, and has a course of about 800 ms. The 
Platte or Nebraska River, the next large tributary of the Missouri, enters the 
latter more than 1200 ms. below the Yellow Stone : it is about 1000 ms. 
long, and is so shallow that except in time of floods it can be forded in 
almost any part of its course. The Platte rises in the Rocky Mts. by two 
forks, the N. and S., which unite several hundred ms. from their source. 
Among the smaller rivers are the Big Horn, Little Missouri,Teton, Running 
Water, &c. The Black Hills extend through the centre of the territory 
from the upper waters of the Platte River, in a nearly N. W. direction to 
the Missouri River. That name is derived from their being covered to their 
summits with cedar trees, which give these hills, at a distance, a black and 
sombre appearance. 



OREGON TERRITORY. 
Pages 178-9.— Lesson 128.— Map No. 15. 

Q. What bounds Oregon on the north ? 
A. British America. 
Q. South? 

A. Upper or New California. 
Q. East? 

A. British America, and Mo. Ter. 
Q. What bounds it on the west ? 
A. Pacific Ocean. 

Q. What forms the eastern boundary ? 
A. Rocky Mts. 
Q. Its highest summits ? 

A. Mt. Brown, Mt. Hooker, and Fremont's Peak. 
Q. Their heights ? 

A. Brown, 16,000 ft.; Hooker, 15,700; Fremont's, 13,570. 
(M. A.) 

)7* 



198 OREGON TERRITORY. 

Q. What mountains west of Lewis' River ? 

A. Blue. 

Q. Near the coast ? 

A. Cascade Range. 

Q. Its chief summits ? 

A. Mt. Baker, Mt. Rainier, Mt. St. Helen's, Mt. Hood, and 
Mt. Jefferson. 

Q. Volcanoes? 

A. Rainier, and St. Helen's. 

Q. Point out the South Pass. This is a gap in the Rocky Mts. 
15 or 20 ms. wide, through which emigrants travel to Oregon. 
(M. G., p. 178.) 

Q. The chief rivers ? 

A. Columbia, and Frazer's. 

Q. Chief branches of the Columbia ? 

A. Lewis', and Clarke's. 

Q. Lengths of the rivers ? 

A. Columbia, 1200 ms. ; Frazer's, 750 ; Lewis', 800 ; Clarke's, 
600. (M. A.) 

Q. Principal forts ? 

A. Vancouver, Wallawalla, and Colville. 

Q. Capes? 

A. Point Flattery, Foulweather, Perpetua, Gregory, and Blanco 
or Orford. 

Q. Bays, Gulfs, &c. ? 

A. Straits of Juan de Fuca, Admiralty Inlet, Puget's Sound, 
Bullfinch's or Gray's Harbour. 

Q. Lakes? 

A. Kulluspelm, Flathead, Coeur d'Alene, Klamet, Summer, 
Abert, Christmas, Pitt's, Salt, and Sylanilles. (M. A.) 

Q. Indian tribes ? 

A. Flatheads, Clalams, Chickeeles, Wallawallas, Nezperces, 
Chinooks, Shoshones, Cayuses, Moleles, Callapuyas, Umpquas, 
and Boonacks. (M. A.) 

Map No. 16. — Q. Where is Oregon city ? 

A. It is situated in a fine fertile valley at the falls of the Willa- 
mette River. 

Q. On what river ? 

A. Willamette. 

Q. Into what stream does the latter flow ? 

A. Into the Columbia R. 

Q. Where is Astoria ? 

A. It is near the mouth of the Columbia. 

Q. Fort Vancouver ? 

A. On the N. bank of the Columbia. 

Q. Cascades? 

A. At the point where the Columbia flows through the Cas* 



OREGON TERRITORY. 199 

cade Range. The Columbia R. is navigable to this place, 120 
ms. (M. G., p. 179.) 

Q. Which is the northern cape of Columbia R. ? 

A. Cape Disappointment. 

Q. Southern? 

A. Point Adams. 

The Oregon Territory consists of a large extent of country lying 
between the Rocky Mountains and the Pacific Ocean, and drained chiefly 
by the Columbia River, its tributaries, and Frazer's River. Its boundaries 
are : on the E., the Rocky Mountain range, along its whole extent ; on the 
S., the parallel of 42° N. lat., dividing it from Upper or New California ; 
on the W., the Pacific Ocean ; and on the N., the parallel of 54° 40' N. 
lat. ; within these limits, nearly all the rivers that flow through the territory 
take their rise. The region thus described contains about 420,000 sq. ms. 
The U. S. claimed the country from N. lat. 42° to 54° 40' ; while Great 
Britain claimed from the northern boundary south to the Columbia River.* 

The whole territory may be estimated as containing 20,000 Indians, and 
about 8000 whites, of whom 7000 are Americans ; the rest are the officers 
and servants of the Hudson Bay Company, comprising British, Canadians, 
and some half-breeds. The Indians are rapidly decreasing in all parts of the 
country ; the causes are supposed to be their rude treatment of diseases, and 
the dissipated lives they lead. 



UPPER OR NEW CALIFORNIA.! 

Page 180.— Lesson 129.— Map No. 15. 

Q. What bounds Upper California on the north ? 
A. Oregon. 

* Oregon Territory, as claimed by the United States, extended from N. 
lat. 42° to 54° 40', and from the Pacific Ocean to the Rocky Mountains, 
a region almost ten times the extent of Pennsylvania. By the treaty ratified 
in London, July 17th, 1846, the 49th parallel of latitude, prolonged from the 
Rocky Mountains to the Pacific Ocean, was adopted as the northern bound- 
ary of the American claim. By this treaty it is agreed that the navigation 
of the Columbia River, from the sea to that point where its course is inter- 
sected by the parallel of 49°, shall be free and open to the Hudson's Bay 
Company, and to all British subjects trading with the same, as well as to 
citizens of the United States ; and further, it is agreed, that all British sub- 
jects residing south of the 49th degree of latitude, shall be protected in the 
possession of such landed and other property as they may own. That part 
of the Oregon Territory now in possession of the United States, extends 
from the 42d to the 49th parallel of N. lat. : it comprises from 280,000 
to 290,000 square miles, or about | of the former claim. 

-j- Upper or New California is an extensive region, being nearly equal in 
area to Oregon. It extends from the Rocky and Anahuac Mts., to the 
Pacific Ocean, and from the parallel of 42° to 32° N. lat. It lies south of 
Oregon Territory, north of Old California and the Mexican states of Sonora 
and Sinaloa, west of Texas and New Mexico, and east of the Pacific Ocean. 



!200 OREGON TERRITORY. 

Q. South? 

A. Old or Lower California, and Sonora. 

Q. East? 

A. U. States, and Mexico. 

Q. West? 

A. Pacific Ocean. 

Q. What mountains near the coast ? 

A. Coast Range. 

Q. East of the Sacramento River ? 

A. Sierra Nevada, or Snowy Range. 

Q. East of the Great Salt Lake ? 

A. Bear River Mts. 

Q. South? 

A. Wahsatch Mts. 

Q. What Mts. form the eastern boundary ? 

A. Rocky, and Anahuac Mts. 

Q. What islands on the coast ? 

A. Santa Barbara Islands. 

Q. What bays ? 

A. San Francisco, Monterey, and Trinidad. 

Q. Which is the westernmost cape ? 

A. Mendocino. 

Q. The largest river ? 

A. Colorado. 

Q. Its chief branches ? 

A. Rio Gila, Green, Grand, and Sevier. 

Q. What rivers join near to San Francisco Bay ? 

A. Rio Sacramento, and Rio San Joaquin. 

Q. Which flows north ? 

A. Rio San Joaquin. 

Q. South? 

A. Rio Sacramento. 

Q. What lakes west of the Sierra Nevada ? 

A. Tule Lakes, and Mountain Lake. 

Extent from N. to S., about 700 miles, and from E. to W. from 600 to 800 
miles. Area about 400,000 sq. ms. It has long formed the north-western- 
most division of the Mexican Republic ; but it may now be regarded as 
attached to the United States. On the 6th of July, 1846, Commodore Sloat, 
commander of the U. S. naval forces in the Pacific Ocean, took possession 
of Monterey, the capital of Upper California ; annexed the territory by pro- 
clamation to the Union, and extended the U. S. revenue laws over it. At 
the same time he invited the people to form a state government for them- 
selves, and to select their own civil officers and magistrates; he also 
guarantied that private property of every description, as well as that belong- 
ing to the church, should be strictly respected. 



MEXICO. 201 

Q. East? 

A. Pyramid, and Mud. 
Q. Which is the largest lake ? 
A. Great Salt Lake. 
Q. What river flows into it ? 
A. BearR. 
Q. What lake ? 
A. Utah. 

Q. Which are the chief Indian tribes ? 

A: Utah Indians, Tabegu aches, Moquis, Pah-Utah Indians, 
Mohahves, Jeniguiehs, Jumas, and Apaches. 



MEXICO. 

Page 183. — Lesson 131. — Maps No. 4 and 6. 

Map No. 4. — Q. What bounds Mexico on the north ? 

A. U. S. and Upper California. • 

Q. On the south and west ? 

A. Pacific Ocean. 

Q. What Republic on the east ? 

A. U. S. 

Q. What sea and gulf on the east ? 

A. Caribbean Sea, and Gulf of Mexico. 

Q. What peninsula ? 

A. Yucatan. 

Q. What gulf on the west 1 

A. California. 

Q. What peninsula ? 

A. California. 

Q. What bay west of Yucatan ? 

A. Campeche. 

Q. East? 

A. Honduras. ' 

Map No. 6. — Q. What rivers flow into the Gulf of Mexico? 

A. Rio Grande del Norte, and Tula. 

Q. The Gulf of California ? 

A. Colorado, and Yaqui. 

Q. The Pacific Ocean ? 

A. Grande. 

Q. What lakes are in Mexico 1 

A. Chapala, and Cayman. 

Q. What mountains ? 

A. Mexican Cordilleras. 

Q. What states border on the Gulf of Mexico ? 

A. Tamaulipas, Vera Cruz, Tabasco, and Yucatan. 



202 GUATIMALA, OR CENTRAL AMERICA. 

Q. On the Pacific Ocean ? 

A. Old California, Jalisco, Michoacan, Mexico, La Puebla, and 
Oaxaca. 

Q. How many miles from California to Birmah ? 

A. 9300. (M. A.) 

Q. From Mexico to the Sandwich Islands ? 

A. 3100. (M. A.) 

Q. To Cochin China ?• 

A. 9900. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of the city of Mexico ? 

A. 140,000. (M. A.) 

Q. What cities have a population of 30,000 and upwards ? 

A. Zacatecas, San Luis Potosi, Queretaro, Guanaxuato, Gua- 
dalaxara, La Puebla, and Oaxaca. (M. A.) 

Q. How many between 12,000 and 30,000 ? 

A. Chihuahua, Monterey, Durango, Valladolid, and Jalapa. 
(M. A.) 

Q. What bay bounds the Balize settlement on the east ? 

A. Honduras. 

Q. What state on the west ? 

A. Yucatan. 

Q. What is the population of the settlement ? 

A. 4000. (M. A.) 

For a further description of Mexico, see Key, page 69. 



GUATIMALA, or CENTRAL AMERICA. 

Page 185. — Lesson 132. — Maps No. 4 and 6. 

Map No. 4. — Q. What bounds Guatimala on the north ? 

A. Mexico, and Balize. 

Q. East? 

A. Caribbean Sea. 

Q. West and south ! 

A. Pacific Ocean. 

Q. What bay on the north ? 

A. Honduras. 

Q. On the east? 

A. Guatimala. 

Q. What lake in the south ? 

A. Nicaragua. 

Q. How long is it 1 

A. 120 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What river connects it with the sea ? 

A. San Juan. 

Q. Which is the most populous city ? 

A. New Guatimala. (M. A.) 



WEST INDIES. 203 

Q. The four next in population ? 

A. Leon, Cartago, San Salvador, and Old Guatimala. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the popu lation of these places ? 

A. Leon, 38,000 ; Cartago, 20,000 ; San Salvador, 15,000 ; Old 
Guatimala, 18,000. (M. A.) 

Map No. 6. — Guatimala comprises five states. 

Q. Point them out. 

A. Guatimala, Honduras, San Salvador, Nicaragua, and Costa 
Rica. 

Q. What is the capital of each ? 

A. Guatimala, New Guatimala ; Honduras, Comyagua ; San 
Salvador, San Salvador ; Nicaragua, Leon ; Costa Rica, Cartago. 

Q. In what State is the water volcano situated ? 

A. Guatimala. 

Q. Volcano of Consiguina ? 

A. Nicaragua. 

Q. Lake Nicaragua ? ' 

A. Nicaragua. 

For a further description, see Key, page 69. 



WEST INDIES. 

Page 189.—Lesson 135.— Map No. 4. 

Q. Which is the largest of the West India Islands ? 
A. Cuba. 

Q. The second in size ? 
A. Hayti. 
Q. Third? 
A. Jamaica. 
Q. Fourth? 
A. Porto Rico. 
Q. How long is Cuba ? 
A. 760 ms. (M. A.) 
Q. Hayti? 

A. 400 ms. (M. A.) 
Q. Jamaica ? 
A. 150 ms. (M. A.) 
Q. Porto Rico? 

A. 100 ms. (M. A.) These are the Great Antilles. 
Q. What sea between the Great Antilles and South America ? 
A. Caribbean. 

Q. What islands lie north of Cuba ? 
A. Bahamas. 

Q. Which are the principal of the Bahamas ? 
A. New Providence, Abaco, Inagua, Turks Island, Long, and 
Guanahani or Cat Island. 



204 SOUTH AMERICA. 

Q. Who discovered Guanahani ? 

A. Columbus. 

Q. In what year ? 

A. In 1492. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the name of the eastern range of the West India 
Islands ? 

A. Caribbee Islands. 

Q. What six islands on the coast of South America ? 

A. Oruba, Curagoa, Buen Ayre, Orchilla, Tortuga, and Mar- 
garita. These are the Little Antilles. 

The Bermudas Islands are about the same distance from Charleston, from 
Halifax, and from St. John's, Porto Rico. 

Q. How many miles is it by the scale ? 

A. 900. (M. A.) 

Q. How far are the Bermudas from Madeira ? 

A. 2800 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Havana ? 

A. 140,000. 

Q. Kingston ? 

A. 30,000. 

Q. Port au Prince ? 

A. 15,000. 

Q. St. Domingo ? 

A. 12,000. 

For a further description, see Key, page 84. 



SOUTH AMERICA.* 

Pages 193-4.— Lesson 137.— Map No. 17. 

Q. What ocean bounds South America on the east ? 

A. Atlantic. 

Q. On the west? 

A. Pacific. 

Q. What sea on the north? 

A. Caribbean. 

DIVISIONS. 

Q. How is New Grenada! bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Caribbean Sea ; E. by Venezuela ; 
S. by Brazil and Ecuador; and W. by the Pacific and Central 
America. (M. A.) 

* For a further description, see Key, page 70. 

| This name is written indifferently, New Grenada and New Granada : the 
former is perhaps the most common : the U. S. government uses it in its 
official papers. 



SOUTH AMERICA. 205 

Q. Capital? 

A. Bogota. 

New Grenada, is one of the three Republics of South America, into 
which, in 1831, Colombia was divided. The boundary line between New 
Grenada and Ecuador, lies between 1° and 2° N. lat. : towards the N. this 
Republic extends to 12° 30' N. lat. : it is situated between 69° and 80° W. 
long. The greatest length, from N. to S., is near 800 ms. ; greatest breadth, 
from E. to W., about 650 ms. Area estimated at 450,000 sq. ms. Pop. 
1,687,000. 

Q. How is Venezuela bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Caribbean Sea ; N. E. by the At- 
lantic ; E. by Guiana ; S. by Brazil ; and W. by New Grenada. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Caraccas. 

Venezuela is a Republic of S. America, which formerly constituted a 
part of Colombia, between 1° and 12° 30' N. Lat., and 60° and 73° 20' 
W. long. Length from E. to W. near 950 ms. ; greatest breadth, from N. 
to S., about 660 ms. Area estimated at 420,000 sq. ms. Pop. 900,000. 

Q. How is Ecuador bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by New Grenada ; E. by Brazil ; S. by 
Peru ; and W. by the Pacific. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Quito. 

Ecuador, (i. e. "Equator," so named from its situation, being intersected 
through its whole length by the equinoctial line-,) is one of the three Re- 
publics which, previously to 1831, constituted the Republic of Colombia. 
It is situated between 1° 36' and 4° 55' S. lat, and 70° 20' and 81° W. 
long. The area is calculated at 280,000 sq. ms. Pop. 600,000. 

Q. How is Guiana bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Atlantic ; E. and S. by Brazil ; 
and W. by Venezuela. (M. A.) 

Guiana, Guyana, or Guayana, is a name applied to the N. E. portion 
of S. America, extending along the coast from Point Barima, to the river 
Oyapok, between lat. 0° 40' and 8° 40' N., and long. 57° 30' and 60° W., 
divided among the English, Dutch, and French. The area is variously 
estimated at from 150,000 to 190,000 sq. ms. 

British Guiana is the largest and most westerly portion of the above terri- 
tory, including more than half its area. It extends between lat, 0° 40' and 8° 
40' N., and between the 57th and 61st deg. of W. long., having E. Dutch 
Guiana, from which it is separated by the R. Corantyn ; S. Brazil ; W. 
Venezuela ; and N. and N. E. the Atlantic. This territory is supposed to 
comprise about 94,000 sq. ms. ; but of this a disputed portion, claimed by 
Brazil and Venezuela, amounts to not less than 64,000 sq. ms., leaving about 
30.000 sq. ms. for the area of the undisputed British territory. Pop. in 
1834, 96,581 ; in 1846, about 102,000. Capital, Georgetown. 

Dutch Guiana. This territory is intermediate, both in size and position, 
between British and French Guiana. It extends between the 2d and 6th 
18 



206 SOUTH AMERICA. 

cleg, of N. lat., and the 53d and 57th deg. of W. long., having E. French 
Guiana, from which it is separated by the Maroni, S. Brazil, W. the R. 
Corantyn, which divides it from British Guiana, and N. the Atlantic. Length 
from N. to S. 250 ms. ; average breadth, about 155 ms. Area about 38,500 
sq. ms. Pop., exclusive of Indians and Maroons, probably 65,000, of whom 
6000 are whites or free coloured people, chiefly Dutch, French, and Jews, 
and the remainder negro slaves. Capital, Paramaribo. 

French Guiana. This, which is the most E. and smallest division of 
Guiana, lies between the 2d and 6th deg. N. lat., and 51^ and 54^ deg. W. 
long., having E. and S. Brazil, W. Dutch Guiana, and N. and N. E. t'.ie 
Atlantic. Length, N. to S., 250 ms. ; breadth varying from 100 to 190 ms. 
Area, 27,560 sq. ms. Pop. in 1837, free, 5056 ; slaves, 16,592 ; total, 
21,648, exclusive of garrison and colonial functionaries. Capital, Cayenne. 

Q. How is Peru bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Ecuador ; N. E. by Brazil ; S. E. and 
S. by Bolivia ; and W. by the Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 
Q. Capital? 

A. Lima. 

Peru is a celebrated country of S. America, formerly one of the most 
valuable possessions of the Spanish crown. It included the modern Re- 
public of Bolivia (then called Upper Peru) ; but at present the term is re- 
stricted to the republic of Peru, lying chiefly between lat. 3° 20' and 22° 
S., and long. 65° and 81° W., having on the N. the Republic of Ecuador, 
E. Brazil, S. E. and S. Bolivia, and S. W. and W. the Pacific. Extreme 
length, S. S. E. to N. N.W., about 1500 ms. Area estimated at 430,000 
sq. ms. Pop. 1,500,000. 

Q. How is Bolivia bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. E. and E. by Brazil and Paraguay ; S. 
by Buenos Ay res and Chili ; W. and N. W. by the Pacific and 
by Peru. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Chuquisaca, formerly called La Plata. 

Bolivia is a republican state of S. America, situated between about 10° 
and 25° 40' S. lat., and 57° and 70° 44' W. long. Length about 1 100 ms. ; 
greatest breadth, 800 ms. Area estimated at about 450,000 sq. ms. The 
pop. is variously estimated from 630,000 to 1,400,000. This republic dates 
from the battle of Ayacucho, in 1824, in which the patriots, under General 
Sucre, completely defeated the royalists. The new republic was named 
Bolivia, in honour of General Bolivar. The sea-coast of Bolivia is of limited 
extent : its only sea-port, Cobija, is a small and unimportant village. 

Q. How is Brazil bounded ? 

A. It is bounded on the N. W. and N. by Ecuador, Venezuela, 
and French, Dutch, and British Guiana; N. E.,E., and S. E., by 
the Atlantic ; and S. W. and W. by Uruguay, Paraguay, Bolivia, 
and Peru. (M. A.) 8 * ° ' 

Q. Capital? 

A. Rio Janeiro. 

Brazil, a vast empire in the E. part of S. America, second only in 



SOUTH AMERICA. 207 

extent to the giant empires of China and Russia, stretches along about two 
thirds of the E. coast of that continent, while its superficial area occupies 
nearly half its whole extent. It lies between 5° N., and 33° S. lat. ; and 
between 35° and 73° W. long. The length, from N. to S., is between 
2600 and 2700 ms., and its breadth, from E. to W,, between 2300 and 2400 
ms. Its extent of coast along the Atlantic Ocean exceeds 4000 ms. ; its 
area is estimated at from 2,600,000 to upwards of 3,000,000 sq. ms. Pop. 
from 5,000,000 to 6,500,000. 

Q. How is Chili bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the southern extremity of Bolivia, E. 
by Buenos Ayres, S. E. and S. by Patagonia and the Gulf of 
Guaiteca (which separates it from the Chonos Archipelago), and 
W. by the Pacific. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Santiago. 

Chili is an independent state of S. America, in the S. W. part of that 
continent, consisting of a long and comparatively narrow strip of country 
between the Andes and the Pacific Ocean, extending from lat. 25° 20' to 
42° S., and between long. 70° and 74° W. Length, N. to S., 1150 ms. ; 
average breadth between 110 and 120 ms. Area, with Chiloe, estimated at 
170,000 sq. ms. Pop. has at different times been variously estimated from 
about 900,000 to 1,500,000. 

Q. How is Buenos Ayres bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Bolivia ; E. by Paraguay, Brazil, 
Uruguay, and the Atlantic ; S. by the Atlantic and Patagonia ; 
and W. by Chili and Bolivia. 

Q. Capital? 

A. Buenos Ayres. 

Buenos Ayres,* or La Plata, called also the Argentine Republic, 
is an independent state, or rather confederation of states, in S. America, 
extending between the 22d and 41st degs. of S. lat., and the 52d and 72d 
of W. long. ; separated from Paraguay, Brazil, and Uruguay, by the Para- 
guay, Parana, and Uruguay rivers. Area estimated at above 750,000 sq. 
ms. Pop., 1,500,000. Greatest length, from N. to S., about 1300 ms. ; mean 
breadth, from E. to W., near 700 ms. 

Q. How is Paraguay bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. and E. by Brazil ; S. E. and S. by the 
territory of Buenos Ayres, or La Plata ; and W. by the latter 
republic and Bolivia. M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 
• A. Assumption. 

Paraguay is an independent state of S. America, principally between the 
21st and 27th degs. of S. lat., and the 54th and 58th of W. long. Length, 
N. to S., about 460 ms. ; greatest breadth, about 210 ms. Estimated area, 
88,000 sq. ms. Estimated population, 300,000. Paraguay is an inland 

* Which signifies " good air." 



208 SOUTH AMERICA. 

peninsula, inclosed, E. and S., by the Parana, W. by the river Paraguay, and 
N. by Brazil. 

Q. How is Uruguay bounded? 

A. It is bounded N. and E. by Brazil ; S. E. and S. by the 
Atlantic, and the estuary of the Rio de la Plata ; and W. by 
the R. Uruguay, by which it is separated from Buenos Ayres, or 
La Plata. 

Q. Capital? 

A. Montevideo. 

Uruguay, or Banda Oriental, is a republic of S. America, between 
lat. 30° and 35° S., and long. 53° and 59° W. Length, about 380 ms. ; 
greatest breadth near 300 ms. It is of nearly circular form, and is supposed 
to embrace an area of about 50,000 sq. ms. : its population does not pro- 
bably, Indians included, exceed 150,000. It is but very little known. 

Q. How is Patagonia bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the territories of Buenos Ayres, or La 
Plata, and Chili ; E. by the Atlantic ; S. by the Strait of Magel- 
lan, separating it from Terra del Fuego ; and W. by the Pacific. 
(M. A.) 

Patagoxia is an extensive country of S. America, occupying the S. ex- 
tremity of the continent, and extending from 39° to near 54° S. lat., and 
from 63° to 75° 40' W. long.; separated on the N. from Buenos Ayres, or 
La Plata, by the R. Negro ; the line which divides it from Chili is not accu- 
rately determined. Length, from N. to S., about 1060 ms.; greatest breadth, 
from E. to W., 600 ms. The area is probably about 370,000 sq. ms. Little 
is known of this region beyond its coast outline. 

Q. On what side of South America are the Andes ? 

A. West. 

Q. What number of miles do they extend ? 

A. 4800 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Between what two states do they form the entire boundary ? 

A. Chili, and Buenos Ayres. 

Q. Between what two do they form the boundary in part ? 

A. Bolivia, and Peru. 

Q. What is the next greatest range of mountains ? 

A. Brazilian. 

Q. What number of miles do they extend ? 

A. 2100. (M. A.) 

Q. In what state are they almost wholly ? 

A. Brazil. 

RIVERS. 

Q. What are the three largest rivers ? 
A. Amazon, Rio de la Plata, and Orinoco. 
Q. How long is each of these ? 

A. Amazon is 3600 ms. ; Rio de la Plata, 2250; Orinoco, 
1500. (M.A.) 



SOUTH AMERICA. 209 

Q. How wide are the mouths of the two largest ? 

A. Mouth of the Amazon, 150 ; Rio de la Plata, 150. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Magdalena ? 

A. It is the principal r. of New Grenada, rises in the little lake 
Papas, among the Andes, in about 1° 50' N. lat., and 76° 30' W. 
long., and, flowing northerly, empties itself into the sea, in about 
11° 10' N. lat., and 74° 45' W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Into what sea does it empty ? 

A. Caribbean. 

Q. Which are the four principal branches of the Amazon on 
the north side ? 

A. Tunguragua, Putumayo, Caqueta, and Negro. 

Q. What are the chief branches of the Amazon on the south 
side? 

A. Ucayle, Jurua, Puras, Madeira, Tapajos, and Xingu. 

Q. How long are each of the foregoing rivers ? 

A. Tunguragua is 900 ms. ; Putumayo, 800 ; Caqueta, 1100 ; 
Negro, 1200; Ucayle, 1200; Jurua, 800; Puras, 900; Madeira, 
2200; Tapajos, 1100; Xingu, 1300. (M. A.) 

Q. Which two rivers form the Amazon ? 

A. Ucayle, and Tunguragua. 

Q. Which two form the Rio de la Plata ? 

A. Parana, and Uruguay. 

Q. Into what ocean do the Orinoco, Amazon, St. Francisco, 
and the Rio de la Plata, flow ? 

A. Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. What rivers are south of the Rio de la Plata ? 

A. Colorado, Rio Negro, Camarones, and Port Desire. 

GULFS. 

Q, Where is the Gulf of Darien ? 

A. It is in New Grenada, on the N. W., being the most southern 
portion of the Caribbean Sea. (M. A.) 

It is between 7° 56' and 10° N. lat., and 76° and 78° W. long. 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Venezuela ? 

A. It is on the coast of Venezuela, on the N.W., and commu- 
nicates with Lake Maracaybo by a narrow strait. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Guayaquil ? 

A. It is in Ecuador, on the W., and leads into the Pacific 
Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Penas ? 

A. It is in Patagronia on the W., and leads into the Pacific 
Ocean. (M. A.) 

BAYS. 

Q. Where is the Bay of Panama ? 

A. It is on the S. coast of the Isthmus of Panama, or Darien, 

18* 



210 SOUTH AMERICA. 

W. N. W. of New Grenada, and leads into the Pacific Ocean. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is Talcahuana Bay? 

A. It is in Chili on the W., and leads into the Pacific Ocean. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Bay of St. George ? 

A. It is in Patagonia on the E., and leads into the Atlantic 
Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is St. Mathias Bay ? 

A. It is in Patagonia on the E., and leads into the Atlantic 
Ocean. (M.A.) 

Q. Where is the Bay of All Saints ? 

A, It is in Brazil, on the E. coast. (M. A.) 

ISLANDS. 

Q. Where is Puno Island ? 

A. It is in the Gulf of Guayaquil, W. of Ecuador. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Islands of St. Felix ? 

A. They are in the Pacific Ocean, W. of Chili. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Islands of Juan Fernandez ? 

A. They are a group of Islands in the Pacific Ocean, situated 
about 400 ms. W. of the coast of Chili, near 33° 40' S. lat., and 
79° W. long. (M. A.) 

The largest one, called Juan Fernandez, from the name of the discoverer, 
is 10 or 12 ms. in length, and perhaps 6 in breadth. It is chiefly remarkable 
for having been, in the early part of the 18th century, the solitary residence 
of Alexander Selkirk, a Scottish sailor, during a period of more than four 
years. The well-known story of Robinson Crusoe is supposed to be founded 
on Selkirk's narrative. The island has been lately taken on lease from the 
Chilian government, by an enterprising American, who has brought thither 
150 families of Tahitians, with the intention of cultivating the land, rearing 
cattle, &c, for the purpose of supplying whalers and other vessels in those 
seas with refreshments. 

Q. Where is Chiloe Island ? 

A. It is a large Island in the Pacific Ocean, near the S. coast 
of Chili and the N.W. coast of Patagonia. (M. A.) 

This island lies between lat. 41° 48' and 43° 50' S., and long. 73° 20' 
and 74° 30' W., and having on its E. side sixty-three small islands, thirty- 
six of which are inhabited ; the whole, including the town of Maulin on the 
main land of the continent, forms the most southern province of Chili. 
Shape of Chiloe, oblong; length, N. to S., 140 ms. ; average breadth, 40 
ms. Area 4800 sq. ms. Pop. (1832), with its accompanying islands, 43,830. 

0. Where is Wellington Island? 

A. It is in the Pacific Ocean,W. of Patagonia, having N. the Gulf 
of Penas, S. the Archipelago of Madre de Dios, and E. the Channel 
of Mesier, 160 ms. long, separating it from Patagonia. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Island of Terra del Fuego ? 

A. Terra del Fuego is a large island, or rather group of islands, 



SOUTH AMERICA, 211 

lying off the southern extremity of S. America, from which it is 
separated by the Strait of Magellan. 

The group, which extends between the 53d and 56th degs. of S. lat., 
and the 64th and 75th of W.long., is about 450 ms. in length : it consists 
of King Charles, South Land, Navarin, Hoste, Clarence, and some other 
islands ; Cape Horn, on Hermit island, forming the most southerly point of 
America, and facing directly the wastes of the ocean which surround the 
Antarctic pole, The name of Terra del Fuego, or, " land ofjire," is sup- 
posed to have been given to this insular group by its discoverer, Magellan, or 
Magalhaens, from its apparent volcanoes. 

Q. Where are the Falkland Islands ? 

A. They are in the Atlantic Ocean, E. of Patagonia. (M. A.) 

The Falkland Islands (Fr. Malouines, Span. Malvinas) are a group in 
the S. Atlantic, belonging to Great Britain, consisting of about 90, or, ac- 
cording to some authorities, as many as 200 islands, between lat. 51° 10' and 
52° 25' S., and long. 57° 40' and 61° 20' W., about 1000 ms. S. S.W. from 
the estuary of the La Plata, and 240 ms. N. E. of Terra del Fuego ; with 
the exception of the two principal islands, however, they are for the most 
part mere rocks. The two largest islands are called the E. and W. Falk- 
lands. T^e greatest length of the former, from N. E. to S. W., is nearly 
130 ms. ; greatest breadth about 80ms. The latter is about 110 ms. in 
length, by 50 ms. in its greatest breadth, in the same directions. Their 
united area is estimated at 13,000 sq. ms. Between the two main islands 
is Falkland Sound, whence the whole Archipelago has derived its name : 
this channel is from seven to twelve miles in breadth. On the eastern side 
of the E. Falkland, at Port St. Louis, a small British colony is established. 

Q. Where is the Island of St. Catharina ? 

A. It is in the Atlantic Ocean, lying off the S. E. coast of Bra- 
zil, separated from the main land by a narrow strait. (M. A.) 

It is about 35 ms. in length, from N. to S., and from 4 to 8 ms. in width. 
Its most N. extremity, Point Rupa, is in lat. 27° 22' 31" N., long. 48° 32' 
7" W. 

Q. Where is Itamaraca Island ? 

A. It is in the Atlantic Ocean, lying off the E. coast of Brazil, 
separated from the main land by a narrow strait. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Joannes Island ? 

A. It is in the N. E. part of Brazil, S. of the mouth of the Ama- 
zon river. (M.A.) 

Q. Between what two rivers is the latter situated ? 

A. Amazon, and Para. 

STRAITS. 

Q. Where is the Strait of Magellan ?* 

A. It is at the S. extremity of S. America, and unites the 
waters of the Atlantic with the Pacific. (M. A.) 

* It was discovered in 1520, by the Portuguese navigator, Magalhaens, 
then in the service of Spain, and called, in honour of him, the Strait of 
Magalhaens. The Spaniards changed the name to Magellan. 



212 SOUTH AMERICA. 

Q. What regions does it separate 1 

A, It separates Patagonia from Terra del Fuego, Clarence 
Island, and the Isle of Desolation. 

It extends from Cape Virgins, on the Atlantic, to Cape Pillar, on the 
Pacific Ocean, a distance of about 300 ms., having a breadth varying from 
1^ to 40 ms. It has an additional communication with the Pacific by 
Cockburn Channel and Magdalen Sound. 

Q. Where is the Strait of Le Maire ? 

A. It is at the E. extremity of Terra del Fuego. (M. A.) t 

Q. What does it separate ? 

A. Terra del Fuego, and Staten Land. (M. A.) 

CITIES. 

Q. Which is the largest city of South America ? 

A. Rio Janeiro. 

Q. The next largest ? 

A. Bahia or St. Salvador. 

Q. What three cities number respectively 100,000, 70,000, and 
'55,000 inhabitants ? 

A. Buenos Ayres, Gluito, and Lima. 

CAPES. 

Q. Which are the most northerly and the most southerly 
capes ? 

A. Cape Gallinas is the most northerly, and Cape Horn the 
most southerly. 

Q. The most easterly and the most westerly ? 

A. St. Roque is the most easterly, and Blanco the most 
westerly ? 

Q. What proportion of South America lies north of the Tropic 
of Capricorn ? The largest or smallest ? 

A. Largest. 

Q. In what zone, then, is it mostly ? 

A. Torrid. 

Q. In what zone is the remainder ? 

A. South Temperate. 

Q. In what hemisphere is South America wholly ? 

A. Western. 

Q. In what hemisphere is it partly ? 

A. Southern. 

South America contains about 12° of north, and 55° of south 
latitude. 

Q. In what latitude is it then ? 

A. South. 

It extends from 35° to 81° of longitude, west from Greenwich ? 

Q. In what longitude then is it reckoned ? 

A. West. 



NEW GRENADA. 213 

DISTANCES. 

Q. How many miles is it from Guiana to Newfoundland ? 

A. 2870 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Brazil to Greenland ? 

A. 4200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Guiana to Liberia ? 

A. 2850 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. New Grenada to Borneo ? 

A. 11,400 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Ecuador to the Gallapagos Islands ? 

A. 650 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Peru to Otaheite ? 

A. 5000 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Chili to New South Wales ? 

A. 8000 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Chili to New Zealand ? 

A. 5800 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Brazil to the west coast of Africa ? 

A. 3400 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Uruguay to the Cape of Good Hope ? 

A. 4100 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Patagonia to Van Diemen's Land ? 

A. 11,400 ms. (M. A.J 

Q. Patagonia to Kerguelen's Land ? 

A. 6100 ms. (M. A.) 



NEW GRENADA. 
Page 196.— Lesson 138.— Map No. 17. 

Q. What bounds New Grenada on the north ? 

A. Caribbean Sea. 

Q. South? 

A. Ecuador. 

Q. East? 

A. Venezuela. 

Q. West? 

A. Pacific Ocean. 

Q. What Isthmus connects it with North America ? 

A. Darien. 

Q. Which are the principal rivers ? 

A. Magdalena, Cauca, Caqueta, Uaupes, Negro, Guaviare, and 
Meta. 

Q. What is the length of each ? 

A. Magdalena is 900 ms. long; Cauca, 600; Caqueta, 1100; 
Uaupes, 800 ; Negro, 1200 ; Guaviare, 600; Meta, 600. (M. A.) 



214 VENEZUELA. 

Q. How far do sloops navigate the Magdalena ? 

A. 580 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Meta? 

A. 1060 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Bogota ? 

A. 35,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Popayan? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Carthagena? 

A. 18,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Mompox? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Honda? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. What mountains extend along the west coast ? 

A. Andes. 

Q. What mountains east of the Magdalena ? 

A. The N. E. range of the Andes. 

For a further description, see Key, pages 204-5. 



VENEZUELA.* 
Pages 197-8.— Lesson 139.— Map No. 17. 

Q. What bounds Venezuela on the north ? 

A. Caribbean Sea. 

Q. South? 

A. Brazil. 

Q. East? 

A. Guiana ? 

Q. West? 

.#. New Grenada. 

Q. Which is the chief river ? 

A. Orinoco? 

Q. How long is it ? 

A. 1500 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. How far is it navigable for ships ? 

A. 500 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. For sloops ? 

A. 780 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What river connects the Orinoco and the Rio Negro ? 

A. Casiquiare. 

Q. What lake in the north-west part of Venezuela ? 

A. Maracaybo. 

* It will be seen that Ecuador is included in this lesson. 



ECUADOR. 215 



Q. How long is it ? 

A. 150 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From what lake does the Orinoco flow ? 

A. Ipava. 

Q. What Indians in Venezuela ? 

A. Guarones, Caribs, and Ottomacs. 

Q. How many inhabitants has Caraccas ? 

A. 23,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Coro? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Valencia ? 

A. 15,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cumana? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. What Island belongs to Venezuela ? 

A, Margarita. 

For a further description, see Key, page 205. 



ECUADOR. 

Q. What bounds Ecuador on the north ? 
A. New Grenada. 
Q. South? 
A. North Peru. 
Q. East ? 
A. Brazil. 
Q. West? ' 
.#. Pacific Ocean. 

Q. What range of mountains is in the western part ? 
A. Andes. 

Q. What two large rivers in the south ? 
A. Tunguragua, and Ucayale. 
These form the Amazon River. 
Q. How far is the Amazon navigable for ships ? 
A. 2400 ms. (M. A.) 
Q. For sloops ? 
A. 3000 ms. (M. A.) 
Q. How many inhabitants has Quito ? 
A. 70,000. (M. A.) 

Q. What three cities number 20,000 each? 
A. Riobamba, Guayaquil, and Cuenca. 
Q. What mountain south of Quito ? 

A. Chimborazo. This was formerly considered the highest in 
South America. 
For a further description, see Key, page 205. 



216 GUIANA. PERU. 

GUIANA. 
Page 200.— Lesson 140.— Map No. 17. 

Q. What bounds Guiana on the north ? 

A. Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. The west? 

A. Venezuela. 

Q. The south and east ? 

A. Brazil. 

Q. The principal rivers ? 

A. Essequibo, Surinam, Maroni, and Oyapock. 

Q. How long are the first three ? 

A. Essequibo, 450 ms. ; Surinam, 300; Maroni, 350. (M. A.) 

Q. How many inhabitants has Georgetown ? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Paramaribo? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

Q. New Amsterdam ? 

A. 4000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cayenne? 

A. 3000. (M. A.) 

Q. What Indians inhabit the south-east part of Guiana ? 

A. Arowauks. 

For a further description, see Key, pages 205-6. 



PERU. 

Page 201.— Lesson Ml.— Map No. 17. 

Q. What bounds Peru on the north ? 

A. Ecuador. 

Q. South? 

A. Bolivia. 

Q. East? 

A. Brazil, and Bolivia. 

Q. West? 

A. Pacific Ocean. 

Q. What mountains extend along the coast ? 

A. Andes. 

Q. What desert in the south ? 

A. Atacama. 

Q. What lake forms part of the eastern boundary ? 

A. Titicaca. 

Q. Which is the head branch of the Amazon ? 

A. Ucayale. 



BOLIVIA. 217 

Q. In what lake does it rise ? 

A. Reyes. 

Q. How far does sloop navigation extend on it from the sea ? 

A. 2600 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Lima ? 

A. 55,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cuzco? 

A. 40,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Arequipa? 

A. 35,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Guamanga? 

A. 24,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Puno? 

A. 18,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cerro Pasco ? 

A. 12,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Truxillo? 

A. 12,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Tacna? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. What are the ports from Ocono to Iquique called ? 

A. The Intermedios. 

Q. When was the battle of Ayacucho fought ? 

A. In 1824. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Yungay ? 

A. In 1839. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 206. 



BOLIVIA. 
Page 203.— Lesson 142.— Map No. 17. 

#. What bounds Bolivia on the north ? 
A. North Peru, and Brazil. 
Q. South? 
,#. Buenos Ayres. 
Q. East? 

.#. Brazil, and Paraguay. 
' Q. West? 
A. South Peru. 

(?. On what ocean is the south-west part situated ? 
A. Pacific. 

Q. Which are the principal rivers ? 

A. Mamore, Branco, Guapore, Paraguay, Pilcomayo, and 
Vermejo. 
19 



218 CHILI. 

Q. How long is each of these ? 

A. Mamore, 1200 ms. ; Branco, 1000 ; Guapore, 500 ; Para- 
guay, 1200; Pilcomayo, 1100; Vermejo, 1000. (M. A.) 

Q. The largest lake? 

A. Titicaca. 

Q. How long is it? 

A. 180 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What two mountains east of Lake Titicaca ? 

A. Sorata, and Illimani. These are the highest in South 
America. 

Q. How many inhabitants has Chuquisaca, the capital ? 

A. 18,000. (M. A.) 

Q. La Paz? 

A. 40,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cochabamba? 

A. 30,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Potosi? 

A. 9000. (M. A.) 

Q. Oruro? 

A. 4000. (M. A.) 

Q. What desert occupies the coast of Bolivia ? 

A. Atacama. 

Q. What tribes of Indians are in Bolivia ? 

A. Moxos, Chiquitos, and Abipones. 

For a further description, see Key, page 206. 



CHILI. 
Page 205.— Lesson US.— Map No. 17. 

Q. What bounds Chili on the north ? 

A. Bolivia. 

Q. South? 

A. Patagonia. 

Q. East? 

A. Buenos Ayres. 

Q. West? 

A. Pacific Ocean. 

Q. What mountains separate Chili from Buenos Ayres ? 

A. Andes. 

Q. What Island lies south of Chili? 

A. Chiloe. • 

Q. How long is it? 

A. 140 ms. M. A.) 

Q. What Islands lie west of Valparaiso ? 

A. Juan Fernandez. 



BRAZIL. 219 

Q. What Island was the residence of Alexander Selkirk ? 

A. Mas-a-Tierra. 

Q. What Islands lie north of Juan Fernandez ? 

A. Islands of St. Felix. 

Q. What is the population of Santiago ? 

A. 65,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Valparaiso ? 

A. 26,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Concepcion? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Quillota? 

A. 8000. (M. A.) 

Q. Santa Rosa? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. S. Felipe ? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. Valdivia? 

A. 7000. (M. A.) 

Q. Copiapo? 

A. 2000. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 207. 



BRAZIL. 
Page 207.— Lesson lte.—Map No. 17. 

Q. What bounds Brazil on the north ? 

A. Venezuela, Guiana, and the Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. East? 

A. Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. West? 

A. Venezuela, Ecuador, Peru, Bolivia, Paraguay, and Uru- 
guay. 

Q. Which are the principal rivers that flow into the Atlantic 
Ocean ? 

A. Amazon, Para, Parnaiba, and St. Francisco. 

Q. How long are they ? 

A. Amazon, 3600 ms. ; Para, 1200 ; Parnaiba, 800 ; St. Fran- 
cisco, 1300. (M. A.) 

Q. How wide is the Amazon River at its mouth ? 

A. 150 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Which are the chief branches of the Amazon ? 

A. Xingu, Tapajos, Madeira, Negro, and Caqueta. 

Q. How long are they ? 

A. Xingu, 1300 ms. ; Tapajos, 1 100 ; Madeira, 2200 ; Negro, 
1200; Caqueta, 1100. (M. A.) 



220 BUENOS AYRES. 

Q. How far is the Amazon navigable for ships ? 

A. 2400 ms. (M! A.) 

Q. For sloops ? 

A. 2600 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. How far can sloops ascend the Madeira from the sea ? 

A. 1800 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What mountains extend along the coast ? 

A. Brazilian. 

Q. How long are they ? 

A. 2100 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What are the chief Indian tribes that inhabit Brazil? 

A. Tapajos, Mauhes, Boticudos, Guapindayes, Camecrans, 
Xerentes, Cayapos, and Bororos. 

Q. What Island at the mouth of the Amazon ? 

A. Joannes. 

Q. How long is it? 

A. 150 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What land was first seen by Cabral, the discoverer of Bra- 
zil, in the year 1500? 

A, Old Porto Seguro. 

Q. What is the population of Rio Janeiro ? 

A. 200,000. (M.A.) 

Q. Bahia? 

A. 120,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Pernambuco? 

A. 65,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cuyaba? 

A. 30,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Sergippe del Rey? 

A. 30,000. (M. A.) 

Q. What towns have 20,000 inhabitants each ? 

A. Para, Maranham, Aracati, San Paul, and Villa Bella 

Q. What district east of the St. Francisco River ? 

A. Diamond. 

For a further description, see Key, pages 206-7. 



BUENOS AYRES. 

Page 209.— Lesson IQo.—Map No. 17, 

Q. What country lies north of Buenos Ay res? 

A. Bolivia. 

Q. East? 

A. Paraguay, and Uruguay. 

Q. West? 

A. Chili. 



BUENOS AYRES. 221 

Q. South? 

A. Patagonia. 

Q. What mountains separate Buenos Ay res from Chili ? 

A. Andes. 

Q. What river from Patagonia ? 

A. Rio Negro. 

Q. From Uruguay ? 

A. Rio de la Plata, and Uruguay. 

Q. From Paraguay? 

A. Paraguay, and Parana. 

Q. What is the length of the Rio de la Plata ? 

A. 2250 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Parana ? 

A. 1900 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Paraguay? 

A. 1200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Colorado? 

A. 1000 ms. (M.A.) 

Q. Rio Negro ? 

A. 700 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Saladillo? 

A. 400ms. (M.A.) 

Q. Salado? 

A. 800 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Vermejo? 

A. 1000 ms. (M.A.) 

Q. How wide is the Rio de la Plata at its mouth ? 

A. 150 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. How far is it navigable for ships ? 

A. 180 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. How far is the Paraguay navigable for sloops 1 

A. 1000 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Buenos Ayres ? 

A. 100,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Cordova ? 

A. 13,000. (M. A.) 

Q. San Juan ? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Mendoza? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 207. 

19* 



222 PARAGUAY URUGUAY. 

PARAGUAY.* 

Page 211.— Lesson 146.— Map No. 17. 

Q. What river forms the east and south boundary of Paraguay ? 
A. Parana. 

Q. The west boundary ? 
A. Paraguay. 

Q. What tropic extends nearly through the middle of Para- 
guay ? 

A. Tropic of Capricorn. 

Q. How many inhabitants has Assumption, the capital ? 

A. 10,000. 

Q. The other towns? 

A. Curuguaty, 3000 ; Villa Rica, 3000 ; Itapua, 2000. (M. A.) 

Q. How far is the Paraguay navigable for sloops from the sea ? 

A. 1000 ms. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 207. 



URUGUAY. 

Q. What bounds Uruguay on the north? 

A. Brazil. 

Q. On the south ? 

A. The Rio de la Plata. 

Q. West? 

A. Uruguay River. 

Q. East? 

A. Brazil. 

Q. How long is the Uruguay River ? 

A. 800 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Negro? 

A. 400 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Montevideo, the capital ? 

A. 15,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Maldonado? 

A. 1000. (M. A.) 

Q. How far is it from Uruguay to the Cape of Good Hope ? 

A. 4100 ms. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 208. 

* It will be seen that Uruguay is included in this lesson. 



PATAGONIA. WZ6 

PATAGONIA. 
Page 212.— Lesson U7.—Map No. 17. 

Q. How is Patagonia bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the territories of Buenos Ayres, or La 
Plata, and Chili ; E. by the Atlantic ; S. by the Strait of Magel- 
lan, separating it from Terra del Fuego ; and W. by the Pacific. 

Q. Which are its chief rivers ? 

A. Camarones, and Port Desire. 

Q. What tribes inhabit it ? 

A. Puelches, and Moluches. 

Q. What islands lie to the eastward ? 

A. Falkland. 

Q. What straits separate this region from Terra del Fuego ? 

A. Magellan. 

Q. What island on the west coast ? 

A. Wellington. 

Q. What island east of Terra del Fuego ? 

A. Staten Land. 

Q. What celebrated Cape south of Terra del Fuego ? 

A. Horn. — This Cape is the southern extremity of Hermit's 
Island. 

For a further description, see Key, page 208. 

Map No. 1. — Western Hemisphere. 

Q. Which is the most northern, Graham's Land, or the Falk- 
land Isles ? 

A. Falkland Isles. 

Q. The most southern ? 

A. Graham's Land. 

Q. Which are the most eastern Islands ? 

A. Sandwich Land. 

Q. Which is the most distant from Patagonia ? 

A. Sandwich Land. 



224 EUROPE. 



EUROPE. 

Pages 216-17.— Lesson 150.— Map No. 18. 

Q. How is Europe bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Arctic Ocean ; E. by Asiatic Russia ; 
S. by the Mediterranean Sea, (which separates it from Africa,) 
the Sea of Marmora, the Black Sea, and the Sea of Azov ; and 
W. bv the N. Atlantic Ocean, which separates it from N. America. 
(M. A.) 

Europe is the smallest of the great divisions of the globe, being only 
about a fifth part of the size of Asia or America, and a third part of that 
of Africa. But, though thus inferior in point of size, Europe is greatly 
superior to the other divisions of the Old World in the enterprise, intelli- 
gence, and civilization of her inhabitants, and perhaps also in her physical 
advantages. 

Europe forms the N. W. portion of the old or E. continent, of which it 
occupies a little more than two-seventh parts. Its most northern point is 
Cape North, in 71° 10' N. lat, on the Island Mageroe. The most southern 
is the Point of Tarifa in Spain, iat. 36° 2' N. ; the most eastern is on the 
Uralian Mts., W. of Ekatarinburg, long. 60° 20' E. ; and the most western 
is Cape Roca, in Portugal, long. 9° 30' W. Its extreme length, from Cape 
St. Vincent, in Spain, N. E., to the mouth of the R. Kara, does not much 
exceed 3000 ms. A line drawn from Cape Matapan, in Greece, to Cape 
North, would measure upwards of 2400 ms. The area is computed at 
3,500,000 sq. ms. ; the pop. at 238,781,000. 

Q. Which is its largest city and river 1 

A. London is the largest city, and the Volga the largest river. 

DIVISIONS. 

Q. How is Norway bounded ? 

A. It is bounded E. by Russian Lapland and Sweden ; S. by 
the Skager Rack, separating it from Denmark, and W. and N. 
by the North Sea, and the Atlantic and Arctic Oceans. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Bergen. 

Norway (Norw. Norge, Germ. Norwegen ) is a country of N. Europe, 
forming the W. portion of the great Scandinavian peninsula, and at present 
united to the crown of Sweden. It extends, including Norwegian Lapland, 
between the 58th and 71st degs. of N. lat., and the 5th and 31st of E. long. 
Its entire length from the Naze, its most S. promontory, to the N. Cape, is 
upwards of 1100 ms. Its breadth varies greatly; in Norrland, near its N. 
extremity, it may average about 50 ms. ; but towards the S. it is as much 
as 250 ms. The area is estimated at about 121,000 sq. ms. Pop. 1,100,000. 
Norway is divided into 18 provinces. 



EUROPE. *2 V 25 

Q. How is Sweden bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. E. by Russian Lapland, from which it is 
separated by the R. Tornea and one of its affluents ; E. and S. 
by the Gulf of Bothnia and the Baltic ; S. W. by the Sound, 
Cattegat, and Skager Rack ; and W. and N. by Norway, from 
which it is for the most part separated by the Dofrafields, the great 
mountain chain of Scandinavia. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Stockholm. 

Sweden (in Swedish, Sverigt) is a monarchy in the N. W. part of 
Europe, comprising the E. part of the Scandinavian peninsula, situated be- 
tween 55° 20' and 69° N. lat., and 11° 10' and 24° 20' E. long. Length 
above 950 ms. ; greatest breadth, about 260 ms. Area estimated at 176,000 
sq. ms. Pop. 3,100,000. Sweden and Norway form at present but one 
kingdom, which comprehends the whole of the Scandinavian peninsula. 
Sweden is divided into 24 lans, or governments. 

Q. How is Russia bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Arctic Ocean; E. by Asiatic 
Russia ; S. by the territories of Austria and Turkey, by the 
Black Sea, and the Caucasian territories of Russia, which are 
comprised within the limits of Asia ; and W. by Sweden, the 
Gulf of Bothnia, the Baltic Sea, and Prussia. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. St. Petersburg. (Capital of the Empire.) 

European Russia, though not comprising the greatest extent of terri- 
tory, surpasses the other divisions of the empire vastly in population and 
importance. It is situated between 40° 40' and 70° N. lat., and 17° 40' 
and 66° E. long. Its greatest length from N. to S. is about 1900 ms. ; its 
greatest breadth from E. to W. is above 1600 ms. Area, 1,755,000 sq. ms. 
Pop. 51,000,000. 

Russia is the most extensive empire, and one of the most powerful on 
the globe, comprehending the N. E. part of Europe, all the N. part of Asia, 
and a portion of N. America, situated between 38° and 78° N. lat., and be- 
tween 17° 40' E., and 130° W. long. The length of its territory, on the 
Eastern continent, is near 6000 ms. ; the greatest breadth is above 2000 ms. 
The area of the whole is more than 7,000,000 sq. ms. The pop. is esti- 
mated at about 61,000,000. This vast empire is divided into three great 
parts, viz. European, Asiatic, and American Russia. The established religion 
is the Greek Orthodox, identical with that of the Greeks of the Ottoman 
empire. The government is an absolute despotism. 

Q. How is Denmark bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Skager Rack, N. E. by the Catte- 
gat, S. E. by the Baltic Sea, S. by Liibeck, Hamburg, Mecklen- 
burg, and Hanover, and W. by the North Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Copenhagen. 

Dexmark (Dan. Dan-e-mark) is a kingdom of Europe, between 53° 
20' and 57° 45' N. lat., and 8° 5' and 12° 46' E. long. It comprises con- 



226 EUROPE. 

tinental Denmark, which may be termed the north-western peninsula of 
Germany, and the large islands of Zealand and Fiinen, besides several 
smaller ones lying near them. The length of the continental portion is 
about 304 ms. ; greatest breadth about 106 ms. The entire area of the 
kingdom is computed at 22,000 sq. ms. Pop. 2,100,000. 

Q. How is Holland bounded ? 

A, It is bounded N. and W. by the. North Sea, E. by Hanover 
and Rhenish Prussia, and S. by Belgium. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Hague. 

Holland, or The Netherlands, comprises the territories formerly called 
the Seven United Provinces ; it is now a secondary European kingdom, but 
was, in the 17th century, and part of the 18th, an independent republic, 
raised by the industry and enterprise of its inhabitants, to the first rank as 
a commercial power. The kingdom of Holland lies in N. W. Europe, 
between lat. 51° 12' and 53° 3~0' N., and long. 3° 22' and 7° 12' E. 
Length, N. E. to S.W., about 200 ms. ; average breadth about 65 ms. The 
eastern part of the Grand Duchy of Luxemburg belongs to Holland ; it is 
situated between lat. 49° 28' and 50° 13' N., and long. 5° 45' and 6° 30' 
E. ; it is detached from the rest of the Dutch dominions, and surrounded by 
those of Prussia, Belgium, and France. Area about 11,000 sq. ms. Pop. 
3,000,000. Holland is divided into 12 provinces. 

Q. How is Belgium bounded? 

A. On the N. by Holland ; E. by Prussia ; S. by France ; and 
W. by the North Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Brussels. 

The kingdom of Belgium is situated between France and Holland, and 
has been established since the separation of its provinces from those of Hol- 
land by the revolution of 1830. Its territory is small as compared with the 
great European states, being only about one-eighth of that of Great Britain, 
while its population but little exceeds four millions. The important position, 
however, which this country has occupied in the political, military, commer- 
cial, and agricultural history of Europe — its former celebrity in manufactures 
and the fine arts — and its present rapid progress in every industrious pursuit 
and social improvement, give it a peculiar interest. 

Belgium extends from 49^ 27' to 51° 31' N. lat., and from 2° 37' to 6° 
E. long. The general outline of the territory is that of a triangular figure, 
of which the longest side stretches along the frontier of France. Belgium 
extends from N.W. to S. E. 193 English ms. ; its greatest breadth, from N. 
E. to S.W., is about 127 ms. The area is estimated at 13,000 sq. ms., and 
the population at 4,200,000. Belgium is a limited monarchy, and is divided 
into 9 provinces. It possesses the western part of the Duchy of Luxem- 
burg. The division of Limburg, a small duchy lying on the River Meuse, 
is still a matter of diplomatic arrangement between Belgium and Holland. 

Q. How is England bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. and N.W. by Scotland; N.E. and E. 
by the North Sea; S. by the English Channel; and W. by St. 
George's Channel, Wales, and the Irish Sea. (M, A.) 



EUROPE. 227 

Q. Capital? 

A. London. 

England, (originally, Engla-lartd, i. e. the land of the Angles, or 
Engles). This most populous, wealthy, and important portion of the 
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, comprises the most southerly, 
largest, and most fertile part of the Island of Great Britain. It lies W. from 
and opposite to France, Belgium, Holland, and the S. parts of Denmark, 
between 49° 57' 30", and 55° 47' N. lat., and 1° 46' E. and 5° 41' W, 
long. Its S. E. extremity, at Dover, approaches to within 21 ms. of the 
opposite coast of France. Its shape approaches nearest to that of a triangle, 
of which Berwick may be considered the apex, and a line from the Land's 
End to the N. Foreland (342 ms.) the base ; a line from the former along 
the W. side (426 ms.), and from the latter along the E. side (334 ms.), 
complete the figure. The sea-coast, if measured from one headland to an- 
other, is about 1200 ms. in extent; but if its principal indentations are fol- 
lowed, it will be found to be fully 2000 ms. The area amounts to 51,500 
sq. ms. The pop., according to the census of 1841, was 1 5,1 19,178. Eng- 
land is divided into 40 counties. 

Q. How is Wales bounded ? 

A. On the N. by the Irish Sea ; S. by the Bristol Channel and 
the Severn River; E. by England; and W. by the Irish Sea, 
and St. George's Channel. 

Wai.es is a principality, and one of the divisions of Great Britain. It lies 
between 51° 22' and 53° 26' N. lat, and between 2° 51' and 5° 20' W. 
long. It is about 135 miles in length from N. to S., and 95 from E. to W. 
in its greatest breadth. Area about 8500 sq. ms. Pop. in 1841, 911,603. 
Wales comprises two divisions, viz. : North Wales and South Wales, which 
are divided into 12 counties. The eldest son of the British sovereign derives 
his title of Prince of Wales from this country. 

Q. How is Scotland bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. and W. by the Atlantic Ocean ; E. by the 
North Sea ; S. E. by England, from which it is separated by the 
Solway Frith, the Cheviot Hills, and the R. Tweed ; and S. by 
the Irish Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Edinburgh. 

Scotland is one of the secondary European kingdoms, comprising the 
northern and smaller portion of the island of Great Britain, and forming 
one of the three great divisions of the United Kingdom of Great Britain 
and Ireland, between lat. 54° 38' and 58° 40' 30" N., and long. 1° 46' 30", 
and 6° 3' 30" W., or, including the Hebrides, 7° 44' W. Its greatest 
length, N. to S., from Dunnet Head to the Mull of Galloway, is about 280 
ms. : its breadth is very unequal, varying from 32 ms., between Alloa on 
the Frith of Forth and Dumbarton on the Clyde, to 170 ms. between Ard- 
namuchan Point on the west coast, to Buchan Ness .on the east. Area, 
including the islands, 30,000 sq. ms. Pop. in 1831, 2,365,114; in 1841, 
2,620,184. 

The kingdom, with its dependencies, is divided into 32 counties. Before 
the accession of James VI. (afterwards James I. of England) to the Eng- 



228 EUROPE. 

lish throne, in 1603, Scotland was an independent kingdom. Till the 
Union, which took place in the reign of Queen Anne, though under the 
same sovereign with England, it still had its own parliament. According 
to the Articles of Union, ratified Jan. 16th, 1707, the peerage of Scotland is 
represented in the house of Lords by 16 peers, chosen by the whole body of 
Scottish peers at the commencement of each parliament. The counties 
were to be represented by 30 members in the house of Commons, and the 
boroughs by 15. This arrangement continued till 1832, when the borough 
representation received an addition of 8 members, making in all 53. Edin- 
burgh is the capital of Scotland, and was formerly the residence of the Scot- 
tish kings. 

Q. How is Ireland bounded? 

A. It is bounded on the N. and W. by the Atlantic Ocean ; N. 
E. by the North Channel ; E. and S. by the Irish Sea, and St. 
George's Channel. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Dublin. 

iREXATrn is a large and important island of Europe, in the N. Atlantic 
Ocean. It is situated to the W. of Great Britain, being separated from the 
latter by St. George's Channel on the S., the Irish Sea in the middle, and 
the North Channel on the N. ; the distance from St. David's Head in S. 
Wales, across St. George's Channel, to Carnsore Point, in Ireland, is about 
50 ms. ; the distance from Holyhead, in N. Wales, across the S. border of 
the Irish Sea, to Dublin, about 55 ms. ; and the distance from the Mull of 
Can tire, across the North Channel, to the opposite coast of Ireland, about 
12£ ms. Besides its proximity to England, Ireland has been long politically 
connected with that country ; and since 1800, when its separate legislature 
was merged into the imperial parliament, it has formed a principal portion 
of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland. 

This Island was called by Aristotle and Strabo Ierne ('it'pv^); by Caesar, 
Tacitus, and Pliny, Hibernia ; and by Mela and others, Juverna ; these 
names being obviously derived from its native or aboriginal name of Ir, 
Eri, or Erin, whence also the modern name has been deduced. 

Ireland is situated between the parallels of 51° 25' and 55° 23' N. lat. 
and of 5° 27' and 10° 30' W. long. It is of a rhomboidal figure ; and, 
though more compact than Great Britain, is deeply indented, particularly on 
its S.W. and N. coasts, with bays and arms of the sea. Its greatest length 
from N. to S. is about 306 ms. ; and its greatest breadth, from W. to E. is 
182 ms. ; but in many places the breadth is much less, and there is no part 
of Ireland above 50 or 55 ms. from the sea. Its area is estimated at about 
31,000 sq. ms. The pop., by the census of 1831, was 7,767,401 ; and by 
that of 1841, 8,175,273. Ireland is divided into four provinces, viz.: 
Ulster in the N., Leinster in the E., Munster in the S., and Connaught in 
the W. These are subdivided into counties, of which Ulster contains 9, 
Leinster 12, Munster 6, and Connaught 5; total, 32. The administration 
of government is vested chiefly in the lord-lieutenant and privy council, who 
are appointed by the crown. 

Q. How is France bounded? 

A. It is bounded N. W. and N. by the English Channel {La 
Manchc), the Straits of Dover (Pas de Calais), and the North 



EUROPE. 229 

Sea ; N. E. by Belgium, Luxemburg, and the Rhenish pro- 
vinces of Prussia and Bavaria ; E. by the territories of Baden, 
Switzerland and the Sardinian States ; S. by the Mediterranean 
and the Pyrenees, which separate it from Spain ; and W. by the 
Bay of Biscay and the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Paris. 

France (Anc. Gallia or Gaul, Fr. La France,} is one of the richest, 
most important, and powerful of the states of Europe, in the W. part of which 
it is advantageously situated, between lat. 42° 20' and 51° 5 f N., and long. 
4° 49' W. and 8° 16' E. Except on its N. E. frontier, its actual are iden- 
tical with its natural boundaries ; being on the E. the Rhine from the influx 
of the Lauter to Basle, the Jura Mts., and the Alps to the Mediterranean ; 
the latter and the Pyrenees on the S.; and N.W. and W. the English Chan- 
nel and the ocean. The shape of France is somewhat hexagonal. Its 
greatest length N.W. to S.E. (from the mouth of the Bidassoa R., on the 
Bay of Biscay, to its easternmost boundary on the Mediterranean Sea) is 
664 ms. ; its greatest breadth (a line crossing the former nearly at right 
angles) is 620 ms. Length, N. to S., Dunkirk to the eastern end of the 
Pyrenees, over 600 ms. ; greatest breadth E. to W. (a line passing from the 
coast westward of Brest, through Paris) about the same ; least breadth E. 
to W. about its centre, 335 ms. Inclusive of Corsica, which, though belong- 
ing naturally to Italy, forms a dep. of France, the total area is estimated at 
205,000 sq. ms. Pop., in 1801, 27,349,000; in 1821, 30,461,875; in 
1831, 32,569,223 , in 1836, 33,540,910 ; in 1846, estimated at 34,200,000. 
The government of France is a limited monarchy. 

Q. How is Spain bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Bay of Biscay and by France, being 
separated from the latter by the Pyrenees ; S. and E. by the Strait 
of Gibraltar and the Mediterranean ; and W. by Portugal and the 
Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Madrid. 

Spain (Anc. Espaua, Span. Hispania, Fr. Espagne,) an extensive and 
once powerful kingdom of S. Europe, occupying the E. and largest portion 
of its S. W. peninsula ; between lat. 36° 5' and 43° 30' N., and long. 3° 
20' E., and 9° 10' W. Greatest length E. to W., about 650 ms. ; greatest 
breadth, 550 ms. Area 183,000 sq. ms. Pop. estimated at 12,000,000. 
Spain comprises 12 great divisions, or Captain-generalships, and these are 
divided into 48 provinces ; nearly all the large divisions correspond in name 
and location with the kingdoms into which this country was so long divided 
during the middle ages. The region occupied by Spain and Portugal is 
often called, by way of distinction, the " Peninsula ;" no other part of Eu- 
rope is so designated. 

Q. How is Portugal bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. and E. by Spain, and S. and W. by the 
Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 
Q. Capital? 
A. Lisbon. 
20 



230 EUROPE. 

Portugal (Anc. Lusitania) is the most western kingdom of Europe. 
It occupies the greater part of the W. portion of the Spanish peninsula, 
situated between the 37th and 42d degs. N. lat., and the 6th and 10th W 
long. Length N. to S., 350 ms. ; average breadth, about 110 ms. Area, 
39,000 sq. ms. Pop. 3,700,000. 

Geographically considered, Portugal is properly a dependency on, or por- 
tion of Spain; and, in fact, all the mountain chains and great rivers by 
which she is traversed originate in the eastern and more extensive portion of 
the peninsula. 

Q. How is Austria bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Saxony, Prussia, the free city of Cra- 
cow, and Russian Poland; E. by Russia and Turkey; S. by 
Turkey, the Gulf of Venice, the territories of the Pope, Modena, 
and Parma ; and W. by Sardinia, Switzerland, and Bavaria. 
(M. A.^ 

Q. Capital? 

A. Vienna. 

The Empire or Austria, (Ger. Oestreich, which signifies « eastern Em- 
pire ") is one of the largest and most important European states. It is situ- 
ated in central and southern Europe; and, with the exception of a narrow 
strip at its S. extremity, projecting along the coast of the Gulf of Venice, its 
territory forms a very compact mass. It extends from about 42° to 51° N. 
lat, and from about 8° 30' to 26° 30' E. long. Its length, from Lake Mag- 
giore, in Italy, to the E. frontier of Transylvania, is about 860 ms. ; and 
its breadth (exclusive of Dalmatia), from the S. frontier of Croatia to the 
most N. point of Bohemia, about 492 ms. The total area is estimated at 
277,534 sq. Eng. ins. The extensive frontier of the empire, upwards of 
4250 ms. in length, has the rare advantage of being well defined by natural 
boundaries ; such as mountains, large rivers, lakes, and the sea, offering 
favourable military positions for defence, with the exception of a portion of 
the frontier of Galicia, towards the Russian provinces, which is open. 

The Austrian empire is composed of many states, differing widely in 
extent and population. As the far greater part of the provinces were united 
under the imperial sceptre by peaceable means — that is, by inheritance or by 
treaty — the boundaries of all remain as they existed while they formed inde- 
pendent states, with the exception of the Italian provinces, whose frontiers 
and divisions date only from 1815. The population, exclusive of Lombardy 
and Venice, is estimated at 32,500,000 ; including that kingdom, 36,950,000. 

Q. How is Prussia bounded ? 

A. It consists chiefly of two parts ; the larger of which, or 
Eastern Prussia, is bounded N. by the Baltic Sea ; E. by Russia, 
Russian Poland, and Cracow ; S. by the Austrian States of Galicia, 
Moravia, and Bohemia, with Saxony and other German States ; 
and W. by Hesse-Cassel, Brunswick, Hanover, and Mecklenburg. 
West Prussia, or the provinces on the Rhine, are bounded N. by 
Hanover ; S. and S. E. by the territories of Bavaria, Nassau, and 
several of the smaller German States ; N. W. and W. by Holland 
and Belgium: and S.W. by France. (M. A.) 



EUROPE 231 

Q. Capital? 

A. Berlin. 

Prussia (Ger. Preussen,) is an important European kingdom, situated 
between 49° 50' and 55° 52' N. lat., and 5° 50' and 22° 54' E. long. The 
principal part of the Prussian dominions lies continuously along the S. shore 
of the Baltic, between Russia and Mecklenburg, comprising the N. part of 
what was formerly Poland, and most of the N. of Germany. The inland 
frontier of this part of the monarchy on the E. and S. is sufficiently con- 
nected 5 but on the W. side it is very ragged, some small independent 
states being almost entirely surrounded by the Prussian dominions. But 
exclusive of this principal portion, there is an extensive Prussian territory 
on both sides the Rhine, divided into the provinces of Westphalia and Rhine. 
This portion is separated from the rest of the monarchy by Hesse-Cassel, part 
of Hanover, Brunswick, &c. The Canton of Neufchatel, in Switzerland, and 
some detached territories in Saxony, also belong to Prussia. Length of East- 
ern Prussia, from N. N. E. to S. S.W., 600 ms. ; greatest breadth about 340 ms. 
Area about 88,000 sq. ms. Area of West Prussja, or the Provinces on the 
Rhine, about 17,000 sq.ms. Area of the whole Prussian Monarchy, including, 
besides the above, the Canton of Neufchatel, in Switzerland, and several other 
small detached pieces of territory, about 1 07,000 sq. ms. Total pop., in 1816, 
10,402,631; in 1825, ' 12,308,948 ; in 1846, 14,000,000. Prussia is an 
absolute monarchy, but the government is administered with so much mild- 
ness and liberality, that the people enjoy, perhaps, as great a share of prac- 
tical liberty as is permitted in any constitutional kingdom in Europe. 

Q. How is Bavaria bounded ? 

A. On the N. and N. W. by the principalities of Reuss and the 
Saxon Duchies ; N. E. by the kingdom of Saxony ; E. by Bohe- 
mia and Upper Austria; S. by the Tyrol; W. by Wirtemberg, 
Baden, Hesse Darmstadt, and Hesse Cassel. 

Q. Capital? 

A. Munich. 

Bayaria, (Ger. Baiern), a kingdom in the interior of Germany, consisting 
of two distinct portions. The one situated to the E. of the Rhine, containing 
above seven-eighths of the whole kingdom, and commonly called the Terri- 
tory of the Danube and the Mayne, extends from 47° 18' to 50° 41' N. lat., 
and from about 9° to 13° 46' E. long. The other portion of the Bavarian 
dominions, the territory of the Rhine, or Rhenish Bavaria, is situated on the 
W. bank of that river, and is completely disjoined from the preceding by the 
territories of Baden and Hesse Darmstadt. It extends from 48° 57' to 49° 50' 
N. lat., and from 7° 6' to 8° 3 1' E. long. The total area of Bavaria is 3 1 ,997 
sq. ms., or about equal to that of Ireland. The pop. is estimated at 4,370,000. 

Q. How is Hanover bounded ? 

A. On the N. W. by the North Sea ; N. and N. E. by the 
Elbe (which separates it from the territories of Hamburg, Den- 
mark and Mecklenburg) and by Mecklenburg ; E. and S. E. by 
Prussia and Brunswick; S.W. by Hesse Cassel, Lippe Schauen- 
burg and the Prussian province of Westphalia ; and W. by Holland, 

Q. Capital? 

A, Hanover, 



232 EUROPE. 

Hajtover (German Hannover), a kingdom in the N.W. part of Germany, 
situated between 51° 18' and 53° 52' N. lat., and 6° 48' and 11° 40' E. 
long. It may be regarded as consisting principally of three portions, the two 
larger of which lie within nearly the same latitudes, and are almost, though 
not quite, divided from each other by the grand duchy of Oldenburg. The 
third is much smaller, and is separated from the more northerly of the other 
two by the territory of Brunswick. Hanover encloses the grand duchy of 
Oldenburg within its territories on all sides except the N., where the latter 
is bounded by the North Sea. The whole contains an area of 14,720 sq. 
ms. The pop. is estimated at 1,755,000. 

Q. How is Saxony bounded ? 

A. On the N. by Prussian Saxony, and Brandenburg ; S. by 
Bohemia ; and W. by the Saxon Duchies and Prussian Saxony. 

Q. Capital? 

A. Dresden. 

The kingdom of Saxony is in the interior of Germany, the centre of the 
kingdom being about 260 ms. distant from the nearest part of the Baltic, and 
300 ms. from the North Sea. It lies between 50° 10' and 51° 28' N. lat., 
and 11° 55' and 15° 3' E. long. Length about 140 ms., greatest breadth 
75 ms. Area 7200 sq. ms. Pop. 1,706,000. This kingdom is, for its 
extent, the most populous in Germany. 

Q. How is Wirtemberg bounded ? 

A. On the N., the W. and the S.W. by the territory of Baden ; 
E. and S. E. by Bavaria ; and S. by the Lake of Constance and 
the Hohenzollern Principalities. 

Q. Capital? 

A. Stuttgard. 

Wirtemberg, or, as it is often written, Wurtemburg, is an interior king- 
dom of Germany, on the head waters of the Danube river. The centre of 
the kingdom is nearly equi-distant from the North Sea and the Gulf of 
Venice, being about 330 miles S. E. of the nearest coasts of the former, and 
280 from that of the latter. Wirtemberg lies between 47° 35' and 49° 35' 
N. lat., and 8° 15' and 10° 30' E. long. Length 140 ms., greatest breadth 
96 ms. Area 7770 sq. ms. Pop. estimated at 1,713,000. 

Q. How is Baden bounded ? 

A. On the N. by Bavaria and Hesse Darmstadt; E. by Wir- 
temberg ; S. by Switzerland and the lake of Constance ; and W. 
by the Bavarian territory of the Rhine and the eastern part of 
France, from which it is separated by the river Rhine. 

Q. Capital ? 

A. Carlsruhe. 

Badeiv is the largest and most populous of the German grand duchies. It 
lies along the E. bank of the Rhine, and is situated between 47° 30' and 49° 
50' N. lat., and ?° 30' and 9° 50' E. long. Length near 190 ms., greatest 
breadth about 100 ms. The area is estimated at 5800 sq. ms. Pop, 1,200,000. 

Q. What do the Hessian States comprise ? 

A. The electorate of Hesse Cassel, the Grand Duchy of Hesse 
Darmstadt, and the landgraviate of Hesse Homburg. 



EUROPE. 233 

Q. How is Hesse Cassel bounded ? 

A. N. by Prussia and Hanover ; S. by Hesse Darmstadt ; E. 
by*Prussia, the Saxon Duchies, and Hesse Darmstadt; and W. 
by Prussia, and the territories of Frankfort, Waldeck, and Nassau. 

Hesse Cassel (Ger. Hessen Cassel), is an interior state, and is called an 
electorate. It lies chiefly on the R. Fulda, one of the head branches of the 
Weser, and comprises one large and two smaller and detached portions of 
territory, the last, however, being so unimportant as to be of but little account 
in the general estimate. The chief division of the state is situated between 
50° 6' and 51° 39* N. lat., and 8° 25' and 10° 15' E. long. The largest of 
the detached territories, the county of Schaumberg, lies about 60 ms. N. of 
the capital : it is surrounded by the territories of Prussia, Hanover, and Lippe. 
The smallest detached territory, the lordship of Schmalkalden, lies about 60 
ms. S. E. of the capital. It is enclosed on all sides by the territories of the 
Saxon Duchies, except on the S. E., where it adjoins a small detached Prus- 
sian territory. The area of the electorate is about 4352 sq. ms. Pop. 
650,000. 

Q. How is Hesse Darmstadt bounded ? 

A. On the N. by Hesse Cassel ; S. by Baden and the Rhenish 
territory of Bavaria ; E. by Bavaria and Hesse Cassel ; and W. 
by Hesse Homburg, Prussia, and Nassau. 

Q. Capital? 

A. Darmstadt. 

Hesse Daioistadt is a Grand Duchy, and the most populous of the 
Hessian states : it consists principally of two detached portions, one of which 
lies N. of the R. Mayne, and the other S. of that stream. These territories 
are separated from each other by the republic of Frankfort, and a part of 
Hesse Cassel : a smaller detached portion lies on the N. W. frontier of Hesse 
Cassel. The chief portions of this state are situated between 49° 23' and 
50° 50' N. lat., and 7° 50' and 9° 36' E. long. Area of the whole, 3600 
sq. ms. Pop. 740,000. 

Q. How is Hesse Homburg bounded ? 

A. The largest district is bounded S. by the Republic of Frank- 
fort, E. by Hesse Darmstadt, and W. by Nassau. The smaller 
district is bounded N. by Rhenish Prussia, S. by Rhenish Bavaria 
and part of Saxe Coburg, and W. by a district belonging to Olden- 
burg. 

Q. Capital? 

A. Homburg. 

Hesse Homburg is a Landgraviate in the W. part of Germany ; it con- 
sists of two distinct portions, which lie on opposite sides of the Rhine, 50 
miles apart. The largest of these districts, the Lordship of Homburg, con- 
tains the capital, and is situated N. of the territory of Frankfort on the 
Mayne. The smaller district constitutes the Lordship of Meisenheim. It lies 
about 50 ms. S. W. of the former. United area, 138 sq. ms. Pop. 24,000. 

The Saxon Duchies comprise four small states, situated in the 
interior of Germany. They ate intermingled with the Schwartz- 
burg and Reuss principalities, and are bounded on the N. by Prus- 
20 + 



234 EUROPE. 

sia; S. by Bavaria; E. by Saxony; and W. by Bavaria and 
Hesse Cassel. These states comprise Saxe Weimar, Saxe Co- 
burg Gotha, Saxe Meiningen Hilburghausen, and Saxe Alfcn- 
burg. 

Saxe Weimar, or Saxe Weimar Eisenach, (Ger. Sachsen Weimar,} 
is a Grand Duchy, consisting of the two principalities of Weimar and Eise- 
nach, composed of several detached portions, lying between 50° 25' and 51° 
30' N. lat., and 9° 50' and 12° 15' E. long. Area about 1438 sq. ms. Pop. 
232,000. Weimar is the capital. 

Saxe Coburg Gotha (Ger. Sachsen Coburg Gotha} is a Duchy, con- 
sisting chiefly of two distinct portions, viz., the principalities of Coburg and 
Gotha. The first is situated between 50° 9' and 50° 24' N. lat., and 10° 40' 
and 11° 15' E. long. The other is situated between 50° 35' and 51° 6' N. 
lat., and 10° 20' and 11° E. long. Area of the duchy, 1024 sq. ms. Pop. 
156,000. Gotha is the capital. 

The princes of this house are particularly fortunate in their matrimonial 
alliances. The king of Belgium, the queen consort of Great Britain, the 
queen consort of Portugal, the Grand Duchess of the heir presumptive of all 
the Russias, besides other individuals less splendidly connected, are all mem- 
bers of the reigning family of this latter state. 

Saxe Meiningen Hilburghausen, is a Duchy composed of the ancient 
Duchy of Meiningen, the principalities of Hilburghausen and Saalfeld, and 
some smaller districts. It lies chiefly between 50° 12' and 50° 53' N. lat., 
and 10° 7' and 11° 40' E. long. Area about 875 sq. ms. Pop. 130,000. 
Meiningen is the capital. 

Saxe Axtenburg (Ger. Sachsen Altenburg ) is the smallest of the Saxon 
Duchies. It consists of two nearly equal portions, separated from each other 
by the territory of Reuss, and is situated between 50° 44' and 51° 6' N. lat., 
and 11° 20' and 12° 40' E. long. Area about 491 sq. ms. Pop. 114,000. 

Mecklenburg is a maritime state of Germany, lying- on the 
southern coast of the Baltic Sea, and extending thence to the river 
Elbe, which separates it from Hanover. • It consists of two distinct 
states, Mecklenburg Schwerin, and Mecklenburg Strelitz, and com- 
prises a territory nearly equal in extent to that of Baden. 

It is one of the least improved states of Germany, and is re- 
markable for the circumstance that nearly one-half the population 
consists of nobility, a large portion of whom, however, being desti- 
tute of property, are reduced to the condition of peasants, and are 
obliged to work for their support, at the most common occupations. 

The Grand Duchy of Mecklenburg Schwerin is the largest and most 
westerly part of Mecklenburg; it lies between 53° and 54° 20' N. lat., and 
10° 35' and 13° 57' E. long. On the N. it is bounded by the Baltic Sea ; W. 
by Lubeck and Lauenburg ; S. by Hanover and the Prussian province of 
Brandenburg ; E. by Mecklenburg Strelitz, and Prussian Pomerania. Length 
from E. to W., about 110 ms., average breadth nearly 45 ms. Area 4755 
ms. Pop. 450,000. Schwerin is the capital. 

The Grand Duchy of Mecklenburg*Strelitz, the smallest of the Meck- 
lenburg states, extends from 53° 9' to 53° 47' N. lat., and from 12° 40' to 



EUROPE. 235 

13° 57' E. long., being about 50 ms. in length, and 28 in its greatest breadth. 
Bounded N. by Pomerania 5 S. and E. by Prussian Brandenburg ; and W. 
by Mecklenburg Schwerin. Area estimated at 768 sq. ms. Pop. 84,000. 
Capital, Strelitz. 

The Grand Duchy of Oldenburg is a maritime state, in the 
N. of Germany. It is enclosed on all sides by the territory of 
Hanover, except on the N. where it is bounded by the North Sea. 
A part of its E. boundary is formed by the R. Weser, which 
separates it from the eastern division of Hanover. 

Oldenburg consists, exclusive of some detached portions of territory, en- 
closed by the Duchy of Holstein, and a small district in the southern part 
of Rhenish Prussia, of an oblong territory, between 52° 29' and 53° 43 f 
N. lat., and 7° 35' and 8° 46' E.. long.: greatest length from N. to S., 120 
ms. ; -with a breadth varying from 20 to 50 ms. Area estimated at 2752 
sq. ms. Pop. 252,000. The capital is Oldenburg. 

The Duchy of Brunswick (Ger. Braunschweig) lies in the 
interior of Germany. Its race of princes is one of the most ancient 
in Europe : the reigning families of Great Britain and Hanover are 
of the House of Brunswick ; and nearly every European sove- 
reign is either directly or collaterally related to it. 

Brunswick consists of five separated portions of territory, which are 
intermingled with the provinces of Prussia and Hanover : three are of some 
extent, and, with one of the smaller divisions, are nearly contiguous to one 
another : the remaining district lies at some distance from the others, and is 
nearly in contact with the territory of Bremen. The area of the whole is 
estimated at 1514 sq. ms. Pop. 250,000. The capital is Brunswick. 

The Duchy of Nassau is an interior state of W. Germany: 
part of its territory lies on the river Rhine, and part on the Mayne. 
The princes of Nassau trace their origin as far back as the 10th 
century. From the younger line, is descended the reigning family 
of Holland, or of Orange Nassau. 

Nassau is situated between 49° 55' and 50° 50' N. lat., and 7° 31' and 
8° 35' E. long. : it is bounded N. and W. by Rhenish Prussia ; S. by Hesse 
Darmstadt; and E. by the territories of Frankfort, Prussia, and Hesse 
Darmstadt. The area is estimated at 2164 sq. ms. Pop. 356,000. Capital, 
Wisbaden. 

Anhalt is an ancient principality of Germany, situated chiefly 
on the river Elbe : it is enclosed on every side by the Prussian 
province of Saxony, except on the west, where it is partly bounded 
by Brunswick. 

The territory of Ajthalt is divided into the Duchies of Anhalt Dessau, 
Anhalt Bernburg, and Anhalt Cothen. It lies between 51° 35' and 52° 6" 
N. lat., and 10° 55' and 12° 36' E. long.* Area of the whole, 1034 sq. ms. 
Pop. 136,000. Capitals of the three Duchies, respectively, Dessau, Bern- 
burg, and Cothen. 

* For the area and pop. of each Duchy, see M. A., Table No. 1. 



230 EUROPE. 

Schwartzeurg is a principality, in the central part of Germany, 
consisting chiefly of two distinct portions, the more northern of 
which is called the Lower County, and the southern the Upper 
County. The former is entirely enclosed within Prussian Saxony, 
and the other within the Saxon Duchies. 

The territory of Schwartzburg is divided into two principalities, viz. 
Sehwartzburg Rudolstadt, and Schwartsburg Sondershousen, each of which 
has a part both of the Upper and the Lower Country. The first named 
state has an area of 448 sq. ms., and 60,000 inhabitants ; its capital is 
Rudolstadt. The other has an area of 386 sq. ms., and 52,000 inhabitants; 
its capital is Sondershausen. 

Reuss is a territory in the centre of Germany, consisting of two 
distinct principalities, viz. Reuss Greitz, and Reuss Schleitz. It 
also comprises two distinct sections, the smaller of which lies a 
few miles N. of the larger. 

This territory lies between 50° 20' and 51° N. lat., and 11° 30' and 12° 
20' E. long. Reuss Greitz has an area of about 1 53 sq. ms., and 25,000 
inhabitants. Reuss Schleitz has an area estimated at 453 sq. ms., and 
59,000 inhabitants. Greitz is the capital of the first named state, and Loben- 
stein of the other. 

Lippe Detmold, and Lippe Schauenburg, are two principalities 
of N. W. Germany, comprising territories separated a few miles 
from each other, by part of the Prussian province of Westphalia. 

Lippe Detmold consists of the counties of Lippe and Sternberg, being 
situated between 51° 48' and 52° 12' N. lat., and 8° 35' and 9° 10' E. long. 
Bounded on the N., S. and W. by Westphalia ; and on the E. by Bruns- 
wick, and part of VValdeck, and Hesse Cassel. Area estimated at 436 
sq. ms., and 78,000 inhabitants ; capital, Detmold. 

Lippe Schauexberg lies N. N. E. of Lippe Detmold, and is less than 
half its extent. It is intersected by the parallel of 52° 20' N. lat., and the 
9th meridian of E. long. Area estimated at 213 sq. ms. Pop. 26,000. 
Buckeburg is the capital. 

Hohenzollern is a territory of S. W. Germany, situated on 
both sides of the river Danube : it is surrounded by the provinces 
of Baden and Wirtemberg, and is intersected by the 48th parallel 
of N. lat., and the 9th meridian of E. long. 

This territory is divided into two distinct states, viz. the principality of 
Hohenzollern Hechingen, and the principality of Hohenzollern Sigmaringen, 
which belong to two different branches of the house of Hohenzollern. The 
first-named state has an area estimated at 117 sq. ms., and 16,000 inhabit- 
ants ; the other has an area of 426 sq. ms., and 39,000 inhabitants. He- 
chingen is the capital of the one, and Sigmaringen of the other. 

Waldeck, or Waldeck Pyrmont, is a principality in N. Ger- 
many, consisting of two separate parts, Waldeck Proper and the 
county of Pyrmont. The first is bounded N. and W. by West- 
phalia and Hesse Cassel ; the other is surrounded by the territories 
of Brunswick, Lippe, and Hanover. 



EUROPE. 237 

Waxdeck Proper is situated between 51° 2' and 51° 31' N. lat., and 8° 
31' and 9° 13' E. long. Area 459 sq. ms. The county of Pyrmont, with 
an area hardly l-20th part as great as that of Waldeck Proper, lies about 
30 miles further N., being intersected by the 52d parallel of N. lat., and the 
meridian of 9° 15' E. long. Total area 459 sq. ms. Pop. 56,000. Arol- 
sen is the capital. 

Lichtenstein, the smallest of the German Principalities, is sit- 
uated in S. Germany on the river Rhine, which separates it from 
the Swiss Canton of St. Gall. 

This little territory is intersected by the parallel of 47° 10' N. lat., and 
the meridian of 9° 32' E. Ion. It is bounded on the E. by the territories of 
Austria, and on the S. and W. by those of Switzerland. Area 53 sq. ms. 
Pop. 6000. Vadutz is the capital. 

The Lordship of Kniphatjsek, the smallest state in Europe, is enclosed 
within the territories of the Duke of Oldenburg. It was recognised as an 
independent state by the Germanic Diet, in 1826. The area is 17 sq. ms. 
Pop. about 3000. Capital the Castle of Kniphausen. 

The Free Cities of Germany, or the Hanse towns, comprise 
Hamburg, Lubeck, Bremen and Frankfort. These cities are the 
remains of a powerful league or alliance, that was formed during 
the middle ages by certain cities and towns, for the mutual support 
of their commerce against the ravages of the pirates and robbers, 
who then infested nearly all parts of Europe, as well as against the 
rapacity and encroachments of the neighbouring nobles and kings. 

This extensive confederacy, when at the height of its power, comprised 
85 of the most commercial cities and towns of Europe. Its alliance was 
courted, and its power was dreaded by the most potent states ; it made war 
with and defeated several monarchs, and in one instance deposed a king of 
Sweden. The increased security and improved condition of modern times 
lendered this association no longer necessary, and it was at length dissolved 
in 1630, after an existence of about 400 years. 

Hamburg, Lubeck, Bremen and Frankfort, are Republics or 
Free Cities, and have each a small adjacent territory attached to 
them. On the formation of the Germanic Confederation in 1815, 
they were recognised as independent states and members of the 
Diet. 

The Republic of Hamburg comprises the terrtiory on the right 
bank of the Elbe, in which the city is situated, together with some 
smaller districts, the chief of which is the bailiwick of Ritzebuttel, 
at the mouth and on the left bank of the river, and in which the 
town of Cuxhaven is situated. Area of the Republic, 134 sq. ms. 
Pop. 153,500. It is bounded on the N., the E., and the W. by the 
Danish territories of Holstein and Lauenburg, and on the S. by 
the river Elbe, which separates it from Hanover. 

Hamburg, the chief commercial emporium of Germany, and the third city 
in population, is situated on the north bank of the river Elbe, 75 miles from 
the sea, in 55° 33' N, lat,, and 9° 59' E. long. It is supposed to have been 



238 EUROPE. 

founded by Charlemagne, and had attained considerable importance so early 
as the beginning of the 12th century. In the 13th it concurred in the for- 
mation of the Hanseatic league. It suffered greatly during its occupation by 
the French in the time of Napoleon, but has since recovered its trade and 
importance, and has more than doubled the number of its inhabitants. Pop. 
in 1814, 60,000 ; in 1846, 128,000. 

The Republic of Ltjbeck is situated chiefly on the west side of 
and near the mouth of the Trave, a small river which flows into 
the Baltic Sea. There are also several very small detached por- 
tions of territory lying S. of the city. It is bounded N. and W. 
by Holstein ; S. by Lauenburg ; and E. by Mecklenburg. Area 
of the Republic, 122 sq. ms. Pop. 67,200. 

The city of Lubeck is situated on the W. side of the R. Trave, 8 ms. 
from the Baltic Sea, in 53° 51' N. lat., 10° 41' E. long. It is the capital 
of the Hanse towns, and though not so prosperous as formerly, is still a place 
of considerable commercial importance. Pop. 26,000. 

The Republic of Bremen is the smallest of the German Free 
States. Its territory lies on both sides of the river Weser, about 
40 ms. from the sea, the chief part being on the right bank of the 
river. Area 72 sq. ms. Pop. 57,800. 

The city of Bremen is, after Hamburg, the most commercial in Germany. 
It is built on both sides of the Weser. The old town is on the right and the 
new town on the left bank of the river, the two divisions being connected by 
a bridge. Bremen was founded in the 8th century, and has long been an 
important commercial town. Lat. 53° 4' N., long. 8° 49' E. Pop. 42,000. 

The Republic of Frankfort lies on both sides of the river 
Mayne, one of the chief tributaries of the Rhine, and a few miles 
above where the former flows into the latter. The larger part of 
its territory is on the S. side of the river. Area 113 sq. ms. Pop. 
64,570. 

Frankfort stands on the right bank of the Mayne, across which 
there is a bridge connecting it with Sachsenhausen, one of its suburbs. It 
is an important city, and may be regarded as the capital of the whole Ger- 
manic Confederation. It is very ancient, and has been long noted for its 
fairs and the importance of its commercial transactions. Lat. 50° 1' N., long. 
8° 36' E. Pop. 54,000. 

The Grand Duchy of Luxemburg, the westernmost part of Ger- 
many, lies between the rivers Meuse and Moselle. It was appor- 
tioned by the treaty of April 19th, 1839, between Holland and 
Belgium. The title of Grand Duke of Luxemburg, with the right 
of suffrage in the Germanic Diet, is enjoyed by the king of Hol- 
land. 

Luxemburg is bounded N. by Belgium ; E. by the Prussian province of 
the Rhine ; and S. and S.W. by France. It lies between 49° 25' and 50° 
28' N. lat., and 5° and 6° 30' E. Greatest length 120 ms. Breadth 75 ms. 
Area of the whole, 2347 sq. ms. Pop. 305,000. Of the foregoing, Belgium 
has the largest share both of the territory and the population. The capital, 



EUROPE. 239 

Luxemburg, is in Dutch Luxemburg, and belongs to Holland. It is one of 
the strongest fortresses in Europe. 

Holstein and Latjenburg are duchies in the N. W. part of 
Germany, belonging to Denmark. They form the S. part of that 
kingdom, and its sovereign, as Duke of Holstein and Lauenburg, 
has a seat in, and is entitled to vote in the Germanic Diet. 

The territories of Hoxstein and Lauettbtjiig, considered as one district, 
is bounded N. by Sleswick, the central province of Denmark ; N. and N.W. 
by the Baltic Sea ; S. by Hanover, from which it is separated by the river Elbe ; 
E. by Mecklenburg ; and W. by the North Sea. It lies between 53° 30' 
and 54° 26' N. lat., and 8° 46' and 11° 7' E. long. Greatest length about 
100 ms., breadth 70 ms. Area 3691 sq. ms. Pop. 410,000. Gluckstadt, 
on the Elbe, is the capital, although Altona, situated a few miles above it, on 
the same stream, is much superior in population and importance. 

Q. How is Switzerland bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. and E. by Germany ; S. by Italy ; and W. 
and N.W. by France. (M. A.) 

Q. Capitals ? 

A. Zurich, Berne, and Lucerne. 

Switzerland (Anc Helvetia, including part of Rhsetia,- Ger., Schweitz; 
Fr. La Suisse') is a mountainous country of central Europe, between 45° 
48' and 47° 48' N. lat, and 5° 57' and 10° 30' E. long. Length, near 230 
ms. ; greatest breadth, above 140 ms. Area, about 15,000 sq. ms. Pop. 
2,100,000. Switzerland is a republic consisting of 22 confederated states, 
called cantons. All the cantons of Switzerland are under a republican form 
of government, excepting Neufchatel, in which the king of Prussia exercises 
the right of sovereignty. The Swiss confederation has no permanent capi- 
tal ; by a federal enactment of 1815, Zurich, Berne, and Lucerne, are alter- 
nately the seat of the general government for two years at a time. 

Q. How is Italy bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Germany and Switzerland ; E. by part 
of Austria and the Gulf of Venice ; S. and S. W. by the Medi- 
terranean Sea ; and W., in the northern parts, by France. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? • 

A. Rome. 

Italy (Lat. Italia, Fr. Italie), one of the most celebrated and fertile 
countries of Europe, the seat of the greatest empire of antiquity,* and of 
art, science, and civilization when the surrounding countries were immersed 
in barbarism. It is finely situated, comprising the whole .of the central 
peninsula of S. Europe, with the extensive and rich country to the N. of the 
peninsula, and included between the Alps and the Mediterranean. It extends 
between lat. 37° 46' and 46° 30' N., and long. 6° 30' and 18° 30' E. In 
antiquity it was known by the names of Hesperia, Ausonia, Saturnia, 
(Enotria, &c. ; but these names, though loosely applied to the whole country, 
were strictly applicable only to particular portions of its surface. Various 
derivations have been assigned to the term Italy. (See Facciolati, Lexicon, 
voce Italia.) In the first instance, it is said to have designated only its more 

* The ancient Roman Empire. 



240 EUROPE. 

S. portion, or what is now the peninsula of Calabria Ultra ; but in the 
course of time it superseded every other name, and was gradually extended 
to the whole country, from the Alps southward. In shape, Italy has been 
familiarly likened to a boot, the heel formed by the Terra d'Otranto, and the 
foot by Calabria, both in the Neapolitan dominions. The general direction 
of the Italian peninsula is S. E. and N. W. ; its length, from Mount St. 
Gothard to Cape Spartivento, is 750 Eng. ms.; its breadth varies from about 
380 ms. in N. Italy, to less than 80 ms. near its centre ; and in one part of 
Calabria it is only 18 ms. from sea to sea. The area of the whole, including 
its larger Islands, Sicily, Sardinia, and Corsica, and the smaller, as Elba, 
the Lipari group, &c., is estimated at 122,000 sq. ms. Pop. 22,000,000. 

This country, once the most important commercial and manufacturing 
region in Europe, is now dependent upon other nations for the superb fabrics 
with which she once supplied them ; her ships no longer cover the Mediter- 
ranean ; her merchants, who were once her nobles and her princes, retain 
only the shadow of mighty names. In the middle ages, Venice, Genoa, 
Florence, and Pisa, were the chief marts of the European commerce with 
the East Indies ; and Italians were scattered all over Europe for the purposes 
of trade. The discovery of a passage by sea deprived them of the commerce 
with India, and the prosperity of these republics declined. 

Before Rome had (2100 years ago) absorbed all the vital powers of Italy, 
this country was thickly inhabited, and, for the most part, by civilized nations. 
In the north of Italy alone, which offered the longest resistance to the Romans, 
dwelt a barbarous people, the Gauls. Farther south, on the Arno and the 
Tiber, a number of small tribes, such as the Etruscans, the Samnites, and 
Latins, endeavoured to find safety by forming confederacies. Less closely 
united, and often hostile to each other, were the Greek colonies of Lower 
Italy, called Magna Grsecia. 

Italy, in the middle ages, was divided into Upper, Middle, and Lower 
Italy. The first division comprehended all the states situated in the basin of 
the Po ; the second extended between the former and the kingdom of Naples, 
which formed the third. 

Modern Italy, with its dependent Islands, comprises 12 political divisions ; 
viz., Austrian Italy, the kingdom of Sardinia, the principality of Monaco, 
the duchies of Parma, Modena, and Lucca, the grand-duchy of Tuscany, the 
republic of San Marino, the Papal States, the kingdom of Naples, French 
Italy (the Island of Corsica), and British Italy (the Island of Malta, &c.) 

Q. How is Greece bounded 1 

A. It is bounded N. by Turkey, E. by the Archipelago,* and 
S. and W. by the Mediterranean Sea.t (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Athens. 

Greece (Anc. Gr., f EMaj, Hellas ,• Lat., Grsecia) is a country in the S. 
E. part of Europe, once distinguished above all others as the seat of civili- 
zation, learning, and the arts. Passing over that period of Grecian history, 
which was so brilliant, and is so well known, we will merely observe that, 
after undergoing various vicissitudes, during the decline of the Roman 
power, Greece became at last permanently incorporated with the Ottoman 

* That part of the Mediterranean denominated the ^Egean Sea. 
\ Denominated, on the W. of Greece, the Ionian Sea. 



EUROPE. 241 

empire, on the fall of Constantinople, 1453, and remained in this condition 
till 1821, when the last successful struggle for Grecian freedom commenced. 
After a long and sanguinary contest, the independence of Greece, through 
the interference of England, France, and Russia, was at length recognised, 
by the Turkish sultan, in 1829. The present kingdom of Greece is situated 
between 36° 23' and 39° 14' N. lat., and 20° 43' and 24° 35' E. long., 
including the island of Negropont. All the principal islands of the yEgean 
Sea {Archipelago) lying W. of the 26th meridian of E. long., with the 
exception of Candia (Anc. Crete), belong also to the kingdom of Greece. 
Area estimated at 21,000 sq. ms. Pop. 797,000. The government is a 
limited hereditary monarchy, under the protection of England, France, and 
Russia. 

Q. How is Turkey bounded ? 

«#. It is bounded N. by Austria; E. by the Black Sea and 
Russia ; S. by the Sea of Marmora, the Archipelago, and the king- 
dom of Greece ; and W. by the Mediterranean Sea, the Gulf of 
Venice, and Austria. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

«/?. Constantinople. 

TrjiiKET, or the Ottoman Empire,* is an extensive country, partly in 
S. E. Europe, and partly in W. Asia, comprising some of the most cele- 
brated, best situated, and naturally finest provinces of the continents to 
which they belong. Its limits are not easily defined, being usually represented 
as including several extensive countries, that are nominally independent. 
Moldavia, Wallachia, and Servia, in European Turkey, are now connected 
with the Porte by rather slender ties ; though, as some of their fortresses are 
garrisoned by Ottoman troops, and as they continue to pay tribute to the Sul- 
tan, they may still, perhaps, be properly included within the wide range of 
the Turkish dominions. Egypt, however, and the other African territories 
that formerly belonged to the Porte, may now be considered as virtually sepa- 
rated from it, yielding only such an acknowledgment of sovereignty as is 
dictated by respect and courtesy to the head of the Mohammedan faith and 
the vicegerent of the prophet ; and, but for the interference of England and 
other European powers, Syria and Palestine would have remained annexed 
to the dominions of the pacha of Egypt. 

European Turret, including Wallachia, Moldavia, and Servia, com- 
prises, with the exception of the new kingdom of Greece, nearly the whole 

* The religion of Turkey is Mohammedanism ; the Grand Seignior is re- 
garded as the vicegerent of the prophet, and the protector of the Moslem 
faith. The government is an absolute despotism, the sultan being under no 
other restraint than what the laws of the Koran impose. The moral condi- 
tion of the Turkish empire is deplorable ; gross ignorance pervades all classes ; 
and the apathy and indifference evinced by the people to improvement of any 
kind, are such as are to be found only in Mohammedan or pagan countries. 
The late sultan made some efforts to produce a beneficial change, but nothing 
of any moment has been effected. The present sovereign seems also anxious 
to introduce improvements: amongst those contemplated, are the establish- 
ment of 20,000 schools, and the formation of rail-roads throughout the 
empire ; the culture of cotton likewise, on a large scale, is to be encouraged 
by the government, in those parts of the empire suited to its growth. 
21 



242 EUROPE. 

of the most easterly of the three great peninsulas of S. Europe, extending 
from 39° to 48^° N. lat., and from 15$° to 29£° E. long. It is bounded 
on the N. by the Austrian empire, from which it is separated by the Save, 
the Danube, and the E. Carpathian Mts. ; on the N. E. it is separated from 
the Russian province of Bessarabia by the Pruth ; on the E. it has the Black 
Sea, the Channel of Constantinople (Bosphorus), the Sea of Marmora, and 
the Strait of the Dardanelles (Hellespont) ; on the S., the Archipelago and 
Greece ; and on the W,, the Mediterranean, the Gulf of Venice (Adriatic"), 
and the Austrian province of Dalmatia. 

Very different estimates have been formed of the extent and population 
of this country, and neither is known with anything approaching to pre- 
cision. The area is usually stated at about 207,000 sq. ms., being rather 
larger than that of France, and the pop. at about 10,000,000. 

SEAS. 

Q. Where is the White Sea ? 

A. It is in the N. part of Russia, and leads into the Arctic 
Ocean. (M. A.) 

The White Sea is a large gulf of the Arctic Ocean, between 63° 40' and 
68° 40' N. lat., and 32° and 45° E. long. The length is about 400 ms. ; the 
breadth varies from 30 ms. to above 100 ms. 

Q. Where is the Baltic Sea ? 

A. It is in the N. of Europe, and separates Sweden and the 
Danish islands from Germany, Prussia, and Russia, and is con- 
nected with the North Sea by the Cattegat and Skager Rack. 
(M.A.) 

It extends from 54° to 66° N. lat., and from 10° to 30° E. long. It is 
about 800 ms. long. The superficial extent is estimated at above 160,000 
sq. ms. Towards the northern extremity it forms two large branches, the 
Gulf of Bothnia, which runs nearly N., and the Gulf of Finland, extending 
in an easterly direction. 

Q. Where is the North Sea ? 

*#. It is between Great Britain on the W., and the Netherlands,* 
Germany, Denmark, and Norway on the S. E. and E. (M. A.) 

It is considered to extend from the Strait of Dover to the northernmost 
of the Shetland Islands. Length, 650 ms. ; greatest breadth, about 450 ms. 

Q. Where is the Irish Sea ? 

Ji. It is between England and Ireland, and leads into St. 
George's Channel. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Mediterranean Sea? 

JI. It is bounded N. by Europe, E. by Asia, and S. by Africa, 
communicating at its W. extremity, by the Strait of Gibraltar, 
with the N. Atlantic Ocean, and at its N. E. extremity, by the 
Dardanelles, with the Sea of Marmora, and by the Channel of 
Constantinople with the Black or Euxine Sea. (M. A.) 

The Mediterranean Sea (the Mare Internum of the ancients, and, more 
recently, the Mare Meditermnetfm) is a large at;;.! very important inland sea, 

* Holland and Belgium. 



EUROPE. 243 

extending, in a general sense, from lat. 30° to nearly 4G° N., and from long. 
50 54/ w. to 36° 8' E. Greatest length, 2250 ms. ; do. breadth, from Ve- 
nice to the Gulf of Sidra, 1200 ins.; estimated area about 690,000 sq. ms. 
It is of an oblong, but very irregular shape, especially on its N. side, into 
which project, southward, the two large peninsulas of Italy and Greece, 
which thus divide the Mediterranean into three basins, the most westerly 
of which is included between the Strait of Gibraltar and the passage, only 
72 ms. broad, between Cape Sorella in Sicily and Cape Bon in Africa ; the 
central part extending eastward from the last-mentioned points to the 
meridian of Cape Matapan, in the Morea ; while the E. basin, called the 
Levant, comprises the Grecian Archipelago and the sea that washes the 
coasts of Asia Minor, Syria, and Egypt. The principal inlets of the W. 
basin are the Bays or Gulfs of Lyons, Genoa, and Naples: it contains, also, 
the three large islands of Corsica, Sardinia, and Sicily ; the Lipari, and 
other islands on the W. side of Italy ; and the Balearic group, off the coast 
of Spain. The central basin has a large arm projecting N. under the name 
of the Adriatic Sea, or Gulf of Venice ; its smaller inlets being the gulfs of 
Taranto, in Italy, Lepanto, in Greece, and Cabes and Sidra (Anc, the two 
Spies), in Africa: Malta, the Ionian Isles, and the numerous rocky islets 
skirting the shores of Dalmatia, are its chief islands. The portion of the E. 
basin or Levant, which stretches N. from the isle of Candia to the coast of 
Macedonia, is called the Archipelago, and is femarkable, not only for the 
extreme irregularity of its coast-line, but for the numerous clusters of volcanic 
islands and rocks that stud its surface ; its chief gulfs are those of Egina, 
Salonica, Contessa, and Smyrna ; and its largest islands are Lemnos, Metelin, 
Thasos, Scio, and Naxio. The great island of Cyprus lies in the angle 
between the coasts of Asia Minor and Syria. 

It is a curious fact, that, though the Mediterranean generally be so deep, 
that soundings, even where possible, are of no practical utility, except in 
some of its bays and harbours, the depth of the channel between Sicily and 
Tunis, according to Sonnini and Smythe, nowhere exceeds 30 fathoms, the 
average not being greater than the depths of the Strait of Dover between 
England and France. 

The chief feeders of the Mediterranean are the Ebro, Rhone, Po, and 
Nile, with the various waters brought from the Black Sea by the strong cur- 
rent that sets S.W. through the Dardanelles. But, notwithstanding this vast 
supply, the evaporation is so rapid, that water constantly passes in through 
the Straits of Gibraltar, to restore the equilibrium. The Mediterranean has 
long been considered a tideless sea; but this is not strictly true : for, in 
the Adriatic, as well as between that Sea and the Coast of Africa, tides 
rise from 5 to 7 feet, and their influence is felt, more or less, along the 
shores of Sicily, and on the W. side of the Morea. The existence of 
this tide, indeed, may suggest an explanation of the loss of so many 
vessels in that region of mist and terror, the Gulf of Sidra, where them 
is always a lofty swell and accumulation of waters during the prevalence 
of N. W. winds. A tide of 8 or 9 ft. also ebbs and flows at pretty regu- 
lar intervals in the smaller Gulf of Cabes, on the same coast. In the 
Straits of Messina and Bonifacio, at Naples, in the narrow channel of the 
Euripus, and on both shores of the Strait of Gibraltar, there is an ebb and 
flow amounting to 3 ft. and upward ; but whether these movements are to 
be attributed to lunar influence, or to other causes, has not been deter- 
mined, 



244 



EUROPE. 



Q. Where is the Black Sea I 

Ji. It lies between Russia in Europe on the N. ; Circassia and 
Georgia on the N. E. and E. ; Turkey in Asia on the S. ; and 
Turkey in Europe on the W. It communicates with the Medi- 
terranean by the channel of Constantinople, the sea of Marmora, 
and the strait of the Dardanelles ; and with the sea of Azov by 
the strait of Enikale. (M. A.) 

The Black Sea, called als6 the Euxine (Anc. Pontas Euxinus ,- Turk. 
Ka-ra Deng-is), is a large internal sea lying between the S. part of Russia 
in Europe and the northern part of Asia Minor, extending from 40° 50' to 
46° 45' N. lat., and from 27° 25' to 40° 48' E. long. It is bounded on the 
N. and N.W. by the Crimea and Southern Russia; on the N. E. and E. 
by the Caucasian countries, Circassia, Mingrelia, and Imeritia ; on the S. 
E. and S. by Armenia and Asia Minor ; and on the W. by the Turkish 
governments of Rumelia and Bulgaria. Its extreme length from E.to W. 
is 760 ms. : its greatest width, on the 31st meridian, 400 ms. ; E. from 
this it narrows by the projection of the Crimea, and the advance of the 
opposite shore of Asia Minor, to 154 ms. ; again it widens to 265 ms. 
between the Strait of -Enikale and the Gulf of Samsun, but from the last 
point it constantly and rapidly diminishes, till its E. coast (running due 
N. and S.) does not exceed 60 ms. in width. Its surface is estimated at 
about 160,000 sq. ms., and Ms coast line, including its sinuosities, considera- 
bly exceeds 2000 ms. 

The Black Sea is connected with the Sea of Azov by the Strait of 
Enikale (Anc. Bosphorus Cimmerius), and with the Sea of Marmora by 
the Channel of Constantinople (Anc. Bosphorus Thracius). With these 
exceptions, it is wholly isolated. It is also much more compact in form than 
most other large bodies of water ; giving off* no great limbs, like the Baltic, 
Mediterranean, &c, and having very few, even moderately sized gulfs. The 
most important, that of Kirkinit (the Carcinitus Sinus of the ancients), 
lies between the N. W. shore of the Crimea and the opposite shore of S. 
Russia, extending as far E. as the isthmus of Perekop. 

Q. Where is the Sea of Azov ? 

Ji. It is in the S. E. quarter of Europe. It communicates by 
the narrow Strait of Enikale (Anc. Bosphorus Cimmerius) with 
the N. E. angle of the Black Sea, and is everywhere else sur- 
rounded by the Russian territories. (M. A.) 

The Sea of Azov, or Azoff, (the Palus Mseotis of the ancients), forms a 
part of the boundary between Europe and Asia. Its name is derived from 
the town of Azov, near its N. W. extremity. It is of a very irregular shape ; 
its greatest length, from the long, narrow sand-bank facing the E. coast of 
the Crimea, to the mouths of the Don, being 200 ms. ; and its greatest 
breadth about 110 ms. From the strait of Enikale to Taganrog is about 
160 ms. It is generally shallow and encumbered with sand-banks, having, 
where deepest, not more than 7 fathoms water, and in some places much less. 

Q. Where is the Sea of Marmora ? 

Ji. It is between Europe and Asia, communicating with the 
Grecian Archipelago by the Strait of the Dardanelles, and with 
the Black Sea by the Channel of Constantinople. (M, A.) 



europe. 245 

The Sea of Marmora or Marmara (Anc. Propontls) is about 150 ms. in 
length, and its greatest breadth is near 50ms. This sea receives its appel- 
lation from Marmora (Anc. Proconnesus,) a small island towards its W. ex- 
tremity, which has long been celebrated for its marble quarries, whence it is 
supposed to derive its name, marmor (in the plural marmora) being the 
Latin word for " marble." 

Q. How long is each of these seas ? 

A. White Sea is 400 ms. long ; Baltic Sea, 800 ; North Sea, 
650; Irish Sea, 130; Mediterranean Sea, 2250; Black Sea, 
760 ; Sea of Azov, 200 ; Sea of Marmora, 150. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Archipelago ? 

A. It is that part of the Mediterranean Sea lying between Asia 
Minor and Greece. (M. A.) 

GULFS. 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Bothnia ? 

A. It is the N. arm of the Baltic Sea, extending a little E. of 
N., between Russian Finland on the E., and Sweden on the W. 
(M. A.) 

This gulf extends from 60° to near 66° N. lat. It is about 430 ms. long, 
and 120 ms. in average width, but at its narrowest part, the Quarken, oppo- 
site Umea, it does not much exceed 40 ms. 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Finland ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Russia, being an arm of the Baltic, 
which extends in an easterly direction between the Russian terri- 
tories of Finland and Revel. (M. A.) 

It is about 280 ms. long ; its greatest breadth is about 75 ms. 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Venice ? 

A. It is that great arm of the Mediterranean extending S. E. 
and N. W. between the coasts of Italy on the W., and those of 
Austria and Turkey on the E. (M. A.) 

The Adriatic Sea, or Guif of Venice (Mare Adriallcum or Supe?'um,) 
extends between 39° 40' and 45° 50' N. lat., and 12° 10' and 19° 40' E- 
long. Length about 500 ms. ; greatest breadth 130 ms. It derived its an- 
cient name from the once flourishing sea-port town of Adria, in Northern 
Italy, now 18 ms. from the shore, and its modern name from Venice. 

Q. How long are each of these ? 

A. Gulf of Bothnia is 430 ms. long; Gulf of Finland, 280; 
Gulf of Venice, 500. (M. A. ) 

Q. W*here is the Gulf of Dantzick ? 

A. It is in the N. part of Prussia, and leads into the Baltic Sea. 
(M. A.) . 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Lyons ? 

A. It is in the S. part of France, and leads into the Mediterra- 
nean Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Genoa ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Italy, and leads into the Mediterra- 
nean Sea. (M. A.) 
21* 



246 EUROPE. 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Taranto ? 

A. It is in the S. E. part of Italy (between Apulia and Cala- 
bria,) and leads into the Mediterranean Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Bay of Biscay ? 

A. It is that portion of the Atlantic Ocean which washes the N. 
coasts of Spain, and divides them from the W. coasts of France. 
(M. A.) 

CHANNELS. 

Q. Where is the channel called the Cattegat ?* 
A. It is a portion of the Baltic Sea, separating the peninsula of 
Jutland from Sweden. (M. A.) 

The Cattegat, from the Skaw (the N. E. point of Jutland), has a direction 
almost due S. between Jutland and Sweden for about 120 ms. The average 
width is near 70 ms. This gulf is narrowest at its N. end, between the 
Skaw and Gottenburg, and widening considerably towards the S. From 
Laholm Bay to the opposite Danish coast is full 100 ms. The two Belts 
and the Sound are the three Straits which connect the Cattegat with the 
Baltic, properly so called ; and their direction is the same as that of the Gulf 
in which they terminate, namely, S. For the position of the Belts, &c, see 
M. A., Map No. 20. 

Q. Where is the Skager Rack ? 

A. It separates the peninsula of Jutland from Norway, and con- 
nects the Cattegat with the North Sea. (M. A.) 

The Skager Back, the first great gulf of the North Sea, runs N. E. 
between the shores of Jutland and Norway for rather more than 150 ms., to 
the W, coast of Sweden. The average width is near 70 ms. 

Q. W'here is St. George's Channel ? 

A. It separates Wales from Ireland, and connects the Irish Sea 
with the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the English Channel ? 

A. It separates England from France, and connects the Strait 
of Dover with the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

This channel is a narrow sea above 300 ms. long ; at its narrowest part, 
in the Strait of Dover, it is only 21 ms. wide: its greatest breadth is near 
140 ms. 

Q. Where is the North Channel ? 

A. It is between Ireland and Scotland, and connects the Irish 
Sea with the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Channel of Constantinople 1 

A. It is between Turkey and Asia Minor, and connects the Sea 
of Marmora with the Black or Euxine Sea. (M. A.) 

Bosporus, commonly but incorrectly written Bosphorus, is the strait between 
the Euxine and the Sea of Marmora, called also the Channel of Constan- 
tinople. It is about 1 m. or 1^ ms. wide, and 20 ms. long. 

* This name is of Dutch origin, and signifies " cat's hole." 



EUROPE. 247 

STRAITS. 

Q. Where is the Strait of Dover ? 

Ji. It separates France from England, and connects the North 
Sea with the English Channel. (M. A.) It is 21 ms. wide. 

Q. Where is the Strait of Otranto ? 

Ji. It separates Italy from Turkey, and connects the Gulf of 
Venice with the Mediterranean Sea. (M. A.) 

This Strait is about 45 ms. wide. 

Q. Where is the Strait of the Dardanelles ? 

Ji. It separates Turkey from Asia Minor, and connects the Sea 
of Marmora with the Archipelago. (M. A.) 

The Strait of the Dardanelles or Hellespont, which connects the Sea of 
Marmora with the iEgean Sea (Archipelago), is above 50 ms. in length, and 
from 2 to 10 ms. in breadth. 

Q. Where is the Strait of Enikale ? 

Ji. It separates the Peninsula of Crimea from Circassia, and 
connects the Sea of Azov with the Black or Euxine Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Strait of Gibraltar ? 

A. It separates Europe from Africa, and connects the Medi- 
terranean Sea with the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

In the narrowest place the breadth of this strait is about 15 ms. Its 
length, from Cape Trafalgar to Europa Point, is near 40 ms. 

RIVERS. 

Q. Where is the Petchora River ? 

Ji. It is in the N. E. part of Russia, rises in the Ural Mts., 
flows N., S. W., and N., and empties into the Arctic Ocean. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Dwina River ? 

Ji. It is in the N. part of Russia, and is formed by the junction 
of the Soukhona from the S. W., and the Vitchegda from the N. 
E. ; and from the point of confluence, flows N. W. and empties 
into the White Sea by several mouths. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Onega River ? 

Ji. It is in the N. part of Russia, rises S. E. of Lake Onega, 
flows first N., then N. E., then N. W., and empties into the White 
Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Tornea River ? 

JI. It rises in the Dovrefield Mts., flows a little E. of S., 
separating for the most part Russian Lapland from Sweden, and 
empties into the Gulf of Bothnia. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Dal, or Dahl River ? 

Ji. It is the finest River of Sweden, rises in the Dovrefield 
Mts., flows first S. E., then N. E., and empties into the Gulf of 
Bothnia, in lat. about 60° 40' N. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Duma River ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Russir . rises near the interior, flows 



*24$ EUROPE. 

S. of W. to Witepsk, thence W. of N. W. until its entrance into 
the Gulf of Riga. 

Q. Where is the Niemen River ? 

A. It rises in the S. W. part of Russia, near the town of Minsk, 
and after a very winding course first W., then N., then W., enters 
the Prussian Territories, where it takes the name of Memel, and 
finally falls into the Kurische HafT, which communicates with the 
Baltic Sea, in about 55° 20' N. lat., and 21° 20' E. long. 

The Niemen is remarkable among the rivers of Europe for its great and 
destructive inundations. At the melting of the snows, in spring, its waters 
are said sometimes to rise, in the short space of 10 or 14 days, 30 ft. above 
the ordinary level. 

Q. Where is the Vistula River ? 

A. It is one of the great rivers of central Europe, flowing from 
S. to N. through Poland. It rises in Austrian Silesia, in a branch 
of the Carpathians, close on the frontier of Galicia, in about 49° 
35' N. lat., and 19° E. long., and flowing, at first north-easterly, 
then northerly, afterwards westerly, and again north-easterly, 
divides itself into several branches, discharging a part of its 
waters into the Frische HafT, and a part into the Gulf of Dant- 
zick. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Oder River ? 

A. It is a large and important river of Germany, traversing the 
centre of the Prussian dominion. It rises on the N. side of the 
Carpathian range, near its W. termination, and after flowing in a 
general north-westerly course, empties itself into the Stettiner 
HafT, near Stettin, by several mouths. 

Q. Where is the Elbe River ? 

A. The Elbe (Anc. Albis) is a large and important r. of Europe, 
through the central part of which it flows. It rises in the Riesen- 
gebirge or Giant Mts. of Bohemia, and takes a meandering course 
generally in a N. W. direction, and after passing through Bohemia, 
Saxony, and Prussia, it separates Mecldenburg, Lauenburg, and 
Holstein from Hanover, and falls into the North Sea, in about lat. 
54° N., and long. 8° 40' E. _ (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Weser River ? 

A. The Weser (Anc. Visurgis) is a r. of N. W T . Germany, and 
is formed by the junction, near the southern extremity of the 
Hanoverian dominion, of the Werra and Fulda, which rise in the 
JRhon-gebirge : its course is N. by W. till the junction of the 
Aller, at which point it turns N. W. and falls into the North Sea 
by a wide estuary, near 53° 30' N. lat., and 8° 30' E. Jong. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Rhine River ? 

A. It is a large river of W T . Europe, rising on the N. side of the 
Alps, flowing through Switzerland and Germany, and falling into 
the North Sea or German Ocean. The principal branch, called 



EUROPE. '2VJ 

by the Germans Vorder-Rhein (i. e. fore Rhine,) rises a little N. 
E. of Mount St. Gothard, in about 46° 38' N. lat., and 8° 39' E. 
long. The main stream takes at first a N. E. direction through 
the magnificent and stupendous valley of the Rheinwald as far as 
Chur. Here the river deflects N., maintaining that general direc- 
tion as far as the Lake of Constance, into which it pours its waters. 
The river leaving this beautiful lake at its W. end, near the town 
of Constance, enters a smaller expanse of water, called the Unter 
or Zetter-See, and thence, narrowing its channel, flows W. to 
Schaffhausen ; 3 ms. below which the stream falls over a ledge 
of rocks 60 ft. in height, forming one of the most celebrated Euro- 
pean cataracts. The river maintains its W. direction as far as 
Basle, where it assumes a pretty constant N. course, becoming the 
boundary between France and the grand duchy of Baden, and 
afterward between Baden and Rhenish Bavaria. At the junction 
of the Mayne, the stream takes a sudden turn W. to Bingen, on 
the W. bank, from wdiich point the course of the river is pretty 
uniformly N.W., to the borders of the Netherlands {Holland and 
Belgium), whence it takes a westerly direction, and divides into 
two principal branches ; the larger of these, called the Waal, joins, 
the Meuse ; the other, which retains the name of the Rhine, falls 
into the North Sea, in 52° 12' N. lat. (M. A.) 

Rhine ( Anc. Ehenus ,• Fr. Rhin ,• Ger. Rhein ,• Dutch Rhyri). All that 
portion of the r. which lies within or along the boundary of Switzerland, is 
called the Upper Rhine ; from Bale to Cologne it is denominated the Middle 
Rhine ; and the remainder of the course to its mouths, the Lower Rhine. 
With respect to length, the Rhine is the fourth r. of Europe, but it is one of 
the first rank as a channel of commerce. The lower Rhine may be navigated 
by sea-vessels of 300 or 400 tons, though flat river-barges are generally used, 
on account of the numerous sand-banks. Area of basin, including tributa- 
ries, 83,298 sq. ms., or about l-42d part of Europe. 

Q. Where is the Thames River ? 

A. It is in the S. part of England, rises in Gloucestershire, near 
Cirencester, by several branches. The principal one, called the 
Isis, joins the Churn near Cricklade, where the united stream first 
takes the name of Thames ; though, after the example of the 
literati of Oxford, it is generally called the Isis till after it passes 
that city. The general course of the river is easterly: it falls into 
the North Sea or German Ocean in about 51° 30' N. lat., and 0° 
50' E. long. 

The Thames (Anc. Tamesis) is the largest and most important river of 
England. It is about 233 ms. in length, and is navigable for ships of any 
burden to Deptford (about 4 ms. S. E. of London), for vessels of 800 tons 
to Catharine Docks, near the tower of London, and for barges to the con- 
fines of Gloucestershire. The greatest breadth of the Thames at London, 
is rather more than a quarter of a mile ; the mean breadth may be 700 qv 
800 ft, 



250 EUROPE. 

Q. Where is the Shannon River ? 

A. It is the largest and most important river in Ireland : it 
rises in the N. W. part of the co. of Cavan, and, flowing at first 
southerly, and afterwards south-westerly, falls into the Atlantic 
Ocean, near 52° 30' N. lat., and 10° W. long. (M. A.) 

This river in its course traverses several lakes, the principal of which are 
Lough Allen, Lough Ree, and Lough Deirgart. Towards its termination, the 
river widens into an estuary from 1 or 2 to 10 ms. broad. It is navigable 
for nearly 190 ms., or to within 6 or 7 ms. of its source. 

Q. Where is the Seine River? 

Ji. It is in the N. part of France, rises in the dep. and moun- 
tain-chain of the Cote d'Or (by which it is separated from the 
basin of the Loire), about lat. 47° 30' N., long. 5° E., 20 ms. N. 
W. of Dijon. It flows generally in a N. W. direction, between 
the basins of the Loire on the S. W., and of the Mense and 
Somme on the N. E., and falls into the English Channel {La 
Manche), which it enters by a wide estuary at Havre, about lat. 
49° 30' N., and long. 0° 10' E. (M. A.) 

Seine (Anc. Sequana), a river of France, and though by no means the 
largest, yet one of the most important in the kingdom, being that on which 
the capital is built. It flows through the deps. of Aube, Seine-et-Marne, 
Seine-et-Oise, Seine, Eure, and Seine-Inferieure, to the English Channel. 
Its entire course, in consequence of its numerous windings, is estimated at 
450 ms., for nearly 300 of which it is navigable. Its source is about 1420 
ft. above the level of the sea. But more than three-fourths of its descent 
takes place within the first 100 ms. of its course, for at Troyes it is not more 
than 440 ft. above the sea ; and at Paris its mean elevation above the latter 
is only 51 ft. ; and at Rouen, 26 ft. The Seine and its tributaries are con- 
nected by the canals of Briare, Orleans, and Nivernois, with the Loire ; by 
that of St. Quentin with the Somme and Scheldt; by that of Ardennes with 
the Meuse; and by that of Burgundy with the Loire. The canal of Ourcq 
also communicates with it. 

Q. Where is the Loire River ? 

A. It is the principal R. of France, through the central part of 
which it flows in a W. direction to lis. embouchure in the Bay of 
Biscay. It rises in mount Gerbier de Jones, on the W. declivity 
of the Cevennes, in the department of Ardeche, about lat. 44° 
38' N., long 4° 30' E., at an elevation of 4593 ft. above the level 
of the sea. Its general direction is N. N. W. to near Orleans, 
after which it flows mostly W. S. W. to its mouth in the Bay of 
Biscay, in about lat. 47° 15' N., long. 2° 15' W. (M. A.) 

The basin of the Loire (Anc. Liger), which comprises nearly one-fourth 
part of the kingdom, has the basin of the Seine on the N. E., that of the 
Garonne on the S. W., and that of the Rhone on the E. The entire course 
of the Loire is estimated at 600 ms., of which 450 are navigable. Before 
losing itself in the ocean, it spreads out into a considerable estuary ; below 
Nantes it is between 2 and 3 ms. in width ; but its navigation in the lower 
part of its course is rendered difficult by shallows and numerous islands. 



EUROPE. 25 1* 

Ships ol 900 tons, though built at Nantes, are loaded at Painibceuf or St. 
Nazaire ; and all ships of considerable burden unload nearly 30 nis. below 
Nantes, their cargoes being conveyed to that city by lighters. 

Q. Where is the Garonne River ? 

Jt. The Garonne r. (the Garumna of the Romans) is in the 
S.W. part of France : it rises in the Pyrenees, and, flowing in a 
north-westerly direction, unites with the Dordogne r., about 15 
ms. below Bordeaux, and forms the Gironde.* (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Douro River ? 

A. The Douro (Span. Duero, Anc. Durius) is in the N. part 
of Spain and Portugal ; it is one of the principal rivers of that 
part of Europe. It rises in the Sierra de Olbion, prov. Soria, Old 
Castile, about lat. 42° N., and long. 2° 50' W. This river takes a 
generally W. course, as far as Miranda, where, turning almost due 
S.W., it forms a portion of the boundary of Portugal, through 
which it flows westward to its mouth in the Atlantic Ocean, in 
lat. 41° 8' N., long. 8° 38' W., 2 ms. W. of Oporto. (M. A.) 

Q, Where is the Tagus River? 

A. The Tagus (Span. Tajo, Portug. Tejo,) is in Spain and Por- 
tugal ; it is the principal and most celebrated r. of the Spanish 
peninsula, through the centre of which it flows from E. to W., 
between the basins of the Ebro and Douro on the N. and the Gua- 
diana on the S. It has its source in the Sierra Albaracin, on the 
borders of Aragon and New Castile, about lat. 40° 25' N., long. 
1° 35' W., 30 ms. W. Teruel, and only 90 ms. from the Medi- 
terranean. The Tagus flows W. S. W. to the confines of Portu- 
gal : it then turns S. S.W., and after expanding into a fine estuary, 
enters the Atlantic Ocean a little below Lisbon, built on its N. bank, 
in 38° 38' N. lat., and 9° 20' W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Guadiana River ? 

A. The Guadiana (Anc. Anas, Arab. Wady-Ana) is in Spain 
and Portugal ; it rises in the Mts. of La Mancha, about lat. 
38° 55' N., long. 2° 48' W., and flowing westerly as far as Ba- 
dajoz, it enters Portugal, where it curves southward, and after a 
very tortuous course enters the Atlantic by two mouths, in about 
lat. 37° 10' N., and long. 7° 14' W. It forms a part of the bound- 
ary between Spain and Portugal. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Guadalquivir River ? 

A. It is in the S. of Spain, having its sources in the depart- 
ments of Murcia and La Mancha, and flowing S. W. through An- 
dalusia. The source called the Guadalquivir, is in the Sierra de 
Cazorla, lat. 37° 51' N„ and long. 2° 58' W. ; but the true source, 
and that most distant from the mouth, the Gaudarmena, rises in 
the Sierra de Alcaraz, not far from the town so called ; lat. 38° 

* The estuary of the Garonne R., below the Dordogne, bears the name of 
the Gironde. It is about 25 ms. in length. 



252 EUROPE. 

48' N., long. 2° 30' W. The general direction is S. W. by W. 
as far as Seville, where it takes a turn nearly S., and, after forming 
two islands, Isla Major and Is la Minor, flows through a marshy 
and most unhealthy flat into the Atlantic at San Lucar, in about 
36° 44' N. lat., and 6° 20' W. long. (M. A.) 

The ancient name of this river was Bsetis ; the present appellation is Ara- 
bic, Wady-al-kebir, the " great river." It is navigable for vessels of 100 
tons as far as Seville, and for boats as high as Cordova, 774 ft. above the sea. 

Q. Where is the Ebro River ? 

A. The Ebro (Anc. Iberus) is in Spain, through the N. E. 
part of which it flows, uniformly almost in a S. E. direction, being 
the only great peninsular r. that has its embouchure in the Medi- 
terranean. It rises at Fontibre, province of Santander, on the S. 
declivity of the Sierra Sejos, about lat. 43° N. and long. 4° W., 
near the sources of the Pisuerga, an affluent of the Douro. It 
flows in a south-easterly direction, and falls into the Mediterranean, 
in about lat. 40° 40' N., long. 0° 55' E. (M. A.) 

The Ebro separates the provinces of Biscay and Navarre from Old 
Castile, intersects Aragon in its centre, and disembogues near the southern 
extremity of Catalonia. It runs mostly through a succession of narrow val- 
leys till it reaches Mequinenza ; after which it enters Catalonia and flows 
through a more level country. At Amposta, 13 ms. W. from its mouth, it 
is about 300 yards wide. It immediately afterward forms a kind of delta ; 
a navigable canal having been cut from the port of Alfaquez, or San Carlos, 
at its S. mouth, to Amposta. The Ebro. is navigable for boats as high as 
Tudela, but its current is very rapid, and its bed in many parts encumbered 
with rocks and shoals. To avoid these obstacles and the numerous wind- 
ings of the r., the Aragon canal has been cut along the right bank from near 
Tudela to Sastago. An ancient Moorish canal, now dry, formerly connected 
the town of Alcanez, on the Guadalupe, with the Ebro. This r., before the 
second Punic war, formed the boundary of the Roman and Carthaginian ter- 
ritories ; and, in the time of Charlemagne, between the Moorish and Chris- 
tian dominions. 

Q. Where is the Rhone River ? 

A. The Rhone (Anc. Rho damns) is in the S. part of France ; 
it rises in the Pennine Alps, and, traversing portions of Swit- 
zerland and France, falls into the Mediterranean Sea, between 
lat. 43° 15' and 48° 15' N., and long. 4° and 8° 20' E. The 
highest source of this river is on the W. side of the great mass of 
St. Gothard, but it scarcely assumes the form of a r. till its junc- 
tion with three or four other streams at the foot of the glacier of its 
own name, a beautiful fan-shaped cluster of ice, the lower edge of 
which is 5470 ft. above the sea. Its course is W. S. W. as far as 
Martigny. Here the stream assumes a N. N. W. direction for 
about 24 ms., and enters the "Lake of Geneva. On leaving this 
lake it flows first S. W., then S., till not far from Chamberry it 
enters France S. of the Jura Mts. Here, however, it takes a sud- 
den turn to the W. N. W., which direction it maintains with few 



EUROPE. 2dS 

exceptions to its junction with the Saone at Lyons. From Lyons 
its direction is nearly due S. to Aries, where its delta commences; 
and it falls into the Mediterranean by a double set of mouths, near 
43° 25' N. lat., and 4° 30' E. long. Estimated area of basin, 
37,300 sq. ms. (M. A.) 

The Rhone enters the Mediterranean by four mouths :. the first separation 
occurs at Aries, where two branches are formed ; one called the great Rhone, 
running S. E., the other known as the little Rhone, pursuing a S. W. course, 
and both together enclosing the alluvial island of Camargue, which has an 
area of about 1900 sq. ms. Each of these again bifurcates a short distance 
above the mouth ; but the east channels are those only which admit of safe 
navigation. The basin of the Rhone is connected by canals with the other 
principal rivers of France. The canal of the Rhone and Rhine connects 
the Doubs with the 111, an affluent of the Rhine; the canal du Centre 
unites the Saone to the Loire, and the canal of Burgundy connects the 
Saone with the Youne, a navigable branch of the Seine ; so that in this way 
the four principal rivers of France are all united. The navigation "of the 
mouth of the Rhone is considerably improved by the canal of Aries, which 
runs close to the Great Rhone, and by the canal of Beaucaire, which leaves 
the r. near the town of that name, and not onlv runs into the Mediterranean, 
but is joined by branch canals with the canal du Midi, connecting the 
Garonne and the Bay of Biscay with the Mediterranean. The Rhone is 
also connected with the Loire by a railway, which passes through the im- 
portant manufacturing town of St. Etienne. 

Q. Where is the Po River ? 

A. The Po ( Anc. Eridanus or Padus) is in the N. of Italy, and 
is the principal r. of that part of Europe ; it issues from the Alps, 
on the confines of France, in about 44° 40' N. lat., and 7° E. long. 
It flows at first easterly, then northerly, till it reaches the point of 
about 45° 13' N. lat., and 7° 50' E. long., when its general course 
becomes and continues almost due E. After dividing Austrian 
Italy from the states of Parma, Modena, and the " States of the 
Church," it empties itself into the Gulf of Venice by numerous 
mouths, near 45° N. lat., and 12° 30' E. long. (M. A.) 

The principal channel or mouth, which joins the sea almost under the 
45th parallel, is called the Maestra, and is always navigable for merchant 
vessels. Boats of 60 tons can, in all seasons, ascend the r. as high as 
Cremona, and, except in times of great drought, as far as Casale, in Pied- 
mont, in long. 8° 27' E. 

Q. Where is the Danube River ? 

A. The Danube (Anc. Danubius, and in the lower part of its 
course Ister, Germ. Donau, Hung. Buna) is in the central and S. 
E. part of Europe, and, though inferior in point of size to the 
Volga, in every other respect the first among European rivers. 
Its general course is from W. to E. : it extends between long. 
8° 10' and 29° 40' E. : its extreme N. point of lat. being 49° 
2'; and its extreme S. point 43° 33' N. Its total course from 
its source to its mouths on the W. shore of the Black Sea, is about 
22 



254 EUROPE. 

1600 ms. ; during which it passes through the territories of Baden, 
Wirtemberg, Bavaria, the Austrian Empire, and Turkey. 

The Danube originates in two streams, the Bregach and the 
Brege, which have their sources on the E. declivity of the Black 
Forest, in the grand duchy of Baden, in about 48° 6' N. lat., and 
8° 9' E. long. These streams having united at Donaueschingen, 
where they are augmented by a spring sometimes regarded as the 
head of the r., the united stream takes the name of the Danube. 
It thence proceeds at first S. E., but afterwards in a N. E. dir > 
tion as far as Ratisbon, near which city it attains its extreme N. 
lat. Jt then flows in a S. E. direction to about long. 15°, and. 
from that point mostly E. to Presburg ; thence S. E. to its con- 
fluence with the Raab, and then E. to Waitzen. At this point it 
turns S. and runs parallel with the Theiss to its junction with the 
Drave. Here it turns S. E., in which general direction it con- 
tinues to Orsova, where it leaves the Austrian dominions. From 
this point it flows at first S. by E. to Widin ; thence its course is 
mostly E. by S. to near Sistow, where it attains to its most S. lat* ; 
and from this point E. N. E. to Rassova. It then turns N. to 
Galacz, and finally runs from this town generally E. to its efflux 
in the Black Sea, by several mouths, about lat. 45° N. (M. A.) 

The basin of the Danube and its tributaries has been estimated to com- 
prise about 1-1 3th part of the entire surface of Europe. It is bounded S. 
by the Alps and the Balkan ; and on the N. at first by the Black Forest and 
some minor alpine ranges, and afterwards by the Bohemian Forest, or Boh- 
mer Wald, and Carpathian Mountains. It includes the plains of Bavaria, 
Hungary, and Turkey in Europe ; and the course of the Danube has been 
generally considered under three grand divisions, each embracing one of these 
plains. The Danube is navigable for large ships as far as Silistria, but there 
are rapids near Orsova, where it leaves the Austrian dominions, which it is im- 
possible for any vessel to ascend, although those drawing not more than 2f 
ft. water may sometimes descend. The navigation is also impeded in the 
upper part of its course, by a great number of rocks, and, lower down, by 
sand-banks. This r. is remarkable for its winding course, and for the mul- 
titude of its islands. 

Q. Where is the Dneister River ? 

Jl. The Dneister (the Tyras or Danaster of the ancients) is in 
trie S. E. part of Europe. It rises on the N. side of the Carpathian 
Mts., in Austrian Galicia, in about 49° N. lat., and 23° E. long., 
and, flowing in a south-easterly direction, through Galicia and the 
S.W. part of Russia, enters the Black Sea by a broad llman or 
swampy lake, about 19 ms. long and 5 ms. wide. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Bog River ? 

Jl. The Bog (Anc. Hypanis) is in, and rises in the S. part of 
European Russia, flows S. E. and enters the r. Dnieper, not far 
from the Black Sea. (M. A.) 



EUROPE. *25o 

Q. Where is the Dnieper River ? 

A. The Dnieper (Anc. Borysthenes) is in the S. part of Euro- 
pean Russia ; it rises near the village of Dnieproosk, in the govern- 
ment of Smolensk, in about lat. 55° 20' N., and flows in a general 
southerly direction to Kiev, thence S. E. to Ekatherinoslav, and 
afterwards S. W. till it unites with the Bog R., and forms a large 
liman or swampy lake at the N. N. W. extremity of the Black 
Sea, nearly 50 ms. long, and from 1 to 6 broad. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Don River ? 

A. The Don (Anc. Tanais) is in the S. E. part of European 
Russia. It rises in the government of Tula, in 55° N. lat., nearly, 
and, passing by the city of Tula, flows S. to the intersection of the 
parallel of 50° N. lat., and the meridian of 40° E. long. ; it then 
turns to the E., till, at Katchalinsk, it approaches within about 36 
ms. of the Volga ; here it takes a W. S. W. direction, which it 
pursues till it falls into the N. E. corner of the Sea of Azov, a little 
below the town of the same name. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Volga River ? 

.#. The Volga, or Wolga (Anc. Rha), is in the central and E. 
part of European Russia, and is the largest r. of Europe. It has 
its source in a small lake at the W. extremity of the gov. Tver, 
in lat. 57° 10' N., long. 32° 20' E., 220 ms. S.S. E. of Petersburg ; 
on the E. declivity of the Valdai plateau, near the source of the 
Duna, the Dnieper, and other large rivers, at an elevation of 895 ft. 
above the level of the sea. 

It flows at first S. E., and afterward N. E. through the govs, of 
Tver and Jaroslavl ; at a point about 70 ms. N.W. of the town of 
Jaroslavl it turns to the E. S. E., which direction it generally 
pursues through Jaroslavl, Kostroma, Niznei, Novgorod, and Ka- 
zan, to the confluence of the Kama, about lat. 55° 8' N., and long. 
49° 30' E. Thenceforward it flows generally S. S. W. through 
the governments of Sinbirsk .and Saratof to Tzaritzin, where it 
approaches within 36 ms. of the main stream of the Don, their 
confluence being prevented by an intervening chain of hills. It 
then turns again to the S. E. through the gov. of Astrachan, and 
pours itself into the Caspian Sea, on its'N. W. side, through an 
extensive delta, hy more than 70 mouths, the W. and largest of 
these being in lat. 46° N., and long. 48° E. (M. A.) 

The basin of the Volga, comprising the central part of European Russia, 
has the basin of the Dwina to the N., of the Don and Dnieper to the S., and 
of the Oural or tLal to the E. The Volga was formerly considered as con- 
stituting a part of the boundary line between Europe and Asia ; but since the 
limits of these continents have been removed to the Caucasus and the Cas- 
pian, its basin, with those of its tributaries, lie wholly within Europe. From 
its source to its mouth its length is estimated at about 2000 ms., being about 
400 ms. longer than the Danube. The area of its basin has been supposed 
to include upwards of 636,000 sq. ms., or considerably more than twice as 



256 EUROPE. 

much as the basin of the Danube, and eight times as much as that of the 
Rhine. 

It will be frequently seen that in giving the sources of the above 
named rivers, the names of mountains, &c, are sometimes mentioned 
which are not defined on the maps, and could not well be given 
without crowding them too much for practical purposes ; but as 
the lat. and long, are always stated, the teacher will find no diffi- 
culty in locating them. And so, in describing their different courses, 
the names of cities, towns, &c, frequently occur, which are not all 
"given on the maps. 

Q. How long is each of these rivers ? 

A. The Petchora is 600 ms. long; Dwina,700; Onega, 300; 
Tornea,250; Dal, 300; Duna,350; Niemen, 350 ; Vistula, 550 ; 
Oder, 450 ; Elbe, 600 ; Weser, 300 ; Rhine, 950 ; Thames, 233 ; 
Shannon, 200 ; Seine, 300 ; Loire, 500 ; Garonne, 300 ; Douro, 
450; Tagus, 550; Guadiana, 500 ; Guadalquivir, 400; Ebro, 
350 ; Rhone, 450 ; Po, 450 ; Danube, 1600 ; Dniester, 500 ; Bog, 
400; Dnieper, 1000; Don, 1000; Volga, 2000. (M. A.) 

LAKES. 

Q. Where is Lake Onega ? 

Jl. It is in the northern part of European Russia, being, next to 
that of Ladoga, the largest lake in Europe ; situated in the centre 
of the government of Olonetz, being intersected by the 61st and 
62d parallels of N. lat., and by the 35th and 36th meridians of E. 
long. The river Svir forms its outlet. (M. A.) 

The length of this lake from N. W. to S. E., is 130 ms. ; breadth varying 
from 30 to 45 ms. Area variously estimated at from 3300 to 4300 sq. ms. 
It receives numerous rivers, and at its S. W. extremity discharges itself into 
the lake Ladoga by the Svir. 

Q. Where is lake Ladoga ? 

A. It is in Russia in Europe, surrounded by the governments 
of Petersburg, Olonetz, and Vyborg in Finland, and extending 
from lat. 59° 58' to 61° 46' N., and from 'long. 29° 50' to 32° 55' 
E. It discharges its surplus waters by the Neva r. into the gulf 
of Finland. (M. A.) 

Though this lake contains the largest collection of fresh water in Europe, 
there is but little accessible information respecting it. Its length N. W. to 
S. E. is about 130 ms. ; greatest breadth about 70 ms. Area estimated at 
from 6200 to 6300 sq. ms. Its depth is very unequal. It receives a num- 
ber of rivers, mostly small, the chief of which are the Voux, connecting it 
with the Saima, the Purus, the Kalla, and other lakes in Finland ; the Svir, 
by which the surplus waters of the lake Onega are poured into it ; and 
the Volkhov, by which it communicates with lake II men. It has several 
islands, chiefly toward its N. extremity ; and is so full of rocks and quick- 
sands, and so subject to storms, that, to avoid if, Peter the Great began, in 
1718, the Ladoga Canal, from New Ladoga, on the Volkhov, to Schlussel- 



EUROPE. 25? 

burg, on the Neva, along the S. shore of the lake, a distance of about 70 
ms. This work was finished under the empress Anne, in 1732 : it is 74 
ft. broad, and, according to the season, from 4 to 8 or 9 ft. deep, and has 20 
large, besides many smaller sluices. It is annually navigated by an im- 
mense number of boats, chiefly with merchandise from Petersburg. 

Q. Where is lake Peipus ? 

A. It is in the W. part of European Russia, lying S. of the 
gulf of Finland, between 57° 48' and 59° N. lat., and 26° 56' 
and 28° 10' E. long. It communicates with the above gulf by 
the river Narova or Narva. (M. A.) 

The extreme length of this lake is about 90 ms. ; greatest breadth, 30 
ms. The southern portion, which is joined to the rest by a narrow strait, 
is called the lake of Pskof, being situated principally within that govern- 
ment. 

Q. Where is lake Wiener ? 

A. It is in the S. part of Sweden, being the largest lake in Eu- 
rope, after that of Onega. This lake is intersected by the 59th 
parallel of N. lat., and the 13th and 14th meridians of E. long. 
The r. Gotha forms its outlet. (M. A.) 

This lake is about 80 ms. in length, by 50 ms. in its greatest breadth, 147 
ft. above the level of the sea. It receives many streams, the only outlet for 
its waters being a channel about 200 yards in width, immediately below 
which is the celebrated cataract of Trolhoetta. Though in parts very deep, 
a great portion of the lake is so shallow as to render its navigation difficult 
and dangerous. 

Q. Where is Jake Wetter ? 

A. It is in the S. part of Sweden, about 25 ms. S. E. of Lake We- 
ner, intersected by the 58th parallel of N. lat., and the meridian of 
14° 30' E. long. Its only outlet is the r. Motala, wdiich flows E. into 
the Baltic Sea. (M. A.) 

Length, 70 ms. ; greatest breadth, 17 ms. 

Q. Where is the lake of Geneva? 

A. The lake of Geneva, or lake Leman (Germ. Genfersee, 
Anc. Lacus Lemanns), is in the S. W. extremity of Switzerland, 
and is the largest lake in that part of Europe. It has N. E. and S. 
E., the canton of Vaud or Leman ; S. W. that of Geneva ; and S. 
Savoy. The r. Rhone forms its outlet. (M. A.) 

This lake fills up the lower portion of a somewhat extensive valley 
enclosed between the Alps and the Jura. It is crescent-shaped, the con- 
vexity being directed N. N. W., and the horns facing S. S. E. Its greatest 
length, a curved line passing through its centre from Geneva at its W. 
extremity, to Villeneuve at its E., is about 47 ms. ; but along the N. shore, 
the distance from end to end is about 55 ms. ; while along its S. it is no 
more than about 40 ms. Its breadth varies considerably ; where greatest, it 
is about 9 ms. wide. The area is estimated at about 240 sq. ms. It is 
divided in common parlance, into the Great and Little Lake ; the latter is 
more exclusively called the lake of Geneva, and extends from that city for a 
22* 



258 EUROPE. 

distance of 14 ms., but with a breadth never more than 3£ ms., to Point 
d'Yroire ; beyond which, lake Leman widens considerably. The Rhone 
enters it near its E. extremity, and emerges from it at its S. W. extremity, 
where its waters, like those of the lake itself, are extremely clear, and of a 
deep blue colour, circumstances which have been often adverted to by Byron. 

Q. How long is each of these lakes ? 

A. Onega is 150 ms. long; ; Ladoga, 130 ; Peipus, 90 ; Wener, 
80 ; Wetter, 70 ; Geneva, 47. (M. A.) 

PENINSULAS. 

Q. Where is the peninsula of Jutland 1 

A. It is in the western part of Denmark, of which country it 
forms one of the largest provinces, having N. the Skager Rack, E. 
the Little Belt and the Cattegat, and W. the North Sea. (M. A.) 
Jutland, so called from the Jutes, the ancient inhabitants, formerly com- 
prised the whole continental portion of the Danish dominions, but it is now 
restricted to the part of the peninsula belonging to Denmark to the N. of 
Sleswick, extending from about 55f° to nearly 58° N. lat., being about 170 
ms. in length, and from 60 to 80 ms. in breadth, comprising an area of 9950 
sq. ms. Pop. in 1834, 525,952, having increased at the rate of about one 
per cent, per annum during the present century. It is of an oblong form, 
with the addition of a triangle towards the N. Surface generally fiat. 

Q. Where is the peninsula of the Morea ? 

A. It is in the southern part of Greece, and forms an important 
division of that kingdom ; it is also the most S. portion of conti- 
nental Europe ; having E. the Grecian Archipelago, and S. and 
W. the Mediterranean Sea. (M. A.) 

Morea (Anc. Peloponnesus) consists of a peninsula attached to S. 
Greece by the isthmus of Corinth, between lat. 36° 15' and 38° 20' N., and 
long. 21° .9' and 23° 30' E. Its length is near 160 ms. ; its breadth about 
100 ms. Area estimated at 8800 sq. ms. Pop., in 1835, about 380,000. 
The name Morea was given to this peninsula by the Italians, from the quan- 
tity of mulberries (in their language " more ") which it produces. 

Q. Where is the peninsula of the Crimea ? 

A. It is in the S. part of European Russia, and may be called 
a four-sided peninsula, having on its E. side the Sivache, or Putrid 
Sea, the Sea of Azov, and the Strait of Enikale ; everywhere else, 
except where it is connected with the main land, it is surrounded 
by the Black Sea. (M. A.) 

Crimea (Russ. Krim ,• Anc. Chersonesus Taurica), is united on the N. 
to the main land by the isthmus of Perekop, 5 ms. in width, and lies be- 
tween 44° 22' and 46° 10' N. lat., and 32° 36' and 36° 30' E. long. Its 
extreme length is above 190 ms. ; its greatest breadth about 130 ms. The 
area is estimated at 8600 sq. ms. Pop. estimated at near 300,000. 

Q. What large peninsula lies south of the Bay of Biscay ? 

A. Spain and Portugal. 

Q. What peninsula lies west of the Gulf of Venice ? 

A. Italy. 



EUROPE. 259 

CAPES. 

Q. Where is Cape Sviatoi ? 

A. It is on the N. coast of European Russia. 

Q. Where is Cape North ? 

A. It is on the N. coast of Norway 1 

Cape North, in 71° 10' N. lat., commonly regarded as the northern ex- 
tremity of Europe, is on the Island Mageroe. The most northern point of 
continental Europe is Cape Nord Kyn, in lat. 71° 6' N. 

Q. Where is the Naze ? 

A. It is the most southern point of Norway ? 

Q. Where is Cape Clear ? 

A. It is the S. point of Clare Island, which lies off the S. extre- 
mity of Ireland, in lat. 51° 19' N., and long. 9° 37' W. (M. A.) 

This Cape generally forms the point of departure, or commencement of 
the reckoning of vessels sailing out of St. George's Channel to the west- 
ward. 

Q. Where is Land's End ? 

A. It is the most westerly point of England. (M. A.) 

Land's End is a headland at the W. extremity of the co. of Cornwall, 
celebrated as being the most westerly land in England ; lat. 50° 4' 8" N., 
long. 5° 41' 31" W. It is formed of granite cliffs, which rise about 60 ft. 
above the level of the sea. These assume, in some places, the appearance 
of shafts, and are as regular as if they had been cut by the chisel. 

Q. Where is Cape Finisterre ?* 

A. It forms the. W. extremity of Spain. Lat. 42° 54' N., long. 
9° 26' W. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape St. Vincent ?t 

A. It forms the S. W. extremity of Portugal. Lat. 37° 3' N., 
long. 9° W. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape de Gatt ? 

A. It is on the S. coast of Spain. 

Q. Where is Cape Teulada ? 

A. It is the most S. point of the Island of Sardinia. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Passaro ? 

A. It is the most S. point of the Island of Sicily. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Matapan ?± 

A. It is the most southerly point of Greece. Lat. 36° 23' 20" 
N., long. 22°30'E. (M. A.) 

ISLANDS. 

Q. Where is Iceland ? 

A. It is in the N. Atlantic Ocean, on the confines of the Arctic 
circle, and W. of Norway. (M. A.) 

* The name is from the Latin finis terrse, which is equivalent to the 
English « Land's End." 

•j- The Sacrum Promontorium of the ancients. 
i Anciently, Tsenarium Promontorium. 



260 EUROPE. 

This is a large Island under the dominion of Denmark, generally con- 
sidered as belonging to Europe, but which should rather, perhaps, be reckoned 
in America; between lat. 63° 30' and 66° 40' N., and long. 16° and 24° 
30' W. Its length is about 230 ms. ; its greatest breadth about 220 
ms. It is of a. very irregular triangular shape, and is estimated to contain 
about 30,000 sq. ms. Pop. (1834) 56,000, supposed to be spread over 
about two-thirds of the Island, the central portion being totally uninhabited, 
and imperfectly explored. Reikiavig, a little town on the W. coast, is re- 
garded as the capital of the Island. 

Q. Where are the Loffoden Islands. 

A. They are a group of Islands in the Atlantic Ocean, on the 
coast of Norway, between lat. 67° 40' and 69° 30' N., and long. 
11° 40' and 16° 20' E. (M. A.) 

There are five larger and seven smaller Islands, having in all from 3,000 
to 4000 inhabitants. The principal are (taking a S. W. direction) AndOen, 
Langoen, and Hindoen, which is the largest of the whole group, and, with 
six others, forms, on the side of the Norwegian continent, the great gulf of 
"West Fiord. 

Q. Where are the Faroe Isles ? 

A. Faroe, or Feroe Islands, are a group of 22 Islands belonging 
to Denmark, in the Atlantic Ocean, between lat. 61° 15' and 62° 
21' N., and long. 6° and 8° W., about 185 ms. N. W. of the Shet- 
land Isles, and 320 ms. S. E. of Iceland. 

The principal Island, Stromoe, in the centre, is 27 ms. long by about 7 
ms. broad ; the other chief Islands are Osteroe, Vaagoe, Bordoe, Sandoe, and 
Suderoe. Total area 495 sq. ms. Pop. about 6800. Only 17 Islands of 
the group are inhabited. 

The Faroe isles are supposed to have been discovered by the Norwegians 
in the ninth century ; since the union of Norway with Denmark, in the 
fourteenth century, they have belonged to the latter country. 

Q. Where are the Shetland Isles ? 

A. They are a group of Islands, in the Atlantic Ocean, about 
120 ms. N. E. of the N. extremity of Scotland. (M. A.) 

The Shetland, or Zetland Isles, (perhaps the Ultima Thule of the an- 
cients,) are separated from the Orkneys by a channel 48 ms. across, and lie 
principally between the parallels of 59° 52' and 60° 50' N. lat., and 30' 
and 1° 40' W. long. Including islets, they are supposed to exceed 100 in 
number : but the mainland or principal Island is a good deal more extensive 
than all the others put together. Between 30 and 40 are inhabited. They 
are about twice as extensive as the Orkneys ; their total area being esti- 
mated at 563,200 acres. In 1841, they had a pop. of about 30,000. 

Q. Where are the Orkney Isles ? 

A. They are a group of Islands in the Atlantic Ocean, situated 
near the N. N. E. extremity of Scotland. (M. A.) 

The Orkneys (Lat. Orcades) are separated from the mainland of Scot- 
land by the Pentland Frith, about 4 ms. in breadth. They are comprised 
between the parallels of 58° 44' and 59° 24' N. lat., and 2° 25' and 3° 20' 
W. long. There are about a dozen principal Islands ; Pomona, or Main- 



EUROPE. 201 

land, being decidedly the largest. But including the smaller Islands (pro- 
vincially holms) and islets, the total number is estimated at 67, of which 
about 40 are uninhabited. They are supposed to comprise an area of nearly 
281,600 acres, and had, in 1841, a pop. of 30,000. They belong to Great 
Britain. The Orkney and Shetland Islands, which are most probably the 
Thule of the ancients, form the county of Orkney and Shetland. 

Q. Where are the Hebrides, or Western Isles? 

A. They are a series of Islands and Islets lying along the W. 
coast of Scotland, partly and principally in the Atlantic Ocean, 
but partly also in the Frith of Clyde. (M. A.) 

The Hebrides, or Western Isles of Scotland (the Hebudes or Ebudes of 
the ancients), are situated between 55° 35' and 58° 51' N. lat., and between 
5° and 7° 52' W. long. The Islands (seven) in the Frith of Clyde con- 
stitute a co. (Buteshire), the others belong respectively to the counties of 
Argyle, Inverness, and Ross. The Hebrides consist of about 200 Islands, 
great and small, and are usually divided into the Inner and Outer Hebrides; 
the former embracing all those Islands which lie nearest to the mainland, in- 
cluding those in the Frith of Forth, the latter consisting of a long continuous 
range of Islands, stretching N. N. E. and S. S. W. from Barra Head, in lat. 
56° 49' N., to the Butt of the Lewis, in lat. 58° 51' N. The strait, which 
divides the Outer Hebrides from the Inner, and from the mainland of Scot- 
land, is called the Minch, and is, where narrowest, from 15 to 16 ms. across. 
The Outer Hebrides are commonly called the Long Island, and appear, in 
fact, as if they had originally consisted of one lengthened Island, divided at 
a remote era into its present portions by some convulsion of nature. Lewis 
and Harris (which are more extensive than all the rest put together), though 
considered as separate, foUh, in fact, only one Island ; and the sounds, or 
arms of the sea, which intervene between the larger Islands of the group, are 
so interspersed with Islets, that the range is still nearly continuous. The total 
extent of the Hebrides is estimated at about 2750 sq. ms. or 1,760,000 acres, 
of which 64,000 acres are lakes. They are divided into 30 parishes, of which 5 
are in the Islands in the Frith of Clyde, 17 in the Inner Hebrides, and 8 in 
the Outer Hebrides. The total pop. in 1801 was 74,022 ; in 1831, 104,021 ; 
and in 1841, 108,000. Of the 200 Islands of which the Hebrides consist, 
more than half are so small or so sterile as not to be inhabited. In 1 808, 
only 79 were regularly inhabited during the whole year ; while 8 were 
tenanted during the summer, and abandoned on the approach of winter. 
The greater portion of the people reside within a mile of the sea-shore : 
in fact, except in the Islands of Bute and Islay, scarcely an inhabited 
house can be seen 1000 yards from the sea-shore, or 300 ft. above the level 
of the sea. • 

Q. Where are the British Isles 1 

A. The islands of Great Britain and Ireland are situated in the 
N. Atlantic Ocean, off the W. shores of continental Europe, oppo- 
site to the N. parts of France, the Low Countries (Belgium and 
Holland), Denmark, and the S. parts of Sweden and Norway. 
(M. A.) 

The British Empire, one of the most civilized, powerful, and important 
states that have ever existed, consists of the islands of Great Britain and 
Ireland, with the smaller islands contiguous to them, and their dependencies 



!262 Europe. 

in various parts of the world. Great Britain, the laygest, and by far the 
richest and most populous of the British Islands, includes what were for- 
merly the independent kingdoms of England and Scotland ; the former 
occupying its S., most extensive and fertile, and the latter its N., and most 
barren portion. These two kingdoms, having been united, form with that 
of Ireland what is called the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, 
which constitutes not only the nucleus and centre, but the main body and 
seat of the wealth and power of the empire. 

The islands of Great Britain and Ireland are situated between 50° and 
59° N. lat., and 2° E. and 11° W. long. Great Britain, which, from its 
superior magnitude and importance, gives name to the United Kingdom and 
the empire, is not only the largest of the European Islands, but one of the 
largest in the world. It lies to the E. of Ireland, and approaches at its S. 
E. extremity at Dover to within 21 ms. of. the opposite coast of France. 
But as the coast of Great Britain stretches N. N. W. from Dover to Duncansby 
Head, the extreme N. E. point of the island, while the opposite shore 
of the Continent recedes in a N.E. direction, the intervening space, called 
the North Sea or German Ocean, is of very considerable dimensions. To 
the S. of the British Islands is the English Channel ; and W. and N. the 
broad expanse of the Atlantic. 

Great Britain is very irregularly shaped, being deeply indented by numer- 
ous gulfs and arms of the sea, but on the whole it approaches to the figure 
of a wedge, being narrowest at its N. and broadest at its S. extremity. The 
longest line not intersected by any considerable arm of the sea that can be 
drawn in Great Britain, extends from Rye in Sussex (lat. 50° 57' 1" N., 
long. 0° 44' E.), to Cape Wrath in Sutherland (lat. 58° 36' N., long. 4° 56' 
W.), a distance of about 580 ms. ; and its greatest breadth from the Land's 
End (lat. 50° 4' 8" N., long. 5° 41' 31" W.) #a point near Lowestoffe, 
on the coast of Norfolk (lat. 52° 28' 30" N., long. 1° 46' E.), is about 367 
ms. But, owing to the indentations already referred to, its breadth in some 
places is much less, being between the friths of Forth and Clyde under 40, 
and between the Murray Frith and .the Minch under 30 ms. from shore to 
shore. Its area is estimated at 89,500 sq. ms., of which England and Wales 
contain 59,500, and Scotland (exclusive of its dependent islands) 26,000 
sq. ms. The area of the Scottish Islands is estimated at 4000 sq. ms. 
The pop. of Great Britain, according to the census of 1841, amounts to 
18,650,965. 

Ireland lies to the W. of Great Britain, between the parallels of 51o 25' 
and 55° 23' N. lat., and of 5° 27' and 10° 30' W. long. Its figure is 
rhomboidal ; and though it has many noble bays and harbours, it is less 
indented by gulfs and arms of the sea, and is decidedly more compact than 
Great Britain. It*is everywhere surrounded by the Atlantic, except on its 
E. shores, which are separated from Great Britain by St. George's Channel, 
the Irish Sea, and the North Channel. From St. David's Head in Wales 
to Carnsore Point, the distance across is 50 ms. ; from Port Patrick in Gal- 
loway to Donaghadee it is 22 ms. ; but from the Mull of Cantire to Tor 
Point in Ireland, it is only 12 ms. The longest line that can be drawn in 
Ireland, in about the same meridian, extends from the old Head of Kinsale 
in Cork to Bloody Farland Point in Donegal, a distance of about 237 ms. ; 
the longest line that can be drawn crosswise, in nearly the same parallel of lat., 
extends from Emlagh Rash, on the coast of Mayo, to Quintin Point, at the 
mouth of Lough Strangford, on the coast of the county Down, being about 182 



EUROPE. 263 

ms. 3 but in other places the breadth is a good deal less. So conveniently is 
Ireland situated in respect of water communication, that there is no part more 
than 50 or 55 m&> distant from the sea, or from one of its arms. The area 
of Ireland is estimated at 31,000 sq. ms. 

Great Britain contains, in all, 84 counties, of which 40 belong to Eng- 
land,* 12 toWaIes,-j- and 32 to Scotland.^ Great Britain and Ireland form 
together what is termed the United Kingdom, of which London is the capi- 
tal. The government is a limited hereditary monarchy. The legislative 
power is vested in the parliament, consisting of the king or queen,§ the house 
of lords, and the house of commons. The king is regarded as the fountain of 
justice and the supreme head of the church. He is the commander-in-chief 
of the forces of the empire, both on land and sea. To him belongs the exclu- 
sive prerogative of granting pardons and of commuting punishments. The 
house of lords consists of the temporal peers of England, who are here- 
ditary, the elective peers of Scotland and Ireland, the bishops of England, 
and four Irish lords spiritual. The house of lords is also the supreme court 
of appeal for Great Britain and Ireland. The house of commons consists of 
individuals elected by the different counties, cities, boroughs, and universities, 
to represent them in parliament. It is required by law that the candidates be 
possessed of a certain amount of property, excepting the sons of peers, and 
those who are to represent the universities. The number of members of the 
house of commons, at present, amounts to 658, of whom 471 are chosen by 
England, 29 by Wales, 53 by Scotland, and 105 by Ireland. 

Ireland is divided into four provinces, viz. : Ulster, in the N. ; Leinster, 
in the E. ; Munster, in the S. ; and Connaught, in the W. These are sub- 
divided into counties, of which Ulster contains 9,|| Leinster 12,^f Munster 6,** 
and Connaught 5.-\\ Amounting in all to 32. 

* Bedford, Berks, Bucks (or Buckinghamshire), Cambridge, Chester (or 
Cheshire), Cornwall, Cumberland, Derby, Devon, Dorset, Durham, Essex, 
Gloucester, Hereford, Hertford, Huntingdon, Kent, Lancaster (or Lanca- 
shire), Leicester, Lincoln, Middlesex, Monmouth, Norfolk, Northampton, 
Northumberland, Nottingham, Oxford, Rutland, Salop (or Shropshire), 
Somerset, Southampton (or Hampshire), Stafford, Suffolk, Surrey, Sussex, 
Warwick, Westmoreland, Wilts, Worcester, York. 

f Anglesea, Brecon (or Brecknockshire), Cardigan, Caermarthen, Caer- 
narvon, Denbigh, Flint, Glamorgan, Merioneth, Montgomery, Pembroke, 
Radnor. 

\ Aberdeen, Argyle, Ayr, Banff, Berwick, Bute, Caithness, Clackmannan, 
Dumbarton, Dumfries, Edinburgh, Elgin (or Murray), Fife, Forfar (or 
Angus), Haddington, Inverness, Kincardine, Kinross, Kirkcudbright, Lanark, 
Linlithgow, Nairn, Orkney and Shetland, Peebles, Perth, Renfrew, Ross 
and Cromarty, Roxburgh, Selkirk, Stirling, Sutherland, Wigtown. 

§ Alexandrina Victoria is now queen of Great Britain and Ireland. 

11 Antrim, Armagh, Cavan, Donegal, Down, Fermanagh, Londonderry, 
Monaghan, Tyrone. 

IT Carlow, Dublin, Kildare, Kilkenny, King's, Longford, Louth, Meath, 
Queen's, Westmeath, Wexford, Wicklow. 

** Clare, Cork, Kerry, Limerick, Tipperary, Waterford. 

■j-f- Galway, Leitrim, Mayo, Roscommon, Sligo. 



264 EUROPE. 

Q. Where is the Isle of Man ? 

A. It is in the Irish Sea, nearly equi-distant from England, Scot- 
land, Ireland, and Wales. (M. A.) 

The Isle of Man (Anc, Mona, Monapia, or Monsedia) is an island 
belonging to the United Kingdom, in the Irish Sea, between lat. 54° 4' and 
54° 27' N., and long. 4° 17' and 4° 34' W. ; its N. E. extremity (the point 
of Ayre) being 17 ms. from Burrow-head, in Wigtownshire; its E. coast 
34 ms. from St. Bee's head, in Cumberland, and the town of Peel, on its W. 
side, 30 ms. from Ballyquintin Point, in Ireland : greatest length, 35 ms. ; 
greatest breadth, about 13 ms. Area, 280 sq. ms., exclusive of the Calf of 
Man, a small disjointed fragment of the island, at its S. extremity. Pop., 
in 1841, 47,000. 

Q. Where is the Isle of Anglesea ? 

A. It is in the Irish Sea, at the N. W. extremity of Wales, from 
which it is separated by the Menai Strait. (M. A.) 

Anglesea, or Anglesey (the Mona of Tacitus), is an island and county 
of N. Wales, in the Irish Sea, separated from the mainland of Britain by 
a narrow strait, varying in width from 200 yards to 2 ms. It is of a triangular 
form, extending, Holyhead included, about 27 ms. from E. to W., by about 
20 from N. to S. ; area, 173,440 acres; surface generally undulating; cli- 
mate temperate, but liable to fogs ; there is in most parts a great deficiency 
of wood, and it has generally a bare, uninviting aspect. The pop., which in 
1776 amounted to 19,780, had increased in 1841 to 50,000. 

Q. Where are the Scilly Islands ? 

A. They are a group of islands lying at the point of junction, 
as it were, of the English and St. George's Channels, about 30 
ms. W. by S. from Land's End, the most W. point of England. 
(M. A.) 

The Scillt Islands belong to England, and are supposed by some to be 
the Cassiterides, or tin islands, of the ancients. There are supposed to be, 
in all, about 150 islands and rocks, but there are only about half a dozen of 
any importance. St. Mary's, the largest, is said to contain about 1640 
acres ; the entire area of the group, as given in the population returns, is 
only 5570 acres. Pop., about 2500. From their situation, they necessa- 
rily have a mild, equable temperature; and though fogs be common, the 
islands are very healthy. 

Q. Where are the Balearic Isles ? 

A. They are situated in the Mediterranean Sea, off the E. 
coast of Spain. (M. A.) 

The Balearic Islands (Anc. Baleares) consist of Majorca, Minorca, 
and Ivica, besides the two very small ones of Formentera and Cabrera. 
These islands belong to Spain, and constitute a separate province. 

Q. Where is the Island of Majorca ? 

A. It is the largest of the Balearic Islands in the Mediterranean 
Sea, belonging to Spain, from the E. coast of which it is 110 ms. 
distant. (M. A.) 

Majorca (Span. Mallorca) lies between 39° 15' and 40° N. Iat., and 2° 
23' and 3° 32' E. long. Greatest length, 48 ms. ; greatest breadth, 42 ms. ; 



EUROPE. 265 

estimated area, 1340 sq. ms. Pop., 182,000. Its shape is that of an irregu- 
lar, four-sided figure, the angles of which are formed W. by cape Tramon- 
tana, N. by cape Formenton, E. by cape Peri, and S. by cape Salinos. Pal- 
ma, the chief town, is in lat. 39° 38' N., long. 2° 45' E. 

Q. Where is the Island of Minorca ? 

A. Minorca (Anc. Balearis Minor) is the second in size of the 
Balearic Islands, belonging to Spain, in the Mediterranean, off the 
E. coast of Spain, from which it is distant about 140 ms. (M. A.) 

Minorca is intersected by the 40th parallel of N. lat., and the 4th meri- 
dian of E. long. ; Mahon, its cap., being in lat. 39° 51' 10" N., long. 4° 18' 
7" E. ; it is of an oblong shape, extending from W. N. W. to E. S. E., but 
somewhat concave on its S. side. Length 32 ms. ; average breadth, 9 ms. ; 
area about 290 sq. ms. Pop. 44,000. 

Q. Where is the Island of Ivica ? 

A. It is in the Mediterranean Sea, forming one of the Balearic 
group belonging to Spain, situated about 42 ms. S. W. of Majorca. 
(M. A.) 

Ivica, Iviza or Ibiza (Anc. Ebusus), is situated between 38° 50' and 39° 
7' N. lat., and 1° 22' and 1° 46' E. long., about 50 ms. E. by N. of Cape 
Nao in Valencia, Spain ; the cap., on its S. W. side, being in lat. 38° 53' 
16" N., long. 1° 26' 32" E. It is of an irregular five-sided figure ; its length 
from N. E. to S.W. being 27 ms., and its average breadth 15 ms- Area, 
about 400 sq. ms. Pop., 22,000. The capital, Iviza, is fortified, and has a 
good harbour. 

Q. Where is the Island of Corsica ? 

A. It is in the Mediterranean Sea, between Sardinia and the 
Genoese coast. On the N. is the Gulf of Genoa ; E. the Tuscan 
Sea ; S. the Strait of Bonifacio, separating it from Sardinia ; and 
to the W. it is opposite the coasts of France and Spain. (M. A.) 

Corsica (Anc. Cyrnos, and also Corsi, whence its name) is a large island 
of the Mediterranean, belonging to France, of which it forms a department. 
Its S. extremity is 10 ms. N. of the island of Sardinia, from which it is sepa- 
rated by the Strait of Bonifacio. Piombino, about 50 ms. distant, is the nearest 
town in Italy, and Antibes, 120 ms. N. W., the nearest point in France. 
Shape, somewhat oval, with a projecting appendage at the N. E. extremity $ 
Area, about 3380 sq. ms. Pop. 208,000. Ajaccio is the capital. 

Corsica was anciently noted for its extensive woosd and its bitter honey ; 
the bees derived the latter from the yew trees, with which the island abounded. 
The inhabitants were remarkable for their longevity, which was supposed to 
be owing to their using this bitter honey as a part of their food. 

Q. Where is the Island of Sardinia ? 

A. It is an island of S. Europe, and, next to Sicily, which it 
nearly equals in size, the largest in the Mediterranean, being sepa- 
rated from Corsica on the N. by the Strait of Bonifacio. (M. A.) 

Sardinia (Ital. Sardegna, Fr. Sardaigne, Anc. Ichnusa, from its resem- 
blance to the print of a foot, post Sardinia). It lies S.W. from the central 
part of Italy ; the mouth of the Tiber, the nearest point of the peninsula, is 



266 EUROPE. 

140 ms. distant ; the coast of Africa is 110 ms., and the head of the Gulf of 
Genoa 230 ms. It is of an oblong form ; length, N. and S., 170 ms. ; great- 
est breadth, 90 ms. Area, with its dependent islands, 10,534 sq. ms. Pop., 
in 1838, 524,633. Cagliari is the capital. [See Key, p. 240.] 

In ancient times, Sardinia was highly fruitful, and was regarded as one of 
the granaries of Rome ; but the climate, except among the mountains, was 
considered so unhealthy, that the Romans seldom kept a standing force there 
for any length of time. A species of wild parsley grew there, which, if 
eaten, contracted, it is said, the nerves of the face, producing involuntary and 
painful fits of laughter, and often causing death ; hence the expression Sar- 
donicus risus, or Sardonic grin, for a horrible or hideous laugh. 

Q. Where is the Island of Elba ? 

A. It is in the Mediterranean Sea, between the coast of Tus- 
cany and the Island of Sardinia. (M. A.) 

Elba (the (Ethalia of the Greeks, and the Iloa or llva of the Etruscans 
and Romans) is an Island of the Mediterranean, or rather of the Tyrrhene 
Sea, belonging to Tuscany, from which it is separated by the strait of Piom- 
bino, 7 or 8 ms. across, being the largest and most important of those in the 
possession of the grand duchy ; between lat. 42° 43' and 42° 53' N., and 
long. 10° 5' and 10° 25' E. Shape irregular, but not very unlike that of 
the letter T, having the upper end towards the E. Length, E. to W., 16 
ms. ; breadth varying from 2 to 12 ms. ; circumference about 68 ms. ; area, 
150 sq. ms. Pop. in 1835, 16,865. 

Q. Where are the Lipari Islands ? 

A. They consist of a group of Islands in that part of the 
Mediterranean called the Tyrrhenian Sea, off the N. coast of 
Sicily. (M. A.) 

The Ltpari Islands (Anc. Moliae Insulas) are a dependency of Sicily, 
from the N. coast, of which they are from 10 to 40 ms. distant, forming a 
part of the intendency of Messina, between lat. 38° 20' and 38° 55' N., 
and long. 14° 15' and 15° 15' E. Aggregate pop. of the group estimated 
at about 22,000, of whom about 12,500 belong to the town of Lipari. 
There are seven principal Islands, Lipari, Vulcano, Stromboli, Salini, Panaria, 
Pelicudi, and Alicudi 5 and a number of adjacent islets and rocks. 

These Islands were called Hephasstiades by the Greeks, and Vulcanise by 
the Romans, from their emitting smoke and flames ; such places being sup- 
posed to be either inhabited by, or under the immediate protection of Vulcan. 
Vulcano, however, was more especially sacred to the god of fire, and is said 
by Virgil to be " Vulcani domus, et Vulcania nomine tellus." They were 
also frequently called Molian Isles, from ^Eolius, one of their sovereigns. 
This prince having learned, according to Pliny, to foretell, from observations 
made on the smoke of the volcanoes, the coming changes of the winds, was 
said by the poets to have the latter under his command. 

Q. Where is the Island of Sicily ? 

A. It is in the Mediterranean Sea, separated from the S. ex- 
tremity of Italy by the narrow strait of Messina, only 2 ms. across, 
and from Cape Bon in Africa by a channel 85 ms. in width. 
(M. A.) 



EUROPE. 267 

Sicily (Anc. Sicilid), the largest, finest, most important, most fruitful, 
and most celebrated Island of the Mediterranean, constituting that portion 
of the kingdom of Naples entitled the Dominii al di la di Faro, lies be- 
tween lat. 36° 38' and 38° 18' N., and long. 13° 20' and 15° 40' E. It is 
of a triangular shape, and was hence, in antiquity, sometimes called Tri- 
ginta, but more commonly Trinacria, from its terminating in three pro- 
montories of Boeo. (Anc. Lilybaeum), Passaro (Anc. Pachynam), and 
Faro (Anc. Pehruni). It seems to have derived its usual name of Sicilia 
from the Sicani or Siculi, its earliest inhabitants. Length, 180 ms. ; greatest 
breadth, measuring from the N. E. to the S. E. angle of the Island, 120 ms. 
Area, estimated at 9900 sq. ms. Pop. in 1836, above 2,000,000. 

Q. Where is the Island of Malta ? 

£.. It is in the Mediterranean Sea belonging to Great Britain, 
60 ms. S. S. W. of Cape Passaro, in Sicily, and 200 ms. N. of 
Tripoli, in Africa. Gozzo and Comino (the latter lies between 
Gozzo and Malta) are dependencies of Malta. 

Malta (Anc. Melita) was known to the Phoenicians at a very remote 
period, and to the Greeks as early as the days of Homer. Here the apostle 
Paul was shipwrecked, on his voyage from Palestine to Rome. It often 
changed masters, both in ancient times and during the middle ages. More 
recently, it was renowned as the residence of the Knights of St. John of Jeru- 
salem, on whom it was conferred by the emperor Charles V. After holding 
it nearly three centuries, it was captured from them by Bonaparte, on his 
voyage to Egypt, in 1798 ; two years afterwards, the British took it, and 
have retained it ever since. 

Q. Where are the Ionian Isles ? 

Ji. They are a collection of seven principal and several smallei 
islands in the Mediterranean Sea, on the W. and S. coasts of 
Greece. (M. A.) 

The Ionian Islands are situated between the 36th and 40th parallels of 
N. lat., and between the 19th and 23d degs. of E. long., consisting of the 
seven principal islands of Corfu, Paxo, Santa Maura, Cephalonia, Ithaca or 
Theaki, Zante, and Cerigo, forming what is termed the Ionian Republic, or 
the Republic of Seven Islands. This republic is under the protection of Great 
Britain, who granted a constitution in 1817. The Lord High Commissioner, 
who is appointed by the British government, commands the forces, convenes 
the legislature, appoints the governors of the different islands, &c. Corfu 
is the seat of government. 

In ancient times, these islands formed small independent states, until they 
were conquered by Alexander the Great. Afterwards, they fell under the 
power of Rome. Since that period, they have often changed masters. The 
Neapolitans, and subsequently the Venetians, who held them for more than 
four centuries, were in possession. More recently, the Russians, and then 
the French, held them. Now they are virtually a part of the British empire. 

Q. Where is the Island of Corfu ? 

A. It is in the Mediterranean Sea, off the S. part of the coast of 
Albania,* from which it is separated by a narrow channel. (M. A.) 

* Albania is a large province of European Turkey, bounded N. by Dal- 
matia and Servia, E. by Macedon and Thessaly, S. by Livadia, and W. by 



'268 EUROPE. 

CoiIfu (Anc. Corey rd) is an island in the Mediterranean, the seat of 
government, and most important, though not the largest of the Ionian islands. 
It lies between lat. 39° 20' and 39° 50' N., and long. 19° 35' and 20° 6' 
E. ; off the S. part of the coast of Albania, from which it is separated by a 
channel only 3-5ths of a m. wide at its N. extremity, 6 ms. at its S. extre- 
mity, and 15 ms. in the centre. The shape of Corfu is elongated ; the island 
describes a curve, the convexity of which is towards the W. ; length, N.W. 
to S. E., 41 ms. ; breadth greatest in the N., where it is 20 ms. ; but it gra- 
dually tapers towards its S. extremity. Area, 227 sq. ms. Pop. (1833) 
60,890. 

Q. Where is the island of Cephalonia ? 

A. It is in the Mediterranean Sea, near the W. coast of Greece. 
(M. A.) 

Cephalonia (Anc. Cephallenia) is the largest island of those composing 
the Ionian Republic, near the W. coast of Greece, opposite the Gulf of Pa- 
tras; between lat. 38° 3' and 38° 29' N., and long. 20° 21' and 20° 49' E.; 
8 ms. N. of Zante, 5 ms, S. of Santa Maura, and 64 ms. S. S. E. of Corfu. 
Length, N. N.W. to S. S.E., 32 ms. ; breadth very unequal. Area, 348 
sq. ms. Pop. (1833) 56,450. 

Q. Where is the Island of Zante ? 

A. It is in the Mediterranean Sea, off the W. coast of the pe- 
ninsula of Mbrea. (M. A.) 

Zante (Anc. Zacynthus) is one of the Ionian islands, of which it is the 
third in point of magnitude and importance, about 10 ms. off the W. coast 
ofrthe Morea, its capital being in lat. 37° 47' 17" N., long. 20° 54' 32" E. 
It is of a somewhat oblong shape ; greatest length N. W. to S. E., about 20 
ms. ; greatest breadth, 10 ms. Area estimated at 156 sq. ms. Pop. in 
1836, 35,348. 

Q. Where is the Island of Cerigo ? 

A. It is in the Mediterranean Sea, the most southerly of the 
seven principal Ionian islands, situated at a considerable distance 
from the others, near the S. extremity of the peninsula of the 
Morea. (M. A.) 

Cerigo (Anc. Cythera) lies between lat. 36° 7' and 36° 23' N., and long. 
22° 52' 30" and 23° 7' 30" E., 25 ms. E. of Cape Matapan. Length, N. 
to S., 20 ms. ; greatest breadth, 12 ms. Area, 116 sq. ms. Pop. (1833), 
8760. 

Q. Where is the Island of Candia ? 

A. It is in the Mediterranean Sea, situated S. E. of the Morea, 
belonging to the Grecian Archipelago, of which it forms the S. 
boundary. (M. A.) 

Candia (Anc. Crete or Creta) is a large and celebrated island of the 
Mediterranean, lying between 34° 57' and 35° 41' N. lat., and 23° 29' and 
26° 20' E. long., its N.W. extremity being 80 ms. S. E. of Cape Matapan, 
in Greece, and its N. W. termination 1 10 ms. S. W. of the nearest point of 
Asia Minor. It is long and narrow, its length from E. to W. being about 

the Gulf of Venice, along with that part of the Mediterranean called the 
Ionian Sea. It is at present included in the Turkish government of Rumelia. 



EUROPE. 269 

160 ms., with a breadth varying from 6 to nearly 50 ms., but averaging 
about 20 ms. Area, 3200 sq. ms. Pop., in 1839, 158,000 ; of whom, 100,000 
are native Greeks, 44,000 Turks, and the remainder Hellenes, Jews, and 
other foreigners, Arab and Albanian troops, and about 2000 black slaves. 

Q. Where is the Island of Milo ? 

A. It is in the Grecian Archipelago (iEgean Sea), about 70 
ms. E. of the Morea. (M. A.) 

Milo (Anc. Melos) is an island of the Archipelago, belonging to Greece, 
in the group of the central Cyclades, the summit of Mount St. Elias ; in its 
S. W. angle, 2036 ft. above the sea, being in Iat. 36° 40' 28" N., long. 24° 
23' 14" E. Pop., 2500. This island is said by Pliny to be circular {Om- 
nium rotundissima, lib. iv., cap. 12), but it is really of an oblong shape, 
being about 13 ms. in length from E. to W., and, where broadest, about 7 
ms. across : it is indented on its N. side by a spacious bay, stretching N. W. 
and S. E. about 6 ms., which has deep water throughout, and forms one of 
the best asylums for shipping in the Levant. 

Q. Where is the Island of Naxio ? 

Jl. Naxio, or Naxia, (Anc. Naxos,) is in the Grecian Archipe- 
lago, E. of the Morea, the largest of the group called the Cyclades, 
intersected by the 37th parallel of N. Iat., and the meridian of 25° 
30' E. long. (M. A.) 

Naxio is about 5 ms. E. of Paros, its capital of the same name being in 
Iat. 37° 7' N., long. 25° 26' E. Shape oval ; circuit, about 48 ms. Area, 
106 sq. ms. Pop,, 18,000. 

Q. Where is the Island of Negropont ? 

A. It is in the Grecian Archipelago, lying close to the E. coast 
of independent Greece, from which it is separated by a channel 
(Anc. Euripus) varying from 40 yards to about 14 ms. in breadth. 
(M. A.) 

Negropoxt, or Egkipo (Anc. Eubaea), is a long, straggling Island, 
between Iat. 37° 57' and 39° 4' N., and long. 22° 57' and 24° 36' E. ; and 
forming, with the Sporades, a separate monarchy of its own name. Length, 
110 ms. ; breadth from 5 to 26 ms. ; the widest part being measured from 
Chalcis to C. Kili. Area, 1480 sq. ms. Pop., in 1836, 60,000. Eubaea 
is very similar in its mountainous character and geological constitution to 
the neighbouring continent, from which it seems to have been separated by 
some sudden convulsion of nature. 

Q. Where is the Island of Lemnos ? 

A. It is in the N. part of the Grecian Archipelago (iEgean 
Sea), 43 ms. S. E. of the promontory of Mount Athos, in Turkey, 
and about the same distance W. of the Strait of the Dardanelles 
(Hellespont.) (M.A.) 

Lemnos (Turk. Stalimene) is an Island of the Grecian Archipelago, 
belonging to the dominion of the Porte, intersected by the parallel of 39° 50 / 
N. Iat., and the meridian of 25° 10' E. long. Area about 150 sq. ms. 
Pop. said to amount to 12,000, chiefly Greeks. It is of an irregular quadri- 
lateral shape, being nearly divided into two peninsulas, by two deep bays or 
23* 



:270 europe. 

indentations of the sea, Port Paradise on its N. and Port St. Antonio on its 
S. side. 

Q. Where is the Island of Aland ? 

A. It is in the Baltic Sea, situated near the point of meeting of 
the Gulfs of Bothnia and Finland, intersected by the parallel of 
60° 20' N. lat., and the 20th meridian of E. long.* It is the chief 
island of a group consisting of many islets and rocks. (M. A.) 

It is 17 ms. long and 16 ms. broad, and contains about 9000 inhabitants. 

The Islands of Alaxd* are a group at the entrance of the Gulf of Both- 
nia, between 59° 50' and 60° 32' N. lat., and 19° 10' and 21° 7' E. long., 
consisting of more than 80 inhabited and upwards of 200 uninhabited islets 
and rocks (Sharon), occupying an area of about 470 sq. ms., and divided 
into three oblong clusters by the Straits of Delet and Lappviisi. The Baltic 
bounds them to the S. ; on the W. the strait of Alandshaf separates them 
from Sweden, its width being about 24 ms. ; and on the E. the straits of 
Wattuskiftet, which are scarcely 2 ms. broad where they are narrowest, and 
about 14 ms. where they are broadest, interpose between them and the Fin- 
land shore. Pop. of the group, 14,000, of Swedish extraction. Aland, the 
chief island, is divided by a narrow strait from Ekeroe, the westernmost 
Island, which has a telegraph. On the E. coast of Aland is the old castle 
of Castleholm, now in ruins. Kumlinge has a pop. of 3000. These 
Islands were wrested by Russia from Sweden in 1809 ; and give the former 
a position from which they may easily made a descent on the Swedish coast. 

Q. Where is the Island of Dago ? 

Ji. It is in the Baltic Sea, near the coast of Livonia,t 7 ms. 
N. of the Isle of Oesel, near the entrance to the Gulf of Finland. 
(M. A.) 

This Island is 2§ ms. in circumference, and has two castles, called Dager- 
wort and Paden. Lat. 58° 44' N., long. 22° 56' E. 

Q. Where is the Island of Oesel ? 

A. It is in the Baltic Sea, extending across the mouth of the 
Gulf of Riga, intersected by the parallel of 58° 30' N. lat., and 
by the 22d and 23d meridian of E. long. (M. A.) 

Oesel is an Island of the Baltic, belonging to Russia, and included in 
the government of Livonia or Riga, principally between lat. 58° and 58° 40' 
N., and long. 21° 40' and 23° E. Length about 60 ms. ; greatest breadth 
near 30 ms. Area, estimated at 1150 sq. ms. Pop., including the inhabit- 
ants of the adjacent Islands of Moen and Runoe, about 35,000, all Esthonians 
except some German landed proprietors, and a few Swedes. 

* These Islands, with the exception of Aland, are so small that they could 
not be shown except on a map of a scale much greater than would be 
suitable for a school atlas. In the Map of Europe, (M. A.) therefore, the 
chief island only is represented, and indicates sufficiently the general posi- 
tion of the group. 

\ Livonia is a government in the W. part of European Russia, between 
the Gulf of Livonia (this gulf is a portion of the Baltic, situated S. of the 
Gulf of Finland) and Lake Peipus. Capital, Riga. 



EUROPE. 271 

Q. Where is the Island of Gothland ? 

A. It is in the Baltic Sea, lying S. W. of Oesel, distant 60 ms. 
from the continent of Sweden. (M. A.) 

Gothland, or more properly, Gottland, (i. e. " good land,") is an Island 
in the Baltic, belonging to Sweden, in the Liin or government of the same 
name, lying between lat. 56° 55' and 58° N., and between long. 18° 10' and 19° 
13' E. It is near 80 ins. in length ; its greatest breadth is above 30 ms. The 
area is computed at 1 1 18 sq. ms. The pop. in 1833 was estimated at 39,800. 

Q. Where is the Island of Oland, or Oeland? 

A. It is in the Baltic Sea, and belongs to Sweden, from which 
it lies S. E., separated from it by a narrow channel. (M. A.) 

Oland is a long and narrow island, lying E. of and separated from the 
province of Calmar by the narrow strait of that name. It lies between 56° 
IV and 57° 22' N. lat., and 16° 20' and 17° 12' E. long.; it is about 80 
ms. in length, and from 3 to 11 in width ; area estimated at 400 sq. ms. 
Pop. 31,000. Borgholm, on the W. coast, is the chief town. 

Q. Where is the Island of Rugen ? 

A. It is in the S. W. part of the Baltic Sea, belonging to Prussia, 
opposite to Stralsund, and separated from Pomerania by a strait 
varying from If to 2 ms. in width. (M. A.) \_See Map No. 20.] 

Rugen is an Island in the Baltic, forming a part of the Prussian province 
of Pomerania, intersected by the parallel of 54° 30' N. lat., and the meridian 
of 13o 30' E. long. It is of an exceedingly irregular shape, being deeply 
indented by bays and arms of the sea. Area, 361 sq. ms. Pop. about 
30,000. Bergen, the capital, situated in the centre of the Island, has 2700 
inhabitants. • After being long in possession of Sweden, Rugen became part 
of the Prussian dominions in 1815. 

Q. Where is the Island of Zealand ? 

A. It is situated at the entrance of the Baltic Sea, being sepa- 
rated from Sweden by the Sound, and from Funen and Langeland 
by the Great Belt. (M. A.) [See Map No. 20.] 

Zealand is the largest and most important of the Danish Islands, being 
that on which Copenhagen is situated. It lies between 54° 58' and 56° 10' 
N. lat., and 10° 50' and 12° 35' E. long. Length, 80 ms. ; greatest breadth 
about 65 ms. Its area may be estimated at 2830 sq. ms. Pop., in 1834, 
including that of the small and thinly peopled Islands of Moen and Samsoe, 
439,962. 

Q. Where is the Island of Funen ? 

A. It is in the Danish Archipelago, the next in size after Zea- 
land, lying between it and continental Denmark ; separated from 
the former by the Great, and from the latter by the Little Belt. 

Funen, or Fyen, is a fertile island in the Baltic Sea, belonging to Den- 
mark, situated between 55° 2' and 55° 40' N. lat., and 9° 40' and 10° 51' 
E. long. Length, N. E. to S.W., 50 ms. ; its greatest breadth near 40 ms. 
Area, 1187 sq. ms. Pop. in 1834, 151,600. Odensee is the capital. Funen, 
together with the islands of Langeland, Taasing, &c, forms a province of 
Denmark. 



272 EUROPE. 

MOUNTAINS. 

Q. Where are the Dofrafield Mts. ? 

A. They divide, for the most part, Sweden and Norway, and 
extend from about 63° N. lat. and 12° E. long, to the N. Cape, in 
the general direction of N. N. E. and S.S.W. (M. A.) 

This chain is also called the Scandinavian Alps, and the Dovrefield, and 
the Doffrine Mountains. 

Q. Where are the Ural Mts. ? 

A. The Ural, or Oural Mts. are an extensive chain, extending, 
including its subsidiary portions, nearly under the same meridian 
from the N. border of the Sea of Aral to the shores of the Arctic 
Ocean, or from about the 51st to about the 69th deg. of N. lat. It 
forms, during the greater part of its course, the boundary between 
Europe and Asia. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Pyrenees Mts. ? 

A. They are a lofty chain of mts. in the S. W. part of Europe, 
which extends from the Mediterranean to the Bay of Biscay, con- 
stituting a natural barrier between France and Spain, between lat. 
42° 10' and 43° 20' N., and long. 3° 20' E. and 2° W. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Cevennes Mts. ? 

A. They are a chain of mts. in the S. of France, commencing 
near the E. end of the Pyrenees, and running in a general direc- 
tion N. through the departments of Lozere, Gard, Upper Loire, 
and Ardeche, form the dividing ridge between the valleys of the 
Rhone and Loire rivers. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Auvergne Mts. ? 

A. They are in the S. central part of France : they branch from 
the Cevennes, and running in a general direction N.W., form the 
dividing ridge between the valleys of the Loire and the Garonne 
rivers. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Cantabrian Mts.? 

A. They run W. along the whole N. coast of Spain from the 
Pyrenees to Cape Finisterre, the most western point of Spain. 

(A. a.) ; f p 

Q. Where is the Sierra Morena range ? 

A. In the S. part of Spain ; they separate the waters of the 
Guadalquivir from those of the Guadiana, and run in a W. S. W. 
direction, ending near the S. E. corner of Portugal. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Sierra Nevada range ? 

A. In the S. part of Spain ; they separate the waters of the 
Guadalquivir from those which flow into the Mediterranean Sea, 
and run in a W. S.W. direction, ending in the rock of Gibraltar, 
near the Strait of that name. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Alps ? 

A. They begin on the side of France between the territory of 
Genoa and the country of Nice, pass into Switzerland, cross that 



europe. 27;> 

country and Tyrol, separating for the most part Italy from France, 
Switzerland and Germany, and terminate, after many windings, 
near the Gulf of Trieste, on the Gulf of Venice. Their general 
form resembles that of a crescent. The highest summit is Mont 
Blanc. (M. A.) 

The Alps constitute one of the most extensive, and, at the same time, the 
highest mountain system of Europe. They stretch in a vast curve, nearly 
semicircular, from about 7° 30' E. long., where they unite with the Apen- 
nines, to the E. extremity of the Gulf of Venice near Fiume, in about 14° 
30' E. long. ; an extent of 700 ms. From a point near the head waters of 
the Adije and the Drave, a branch of these mountains, the Norci and Styrian 
Alps, extends N. by E. towards the Danube, joining, it is said, the Carpa- 
thian Mountains, which traverse the E. parts of the Austrian empire. The 
Alps are distinguished in different quarters by various local names, for which 
see Map, No. 20, M. A. 

The Alps are closely united to several other mountain ranges ; on the W. 
to the Apennines, which traverse Italy in its whole length ; on the S. E. to 
the Balkan, which covers Turkey and Greece with its numerous ramifications ; 
and on the E. to the Carpathians. 

Q. Where are the Apennines ? 

A. They skirt the Gulf of Genoa, and run in a S. E. direction 
to the S. extremity of Italy. 

Or, to describe them more minutely : this chain, beginning near 
the meridian of 7° 30' E. long., in the territory of Genoa, traverses 
Italy in its whole length. When near the end of its course, it divides 
into two branches, one of which runs S. E. towards the Capo di 
Leuca, while the other advances S. to the Strait of Messina.* 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Carpathian Mts. ? 

A. They are a chain which bounds Hungary on the N.W., N., 
and N. E., and Transylvania on the N. E., E., and S. E.t 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Balkan Mts. ? 

Ji. They are a chain of mts. in European Turkey, between 
Bulgaria and Rumelia, which commences near the Adriatic, 
(Gulf of Venice,) and terminates at the Black Sea. (M. A.) 

Or, to be more minute. — This chain enters Turkey at its N.W. 
corner, and runs E. in an irregular line, to Cape Emineh on the 
Black Sea. It throws off in its progress two considerable branches 
towards the N., one dividing Bosnia from Servia, and the other, 
Servi'a from Bulgaria ; and two towards the S., one dividing Alba- 
nia from Rumelia, and the other, called the Rhodope Mts., cross- 
ing Rumelia to the shores of the Grecian Archipelago. 

* At its W. extremity, this range, being connected with the Alps, may 
be considered as an extensive offset of that great system. 

\ Hungary and Transylvania form part of the Austrian empire, 



274 NORWAY. 

Q. Tell the length of the range, and the heights of those mts. 
that have figures attached to them. 

A. The Dofrafield, or Dovrefield Mts. are 1000 ms. long, and 
7600 ft. high ; Ural Mts., 1400 ms. long, 4000 ft. high ; Pyrenees, 
260 ms. long, 10,000 ft. high : the Alps, 700 ms. long ; Apennines, 
700 ms. long, and from 8000 to 11,000 ft. high; Carpathians, 
550 ms. long, 8600 ft. high ; Balkan, 700 ms. long. (M. A.) 

Q. What race of people are in the northern part of Russia ? 

A. Samoyedes. 

Q. What three races are partly in Europe, and partly in Asia ? 

A. Baschkirs, Kalmucks, and Cossacks. 

DISTANCES. 

Q. How many miles is it from Iceland to Norway ? 

A. 850 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From Norway to Greenland ? 

A. 1800 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From Scotland to Labrador ? 

A. 2100 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From Ireland to Labrador ? 

A. 1950 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From England to Newfoundland ? 

A. 2200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From France to Canada ? 

A. 2800 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From France to Nova Scotia ? 

A. 3000 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From Oporto, in Portugal, to New York ? 

A. 3500 ms. (M. A.) 



NORWAY. 

Page 219. — Lesson 151. — Map No. 18. 

Q. What bounds Norway on the north ? 

A. Arctic Ocean. 

Q. South? 

A. Skager Rack. 

Q. East ? 

A. Sweden. 

Q. West? 

A. Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. What mountains on the east ? 

A. Dofrafield. 

Q. How long and high are they ? 

A. 1000 ms. long, and 7600 ft. high. 

Q. What islands north of the Arctic Circle ? 

A. LofToden. 



SWEDEN. 275 

Q. Which is the chief river ? 

A. Glommen. 

Q. How long is it ? 

A. 250 ms. (M.A.) 

Q. What is the population of Bergen ? 

A. 22,000. (M.A.) 

Q. Christiania? 

A. 21,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Drontheim? 

A. 10,000. (M.A.) 

Q. Kongsberg ? 

A. 8000. (M. A.) 

Q. Which extends farthest north, Norway or Sweden ? 

A. Norway. 

For a further description, see Key, page 224. 



SWEDEN. 
Page 221.— Lesson 152.~Map No. 18. 

Q. What bounds Sweden on the north and west ? 

A. Dofrafield xMts. 

Q. East? 

A. Gulf of Bothnia, and Baltic Sea. 

Q. South? 

A. Baltic Sea. 

Q. Which are the principal rivers of Sweden ? 

A. Tornea, Kalix, Lulea, Skelleftea, Indai, Luisna, Dal, and 
Clara. 

Q. Tell the length of each of these. 

A. Tornea is 250 ms. long ; Kalix, 250 ; Lulea, 200 ; Skel- 
leftea, 200; Indal, 150; Luisna, 200; Dal, 300; Clara, 250. 
(M. A.) 

Q. The chief lakes ? 

A. Malar, Wener, and Wetter. 

Q. How long are the last two ? 

A. Wener is 80 ms. long ; Wetter, 70. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Stockholm ? 

A. 83,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Gottenburg? 

A. 29,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Gene? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Carlscrona? 

A. 12,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Calmar? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 



270 RUSSIA IN EUROPE. 

Q. Upsal? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. Fahlun? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 225. 



RUSSIA IN EUROPE. 
Page 226.— Lesson 154.— -Map No. 18. 

ty. What bounds Russia on the north ? 

A. Arctic Ocean. 

Q. What seas on the south ? 

A. Black, and Azov. 

Q. What sea and gulf on the west ? 

A. Baltic Sea, and Gulf of Bothnia. 

Q. What mountains on the east? 

A. Ural. 

Q. What rivers form the south-east boundary ? 

A. Volga and Don. 

Q. What rivers flow into the White Sea ? 

A. Mezene, Dwina, and Onega. 

Q. Into the Gulf of Riga? 

A. Dun a. 

Q. The Gulf of Dantzic? 

A. Vistula. 

Q. The Sea of Azov ? 

A. Don. 

Q. The Black Sea? 

A. Dnieper, Bog, and Dniester. 

Q. Tell the length of all these rivers. 

A. Volga is 2000 ms. long; Don, 1000; Mezene, 400; 
Dwina, 700 ; Onega, 300 ; Duna, 350 ; Vistula, 550 ; Dnieper, 
1000; Bog, 400; Dniester, 500. (M. A.) 

Q. Which are the three principal lakes? 

A. Onega, Ladoga, and Peipus. 

Q. How long is each ? 

A. Onega is 150 ms. long ; Ladoga, 130 ; Peipus, 90. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of St. Petersburg ? 

A. 470,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Moscow? 

A. 350,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Kazan? 

A. 57,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cronstadt? 

A. 45,000. (M. A.) 



(M. 


A.) 


(M. 


A.) 


(M. 


A.) 


(M. 


A.) 



RUSSIA IN EUROPE. 277 

Q. Odessa? 

A. 69,000. 

q. Riga? 

A. 67,000. 

Q. Wilna? 

A. 54,000. 

Q. Orel? 

A. 30,000. 

Q. Warsaw? 

A. 141,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cracow ? 

A. 37,000. (M. A.) 

<?. Lublin? 

A. 8000. (M. A.) 

Q. On what gulf are St. Petersburg, Cronstadt, and Revel? 

A. Gulf of Finland. 

Q. How long is it ? 

^. 280 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. How long is the Gulf of Bothnia ? 

A, 430 ms. (M. A.) 

#. The White Sea? 

A. 400 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. The Black Sea? 

A. 760 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. On what river is Moscow ?* 

A. It is on the River Moskva. 

Q. The other chief cities ? 

A, Rigat is on the River Duna : Moghilev,^ on the Dnieper ; 
Cherson,§ on the Dnieper; Niznei Novgorod, on the Volga; 
Archangel,|| on the Dwina ; Sinbirsk,^[ on the Volga. 

* Moscow (Russ. Moskva) is a large city of European Russia, long the 
residence of the sovereigns, and still one of the capitals of the empire, on 
the navigable R. Moskva, 400 ms. S.E. of St. Petersburg, lat. 55° 45' N., 
long. 37° 33' E. 

f Riga is an important city and river port of European Russia, cap. of 
Livonia, on the Duna, about 9 ms. from its embouchure, in the Gulf of 
Riga, lat. 56° 57' N., long. 24° E. 

* Moghilev is a town of European Russia, on the Dnieper, 85 ms. S. W. 
of Smolensk, and 110 ms. E. by S. of Minsk, lat. 53° 53' N., long. 30° 
24' E. 

§ Cherson is on an eminence on the right bank of the Dnieper, about 60 
ms. above Kinbourn Fort, at the entrance to the estuary of that river, lat. 
46° 37' N., long. 32° 38' E. 

|| Archangel is the principal city and port of trade in the N. of Russia, 
on the right bank of the Dwina, about 34 ms. above where it falls into the 
White Sea, lat. 64° 32' N., long. 40° 33' E. 

*| Sinbirsk is on the Volga, on an isthmus between it and the Sviaga, 
lat. 54° 18' N., long. 48° 22' E. 
24 



2?8 DENMARK. 

Q. When were the battles of Narva, Poltava, and Borodino 
fought ? 

A. Narva in 1700 ; Poltava in 1709 ; Borodino in 1812. 
For a further description, see Key, page 225. 



DENMARK. 

Page 229. — Lesson 156. — Map No. 18. 

Q. What bounds Denmark on the north ? 

A. Skager Rack. 

Q. South? 

A. Hanover. 

Q. East? 

A. Cattegat. 

Q. West? 

A. North Sea. 

Q. What peninsula forms the chief part of Denmark ? 

A. JutJand. 

Q. What two islands lie east of Jutland ? 

A. Funen and Zealand. 

Q. On what island is Copenhagen ? 

A. Zealand. 

Q. What is the population of Copenhagen ? 

A. 119,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Flensburg ? 

A. 16,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Sleswick? 

A. 8000. (M. A.) 

Q. Elsineur? 

A. 8000. (M. A.) 

Q. In what direction from Denmark are the Faroe Isles ? 

A. North-west. 

Q. Iceland ? 

A. North-west. 

Q. How far from Jutland to Scotland ? 

A. About 450 ms. 

Q. Which are the principal of the Faroe Isles ? 

A. Stromoe, Osteroe, Suderoe, and Sandoe. 

Q. The population ? 

A. 6800. (M. A.) 

Q. How long and wide is Iceland ? 

A. It is 230 ms. long, and 220 wide. (M. A.) 

Q. What towns in Iceland ? 

A. Reikiaviig, and Skalholt. 

Q. Capes? 

A. North, and Closterbay. 



HOLLAND. 279 

Q. Bays? 

A. Breede, and Faxe. 

The principal Danish Islands are Zealand, Funen, Laaland, 
Falster, and Bornholm. (See Map No. 20.) (M. A.) 
For a further description, see Key, page 225. 



HOLLAND. 
Page 231.— Lesson 157.— Map No. 18. 

Q. What bounds Holland on the north and west ? 
A. North Sea. 
Q. On the south ? 
A. Belgium. 
Q. East? 

A. Hanover, and Prussia. 
Q. What river flows through this country ? 
A. Rhine. 
Q. How long is it ? 
A. 950 ms. 

Q. What bay lies north of Amsterdam 1 
A. Zuyder Zee. 

Q. What country lies due west from Holland ? 
A. England. 

Q. How many miles is it by the scale ? 
A. About 1 10 ms. 

Q. What sea separates Holland and England ? 
A. North Sea. 

Q. How many inhabitants has Amsterdam ? 
A. 207,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Rotterdam? 
A. 78,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Groningen? 
A. 30,000. (M. A.) 

Leyden and Utrecht are on one of the lower branches of the 
Rhine. See Map No. 20. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 226. 



BELGIUM. 
Page 232.— Lesson 158.— Map No. 18. 

Q. What bounds Belgium on the north? 

A. Holland, and the North Sea. 

Q. South? 

A. France. 



280 ENGLAND. 

Q. East? 

A. Prussia. 

Q. Which is the principal river of Belgium ? 

A. The Meuse ; the city of Liege is on its W. bank ; this river 
is 400 ms. long. (M. G.) 

Q. How many inhabitants has Brussels ? 

A. 134,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Ghent? 

.#.88,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Antwerp? 

A. 75,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Liege ? 

A. 52,000. (M. A.) 

Antwerp and Ghent are on the river Scheldt. See Map No. 
20. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Europe, lesson 150/A, Map No. 
18. Key, page 226. 

ENGLAND. 
Page 239.— Lesson 162.— Maps No. 18, and 19. 

Map No. 18. — Q. What bounds England on the north? 

A. Scotland. 

Q. South? 

A. English Channel? 

Q. East? 

A. North Sea. 

Q. West? 

A. Wales, and the Irish Sea. 

Q. What strait separates it from France ? 

A. Dover. 

Q. What channel ? 

A. English. 

Q. What channel between England and Wales ? 

A. Bristol. 

Map No. 19. — Q. What rivers form part of the boundary be- 
tween England and Scotland ? 

A. Tweed, and Esk. 

Q. What hills ? 

A. Cheviot. 

Q. What firth separates the north-west and south-west parts of 
England and Scotland ? 

A. Solway. 

Q. What is the most southern extremity of England ? 

A. Lizard Point. 

Q. The most western ? 

A. Land's End. 



ENGLAND. 28 1 

Q. What are the three chief rivers of England ? 

A. Humber, Thames, and Severn. 

Q. What two rivers form the Humber ? 

A. Ouse, and Trent. 

Q. How long are each ? 

A. Ouse is 100 ms. long ; Trent, 133. (M. A.) 

Q. The Thames ? 

A. 233 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. The Severn ? 

A. 200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What rivers flow into the North Sea ? 

A. Commencing at the North. — The Tyne, Weare, Tees, 
Humber, Yare, Orwell, Blackwater, and Thames. 

Q. Into the Wash ? 

A. Witham, Glen, Welland, Neu, and Great Ouse. 

Q. Into the English Channel ? 

A. Ouse, Avon, Frome, Exe, and Tamer. 

Q. Into the British Channel ? 

A. Severn. 

Q. How long is the latter ? 

A. 200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What rivers flow into the Irish Sea ? 

A. Lune, Ribble, Mersey, and Dee. 

Q. What islands lie at the mouth of the Thames ? 

A. Sheppey, and Thanet. 

Q. In the English Channel ? 

A. Isle of Wight. 

Q. In the Irish Sea ? 

A. Isle of Man. 

Q. In the British Channel ? 

A. Lundy. 

Q. Near Land's End ? 

A. Scilly Isles. These are dangerous to seamen, and vessels 
are often wrecked on them. For the position of the Norman 
Isles, See Map No. 21. These Islands once belonged to France, 
and were a part of the patrimony of the Norman kings, whence 
their name. (M. G. p. 239.) 

Q. Point out Jersey, Guernsey, Alderney, and Sark. 

Q. What is the population of the Isle of Man? 

A. 47,000. ( M.A.) 

Q. Isle of Wight ? 

A. 42,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Norman Isles 1 

A. 76,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Which is the chief lake in England ? 

A. Windermere. 
24* 



282 ENGLAND. 

Q. How long is it ? 

A. 12 ms. (Mere, or Meet, signifies a lake.) (M. A.) 

Q. The chief mountains ? 

.#. Helvellyn, and Skiddaw. 

Q. How high are they ? 

^. Helvellyn is 3325 ft. ; Skiddaw, 3175. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of London ? 

A. 1,874,000. (M. A.)* 

Q. Manchester? 

A. 242,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Liverpool? 

A. 223,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Birmingham? 

A, 183,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Leeds? 

A. 152,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Bristol? 

A. 122,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Plymouth ? 

A. 80,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Norwich? 

A. 63,000. (M. A.) 

q. Sheffield? 

A. 68,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Hull? 

A. 42,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Nottingham? 

A. 53,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Portsmouth? 

A. 53,000. (M. A.) 

Q. New Castle? 

A. 50,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Sunderland? 

A. 17,000. (M. A.) 

* The exact population of London and its suburbs in 1841 was 1,873,676, 
but on the maps it is engraved 1874, indicating the number 1,874,000. It 
is to be observed, that in placing the figures of the population on the Maps 
of the School Atlas, those indicating the thousands only are given, especially 
where the amount is considerable. Where a fraction of a thousand occurs 
in the actual number, say below 500, the preceding, and when above 500, 
the following thousand is shown. Thus Liverpool, with 223,003 inhabit- 
ants, is engraved 223, and Birmingham, with 182,922, is engraved 183. 
In the maps of our own states, where more minuteness, particularly in the 
smaller numbers, is required, ^ represents about 250, £ 500, and £ 750 ; 
thus 1250, or about that amount, would be H, 1500 would be l£, and 1750 
would be ]£. 



ENGLAND. 283 

Q. Bath? 

A. 38,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cambridge? 

A. 24,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Oxford? 

A. 24,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Worcester? 

A. 25,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Shrewsbury? 

A. 18,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Chester? 

A. 23,000. (M. A.) 

Q. York? 

A. 29,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Carlisle? 

A. 23,000. (M. A.) 

Q. On what rivers are the towns printed in Italics situated 1 

A. London is on the Thames;* Liverpool, on the Mersey ;t 
Leeds, on the Aire ;{ Bristol, at the confluence of the Avon and 
Frome ;§ Norwich on the Wensom ;|| Sheffield on the Don ;^f 

* London (Lat. Loridinium, Fr. Londres), the metropolis of the U. King- 
dom of Great Britain and Ireland, and the most populous, wealthy, and com- 
mercial city of which we have any accounts, is situated partly and princi- 
pally on the N. bank of the Thames, in the county of Middlesex, and partly 
on its S. bank, in the county of Surrey, about 45 ms. above the river's mouth 
at the Nore, and 15 below the highest tideway. 

I Liverpool is a seaport of England, being, next to London, the greatest 
emporium of the British empire, and, in fact, of the world, in the co. of Lan- 
caster, on the E. or right bank of the Mersey, 32 ms. W. by S. of Manches- 
ter, 67 ms. W. S. W. of Leeds, and 196 ms. N. N. W. of London ; lat. 53° 
22' N., long. 2° 57' W. 

\ Leeds is a celebrated manufacturing town of England, being the great 
centre of the woollen cloth trade, co. York, W. riding, situated on both sides 
of the navigable river Aire, 23 ms. W. S. W. of York, 29 ms. N. of Sheffield, 
and 170 ms. N. by W. of London ; lat. 53° 47' N., and long. 1° 32' W. 

§ Bristol is a city, co., and sea-port of England, at the confluence of the 
Avon and Frome, 8 ms. N. W. of the embouchure of the former, in the 
Bristol Channel, and 108 ms. W. of London. Lat. 51° 27' N., long. 2° 
35' W. 

|| Norwich, a city of England, being a county of itself, and an important 
manufacturing town, is situated in co. Norfolk, of which it is the cap., on 
the navigable river Wensom (crossed here by 10 bridges), 56 ms. N. E. of 
Cambridge, and 96 ms. N. N. E. of London ; lat. 52° 7' N., long. 1° 16' E. 

^ Sheffield is a market town, cap. of the district of Hallamshire, W. riding, 
co. York, at the confluence of the Don and Sheaf, the former of which is 



284 ENGLAND. 

Hull, on the Humber ;* Nottingham on the Leen ;f New Castle, 
on the Tyne ;$ Sunderland, on the Weare ;§ Bath, on the Avon ;j| 
Cambridge, on the Cam ;1J Oxford, on the left bank of the Isis, a 
branch of the Thames ;** Worcester, on the Severn ;tt Shrews- 
crossed by three and the latter by two bridges, 39 ms. S. of Leeds, and 140 
ms. N. by W. of London. 

* Hull is a large and important commercial town, and river-port of Eng- 
land, and co. of itself, locally situated in co. York, E. riding, on the N. bank 
of the Humber estuary, 22 ms. from the Spurnhead, 34 ms. S. E. of York, 
and 155 ms. N. of London. Lat. 53° 45' N., long. 0° 20' W. 

-j- Nottingham is an extensive manufacturing town of England, and co. 
of itself, locally situated in Nottingham co., of which it is the cap., situated 
on the Leen, about |ofam. from its junction with the Trent, crossed here 
by an old bridge of 19 arches, 14 ms. E. by S. of Derby, and 108 ms. N. 
N. W. of London. 

+ Newcastle-upon-Tyne is a river-port of England, locally situated in 
Castle-ward, co. Northumberland, of which it is the cap., but it is also a co. 
by itself, and is celebrated as the principal British port for the shipment of 
coal, on the N. bank of the Tyne, about 9^ ms. from its mouth, 54 ms. E. 
of Carlisle, and 244 ms. N. by W. of London : lat. 54° 58' N., long. 
1° 37' W. 

§ Sunderland is a sea-port of England, being, next to Newcastle and 
Stockton, the greatest port in the kingdom for the shipment of coal, co. Dur- 
ham, ward Easington, on the Weare, close to its mouth in the North Sea, 13 
ms. N. E. of Durham, with which city it is connected by a railway, and 
245 ms. N. N. W. of London ; lat. (of light-house) 54° 55' N., long. 1° 
21' W. 

|| Bath is a city of England, in the N. E. part of co. Somerset, 102 ms. 
W. by S. of London, on the Avon, along which its buildings extend for up- 
ward of 2 ms., ascending the acclivities, and crowning some of the summits 
of the adjoining range of hills. 

T[ Cambridge is a town of England, in the co. Cambridge, being the seat 
of one of the great English universities, on the Cam ; 48 ms. N. by E. of 
London. The greater portion of the town stands on the S. E. bank of the 
river. 

** Oxford is a city of England, cap. of Oxford co., and the seat of the oldest 
of the two great English universities, on the left bank of the Isis, near its con- 
fluence with the Cherwell, which are both crossed by numerous bridges, 
(one of which, on the London road, is a handsome stone structure, of five 
arches,) 52 ms. W. N. W. of London, lat. (Observatory) 51° 45' N., long. 
1° 15' W. 

f f Worcester is a city of England, locally situated in the co. of Worcester, 
of which it is the cap., but forming a co. of itself ; on the Severn, crossed by 
a handsome stone bridge of five arches ; 25 ms. S. W. of Birmingham, and 
100 ms. W.N.W. of London; lat. 52° 9' N., long. 2° 0' W. 



ENGLAND. 285 

bury, on the Severn ;* Chester, on the Dee ;t York, on the Ouse ;J 
and Carlisle, on the Eden, at the confluence of the Caldew and 
Petter.§ 

Q. In what years did the battles that are marked on the map 
take nlace ? 

A. Battle of Hastings, 1066 ; North Allerton, 1 138 ; Lincoln, 
1140; Durham, 1346; Otterburn or Chevy Chace, 1388; 
Shrewsbury, 1403 ; Hexham, 1463; Bosworth, 1485; Flodden 
Field, 1513; Edge Hill, 1642; Newbury, 1643-4; Marston 
Moor, 1644 ; Horncastle^ 1644 ; Naseby, 1645 ; Worcester, 1651 ; 
Sedgemoor, 1685. 

Q. What light-house is near Plymouth Sound ? 

A. Eddy stone. 

Q. How far is it from England to Denmark ? 

A. 400 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. To Russia ? 

A. 900 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. To Holland ? 

A. 150 ms. (M.A.) 

Q. To the Island of Jersey ? 

A, 100 ms. (M.A.) 

Q. To Guernsey ? 

A. 80 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. To Spain? 

A. 460 ms. (M. A.) 

* Shrewsbury is a market town of England, co. Salop, of which it is the 
cap.; nearly in the centre of the co,, in a peninsula formed by the Severn, 
on two gentle declivities, 50 ms. S. by E. of Liverpool, 138 ms. N. W. of 
London. It is chiefly separated from the river by garden and meadow 
ground, skirted by a range of genteel houses, and its exterior appearance is 
from many points striking and majestic. 

j- Chester is a city and sea-port of England, locally in the co. of Chester, 
on a rocky elevation on the N. bank of the Dee, by which it is half encircled, 
on the S. border of the co., about 6 ms. above the confluence of the Dee with 
its estuary, 27 ms. S. by E. of Liverpool, 164 ms. N. W. of London ; lat. 
53° 11' N., long. 2° 52' W. 

\ York (Anc. Eboracum) is an ancient and celebrated city of England, 
being, under the Romans, the capital of Britain, and at present the second 
city of the kingdom in respect of rank, though not of importance. It is a 
county of itself, and a parliamentary and municipal borough, locally situated 
near the centre of the co. York, of which it is the cap., at the junction of the 
N., E., and W. Ridings ; on the Ouse, at the confluence of the Foss, 22 ms. 
N. E. of Leeds, 33 ms. N. W. of Hull, 170 ms. N.N. W. of London, and 
160 ms. S. S. E. of Edinburgh. Lat. 53° 57' N., long. 1° 4' W. 

\ Carlisle is a city of England, co. Cumberland, on a gentle eminence, in 
an extensive plain at the confluence of the Eden, Caldew, and Petter, which 
nearly surround it ; 260 ms. N. N. W. of London, and 98 ms. N. by W. of 
Manchester. 



286 WALES. 

Q. To Newfoundland ? 

A. 2200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. To Cape Clear ?* 

A. 195 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. How wide is the strait of Dover ? 

v2. 21 ms. (M. A.) 

#. How long and wide is the Irish Sea ? 

A. 130 ins. long, and 100 wide. (M. A.) 

WALES.— Map No. 11. 

Q. What bounds Wales on the north ? 
A. Irish Sea. 
Q. South? 
A. Bristol Channel ? 
#. East? 
.#. England. 
Q. West? 

.#. St. George's Channel. 
Q. What bay on the west coast ? 
A. Cardigan. 
Q. On the south ? 
.#. St. Brides, and Caermarthen. 
Q. What island lies north of Wales ? 
A. Anglesea. 

Q. What is its population ? 
^. 50,000. (M.A.) 
Q. What strait separates it from Wales ? 
.#. Menai. 

Q. What rivers are wholly in Wales ? 
./?. Conway, Dovey, Tief, and Towy. 
Q. What rivers rise in Wales, but flow into England ? 
A. Dee, Severn, Teme, and Wye. 
Q. What are the three chief mountains in Wales ? 
A. Snowdon, Cader Idris, and Plynlimmon. 
Q. How high are the first two ? 
A. Snowdon is 3571 ft. high ; Cader Idris, 3550 ft. 
Q. How many miles is it from St. David's Head to Carnsore 
Point ?t 

A. 50 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Merthyr Tydvil ? 

A. 35,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Swansea? 

A. 17,000. (M.A.) 

* From Cape Clear, Ireland to Land's End, England, 195 ms. (See Alias.") 
\ The S. E. extremity of Ireland. (M. A.) 



SCOTLAND. 287 



Q. Caermarthen ? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Mold ? 

A. 9000. (M. A.) 

Q. Holywell? 

A. 9000. (M.A.) 

Q. Caernarvon? 

A. 8000. (M. A.) 

Q. Holyhead? 

A. 4000. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 227. 



SCOTLAND. 

Pages 24l-2.~Lesson 164.— Map No. 19. 

Q. What bounds Scotland on the north and west ? 

A. Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. East? 

A. North Sea. 

Q. South? 

A. England, and the Irish Sea. 

Q. What separates it from Ireland ? 

A. North Channel ? 

Q. How wide is it ? 

A. 12 ms. 

#. Which is the most northern part of Scotland ? 

A. Dunnet Head. 

Q. Southern? 

A. Mull of Galloway. 

Q. Eastern? 

A. Buchan Ness. 

Q. Western? 

A. Ardnamurchan Point. 

FIRTHS OR FRITHS. 

Q. Where is Dornoch Firth ? (Firth or Frith is used in Scot- 
land for Bay and Strait. M. G., p. 241.) 

A. It is on the E. coast of Scotland, in the N. E. part, pene- 
trating inland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cromarty Firth ? 

A. It is in the N. part of Scotland, setting up from Murray 
Firth inland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Murray Firth ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Scotland, in the N. E. part, pene- 
trating far inland. (M. A.) 



288 SCOTLAND. 

Muhhat Firth (Anc. JEstuarium Varans) is a bay on the E. coast of 
Scotland, between Ross-shire and Elginshire. 

Q. Where is the Firth of Tay ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Scotland, lying N. of Firth of Forth, 
penetrating inland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Firth of Forth ? 

A. It is a narrow arm of the sea, on the E. coast of Scotland, 
in the S. E. part, setting up far inland. (M. A.) 

After the R. Forth is joined by the Devon, on the N. it begins to widen, 
and gradually assumes the appearance of a bay. This bay, called the Frith 
of Forth, is about 50 ms. long, and, where widest, is near 15 ms. broad. 

Q. Where is Solway Firth ? 

A. It is a large arm of the Irish Sea, separating the S. W. part 
of Scotland from the N. W. part of England. 

Q. Where is the Firth of Clyde ?* 

A. It is a long crooked arm of the sea on the W. coast of Scot- 
land, directly opposite the Firth of Forth, on the E. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Wigton Bay ? 

A. It is on the S. coast of Scotland, and in the S.W. part, pene- 
trating inland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Glenluce Bay ? 

A. It is on the S. coast of Scotland, situated in the S. W. part, 
lying W. of Wigton Bay, and setting up from the Irish Sea inland. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Sound of Jura ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Scotland, separating the islands of 
Jura and Isla from the mainland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Minch ? 

A. It is on theW. Coast of Scotland, separating Lewis and 
Harris Island from the mainland.t (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Little Minch ? 

A. It is on the W. Coast of Scotland, lying S. S. W. of the 
Minch, both forming a strait which divides the Outer Hebrides 
from the Inner, and from the mainland of Scotland. (M. A.) 

CAPES. 

Q. Where is Cape Wrath ? 

A. It is the N. W. point of Scotland, and also of Great Britain. 
Lat. 58° 34' N., long. 4° 47' W. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Dunnet Head ? 
A. It is the N. extremity of Scotland, and its N. point in the 

* United to the Firth of Forth by the Forth and Clyde canal. 

f Lewis and Harris (which is more extensive than all the rest of the 
Hebrides put together), though considered as separate, forms, in fact, only 
one island. 



SCOTLAND. 289 

Pentland Firth is also the N. extremity of Great Britain. Lat. 
58° 42' N., long. 3° 29' W. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Duncansby Head ? 

A. It is the extreme N. E. point of Scotland, and also of Great 
Britain. Lat. 58° 40' N., long. 3° 8' W. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Kinnaird's Head ? 

A. It is a lofty promontory on the E. coast of Scotland, in 
Aberdeenshire, (M. A.) 

Here is a castle four stories high, on the top of which is a light-house. 
Lat. 57° 39' N., long. 1° 46' W. 

Q. Where is Tarbet Ness ? 

A. It is in Cromarty county, on the E. coast of Scotland, in 
the N. E. part, extending in a N. E. direction between Dornoch 
and Murray Firths. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Buchan Ness ? 

A. It forms the E. extremity of Scotland, in Aberdeenshire. 
Lat. 57° 27' N., long. 1° 34' W. (M. A.) 

Near this promontory are the Bullers of Buchan, and other stupendous 
rocks and precipices, much admired for their awful grandeur. 

Q. Where is the Mull of Galloway? 

A. It forms the extreme S. point of Scotland. (M. A.) 

This Mull forms the W. point of entrance to Luce, or Glenluce Bay, and 
the E. point of entrance to the North Channel, between the Irish Sea and 
the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

The Mull of Galloway is a promontory of Scotland, county Wigton, com- 
prising the S. portion of the district called the Rhynns. It stretches in a S. 
S. E. direction from Portpatrick to the Point of the Mull, about 17 ms. : its 
breadth varies from about 2 to 5 ms. The Point of the Mull, the farthest 
S. limit of Scotland, in lat. 54° 38' N., long. 4° 52' W., rises about 255 ft. 
above the level of the sea, and is bold, bleak, and striking. A light-house 
of the first class, with an intermittent light, having the lantern elevated 325 
ft. above the level of the sea, has been erected on this headland. The view 
from the balcony of the light-house is very extensive, commanding the whole 
Isle of Man, the Coast of Cumberland and the Cumberland Mountains ; a 
great part of the coast with the mountains of Dumfries-shire and Galloway, 
the Paps of Jura, and the Coast of Ireland, from Fairhead to the Mourne 
Mountains. 

Q. Where is the Mull of Cantire ? 

A. It is the S. extremity of the peninsula of Cantire,* on the 
W. coast of Scotland, on which is a light-house, in lat. 55° 17' 
N., long. 5° 41' W. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Ardnamurclran Point ? 

A. It is a promontory on the W. coast of Scotland, Argyleshire, 
being the most westerly point in the mainland of Great Britain, 
lat. 56° 45' N., long. 6° 8' W. (M. A.) 

* This peninsula is situated in the S. W. part of Scotland, forming the 
southern extremity of Argyleshire. 
25 



290 SCOTLAND. 

(Ness and Mull are the same as Cape, Head, or Point. M. G. 
p. 341.) 

ISLANDS. 

Q. What islands lie west of Scotland ? 

A. Hebrides or Western Islands. (M. A.) 

Q. What islands lie north ? 

A. Orkney. (M. A.) 

Q. What firth separates them ? 

A. Pentland. (M. A.) 

Q. How wide is it ? 

A. 4 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What islands lie N. E. from the Orkneys ? 

A. Shetland. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of the Shetland Islands ? 

A. 30,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Orkney Islands ? 

A. 30,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Hebrides? 

A. 108,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Which is the chief town of the Hebrides ? 

A. Stornaway. (M. A.) (Lat. 58° 13' N., long. 6° 16' W.) 

Q. Of the Orkneys ? 

A. Kirkwall. (M. A.) (Lat. 59° N., long. 2° 57' W.) 

#. Of the Shetland Islands ? 

A. Lerwick. (M. A.) (Lat. 60° 11' N., long. 1° 10' W.) 

Q. Where is StafTa? 

A. It is a small island of Scotland, belonging to the Hebrides 
(famous for its basaltic columns and caverns), off the W. coast of 
the Island of Mull, 9 ms. N. N. E. from Iona. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Iona ? 

A. It is a small island of Scotland, belonging to the Hebrides, 
situated near the W. extremity of the island of Mull, intersected 
by the parallel of 56° 22' N. lat., and the meridian of 6° 26' W. 
long. (M. A.) 

Iona was anciently celebrated for its religious institutions, schools, and 
learned men. (M. G., p. 242.) 

losx, or Icolmkill, (the native name is I, pronounced like ee, and sig- 
nifying " island,") is chiefly interesting on account of its ruins and historical 
remembrances. While western Europe lay buried in ignorance and barba- 
rity, this island was remarkable as the seat of learning and of the Christian 
religion, which was introduced near the middle of the 6th century, by St. 
Columba, a native of Ireland. The name Icolmkill is a contraction of 
I-Columb-kill, i. e. the " island of Columba's cell or monastery," kill or kil 
signifying any religious residence. Length of the island, about 3 ms, 



SCOTLAND. '291 

LOCHS, OR LAKES. 

Q. Where is Loch Shin ? (Lakes and inlets are called Lochs 
m Scotland. M. G., p. 242.) 

A. It is in the S. part of Sutherlandshire, in the N. of Scotland. 
At its S. E. extremity issues the rapid river Shin, which flows into 
the head of the Frith of Dornoch. (M. A.) 

This loch or lake is 15 ms. long and 2 broad. 

Q. Where is Loch Mare? 

A. It is in Ross-shire, in the N.W. part of Scotland, and flows 
into the Minch. (M. A.) 

This lake is 16 ras. long, and from 1 to 2 ms. broad. There are 24 small 
islands in it. 

Q. Where is Loch Ness ? 

A. It is in Inverness-shire, in the N. part of Scotland. Its out- 
let, at the N. extremity, is the r. Ness, which flows into Murray 
Firth, below Inverness. (M. A.) 

This lake is about 24 ms. long, and from about three-quarters of a mile 
to 2 ms. wide. 

Q. Where is Loch Rannoch ? 

A. It is in Perthshire, near the interior of Scotland ; it receives 
the waters of Loch Ericht from the N., and flows into the R. Tay. 
(M. A.) 

This lake is 11 ms. in length. 

Q. Where is Loch Tay ? 

A. It is in Perthshire, in the interior of Scotland, formed by 
several streams and the R. Tay, which flows through its whole 
length. (M. A.) 

This lake is 15 ms. long, and in most parts above 1 m. broad. 

Q. Where is Loch Lomond ? 

A. It is between the counties or shires of Stirling and Dumbar- 
ton, in the S. W. part of Scotland. Its outlet is the R. Leven, 
which, issuing from its S. extremity, falls into the Firth of Clyde, 
close to Dumbarton. (M. A.) 

This, which is the largest of the Scotch, and, indeed, of the British lakes * 
is a noble sheet of water, of a triangular shape, about 21 ms. in length, N. 
N.W. and S. S. E., and where broadest, along its S. shore, it is from 7 to 8 
ms. across ; but its upper portion is comparatively narrow, being only about 
1 m. in breadth. Its area is estimated at about 25,000 acres : its most 
usual depth is about 20 fathoms; but in some places it has a depth of 
80, and even of 120 fathoms. It is studded with numerous islands, some 
of which are of considerable size, and finely wooded. 

* The largest lake, properly speaking, but not the largest Ivch — the latter 
term is often applied, in Scotland, to arms of the sea. 



292 SCOTLAND. 

Q. Where is Loch Leven ? 

A. It is in Kinross-shire, in the E. part of Scotland, and flows 
into the Firth of Forth. (M. A.) 

This lake is upwards of 10 ms. in circumference, and somewhat of a cir- 
cular form. It has several small islands, on one of which is a ruinous castle, 
where Mary, queen of Scots, was confined hy the confederate lords, after 
she had separated from Bothwell ; and on another, named St. Serfs Isle, is 
the ruin of a priory. On the E. side of the lake, near its outlet, stands the 
ruinous monastery of Portmoak. 

Q. How long is Loch Ness ? 

A. 24 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Loch Lomond ? 

A. 21 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Loch Assynt ? 

A. It is in Sutherlandshire, in the N. W. part of Scotland, on 
the W. coast, setting up from the Minch inland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Loch Broom ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Scotland, in the N. W. part, in 
Ross-shire, setting up from the Minch inland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Loch Sunart ? 

A. It is an inlet of the sea, on the W. coast of Scotland, which 
extends 20 ms. E. into Argyleshire, from the N. end of the island 
of Mull. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Loch Linnhe ? 

A. It is an arm of the sea on the W. coast of Scotland, which 
separates the counties of Argyle and Inverness. It extends in 
a N. E. direction from the sound of Mull to Fort William, where 
it takes a westerly direction, and acquires the name of Loch Eil. 
Another branch, in an easterly direction, is called Loch Leven. 

Q. Where is Loch Awe ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Scotland, in Argyleshire. The river 
Awe, the outlet of this lake, flows into Lake Etive. 

This lake is 24 ms. long, while its average breadth is only about 1 rn. 

Q. Where is Loch Fyne ? 

A. It is an inlet of the Atlantic Ocean, on the W. coast of 
Scotland, in Argyleshire. (M. A.) 

This lake is nearly 40 ms. in length, and receives and returns a tide on 
each side of the isle of Arran, which is opposite its entrance. 

RIVERS. 

Q. What rivers flow into Murray Firt|i ? 

A. Spey, and Doveran. 

Q. The North Sea ? 

A. Ythan, Don, Dee, North Esk, South Esk, and Tweed. 

Q. The Firth of Tay ? 

A. Tav, and Earn. 

Q. The Firth of Forth ? 

A. Forth. 



SCOTLAND. 293 

Q. The Solway Firth ? 

A. Esk, Nith, and Dee. 

Q. The Firth of Clyde ? 

A. Doon, Ayr, and Clyde. 

Q. Where is the Caledonian Canal ? 

A. It extends in a S. E. direction from Murray Firth on the E. 
coast of Scotland, to Lake or Loch Linnhe on the W. coast, open- 
ing a way for frigates across Scotland, through Loch Ness, Loch 
Oich, and Loch Lochie. 

Q. On what rivers are the chief cities ? 

Ji. Glasgow is on the Clyde ;* Perth, on the Tay ;t Paisley, on 
the White Cart ;i Ayr, on the Ayr ;§ Dumfries, on the Nith ;|| 
Aberdeen, on the Dee ;^[ Leith, on the Leith ;** Kilmarnock, on 
the Irvine, and on the small stream Kilmarnock or Fenwick, a 
tributarytt of the former. 

* Glasgow, a city, river-port, and the most populous and important manu- 
facturing and commercial town of Scotland, county Lanark, on both sides 
of the Clyde, 42 ms. W. by S. from Edinburgh, and 18 ms. E.S.E. from 
Greenock ; lat. 55° 51' 32" N. (Macfarlane's Observatory), long. 4° 17' 54" 
W., being about 8 ms. farther S. than Edinburgh. 

j- Perth, a royal and parliamentary borough, and manufacturing town of 
Scotland, county of Perth, of which it is the capital, situated on a plain on 
the right bank of the Tay, 33 ms. N. by W. from Edinburgh ; lat. 56° 23' 
N., long. 3° 26' W. 

\ Paisley, a parliamentary borough, market and manufacturing town of 
Scotland, county of Renfrew, partly on an eminence and partly on a plain, 
on both sides the White Cart, 3 ms. S. of Renfrew Ferry, on the Frith of 
Clyde, and 8 ms. W. by S. from Glasgow. 

§ Ayr, a sea-port, royal borough, and maritime town of Scotland, capital 
of Ayrshire, on the S. side of the R. Ayr, at its confluence with the sea, 
75 ms. S. W. from Edinburgh, and 34 ms. S. S. W. from Glasgow. 

|| Dumfries, a sea-port and parliamentary borough of Scotland, county of 
Dumfries, of which it is the capital, on the E. bank of the Nith, about 9 
ms. from its influx into the Solway Frith, 64 ms. S. by W. from Edinburgh, 
and 30 ms. W. by N. from Carlisle. 

1 Aberdeen, capital of Aberdeen county, an ancient, distinguished, and 
flourishing royal borough, situated mostly on rising ground on the N. bank 
of the Dee, near its mouth ; lat. (of Marischal College Observatory) 57° 8' 
58" N., long. 2° 5' 41" W. 

** Leith, a sea-port and parliamentary borough of Scotland, county Mid 
Lothian or Edinburgh, on both sides of a small r. of the same name, at its 
confluence with the Frith of Forth, on a flat sandy shore, 2 ms. N. by E. of 
the centre of Edinburgh, of which city it is the port. 

■\\ Kilmarnock, an eminent manufacturing town, parliamentary borough, 
borough of regality, and parish of Scotland, district of Cunningham, Ayr- 
shire, on level ground on the N. bank of the Irvine, and on the small stream 
Kilmarnock or Fenwick, a tributary of the former ; 20 ms. S. W. by S. from 
Glasgow, and 12 ms. N. N. E. from Ayr. 
25* 



294 SCOTLAND. 

MOUNTAINS. 

Q. Where are the Grampian Hills ? 

A. They are a celebrated and well-known mountain chain 
forming the line of demarcation between the Lowlands and High- 
lands of Scotland. Its limits are not very well defined ; but it 
may be regarded as commencing on the E. side of Loch Etive in 
Argyleshire, and as stretching across the island, till it terminates 
between Stonehaven and the mouth of the Dee on the E. coast. 

Or, the Grampians may be very accurately described as follows : 
They are a chain of mts. in Scotland, which stretches like a mighty 
wall along the southern front of the Highlands, running from 
Argyleshire, on the Atlantic, across the island, into Aberdeenshire, 
on the North Sea, and then forming another ridge in a north- 
westerly direction, extends to the county of Elgin, and the borders 
of Inverness. 

There appears to be considerable diversity among geographers respect- 
ing the application of the name Grampian. The term is not used by the 
natives of that part of Britain. It is derived from the Mons Grampius, 
mentioned by Tacitus in his Agricola. In its most extensive application, it 
appears to comprehend all the mountain ranges N. of a line drawn from the 
Firth of Clyde to the Firth of Tay, thus including all the higher mountains 
of Scotland. Ben Nevis, in Inverness-shire, is the highest of the Grampian 
system, and of all the mts. in Great Britain, rising 4379 ft. above the level 
of the sea. Ben Mac Dhu, situated in the W. part of Aberdeenshire, is 
second only to Ben Nevis, having an elevation of 4305 ft. above the sea ; 
Ben Cruachan, in Argyleshire, S. of Loch Etive, is 3669 ft. high. Ben 
Lomond, in Stirlingshire, is perhaps the best known of the mountains of 
Scotland, on account of its forming the southern extremity of the High- 
lands. It rises 3197 ft. above the level of the sea. Ben Venu, in Perth- 
shire, extends along the southern shores of Loch Katrine, and presents the 
most striking features in the picturesque scenery for which that lake is so 
remarkable. Ben Vorlich, or Voirlich, in Perthshire, is second only to Ben 
Venu, among all the mts. of Scotland, for wild and variegated scenery. 

Q. Where are the Cheviot Hills ?* 

A. They run from N. E. to S. W., and form part of the boun- 
dary between Scotland and England. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Ben Nevis ? 

A. It is in Inverness-shire, being the highest of the Grampians, 
situated immediately to the E. of Fort William, near the W. coast 
of Scotland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cairngorm Mt. ? 

A. It is in the N. E. part of Scotland, at the S. W\ extremity 
of Banffshire, on the border of Inverness. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Bent Lawers ? 

A. It is in the interior of Scotland, on the N. side of Loch Tay. 
(M. A.) 

* The highest summit is 2658 ft. above the sea. f Ben signifies Mountain. 



SCOTLAND, 295 

Q. How high are the last three ? 

Ji. Ben Nevis is 4379 ft.; Cairngorm Mt., 4050 ft.; Ben 
Lawers, 4015 ft. (M. A.) 

POPULATION OF CITIES. 

Q. What is the population of Glasgow ? 
Ji. 275,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Edinburgh? 
Ji. 138,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Aberdeen? 
Ji. 63,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Paisley? 
A. 60,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Dundee? 
Ji. 60,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Leith? 

Ji. 26,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Greenock? 
Ji. 37,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Kilmarnock? 
Ji. 20,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Dunfermline? 
Ji. 8000. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is John O'Groat's House ? 
Ji. In the N. E. part of Scotland. (M. A.) 
This was long ago noted as the most northerly dwelling in Scotland : it 
is now in ruins. (M. G.) 

DISTANCES. 

Q. How far is it from the Clyde to the West Indies ? 

Ji. 4800 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From Scotland to Labrador ? 

Ji. 2100 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From Scotland to Iceland ? 

Ji. 550 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From the Faroe to the Orkney Islands ? 

Ji. 400 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From Greenland to the Shetland Islands ? 

Ji. 1550 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. To the Faroe Isles from Shetland ? 

Ji. 200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From the Shetland Isles to Norway ? 

Ji. 200 ms. (M.A.) 

Q. From Scotland to Norway? 

Ji. 350 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From Scotland to Sweden? 

Ji. 600 ms. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, pages 227-8, 



296 IRELAND, 

IRELAND. 

Page 244.— Lesson 166.— Map No. 19. 

Q. What bounds Ireland on the north, south, and west ? 

A. Atlantic Ocean. 

Q. On the East? 

A. Irish Sea. 

Q. What separates it from England ? 

A. Irish Sea. 

Q. How long and wide is the Irish Sea ? 

A. It is 130 ms. long, and 100 ms. wide. (M. A.) 

Q. What separates Ireland from Scotland ? 

A. The North Channel. 

$. How wide is it ? 

A. 12 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What separates Ireland from Wales ? 

.#. St. George's Channel. 

Q. How wide is it ? 

^. 50 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Which is the most northern part of Ireland ? 

A. Malin Head. 

Q. The most southern? 

A. Mizen Head. 

Q. The most western? 

A. Cape Sybil. 

ISLANDS. 

Q. Where is Rathlin Island ? 

A. It is in the Atlantic Ocean, off the N. coast of Ireland. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is Tory Island ? 

A. It is in the Atlantic Ocean, off the N. coast of Ireland. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where are the North Isles of Arran ? 

A. They are in the Atlantic Ocean, on the W. coast of Ireland, 
co. Donegal. (M. A.) 

The most N. extremity of the largest of these islands, called Arranmore, 
is in lat. 55° N., long. 8° 29' W. A light-house is erected on this point, 
with a fixed light elevated 200 ft. above high-water mark. This island con- 
tains about 2000 acres, and nearly 1000 inhabitants; the land being divided 
into the minutest portions, such as a " cow's foot," or the quarter of a cow's 
grass. They are mostly fishers. 

Q. Where is Achil Island ? 

A. Achil, or Eagle Island, is in the Atlantic Ocean, on the W. 
coast of Ireland, county Mayo, separated from the mainland by a 
narrow channel. (M. A.) 

This island is about 30 ms. in circumference, and contains above 23,000 



IRELAND. *297 

acres. Pop. 5277. It is mountainous ; and eagles — whence its name — 
breed in its inaccessible fastnesses. The inhabitants speak the Irish lan- 
guage, and are in an extremely depressed, miserable condition. 

Q. Where is Enisture Island ? 

A. It is in the Atlantic Ocean, on the W. coast of Ireland, 
lying S.W. of Clare Island. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the South Isles of Arran ? 

A. These consist of three islands, in the Atlantic Ocean, on the 
W. coast of Ireland, stretching N.W. and S. E., about 12 ms. 
along the mouth of Galway Bay, being part of the county Gal- 
way, in Ireland. (M. A.) 

These islands contain in all about 6854 acres ; the largest, Arranmore, com- 
prising about 4607 ; Innis More, 1338 ; and Innis Leer, 909. Pop. 3191. 

Q. Where is Blasket Island ? 

A. It is in the Atlantic Ocean, on the W. coast of Ireland, co. 
Kerry, situated on the N. side of the entrance into Dingle Bay. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is Valentia Island ? 

A. It is in the Atlantic Ocean, on the W. coast of Ireland, co. 
Kerry, lying S. E. of Blasket Island, on the S. side of the en- 
trance to Dingle Bay. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Clare Island ? 

A. It is near the W. extremity of St. George's Channel, about 
7 ms. S. E. from Baltimore, co. Cork, Ireland. (M. A.) 

The southern point of this island is Cape Clear, so well known to mariners. 
BAYS. 

Q. Where is Carlingford Bay ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Ireland, setting up from the Irish 
Sea, between the counties of Down and Louth. (M. A.) 

This Bay is 8 ms. in length, by from 1 to 1^ ms. wide, with deep water 
and secure anchorage, but, being situated between lofty mts., is liable to 
sudden squalls. 

Q. Where is Dundalk Bay ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Ireland, co. Louth, lying S. of Car- 
lingford Bay, and leads into the Irish Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Dublin Bay ? 

A. It. is on the E. coast of Ireland, co. Dublin, lying S. S. E. 
of Dundalk Bay, and leads into the Irish Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Bantry Bay ? 

A. It is an inlet of the sea, in the S.W. extremity of Ireland, 
co. Cork, between Crow Point, on the N., and Sheep's Head, on 
the S. (M. A.) 

This is one of the finest and most capacious harbours in Europe. It 
stretches inwards, in a N. E. direction, above 25 ms., with a breadth varying 
from 4 to 6 ms. Near the entrance of the bay, on its N.W. side, is Bear 
Island, separated from the mainland by a crooked strait about a mile broad, 



298 IRELAND. 

having from 10 to 30 or 40 fathom water, and affording a safe retreat for the 
largest vessels. Farther up the hay is Whiddy Island, on the S. side of 
which, nearly opposite to Bantrytovvn, there is an admirable roadstead, 
where ships lie land-locked in from 24 to 40 ft. water. Bear Island forms, 
as it were, a natural breakwater, protecting the bay from the S.W. winds. 

Q. Where is Kenmare Bay ? 

A. It is an inlet of the sea, in the S.W. part of Ireland, co. 
Kerry, lying N. of Bantry Bay. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Dingle Bay ? 

A. It is an inlet of the sea, in the S.W. part of Ireland, co. 
Kerry, lying N. of Kenmare Bay. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Galway Bay ? 

A. It is a large Bay on the W. coast of Ireland, encircled on 
the N. and E. by co. Galway, and S. by co. Clare ; to the W. 
where the S. Isles of Arran stretch across its entrance, it is open 
to the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

This bay extends about 20 ms. from W. to E., and is from 7 to 20 ms. 
wide. 

Q. Where is Killala Bay ? 

A. It is an inlet of the sea, in the N.W. part of Ireland, co. 
Ma3 r o, prov. of Connaught. (M.' A.) 

Q. Where is Donegal Bay ? 

A. It is a large inlet of the sea, on the W. coast of Ireland, and 
in the N. W. part, forming the S. boundary of the co. Donegal. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is Wexford Harbour 1 

A. It is on the E. coast of Ireland, and in the S. E. part co. 
Wexford, setting up from St. George's Channel. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Waterford Harbour ? 

A. It is on the S. coast of Ireland, setting up from St. George's 
Channel, between Waterford and Wexford counties. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cork Harbour? 

A. It is on the S. coast of Ireland, co. Cork, setting up from St. 
George's Channel. (M. A.) 

HEADS. 

Q. Where is Malin Head ? 

A. It is the N. extremity of Ireland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Fair Head ? 

A. It is the N. E. point of Ireland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Kinsale Head ? 

A. It is on the S. coast of Ireland, county Cork. (M. A.) 

Q~ Where is Mizen Head ? 

A. It is the S. point of Ireland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Loop Head ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Ireland, county Clare, at the mouth 
of Shannon R. (M. A.) 



IRELAND. 299 

Q. Where is Urris Head ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Ireland, county Mayo. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Teillen Head? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Ireland, county Donegal. (M. A.) 

L0T7GHS.* 

Q. Where is Lough Swilly ? 

A. It is on the N. coast of Ireland, county Donegal, setting up 
from the Atlantic Ocean, and penetrating far inland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Lough Foyle ? 

A. It is on the N. coast of Ireland, county Londonderry, and 
is connected with the Atlantic, by a short and narrow strait. 

This lough, of an oval form, is about 15 ms. long, and 8 ms. wide in the 
middle, which is connected with the sea by a strait, less than a mile in 
breadth. The R. Foyle, which flows into its southern extremity, is naviga- 
ble for vessels of 400 tons as far as Londonderry. 

Q. Where is Belfast Lough ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Ireland, in the N. E. part, setting 
up from the Irish Sea, between the counties of Down and Antrim. 
(M. G.) 

Q. Where is Lough Strangford ? 

A. It is a large bay or inlet of the Irish Sea, in the county of 
Down, on the E. coast of Ireland. (M. A.) 

This lough is about 17 ms. long and 5 ms. broad, and contains a great 
many small islands. The bar or entrance into it from the Irish Sea is 3 ms. 
below Strangford, and not a m. in breadth. 

Q. Where is Lough Neagh ? 

A. It is in the N. E. part of Ireland, (about 90 ms. N. of Dub- 
lin,) near the centre of the province of Ulster, having N. and E. 
the county of Antrim, S. E. Down, by which it is merely touched, 
S. Armagh, W. Tyrone, and N. W. Londonderry. The lower 
Bann R. is the only channel through which its refluent waters find 
a passage to the sea. 

This is the largest lake in the United Kingdom, being 21 ms. in length, 
by about 9 ms. in breadth; occupying, inclusive of Lough Beg, (255l£ 
acres), which is joined to it, an area of 61,626 Irish, or 99,823| statute 
acres, at ordinary high-water mark. Though by far the largest, it is by no 
means the most beautiful of the Irish lakes. Its waters are celebrated for their 
petrifying quality. 

Q. Where is Lough Earne ? 

A. It is a celebrated lake in the N. W. part of Ireland, county 
Fermanagh, which it divides into two nearly equal portions. It 
is usually considered as divided into the Upper and Lower lake, 
connected by a broad winding channel, perhaps 7 ms. long, which 

* The term lough is used in Ireland for lakes and inlets of the sea. (M. G.) 



300 IRELAND. 

might properly be called the R. Erne. It discharges itself at us 
N. W. extremity by a rapid current of about 9 ms., which, after 
falling over many ledges of obstructing rocks, precipitates itself 
down a grand cataract into Ballyshannon Bay,* at the town of 
Ballyshannon. (M. A.) 

Lake Erne contains in all an area of about 40,000 acres ; and stretches 
N. W. and S. E. 30 or 35 ms. The lower lake is the largest ; and both it 
and the upper lake are full of Islands, some of them large and thickly in- 
habited, many of them well wooded, and the whole so disposed and accom- 
panied by such a diversity of coast, as to form a vast number of rich and 
interesting prospects. 

Q. Where is Lough Allen ? 

A. It is in the N. W. part of Ireland, county Leitrim, generally 
supposed to be the source of the Shannon R. (M. A.) 

This Lake is about 10 ms. in length, and from 4 to 5 in width. It is 
generally supposed to be the source of the Shannon, and it has perhaps the 
best title to that distinction. It is elevated 144 ft. above the level of high 
water-mark at Limerick ; and the Shannon has been rendered navigable as 
far as the lough. 

Q. Where is Lough Ree ? 

A. It is in the central part of Ireland, forming part of the R. 
Shannon. (M. A.) 

This Lake is 17 ms. in length, and perhaps 6 in its greatest breadth. 

Q. Where is Lough Deirgart ? 

A. It is in the central part of Ireland, forming part of the R. 
Shannon, and crossed by the 53rd deg. of N. lat. (M. A.) 

Q. Of what river do the last three named loughs form a part ? 

A. Shannon. 

Q. Where is Lough Mask ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Ireland, counties of Mayo and Gal- 
way, province of Connaught, lying N. of Lough Corrib. 

Q. Where is Lough Corrib ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Ireland, county of Galway, province 
of Connaught, lying S. of Lough Mask, and discharges itself into 
Galway Bay. (M. A.) 

This Lake is 22 ms. in length, containing numerous islands. 

Q. Where is the Lake of Killarney ? 

A. The Lake of Killarney, or Lough Lane, consists properly 
of three lakes, connected by a winding channel, situated in the 
S. W. part of Ireland, county Kerry, lying at the E. extremity 
of the extensive range of mts. called Macgillicuddy's Reeks, and 
is divided into three parts, called the Lower, Middle, and Upper 
Lake ; their refluent waters being carried off by the Lane R., 
which falls into Castlemaine harbour, at the bottom of Dingle Bay. 
(M. A.) 

* This and Donegal Bay are connected. 



IRELAND. 301 

Q. How long is Lough Neagh ? 
A. 21 ms. (M. A.) 

RIVERS. 

Q. Where is the Bann River? 

A. Bann, Upper and Lower, two rivers in the N. of Ireland : 
the first, or Upper Bann, rises in the plain called, the Deer's or 
King's meadow, in the N. part of the Mourne Mts., in the co. of 
Down. Its course, at first, is winding ; but its general direction 
is N. W. After passing Gilford and Portadown, it falls into Lough 
Neagh at Banfoot ferry.* 

The Lower Bann issues from Lough Beg, connected on the N. 
W. with Lough Neagh, and flowing N. with a little inclination to 
the W., falls into the Atlantic Ocean about 4 ms. N. W. of Cole- 
raine. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Foyle River ? 

A. It is in the N. part of Ireland, formed by the conflux of the 
Fin and the Mourne, at LifFord, in the co. of Donegal. After their 
junction it flows in a general direction N. N. E., and 4 ms. below 
Londonderry, expands into a bay, called Lough Foyle,t which 
communicates with the Atlantic by a short and narrow strait. 

Q. Where is the Boyne River ? 

A. It is in the E. part of Ireland, has its source in the Bog of 
Allen, near Carberry, in Kildare co. It flows N. E. by Trim, 
Navan, and Slane, to Tulloghallen, whence it follows an E. course 
to Drogheda, uniting with the Irish Sea about 2 ms. lower down. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is LifFey River ? 

A. It is in the E. part of Ireland, rises in the co. of Wicklow, 
flows W. into co. Kildare, where it has a cataract near Leixslip, 
and then turning N. E. passes through the co. and city of Dublin, 
below which it enters the Irish Sea. 

Q. Where is Avoca, or Ovoca River ? 

A. It is. in the co. of Wicklow, province of Leinster, Ireland, 
having its source near the head waters of the LifTey, in the N. part 
of the co., and flowing first S. S. E., then E., empties itself into 
St. George's Channel. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Slaney River ? 

A. It is in the S. E. part of Ireland, rises at the foot of Mount 
Lugnaquilla, co. of Wicklow, flows in a general S. E. course, and 
falls into the arm of the sea termed Wexford Harbour. 

Q. Where is Barrow River ? 

A. It is in the S. E. part of Ireland, being, next to the Shannon, 

* Near Portadown it is joined by the Newry canal ; and is thence navi- 
gable by barges to the Lake. 

f This Lough is of an oval form, and is about 15 ms. long, and 8 ms. wide 
in the middle. 
26 



302 IRELAND. 

the most important in that island. It rises in the Sliebhbloom 
Mountains, Queens co. : it course is first N. E. to Portarlington, 
then E. to Monastereven, and thence nearly due S., past Athy, 
Carlow, Craig, and New-Ross ; about 8 ms. below which it falls 
into the estuary of Waterford Harbour, of which it forms the right 
arm. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Suire River ? 

A. It is in the S. E. part of Ireland, rises in Tipperary co., in 
the Sliebhbloom Mts., and has generally a S. course till it ap- 
proaches the Knock-me-le-down range of hills, which separates 
its basin from that of the Blackwater. It then turns E., and ulti- 
mately falls, together with the Barrow, into the estuary termed 
Waterford Harbour. (M. A.) 

In a commercial point of view, this is one of the most valuable rivers of 
Ireland. Vessels of 500 tons come up it to Waterford ; besides which city, 
Carrick, Clonmel, Cahir, &c, are situated on it. 

Q. Where is the Blackwater River ?* 

A. It is in the S. part of Ireland, being the chief r. of Munster: 
it rises on the confines of the counties of Limerick and Kerry, and 
soon assumes an eastern direction, which it generally preserves 
till about a dozen miles from its mouth, when it turns suddenly 
S., and falls into St. George's Channel at Youghall Harbour. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is Lee River? 

A. It is in the S. W. part of Ireland ; rises on the confines of 
co. Kerry, flows E. to Cork, and falls into Cork Harbour. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Shannon River ? 

A. It extends through the centre of Ireland, being the largest 
and most important r. in the island ; it rises in the N. W. part of 
the co. of Cavan, and, flowing at first southerly, and afterwards 
south-westerly, falls into the Atlantic Ocean, near 52° 30' N. lat., 
and 10° W. long. (M. A.) 

This river in its course traverses several lakes, the principal of which are 
Lough Allen, Lough Ree, and Lough Deirgart. Towards its termination, 
the r. widens into an estuary from 1 or 2 to 10 ms. broad. It is navigable 
for almost 200 ms., or to within 6 or 7 ms. of its source. 

Q. How long is the Shannon ? 
A. 200 ms. (M. A.) 
Q. What river flows into Lough Neagh ? 
A. Blackwater. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is the Ghurane Tuel Mt. ? 

A. It is in the S.W. corner of Ireland, co. Kerry, adjoining the 
celebrated lakes of Ki Harney, which lie E. (M. A.) 

* Sometimes called the Broadwater R. 



IRELAND. 303 

Q. How high is it ? 

A. It is the highest mt. in Ireland, rising 3400 ft. above the 
level of the sea. (M. A.) 

Q. When were the battles of Aghrim and the Boyne fought ? 

A. Battle of the Boyne, 1690; Aghrim, 1691. (M. A.) 

Q. On what river is Dublin ? 

A. On the Liffey.* 

Q. The other principal cities ? 

A. Waterford is on the River Suire;t Londonderry, on the 
Foyle ;± Athlone, on the Shannon ;§ Limerick, on the Shannon ;[| 

* Dublin, a city and sea-port of Ireland, of which it is the cap., co. Dublin, 
on the E. coast of the island, at the mouth of the Liffey, by which it is in- 
tersected : 292 ms. W.N.W. of London, 138 ms. W. of Liverpool, 60 ms. 
W. of Holyhead; lat. 53° 20' N., long. 6° 17' W. The city is supposed 
to be the Eblana of Ptolemy, and was called by the native Irish Ballyath- 
cliatk, " the town on the ford of the hurdles ;" and by the Danes Bivelin or 
Dubhlln, « the black pool," from its vicinity to the muddy swamps at the 
mouth of the river. 

■f Waterford, a city, parliamentary borough, and sea-port of Ireland, pro- 
vince of Munster, on the estuary of the E. Suir, about 10 ms. from the sea, 
and 82 ms. S. S. W. of Dublin ; lat. 52° 13' N., long. 7° 10' W. It is a 
county of itself, comprising 9683 acres, but it is locally situated near the W. 
extremity of the county of Waterford, of which it is the capital. 

t Londonderry, or Derry, a city, parliamentary borough, and river-port of 
Ireland, cap. co. of same name, and a co. by itself, advantageously and beau- 
tifully situated on the W. bank of the Foyle, about 5 ms. above where it falls 
into Lough Foyle, 121 ms. N. by W. of Dublin ; lat. 54° 59' N., long. 7° 
19' W. 

§ Athlone, an inland town of Ireland, counties Wcstmeath and Roscom- 
mon, on the Shannon, 65 ms. W. of Dublin, lat. 53° 32' N., long. 7° 54' 
W. Its name is derived from Ath Luan, " the ford of the rapids." To 
command this ford a castle was built here by the English shortly after their 
arrival in the country, that became a post of great consequence. In 1641 
Athlone was besieged by the Irish army, but, after a resistance of upwards of 
five months, was relieved by the Duke of Ormond. In the subsequent war 
of 1688, it was gallantly defended by Colonel Grace against the English, but 
was taken by storm the next year by Gen. Ginkell, afterwards earl of Athlone. 
The fortifications, which had suffered much during this siege, were renovated, 
but in 1697, the castle and the greater part of the town were destroyed by 
the explosion of a gunpowder magazine, occasioned by lightning. During 
the late war with France, it was made the military depot for the W. of Ire- 
land, and secured by strong works on the Connaught side, covering an extent 
of fifteen acres, and containing two magazines, an ordnance store, an armory 
for 15,000 stand of small-arms, and barracks for 900 men. 

|| Limerick, a city, parliamentary borough, river-port, and co. of itself, in 
Ireland, province of Munster, on the Shannon, 107 ms. S.W. of Dublin, and 
55 ms. E. of Loophead at the mouth of the Shannon ; lat. 52° 40' N., long. 
8° 35' W, It is principally situated on the S. E. side of the r., within the 
co. of Limerick, but partly also on its N. side, within the co. of Clare. The 



304 IRELAND. 

Cork, on the Lee ;* and Drogheda, on the Boyne, four miles 
above the sea.t 

POPULATION OF CITIES AND TOWNS. 

Q. What is the population of Dublin ? 
A. 233,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Cork? 

A. 115,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Belfast? 
A. 75,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Limerick? 
A. 48,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Waterford? 
A. 29,000. (M. A.) 

Q. What towns have from 10,000 to 19,000 inhabitants ? 
A. Armagh, Londonderry, Newry, Dundalk, Bandon, Athlone, 
Sligo, Clonmell, Drogheda, Galway, and Kilkenny. (M. A.) 

DISTANCES. 

Q. How far is it from Ireland to Iceland ? 

A. 700 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. To Labrador ? 

A. 1950 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. To Spain ? 

A. 600 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From Cape Clear (Ireland) to Land's End (England) ? 

A. 195 ms. (M. A.) 

PROVINCES. 

Q. In what part of Ireland is Ulster ? 

A. In the north ? 

Ulster is one of the four provinces into which Ireland is divided, and 
the most northerly, comprising the counties of Donegal, Londonderry, An- 
trim, Tyrone, Fermanagh, Monaghan, Armagh, Down, and Cavan. 

This province is bounded E. by the Irish Sea, N. and W. by the Atlantic 

co. of the city, which is identical with the parliamentary borough, includes 
an area of about 27,000 acres. 

* Cork, a city and river-port of Ireland, province of Munster, on the Lee, 
11 ms. above where it discharges itself into Cork Harbour; lat. 51° 53' N., 
long. 8° 29' W. ; 135 ms. S. W. of Dublin. This is the second city of 
Ireland in respect of population and commercial importance, and forms a co. 
in itself, having a local jurisdiction separate from that of the co. of Cork, by 
which it is surrounded. The co. of the city comprises 44,463 acres. 

+ Drogheda, a parliamentary borough and sea-port town of Ireland, being 
a co. in itself, but locally in the counties of Meath and Louth, province of 
Leinster, on the Boyne, four miles above its embouchure in the Irish Sea, 
and 25 ms. N. of Dublin. 



IRELAND. 305 

Ocean, S. W. by the province of Connaught, and S. by that of Leinster. 
The principal place is Belfast. 

Ulster comprises 54 baronies, 332 parishes, 8450 sq. ms., 5,408,070 
English statute acres, 3,754,352 cultivated acres, 1,469,922 acres of unim- 
proved mountains and bogs, 183,796 acres in lakes. The pop. in 1841 was 
2,388,890. 

Q. In what part of Ireland is Leinster ? 

A. In the east ? 

Leinster is one of the four great provinces into which Ireland is divided, 
on the E. side of the Island, comprising the counties of Carlow, Dublin, 
Kildare, Kilkenny, King's, Longford, Louth, Meath, Queen's, Westmeath, 
Wexford, and Wicklow. 

This province is bounded N. by Ulster, E. and S. by St. George's Channel, 
and W. by Munster and Connaught. Dublin is the capital. 

Leinster comprises 97 baronies, 992 parishes, 7472 sq. ms., 4,782,058 Eng- 
lish statute acres, 4,114,160 cultivated acres, 635,424 acres of unimproved 
mountains and bogs, 32,474 acres in lakes. The pop. in 1841 was 1,971,970. 

Q. In what part of Ireland is Munster ? 

A. In the south-west. 

Munster is one of the four great provinces into which Ireland is divided, 
comprising the S. W. portion of the Island, and counties of Clare, Cork, 
Kerry, Limerick, Tipperary, and Waterford. 

This province is bounded N. by Connaught, E. by Leinster, and S. and 
W. by the Atlantic. The principal place is Cork. 

Munster comprises 59 baronies, 816 parishes, 9187 sq. ms., 5,879,872 
English statute acres, 3,929,852 cultivated acres, 1,905,368 acres of unim- 
proved mountains and bogs, 44,652 acres in lakes. The pop. in 1841 was 
2,395,800. 

Q. In what part of Ireland is Connaught ? 

A. In the west. 

Connaught is one of the four provinces into which Ireland is divided, 
on its W. coast, containing the counties of Galway, Leitrim, Mayo, Roscom- 
mon, and Sligo. 

This province is bounded N. by Donegal and Sligo Bays, E. by the River 
Shannon, which separates it from Leinster, S. by Munster, and W. by the 
Atlantic Ocean. Galway is the principal town in Connaught. 

Connaught comprises 42 baronies, 296 parishes, 6765 sq. ms., 4,329,608 
English statute acres, 2,805,109 cultivated acres, 1,330,022 acres of unim- 
proved mountains and bogs, 194,477 acres in lakes. The pop. in 1841 was 
1,418,613. • 

General totals of the above provinces : 252 baronies ; 2436 parishes ; 
31,000 sq. ms.; 20,399,608 English statute acres; 14,603,473 cultivated 
acres ; 5,340,736 acres of unimproved mountains and bogs ; 455,399 acres 
in lakes ; pop. in 1841, 8,175,273 ; pop. per square mile, 263.7. 

The foregoing provinces were in ancient times independent kingdoms. 
/ For a further description, see Key, page 228 : also, under 
head of British Isles, Key, pages 262-3. 
26* 



306 PRANCE. 

FRANCE. 
Page 247.— Lesson 168.— Map No. 21. 

Q. What bounds France on the north ? 

A. English Channel, Strait of Dover, and Belgium. 

Q. South? 

A. Spain, and the Mediterranean Sea ? 

Q. East? 

A. Baden, Switzerland, and Sardinia. 

Q. West? 

A. Bay of Biscay. 

Q. What river flows into the English Channel ? 

A. Seine. 

Q. Into the Bay of Biscay ? 

A. Loire, and Garonne. 

Q. Into the Gulf of Lyons ? 

A. Rhone. 

Q. How long is each river ? 

A. Seine is 300 ms. ; Loire, 500 ; Garonne, 300 ; Rhone, 450. 
(M. A.) 

Q. What river forms the boundary between France and Baden ? 

A. Rhine. 

Q. What lake does the Rhone flow from ? 

A. Geneva. 

Q. What mountains separate France from Spain ? 

A. Pyrenees. 

Q. From Sardinia ? 

A. The Alps ? 

Q. From Switzerland ? 

.#. The Jura Mts. 

Q. What mountains between the Rhone and Loire ? 

A. Cevennes. 

Q. West of the Loire ? 

./?. Auvergne. 

Q. West of the Rhine ? 

.#. Vosges Mts. 

Q. What Islands on the coast of France ? 

.#. Norman Isles, Belleisle, Noirmoutier, Dieu, De Re, and 
Oleron. (M. A.) 

Q. Which belong to Great Britain ? 

A. Norman Isles. 

Q. What is the population of Paris ? 

A. 1,000,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Marseilles? 

A. 170,000. (M. A.) 





FRANCE. 3(W 


Q. Lyons? 


A. 


200,000. (M. A.) 


Q- 


Bordeaux ? 


A. 


95,000. (M. A.) 


Q. 


Rouen ? 


A. 


100,000. (M. A.) 


ft 


Nantes ? 


A. 


75,000. (M. A.) 


Q. 


Lille? 


A. 


72,000. (M. A.) 


£. 


Toulouse ? 


A. 


68,000. (M. A.) 


Q. 


Strasburg ? 


A. 


50,000. (M. A.) 


Q. 


Orleans ? 


A. 


40,000. (M. A.) 


Q- 


Toulon ? 


A. 


45,000. (M. A.) 


Q. 


What Island in the Mediterranean Sea belongs to France ? 


A. 


Corsica. 


Q. 


How long and wide is it ? 


A. 


120 ms. long, and 50 wide. (M. A.) 


Q. 


How many inhabitants has Bastia ? 


A. 


12,000. (M. A.) 


Q. 


Ajaccio ? 


A. 


9000. (M. A.) 


Q. 


On what river is Bordeaux ?* 


A. 


Garonne. 


Q- 


Rouen ?t 


A. 


Seine. 


Q- 


Nantes ?± 


A. 


Loire. 



* Bordeaux, or Bourdeaux (Anc. Burdigala), is an important commercial 
city and sea-port of France ; capital of department Gironde, in the centre 
of an extensive plain, on the left or W. bank of the Garonne, 55 ms. S. E. 
from its embouchure, 102 ms. N. N. E. of Bayonne, and 307 ms. S. W. of 
Paris ; lat. 44° 50' N., long. 0° 33' W. 

+ Rouen (Anc. Rothomagus) is one of the principal cities of France, and 
the great seat of its cotton manufacture, department Seine-Inferieure, of 
which it is the capital, on the Seine, 44 ms. (direct distance) from its mouth, 
and 67 ms. N.W. from Paris; lat. 49° 26' N. long. 1° 5'E. 

+ Nantes ("Anc. Mamnetes, or Civitas Namnetum) is a large and cele- 
brated commercial city and port of France, department Loire-Inferieure, of 
which it is the capital, on the Loire, where it is joined by the Erdre and 
Severe-Nantaise, about 34 ms. from its mouth, and 210 ms. S. W. from Paris ; 
lat. 47° 13' N., long. 1° 32' W. 



308 SPAIN. 

Q. Tours?* 
A. Loire. 
Q. Orleans 1% 
A. Loire. 
Q. Toulouse ?t 
A. Garonne. 
Q. Strasburg ?§ 
A. 111. 

Q. Point out Tours, and other noted battle-fields. 
A. Battle of Tours in 732; Crecy, 1346; Poitiers, 1356; 
Agincourt, 1415 ; Toulouse, 1814; Orthes, 1814. (M. A.) 
For a further description, see Key, page 229. 



SPAIN. 

Page 249.-— Lesson \m.—Map No. 21. 

Q. What bounds Spain on the north ? 

A. France, and the Bay of Biscay 

Q. South? 

A. Mediterranean Sea, and Atlantic Ocean, 

Q. East ? 

A. Mediterranean Sea. 

Q. West? 

A. Portugal. 

Q. Which are the chief rivers of Spain ? 

A. Douro, Tagus, Guadiana, Guadalquivir, and Ebro. 

* Tours (Anc. Csesaromagus) is a city of France, department Indre et 
Loire, of which it is the capital ; it is surrounded by extensive and fertile 
plains, and is itself placed on the narrow tongue of land between the rivers 
Loire and Cher, close to the point of their confluence, 127 ms. S. W. from 
Paris. Lat. 47° 23' N., long. 0° 41' E. 

f Orleans ( Ar5c. Genabum, and afterward Aureliand) is a city of France, 
in the centre of the kingdom, capital department Loiret, on the Loire, 34 
ms. N. E. from Blois, and 68 ms. S. S. W. from Paris. Lat. 47° 54' N. ; 
long. 2° 45' E. 

| Toulouse, or Thoulouse (Anc. Tolosa), is one of the principal and 
most ancient cities in the S. of France, department Haute-Garonne, of which 
it is the capital, on the Garonne, at the junction of the canals of Languedoc 
and Briare with that river, 132 ms. S.E. from Bordeaux ; lat. 43° 35' N., 
long. 1° 26' E. 

§ Strasburg, or Strasbourg, (Anc. Argeritoratum), a fortified city of 
France, on its E. frontier, department Bas-Rhin, of which it is the capital, 
on the 111, within a short distance of the Rhine, to which its glacis extends, 
and across which it communicates with Kehl by a bridge principally of boats, 
about 100 ms. S.S. W. from Mentz, and 250 ms. E. by S. from Paris ; lat. 
48° 34' N., long. 7° 44' E. 



SPAIN. 309 

Q. How long are each of these ? 

A. Douro is 450 ms. long ; Tagus, 550; Guadiana, 500 ; Gua- 
dalquivir, 450 ; Ebro, &50. (M. A.) 

Q. Which are the chief mountains ? 

A. Pyrenees, Cantabrian, Sierra Morena, and Sierra Nevada. 

Q. How high are they ? 

A. Pyrenees, 10,000 ft. ; Cantabrian, 11,200 ft. ; Sierra Morena, 
5883 ft. ; Sierra Nevada, 11,678 ft. (M. A.) 

Q. Which separate France from Spain ? 

A. Pyrenees. 

Q. What mountain lies west of Barcelona ? 

A. Montserat.* 

Q. What Islands lie east of Spain ? 

A. Balearic. 

Q. What strait separates Spain from Africa ? 

A. Gibraltar. 

Q. How wide is it ? 

A. 15 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Madrid ? 

A. 224,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Barcelona? 

A. 181,000. (M.A.) 

Q. Seville? 

A. 91,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Granada? 

A. 59,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Valencia ? 

A. 66,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cordova ? 

A. 39,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cadiz? 

A. 64,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Malaga? 

A. 75,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Saragossa ? 

A. 44,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Point out the places noted for sieges. 

A. Saragossa, Badajoz, Pampeluna, St. Sebastian, and Cadiz. 

Q. Battles? 

A. Battle of Talavera in 1809 ; Ciudad Rodrigo, 1812 ; Sala- 
manca, 1812; Vittoria, 1813. (M. A.) 

Q. Naval battles ? 

A. Jervis' victory, off Cape St. Vincent, in 1797; Nelson's 
victory, off Cape Trafalgar, in 1805. (M. A.) 

For a further description of Spain, see Key, page 229. 

* This is noted for its singular form and the monasteries built on it. (M. G. 
p. 249.) 



310 PORTUGAL. 

PORTUGAL. . 
Page 251.— Lesson 170.— Map No. 21. 

Q. What bounds Portugal on the north and east ? 
A. Spain. 
Q. South and west ? 
A. Atlantic Ocean. - 
Q. Which are the principal rivers ? 
A. Tagus, Douro, and Guadiana. 
Q. How long is each of these ? 

A. Tagus is 550 ms. long; Douro, 450; Guadiana, 500, 
(M. A.) 

Q. On what river is Lisbon ?* 

A. Tagus. 

Q. Oporto ?t 

A. Douro. 

Q. Coimbra?:}: 

A. Mondego. 

Q. Which are the principal mountains ? 

A. Sierra Estrelia ? 

Q. What is the population of Lisbon ? 

A. 298,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Oporto? 

A. 80,000. (M-A.) 

Q. Coimbra ? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

Q. St. Ubes ? 

A. 15,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Braga? 

A. 14,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Elvas? 

A. 10,000. (M.A.) 

Q. Evora? 

A. 14,000. (M. A.) 

* Lisbon (Port. Lisboa ; Anc. Olisipo, and afterward Felicitas Julia), is 
the capital city and principal sea-port of Portugal, in the comarca of its own 
name, admirably situated for commerce on the right bank, and near the 
mouth of the Tagus, 172 ms. S. from Oporto, 220 ms. N. W. from Cadiz, 
and 320 ms. W. S. W. from Madrid. Lat. 38° 42' N., long. 9° 5' W. 

+ Oporto, or Porto, is an important commercial city and sea-port of Portu- 
gal, on the N. bank of the Douro, about 2 ms. from its mouth, 174 ms. 
N. by E. from Lisbon ; lat. 41° 10' N., long. 8° 37' W. 

\ Coimbra, a city of Portugal, province Beira, capital of a district, and see 
of a bishop, partly on a steep rocky precipice, and partly on a plain con- 
tiguous to the Mondego, 115 ms. N.N.E. from Lisbon ; lat. 40° 12' N., 
long. 8° 26' W. 



GERMAN V. 311 

Q. Where is Ourique ? 

A. In the S. part of Portugal. 

Q. Vimeira? 

A. In the S. W. part of Portugal. 

Q. Busaco? 

A. In the N. W. part of Portugal. 

For a further description, see Key, pages 229-30, 



GERMANY.* 

Page 260.— Lesson 177.— Map No. 20. 

Q. What bounds Germany on the North ? 

A. The North Sea, Denmark, and the Baltic Sea. 

Q. South? 

A. Switzerland, and Lombardy and Venice. 

Q. East? 

A. Poland, Galicia, and Hungary. 

£. West? 

A. Holland, Belgium, and France. 

Q. How many German States are there ?t 

A. Thirty-nine. 

Q. How many are empires ? 

A. One. 

Q. Kingdoms? 

A. Five. 

Q. Grand Duchies? 

A. Seven. 

Q. Duchies? 

A. Nine. 

Q. Principalities ? 

A. Ten. 

Q. Electorates? 

A. One. 

Q. Landgraviates ? 

A. One. 

Q. Lordships? 

A. One. 

Q. Republics? 

A. Four. 

Q. How many States are Catholic ? 

A. Six. 

Q. Protestant ? 

A. Thirty-three. 

* For description, see Key, pages 230 to 239. 

f See table of the German States, in Mitchell's Atlas, Table No. 



312 GERMANY. 

Q. Absolute in government? 

A. Five. 

Q. How long and wide is Germany ? 

A. It is 600 ms. long, and 550 ms. wide. (M. A.) 

Q. Its area? 

A. 251,000 sq. ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Population ? 

A. 40,000,000. (M.A.) 

Q. To what state does Holstein and Lauenburg belong ? 

A. Denmark. 

Q. To what states does Luxemburg belong ? 

A. Belgium and Holland. 

GERMAN STATES. 

Q. Point out the different States on the Map.* 

A. Austria, Prussia, Bavaria, Wirtemberg, Hanover, Saxony, 
Baden, Hesse Cassel, Hesse Darmstadt, Hesse Homburg, Hol- 
stein, &c, Luxemburg, Saxe Weimar, Saxe Coburg Gotha, Saxe 
Altenburg, Saxe Meiningen Hilburghausen, Brunswick, Mecklen- 
burg Schwerin, Mecklenburg Strelitz, Oldenburg, Nassau, Anhalt 
Dessau, Anhalt Bernburg, Anhalt Cothen, Reuss Greitz, Reuss 
Schleitz, Hohenzollern Hechingen, Hohenzollern Sigmaringen, 
Lichtenstein, Schwartzburg Sondershausen, Schwartzburg Rudol- 
stadt, Lippe Detmold, Lippe Schauenburg,Waldeck,Kniphausen, 
Lubec, Hamburg, Bremen, Frankfort. (M. A.) 

RIVERS. 

Q. What Rivers flow into the North Sea ? 

A. Rhine, Ems, Weser, Elbe, and Eyder. 

Q. Into the Baltic Sea? 

A. Oder. 

Q. How long is each of these ? 

A. Rhine, 950 ms.; Ems, 150; Weser, 300; Elbe, 600; 
Oder, 450. (M. A.) 

Q. Which is the principal river in the south of Germany ? 

A. The Danube. 

Q. Into what river do the Meuse, Moselle, Mayne, and Neckar 
flow? 

A. The Rhine. 

Q. The Lech, Iser, Inn, Ens, Leitha, March, Raab, and Drave ? 

A. The Danube. 

The Save also flows into the Danube. (M. G.) 

* The smaller German States which have a common title, will be found 
under their respective heads : thus, the Saxon Duchies are under Saxe ; 
those of Anhalt, under Anhalt, &c. The capitals designate the general 
position of the special divisions. (M. G. — this lesson.) 



GERMANY. 313 

Q. Into what river do the Hunte, Aller, Fulda, and Werra, 
flow? 

A. The Weser. 

Q. The Moldau, Mulda, Saal, Havel, and Ilmenau ? 

A. The Elbe. 

The Neisse, Bober, and Wartha, are the chief branches of the 
Oder. (M. G.) 

Q. Into what sea does the Danube flow ? 

A. The Black Sea. (See Map No. 18.) 

LAKES. 

Q. Where is Muritz Lake ? 

A. It is in the S. E. part of the Grand Duchy of Mecklenburg 
Schwerin, being the largest lake in N. Germany. (M. A.) 

This lake has an area of more than 50 sq. ms., and is elevated 216 feet 
above the level of the sea. 

Q. Where is Lake Schweiloch ? 

A. It is in the S. part of Brandenburg, (a province of E. 
Prussia), and flows into the R. Spree. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Ammer Lake ? 

A. It is in the S. part of Bavaria, and flows into Ammer R. 
(M. A.) 

This lake is about 12 ms. long, and 27 in circuit. 

Q. Where is Cheim Lake ? 

A. It is in the S. E. part of Bavaria, and flows by a small branch 
into the Inn R. (M. A.) 

This lake is about 35 ms. in circuit. 

Q. Where is Atter Lake ? 

A. It is in the Archduchy of Upper Austria, and flows into a 
branch of the Danube. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Traun Lake ? 

A. It is in the Archduchy of Upper Austria, lying E. of Atter 
Lake, and flows into a branch of the Danube. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Lake of Constance ? 

A. It lies between Switzerland and Germany, surrounded by 
the territories of Baden, Wirtemberg, Bavaria, Austria (Vorarlberg,) 
and Switzerland, and flows into the Rhine. (M. A.) 

Constance (Anc. Lacus Brigantinus, or Suevicus, Germ. Bodensee,) is 
situated in central Europe, being the largest belonging to Germany, between 
lat. 47° 29' and 47° 49' N., and long. 9° 2' and 9° 45' E. Length N. W. 
to S. E., about 45 ms., greatest breadth about 83 ms. ; area, about 200 sq. 
ms. ; elevation above the level of the sea, 1255 ft. ; greatest depth, 964 ft. 
Its most N. portion consists of a narrow prolongation, called the Neberling 
Lake. The Rhine enters the Lake of Constance on the S. E., and issues 
from its N. W. extremity at the city of Constance, connecting it with the 
lake called the Unter or Zeller-see, which contains the fertile Island of Reiche- 
nau, and is sometimes considered part of the Lake of Constance. 
27 



314 GERMANY. 

Q Where is Cirknitz Lake •? 

A. It is in Camiola (a duchy of Austria) intersected by the 
parallel of 45° 45' N. lat., and the meridian of 14° 23' E. long. 

This lake is about 20 ms. in circumference. 

Cirkktitz or Zirknitz is an alternating lake : it is full of water in winter, 
which passes off in the early part of summer, and the bottom of the lake 
becomes a pasture-ground. (M. G., this lesson.) 

ISLANDS. 

Q. Where are the Islands of Rugen, Usedom, and Wollin ? 
A. They are in the Baltic Sea, on the coast of the Prussian 
province of Pomerania. (M. A.) 
Q. To what state do they belong ? 
A. To Pomerania. 

Q. W'hat Island lies west of Holstein ? 
A. Heligoland. 

Q. To what power does it belong ? 
A. To Great Britain ? 

MOUNTAINS. 

Q. Where are the mts. called the Fichtelgebirge ? 

A. Fichtelgebirge, (i. e. Pine Mountains), is an irregular 
mountain mass situated principally in the N. E. part of Bavaria. 
(M. A.) 

These mts. may be considered as the centre and nucleus of the mts. in 
central Germany, and from them branch, in four directions, the ranges com- 
posing the watershed that divides the rivers of the Black Sea from those of 
the Baltic and North Sea. 

Q. Where are the Erzgebirge Mts. ? (i. e. Ore Mountains.) 

A. Diverging N. E. from the Fichtelgebirge, they form the 
boundary between Saxony and Bohemia, having their scarped side 
S. towards the R. Eger. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Riesengebirge Mts. ? 

A. They form the boundary between Prussian Silesia on the 
N., and Austrian Bohemia and Moravia on the S. (M. A.) 

They form the E. continuations of the Erzgebirge, which join the Carpa- 
thian ridge near the source of the Oder and Vistula. The last three ranges 
form the Sudetic Mts. (M. G.) 

Q. Where are the Hartz Mts. ? 

A. Harz or Hartz (Silva Hercynia, Tac), a mountain chain 
of Germany, on the S. E. frontier of Hanover, connected by low 
hills with the Thuringer-wald, a W. offset from the Fichtelge- 
birge, the great centre of the German mountain system. 

These mts. extend farther N. than any other chain, and immediately at its 
foot commences the great plain which stretches N. to the Baltic, and from 
the North Sea to the Volga R. 



GERMANY. 315 

Q. Where is the Bohmerwald 1 ■ 

A. It forms the S. W. boundary of Austrian Bohemia, sepa- 
rating it from Bavaria. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the ArLberg Mts. ? 

A. They are on the S. frontier of Bavaria. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Vosges Mts. ? 

A. Vosges (Germ. Wasgau) Mts., a chain in the N. E. part of 
France, which extends parallel with the Rhine, separating the 
departments of Haute and Bas-Rhin on the E. from those of Haute- 
Saone, Vosges, and Meurthe on the W., stretching also into Rhe- 
nish Bavaria, and terminating to the N. E. in Mont Tonnerre. 

Q. How high are all the foregoing Mts. ? 

A. Fichtelgebirge, 5200 ft. ; Erzgebirge, 3900 ft. ; Reisenge- 
birge, 5200ft. ; Hartz, 4500 ft.; Bohmerwald or Bohemian Forest 
4500 ft. ; Arlberg, 5000 ft. ; Vosges, 4500 ft. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Black Forest or Schwarzwald ? 

A. It stretches from the banks of the Rhine, where that r. forms 
the Swiss boundary, in a northern direction through the Grand 
Duchy of Baden as far as the Neckar R., and towards the E. far 
into the kingdom of Wirtemberg, falling gradually in the latter 
direction with prolonged offsets, but suddenly and steeply towards 
the valley of the Rhine. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Odenwald ? 

A. It . extends from the N. E. part of Baden into Hesse 
Darmstadt, or the Grand Duchy of Hesse, in a N. W. direction. 
(M. A.) 

The highest summit, the Katzenbuchel, 2180 ft., lies in Baden ; but the 
greater part of the chain belongs to Hesse. 

Q. Where are the Hercynian or Wild Mts. ? 

A. They form the S. E. boundary of Bohemia, dividing it from 
Moravia, and separating the affluents of the Elbe from those of the 
Danube. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Alps ? 

A. They begin on the side of France, between the territory of 
Genoa and the country of Nice, pass into Switzerland, cross that 
country and the Tyrol, separating for the most part Italy from 
France, Switzerland and Germany, and terminate, after many 
windings, near the Gulf of Trieste, on the Gulf of Venice. 

The Alps compose the great central table-land of Europe, over a sixth 
part of which their ramifications are estimated to extend. The most ele- 
vated summits of the Alpine system yield in elevation only to those of the 
Caucasus ; Mont Blanc, in Savoy, the culminating point, is 15,668 ft. in 
height. The Alps divide into nine principal branches, which spread over 
Switzerland, France, Germany, the Austrian empire, Turkey, Greece, and 
Italy ; the Apennine, Carpathian, and Balkan Mts., &c, all belong to, or 
are intimately connected with, this system. 

For a further description of the Alps, see Europe, lesson 150^A, 
Map No. 18, Key, pages 272-3. 



316 GERMANY. 

Q. How long are the Alps ? 

A. 700 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Point out the Rhetian, Julian, Noric, and Styrian Alps. 

Ji. They stretch from the frontier of Switzerland through Tyrol, 
following the right bank of the Inn, as far as the point of junction 
of Upper Austria and Carinthia ; here they take an E. N. E. 
direction through Styria into Hungary, and subside in the Leitha 
chain, near the Danube. (M. A.) 

GERMAN PROVINCES OF AUSTRIA.* 

Q. Where is Bohemia ? 

A. In the N. E. part of the empire ; it has N. E., Prussian Si- 
lesia; N. and N.W., Saxony; S. W., Bavaria; and S. and S.E., 
the archduchy of Austria and Moravia. (M. A.) 

The kingdom of Bohemia (Germ. Bohmen, Boh. Czech) is an inland 
country, occupying the centre of Europe, and forming an important portion 
of the Austrian empire, between lat. 48° 34' and 51° 3' N., and long. 12° 5' 
and 16° 46' E. It contains 20,285 sq. ms. Pop. 3,828,479. Its shape is 
an irregular rhomboid ; greatest length, E. to W., 200 ms. 5 greatest length, 
N. to S., 170 ms. The principal rivers of Bohemia are the Elbe, Moldau, 
Beraun, Eger, and Sazawa. Chief towns, Prague, the capital, Bud weis and 
Klattau. 

Q. Where are Moravia and Austrian Silesia ? 

A. They are in the N. part of the empire ; on the N. they have 
Prussian Silesia ; E. and S. E., Galicia and Hungary ; S„ the lat- 
ter country and Lower Austria ; and W. and N. W., Bohemia. 
(M. A.) 

Moravia (Germ. Mahreri) is an important province of the Austrian 
empire, which, including Austrian Silesia, incorporated with it since 1783, 
extends between lat. 48° 40' and 50° 25' N., and the 15th and 19th degs. 
of E. long. It is of a rhomboidal shape ; greatest length about 185 ms. ; 
average breadth 55 ms. Area, about 10,240 sq. ms. Pop. in 1838, 
2,143,052. Principal rivers of Moravia, the March, Schwartz, Iglawa and 
Thaya. Chief towns, Brunn, the capital, Olmutz, Iglau, and Sternberg. 
The chief rivers of Silesia are the Oder and Vistula. Capital, Troppau. 

Q. Where are Upper and Lower Austria ? 

A. In the W. part of the empire ; they form an archduchy 
which constitutes the principal part of the hereditary dominions 
of the house of Austria. The archduchy is bounded N. by Bohe- 
mia and Moravia, E. by Hungary, S. by Styria, Ulyria, and the 
Tyrol, and W. by the Tyrol and Bavaria. It is divided into 
Upper and Lower Austria. The former occupies the western, the 
latter the eastern portion of the archduchy. (M. A.) 

The Archduchy of Austria, the nucleus and centre of the Austrian em- 
pire, is divided into the two provinces of Austria above the Ens, and Austria 
below the Ens, commonly termed Upper and Lower Austria. The lower 

* See Key, page 230. 



GERMANY. 317 

province has for centuries experienced no alteration in its boundaries ; but 
Upper Austria was enlarged in the present century by the incorporation of 
the archbishopric of Salzburg, with the exception of the lordship of Berch- 
tesgaden, which fell to Bavaria, and of the district lying along the right bank 
of the Inn from the Salza to the mouth of that river. The archduchy of 
Austria lies between lat. 46° 57' and 49° 0' N., and long. 12° 46' and 17° 7' 
E. ; and, according to the measurement of the imperial engineers, contains 
15,017 English sq. ms., of which 7317 belong to the lower, and 7700 to the 
upper province. The principal rivers of these provinces are the Danube, 
Inn, Salza, Ens, Leitha, March and Thaya. The chief towns of Upper Aus- 
tria are, Lintz, Salzburg, and Steyer. Of the Lower province, Vienna, the 
capital of the empire, Neustadt and Glocknitz. 

Q. Where is the Tyrol ? 

A. The Tyrol (Anc. Rhsetia, with part of Noricam) is a pro- 
vince of the Austrian empire ; having N., Bavaria ; E., the arch- 
duchy of Austria, and Carinthia ; S., the Lombardo- Venetian king- 
dom ; and W., Switzerland (the Grisons, &c.),and the principality 
of Lichtenstein. (M. A.) 

This province lies between 45° 40' and 47° 44' N. lat., and 9° 32' and 
12° 55' E. long. Length, E, to W., about 120 ms. ; average breadth some- 
what less than 100 ms. Area estimated at about 11,000 sq. ms. Pop., in 
1838, 831,298. This country may be regarded as an extension of Switzer- 
land towards the E. It is traversed in its whole extent by the main ridge 
of the Alps, which has here some of its loftiest summits, including, among 
others,- mount Ortler, 12,823 ft., and the Gross Glockner, 12,567 ft. above the 
level of the sea. This grand chain separates the waters that flow N. to the 
Rhine and the upper Danube from those that flow S. to the Po and the Adri- 
atic (Gulf of Venice), and the lower Danube. But, exclusive of this gigantic 
chain, an inferior chain, from 50 to 60 ms. S. of the latter, divides the country 
into three portions : the valley of the Inn, to the N. of the high Alps; that 
of the Drave, between the high Alps and the inferior chain ; and the coun- 
try to the S. of the latter, drained by the Adige, and other rivers flowing 
into the Adriatic (Gulf of Venice). The principal rivers of the Tyrol are 
the Inn, Rhine, Lech and Adige. The chief towns are Innspruck, the capi- 
tal, Trent, Roveredo, Botzen and Halle. 

Q. Where is Styria ? 

A. It has N. the archduchy of Austria ; E. Hungary ; S. E. 
Croatia ; S. Carniola ; and W. Carinthia and Upper Austria. 
(M. A.) 

The province of Sttria (Germ. Sfeier?Jiark) is an interior territory, situ- 
ated immediately S. of Upper'and Lower Austria, It lies between 45° 55' 
and 47° 40' N. lat., and 13° 30' and 16° 10' E. long. It varies in length 
from N. to S., from 120 to 40 ms. ; from.E. to W. it is about 110 ms. in 
extent.. Area, 8531 sq. ms. Pop. in 1838, 940,951. This province is di- 
vided into Upper and Lower Styria ; the first is a rugged, mountainous dis- 
trict, through which the Styrian Alps extend from E. to W. ; but the other 
is for the most part a fertile, level plain, watered by the Drave, the Muhr, 
the Raab, and other streams. The Ens waters the northern part of the Up- 
per province. Upper Styria is famous for its iron, much of which is made 
27* 



318 GERMANY. 

into steel, and exported to other countries. The towns of Styria are, Gratz, 
the capital, Marburg, and Cilly. 

Q. Where are Carinthia and Carniola ? 

Ji. They have N. Upper Austria and Styria ; E. Styria ; S. 
Croatia and Istria, and W. a part of the government of Trieste, the 
Lombardo- Venetian kingdom, and the Tyrol. (M. A.) 

The Duchies of Cahinthia and Carniola (Germ. Karnthen and Krain, 
form two contiguous inland provinces of the Austrian empire ; the former 
being included in the ancient Noricum, and the latter in Illyricum : they 
now respectively form the northern and central portions of the kingdom of 
lllyria, as established in 1815, chiefly between lat. 45° 30' and 47° 10' N., 
and long. 12° 40' and 15° 40' E. Area, 6930 sq. ms. Pop. (1838) 748,785, 
about 3-5ths of which belong to Carniola. These provinces compose that 
part of lllyria forming the government of Laybach, and are divided into 
five circles, viz., Carinthia into Klagenfurt and Villach, or Lower and Upper 
Carinthia ; and Carniola into those of Laybach, Adelsberg, and Neustadt. 
The Save and the Drave are the principal rivers of these duchies. Klagen- 
furth is the capital of Carinthia, and Laybach of Carniola. 

For the other great divisions of Austria, see Map No. 18. They 
are Hungary, Galicia, and Dalmatia. Chief towns, Pest, Lem- 
berg, and Zara. (M. G., p. 261 — this lesson.) 

Q. Where is Hungary? 

A. It is bounded on the N. and N. E. by Moravia and Galicia, 
E. by Transylvania, S. by Turkey, Sclavonia and Croatia, and 
W. by Styria and Lower Austria. (M. A.) 

Hukgakt (Hung. Magyar Orszag, Germ. Ungarn) is an extensive king- 
dom of Central or S. E. Europe, forming a part of the Austrian empire, situ- 
ated between 44° 28' and 49° 36' N. lat., and 16° and 25° E. long. Its 
extreme length, from E. to W., is about 420 ms. ; the greatest breadth from 
N. to S. is about 330 ms. The area is computed at 78,822 sq. ms. Pop. 
uncertain, but estimated at upwards of 10,000,000. The kingdom of Hun- 
gary includes, besides Hungary proper, Sclavonia, Croatia, and several dis- 
tricts of less importance. The government is called a limited monarchy, but 
aristocracy is predominant, and the nobles have great power, while the great 
mass of the peasantry are in a state of extreme degradation. The kingdom 
of Hungary formerly included, besides its present territories, Transylvania, 
Dalmatia, and the Military Frontier ; which countries, since their annexa- 
tion to the crown of Austria, still go under the general name of the Hunga- 
rian dominions. Hungary is a well-watered country, and contains many 
rivers. The latter consist of the Danube and its branches, the Theiss, Maros, 
Koros, Waay and Raab. Buda, on the W. bank of the Danube, is the resi- 
dence of the viceroy and his court, but Pest, on the opposite side of the river, 
is the seat of the judicial tribunals of the kingdom, so that the two cities, 
taken together, may be considered as the capital. Presburg, on the Danube, 
Debretzen, S. of the Theiss, Szegedin, at the junction of the Theiss and 
Maros, and Temesvar, are the other chief towns. 

Q. Where is Galicia ? 

Jl. It lies to the N. of the Carpathians, by which it is separated 
from Hungary ; on the N. W. Galicia is separated from the state 



GERMANY. 319 

of Cracow, and a part of the kingdom of Poland, by the Vistula ; 
on the N. and N. E. part of Poland and Russia ; on the E. is the 
western part of Russia; and S. E. is Moldavia. (M. A.) 

The kingdom of Gazicia (Germ. Galizien) forms the N. E. portion of 
the Austrian dominions, being situated between 47° and 50° 50' N. lat., and 
18o 54' and 26° 37' E. long. Its length, from E. to W., is about 350 ms. ; 
its greatest breadth, from N. to S., near 230 ms. The area is computed at 
32,949 sq. ms. Pop. about 4,600,000. The chief rivers of Galicia are the 
Vistula, the Bug, the Dniester, and the Pruth. Lemberg is the capital; the 
other towns of any importance are Brody, Bochnia, Sambor, Tarnopol and 
Stanislaus. 

Q. Where is Dalmatia? 

A. It lies in the S. part of the empire ; on the N. it is bounded 
by Hungary, N. E. and E. by Turkey, and S. W. by the Adriatic 
(Gulf of Venice). (M. A.) 

Dalmatia (Anc. part of lllyricum) forms a kingdom belonging to the 
crown of Austria, situated between 42° and 45° N. lat., and 14° 30' and 19° 
E. long., being the most S. province of the Austrian empire, comprising a 
long and narrow territory lying along the N. E. shore of the x\driatic, and 
numerous islands in that sea. Length of the continental portion, N. W. to 
S. E., 250 ms. : breadth greatest towards the N., where it averages nearly 
40 ms. ; but it tapers thence gradually to its S. extremity, and in its lower 
half is never more than 15 ms. in width. Area, 5098 sq. ms. Pop. 320,000. 
The rivers of Dalmatia are of small extent, and all flow into the Gulf of 
Venice ; the most important are the Narenta, Cettina and Kerka. Zara is 
the capital ; the other towns of any note are Spalatro, Ragusa, and Cattaro. 

GERMAN PROVINCES OF PRUSSIA.* 

Q. Where is Pomerania? 

$_. It is a large province of the Prussian states, lying along the 
S. coast of the Baltic, having E. and S. the provinces of West 
Prussia and Brandenburg, and W. Mecklenburg. 

This province extends between 53° and 54° 50' N. lat., and from 12° 20' 
to 18° 2' E. long. Its form is oblong, its length (from E. to W.) being 
above 200 ms. ; while its breadth varies from 30 to 60 and 80 ms. Area, 
12,179 sq. ms. Pop. in 1837, 970,117, of whom 956,334 were Protestants. 
It is divided into three regencies, and these again into 25 circles. Surface 
flat. Principal towns, Stettin, Stralsund, Greifswald, Stargard, Stolpe, &c. 
Principal rivers, Oder, Leba, Stolpe, Rega, Persante, Ucker, Peene, and Ihna. 
The HafF is a large bay, or rather lagoon, of an irregular form, which com- 
municates with the Baltic by the mouths of the Oder. 

Q. Where is Brandenburg ? 

A. It has N., Mecklenburg and Pomerania ; E., the provinces 
of Prussia and Posen ; S., Silesia and the kingdom of Saxony ; 
and W., Prussian Saxony, Anhalt, and Hanover. [See Map of 
Austria and Prussia.) 

Brandenburg is an important province of the Prussian states, consisting, 
principally of the ancient mark or marquisate of Brandenburg, between 

~ * See Key, pages 230-31. 



320 GERMANY. 

51° 10' and 53° 37' N. lat., and 11° 13' and 16° 12' E. long. Area, 
15,000 sq. ms. Pop., in 1837, 1,694,042, of whom 1,666,232 were Pro- 
testants, 15,258 Catholics, and 12,552 Jews, &c. It is divided into two 
regencies and thirty-four circles. Principal towns, Berlin, Potsdam, Frank- 
fort, Brandenburg, &c. It consists principally of an immense sandy plain, 
watered by the Oder, Spree, Havel, Netz, and other rivers, and by numerous 
lakes. 

Q. Where is Silesia ? 

A. It is in the N. E. part of Germany, lying around the upper 
portion of the Oder ; having N., the province of Poland ; E., 
Poland and Cracow; S. E., Austrian Galicia; S„ Austrian 
Silesia, Moravia, and Bohemia ; and W., Saxony and Branden- 
burg. (M. A.) 

Silesia is an important and valuable province of the Prussian dominions. 
It lies between 49° 40' and 52° N. lat, and 14° 25' and 18° 12' E. long., and 
has an oblong shape, extending N. W. and S. E. Area, 15,711 sq. ms. Pop., 
in 1837, 2,645,166 ; of whom 1,394,088 were Protestants, 1,226,555 Catho- 
lics, and 25,510 Jews. The proportion of Protestants to Catholics has increased 
considerably since the Prussian conquest. Principal towns, Breslau, Lieg- 
nitz, Glogau, Gorlitz, Neisse, Glatz, Oppeln, &c. It is divided into three 
regencies, and these again into 57 circles. Surface rugged and mountainous 
along its S. and S. W. frontier, but in other parts it is either flat, or but 
slightly undulating; this is particularly the case on the E. side of the Oder. 

Q. Where is Saxony ? 

A. The province of Saxony is in the southern part of Prussia ; 
it is bounded N. by Hanover and Brandenburg ; S. by the king- 
dom of Saxony, and the Saxon duchies ; E. by Brandenburg ; and 
W. by Hanover, Brunswick, and Hesse Cassel. 

This province extends from 51° 55' to 53° 10' N. lat., and from 10° 34' to 
14° 21' E. long. Length, from E. to W. 175 ms.; breadth, from N. to S., 
123 ms. Area, 8492 sq. ms. Pop., in 1837, 1,539,353, of whom 1,437,353 
were Protestants, and 97,932 Catholics. It forms a portion of the southern 
part of the great flat plain of Northern Germany, and is intersected by the 
river Elbe, and its branches, the Saale, the Muldau, and the Elster. It in- 
cludes' within its boundaries the independent principalities of Anhalt, of 
Schwartzburg Sondershausen, and part of Brunswick. The province is di- 
vided into three regencies, and these again into 41 cities. Principal towns, 
Magdeburg, Halle, Halberstadt and Erfurth. 

Q. Where is Westphalia ? 

A. It has N., Hanover ; E., the latter, and some of the smaller 
German States ; S., the latter, and S. W., the Prussian province 
of the Rhine ; and W., Holland. (M. A.) 

The province of Westphalia contains all the N. portion of the Prussian 
dominions to the W. of the Weser, lying between lat. 50° 40' and 52° 30' 
N., and long. 6° 25' and 9° 23' E. Area, 7801 sq. ms. Pop., in 1837, 
1,317,541 ; of whom 749,782 are Catholics, 554,649 Protestants, and 13,016 
Jews. Principal towns, Munster, Minden, Paderborn, Armsberg, Hamra, &c. 
It is divided into three regencies, and these again into 37 circles. Principal 



GERMANY. 321 

rivers, Ems, Weser, Lippe, &c. Surface in the E., N. E., and S., hilly or 
mountainous ; but it is level in the middle of the province, and in the N. W. 
adjoining Holland. 

Q. Where is the province of the Rhine ? 

A. It has N., Holland ; E., the province of Westphalia, Nassau, 
and other German States ; S., France ; and W., the latter, Bel- 
gium, and Holland. (M. A.) 

This province contains the S. portion of the Prusso-Rhenish provinces, lying 
between 49° and 52° N. (at., and 6° and 9f° E. long. Area, 10,327 sq. ms. 
Pop., in 1837, 2,433,250, of whom 1,842,154 are Catholics, and 564,728 
Protestants. Principal towns, Aix-la-Chapelle, Cologne, Coblentz, Dussel- 
dorf, Elberfeldt, Barmen, Treves, Bonn, &c. It is divided into five regen- 
cies, and these again into 59 circles. Principal rivers, Rhine, (which traverses 
almost the whole extent of the province), Moselle, Saar, Roer, and Wupper. 
Surface very various. 

Q. Where is Prussia Proper ? 

A. In the N. E. part of the kingdom of Prussia. It has the 
Baltic Sea N. ; Pomerania and Brandenburg W. ; Poland and 
Posen S. ; and Russia E.* 

The province of Prussia Proper, formerly divided into E. and W. 
Prussia, is the original patrimony of the dukes of Prussia, hence often called 
ducal Prussia. In the year 1525, it was formed into a duchy, as a fief of 
Poland. In 1657 that kingdom acknowledged its independence, with the 
duke of Brandenburg as sovereign. In 1701 duke Frederick III. placed the 
crown on his head as king Frederick I., thereby elevating Prussia into a 
kingdom. It received from time to time various accessions of territory, but 
Frederick II. (Great), from 1740 to 1786, more than doubled the previous 
extent of Prussia, and raised it to the position of a first-rate monarchy. By 
the treaty of Vienna it received further accession, and is now the 5th in rank 
of the great European powers. 

Prussia Proper extends from 52° 50'. to 55° 53' N. lat., and from 16° to 
22° 54' E. long. Its greatest length is about 295 miles, with a width vary- 
ing from 120 to 80 miles. Pop., in .1837, 2,125,535, of whom 1,532,326 
were Protestants, 555,230 Catholics, and the rest Jews and Mennonites. It 
is divided into four regencies, and 57 circles. Principal towns, Konigsberg, 
Dantzick, Elbing, Culm, Thorn, and Marienwerder. The province consists' 
chiefly of an immense plain, traversed by the Vistula, Pregel, Passay, and 
other rivers, and interspersed with numerous lakes and vast forests. 

Q. Where is Posen 1 

A. In the eastern part of the kingdom of Prussia ; on the N. is 
Prussia Proper ; S. Silesia ; E. Poland ; and W. Brandenburg. 

Posen is a province of the Prussian monarchy, comprising the portion of 
Poland assigned to Prussia by the treaty of Vienna in 1815. It is of a 
triangular shape. Area, 1 1,374 sq. ms. Pop., in 1837, 1,158,608, of whom 
739,527 were Catholics, 344,853 Protestants, and 74,194 Jews. Principal 
towns, Posen, Bromberg, Gresen. It is divided into two regencies, and 

* The provinces of Prussia Proper and Posen are not in Germany, and 
are not represented in the map of that country in the Atlas, 



322 GERMANY. 

these again into six circles. Surface generally flat, and in part occupied by 
extensive marshes and forests. Principal rivers, Warta, Netze, and Obra. 

CAPITALS AND THEIR POPULATION. 

Q. Point out the capitals of the German States, and tell the 
population of each. 

A. Austria, Vienna, 360,000 ; Prussia, Berlin, 311,000; Ba- 
varia, Munich, 106,000 ; Wirtemberg, Stuttgard, 38,000 ; Han- 
over, Hanover, 24,000 ; Saxony, Dresden, 80,000 ; Baden, 
Carlsruhe, 20,000 ; Hesse Cassel, Cassel, 26,000 ; Hesse Darm- 
stadt, Darmstadt, 23,000 ; Hesse Homburg, Homburg, 3000 ; 
Holstein, &c, Kiel, 7500 ; Luxemburg, Luxemburg, 10,000 ; 
Saxe Weimar, Weimar, 10,000 ; Saxe Coburg Gotha, Gotha, 
12,000; Saxe Altenburg, Altenburg, 12,000 ; Saxe Meiningen 
Hilburghausen, Meiningen, 5000 ; Brunswick, Brunswick, 
36,000 ; Mecklenburg Schwerin, Schwerin, 12,000 ; Mecklen- 
burg Strelitz, New Strelitz, 6000; Oldenburg, Oldenburg, 
8000; Nassau, Wisbaden, 8000; Anhalt Dessau, Dessau, 
10,000 ; Anhalt Bernburg, Bernburg, 5000 ; Anhalt Cothen, 
Cothen, 6000 ; Reuss Greitz, Greitz, 7000 ; Reuss Schleitz, 
Lobenstein, 3000 ; Hohenzollern Hechingen, Hechingen, 3000 ; 
Hohenzollern Sigmaringen, Sigmaringen,-1000; Lichtenstein, 
Vadutz, 1000; Schwartzburg Sondershausen, Sondershausen, 
3800; Schwartzburg Rudolstadt, Rudolstadt, 5000; Lippe 
Detmold, Detmold, 3000; Lippe Schauenburg, Buckeburg, 
2100; Waldeck, Arolsen, 2000; Kniphausen, Kniphausen, 
50; Lubec, Lubec, 26,000; Hamburg, Hamburg, 128,000; 
Bremen, Bremen, 42,000 ; Frankfort, Frankfort, 55,000. 
(M. A.) 

CAPITALS SITUATED ON RIVERS. 

Q. Point out those capitals situated on rivers that are named in 
the Map, and the names of the rivers. 

A. Vienna is on the Danube ;* Berlin, on the Spree ;t Munich, 
on the Iser ;± Stuttgard, on the Nesen, a small tributary of the 

* Vienna, (Germ. Wien, Lat. Vindabona), a city of Germany, cap. of the 
Austrian empire, province Lower Austria, on an arm of the Danube, where 
it is joined by the small rivers Wien and Alster, 190 ms. E. from Munich, 
330 ms. S. S. E. from Berlin, and 800 ms. N. W. from Constantinople. Lat. 
of the observatory, in the centre of the city, 48° 12' N. ; long. 16° 32' E. 

-f- Berlin, the cap. of the Prussian States, and the ordinary residence of the 
monarch, on the Spree, 127 ft. above the level of the sea, in the middle mark 
of Brandenburg; lat. 52° 31' N., long. 13° 22 7 E. It was founded about 
the middle of the 12th century. 

i Munich, (Germ, Miinchen,) a city of S. Germany, the cap. of Bavaria, 
highly interesting on account of its collections of the fine arts, on the Iser, 
crossed here by three bridges, about 220 ms. W. from Vienna, and 118 ms. 
E. S. E. from Stuttgard ; lat. 48° 8' N., long. 11° 34' K. 



GERMANY. 323 

Neckar;* Hanover, on the Leine ;t Dresden, on the Elbe ;\ Cas- 
sel, on the Fulda ;§ Luxemburg, on the AJzette, a tributary of the 
Sur ;|| Weimar, on the Ilm, an affluent of the Saale ;^[ Meiningen, 
on the Werra;** Brunswick, on the Ocker, a branch of the Aller ;tt 
Oldenburg, on the Hunte, a tributary of the Weser ;+± Wisbaden, 
on an affluent of the Rhine ;§§ Dessau, on the Mulda ;||||. Bern- 

* Stuttgard, a city of S. Germany, cap. of the kingdom of Wirtemberg, on 
the Nesen, a small tributary of the Neckar, about 1^ ms. from its embou- 
chure in that river, 38 ms. S. E. by E. from Carlsruhe, and 120 ms. N. W. 
from Munich. Lat. (of the gymnasium) 48° 46' N., long. 9° 10' E. 

| Hanover, a city of W. Germany, cap. of the kingdom of Hanover, on 
the Leine, a branch of the Weser, 84 ms. S. from Hamburg, 62 ms. S. E. 
from Bremen, 35 ms. W. from Brunswick. Lat. 52° 22' N., long. 9° 
44' E. 

| Dresden, a city of Germany, cap. of the kingdom of Saxony, on both 
sides of the Elbe ; 61 ms. S. S. E. from Leipzig, 233 ms. E. N. E. from 
Frankfort on the Mayne, 220 ms. N. N. E. from Munich, 100 ms. S. by E. 
from Berlin, and 230 ms. N. W. from Vienna; lat. 51° 2' N., long. 13° 
34' E. 

§ Cassel (Anc. Castellum Cattorum), a town of W. Germany, province 
of Lower Hesse, of which, and of the electorate of Hesse Cassel, it is the 
cap., and residence of the elector. It is finely situated on both sides of the 
Fulda, 72 ms. S. by W. from Hanover, and 89 ms. N. N. E. from Frankfort 
on the Mayne; lat. 51° 19' N., long. 9° 35' E. 

|| Luxemburg, (Germ. Lutzelburg), a town belonging to the kingdom of 
the Netherlands, the cap. and only place of any importance in the Grand 
Duchy of Luxemburg, and one of the strongest fortresses of Europe ; on the 
Alzette, a tributary of the Sur, 22 ms. S. W. from Treves, and 77 ms. S. S. E. 
from Liege ; lat. 49° 37' N., long. 6° 7' E. 

IT Weimar, a city of central Germany, cap. of the Grand Duchy of Saxe, 
and the usual residence of the grand duke, on the Ilm, an affluent of the 
Saale, 104 ms. W. by S. from Dresden, 116 ms. S. E. from Hanover, and 
136 ms. S. W. from Berlin. 

** Meiningen, a town of Central Germany, cap. of the Duchy of Saxe- 
Meiningen Hilburghausen, on the Werra, here crossed by two stone bridges, 
31 ms. E. N. E. from Fulda. 

j-f Brunswick, a city of Germanygkcap. of the Duchy of Brunswick, on the 
Ocker, a branch of the Aller ; lat. 56° 18' N., long. 10° 32' E. 

$4= Oldenburg, a town of N. W. Germany, cap. of the Grand Duchy of 
Oldenburg, and residence of its sovereign, circle of same name, on the Hunte, 
a tributary of the Weser, 24 ms. W. N. W. from Bremen. Lat. 53° 8' N., 
long. 8° 13' E. 

§§ Wisbaden or Wiesbaden, a town of W. Germany, cap. X)f the Duchy 
of Nassau, and one of the most frequented watering places in the confedera- 
tion ; on an affluent of the Rhine, 4 ms. N. from the latter, and 6 ms. N. 
N. W. from Mentz. 

I!!| Dessau, a town of N. Germany, cap. of the duchy of Anhalt Dessau, 
residence of the duke and seat of government, on the left bank of the Mulda, 



324 GERMANY. 

burg, on the Saale ;* Greitz, on the Elster ;t Sigmaringen, on the 
Danube ; Vadutz, on the Rhine ; Lubec, on the Trave ;| Ham- 
burg, on the Elbe ;§ Bremen, on the Weser ;|| and Frankfort, on 
the Mayne.H 

UNIVERSITIES AND COLLEGES. 

Point out the places where universities and colleges are situated, 
and tell the number in each state respectively. 

Q. In Prussia ? 

A. Berlin (the capital), in Brandenburg ; Breslau, in Silesia ; 
Bonn, in Rhine ; Halle and Magdeburg, in Saxony ; Konigs- 
berg, in East Prussia; Griefswald, in Pomerania; Munster, in 
Westphalia. (M. A.) 

Q. In the Austrian Empire ? 

A. Vienna (the capital), in Lower Austria ; Prague, in Bohe- 
mia ; Lemberg, in Galicia ; Olmutz, in Moravia ; Innspruck, in 
the Tyrol ; Gratz, in Styria; and Pavia and Padua, in the Italian 
States. (M. A.) 

Q. In Bavaria? 

A. Those of Munich (the capital), Wiirtzburg, Furth and Er- 
langen. (M. A.) 

near its confluence with the Elbe, 67 ms. S. W. from Berlin, and 33 ms. N. 
by W. from Leipzig: lat. 51° 50' N., long. 12° 17' E. 

* Bernburg, a town of Germany, cap. duchy of Anhalt Bernburg, on the 
Saale, by which it is intersected, 23 ms. S. from Magdeburg. 

•j- Greitz, Greiz, or Graitz, a town of Central Germany, cap. of the princi- 
pality of Reuss (elder branch), on the White Elster, 49 ms. S. from Leipzig. 

\ Lubec, a city of N. Germany, the cap. of the Hanseatic towns, and the 
seat of their high court of appeal, is situated on the Trave, about 10 ms. (di- 
rect distance) from Travemunde, at its mouth in the gulf of Lubeck, in the 
Baltic, 36 ms, N. E. from Hamburg, and 38 ms. S. E. from Kiel ; lat. 53° 
52' N., long. 10° 41' E. 

§ Hamburg, the principal commercial city and sea-port of Germany, cap. 
of the republic of Hamburg, and one of the three existing Hanse Towns, and 
four free imperial cities of Germany ; on the N. bank of the Elbe, at the 
point where it receives the Alster, 60 msfS. E. from its mouth, 60 ms. N. E. 
from Bremen, and 36 ms. S. W. from Lubeck ; lat. 53° 32' N., long. 9° 
58' E. 

|| Bremen, one of the three free German Hanseatic cities, on the Weser, 
by which it is intersected, 60 ms. S. W. from Hamburg, and about 37 ms. 
(direct distance) from Bremenhaven, at the mouth of the Weser ; lat. 53° 
4' N., long. 8° 48' E. 

f Frankfort, a celebrated city of Germany, the cap. of a small republic of 
the same name, and of the whole Germanic confederation, is situated about 
270 ms. W. S. W. from Berlin, and 50 ms. E. by S. from Coblentz. It 
stands on the right bank of the R. Mayne, across which there is a bridge, 
connecting it with Sachsenhausen, one of its suburbs. 



GERMANY. 325 

Q. In the Kingdom of Hanover ? 

A. The university of Gottingen. (M. A.) 

Q. In the Kingdom of Saxony ? 

A. The university of Leipsic ? (M. A.) 

q. In Baden ? 

A. The universities of Heidelberg, and Freiburg. (M. A.) 

Q. In Wirtemberg? 

A. The university of Tubingen. (M. A.) 

Q. In the Duchy of Holstein ? 

A. The university of Kiel. (M. A.) 

This university, founded in 1665, has had many distinguished men among 
its professors : it has a valuable library, comprising 70,000 volumes, and is 
attended at present by about 300 students. 

Q. In the Grand-Duchy of Mecklenburg-Schwerin ? 
A. The university of Rostock. (M. A.) 
Q. In the Grand-Duchy of Saxe- Weimar ? 
A. The university of Jena. (M. A.) 
Q. In Hesse-Cassel, or Electoral Hesse ? 
A. The university of Marburg. (M. A.) 
Q. In the Grand-Duchy of Hesse-Darmstadt ? 
A. The university of Giessen. (M. A.) 

This university, founded in 1607, is now usually attended by between 300 
and 400 students ; a few years ago, the ordinary number was upward of 500. 

POPULATION OF CITIES. 

Q. Which is the most populous city in Germany ? 
A. Vienna. 
Q. The next ? 
A. Berlin. 

BATTLES. 

Q. In what years did the battles fought in Austria take place ? 

A. Battle of Sor, in 1745; Lowositz, 1756; Kolin, 1757; 
Prague, 1757 ; Reichenberg, 1757 ; Austerlitz, 1805 ;* Diernstein, 
1805 ; Wagram, 1809 ;t Aspern, 1809 ;± Culm, 1813. (M. A.) 

*In the vicinity of this town, on the 2d of December, 1805, took place 
the famous battle that bears its name, between the grand French army under 
Napoleon, and the combined Russian and Austrian armies under their re- 
spective emperors. The genius of Napoleon never shone more conspicuously 
than on this occasion. His superior talent more than compensated for the 
numerical inferiority of his forces, and secured for the French a complete 
and decisive victory with comparatively little loss on their part. The battle 
of Austerlitz was followed by the treaty of Presburg, signed on the 26th of 
December. 

•j- This village is celebrated in military history for the great battle fought 
in its vicinity, on the 6th of July, 1809, by the grand French army under 

\ For note, see next page. 
28 



326 GERMANY. 

Q. When did the battles fought in Prussia take place ? 

A. Battle of Molwitz, in 1741 ; Friedberg, 1745 ; Lissa, 
1757 ; Rosbach, 1757 ;* Zorndorf, 1758 : Minden, 1759 ;t Liegnitz, 
1760;$ Cunersdorf, 1760 ; Tongau, 1760; Altenkirchen, 1796 ;§ 
Magdeburg, 1806 ; Erfurth, 1806 ; Lutzen, 1813.|| (M. A.) 

Napoleon, and the Austrians under the archduke Charles. The former 
gained a complete victory ; the Austrians lost above 20,000 men taken 
prisoners, besides a vast number killed and wounded. This great victory Icu 
to an armistice, followed by the treaty of Schoenbrun. 

\ This and the neighbouring village of Essling were, in 1809, the scene 
of a tremendous conflict between the grand French army, commanded by 
Napoleon, and the Austrians, under the Archduke Charles. After two days' 
(21st and 22d May) continuous fighting, with vast loss on both sides, Napo- 
leon was obliged to withdraw his troops from the field, and take refuge in 
the Island of Lobau, in the Danube. 

* A village celebrated in modern history for its being the scene of the 
great victory gained on the 5th of November, 1757, by Frederick the Great, 
with little loss to his own forces, over the French and Imperialists. 

\ The French were defeated in the vicinity of Minden in 1759, by the 
Prussians under Prince Ferdinand, brother to Frederick the Great, and the 
British under Lord George Sackville. The non-compliance of the latter with 
the orders of the former is said to have saved the French from a complete 
rout, and gave rise at the time to a great deal of acrimonious discussion. 

* On the 16th of August, 1760, Frederick the Great totally defeated the 
Austrian general Laudohn in the neighbourhood of this town ; Frederick 
made his dispositions with so much skill as to render it impossible for Mar- 
shal Daun, who commanded another Austrian army, to come to Laudohn's 
assistance. 

§ The vicinity of this town was, in 1796, the theatre of some obstinate 
conflicts between the French and Austrians; in one of which, on the 21st 
September, the brave general Marceau was killed. 

|| This town, the population of which is under 1500, would be unworthy 
notice, were it not that its environs have been the scene of two of the most 
memorable conflicts of modern times. The first, which occurred on the 16th 
of November, 1632, took place between the Imperialists, under Wallenstein, 
and the Swedes, under their heroic monarch, Gustavus Adolphus. The lat- 
ter were victorious ; but the victory was dearly purchased by the death of 
their king, who fell (it has been alleged by treachery) in the action. Besides 
their king, the Swedes lost about 3000 men ; but the loss of the Imperialists 
amounted to double that number, and their artillery fell into the hands of the 
conquerors. 

The other great conflict took place nearly on the same ground, on the 2d 
of May, 1813, between the French, under Napoleon, and the allied army, 
encouraged by the presence of the emperor Alexander and the king of 
Prussia. The struggle was most obstinate and bloody ; but in the end vic- 
tory declared in favour of the French. The allies lost 20,000 men, killed 
and wounded, and that of the French was also very severe. 



GERMANY. 327 

Q. When did the battles fought in Bavaria take place ? 

A. Battle of Blenheim, in 1704 ;* Hohenlinden, 1800 ;t Ratis- 
bon, 1809 ;± Eckmuhl, 1809.§ (M. A.) 

Q. When did the battles fought in Saxony take place ? 

A. Battle of Bautzen, in 1813 ; Dresden, 1813 ; Leipsic, 1813.|| 
(M. A.) 

* This village is famous in modern history as being the scene of the great 
battle fought August 13, 1704, between the English and Imperialists, under 
the Duke of Marlborough and Prince Eugene, and the French and Bava- 
rians, under Marshals Tallard and Marsin and the Elector of Bavaria. Each 
army consisted of nearly 80,000 men. The English and their allies gained 
a complete and decisive victory. Their enemies left above 10,000 men killed 
and wounded on the field ; a vast number more were drowned in the Danube, 
and above 13,000 were made prisoners; among the latter were Marshal Tal- 
lard (whose son was killed) and many other officers of distinction. All the 
artillery, baggage, &c, of the French and Bavarians fell into the hands of the 
conquerors. The loss of the latter, though severe, was not greater than 
might have been expected, having amounted to about 5000 killed and 8000 
wounded. 

\ Near this village took place, on the 3d of December, 1800, one of the 
greatest conflicts of the revolutionary war, between a French and Bavarian 
army under Moreau, and the Austrians under the Archduke John. The 
former gained a complete victory. Besides killed and wounded, the Aus- 
trians lost 10,000 prisoners and 100 pieces of cannon. Campbell's noble 
ode, entitled Hohenlinden , has rendered the name at least of this battle fami- 
liar to most Americans. 

i Ratisbon was the capital of the dukes of Bavaria, till their duchy was 
overturned by Charlemagne. It was afterwards a free imperial city, governed 
by a count of the empire. In 1809, some severe fighting took place before 
it between a part of the grand French array, under Napoleon, and the Aus- 
trians, to the disadvantage of the latter, who were forced to retire towards 
Bohemia. 

§ Here, on the 22d April, 1809, the grand French army, under Napoleon, 
gained a decisive victory over the Austrians, under the Archduke Charles. 
Marshal Davoust, having particularly distinguished himself on this occasion, 
was raised by Napoleon to the dignity of Prince of Eckmuhl. The battle 
of the 22d was preceded by partial actions on the 19th, 20th, and 21st, all 
of which terminated favourably for the French. 

|| The vicinity of Leipsic, and, indeed, the town itself, was, in October, 
1813, the scene of a most tremendous conflict. Napoleon having concen- 
trated at this point such of his forces as he had been able to collect from the 
different parts of Germany, to the amount of about 135,000 men, was at- 
tacked on the 16th by the allied army, under Prince Schwartzenberg, Blu- 
cher, and ether generals, accompanied by the Emperors of Russia and Austria, 
the King of Prussia, &c. The allied forces amounted to at least 250,000 
men. The struggle, which was fierce, obstinate, and bloody in the extreme, 
terminated at nightfall without any decided advantage to either party. It 
was renewed on the 18th, when a Saxon brigade went over, during the heat 
of the action, from the French to the allies, which, combined with their supe- 



328 GERMANY. 

Q. When did the battle fought in Wirtemberg take place I 

A. Batde of Ulm, in 1S05.* (M. A.) 

Q. When did the battle fought in Saxe- Weimar take place ? 

A. Battle of Jena, in 1306.t (M. A.) 

Gebxas-t (Germ. Deuischland or Teulsehland ; Fr. Allemagne ; Ital. 
Germania, Slavonia') at present comprises all the countries of central 
Europe, and is situated between 45° 30' and 55° 5(K N. lat.. and 4° 45' and 
22° 54' E. long. These limits have reference to all the territories comprised 
in the Germanic confederation, including some districts which do not belong 
to Germany proper ; e.g. Luxemburg and Friuli. According to the more 
strict application of the name, Germany is bounded on the N. by the North 
Sea, Denmark, and the Baltic Sea ; E. by Prussian Poland, Galicia, and 
Hungary ; S. by Croatia, Illyria,± Italy, and Switzerland ; and W. by France, 
Belgium, and Holland. Its length, from the Netherlands to the E. part of 
Prussia, is upwards of 700 ms. ; its breadth is very unequal ; measuring 

rior force, gave the latter an advantage that all the genius of Napoleon, 
seconded by the valour and devotion of the French, could not counteract. 
Though the French maintained their ground during the day, a retreat be- 
came indispensable ; and owing to the accidental blowing up of a bridge, a 
part of the French army was cut off ; so that Napoleon lost 25.000 men, 
who fell into the hands of the allies as prisoners, exclusive of the far greater 
number who fell in the previous battles. Prince Poniatowski, who may em- 
phatically be said to have been the last of the Poles, after displaying prodi- 
gies of valour, lost his life in the retreat on the 19th, having been drowned 
in attempting to cross the Elster. This great victory completely emanci- 
pated Germany from the yoke of the French, and opened the road to Paris to 
the allies. 

* In 1805, Ulm was the theatre of some most important military events. 
Austria, having declared war against France, pushed forward a strong army 
into Bavaria, under General Mack, who established his head-quarters at Ulm. 
But Napoleon having succeeded by a series of masterly manoeuvres in cut- 
ting off Mack's communications with Austria, the latter was cooped up in 
the city with all that portion of his army, amounting to about 26.000 men, 
that had not already fallen into the hands of the French. Considering the 
strength of the place, and the numbers of the garrison, a vigorous resistance 
might have been anticipated ; but, instead of this, Mack capitulated on the 
17th of October, and delivered up the town, and his army as prisoners of 
war, without so much as firing a shot. 

j- Jena is famous in modern history, from its vicinity having been the 
scene of the great battle of the 14th of October, 1806, between the grand 
French army under Napoleon, and the Prussians, commanded by the King 
and the Duke of Brunswick, the latter of whom was mortally wounded in 
the action. The French gained a complete and decisive victory. The 
Prussians lost above 20,000 men, killed and taken in the course of the day, 
with all their cannon, baggage, &c. In fact, their army may be said to have 
been totally destroyed ; as most of the troops who escaped from the field 
were soon after compelled to surrender. 

* It will be recollected that the kingdom of Illyria forms only a part of the 
Austrian empire. 



GERMANY 



329 



from N. to S., from the Baltic to the southern limit of Tyrol, it amounts to 
near 600 ms. The area is stated at 251,000 sq. ms. Before the French 
revolution, the German empire was divided into nine circles ; namely, those 
of Austria, Bavaria, and Suabia, in the S. ; Franconia, Upper Rhine, and 
Lower Rhine, in the middle ; and Westphalia, Upper Saxony, and Lower 
Saxony, in the N. Other countries, however, were considered as forming 
parts of the empire, of which the principal were Bohemia, Silesia, Moravia, 
and Lusatia. The present Germanic Confederation, as established by an act 
of the Congress of Vienna, on the 8th of June, 1815, consists of thirty-nine 
independent states. The central point and organ of the confederation is the 
Federative Diet, which sits at Frankfort on the R. Mayne. It exercises its 
authority in a double form : 1st, as a general assembly, termed Plenum ; and, 
2dly, as a minor council, called the Federative Diet Ordinary. The Plenum 
meets only when an affair relating to all the confederation is to be decided. 
It has seventy votes, of which four belong to Austria, and as many to each 
of the five German kingdoms ; the other states, according to their respective 
importance, have three, two, or one vote each. The Federative Diet Ordinary 
possesses in all seventeen votes, out of which eleven principal states have 
each a single vote, and the remaining twenty-seven only six joint votes. 
Austria presides in both assemblies, and decides in case of equality. The 
objects of the Germanic Confederation are mutual defence against a common 
enemy, and the preservation of internal security and peace among the con- 
federated states, which have no right to declare war on each other, but must 
submit their differences to the decision of the Diet. The following is a list 
of the states, with the number of votes which each possesses in the general 
assembly : 

I. States having each four votes : 
4. Saxony. 



1. Austria. 

2. Prussia. 

3. Bavaria. 



5. Hanover. 

6. Wiirtemburg. 
II. States having each three votes : 

10. Holstein and Lauenburg. 

11. Luxemburg. 



7. Baden, 

8. The electorate of Hesse. 

9. The grandduchy of Hesse. 

III. States having each two votes : 

12. Brunswick. 14. Nassau. 

13. Mecklenburg-Schwerin. 

IV. States having each one vote . 



15. Saxe- Weimar. 

16. Saxe-Coburg. 

17. Saxe-Meiningen. 

18. Saxe-Hildburghausen. 

19. Mecklenburg-Strelitz. 

20. Oldenburg and Kniphausen. 

21. Anhalt-Dessau. 

22. Anhalt-Bernburg. 

23. Anhalt-Coethen. 

24. Schwarzburg-Sonderhausen. 

25. Schwarzburg-Rudolstadt. 

26. Hohenzollern-Hechingen. 

38* 



27. Lichtenstein. 

28. Hohenzollern-Sigmaringen. 

29. Waldeck. 

30. Reuss, elder branch. 

31. Reuss, younger branch. 

32. Lippe-Schauenburg. 

33. Lippe-Detmold. 

34. Hesse-Homburg. 

35. Liibeck. 

36. Frankfort. 

37. Bremen. 

38. Hamburg. 



330 SWITZERLAND. 

The following is a list of the Austrian, Prussian, Dutch, and Danish 
possessions comprised in the Germanic Confederation : 

Austrian. — The archduchy of Austria, the duchies of Salzburg, Styria, 
Carinthia, Carniola, Austrian Friuli, the territory of Trieste, the county of 
Tyrol, with Vorarlberg, the kingdom of Bohemia, the margraviate of Mora- 
via, and Austrian Silesia. 

Prussian. — The provinces of Brandenburg, Pomerania, Silesia, Prussian 
Saxony, Westphalia, and the province of the Rhine. 

Dutch, — The grandduchy of Luxemburg. 

Danish. — The duchies of Holstein and Lauenburg. 



SWITZERLAND. 
Page 263.- -Lesson MS.— Map No. 20. 

Q. What bounds Switzerland on the north ? 

A. France, Baden, and Wirtemburg. 

Q. South? 

A. Sardinia, and Lombardy and Venice. 

Q. East? 

A. The Tyrol. 

Q. Where are the Jura Mts. ? 

A. They commence near Geneva, and stretch from S. W. to 
N. E. along the frontier of France and Switzerland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Pennine Alps ? 

A. They extend along the frontier of Switzerland and Italy, 
between Mont Blanc, in Savoy, near the S. W. boundary of 
Switzerland, and the Lepontine Alps, having a general direction 
from S. W. to N. E. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Lepontine Alps ? 

A. They extend along the frontier of Switzerland and Italy, 
stretching between the Pennine and Rhetian or Rhsetian Alps, 
having a general direction from S. W. to N. E. (M. A.) 

Q. How high is Mt. Rosa ? 

A. 15,552 ft. (M. A.) 

Q. The Jura Mts. ? 

A. 5300 ft. (M. AA 

Q. Where is Lake Constance ? 

A. It lies between Switzerland and Germany, surrounded by 
the territories of Baden, Wirtemberg, Bavaria, Austria and Swit- 
zerland, and flows into the Rhine. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 313. 

Q. Where is the Lake of Geneva ? 

A. The Lake of Geneva, or Lake Leman (Germ. Genfersee, 
Anc. Lacus Lemanus) is the largest lake of Switzerland, near the 
S. W. extremity of which it is situated. It has N. E. and S. E. 



SWITZERLAND. 331 

the canton of Vaud or Leman ; S. W. that of Geneva; and S. 
Savoy. The R. Rhone forms its outlet. 

For a further description, see Europe, lesson 150£A, Map No. 
18, Key, pages 257-8. 

Q. Where is Lake Neufchatel? 

A. Lake Neufchatel (Ger. Neuenburger-See), called also the 
Lake of Yverdun, is on the S. E. side of the small canton of 
Neufchatel, which lies in the N. W. part of Switzerland, border- 
ing on France, and flows into the Aar R. (M. A.) 

This lake is 21 ms. in length, and about 5 ms. in its greatest breadth ; 
greatest depth, about 400 ft. The surface is estimated to be 1320 ft. above 
the level of the sea. 

Q. Where is Lake Lucerne ? 

Ji. It is situated nearly in the centre of Switzerland, on both 
sides of the R. Reuss, which forms its outlet. (M. A.) m 

Lake Lucerne (Germ. Waldstdtter Lee) is one of the most picturesque 
pieces of water in Europe. It is nearly cruciform, with an addition to its E. 
end, called the Lake of Uri. Its entire length is about 25 ms., but the 
breadth of any of its arms is seldom more than 2 or 3 ms. The surface is 
1380 ft. above the level of the sea. The greatest depth is stated to be 900 ft. 

Q. Where is Lake Zurich? 

A. It is in the N. part of the canton of Zurich, which lies in 
the N. E. part of Switzerland ; and at its N. W. extremity it dis- 
charges itself by the Limmat. 

This is one of the principal lakes of Switzerland, being bounded by the 
cantons of Zurich, Schwytz, and St. Gall. It curves slightly from S. E. to 
N. W. Length, about 25 ms. ; breadth, varying to about 3 ms. ; but at 
Rapperschwyl it is contracted to less than a \ m., and is crossed there by a 
wooden bridge. Area estimated at about 23 sq. ms. ; height above the sea, 
1362 Eng. ft. Its depth in some places exceeds 600 ft. ; but for several 
hundred yards from its banks it is (near Zurich at least) seldom more than 
from 6 to 12 ft. in depth. At its S. E. extremity it receives the Linth 
canal, which brings to it the superfluous waters of the Lake Wallenstadt ; at 
its N. W. extremity it discharges itself by the Limmat. 

Q. How long is each of these lakes ? 

Ji. Constance is 45 ms. long ; Geneva, 47 ; Neufchatel, 21 ; 
Lucerne, 18 ; Zurich, 25. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Neufchatel and its territory ? 

«#. Neufchatel (Germ. Neuenburg) is a town of Switzerland, 
cap. of the canton of Neufchatel, situated on the N. W. shore of 
the lake of Neufchatel* (M. A.) 

Neufchatel territory is a canton in the N. W. part of Switzer- 
land, bordering on France. (M. A.) 

* This town is 17 ms. N. W. from Freyburg, and 46 ms. E. S. E. from 
Bessangon. Pop. about 5000. It is built upon the steep slope of the Jura 
Mts., and along a narrow strip of level ground between the hills and the lake. 



332 ITALY. 

This canton forms a principality belonging to Prussia ; it lies between lat. 
46° 50' and 46° 10' N., and long. 6° 25' and 7° 5' E. ; having N. E. and E. 
the canton of Berne, S. E. the lake of Neufchatel, S. W. Vaud, and W. and 
N. W. the department of Doubs, in France. Length, N. E. to S. W., 33 
ms. ; average breadth about 9 ms. ; area, 280 sq. ms. Pop. in 1837, 58,616, 
of whom 17,744 were either citizens of other cantons, or foreigners. The 
Jura chain runs through the canton in its entire length, dividing it into two 
parts, one belonging to the basin of the Rhine, and the other to that of the 
Rhone. 

Q. What is the population of Geneva ? 

A. 28,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Basle? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Berne? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Zurich? 

A. 12,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Lucerne ? 

A. 7000. (M. A.) 

Q. Which of these towns have colleges ? 

A. Geneva, Basle, and Berne. (M. A.) 

Q. How high are the falls of the Rhine ? 

A. 60 ft. (M. A.) 

Q. When was the battle of Morgarten fought ? 

A. In 1315. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Morat? 

A. In 1476. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Zurich ? 

A. In 1798. (M. A.) 

Q. What three considerable rivers rise in Switzerland ? 

A. Rhine, Rhone, and Inn. (M. A.) 

For a farther description, see Key, page 239. 



ITALY. 

Pages 265-6.-— Lesson 179. — Maps No. 21 and 20. 

Map No. 21. — Q. What mts. bound Italy on the north ? 

A. The Alps. 

Q. What sea on the south and west ? 

A. Mediterranean. 

Q. East? 

A. The Gulf of Venice. 

Q. What islands lie west ? 

A. Corsica, Sardinia, and Elba. 

Q. South? 

A. Sicily. 



ITALY. 333 

Q. What strait separates Italy from Turkey ? 

A. Otranto. 

Q. What mountains extend through Italy ? 

A. Apennine. 

Map No. 20. — Q. Where is the river Po ? 

A. The Po (Anc. Eridanus or Padus) is the principal r. of 
Italy ; it issues from mount Viso in the Alps, on the confines of 
France, in about 44° 40' N. lat., and 7° E. long. It flows at first 
easterly, then northerly, till it reaches the point of about 45° 13' 
N. lat., and 7° 50' E. long., when its general course becomes and 
continues almost due E. After dividing Austrian Italy from the 
states of Parma, Modena, and the " States of the Church," (the 
Pope's dominions), it empties itself into the Gulf of Venice by nu- 
merous mouths, near 45° N. lat., and 12° 30' E. long. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 256. 

Q. What rivers flow into it on the north ? 

A. The Mincio, Oglio, Adda, Tecino, Dora Baltea, Dora, and 
Chisson. (M. A.) 

Q. South? 

A. Panaro, Taro, Trebia, and Tanaro. (M. A.) 

Q. What rivers flow into the Gulf of Venice ? 

A. The Po, Adige, Brenta, Piave, and Tagliamento. (M. A.) 

Q. How long are the Po and Adige ? 

A. Po, 450 ms. long ; Adige, 200. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Lake Garda ? 

A. It is in the N. part of Lombardv and Venice, and flows into 
the Mincio R. (M. A.) 

Lake Garda (Anc. Lacus Benacus) is a noted lake in Austrian Italy, 
bounded by the provinces of Mantua, Brescia, and Verona, and the circle of 
Roveredo, in the Tyrol, and situated between 45° 26' and 45° 56' N. lat., 
and 10° 32' and 10° 50' E. long. Its length is about 35 ms. ; its greatest 
breadth about 10 ms. The R. Mincio forms its outlet. A steamboat plies 
between Desenzano, on its S. coast, and Riva, at its N. extremity. 

Q. Where is Lake Como ? 

A. It is in the N. W. part of Lombardy and Venice, and flows 
into the Lower Adda. (M. A.) 

Lake of Como (Ital. Lago di Como, Anc. Larius Lacus) is a famous lake 
of N. Italy, which, in modern times, has derived its name from the city of 
Como, situated at the S. W. extremity of this lake. This fine sheet of water 
(intersected by the 46th parallel of N. lat.) is very irregularly shaped, being 
divided by the triangular district which has Bellagio at its apex, into three 
great arms, one of which stretches from Bellagio S. W. to Como, another 
N. to Riva and Novate, near the mouth of the Maria R., and a third S. E. to 
Lecco, and the outlet of the Adda. These divisions of the lake are some- 
times called, from the chief towns on their banks, the lakes of Como, Belluno, 
and Lecco. Its greatest length may be about 38 ms. ; but it is nowhere above 
4 ms. in width. The depth is said to vary from 40 to 600 ft. It receives 



334 ITALY. 

the waters of the Upper Adda, and several other rivers, but its only outlet is 
by the Lower Adda. 

Q. Where is Lake Maggiore? 

A. It is in N. Italy, lying partly between Piedmont and Lom- 
bardy, and partly within the Swiss canton of Tessin or Tecino, 
intersected by the 46th parallel of N. lat., and the meridian of 8° 
40' E. long. Its only outlet is the Lower Tecino. (M. A.) 

Maggiore (Lago Di), or Lake of Locarno (Anc. Locus Verbanus"), is a 
long and. narrow lake, stretching above 40 ms. from Magadino, at its N., to 
Sesto-Calende, at its S. extremity, while in its widest parts, opposite to the 
mouth of the Toce, it is about 6 ms. across, but its ordinary breadth does not 
exceed from 2 to 3 ms. Its general direction is S. S. W. and N. N. E., and 
it may, in fact, be considered as an expansion of the Tecino, which enters it 
at its N. and leaves it at its S. extremity. In addition to the Upper Tecino, 
it receives on its W. the waters of the Toce, and on its E. side those of the 
Tresa, flowing from the Lago di Lugano (Lake Lugano). 

Q. How long is each of these lakes ? 

A. Garda, 35 ms. ; Como, 38 ; Maggiore, 40. (M. A.) 

KINGDOM OF SARDINIA. 

Q. How is Sardinia bounded ? 

A. It is bounded on the N. by Switzerland ; E. by Austrian 
Italy (Lombardy and Venice), and the territories of Parma, Tus- 
cany, and Modena ; S. by the Mediterranean ; and W. by France. 
(M. A.) 

Sardinian States (It. Stati Sardi) is the name given to the dominions of 
the house of Savoy. This kingdom comprehends, besides the island of 
Sardinia, an extensive territory occupying the N. W. portion of Italy, be- 
tween 43° 40' and 46° 27' N. lat., and 5° 38' and 10° 6' E. long. Length, 
from S. E. to N. W., near 250 ms. ; greatest breadth, above 200 ms. It 
includes th§ duchy of Savoy, Piedmont in its more extensive sense, the 
duchy of Genoa, and the county or province of Nice. Total area of 
the kingdom, 29,534 sq. ms. Pop. 4,400,000. Area of the continental 
portion, about 19,000 sq. ms. Pop. about 4,100,000. The prevailing 
religion of the Sardinian States is Roman Catholicism. The government 
is a monarchy, hereditary in the male line ; and though the regal authority 
is somewhat circumscribed by a supreme council in the Island of Sardinia, 
it is absolute in the continental portion of the kingdom. Turin is the 
capital. 

Q. Where are the Maritime Alps ? 

A. They separate Piedmont from Nice. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Cottian Alps ? 

A. They separate Piedmont from France. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Pennine Alps ? 

A. They extend along the frontier of Switzerland and Italy, 
between Mont Blanc, in Savoy, near the S. W. boundary of Swit- 
zerland, and the Lepontine Alps, having a general direction from 
S. W. to N. E. (M. A.) 



ITALY. 335 

Q. How high is Mont Blanc ? 

A. 15,668 ft. (M. A.) 

Q. Mt. Rosa? 

A. 15,552 ft. (M. A.) 

Q. How long and high are the Apennines ? 

A. 700 ms. long, and from 8000 to 11,000 ft. high. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Turin, and the other towns ? 

A. Turin, 124,000; Novarra, 15,000; Alessandria, 35,000; 
Mondovi, 17,000; Asti, 22,000 ; Coni, 18,000 ; Saviglione, 15,000; 
Aosta,7000; Nice, 34,000; Genoa, 115,000; Novi,6000. (M. 
A.) 

Q. When were the various battles fought ? 

A. Battle of Turin, in 1706; Mondovi, 1796; Montenotte, 
1796 ; (this battle was the commencement of Bonaparte's career 
of victory, it being the first in which he acted as a commanding 
general out of France ;) Voltri, 1797 ; Novi, 1799 ; Marengo, 
1800. 

Q. On what river is Turin ?* 

A, OnthePo. 

Q. Alessandria, and the other chief towns 1 

A. Alessandria is on the Tanaro, a branch of the Po ;t Asti, 
on the Tanaro \% Coni, at the confluence of the Stura and Gesso.§ 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is Monaco ? 

A. It has W. the division of Nice ; E. that of Genoa ; and S. 
the Mediterranean. (M. A.) 

This is a small principality of N. Italy, under the protection of the King 
of Sardinia, about 8 ms. in length, by 6J in breadth. Area, 52 sq. ms. 
Pop. about 7000. Monaco, a little town on the Mediterranean, is the 
capital. 

* Turin (Ital. Torino, Anc. Augusta Taunnoruni), a city of N. Italy, 
the capital of the Sardinian dominions, province of same name, in Pied- 
mont, near the Po, where it is joined by the Dora, 80 ms. W. S. W. from 
Milan. Lat. 45° 4' N., long. 7° 40' E. 

-j- Alessandria, or Alexandria, an important town and fortress of the Sar- 
dinian States, province of the same name, in a marshy country on the Tanaro, 
near where it is joined by the Bormida, 47 ms. E. S. E. from Turin, lat. 44° 
55' N., long. 8° 36' E. 

t Asti (Anc. Asta or Hasta Pompeid), a city of the Sardinian States, 
province of Alexandria, on the Bourbo, near its confluence with the Tanaro, 
28 ms. E.S.E. from Turin, lat. 44° 57' N., long. 8° 12' E. 

§ Coni, or Cuneo, a town of N. Italy, kingdom of Sardinia, capital of divi- 
sion and province, on a hill at the confluence of the Stura and Gesso, 45 ms. 
S. by W. from Turin. 



336 LOMBARDY AND VENICE, OR AUSTRIAN ITALY. 

ISLAND OF SARDINIA. 

Map No. 21. — Q. Where is the Island of Sardinia ? 

A. It is an island of S. Europe, and next to Sicily, which it 
nearly equals in size, the largest in the Mediterranean, being 
separated from Corsica, on the N., by the Strait of Bonifacio. 
(M. A.) — For a further description, see Key, p. 269. 

Q. How long and wide is it 1 

A. 170 ms. long, and 90 wide. (M. A.) 

Q. What strait separates it from Corsica ? 

A. Bonifacio. 

Q. Point out its highest Mt. 

A. Mt. Genargentu. 

Q. What is the population of Cagliari ? 

A. 27,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Sassari? 

A. 24,000. (M. A.) 

For a further description of Italy, see Key, pages 239-40. 



LOMBARDY AND VENICE, (OR AUSTRIAN ITALY.) 

Page 268.— Lesson ISO.— Maps No. 20, 21. 

Map No. 20. — Q. How is Lombardy and Venice bounded? 

A. It is bounded on the N. W. and N. by Switzerland, Tyrol, 
and Tllyria ; E. by Illyria and the Gulf of Venice ; S. and S. W. 
by the States of the Church (Papal States), Modena, Parma, and 
the Sardinian Territories. (M. A.) 

This country extends from about 44° 48' to 46° 40' N. lat., and from 8° 
32' to 13° 44' E. long. Length near 250 ms. ; greatest breadth above 120 
ms. The area is 18,534 sq. ms. Pop. about 4,450,000. Milan is the seat 
of government. 

For a further description, see Italy, Key, page 240. 

Q. What is the population of the chief towns ? 

A. Milan, 185,000 ; Venice, 97,000 ; Padua, 45,000 ; Mantua, 
27,000; Cremona, 28,000; Brescia, 35,000; Pavia, 25,000; 
Lodi, 15,000 ; Verona, 48,000 ; Belluno, 12,000 ; Udine, 22,000 ; 
Treviso, 11,000; Vicenza, 20,000; Bergamo, 80,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Point out those situated on rivers. 

A. Mantua is on the Mincio ;* Cremona, on the Po ;t Pavia, 
on the Tecino;| Lodi, on the Adda;§ Verona, on the Adige.|| 

* Mantua (Ital. Mantova) is a fortified town of Austrian Italy, province 
of Lombardy, capital deleg. Mantua, on both sides the Mincio, 21 ms. S. 
S. W. from Verona, and 37 ms. E. by N. from ^Cremona ; lat. 45° 9' N., 
long. 10° 48' E. 

For notes, see next page. 



ITALIAN STATES. 337 

Q. When were the different battles fought ? 
A. Battle of Pa via, in 1525 ; Rivoli, in 1796 ; Areola, in 
1796;* Lodi, in 1796 ;t Belluno, in 1797. (M. A.) 



ITALIAN DUCHIES. 



Q. How is Parma bounded ? 

A. It is bounded on the N. by the Austrian dominions, from 
which it is separated by the Po ; E. by Modena ; S. by the 
Modenese, Tuscan, and Sardinian Territories ; and W. by the 
dominions of Sardinia. (M. A.) 

The duchy of Parma* is an independent state of N. Italy, between 44° 
22' and 45° 8' N. lat., and 9° 20' and 10° 37' E. long. Its extent from E. 
to W., is above 60 ms. ; from N. to S., near 50 ms. Area estimated at 
2250 sq. ms. Pop. in 1833, 440,000. 

MODENA. 

Q. How is Modena bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Austrian Italy ; E. by the N. delegs. 
of the Papal States ; S. by Tuscany, Lucca, and the Mediter- 
ranean ; and W. by a portion of the Sardinian dominions, and 
Parma. 

The duchy of Modena, called by the Italians Stato Estense, is a state of 

j- Cremona, a city of Austrian Italy, capital deleg. same name, on the 
left bank of the Po, 46 ms. S.E. by E. from Milan, and 26 ms. N. W. from 
Parma; lat. 45° 7' N., long. 10° 2' E. 

i Pavia (Anc. Ticinum) is a frontier city of Austrian Italy, Lombardy, 
capital deleg. of its own name, on the Ticino, 19 ms. S. S. W. from Milan ; 
lat. 45° 10' N., long. 9° 9' E. 

§ Lodi, a city of Lombardy, capital deleg. Lodi and Crema, on the Adda, 
here crossed by a wooden bridge, and on the road from Milan to Piacenza, 
18 ms. S. E. from Milan ; lat. 45° 18' N., long. 9° 20' E. 

U Verona, a celebrated city of Austrian Italy, capital deleg. of same name, 
on the Adige, at the point where the last declivities of the Alps sink into 
the great plain of Lombardy, 64 ms. W. from Venice ; lat. 45° 26' N., 
long. 11° E. 

* A series of sanguinary engagements took place here on the 15th, 16th, 
and 17th of November, 1796, between the Austrians and the French, under 
Napoleon, when the former were ultimately defeated. 

-j- Lodi is famous in modern history for the victory achieved here on the 
10th of May, 1796, by Napoleon, in his first Italian campaign. The can- 
non of the Austrians swept the bridge behind which they were drawn up ; 
but it was, notwithstanding, forced by the French at the point of the bayonet, 
and the Austrian army totally defeated. On this occasion, the intrepidity 
and gallantry of Napoleon shone as conspicuously as his skill as a tactician. 
29 



3,58 ITALIAN STATES. 

N. Italy, consisting of the united duchies of Modena and Massa-Carrara, 
principally included between the 44th and 45th degrees of N. lat., and the 
10th and 11th degrees of E. long. Area estimated at 2145 sq. ms.; and 
the pop. at 400,000. 

LUCCA. 

Q. How is Lucca bounded ? 

A. It is bounded (except a few small detached portions) N. W. 
and N. by the territories of Modena, and the Tuscan Lunigiana ; 
E. and S. by Tuscany ; and W. by the Mediterranean. (M. A.) 

The duchy of Lucca is a state of Central Italy, being, excepting San 
Marine, the smallest of the Italian States, between lat. 43° 46 / and 44° 14' 
N., and long. 10° 9' and 10° 42' E. Length (N. to S.), 26 ms. ; greatest 
breadth, 21 ms. Area (including Montignoso, &c), 434 sq. ms. Pop. 
150,000. « 

TUSCAN Y. 

Q. How is Tuscany bounded ? 

A. It is bounded (with the exception of some small detached 
portions) N. by the territories of Lucca, Modena, and the Papal 
States; E. and S. E. by the latter; and S. W. and W. by the 
Mediterranean, here called the Tyrrhene or Tuscan Sea. (M. A.) 

The grand-duchy of Tuscany (Anc. Etruria) forms a state of N. and 
Central Italy, being the third in rank in that peninsula, principally between 
lat. 42° and"44p N., and the 10th and 12th degrees of E. long. Length, 
from N. to S., about 130 ms. ; greatest breadth, from E. to W., above 100 
ms. Total area, including Elba and some other small islands in the Medi- 
terranean, 8759 sq. ms. Pop. 1,450,000. Florence is the capital. 

STATES OF THE CHURCH. 

Q. How are the States of the Church bounded ? 

A. They are bounded N. by Austrian Italy ; N. E. and E. by 
the Adriatic (Gulf of Venice), and kingdom of Naples ; S. W. 
by the Mediterranean ; and W. and N. W. by Tuscany and 
Modena. (M. A.) 

Papal State (Ital. Stato Ponfijicio, or Stato della Chiesa, i. e. " State of 
the Church") is a division of Italy, comprehending the dominions of the see 
of Rome, of which the Pope is the sovereign. It is principally situated 
between 41° 10' and 45° N. lat., and 11° and 14° E. long. Its length is 
about 270 ms. ; the breadth varies greatly ; in one part it extends across the 
Italian Peninsula, and is near 140 ms. broad. Area estimated at 17,572 sq. 
ms. Pop. 2,730,000. The seat of government is at Rome. 

Q. What is the population of the cities in those states ? 

A. In Parma : 

Parma, the capital, contains 36,000 ; Piacenza, 28,000. (M. A.) 

In Modena : 

Modena, the capital, contains 27,000 ; Reggio, 18,000. (M. A.) 

In Lucca : 

Lucca, the capital, contains 24,000. (M. A.) 



ITALIAN STATES. 339 

In Tuscany : 

Florence, the capital, contains 97,000; Pisa, 30,000. (M. A.) 
In the States of the Church : 

Bologna contains 69,000 ; Ferrara, 25,000 ; Ravenna, 16,000 ; 
Rimini, 27,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is San Marino ? 

A. It is a little republic of Italy, under the protection of the 
Pope, situated in the States of the Church, near 43° 55' N. lat., 
and 12° 30' E. long. (M. A.) 

Sax Mariuo, a town and republic of Italy, under the protection of the 
Pope; being about the smallest, as well as the most ancient, state in Europe. 
The territory of the republic, enclosed on all sides by the legation of Urbino, 
in the Papal States, consists of a craggy mountain, about 2200 ft. high, and 
some adjacent hillocks, with one town and four villages ; comprising an area 
of about 22 sq. ms., and a pop. of 7600. The town stands on the side of 
the mountain above mentioned, about 15 ms. S. W. from Rimini, and 26 ms. 
N. N. W. from Urbino : lat. 43° 56' N., long. 12° 27' E. 

Map No. 21. — Q. What is the population of Rome? 
A. 149,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Bologna? 
A. 69,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Ferrara ? 
A. 25,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Florence ? 
A. 97,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Leghorn ? 
A. 76,000. (M. A.) 
Q. On what river is Rome ? 
A. On the Tiber.* (M. A.) 
Q. Florence ? 

A. On the Arno.t (M. A.) 
Q. What island west of Tuscany ? 
A. Elba. (M. A.) 

This is noted for having been the residence of Napoleon Bona- 
parte during part of the years 1814 and 1815. (M. G. p. 268.) 

* Rome, the most celebrated of European cities, famous alike in ancient 
and modern history ; first, as the metropolis of the most powerful nation of 
antiquity, and, afterwards, as the ecclesiastical capital of Christendom, and 
the residence of the pope, on both sides the Tiber, but principally on its E. 
bank, about 16 ms. from its mouth, 1 15 ms. N.W. Naples, and 145 S. S. E. 
Florence; lat. 41° 53' N., long. 12° 29' E. The pop., which, in 1837, 
amounted to 156,552, had decreased, in 1838, to 148,903, owing to the in- 
fluence of cholera and other causes. 

-j- Florence (Ital. Firenze, Anc. Florentia Tuscoram) is a city of Cen- 
tral Italy, and cap. of the grand-duchy of Tuscany, on both sides the Arno, 
63 ms. S. by W. from Bologna, 68 ms. E. X. E. from Leghorn, and 187 ms. 
N. W. from Rome ; lat. 43^ 46' N., long. 11° 15' E, 



340 NAPLES. 

KINGDOiW OF NAPLES. 
Pages 270-1.-— Lesson 181.— Maps No. 21 and 22. 

Map No. 21. — Q. How is Naples bounded ? 

A. It has N., the Papal States ; E., the Adriatic (Gulf of 
Venice) ; and elsewhere the Mediterranean. (M. A.) 

The kingdom of Naples, otherwise called the Kingdom of the Two 
Sicilies, is a European state of the second class : its continental districts 
are nearly identical with the Magna Grxcia of antiquity. It comprises the 
S. portion of Italy, with Sicily and the adjacent islands, included between 
the 36th and 43d degs. of N. lat., and the 12th and 19th of E. long. Its total 
area may be estimated at 42,550 sq. ms., and its pop. at about 7,846,000. 

The Neapolitan territory is divided into two principal portions, the conti- 
nental and the insular, the first being called the Dominij al di qua del Faro 
(the country on this side the Faro, or Straits of Messina), and the latter, 
Dominij al di la del Faro (or the country beyond the Faro). The latter 
portion has been fully treated of under the head Sicily, pages 269-70. 

The continental part of the kingdom of Naples, the limits of which have 
scarcely varied for the last eight centuries, is about 400 ms. in length, 
N. N. W. to S. S. E., and 130 ms. in its greatest breadth, from Cape Campa- 
nella to the Garganian promontory. Its shape is very irregular ; at its S. E. 
extremity are the two peninsulas of Calabria and Otranto, forming one the 
foot and the other the heel of the boot which Italy is supposed to resemble, 
while to the N. W. of the latter is the conspicuous promontory of Gargano, 
extending into the Adriatic (Gulf of Venice), representing the Spur. 

The kingdom of Naples is divided into 22 provinces, or intendancies, 15 
belonging to the peninsula, and 7 to Sicily. The government is nominally 
a limited monarchy, but approaches very nearly to a despotism. The reign- 
ing family is a branch of the house of Bourbon. 

Q. What strait separates Naples from Turkey ? 

A. Otranto. 

Q. What gulf is there in the south ? 

A. Taranto. 

Q. What mountains extend through it? 

A. Apennines. 

Q. What mountain near Naples ? 

A. Mt. Vesuvius. 

q. In Sicily? 

A. Mt. Etna. 

Q. What islands lie north of Sicily ? 

A. Lipari. 

Q. W T hat capes in Sicily ? 

A. Passaro, Lungo, and Sorello. 

Q. What strait separates Italy and Sicily ? 

A. Messina. 

Q. What is the population of Naples ? 

A. 350,000. (M. A.) 



GREECE. 341 

Q. Palermo ? 
A. 140,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Messina? 
A. 60,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Catania? 
A. 52,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Taranto? 
A. 18,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Bari? 

A. 19,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Syracuse ? 
A. 16,000. (M. A.) 
Q. How long and wide is Sicily ? 
A. 180 ms. long, and 130 wide. (M. A.) 
Q. What island south ? 
A. Malta. 

Q. What island north of Malta ? 
A. Gozzo. 

Map No. 22. — Q. On what coast do the Ionian Isles lie ? 
A. That of Turkey and Greece. 

For a description of the Ionian Isles, see Key, pages 267-8. 
Q. Which is the largest island ? 
A. Corfu. 

Q. Which is the most northern ? 
A. Corfu. 

Q. The most southern ? 
A. Cerigo. 

Q. What is the population of the Ionian Islands ? 
A. 208,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Chief towns? 

A. Corfu, 17,000 ; Argostoli, 4500 ; Zante, 20,000; Kapseli, 
5000. (M. A.) 



GREECE. 

Page 272.— Lesson 182.— Map No. 22. 

Q. What bounds Greece on the north ? 

A. Turkey. 

Q. South and west ? 

A. Mediterranean Sea. 

Q. East? 

A. Archipelago. 

Q. What peninsula in the south ? 

A. Morea. 
29* 



342 TURKEY IN EUROPE. 

Q. What isthmus unites it to the main land I 

A. Corinth. 

Q. What is the southern Cape of Greece? 

A. Matapan. 

Q. What island south of the Morea? 

A. Cerigo. 

Q. What islands west of Greece ? 

A. St. Maura, Cephalonia, and Zante. 

Q. What groups east ? 

A. Northern Sporades, and Cyciades. 

Q. What island near the east coast ? 

A. Negropont. 

Q. What gulfs on the south ? 

A. Colokythia, and Coron. 

Q. East? 

A. Napoli, and Egina. 

Q. West? 

A. Patras, and Lepanto. 

Q. What gulfs nearly separate Hellas and the Morea ? 

A. Egina, and Lepanto. 

Q. Point out the chief mountains. 

A. Mt. Velia, and Mt. Zagora. 

Q. Rivers ? 

A. Orphea, Vasdico, and Aspropotamos. 

Q. Lake? 

A. TopoHas. 

Q. Tell the population of Athens. 

A. 17,000. (M. A.) 

Q. The other towns. 

A. Livadia, 10,000 ; Patras, 6000. 

For a further description, see Key, pages 240-1. 



TURKEY IN EUROPE. 

Page 276.— Lesson 184.— Map No. 18. 

Q. What bounds Turkey on the north ? 

A. Austria. 

Q. South? 

A. Greece, Archipelago, and Sea of Marmora. 

Q. East? 

A. The Black Sea. 

Q. West? 

A. Gulf of Venice. 

Q. Which is the chief river ? 

A. Danube. 



TURKEY IN EUROPE. 343 

Q. How long is it ? 

A. 1600 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Into what sea does it flow ? 

A. Black. 

Q. Point out the principal mountains. 

A. Balkan. 

Q. How long are they ? 

A. 700 ms. (M. A.) 

(?. What strait between the Archipelago and the Sea of Mar- 
mora ? 

A. Dardanelles. 

Q. What channel leads into the Black Sea ? 

A. Channel of Constantinople. 

Q. What is the population of Constantinople ? 

A. 600,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Adrianople? 

A. 100,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Bucharest? 

A. 80,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Serajevo? 

A. 60,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Salonica? 

.#.•70,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Sophia? 

A. 50,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Joannina? 

A. 12,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Ibraila? 

A. 30,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Shumla? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Seres? 

A. 27,000. (M. A.) 

Q. On what strait is Constantinople ? 

A. On the Channel of Constantinople. 

Q. On what rivers are the largest of the other cities ? 

A. Silistria is on the Danube ;* Widin, on the Danube ;t Bel- 
grade, on the Danube ;i Ibraila, on the Danube. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, pages 241-2. 

* Silistria (Turk. Dristra), a city of European Turkey, province Bulgaria, 
capital of a Sanjiak, on the Danube, 63 ms. E.N. E. from Rutschuck. 

f Widin or Vidin, a fortified town of Bulgaria, capital of a Sanjiack, on 
the Danube, 130 ms. S. E. from Belgrade. 

+ Belgrade (Anc. Singidunum), a fortified town of the principality of 
Servia, on the right bank of the Danube, at the point where it is joined by 
the Save; lat. 44° 47' N., long. 20° 39' E. 



344 asia. 

ASIA. 

Page 279.-— Lesson 186.— M*p No. 23. 

Q. How is Asia bounded ? 

.3. It is bounded on the N. by the Northern or Arctic Ocean ; 
on the E., by the Pacific Ocean; on the S., by the Indian Ocean ; 
and on the W. and N. W., by the Red Sea, the Mediterranean, 
the JEgean Sea or Archipelago, the Strait of the Dardanelles, the 
Sea of Marmora, the Channel of Constantinople, the Black Sea, 
the River Ural, the Ural Mountains, and lastly, by the River and 
Sea of Kara. (M. A.) 

On the N., Asia is washed hy the Arctic Sea, which separates it from the 
Arctic countries of America $ on the E. by the Pacific Ocean, which divides 
it from the continent of America ; on the S. by the Indian Ocean, which 
lies between it and Australia ; on the W. it is conterminous with Africa and 
Europe, The boundary line between it and Africa is formed by the Gulf of 
Aden, the Strait of Babelmandeb (where both continents are only about 16 
ms. apart), the Red Sea, and the Isthmus of Suez, where both continents 
unite for about 50 ms. Asia is separated from Europe by the Mediterranean 
Sea, the ^Egean Sea or Archipelago, the Strait of the Dardanelles, the Sea 
of Marmora, the Channel of Constantinople, the Black Sea, and the sea of 
Azov. From the eastern shores of the latter sea, the boundary line runs 
along the River Don to that part of its course which approaches nearest to 
the Volga ; thence due E. to that stream ; thence up the middle of its chan- 
nel to the mouth of the River Kama. Thence it follows the course of that 
r. up to its source in the Uralian range, which latter forms the remainder 
of the boundary line to the Gulf of Kara, E. of the Island of Nova Zembla. 

Asia, the largest, most early civilized, and, in many respects, the most 
interesting of the great divisions of the globe, extends from 1° 20' to 78° 
N. lat., and, when the islands belonging to it are included, from 11° S. lat. 
From west to east it extends from 26° to 190° E. long. The most northerly 
point of the continent is Cevero Vostochnoi, 78° N. lat. ; the most easterly, 
East Cape, 190° E. long. ; the most southerly, Cape Romania (formed by 
the extremity of the Malay peninsula), 1° 20' N. lat. ; and the most 
westerly, Cape Baba, in Asia Minor, 26° E. long. Cape Cevero Vostochnoi 
and Cape Romania are more than 5300 ms. distant from each other, and 
this, consequently, is the extent of Asia from N. to S. Its greatest breadth 
occurs under the parallel of 70° N. lat., between Cape Baba and the E. 
coast of the Corea, where it extends about 5400 ms. from W. to E. Its 
surface is supposed to cover about 16,000,000 sq. ms., being above four and 
a half times the area of Europe. Pop. estimated at 450,000,000. 

Q. Which is the largest city and river ? 

A. Pekin is the largest city, and the Yangtse-kiang the largest 
river. (M. A.) 

DIVISIONS. 

Q. How is Siberia bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N., by the Arctic Ocean ; E. and S. E., by 



ASIA. 345 

those arms of the Pacific Ocean known as the Sea of Kamtschatka 
and the Sea of Ochotsk ; S., by the Chinese Empire, and Inde- 
pendent Tartary ; and W., by Europe. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Tobolsk. 

Siberta is a vast territory belonging to Russia, and occupying the whole 
northern part of the Asiatic continent. It is situated between 47° 30' and 
78° N. lat., and 59° and 190° E. long. Length, from E. to W., about 
4000 ms. Greatest breadth, from N. to S., near 2000 ras. Area estimated 
at 5,000,000 sq. ms. The pop. was estimated in 1838 at 2,650,000. 

Q. How is Tartary bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Asiatic Russia (Siberia) ; E. and S. E., 
by those arms of the Pacific Ocean known as the Channel of Tar- 
tary, the Sea of Japan, the Strait of Corea, and the Yellow Sea ; 
S., by China, Thibet, Little Thibet, Afghanistan, and Persia ; and 
W. and N. W., by the Russian Empire, from which it is sepa- 
rated by the Caspian Sea, and Ural River. (M. A.) 

Tartars:, or Tatart, is a very extensive region of Central Asia, partly 
comprised in the Chinese empire, and partly in Independent Tartary, which see. 

Tartary is the name given in Europe to that immense region extending 
almost entirely across Asia from the Caspian to the Eastern Ocean. It is 
the second of the three great belts into which that continent is portioned 
out. Although the name of Tartary be only partially recognised within 
these limits, and though in so vast a region much diversity of every kind 
must necessarily exist, the general similarity is striking. Many parts of it' 
are bordered, and even pervaded, by chains of mountains ; and large cities, 
cultivated spots, and fixed societies here and there occur. It contains also 
sandy deserts of considerable extent. Still, the predominant characteristic is 
that of plains almost boundless, covered with herbage more or less abundant, 
and occupied by wandering and pastoral tribes, whose camps, like moving 
cities, pass continually to and fro over its surface. 

Q. How is Independent Tartary bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N., by the Russian dominions (Siberia) ; E. 
and S. E., by the Chinese Empire. ; S., by Afghanistan and Persia ; 
and W. and N. W., by the Russian Empire, from which it is sepa- 
rated by the Caspian Sea, and Ural River. (M. A.) 

Independent Tartary, or Toorkistan (i. e. the " country of the 
Turks"), is situated in the N. W. central part of Asia, between 35° and 45° 
N. lat., and 50° and 75° E. long. Length, from N. to S., near 1400 ms. : 
greatest breadth, from E. to W., about 950 ms. Area vaguely estimated at 
from 700,000 to 1,000,000 sq. ms. A large portion of this extensive coun- 
try consists of elevated table-land, intersected by ridges of mountains, some 
of which appear to be not less than 18,000 ft. above the level of the sea. 
Deserts of greater or less extent are found in different parts. Toorkistan i.s 
divided into a number of independent states or hhanats, which vary greatly 
in extent and population. All the chiefs or khans appear to be possessed of 
a power more or less arbitrary. The principal khanats are those of Bok- 
hara, Khiva, and Khokand. Mohammedanism is the prevailing religion of 



346 asia. 

Toorkistan : it is said that the laws of the Koran, especially in Bokhara, are 
more strictly observed here than in any other Mohammedan country. The 
amount of the pop. is wholly conjectural, but is estimated at about 6,500,000. 
The uncertainty on the subject may be inferred from the circumstance that 
the last Russian embassy to Bokhara reckoned the pop. of that country at 
2,500,000 ; while the late A. Burnes reckoned it at not more than 1,000,000. 
A great proportion consists of fixed inhabitants, cultivating the ground, 
or inhabiting towns. The bulk of these, over all Independent Tartary, 
as well as Cashgar and Cabul, consist of a race called Taujiks, appa- 
rently descended from an original native people reduced to subjection by the 
conquering tribes who at present bear sway ; and the name is now generally 
applied to all who have adopted the same peaceable and industrious habits. 

Q. How is Turkey bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Russian Empire (from which it is 
partially separated by the Black Sea) ; E. by Persia ; S. by 
Arabia and by the Mediterranean; W. by the iEgean Sea or 
Archipelago, and the Strait of the Dardanelles ; and N. W. by 
the Sea of Marmora. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

Ji. Constantinople. 

The Turkish dominions in Asia are of much greater extent than those in 
Europe, but their population is supposed to be about the same. They embrace 
the whole peninsula of Asia Minor and the adjacent islands, the greater part of 
Xrmenia and Koordistan, with Syria and Palestine, Mesopotamia, and a por- 
tion of Arabia. In all, they may comprise an area of about 430,000 sq. 
ms., with a pop. probably, of about 10,000,000. 

Turkey or Ottoman Empire (in Turkish, Osmanlee Vilayetee, or the 
"country of the Osmanlees") is an extensive country occupying the S. E. 
portion of Europe, and the W. part of Asia, principally situated between 
30° and 48° N. lat., and 16° and 48° E. long. ; bounded on the N. by 
Austria and the Russian Empire (from which it is partially separated by the 
Black Sea) ; E. by Persia ; S. by Arabia and by the Mediterranean ; and 
W. by the Mediterranean, the Adriatic (Gulf of Venice), and the Austrian 
territories. Length, from N. N. W. to S. S. E., above 1800 ms. ; greatest 
breadth, from N. to S., perhaps 700 ms. The area of European Turkey in 
estimated at about 207,000 sq. ms., and the pop. at 10,000,000 ; the area of 
Asiatic Turkey at about 430,000 sq. ms., and the pop. at 10,000,000, which 
would give 637,000 sq. ms. for the area, and 20,000,000 for the pop. 
of the whole empire. The religion of Turkey is Mohammedanism ; the 
Grand Seignior is regarded as the vicegerent of the prophet, and the protec- 
tor of the Moslem faith. The government is an absolute despotism, the 
sultan being under no other restraint than what the laws of the Koran im- 
pose. Constantinople is the capital. 

Q. How is Arabia bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. \y the Asiatic provinces of the Turkish 
Empire (Syria, Mesopotamia, and Koordistan) ; N. E. by the 
Gulfs of Persia and Oman ; E., S. E., and S., by that part of the 
Indian Ocean called the Arabian Sea; and W. by the Arabic 
Gulf or Red Sea. (M. A.) 



asia. 347 

Arabia is an extensive peninsula, comprising the S. W. portion of the 
Asiatic Continent, situated between the rest of Asia and Africa, and between 
12° 22' and 33° 45' J\\ lat., and 32° 50' and 58° 42' E. long. Its greatest 
length from Suez to Cape lsolette is 1690 ms., and its greatest width from 
the Strait of Babelmandeb to the city of Bussorah, on the Euphrates, 1350 
ms. Its area is estimated at from 1,000,000 to 1,200,000 sq. ms. Arabia 
has been supposed to contain from 8,000,000 to 10,000,000 inhabitants, 
though this is probably beyond the mark. The nomadic habits of the greater 
part of its pop., and the number of petty states into which the settled pop. 
is divided, and the little that is known with respect to most of them, renders 
it impossible to assign either their limits or their population. 

Arabia was commonly divided by the ancient geographers (and the terms 
are still retained) into three parts, Arabia Felix, or happy; Petraea, or 
stony ; and Deserta, or desert. Arabia Felix borders on the Persian Gulf, 
the Indian Ocean, and the S. part of the Red Sea ; Arabia Petraea lies on the 
Red Sea, N. of Arabia Felix ; Arabia Deserta includes all the northern 
part of the country. Among the Arabians, however, these names are not 
known. They call Arabia Deserta, Nedjed or Nej'd ; Arabia Petraea, 
the Hedjaz ; Arabia Felix is divided into Yemen, Hadramaut, Oman, and 
Lahsa. 

For further particulars, see Key, page 389. 

Q. How is Persia bounded ? 

JL, It is bounded N. by the Russian province of Georgia, the 
Caspian Sea, and Independent Tartary ; E. by Afghanistan and 
Beloochistan ; S. and S. W. by the Persian Gulf, and that part 
of the Indian Ocean called the Arabian Sea ; and W. by Asiatic 
Turkey. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

Ji. Teheran. 

Persia (called by the natives Iran or Eerari) is an extensive country in the S. 
S. W. part of Asia, between 25° and 40° N. lat., and 44° and 62° E. long. 
Its political boundaries have varied greatly at different epochs, sometimes 
including Armenia, Georgia, and Bokhara, and sometimes reduced to less than 
its natural limits. At present, however, the territories of Persia are much 
more circumscribed ; the provinces of Herat, Afghanistan and Beloochis- 
tan are quite independent, while a considerable tract of land E. of the Tigris 
is possessed by Turkey. The greatest extent of Persia (with its present 
boundaries) from N. to S., is about 800 miles, and from E. to W., about 
700 ms. Area, 470,000 sq. ms. Pop. estimated at 8,000,000. The 
religion is Mohammedanism ; the government a military despotism. 

Q. How is Afghanistan bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Independent Tartary ; E. by the king- 
dom of Lahore ; S. by Beloochistan ; and W. by Persia. (M. 
A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Cabul. 

Afghanistan, called also the kingdom of Cabul, is a kingdom of S. Asia, 
between 28° and 36° N. lat, and 59° and 72° E. long. Its actual limits, 
however, ar6 very uncertain. Including Herat, the area is estimated at about 



348 asia. 

300,000 sq. ms. ; the pop. at 6,000,000. A large portion of the country 
is mountainous, or consists of high table land. In character, the Afghans 
resemble the Arabs ; they are hospitable, brave, rapacious, and revengeful. 
Mohammedanism is the prevailing religion. Cabul is the capital. 

Q. How is Beloochistan bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Afghanistan, and the sandy desert of 
Caubul ; E. by Upper and Lower Sinde ; S. by that part of the 
Indian Ocean called the Arabian Sea ; and W. by Persia. (M. 
A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Kelat. 

Beloochistan (Anc. Gedrosia, and the countries of the Ichthyophagi, 
Oritae, Arabitae, &c, Arriari) is a country in the S. of Asia, bordering on 
the Indian Ocean, and lying between 24° 50' and 30° 40' N. lat., and 57° 
50' and 69° 10' E. long. 'Length, E. to W., 700 ms. ; breadth, on either 
side, 350 ms., and 190 ms. in the centre ; area, 150,000 sq. ms. The pop. 
has been estimated at from 1,500,000 to 3,000,000; but the latter is no 
doubt beyond the mark : we incline to think that the smaller number would 
be nearer the truth. The Belooches are for the most part pastoral in their 
mode of life, though some of them are engaged in agriculture. In charac- 
ter, they are hospitable, and generally faithful to their promises, but avari- 
cious, rapacious, and revengeful. The prevailing religion is Mohammedanism. 
The government is a confederacy of several small territories, each having 
its own chief. All the others recognise the supremacy of the Khan, who 
resides at Kelat. 

Q. How is Hindoostan bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the highest mts. in the world, the 
Himmaleh or Himalaya, which separate it from Thibet and Little 
Thibet ; N. E. by the Burrampooter or Brahmapootra R., which 
separates it from British Birmah ; S. E. by the Bay of Bengal ; 
S. by the Indian Ocean ; S. W. by the Arabian Sea ; and N. W. 
by the Indus R., which separates it from Beloochistan and Af- 
ghanistan. (M. A.) 

Q: Capital? 

A. Calcutta. 

Hindoostan or Hindostan (u e. in Persian, the « country of the Hin- 
doos,'' or India on this side the Ganges) is an extensive country in the 
S. of Asia, between 8° 4' and 35° N. lat., and 67° and 91° E. long., ex- 
tending from Cape Comorin, on the S., to the Himmaleh or Himalaya Mts., on 
the N., and from the head of the Bay of Bengal, on the E., to the western bor- 
der of the valley of Indus, on the W. The length, from N. to S., is near 1900 
ms. 5 breadth, from E. to W., between 1400 and 1500 ms. The area of 
Hindoostan is estimated at 1,200,000 sq. ms. The number of inhabitants, by 
the latest accounts, is about 140,000,000. According to Malte-Brun, the 
pop. is not less than 134,000,000; the Penny Cyclopaedia estimates it at 
between 110,000,000 and 120,000,000. A large portion of this vast coun- 
try is subject to the English. The East India Company shares with the 
King of Great Britain the sovereignty over almost all the provinces which 



asia. 349 

combine to form the Anglo-Indian Empire. This company, without pos- 
sessing the title, enjoys nearly all the rights of royalty. Its authority, how- 
ever, is dependent on the British' Parliament, to which the officers of the 
East India government are directly responsible. The territory, under the 
administration of the company, is divided into three governments, designated 
as the presidency of Bengal and Agra, the presidency of Madras, and the 
presidency of Bombay. The inhabitants of Hindoostan may be divided into 
three principal classes,- viz. : the Aborigines, or Hindoos, the Asiatics of foreign 
extraction, and the Europeans. 

Q. How is Birmah bounded 1 

A. It is bounded N., by Thibet and China; E., by China, Ton- 
quin, and Siam ; and S. and W., by the Bay of Bengal and As- 
sam and Aracan. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Monchaboo. 

Bipoiah, or the Biioian Expire, is an extensive country of India beyond 
the Ganges, formerly the most powerful state of that peninsula, and consi- 
derably larger than at present ; extending between the lat. of 9° and 27° 
N., upwards of 1000 ms. in length, and nearly 600 ms. in breadth. At 
present it comprises the territory between lat. 15° 45' and 27° 22' N., and 
long. 92° 43' and 99° E. Length, N. to S., 710 ms., greatest breadth, E. to 
W., 370 ms. Area, about 254,000 sq. ms. Pop. estimated at from 4,000,000 
to 6,000,000. 

The Birmans are much less civilized than the Hindoos. In religion they 
are Buddhists ; neither Mohammedanism nor Christianity has made any pro- 
gress among them. The government is an absolute despotism, their sove- 
reign being the lord of the life and property of all his subjects. 

Q. How is Siam bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N., by Birmah ; E., by the Empire of Anam ; 
S., by the Gulf of Siam and Independent Malacca ; and W., by 
the Bay of Bengal and Birmah. (M. A.) 

q. Capital? 

A. Bangkok. 

Siax (called by the natives Thai, the tree country, and by the Birmans 
Yoodra or Yuthia) is an extensive country of India beyond the Burram- 
pooter, comprising, with its dependent states, most of the central and S. 
parts of that peninsula; extending between the 6th and 21st degs. of N. lat., 
and the 98th and 104th degs. of E. long. ; besides Siam Proper, it includes 
a part of Laos, or the country of the Shans ; also portions of Malacca and 
Cambodia. Its area has been very variously stated, but according to Craw- 
ford, it amounts to 190,000 sq. ms. ; Mitchell estimates it at 184,000 sq. ms. 
Its pop. has been estimated, though on very vague and unsatisfactory data, 
by Crawford, at 2,790,500, and by Malcolm at 3,000,000 ; of whom, probably 
1,500,000 are native Siamese, 800,000 Shans, 250,000 Malays, Peguans, 
&c, and 450,000 Chinese settlers ; but other authorities estimate the pop 1 . 
at from 6,000,000 to 8,000,000 ; in Mitchell's Geography it is stated at 
3,800,000. Buddhism is the prevailing religion of the Siamese. The 
government is an absolute despotism. 

30 



350 ASIA. 

Q. How is Anam bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N., by China ; W., by Siam, and in the rest 
of its extent by those arms of the Pacific Ocean known as the 
Gulf of Tonquin, the China Sea, and the Gulf of Siam. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Hue. 

A^am or An-jtam (Empire of) is a country of Asia, occupying the E. 
portion of the great E. peninsula of S. Asia, or India beyond the Ganges, 
comprising Cochin China and Tonquin (to which only the name of An- 
nam properly belongs), with the E. and S. part of Cambodia, part of Laos, 
and many small islands in the China Sea. It lies between 8° 45' and 23° 
28' N. lat., and 101° to 109° E. long. It is 965 ms. in length, varying in 
width from 415 ms. to 200 ms. Area, probably about 350,000 sq. ms. Pop. 
variously estimated at from 5 to 15 or 20 millions ! The lowest estimate 
is that of Mr. Crawford ; in Mitchell's Geography it is given at 9,000,000, 
which seems a fair average. 

Q. How is China bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Chinese Tartary ;* E., S. E., and S. 
by those arms of the Pacific Ocean known as the Petchelee Gulf, 
the Yellow Sea, the Eastern Sea, the Strait of Formosa, the China 
Sea, and the Gulf of Tonquin ; on the land side by Tonquin, 
Laos, and Birmah; and W. by Thibet and Chinese Tartary. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Peking. 

China is an extensive country in E. Asia, bordering on the Pacific, and 
constituting the principal portion of the Chinese empire. It lies between 
20° and 41° N. lat., and 98° and 124° E. long. Length, from N. to S., 
1474 ms. ; breadth, from W. to E., 1355 ms. But these are not the longest 
straight lines that may be made to intersect its surface ; since, from the N. E. 
corner to the frontiers of Birmah, the distance is 1 669 ms., and from the N. 
W. extremity to the isle of Amoy, it is 1557 ms. The entire area is probably 
about 1, 640,000 sq. ms.-j- The coast is upwards of 2500 ms. in length, while 
the land frontier occupies a space of 4400 ms. Thus, China Proper is about 
eight times the size of France, and eleven times that of Great Britain. 

* On the northern frontier, China is enclosed by the great wall, about 1500 
ms. long, and 20 ft. high. It is believed to have been built about 200 years 
before the Christian era, and exceeds everything of human art and industry 
that is read of in history. 

-j- Though these are offered as the dimensions of China, with some confi- 
dence as to their correctness, it is right to quote the statements of former 
writers. Lord Macartney (1797) gives the area of China Proper at 1,297,999 
sq. ms., which has been copied by Pinkerton and Murray ; Malte-Brun (1811) 
gives 1,482,091 sq. ms. The Quarterly Review (July 1836) states that the 
surface " by the most correct maps may be taken at 1,680,000 sq. ms., or 
1,^75,200,000 acres." Gutzlaff (1838), evidently misled by a misprint in 
the English translation of Malte-Brun, sets down the area at 537,000 sq. 
ms., while at p. 57 of the same work the number of sq. ms. allotted to each 
province, when added up, amount to 1,297,999, Lord Macartney's estimate. 



ASIA. 351 

Great Plain. — The first object that invites attention in the general aspect 
of China is its great plain, which, occupying the N. E. part of the country, 
is above 700 ms. in length, and varies in width from 150 to near 500 ms. 
The entire area encloses no less than six provinces, and a space of 210,000 
sq. ms., being seven times greater than the plain of Lombardy. It is extreme- 
ly populous, and if we might depend upon the census of 1813, no fewer than 
170,000,000 "mouths" — the Chinese expression for souls — are fed upon its 
surface ! The N. portion, bounded by the great wall, is dry and sandy, and 
its E. portion, bordering on the sea, and between the two great rivers, the 
Hoang-ho and the Yang-tse-Kiang, by which it is intersected, is low, 
swampy, and studded with lakes. But, notwithstanding these deductions, it 
may be said to be, on the whole, extremely fertile. It has few trees, but is 
everywhere well watered ,• is cultivated with the utmost care, and produces 
vast quantities of rice, with cotton, wheat, &c. 

The government of China is an absolute despotism. The emperors of the 
present or Mantchoo dynasty, sprung from a union of the eastern Tartars 
and Monguls, and have been in possession of the sovereignty since the year 
1644. 

The area of China* Proper is not quite a third part of the whole empire. 
It is true that its dimensions have not been satisfactorily determined, and 
it will be seen that our estimate of the extent of the empire, as well as 
of China Proper, differs from the calculations of preceding geographers ; 
which, indeed, widely disagree with each other, except where the mistakes 
of one writer have been copied by another. 

Q. How is the Chinese Empire bounded ? 

A. It -is bounded N. (for the immense extent of 3300 ms.) by- 
Asiatic Russia ; E. and S. E. by those arms of the Pacific Ocean 
known as the Channel of Tartary, the Sea of Japan, the Strait of 
Corea, the Yellow Sea, the Eastern Sea, the Strait of Formosa, 
the China Sea, and the Gulf of Tonquin ; on the land sides, S. 
and S. W. by Tonquin, Laos, Birmah, and Hindoostan ; and W. 
and N. W. by Independent Tartary. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Pekin, or Peking. 

The Chinese Emptbe is a vast country of S. E. Asia, between lat. 20° 
and 56° N., and long. 70° and 144° E., in form nearly square. Its extent 
from the borders of Khokan and Budukshan to the sea of Ochotsk is 3350 
ms., and its greatest width from the frontiers of Daouria, N., to Tonquin, S., 
is 2100 ms., enclosing, altogether, a space of about 5,200,000 sq. ms. Thus 
the Chinese empire includes all the table-land of eastern Asia — nearly a third 
part of the whole continent — or a little more than a tenth part of the land 
portion of the globe ; and contains within its enormous area the largest 
amount of population united under one government in the world. The coast 
line has an extent of above 3350 ms., and the total circumference of the 
empire is about 12,550 ms. 

* We have borrowed this name from the Malays, who call China Tchina. 
Generally speaking, the Chinese call their empire after the name of the reign- 
ing dynasty, so that it has differed at different periods. Being at present 
governed by the Manchoo dynasty, who have adopted the name of Tkising, 
the Chinese call themselves Thising-Jin y that is, men of Thising. 



352 asia. 

According to a census which is stated to have been taken by the Chinese 
government in 1812, the entire pop. of the empire amounted to more than 
360,000,000. Balbi estimates it at 170,000,000. In Mitchell's Geography 
the amount is assumed at 226,000,000. 

Q. How is Thibet bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Kuen-lun and Thsoung-ling Mts., 
which separate it from Little Bucharia and the Desert of Cobi ; 
E. by China ; S. and S. W. by the great Himmaleh Mts., separat- 
ing it from Birmah, Assam, and Hindoostan ; and W. by the Be- 
loor Mts., separating it from Independent Tartary. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Lassa. 

Thibet or Tibet (native Toup'ho, Bhoie, and Puekoachim, " snowy 
region of the north") is a very extensive region in the S. E. central part of 
Asia, of which very little is known. It appears to lie between 27° and 36° 
N. lat., and 72° and 103° E. long. The W. part of this vast tract, called 
Little Thibet (including Ladakh, Le, Baltee, &c), formerly under the con- 
trol of China, appears now to be independent of that power. Its boundaries 
on every side but the S. being so uncertain, and our knowledge of the country 
so limited, it is impossible to form any thing like an accurate estimate either 
of its area or pop. 

The country is politically divided into Wei and Tsang, or Hither and 
Farther Thibet. Wei is that division bordering on China, and having for 
its capital Lassa, or H'lassa, the residence of the Delai Lama. It is divided 
into 8 cantons, that of Lassa being the principal ; and 39 feudal townships, 
called tooszes, which lie northward, contiguous to some similar townships in 
the country of Ko-ko-nor. Tsang, or Ulterior Thibet, is W. of the former, 
and extends W. from about long. 90° E. It is divided into 7 cantons, its 
capital being Teshoo Loomboo. These two provinces are under the direc- 
tion of two ministers, sent from the imperial cabinet at Pekin ; and of two 
high priests of Thibet, called Delai Lama and Bantchin-Erdeni. The minis- 
terial residents govern both provinces conjointly, consulting only with the 
Dalai Lama for the affairs of Hither, and with the Bantchin-Erdeni for those 
of Farther Thibet. All appointments to offices of government and titles of 
nobility must be approved by the Chinese officers. But in minor matters 
the residents do not interfere, leaving such affairs to the secular deputies of 
the high priests, called D'heba. The government of the 39 feudal townships 
in Hither Thibet, and of the Tamuh or Dam Mongols, inhabiting the N. 
frontier, is entirely in the hands of residents. Two officers, natives of the 
country, are sent to each canton from Lassa, and relieved every three years. 
The subordinate management of the communities is entrusted to two officers 
in each, the d'heba and vazir, the former appointed from Lassa, the latter a 
native of the place, who, with the chief lama of the village, form a sort of 
local council, dependent on the provincial authorities ; who again are obliged 
to refer to the capital for instructions in all extraordinary cases. 

Thibet is remarkable as being the central seat and head-quarters of Budd- 
hism, where the Buddhic religion is preserved in its greatest purity. The 
whole nation is divided into two distinct and separate classes, those who 
carry on the business of the world, and those who hold intercourse with 
heaven. No interference of the laity ever interrupts the regulated duties of 



asia. 353 

the clergy, nor do the latter ever employ themselves in secular affairs. In this, 
and in the absence of castes, consist some of the most striking differences 
between the religion of Thibet and that of Hindoostan, all distinction of caste 
being utterly repudiated by the Buddhic faith. The priests of Thibet are 
all called lamas ; and the Grand, or Dalai Lama, who resides at Lassa, is 
believed by his adherents to be an incarnation of the Divinity in a human 
form. On the dissolution of this body, he is supposed to reappear in the body 
of some infant, who subsequently passes through the term of his mortal 
existence with all the honours of the Grand Lama. The Teshoo Lama, and 
others, are also supposed to be divine incarnations, occupying successively 
different bodies ; and Turner gives an amusing account of an interview 
with the former, who, although only 18 months old, appears to have con- 
ducted himself with astonishing dignity and decorum ! The Buddhists of 
Thibet have convents for men and women, and their religious institutions 
present several striking coincidences with those of the Roman Catholic 
church. 

Thibet appears to have had relations with the Chinese Empire at a very 
early period ; but it was governed by its own princes till about 1720, when 
the Emperor Kang-he acquired its sovereignty. Still, the greater share of 
power was left in the hands of the Grand Lama till the invasion of the 
Nepaul Gorkhas in 1790 ; when, on their expulsion by the Chinese, the 
present form of government was established, and strangers, formerly per- 
mitted to enter the country, were altogether excluded. 

Q. How is Corea bounded ? 

Ji. It is bounded N. by Mantchooria ; E. by the Sea of Japan ; 
S. by the Strait of Corea ; and W. by the Yellow Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

Ji. Kingkitao. 

Corea (called by the natives Chaou-Seen, by the Chinese Keaou-le, and 
by the Mantchoo Tartars Sol-ho) is a maritime country on the E. coast of 
Asia, tributary to China, consisting of a large oblong-shaped peninsula, with 
an adjoining portion of the continent, and a vast number of islands, which 
are especially numerous on the W. coast. The whole of the dominions lie 
between lat. 34° 30' and 40° N., and long. 123° 50' and 129° 30' E. ; having 
E., the Sea of Japan ; S., the Strait of Corea ; W., the Yellow Sea, and 
Gulf of Leao-tong ; N. W., the province of Leao-tong ; and N., Mantchooria. 
From the latter it is separated by a mountain chain, and the Thumen-Kiang 
River. Length, N. to S., 400 ms. ; average breadth of the peninsula, about 
130 ms. Total area, inclusive of islands, probably about 48,000 sq. ms. 
The pop. has been estimated at 15,000,000, but there are no real grounds 
for this estimate, which, we have little doubt, is greatly beyond the mark. 
Gutzlaff represents the coasts as thinly inhabited. Mitchell estimates the 
pop. at 7,000,000. 

Q. How is Japan bounded ? 

Ji. It is bounded N. by the Sea of Ochotsk and the indepen- 
dent part of the Island of Seghalien, Tarakai, or Karafto ; E. by 
the N. Pacific Ocean ; S. by the Eastern Sea of the Chinese ; and 
W. by the Sea of Japan ; which communicates with the open 
ocean by the Straits of La Perouse, Sangar, &c, running between 
the different islands. (M. A.) 
30* 



354 asia. 

Q. Capital? 

A. Jedo. 

The Empire of Japan, (called Niphon by the Japanese ; Yang-koo, and 
Jepen or Jepoon by the Chinese*) is an insular empire off the E. coast of 
Continental Asia, and opposite to the Sea of Japan and the Channel of 
Tartary and Strait of Corea, by which it is separated from Mantchooria. 
It comprises five large, and a great number of small islands, lying between 
the 30th and 50th parallels of N. lat., and between the 128th and 151st degs. 
of E. long. 

Our knowledge of Japan is somewhat limited. A few Dutch traders 
annually visit its only open port, Nangasaki ; and the Russians have ac- 
quired some slight acquaintance with the country ; but, though the talents 
of Kiimpfer, Thunberg, Krusenstern, Siebold, M eylan and Fischer, have been 
engaged in collecting materials foi a good description of this very curious 
and interesting country, the cautious and jealous policy of the Japanese 
government with respect to the admission of foreigners (caused, as in China, 
by the attempts of Jesuit missionaries to Christianize the country), has 
hitherto in a great measure baffled the efforts of European inquirers into its 
internal arrangements and economy. The shores of Japan are, likewise, 
either so rocky or so extremely flat, and are so often enveloped in heavy and 
dangerous fogs, that exploring vessels cannot approach near enough to make 
an accurate survey of the coasts. 

Balbi calculates the area of the Japanese Empire at about 240,000 sq.ms., 
and McCulloch at 266,600 sq. ms. The pop. is variously estimated at from 
12,000,000 to 25,000,000. In Mitchell's work the sq. ms. are stated at 
260,000, and the inhabitants at 14,000,000. 

As an evidence of the superior civilization of the Japanese, we may 
adduce the great attention which is paid to female education, and the gene- 
ral respect shown to that sex — a respect which is without a parallel among 
the nations of Asia. In their moral character, the people of Japan are re- 
presented as manly, honest, and brave, and as entertaining a high sense of 
honour. The prevailing religion is Buddhism, variously modified by other 
superstitions. The government is despotic ; but the emperor himself is con- 
sidered as subject to the laws, which are of long standing and cannot be 
easily changed. Yedo (Jedo), on the Island of Niphon, is the capital. 



Q. Where is the Sea of Kara ? 

A. It is N. W. of Siberia, extending northward from the bound- 
ary of Europe and Asia into the Arctic Ocean, and having W. 
and N. the Islands of Nova Zembla. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Sea of Kamtschatka ? 

A. It lies between the N. E. extremity of Asia and the N. W. 
of America, and is separated from the Pacific Ocean by the Aleu- 
tian Islands. (M. A.) 

Q. W T here is the Sea of Ochotsk ? 

A. It is in the N. E. of Asia, between the peninsula of Kamt- 

* Yang-hoo signifies the « workshop of the sun ;" Jepoon, the " country 
of the rising sun." 



asia. 355 

schatka on the E. and the E. part of Siberia and the Island of 
Seghalien on the W., being separated from the Pacific Ocean on 
the S.E. by the chain of the Kurile Islands. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Sea of Jesso ?* 

A. It is in the N. E. of Asia, having the Sea of Ochotsk on 
the N., the Island of Seghalien on the W.,and the Kurile Islands 
on the S. E., separating it from the Pacific Ocean. 

Q. Where is the Sea of Japan ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Asia, situated between the Japa- 
nese Islands and the opposite coasts of Mantchooria and Corea. 
(M. A.) 

This sea extends from about 34° to 52° N. lat. (if we include the Gulf 
or Channel of Tartary, at the N. extremity), and from 127° 20' to 142° E. 
long. Its length is about 1400 ms. ; greatest breadth about 600 ms. 

Q. Where is the Yellow Sea ?t 

A. It is on the E. coast of Asia, having N., Mantchooria ; E., 
Corea ; S., the Eastern Sea ; and W., China. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Eastern Sea ? 

A. It has N. the Yellow Sea ; N. N. E. the Japanese Islands ; 
S. S. W. the Island of Formosa ; and W. China ; being separated 
from the Pacific Ocean on the S. E. by two or three small groups 
of islands, among which the Loo-Choo have obtained some 
celebrity in latter times. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the China Sea ?$ 

A. It extends from the Island of Formosa to the Equator, lying 
between the Philippines and the Islands of Palawan and Borneo 
on the E. and S. E., and Farther India and China on the N. W. 
and N. 

Q. Where is the Arabian Sea 1 

A. It stretches between the peninsula of Hindoostan on the E., 
and that of Arabia on the W., having Beloochistan on the N., and 
is formed by the Jndian Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Red Sea ? 

A. It lies between Arabia and Africa, communicating with the 
Indian Ocean by the Strait of Babelmandeb and the Gulf of 
Aden. (M. A.) 

Red Sea (Anc. Arabicus Sinus, or Rubrum Mare), an extensive inland 
sea between Africa and Arabia, connected with the Indian Ocean by the 

* This is also called the Sea of Seghalien or Tarakai, from the large island 
forming its W. side, and commonly called Seghalien. 

•j- Called Wang-Hal (Yellow Sea) by the Chinese, which is merely an 
extensive N. Gulf of the Tongo-Hai (Eastern Sea). 

* Called Han-Hal (Southern Sea) of the Chinese; called by the Euro- 
peans the Chinese Sea, because it is traversed by them in their voyage to 
China. 



356 asia, 

Strait of Babelmandeb, less than 20 ras. across, between lat. 12° 40' and 
30° N., and long. 32° and 44° E. Extreme length, 1500 ms. ; extreme 
breadth, 230 ms. ; average breadth, 135 ms. ; estimated area, 185,000 sq. 
ms. It runs in a pretty direct course from N. N. YV. to S. S. E., being 
divided at its N. extremity into two arms, the longest and most westerly of 
which is the Gulf of Suez, at the head of which is the port of the same 
name. The other branch, which runs N. N. E., having a length of 120 ms., 
is called the Gulf of Akaba. On the promontory between these gulfs is the 
mountain group of Djibbel-Musa, including Mounts Sinai and Horeb, famous 
in Scripture History. The Gulf of Suez is more than 180 ms. in length, 
and its breadth may average about 22 ms. The Strait of Djubal, the entrance 
to this gulf, is nearly 1 6 ms. across. The present charts of the Red Sea 
were formed in 1829, by order of the East India Company, under the super- 
intendence of Captains Elwin and Moresby ; but a considerable section of 
its S. part had been surveyed in 1801, by Sir H. Popham, under Lord Valen- 
cia. The more recent, however, is the only complete survey that has been 
made of this important gulf. 

The Red Sea, though, generally speaking, of great depth (probably 
averaging 100 fathoms), is in parts studded with rocky islets and hidden 
coral banks, which extend far into the channel, and sometimes impede the 
course of vessels. The islands are scattered pretty abundantly in all parts 
of the sea. Several occur near the entrance of the two northern gulfs; but 
by far the greater number are found at its S. W. extremity, nearly opposite 
Massuah ; this group being denominated the Dhalak Archipelago. Farther 
S. are several other islands, one of which (called Djibel-Teer) comprises an 
active volcano, rising nearly 1200 feet above the sea. The Island of Cameran 
lies S. W. of Loheia ; and nearly opposite Hodeida, in lat. 15° N., is the 
group of the Zebayer Islands. 

The Red Sea is first mentioned in Sacred History in connexion with the 
miraculous passage of the Israelites across the Gulf of Suez. (Exod. xiv. 
21.) In the time of Solomon, two ports, Elath and Ezion-geber, were 
established on the Gulf of Akaba ; and the Phoenicians seem to have car- 
ried on a large trade on this sea, though, probably, they had no direct com- 
munication with India. The early Greek writers, including Herodotus, 
seem to have had very vague notions respecting the Red Sea ; for the 
'Epuflpa ^coafftfa apparently comprises, in their estimation, the whole extent 
of coast from the Indus to the coast of Africa. DJring the flourishing 
period of the Persian Empire, the Persian Gulf was the medium through 
which Europe and Western Asia" received the wealth of the east ; but under 
the successors of Alexander, especially the Ptolemies, who exerted themselves 
to promote the trade of this sea, it became an important channel of inter- 
course between Europe and India and the east. This intercourse continued 
with little intermission, though not to the same extent at all times, till the 
discovery of the passage round the Cape of Good Hope, by which com- 
merce was diverted into a wholly different channel. The time, however, 
seems now to have arrived when the Red Sea is again to recover a portion, 
if not the whole, of its ancient importance as a great commercial highway. 

Great discrepancy of opinion has prevailed respecting the origin of the 
name. According to Pliny (Hist. Nat. lib. vi. cap. 23) and Quintius Cur- 
tius (lib. viii. cap. 9), its Greek name, signifying red, is derived from 
Erythros, a king of the adjoining country. But the more probable opinion 
seems to be that it is derived from the great abundance of coral found in it. 



asia. 357 

Q. Where is the Dead Sea ? 

*/?. It is in the S. part of Palestine. The R. Jordan flows into 
it at its N. extremity, but it has no visible outlet. (M. A.) 

The Dead Sea (Anc. Lacus Asphaltites ; Arab. Bahr Lout; i. e. the 
" Sea of Lot") is situated in Palestine, between 31° 8' and 31 o 47' N. lat., 
and 35° 25' and 35° 38' E. long. Its length is about 50 ms. ; its greatest 
breadth, 12 ms. The towns of Sodom and Gomorrah are said to have been 
on its western bank, where some few ruins occur. The waters of the Lake 
Asphaltites are pungent and bitter. Asphaltum floats upon its surface, and 
covers the whole extent of its shores. Near the S. portion of the Dead Sea 
is a low mountain ridge, about 150 ft. high, which is one mass of solid rock- 
salt, covered with layers of soft limestone and marl. Several of the streams 
which flow into the sea in this part, are salt as the saltest brine. It appears 
from the researches of a late writer, Russegger, that the Dead Sea is 1429 
feet below the level of the Mediterranean. 

The extent, &c, of the Dead Sea, as given by McCulIoch, varies a little 
from the preceding ; we therefore subjoin his very beautiful and lengthy 
description of it, as follows: 

Dead Sea, a Lake of Palestine, celebrated in Scripture history, between 
31° 5' and 31° 52' N. lat., and 35° 26' and 35° 43' E. long. Its dimen- 
sions have been variously stated, but it is probably about 55 ms. in length, 
and 20 in extreme width. On the E. and W. it is bounded by exceedingly 
high mountains ; on the N. it opens to the plain of Jericho and the valley 
of the Jordan ; on the S. the Valley of El-Ghor extends, as if it were a 
continuation of its bed, to the Gulf of Akabah. 

Nothing can be more dreary than the scenery around this famous lake ; 
the soil, impregnated with salt, is without vegetation, the air is loaded with 
saline particles, and the bare crags of the surrounding mountains furnish no 
food for either beast or bird. Hence its neighbourhood is deserted by ani- 
mated beings, and the dreary stillness of the place is increased by the nature 
of the lake itself. Intensely salt, its waters are not moved by a gentle breeze, 
and, owing to the hollowness of its basin, being seldom affected by a strong 
one, its usual appearance is that of stagnation, agreeing well with the death- 
like stillness and desolation around. 

This absence of life has given to the lake its popular designation of Dead 
Sea, and is the source of the common tradition that its waters are fatal to 
fish, and its exhalations to birds and other animals. This is, however, in- 
correct ; straggling birds fly over its surface uninjured ; and Maundrell found 
upon its shores some shells, which seemed to imply that it was not altogether 
tenantless. The water is very limpid, but extremely bitter and nauseous, the 
substances held in solution amounting to one-fourth part of its whole weight. 
It has also a strong petrifying quality, which accounts for the want of any 
great variety of fish ; and it is peculiarly buoyant, though the assertion that 
nothing sinks within its bosom is wholly fabulous. Asphaltum (whence its 
classical name) floats in great quantities on its surface ; and a bituminous 
stone, very inflammable, and capable of receiving a high polish, is found 
upon its shores. 

The Dead Sea is one of the class of lakes that have no visible outlets : it 
receives six streams besides the Jordan, but gives forth none ; the surplus 
water being carried off by evaporation. Its depth varies in the dry and rainy 



358 asia. 

seasons, but is never very great ; at its narrowest part, about 8 rns. from its 
S. extremity, it is usually fordable. 

Its Arabic name, Bahr Lout (Sea of Lot), refers to the connexion between 
the history of this lake and that of the nephew of Abraham, in whose days 
its bed, then the fertile vale of Siddim, was considered by the sacred his- 
torian as worthy to be compared with the " garden of the Lord." (Gen. 
xiii. JO.) It certainly contained five cities (Gen. xiv. 2); and, according 
to Stephen of Byzantium (art. XoSo/xa), 10, and Strabo (xvi., cap. 2, 764), 
13. In the visitation by which they were all destroyed, with the exception 
of Zoar (Gen. xix. 23, 24), the neighbouring country underwent an extra- 
ordinary change ; so much so, that Moses in another place (Deut. xxix. 23) 
describes it as " a land of brimstone, and salt, and burning," characteristics 
by which it still continues to be marked. Ruins of the overthrown cities 
are said to have been seen on the W. side of the lake, but the fact has not 
been authenticated. In Scripture this collection of water is called the Salt 
Sea (Gen. xiv. 3; Deut. iii. 17; Josh. xv. 5) ; the Sea of the Plain (Deut, 
iii. 17) ; and the East Sea (Ezek. xlvii. 18 ; Joel, ii. 20). 

Q. Where is the Mediterranean Sea ? 

Ji. It is bounded N. by Europe ; E. by Asia ; and S. by 
Africa, communicating at its W. extremity, by the Strait of Gib- 
raltar, with the N. Atlantic Ocean, and at its N. E. extremity, by 
the Dardanelles, with the Sea of Marmora, and by the Channel 
of Constantinople, with the Black or Euxine Sea. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, pages 242-3 

Q. Where is the Black Sea? 

A. It lies between European Russia on the N. ; the Caucasian 
countries of Circassia and Georgia on the N. E. and E. ; Asiatic 
Turkey on the S. ; and European Turkey on the W. It com- 
municates with the Mediterranean Sea by the Channel of Con- 
stantinople, the Sea of Marmora, and the Strait of the Dardanelles, 
and with the Sea of Azov by the Strait of Enikale. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 244 

Q. Where is the Caspian Sea ? 

A. It is a large inland sea, being wholly enclosed, having no 
outlet whatever to the ocean, and is surrounded by Tartary, Persia, 
the Caucasian countries, and the Russian governments of Astrakhan 
and Orenburg. (M. A.) 

Caspian Sea (the Mare Hyrcanum of the ancients) is a great salt lake of 
W. Asia, extending from 36° 35' to 47° 25' N. lat., and from 46° 50' to 
54° 10' E. long. Its direction is from N. by W. % W. to S. by E. | E., but 
at its N. end it turns due E., terminating in a considerable gulf called 
Mervoi Kultuk, or the Dead Sea. It is here almost 400 ms. from E. to W., 
but in general it is not much more than half that width, and at its narrowest 
part (about 40° 20' N.) it does not exceed 120 ms. across: its greatest 
length, from N. to S., is estimated at from 750 to 800 ms. ; and its area may 
be estimated at 120,000 sq. ms. The waters of this sea are much less salt 
than those of the Atlantic. Gmelin estimates the proportion as I to 4. 



ASIA. 350 

Though it receives the waters of the Volga and several other rivers of con- 
siderable magnitude, the Caspian has no outlet. The surface of this sea is 
stated to be more than 3G0 ft. below that of the ocean. 

The Caspian Sea, Katfrtt^ ©cOacrara, is the oldest name of this water. It 
was derived from the Caspii, a people who inhabited its banks ; as the more 
modern term Hyrcanian Sea, ©coacrcra Tpxawa, was similarly derived from 
the more important Hyrcanii, a principal branch of the great Persian family. 
In the present day it is called More Gualenskoi by the Russians ; Kulsxim, 
by the Persians ; Bahr Kurzum by the Arabs 5 Kulzum Dengkis, by the 
Turks ; and Akdinghis by the Tartars. 

Q. Where is the Sea of Aral ? 

A. It is a great inland sea or lake of Asia, in Independent Tar- 
tary, situated E. of the Caspian Sea, between the 43d and 47th 
degs. of N. lat., and the 58th and 62d of E. long. It has no 
outlet. (M. A.) 

This sea is about 240 ms. in length from S. W. to N. E., and from about 
90 to nearly 120 ms. in breadth ; so that, with the exception of the Cas- 
pian, it is the most extensive inland sea of the Old World. It has a great 
number of islands, particularly towards the S., and is generally so shallow, 
that it can be safely navigated only by flat-bottomed boats. Its waters are 
salt, and its coasts generally low and sandy, the country around consisting 
mostly of vast arid steppes. It is well supplied with fish, of which sturgeons 
are the most valuable ; seals are also met with. The Sea of Aral receives, 
besides smaller streams, the waters of two great rivers, the Sir or Sihon 
(the Jaxartes of the ancients), and the Amoo or Jihon (the Oxus of the 
ancients). But, notwithstanding it has no outlet, the prevalent opinion is, 
that the supply of water brought to it, and also to the Caspian Sea, is un- 
equal to what is carried off by evaporation, and that their level and surface 
are being gradually diminished. The extraordinary difference between the 
level of the Caspian and the Sea of Aral, and the level of the Black Sea, as 
well as the nature of the soil in their vicinity, the traditional and historical 
statements with respect to their boundaries, and the opinions of the most emi- 
nent naturalists, all lead to the belief that they once extended over a much 
larger tract of country, and most probably made part of one great inland sea. 

GULFS. 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Obi ? 

A. It is an inlet of the Northern Ocean, in the N. W. part of 
Siberia. The S. W. extremity is entered by the R. Obi. (M.A.) 

This gulf is 360 ms. long from N. to S., and from 45 to 60 ms. in breadth. 

Q. Where is the Gulf of the Lena ? 

A. It is an inlet of the Northern or Arctic Ocean, on the N. 
coast of Siberia. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Anadir ! 

A. It is on the E. coast of Siberia, near Bhering's Strait ; it 
sets up from the Sea of Kamtschatka far inland. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Tonquin ? 

A It is N. E. of the Empire of Anam, formed by the China 
Sea. (M. A.) 



360 ASIA. 

This gulf is situated between 18° and 22° N. lat., and 106° and 110° E. 
long. Length above 200 ms. ; greatest breadth above 170 ms. 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Siam ? 

A. It is situated between the Malay Peninsula, on the W., 
and Cambodia on the E., being formed by the China Sea. (M. A.) 

This gulf is about 500 ms. in length, and 350 ms. in its greatest breadth. 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Martaban ? 

A. It is S. of the Birman Empire, formed by the Bay of Bengal. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Manaar ? 

A. It is an inlet of the Indian Ocean, dividing the Island of 
Ceylon from the S. extremity of Hindoostan ; extending between 
lat. 7° 30' and 9° N., and long. 78° and 80° E. (M. A.) 

This gulf would seem, from its situation between Ceylon and the conti- 
nent, to be important for commercial purposes ; but it is, on the contrary, 
hardly navigable, from its shallowness, except for vessels of the size of a 
small sloop, and is, in consequence, but little frequented. A ridge of rocks 
and sand-banks extends nearly across it from the N. shore of Ceylon to 
Ramisseram I., near the S. E. coasts of Hindoostan, which the natives call 
Adam's Bridge, from a tradition amongst them that the father of mankind 
here passed from Ceylon, his first residence, to India. 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Cambay 1 

A. It is an inlet of the Arabian Sea, on the W. coast of Hin- 
doostan. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Cutch? 

A. It is an inlet of the Arabian Sea, on the W. coast of Hin- 
doostan, lying N. W. of the Gulf of Cambay. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Oman ? 

A. It lies between the coasts of S. Persia and Beloochistan on 
the N., and those of Oman on the S. and W. It connects with 
the Gulf of Persia by the Strait of Orams, 33 ms. wide, in which 
the noted Isle of Ormus is situated. This gulf forms the N. part 
of the Arabian Sea ; its width, from Cape Ras-al-Gat to the coast 
of Beioochistan, is about 220 ms. (M. A.) 

From very early times, this part of the Arabian Sea has been a great 
commercial thoroughfare for the trade carried on from India to the countries 
on the Euphrates and the Mediterranean. More than 2000 years ago, its 
waters were traversed by the fleet of Alexander the Great, under the com- 
mand of his admiral Nearchus, in the noted voyage from the Indus to the 
Euphrates. 

Q. Where is the Persian Gulf? 

A. It separates Persia from Arabia, communicating with the 
Arabian Sea by the Strait of Ormus, and the Gulf of Oman. 
(M. A.) 

This gulf is an extensive arm of the Indian Ocean, separating Persia 
from Arabia, between the 24th and 30th degs. N. lat., and the 47th and 57th 
degs. E. long., uniting with the Indian Ocean by the 6trait, about 32 ms. across, 



ASIA. 361 

between Cape Musseldom (lat. 26° 19' N., long. 56° 30' E.) and the oppo- 
site coast. This gulf has somewhat of an oval shape, extending about 520 
ms, N. W. and S.E., with an average breadth of about 160 ms, ; but 
toward its S. E. end it is upwards of 220 ms. in width, though it soon after- 
ward, on taking its northern bend, previously to its junction with the ocean, 
becomes much narrower. It receives at its N. W. end the united waters of 
the Euphrates and Tigris, called the Shat-ul-Arab, about 70 ms. below Bus- 
sorah ; but it has few or no other affluents of any importance. These 
streams, however, assisted in some measure also by the shape of the gulf 
itself, tend to diminish the height of the tides, which are considerably less 
than in the Red Sea. 

Q. Where is the Bay of Bengal ? 

A. It stretches between the peninsula of Farther Tndia on the 
E., and that of Hindoostan on the W., formed by the Indian Ocean. 
(M. A.) 

The Bay of Bengal is a large arm of the Indian Ocean, and is the largest 
portion of water which bears the name of bay. It extends N. from 8° to 
22° N. lat. • the long, of the middle of the bay is about 90° E. from Green- 
wich. It is of a triangular form, the coasts on each side stretching N. W. 
and N. E. until they meet at the mouths of the Ganges and Burrampooter 
rivers. On the W. side is Hindoostan, and the island of Ceylon ; on the E. 
is Aracan, Birmah, the British provinces S. of the Salwen, and the W. part 
of Siam; S. E. is the I. of Sumatra ; E. of the middle of the bay are the 
Andaman and Nicobar Islands. From E. to W. the Bay of Bengal extends 
1350 ms., and from N. to S. almost 1000 ms. It receives at its head the 
waters of the Ganges and Burrampooter rivers ; on the W. those of the 
Mahanuddy, the Godavery, and the Krishna or Kistna ; on the E. the Irra- 
waddy and Salwen are the principal streams which flow into this part of the 
ocean. 



Q. Where is Bhering's Strait ? 

A. It separates Asia on the N. E., from America on the N. W., 
and connects the Arctic with the Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Strait of Matsmay ? 

A. It separates Niphon from Jesso, and connects the Sea of 
Japan with the Pacific Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Strait of Corea ? 

A. It separates Corea from Niphon and Kiusiu, and connects 
the Sea of Japan with the Eastern Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Strait of Formosa ? 

A. It separates the Island of Formosa from China, and con- 
nects the Eastern with the China Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Strait of Malacca ? 

A. It separates Malacca or the Malay Peninsula from the Island 
of Sumatra, and connects the China Sea with the Indian Ocean. 
(M.A.) 

The breadth of this strait in some places is less than 30 ms. ; its whole 
length is about 600 ms. 
31 



362 asia. 

Q. Where is the Strait of Babelmandeb ? 
A. It separates Arabia from Abyssinia, and connects the Red 
Sea with the Indian Ocean. (M. A.) 

The width of this strait is estimated at about 16 ms. ; it is divided in two 
by the small island of Perim, which lies 4 or 5 miles from the Arabian coast, 
In the deepest part of the strait no soundings are found with 100 fathoms 
of line. The name Babelmandeb signifies, in Arabic, "the Gate of Tears." 

CAPES. 

Q. Where is Cape Cevero Vostochnoi ? 

A. This cape (called North East Cape by Baldwin and 
Morse; and Cape Taimura by McCulloch) forms the most 
northerly point of Asia. (M. A") Lat. 78° N., long. 104° E. "' 

Q. Where is Cape Chalagskoi ? 

S. It is on the N. coast of Siberia. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is East Cape ? 

A. This cape (called by McCulloch, Tshukotskoi JYoss) forms 
the most easterly point of Asia, situated opposite Cape Prince of 
Wales, the most westerly point of America. (M. A.) Long. 
190° E. 

Q. Where is Cape St. Thadeus? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Siberia. (M. A.) Lat. 62° 50' 
N., long. 179° 5' E. 

Q. Where is Cape Cambodia ? 

A. It is the most southerly point of Cambodia. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Romania ? 

A. This cape (called by McCulloch, Cape Buros) is the most 
southerly point, of Asia. (M. A.) Lat. 1° 20' N. 

Q. Where is Cape Comorin? 

A. It forms the S. extremity of Hindoostan. (M. A.) Lat. 8° 
4' N., long. 77° 37' E. 

Q. Where is Cape Ras-al-Gat? 

A. It forms the most easterly point of Arabia. (M. A.) Lat. 
22° 22' N., long. 59° 58' E. 

Q. Where is Cape Isolette ? 

A. It is on the S. E. coast of Arabia. (M. A.) 

RIVERS. 

Q. Where is the Obi River ? 

A. It is a large River of Siberia, in the governments of Tomsk 
and Tobolsk, rising by two principal sources near the frontiers of 
the Chinese Empire, near the 50th parallel of N. lat., and the 89th 
meridian of E. long. Its course is first north-westerly, till its 
junction with the Irtysh, in about 61° N. lat., and 69° E. long., 
when it changes to the N., and continues in this direction to its 
termination in the Gulf of Obi, in about 06° 40' N. lat., and 67° 
E. long. Length, 2500 ms. (M. A.) 



asia. 363 

If the Irtysh or Irtish (which joins the Obi in lat. 61° N., and is the 
longest and widest stream, and most direct from the source) be considered the 
main river, its length will exceed 3000 ms. ; the area of its entire basin has 
been estimated at 1,357,000 sq. ms. The Obi, which is the eastern branch, 
has numerous affluents, the principal of which are the Tom, Tehelim, and Ket, 
joining it on the E. or right bank. After its junction with the Irtysh, it 
attains a breadth in some places of nearly 20 ms., with a depth varying from 
2 to 7 fathoms, and has a very rapid current, forming in the lower part of 
its course numerous islands, and flowing over rocky ledges, that greatly im- 
pede navigation during the few months that the river is free from ice. The 
Irtysh rises within the Chinese Empire, in lat. 47° N., long. 89° 10' E., on 
the N. side of the Thian-Chan Mts., and pursues a course nearly W. N.W. 
of 240 ms. to Lake Zaizan or Zaizan Nor, through which it flows, and then 
turns northward for about 100 ms., after which it has a general N.W. direction, 
passing Semipolatinsk and Omsk, as far as Tobolsk. Below this point it 
makes a curve north-eastward of about 300 ms., and joins the Obi near 
Samarov. 

Q. Where is the Yenisei River ? 

A. It is a great R. of N. Asia, in Siberia, through the central 
part of which it flows. It rises within the Chinese Empire, near 
51° N. lat., and 98° E. long., and proceeds at first W. for about 
5° of long., to near the point where it leaves the Chinese fron- 
tier. It then turns northward, and pursues generally a northerly- 
course to the Arctic Ocean, which it enters by a wide estuary 
called Yenisei Gulf, or rather the bay of the 72 islands, the 
mouth of which is in about 721° N. lat., and 85° E. long., about 
200 ms. E. of the Gulf of Obi. Length, 2300 ms. (M. A.) 

This r. has its basin lying between those of the Lena to the E., and the 
Obi to the W., and is supposed to comprise an area of nearly 1,000,000 sq. 
ms., being about the same size as the province of Yeniseisk. 

The Angara, or Verchnie Tungoosrka, the most important tributary of this 
river, is much larger than that part of the Yenisei which lies above their 
junction. It has a course of about 1100 ms., and flows from Lake Baikal. 
A deep and powerful stream, the Sanelege which runs into the same lake, may 
be considered as the head of the Angara. Its length is about 700 ms., making 
the whole at least 1800 ms., whereas the Upper Yenisei has not more than 
half that extent, and is altogether a much smaller river. As in the case of 
our Missouri and Mississippi, the largest stream has been regarded as a tri- 
butary, f 

Q. Where is the Lena River ? 

A. It is a large R. of N. Asia, the principal in E. Siberia, ex- 
tending through 19° N. lat., and falling into the Arctic Ocean. 

It rises in the mountains which skirt the N. W. shore of Lake 
'Baikal, in about 58° N. lat., and 106° E. long. It first runs 
northerly, and then in a general E. N. E. direction, till it reaches 
Yakoutsk, the metropolis of E. Siberia ; after which it flows N. 
to the Arctic Ocean, which it enters by several mouths, in about 
73° N. lat., and 127° 30' E. long. Length, 2600 ms. (M. A.) 



364 a«xa. 

Near its termination, the r. is very broad, and several of its numerous 
arms (among which are extensive deltas or islands) present the appearance 
of wide estuaries. It is said to be safely navigable for the greater part of 
its course. 

The basin of the Lena, according to Ritter, covers an area of about 800,000 
sq. ms. 

Q. Where is the Amoor River ? 

A. Amoor (Amur or Amour, called also the Seghalien) is a 
large R. of E. Asia, which has its sources in Mongolia. It is 
formed by the junction of two rivers, — the Onon or Chilka, 
which rises nearly under the 110th deg. of E. long., and the 50th 
deg. of N. lat., and the Kerion or Argoun, which rises nearly 
under the same meridian, but about 2h° more to the S. The 
latter river traverses the Lake of Koulon, and, issuing from it, 
and pursuing a N. E. course, forms, for a considerable distance, 
the line of demarcation between the Russian and Chinese Em- 
pires. The Kerion and Onon unite near the Fort of Ruklanova, 
in about the 120th deg. of E. long. The combined r. having 
taken the name of Amoor, flows E. and S. E., till, at its most S. 
point, it is joined by its large tributary, the Songari, flowing N. 
E. ; the Amoor, having suddenly taken the same direction, pre- 
serves it during the remainder of its course, till it falls into the 
arm of the sea opposite the N. end of the Island of Seghalien, or 
Tchoka, in about the 53d deg. of N. lat., and the 140th deg. of 
E. long. (M. A.) 

The entire course of the r., to the source of either of its principal branches, 
may be estimated, inclusive of its windings, at about 2200 ms. ; but the dis- 
tance in a direct line from its sources to its embouchure does not exceed 
1400 ms. 

Q. Where is the Hoang-Ho River ? 

A. Hoang-Ho or Whang-ho {%. e. the "Yellow River," so 
named from the colour which the yellow clay along its banks gives 
to its waters) is one of the largest rivers of China, which rises 
in the Kuen-lun Mts., near 35° N. lat., and 98° E. long. It pur- 
sues a very circuitous N. E. course through the N. W. part of 
China, and enters the S. part of Chinese Tartary near 42° N. lat., 
where, after running due E., it suddenly bends S., penetrating 
China to a latitude nearly parallel to its source ; and then it pur- 
sues an easterly direction till it enters the Yellow Sea, in about 
33° 50'N.lat./and 120° 10' E. long. Length, 2500 ms. (M.A.) 

Q. Where is the Yang-tse-Kiang River ? 

A. Yang-tse-Kiang, or '• Blue River," called, also, sometimes, 
Ta Kiang or " Great River," is the largest r. of China. Its 
source has never been visited by Europeans, but, according to the 
statements of some Chinese travellers, it appears to rise between 
34° and 35° N. Int.. and S9 - and 90° E. long. Its general course 



ASIA. ofjJ 

is easterly, and it falls into the Eastern Sea in about 32° N. lat., 
and 121° E. Jong. Length 2800 ms. (M. A.) 

The breadth of this r. in the last 800 ms. of its course varies from 1 to 3 
ms, The tide ascends about 400 ms. : in this part the depth of the r. is 
very great; a Chinese proverb says, "the sea has no boundary, and the Ta 
Kiang no bottom." The whole length of the Yang-tse-Kiang is estimated at 
above 3000 ms. 

The Hoang-ho, or "Yellow River," and the Yang-tse-Kiang, or " Sou of 
the Ocean," rank in the first class of rivers. " These two great streams, 
similar both in rise and destination, descend with rapidity from the great 
table-lands of Central Asia, and each of them meets a branch of mountains 
which forces it to describe an immense circuit, the Hoang-ho to the N., and 
the Yang-tse-Kiang to the S. Separated by an interval of 1100 ms., the 
one seems inclined to direct itself to the tropical seas, while the other wan- 
ders off among the icy deserts of Mongolia. Suddenly recalled, as if by a 
recollection of their early brotherhood, they approach one another like the 
Euphrates and Tigris, in ancient Mesopotamia; where, being almost con- 
joined by lakes and canals, they terminate, within a mutual distance of 110 
ms., their majestic and immense course." — Malte-Brun. 

Q. Where is the Cambodia River? 

A. Cambodia (called also Meinam-Kong) is a large r. of S. 
Asia, which rises in the N. of Thibet, not far from the Kuen-lun 
Mts., and flows through Thibet and the W. side of Yunnan (the 
S. W. province of China), and Laos, and through the Cambodian 
Territory in a general south-easterly direction, falling into the 
China Sea, by several channels, between the latitudes of 9° and 
11° N. Length 2000 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Meinam River ? 

A. It is a r. of Siam, which rises in the N. of Birmah, and 
after flowing through Siam from N. to S., falls into the Gulf of 
Siam, by two mouths. Length 800 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Salwen River? 

A. Salwen or Salwin (called by the natives Than-Lymg or 
Than-Liceng) is a r. in the S. part of Asia, of the second class, 
which is supposed to rise in China, near 27° N. lat., and 99° E. 
long. It descends in a nearly uniform S. direction, in almost all 
its course, bounding the Birman Empire for a considerable distance 
on the E., and falls into the Gulf of Martaban. Length 900 ms. 
(M. A.) 

Though this r. brings down a great volume of water, it is not navigable 
in the lower part of its course. The upper portion has not been explored. 
McCulloch says the Salwen R. rises in Thibet, beyond the sources of the 
Irrawaddy. 

Q. Where is the Irrawaddy River ? 

A. The Irrawaddy (Erivati, " the Great River'M is an im- 
portant Asiatic R., the principal in India beyond trie Burram- 
pooter. 

31* 



360 ASIA. 

According to Mitchell's Atlas, it rises in the N. of Thibet, and 
flows first S. E., then generally S. through the centre of the Bir- 
man Empire, which it traverses in its entire length, till it falls, by 
numerous mouths, into the Bay of Bengal, in about the 16th deg. 
of N. lat., and between 93° 20' and 97° E. long. Length 1700 
ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Burrampooter or Brahmaputra River ? 

A. Brahmaputra {the son of Brahma), vulg. Burrampooter, 
is one of the largest rivers of Asia, forming the proper E. bound- 
ary of Hindoostan. According to Mitchell's Atlas, it rises in the 
Kuen-lun Mts., and flows in a general course, first S. E., then 
W. S. W., then S. E., and finally S. S. W., and falls into the 
Bay of Bengal by a mouth 5 ms. wide, in lat. 22° 50' N., long: 
90° 40' E. "Length 1500 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Ganges River ? 

A. Ganges (Hindoo, Gimga), the principal r., or, as it has been 
expressively termed, the Nile, of Hindoostan, through the N. and 
E. parts of which it flows, watering its most fertile region, and 
extending through 13° of long, and nearly 10° of lat., from the 
central chain of the Himmaleh to the Bay of Bengal. 

This r. rises by two principal branches in the Himmaleh Mts., 
near 31° N. lat., and between 78° 30' and 80° E. long. One of 
these, the Bhagirathi, which is considered the true Ganges, rises 
from the side of a mountain 13,800 ft. above the level of the sea. 
In the~hrst part of its course it runs south-westerly* but gradually 
changes towards the S. E., and, after its union with the Jumna, 
in about 25° 20' N. ht., and 82° E. long., it flows easterly, and 
continues in this direction to near 88° E. long., when it again 
changes to the S. E., and falls into the Bay of Bengal, by nume- 
rous mouths, between lat. 23° and 21° 30' N., and long. 88° and 
90° 40' E. Length 1600 ms. (M. A.) 

The Ganges is the holy river of the Hindoos ; its waters are believed to 
purify from all sins. Many ablutions and suicides accordingly take place in 
it ; and the feet of the dying, when they are sufficiently near residents, are 
in most instances immersed in it. Such as reside at a distance procure some 
of the water, and keep it with care as a sacred treasure, to be given in the 
hour of death. This water is, therefore, an article of considerable commerce 
in India. Hindoo witnesses, in the British courts of justice, are sworn 
upon the water of the Ganges, as the Christians and Mohammedans are upon 
their sacred books. 

Q. Where is the Godavery River 1 

A. It is a considerable river of Hindoostan, through the central 
part of which it flows, extending through nearly 9° of longitude. 
It rises, by numerous streams, in the W. Ghauts, about lat. 20° N., 
and long. 74° E., and runs in a direction generally E., but with a 
slight inclination southward, to near long. 80° E. From this 



asia. :j(57 

point it flows mostly S. E. for about 90 ms., bounding the pro- 
vince of Hyderabad on the N. E., and separates, near Rajahmun- 
dry (N. Circars), into two arms, which fall into the Bay of Bengal, 
between lat. 16° 20' and 16° 40', enclosing a fertile delta, with 
an area of about 500 sq. ms. Length, 600 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Nerbuddah River ? 

A. Nerbuddah (Narmada, " The bestower of pleasure," called 
by Ptolemy the Namadus) is a river of Hindoostan, extending 
through 9° of long., in the N. part of the Deccan. It rises in the 
table-land of Gundwanah, lat. 22° 40' N., long. 81° 45' E„ near 
the sources of the Sone and Mahanuddy. It has a general W. 
direction, with a slight inclination to the S., with fewer windings 
than most Indian rivers; and, after a course of about 800 ms., 
falls into the Gulf of Cambay, in lat. 21° 36' N., long. 72° 50' E. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Indus River ? 

A. Indus ( Sindhu, Sansc. : Anb Sind, Pers.) is a large river 
of S. Asia, forming, during a great part of its course, the proper 
N.W. boundary of Hindoostan, and lying between the 23d and 
35th parallels of N. lat., and between the 67th and 81st degrees 
of E. long. 

This river rises in the N. declivity of the Himmaleh Mts.,* and 
flowing, first, north-westerly through Little Thibet, and afterwards 
in a zig-zag course, first S. W., then S.W. by S., forming the 
boundary between Hindoostan on the one side, and Afghanistan 
and Beloochistan on the other, it empties itself into the Indian 
Ocean, by several mouths, in about 24° N. lat., and 68° E. Ions. 
Length, 1700 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the River Euphrates ? 

A. It is the most famous river of Turkey, in W. Asia ; rises 
in the pachalic of Erzerum, and is formed by the junction of 
two great arms — the Frat and the Morad. The former, which is 
also the most N., has its principal sources about 20 ms. N. E. 
from Erzerum, in the Tcheldir mountains, near the sources of 
the Araxes : the Morad has its sources on the N. declivity of the 
Arghidagh Mts., 45 ms. N. E. from the nearest point of Lake 
Van. Both these rivers pursue a W. course, inclining to the S., 
till they unite near Kebban, in about the 39th deg. of N. lat., and 
39° 25' E. long. The united stream thence flows S. W. to Sami- 
sat (Samosata), in lat. 37° 31' N., long. 38° 23' E., having 
received, on the right, the Kara-su, and forced a passage for itself 

*As the source of this river has not been visited by Europeans, its situa- 
tion is at present only a matter of conjecture ; but general consent seems to 
place it on the N. declivity of the Cailas branch of the Himmaleh range, 
near the Chinese frontier town of Goroo, and not far from the lake Mansu- 
roura and the sources of the Sutlege. 



368 asia. 

through the main range of Taurus, and formed a double cataract 
15 ms. above Samisat. From the latter point, the river pursues a 
nearly S. course to Rajik, about 50 ms. E. from Aleppo, its course 
being thence almost uniformly S. E. until it unites with the Tigris, 
in lat. 31° N., and long. 47° 40' E., to form the Shat-ul-Arab, or 
" River of Arabia," which discharges itself into the head of the 
Persian Gulf, in about lat. 30° N., and long. 48° 30' E. Length, 
1400 ms. (M. A.) 

The Euphrates (Gr. Ev^patf^, so calied from fv^pouvco, to exhilarate or 
make glad, because its waters, like those of the Nile, fertilize the adjacent 
lands) is the most considerable river of W. Asia, and its basin, exclusive 
of that of the Tigris, is supposed to comprise about 109,000 sq. geog. m. 
After watering on either side the territories belonging to Turkey as far S. as 
near lat. 36°, it forms, from that point to about lat. 33° 30', the boundary 
between them and Syria ; it next divides Turkey from Arabia, and, lastly, 
from its union with the Tigris to its mouth in the Persian Gulf, about lat. 
30° and long. 48° 30', it separates Arabia and Persia. 

It is singular that the ancients should have had no correct information 
respecting the sources either of the Euphrates or the Tigris ; and there is 
the greatest obscurity and discrepancy in the statements they have put forth 
respecting them. The popular opinion seems to have been that their sources 
were identical ! And though this notion was rejected by Strabo, Mela, 
Pliny, &c, none of them appears to have had any precise information on 
the subject. 

The banks of the Euphrates were in antiquity the seat of many noble 
cities. The small mean town of Hillah occupies a minute portion of the 
site of the once mighty Babylon, " the glory of kingdoms, the beauty of the 
Chaldees' excellency ;" Hit (anc. Is ox Acopolis), Anna (anc. Anetho), Ker- 
kisiya (Cercesium), and Bir, are among the other towns on its banks; but 
Bussorah or Basra, on the Skat-ul-Arab, is at present the only large city on 
the Euphrates. 

Q. Where is the Don River ? 

A. Don (Anc. Tanais) is a large river of European Russia. 
It rises in the district of Epifan, in the government of Tula, in 
about 54° N. lat., and, passing by the town of Lebedian, flows S. 
to Voronez and Kalitva; it then turns to the E., till, at Katcha- 
linsk, it approaches within about 36 ms. of the Volga ; here it 
takes a W. S. W. direction, which it pursues till it falls, by various 
mouths, into the N. E. corner of the Sea of Azov, a little below 
the town of the same name. Length, 1000 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Volga River ? 

A. The Volga or Wolga (Anc. Rha) is the largest river of 
Europe, through the E. part of which it flows. It has its source 
in a small lake at the W. extremity of the government of Tver, 
in lat. 57° 10' N., long. 32° 20' E., 220 ms. S. S. E. from Peters- 
burg ; on the E. declivity of the Valdai plateau, near the source 
of the Duna, the Dnieper, and other large rivers, at an elevation 
of 895 ft. above the level of the sea. 



asia. 369 

It flows at first S. E. and afterward N. E,, through the govern- 
ments of Tver and Jaroslav; at Mologa it turns to the E. S. E., 
which direction it generally pursues through Jaroslav, Kostroma, 
Niznei Novgorod, and Kazan, to the confluence of the Kama, 
about lat. 55° 8' N., and long. 49° 80' E. Thenceforward it 
flows generally S. S. W. through the governments of Sinbirsk 
and Saratof to Tzaritzin, where it approaches within 30 ras. of 
the main stream of the Don, their confluence being prevented by 
an intervening chain of hills. It then turns again to the S. E., 
through the government of xAstrachan, and pours itself into the 
Caspian Sea, on its N.W. side, through an extensive delta, by 
more than 70 mouths, the W. and largest of these being in lat. 
46° N., and long. 48° E. Length, 2000 ms. (M. A.) 

For a further description of this river, see Key, p. 255. 

Q. Where is the Ural River ? 

A. The Ural, Oural, or Yaik (the Rhymnus of the ancients), is 
a large R. of the Russian Empire, forming, in part, the N. W, 
boundary between Asia and Europe. It rises in the Ural Mts. 
(near 55° N. lat., and 59° E. long.), whence its name, in the dis- 
trict of Troitsk ; and after a lengthened south-westerly course past 
Orsk, Orenburg, and Uralsk, pours its w T aters by various mouths 
into the northern extremity of the Caspian Sea. Length, 900 ms. 
(M. A.) 

This r. is reckoned one of the bulwarks of the Russian Empire, against 
the incursions of the nomades of the Tartar Steppes. 

Q. Where is the Amoo River ? 

A. The Amoo, or Oxus, is a great R. of Independent Tartary, 
which rises from a mountain lake in 37° 27' N. lat., and 73° 40' E. 
long., at an elevation of 15,600 ft. above the level of the sea. Its 
general direction is north-westerly : it enters the Sea of Aral, by 
several mouths, near 43° 30' N. lat., and 58° E. long., after a 
course of 1000 ms. (M. A.) 

The Oxus (called by the natives Amoo or Jihon), a river of central Asia, 
flowing westward through the territories of Budukshan, Koontlooz, Bokhara, 
Khiva, &c, into the Aral Sea, and extending between long. 58 3 and 74° 
E. This river was, in 1838, traced up to its source by Lieut. Wood, who 
ascertained that it rises in the mountain-lake of Sir-i-kol, which he called 
Victoria, within the district of Pamer, lat. 37° 27' N., long. 73° 40' E , 
at an elevation of 15,600 ft. above the sea. Its course hence is S. W. 
for about 70 ms. to Langer Kish, where it turns westward. In long. 71° 
40', it passes the ruby mines of Budukshan, near the town of Iskhasm, and 
is deflected northward by a large offset of the Western Himmaleh Chain. 
After another turn southward, its course is pretty regularly W. N. W. through 
extensive plains, and at the point where Sir A. Burnes crossed it on his way 
to Bokhara, he found it to be upwards of 800 yards in width*, about 20 feet 
in depth, with muddy waters, and a current of about 3$ ms, an hour, and 



370 ASIA. 

from Kharjoo downwards, for 300 ras., it is made available for commercial 
communication. The river passes about 20 ms. N. E. of Khiva, which is 
situated in a verdant plain, irrigated by numerous canals supplied from its 
waters. It forms at its mouth a pretty extensive delta, the apex of which 
is about 50 ms. from its principal and only navigable embouchure in the 
Aral Sea, the breadth of coast from the W. to the E. mouth being about 
45 ms. 

The Oxus, regarded by some critics as the Araxes, mentioned by Hero- 
dotus as flowing through the territories of the Massageta? (i., 301-205 ; iv., 
11), was supposed by Strabo and Ptolemy to fall into the Caspian ; and the 
traces of a valley, nearly resembling the dry bed of a river, have induced 
some modern geographers to adopt the opinion, that in the course of ages 
the Oxus formed for itself a new channel, running into the Aral Sea. But, 
however confused our information respecting this river, it undoubtedly formed 
the boundary line between the more civilized and settled nations of W. Asia, 
and the wandering hordes of Tartary. The Oxus was the northern limit of 
the territories subdued by Cyrus and Alexander, and it seems to have been 
used, at a very early period, as a channel for commercial intercourse between 
India and the countries bordering on the Caspian and Euxine. The Ochus 
is mentioned by Strabo as one of its principal affluents ; but his account is 
inconsistent, and unworthy of credit. 

Q. Where is the Sihon River ? 

A. It is a R. of Independent Tartary, which, issues from the 
Beloor Mts., on the confines of Cashgar, and, taking a N. E. 
course of about 700 ms., enters the N. E. part of the Sea of 
Aral. (M. A.) 

The Sihon, or Sirr (the ancient Taxartes), formerly flowed to the Caspian 
Sea, but the Tartars, to free themselves from pirates, turned its course. 

Q. Where is the Cashgar River ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Chinese Tartary, formerj by two 
principal streams, which take their rise in the Beloor Mts., and 
after their confluence it flows a little N. of E., and empties into 
Lake Lop Nor. Length, 700 ms. (M. A.) 

ISLANDS. 

Q. Where are the Islands of Nova Zembla 1 

A. They are in the Arctic Ocean, N. E. of Europe, and lying 
off the N. coast of Asia. (M. A.) 

Q. W 7 here 'is Kotelnoi Island ? 

A. It is in the Arctic Ocean, off the N. coast of Siberia. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Island of New Siberia ? 

A. It is in the Arctic Ocean, lying off the N. coast of Siberia 
(Asiatic Russia), and E. of Kotelnoi Island. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Liaghoff Island ? 

A. It is in the Arctic Ocean, lying off the N. coast of Russian 
Siberia, and S. W. of the Island of New Siberia. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are Bhering's Islands ? 

A. They are in the Sea of Kamtschatka, lying off the peninsula 



ASIA. 371 

of Kamtschatka, and forming the most western of the Aleutian 
chain of islands. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Aleutian Islands ? 

A. They are an extensive chain of islands in the N. Pacific 
Ocean, stretching from the Peninsula of Kamtschatka, in Asia, to 
Cape Alaska, in N. America, comprised in the Russian govern- 
ment of Irkootsk. (M. A.) 

These islands are very numerous, occupying a circular arc, extending from 
165° to 195° E. long., and above 600 ms. in length. 

Apparently, this insular chain consists of the summits of a range of sub- 
marine mountains. In 1795, a volcanic island rose from the sea, in the mid- 
dle of the line, which, id 1807, was found to be enlarged to about 20 ms. in 
circuit, and lava was then flowing down its sides. There are always among 
them several volcanoes in activity, and some, known to have emitted flames, 
are now quiescent. Earthquakes are common, and sometimes so violent as 
to throw down the huts of the inhabitants. Bhering's Island, Attoo, and 
Oonalashka, are the largest, the first being 104 ms. in length, but many are 
only inconsiderable rocks. They are intersected by channels, various alike 
in width and in the safety of navigation. All exhibit a barren aspect ; high 
and conical mountains, covered with snow during a great portion of the year, 
being the most prominent features. Vegetation scanty ; there are no trees, 
nor any plants surpassing the dimensions of low shrubs and bushes. But 
abundance of fine grass is produced in the more sheltered valleys, and differ- 
ent roots, either indigenous or introduced recently. 

The natives are of middle size, of a dark-brown complexion, resembling 
an intermediate race between the Mongol Tartars and N.Americans. Their 
features, which are strongly marked, have an agreeable and benevolent ex- 
pression. Hair strong and wiry ; beard scanty ; eyes black. They are not 
deficient in capacity, and the different works of both sexes testify their inge- 
nuity. They are indolent, peaceable, and extremely hospitable, but stubborn 
and revengeful. Tattooing, which was common among the females, is on 
the decline, but they practise a hideous mode of disfiguring themselves, by 
cutting an aperture in the under lip, to which various trinkets are suspended. 
These deformities, however, are less common than when the islands were 
discovered, the more youthful females having learned that they are no recom- 
mendations in the eyes of their Russian visiters. A man takes as many 
wives as he can maintain ; they are obtained by purchase, and may be re- 
turned to their relations ; or the same woman may have two husbands at 
once ; and it is not uncommon for men to exchange their wives with each 
other. Their subsistence is principally obtained by fishing and hunting. 
Their dwellings are spacious excavations in the earth, roofed over with turf; 
as many as 50 or even 150 individuals sometimes residing in the different 
divisions. Only a few of the islands are inhabited ; but in former times the 
population is said to have been more considerable. Its decrease is ascribed to 
the exactions of the Russian American Company, who have factories in the 
islands. Its present amount has been variously estimated, at from a few 
hundreds to 6000. The islands were partially discovered by Bhering, in 
1741. 

Q. Where are the Kurile Islands ? 

A. They are a chain of small islands at the E. extremity of 



372 asia. 

Asia, connecting the peninsula of Kamtschatka with the large 
islands which form the Empire of Japan. (M. A.) 

These islands are chiefly dependent on Russia, but the three farthest 8. 
belong to Japan. They extend between lat. 43° 40' and 51° N., and long. 
143° 50' and 156° 20' E., and occupy a length of more than 700 ms. Pop. 
unknown, but very small. The inhabitants of the N. islands resemble the 
Kamtschatdales in honesty, openness of character, hospitality, and shyness 
to strangers. Those in the S. islands are Ai'nos, a race similar to the Japa- 
nese. These islands were discovered between 1713 and 1720 ; but it must 
be acknowledged that they are very little known, even after the lapse of more 
than a century, and the labours of Broughton, Krusenstern, and other tra- 
vellers. 

Q. Where are the Tchantar Islands ? 

A. They are situated in the W. part of the Sea of Qchotsk, N. 
and N. W! of the Island of Seghalien. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Island of Seghalien ? 

A. It is a large island in the Seas of Ochotsk and Jesso, sepa- 
rated from the continent of Asia by the Channel of Tartary, on the 
W. ; and from the Island of Jcsso, by Perouse Strait, on the S. 
(M. A.) 

Seghalien, or Tarakai, is a large island on the E. coast of Asia, extending 
from 46° to 54° 20' N. lat. Length, above 600 ms. ; breadth, from 25 ms. to 
120 ms. As it is very rarely visited by Europeans, little is known respect- 
ing it. It is said to be covered with dense fogs nearly all the year round. 
The aboriginal inhabitants are called Ai'nos, being the same race as the 
Kurilians. 

Q. Where are the Islands of Jesso, Niphon, Sikoke, and Kiusiu ? 

A. They form, for the most part, the Empire of Japan, situated 
in the E. part of Asia, opposite to the Sea of Japan, th'e Channel 
of Tartary, and the Strait of Corea, by which they are separated 
from Mantchooria. (M. A.) For the situation, extent, and pop. 
of these islands, see Key, pages 353-4. 

Q. W T here are the Loo-Choo Islands ? 

A. They are a group in the N. Pacific Ocean, E. of China, 
and nearly midway between the Empire of Japan and the Island 
of Formosa. (M.A.) 

Loo-Choo (or Lieou-Khieou) islands are comprised within lat. 26° and 
28° N., and long. 127°- and 129° E. There are in all about 36 islands ; 
but, excepting the Great Loo-Choo Island, towards the centre of the group, 
70 ms. in length, by from 12 to 15 ms. broad, they are mostly of very infe- 
rior dimensions. These islands are reported to have a delightful climate, 
and a soil of great richness, producing the fruits and vegetables of countries 
the most remote from each other. Rice is cultivated with great care. Cattle, 
goats, and pigs, are said to be diminutive, .but the poultry is large and excel- 
lent. The islands yield sulphur and salt, and have, it is alleged, rich mines 
of copper and tin. Conflicting statements have been made by different tra- 
vellers respecting the civilization, political condition, and jurisprudence of 
the natives. They appear, however, to be of the same race as the Japanese, 



asia. 373 

and have adopted not merely the costume but the language of that people. 
Their religion is a species of Buddhism, and their government like that of 
other Asiatic countries of a despotical character. They are friendly and 
hospitable, but it is now sufficiently ascertained that Captain Hall was totally 
mistaken in the estimate he formed of those islanders, who, had his state- 
ments been well founded, almost realized the poetical fictions of the golden 
age. The Loo-Choo Islands were for some time subject to Japan, but were 
conquered by China about 1372. Kintching, the capital of the group, is 
near the S. extremity of the Great Loo-Choo, the largest island. 

Q. Where is the Island of Formosa ? 

A. It is in the China Sea, lying S. E. of China, from which it 
is separated by the Strait of Formosa. (M. A.) 

Formosa (Chin. Tae-wan, or « Terrace Bay"), an island in the China 
Sea, belonging partly to China, between lat. 22° and 25° 30' N., and long. 
120° 30' and 122° E. ; about 80 m. from the Chinese coast, from which it 
is separated by the Channel of Formosa or Fo-kien ; and 220 ms. N. of Lu- 
zon, the chief of the Philippine Islands. Length, N. to S., about 220 ms. ; 
breadth, in its centre, about 80 ms. Area, 15,000 sq. ms. Pop. uncertain, 
but perhaps, between 2,000,000 and 3,000,000. Coal of good quality has 
been found recently on this island. 

Q. Where is the Island of Hainan ? 

A. It is in the China Sea, S. of China, from which it is sepa- 
rated by the Channel of Junks. (M. A.) 

Hainan or Hai-lam (Chinese, " South of the Sea") is a large island of the 
Chinese Sea, near the S. extremity of the province of Canton (Quang-tong), 
to which it belongs, and from which it is divided by the Channel of Junks,* 
which is only 15 or 16 ms. wide. Although in view of vessels going to 
China, it is little known or visited. It lies between 18° 10' and 20° 6' N. 
lat., and 108° 30' and 111° 5' E. long. The island is of a somewhat oval 
shape ; greatest length, N. E. to S. W., about 200 ms. ; average breadth, 
nearly 70 ms. The area is estimated at above 16,000 sq. ms. Pop. esti- 
mated in 1823 as little short of a million, independent of unconquered tribes 
in the interior. Khioong-tcheoo, the cap., situated on the N. coast, is said to 
contain 200,000 inhabitants. 

Q. Where is Pulo Pinang Island ? 

A. It is in the Indian Ocean, on the W. coast of the Malay 
Peninsula, from which it is separated by a narrow strait. (M. A.) 

This island, called also Prince of Wales Island, about 16 miles long, was 
only one uninterrupted forest till 1786, when the English East India Company 
purchased it from the King of Queda, a petty Malay prince on the coast of 
Malacca, and formed a settlement there, with a view to the refreshment of 
their China ships. In 1805 it was made a regular government, subordinate 
only to that of Bengal. This island promises to become more important, 
on account of the nutmegs, cloves and pepper it produces, and to the culti- 
vation of which great attention has recently been paid. Cocoa-nuts, indigo 



* Probably identical with what was called •< the Gates of China" by the 
Mohammedan authors of the 8th and 9th centuries. 
32 



374 asia. 

and cotton are also raised. Pop. about 40,000, chiefly Malays and Chinese ; 
the Europeans are less than a thousand in number. Georgetown, the capital 
of Pulo Pinang, contains 13,000 inhabitants; an English weekly newspaper 
is printed. A few of the shops are kept by Europeans, but the population 
consists mostly of Chinese. 

Province Wellesley, a dependency of Pulo Pinang, lies on the opposite 
coast of Malacca. It is about 35 ms. long, and 4 or 5 wide. Pop. about 
48,000, nearly all Malays, with a few Chinese. Rice, pepper and sugar are. 
the chief products. 

Q. Where are the Andaman Islands 1 

A. They are a lengthened narrow group, in the E. part of the 
Bay of Bengal. (M. A.) 

These islands (Anc. Bonse, Fortunes Insulna) stretch N. and S., between 
10° 30' and 13° 40' N. lat., under about 92° 50' E. long., and consist of 
four large islands and several smaller ones. Three of these are almost con- 
tiguous, being separated only by very narrow straits, so that they are usually 
regarded as one island, and named the Great Andaman. The other of the 
four is called the Little Andaman. The former, including all its parts, is 
about 150 ms. in length, and 20 in breadth. The latter, lying 30 ms. S. of 
it, is 28 ms. long, and 17 broad. 

The Andaman Islands are within the full sweep of the S. W. monsoon, 
and are washed for eight months a year by incessant rains. They produce 
many large trees, that might furnish timber and planks for the construction 
of ships, and for the finest cabinetwork. The quadrupeds are but few, con 
sisting principally of a diminutive breed of swine and rats. Among the 
birds is the swallow that produces the edible nests so highly esteemed in 
China. Fish are generally plentiful, but occasionally scarce. The inhabit- 
ants, who are not supposed to exceed 2500 or 3000 in number, seem to be 
a peculiar race, in the lowest state of barbarism. They seldom exceed 5 feet 
in height, have protuberant bellies, limbs disproportionally slender, skin a 
deep sooty black, hair woolly, nose flat, lips thick, eyes small and red, their 
countenances exhibiting the extreme of wretchedness — a mixture of famine 
and ferocity. They go quite naked, and are insensible to shame from expo- 
sure. They have made no effort to cultivate the ground, and are found only 
on the sea-coast, depending principally for subsistence on fishing. Their 
implements are of the rudest texture ; but they use them with great dex- 
terity, particularly in spearing and capturing fish. They have no utensil 
that will resist fire, and dress their food by throwing it on the live embers, 
and devouring it half-broiled. Their habitations display little more ingenuity 
than the dens of wild beasts. Being much incommoded by insects, their 
first occupation in the morning is to plaster their bodies all over with mud, 
which, hardening in the sun, forms an impenetrable armour. They paint 
their woolly heads with red ochre and water, and, when completely dressed, 
have a most hideous appearance. They have an intense hatred of strangers, 
with whom they cannot be persuaded to hold any intercourse. They are 
supposed to worship the sun and moon : and during storms and tempests, 
endeavour to avert the wrath of the demon by whom they suppose them to 
be produced. Their language is peculiar, and is not known to have the 
slightest affinity to any spoken in India, or in any of the Indian Islands. 
They are said to be cannibals, but this is doubtful. 



asia. 375 

Q. Where are the Nicobar Islands ? 

A. They are a group of islands in the Indian Ocean, lying 
N. W. of the island of Sumatra. ' (M. A.) 

These islands are situated between 6° 30' and 9° 30' N. lat., and 93° 
and 94° 20' E. long., about midway between the N. W. point of Sumatra 
and the Andaman Islands, and from 100 to 130 ms. from each. Sambelong 
and Carnicobar, the former at the S. and the latter at the N. extremity of 
the group, are the principal ; there are, however, about half-a-dozen other 
islands of some consequence, and a number of small islets. Most of these 
islands are hilly, and are all covered more or less with dense woods of cocoa- 
nut, areca-palm, and various timber trees. The climate is extremely un- 
healthy to Europeans, and is supposed to owe this quality, in great part, to 
the extensive spontaneous decomposition of vegetable matter. These islands 
are inhabited by a race of natives of the Indo-Chinese stock, whose inoffen- 
sive character contrasts strongly with the wild ferocity of their neighbour* 
of the Andaman Islands. Their chief occupations are fishing, rearing hogs 
and poultry, a little agriculture, and trafficking among themselves, and with 
foreigners who touch at the Nicobars. Cocoa and betel-nuts are met with 
in immense quantities, and most of the Indian ships bound eastward, call 
here to take in a cargo of the former, which they obtain at the rate of 4 
nuts for a leaf of tobacco, and 100 for a yard of blue cloth. The natives 
also exchange fowls, hogs, birds' nests, ambergris, tortoise-shell, wild cinna- 
mon, sassafras, &c, for iron, tobacco, cloth, silver coin, and other European 
goods. They live under a number of petty chiefs; but little is known of 
their internal economy, customs, &c, the great insalubrity of the climate 
having successively broken up all the establishments formed on the Nicobars 
by the Danes, the British missionaries, &c, in the latter half of the last 
century. These islands are considered to belong to Denmark, and are now 
the only possessions in the East which that government claims. 

Q. Where is the Island of Ceylon ? 

A. It is a large island near the S. extremity of Hindoostan ; hav- 
ing N. W. the Gulf of Manaar and Palk's Strait, which separate 
it from Hindoostan ; S. and S. W. the Indian Ocean ; and E. the 
Bay of Bengal. (M. A.) 

Ceylon (called by the natives Sin-gha-lct ; by the Portuguese Ceildo, of 
which the English name Ceylon is a corruption ; Anc. Taprobdna) is a 
large island belonging to Great Britain, bearing the like relation to the Indian 
that Sicily does to the Italian peninsula. It lies between lat. 5° 54' and 9° 
50' N., and long. 79° 50' and 82° E. It tapers to a point towards the N., 
and is shaped like the section of a pear cut lengthwise through the middle. 
Length, N. to S., 270 ms. ; average breadth, nearly 100 ms. ; area, 24,500 
sq. ms. Pop. (1835) 1,242,000. The inhabitants of Ceylon are composed 
of the Singhalese, the original possessors of the island, the Malabars, who 
came as invaders from the opposite coast, the Mohammedans or Moors, and a 
small proportion of Europeans and other foreigners. Colombo is the 
capital. 

Q. Where are the Laccadive Islands? 

A. They are a group of islets in the Indian Ocean, lying about 
75 ms. W. from the Malabar Coast. (M. A.) 



376 ' asia. 

The Laccadive Islands (Laksha-Dwipa, "a lac, or 100,000 isles") are a 
group in the Indian Ocean, lying chiefly between lat. 10° and 12° N., and 
long. 72° and 74° E. There are 19 principal isles, but the largest is not 
more than 6 sq. ms. in extent. Most of them are surrounded by rocks and 
coral reefs ; the water near them, however, is deep, and they are separated by 
wide channels, frequented by ships passing from India to Persia and Arabia. 
They are inhabited by a race of Mohammedans called Moplays. Vasco de 
Gama discovered these islands in 1499 ; they were dependent on Cananore 
till ceded by Tippoo, in 1792 ; and came into the British possession with the 
rest of that sovereign's dominions. 

Q. Where are the Maldive Islands ? 

A. They are a chain of small islands in the Indian Ocean, 
lying S. of the Laccadives. (M. A.) 

Maldive Islands, or Maldives, a chain of islands in the Indian Ocean, ex- 
tending between the 1st deg. of S. and the 7th of N. lat., a distance of about 
560 statute ms. ; and between 72° 48' and 73° 48' E. long. The Lacca- 
dive Islands, to the N. of the Maldives, may not improperly be considered a 
continuation of this island system. They are of coralline formation, 
arranged in round or oval groups called atolls, separated by several channels, 
which may be safely navigated by ships of the largest size. The different 
groups are surrounded by coral reefs, on which the surf beats violently ; but 
between the islands the sea is perfectly smooth, and forms safe harbours for 
small craft. These islands have been rarely visited by Europeans, though 
lying in the direct route to India. All that are of any extent are richlv 
clothed with palms and other trees; but no edifice has been seen in sailing 
past them, whence it may be concluded that none exists higher than a cocoa 
tree. The people of the Maldives are Mohammedans, and probably of an 
Arabic stock. They live under a Sultan, who, according to Hamilton, 
resides in Male, an island about 3 ms. in circuit, fortified by walls and bat- 
teries, on which above 100 pieces of artillery are mounted. The Sultan, 
however, considers himself dependent on the British government of Ceylon, 
to which he sends an annual embassy. 

Q. Where is Cyprus Island ? 

A. It is a famous and considerable island, in the N. E. angle of 
the Mediterranean, between Asia Minor and Syria. 

This island at present belongs to Egypt, and lies 44 ms. S. from Cape 
Anamour, in Asia Minor, 65 ms. W. from Latakia, in Syria, and 330 ms. 
E. from Candia ; between lat. 34° 34' and 35° 42' N., "and long. 32° 18' 
and 34° 37' E. Shape somewhat oval, with a considerable promontory 
projecting E.N. E. from the main body of the island; greatest length, 132 
ms. ; average breadth, from 30 to 35 ms. Pop. estimated at 70,000, of whom 
40,000 are Greeks. It is intersected lengthways, or from E. to W., by a 
range of mountains, the highest point of which, St. Croce (anc. 31. Olym- 
pus), is about 15 ms. S. of Nicosia. 

The brutal despotism under which it has groaned for centuries, has de- 
populated the island, and rendered the few inhabitants it now contains re- 
markable only for indigence, sloth, and apathy. In antiquity, the pop. pro- 
bably fell little short of 1,000,000; and in 1571, when it was conquered by 
the Turks, it had a pop. of about 400,000, or nearly six times its present 
amount. Nowhere, indeed, as Mr. Kinneir has trulv stated, is the baleful 



asia. 377 

influence of the Ottoman dominion more conspicuous than in Cyprus, where 
it has literally turned cities into miserable villages, and cultivated fields into 
arid deserts. 

Cyprus was originally peopled by the Phoenicians, It was colonized by 
the Greeks, and successively possessed by the Egyptians, Persians, Greeks, 
and Romans. In antiquity, it was as famous for the worship of Venus as 
Delos for that of Apollo and Diana. This, in fact, was the favourite seat 
of the goddess. Divine honours are supposed to have been first paid to her 
at Paphos, where she had a magnificent temple — But the whole island was 
sacred to Venus : and besides Paphos, three other cities were celebrated for 
her worship. Hence the epithets Cyprian, Paphian, Idalian, &c, applied to 
Venus. 

After the fall of the Western Empire, Cyprus formed part of the Byzan- 
tine Empire, from which it was taken by the Saracens. Isaac, a prince of 
the Comneni family, having usurped the sovereignty, was dethroned in 1 191, 
by Richard I., King of England. The latter having conferred the island on 
Guy de Lusignan, to indemnify him for the loss of Jerusalem, it continued 
in possession of his family for three centuries, or till 1480, when, on default 
of heirs, it fell to the Venetians. The Turks took it from them in 1571. 
Bregadino, the gallant defender of Famagusta, after exhausting every re- 
source, at last capitulated on honourable terms. No sooner, however, had 
the place been delivered up, than the capitulation was disregarded ; and 
Bregadino himself was skinned alive and impaled — a dreadful augury of 
what the population was to suffer under the dominion of such barbarous 
ruffians. It is now in the possession of Mehemet Ali. 

LAKES. 

Q. Where is Balcash Lake ? 

A. It is in the N. W. part of Chinese Tartary. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Zaizan Nor ? 

A. It is in the N. W. part of Chinese Tartary. The R. Irtysh 
passes through it. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Altyn Lake ? 

A. It is in the S. part of Siberia, formed by the R. Obi. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Baikal Lake ? 

A. It is in the S. part of Siberia, in the government of Irkoutsk, 
and flows into the Angara, a large and rapid r., an affluent of the 
Yenisei. (M. A.) 

This lake, sometimes called the Sviaiore More, or Holy Sea, is situated 
between 51° and 56° N. lat., and between 104° and 110° E. long. Its 
greatest length in a N. N. E. and S. S. W. direction, is about 370 ms. 5 but, 
where greatest, its breadth does not exceed 60 ms., and is in some parts 
much less, The superficial extent is estimated at 14,800 sq. ms. This lake 
is very deep ; in some places the bottom has not been reached by a line of a 
hundred fathoms. Its surface is about 1793 ft. above the level of the sea. 
Lake Baikal abounds with fish, particularly sturgeon; and with seals, the 
presence of which seems very remarkable, considering the distance from the 
sea. The waters are said to be subject to certain interior agitations, which 
render the navigation dangerous, even when the wind is moderate. Its 
water is completely fresh. 
32* 



378 asia. 

Q. Where is Poyang Lake ? 

A. It is in the E. part of China, and flows into the Yang-tse- 
kiang R. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Tonting Lake ? 

A. It is in the interior of China, lying W. of Poyang Lake, 
and flows into the Yang-tse-kiang R. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Koko Nor? 

A. It is in the N. W. part of China. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Lake Zurrah ? 

A. It is in the W. part of Afghanistan. The R. Helmund 
flows into it. (M. A.) 

MOUNTAINS. 

Q. Where are the Ural Mts. ? 

A. The Ural or Oural Mts. are an extensive chain, extending, 
including its subsidiary portions, nearly under the same parallel 
from the N. border of the Sea of Aral to the shores of the Arctic 
Ocean, or from about the 51st to about the 69th deg. of N. lat. 
It forms, during the greater part of its course the boundary be- 
tween Europe and Asia. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Little Altai Mts. 

A. They extend along the N. border of Soongaria, (a division 
of Chinese Tartary), separating it from Independent Tartary. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Great Altai? 

A* They consist of a vast mountain chain running from W. to 
E., under the general name of Altai', forming a parallel line with 
the mightier ranges of Central Asia and India, and separating 
Siberia from the Chinese Empire. (M. A.) 

These mts. commence near the Sea of Aral, and terminate at East Cape, 
on the Pacific Ocean, in the 190th deg. of E. long. They traverse, under 
different names, an extent of near 5000 ms. The highest part of the chain 
is computed at 11,512 ft. (1800 toises) above the level of the sea. 

Q. Where are the Taurus Mts. ? 

A. They extend through Asiatic Turkey : commencing near 
the shores of the Archipelago, they extend to the R. Euphrates, 
in the N. E. part of Turkey, where the Ararat rises into the region 
of perpetual snow. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Mt. Sinai ? 

A. It is a mountain of Arabia, near the Gulf of Suez, or upper 
part of the Red Sea, famous for its connection with some of the 
most memorable events of sacred history. (M. A.) 

This mountain is generally supposed to be identical with the mountain 
called by the Arabs Djibbel Moum, or Mountain of Moses, or simply El 
Tor, the Mountain, in the peninsula between the Gulfs of Suez and Akaba, 
in about lat. 28° 25' N., long. 34° 10' E. The group of moutains to which 
Sinai belongs, and which also includes Mount Horeb, Mount St. Catherine, 



asia. 379 

and other remarkable summits, is surrounded on all sides by deserts occu- 
pied only by tribes of Bedouins, or wandering Arabs. The mountains are 
penetrated by deep chasms, edged by bare perpendicular ledges of rock ; and 
the whole has a singularly wild and sterile appearance. 

The height of Mount Sinai has been variously estimated, but according to 
observations taken by Mr. Wellsted, it may be stated at about 7500 ft. above 
the level of the sea, and about 2500 ft. above the convent of St. Catherine. 

On the summit of the mountain is a dilapidated church, which tradition 
represents as founded on the spot where, amid thunder and lightning, and 
the smoke of the agitated mountain, Moses received the Decalogue from the 
hands of the Almighty. (Exodus, xx.) Truth, however, is seldom un- 
accompanied with error ; and but a few yards distant from the church are 
the ruins of a mosque ; this mountain, by a singular coincidence, being hal- 
lowed alike in the estimation of Jews, Christians, and Mohammedans. 

It seems, to a person on the summit of Sinai, as if the whole of Arabia 
Petrsea had once been an ocean of lava, and that, while its waves were lite- 
rally running mountains high, it had suddenly been commanded to stand 
still. Mount Sinai itself, Mount St. Catherine, which is still higher, and the 
adjacent mountains, rise in sharp, conical, granite peaks ; and from their 
steep and shattered sides huge musses have been thrown down. The pros- 
pect from the summit of Sinai is most extensive : the Gulf of Akaba, on 
the one hand, and that of Suez on the other, with Mount Agrib, on the 
Egyptain coast, are distinctly visible. Barrenness and desolation are how- 
ever its grand characteristics. « No villages and castles, as in Europe, here 
animate the picture; no forests, lakes, or falls of water, break the silence and 
monotony of the scene. All has the appearance of a vast and desolate 
wilderness, either gray, darkly brown, or wholly black." But it is the asso- 
ciations connected with the mountain, and the astonishing events of which 
it is believed to have been the theatre, that inspire those feelings of awe and 
veneration felt by all who have either beheld or ascended Mount Sinai. Con- 
siderable doubts have, however, been entertained whether the mountain now 
described be really the Mount Sinai of the Pentateuch. It might be ex- 
pected that the summit of the mountain should exhibit some traces of the 
stupendous phenomena that are said to have accompanied the manifestation 
of the Divine presence. But, according to Burckhardt, neither Sinai, nor 
any of the adjoining summits, exhibits any traces of volcanic action. It is 
supposed by some that the Djlbbcl Katerin, or Mount St. Catherine, has the 
best title to be regarded as the true Sinai. 

There are really, however, no means by which to arrive at any satisfactory 
conclusions on the subject. All that can with confidence be stated (for 
monkish legends and traditions go for nothing) is, that Mount Sinai must be 
somewhere in this vicinity ; and that though the hypothesis, that the Djlbbel 
Mousa and the Sinai of the Bible be identical, be not free from difficulties, 
it is as much so, perhaps, as any other that has been advanced in its stead. 

Q. Where are the Ramleah Mts. ? 
A. They extend through the N. of Arabia. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is Mt. Ararat ? 

A. It is a famous Mountain of Armenia, on the confines of the 
Russian, Turkish, and Persian Empires. (M. A.) 

Ararat (Turkish, Aghur Dagh ,• Armenian, Maris), a famous Mountain 



380 ASIA. 

of Armenia, on the confines of the Russian, Turkish, and Persian Empires, 
its principal summit being about 35 ms. S. of Erivan, lat. 39° 30' N., long. 
44° 35' E. Its base E. and N. E. is washed by the Araxes, from the low 
plain of which it rises most majestically to an immense height. It forms the 
termination in this direction of a range of mountains connected with the 
Caucasian Chain; but these, though elevated, seem, in comparison with 
Ararat, so low, as to strengthen the impression of sublimity and greatness 
made by contemplating it singly from the plains to the E. It consists of 
two enormous conical masses, one much higher than the other, but the 
lowest ascending far within the line of perpetual congelation. Repeated 
efforts had been made at different times to reach its summit, but this Her- 
culean task was not effected till 1830, when Professor Parrot, of Dorpat, 
accomplished, by dint of extraordinary perseverance and energy, what had 
previously been reckoned all but impossible. He determined the altitude of 
the highest peak to be 16,200 French, or 17,230 English ft. above the level 
of the sea, being about 4760 ft. higher than Mont Blanc. The summit is 
described as a circular plain of limited dimensions, united by a gentle 
descent to the less elevated peak towards the E. The whole of the upper 
region of the mountain, from the height of 12,750 ft., is covered with per- 
petual snow and ice ; and not unfrequently avalanches precipitate them- 
selves down its sides with tremendous noise and fury. 

On one of the sides of the principal cone is a chasm or cleft of prodigious 
depth, having much the appearance of the crater of a volcano. Tournefort 
says, that its precipices are blackened as if by smoke, but that nothing issues 
from it except torrents of muddy water ; but the mountain presents many 
appearances of volcanic action, and Dr. Reineggs affirms that he has seen 
fire and smoke issue from this chasm for three days together. 

Ararat is not only an object of superior interest from its mass and height, 
but still more from the associations with which it is connected. It is be- 
lieved to be the Ararat of Scripture, on whose summit the ark rested, after 
the waters of the flood had subsided. (Genesis, viii., 4.) And certainly it 
would be difficult anywhere to find a mountain that seems better entitled to 
the honour of serving as a stepping-stone to those who survived that awful 
catastrophe. 

Q. Where are the Caucasus Mts. ? 

A. Caucasus (Gr. Kavxacro?) are an extensive mountain system, 
between the Black and Caspian Seas. The general direction of 
the range is from W. N. W. to S. S. E., separating Circassia from 
Georgia. (M. A.) 

The highest summit, Elburus, is 2800 toises, or about 17,908 English ft. 
above the level of the sea. 

Q. Where are the Elborz or Elbruz Mts. ? 
A. They extend through the N. of Persia from E. to W., 
parallel with the S. shore of the Caspian Sea. (M. A.) 

These mts. form the S. boundary of the Persian province of Mazanderan, 
stretching along its whole length, and eastward into Khorassan. Demavend, 
forming its loftiest peak, 14,700 ft. high, according to Major Todd, is situated 
in a district called Tabrestan, and across it is that long defile called the Cas- 
pian Gates, leading from Teheran to Amul. 



ASIA. 381 

Q. Where are the Hindoo Koosh Mts. ? 

A. They form the N. boundary of Afghanistan, separating it 
from Independent Tartary. (M. A.) 

This grand mountain chain is a continuation of the snowy range of Hin- 
doostan. From numerous accounts, not yet perhaps accurately combined, it 
is supposed to extend without interruption westward till it locks in with 
the Elborz Mts. and thus connects itself with Taurus and Russian Caucasus. 
That part which rises above the plain of Cabul is, from a peculiarly elevated 
peak, called generally Hindoo Koosh, or Hindoo Koo. In its progress west- 
ward, it takes, or at least it received from the ancients, the name of Paro- 
pamisus. One point, the most elevated yet observed, has been stated to 
reach 20,593 ft. 

Q. Where are the Ghaut Mts. ?* 

A. They extend along the W. Coast of Hindoostan, from the 
Gulf of Cambay to Cape Comorin. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Beloor Mts. ? 

A. They form a transverse chain, on the E. frontier of Inde- 
pendent Tartary, which connects the extremities of the Thian- 
chan and the Himmaleh Mts. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Thsoung-ling Mts. ? 

A. The Thsoung-ling, or Blue Mts., extend from the W. part 
of the Kuen-lun, parallel to the Himmaleh, at a varying distance, 
along the N. boundary of Little Thibet, and as the two chains pro- 
ceed westward, the space between them is gradually narrowed, 
till, at their extremity, they meet and form one mass with the 
Hindoo Koo, which extends thence westward along the N. bound- 
ary of Afghanistan. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Thian-chan Mts. ?t 

A. They extend from E. to W. through the heart of Chinese 
Tartary, dividing the country into two great table-plains. (M. 
A.) 

Q. Where are the Kuen-lun Mts. ? 

A. They form the N. boundary of Thibet. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Peling Mts. ? 

A. They are in the N. part of China, which they intersect 
from W. to E. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Meling Mts. ? 

A. They are in the S. part of China, intersecting it from W. to 
E., and running parallel with the Peling range. (M. A.) 

PENINSULAS. 

Q. Where is the Peninsula of Kamtschatka? 

A. It is a large peninsula near the N. E. extremity of Asia; 

* The word Ghaut literally signifies a " mountain pass." 

j- Called by the Chinese, the Thian-chan, or " celestial mountains," 



382 asia, 

having E. the Aleutian Archipelago, or Sea of Kamtschatka ; and 
W. the Sea of Ochotsk. (M. A.) 

This peninsula is situated between the 51st and 62d parallels of N. lat., 
and the 155th and 170th meridians of E. long.- It is near 800 ms. in 
length, and about 290 ms. in its greatest breadth ; while the narrowest part 
of the isthmus is rather less than 100 ms. wide. Cape Lopatka, in 51° / 
N. lat., and 156° 42' E. long., forms the S. extremity of Kamtschatka. The 
principal inhabitants of this country are the Kamtschatdales, who belong to 
the Mongolian race. They occupy the S. portion of the peninsula, as far as 
58° N. lat., and have fixed habitations. Kamtschatka forms a district of 
the Russian dominions, of which Petropaulovsk (called also Awatska or 
Avatchka) is the capital. 

Q. Where is the Peninsula of Corea ? 

A. It is a large oolong-shaped peninsula of Chinese Tartary, 
on the E. Coast of Asia ; having E. the Sea of Japan ; S. the 
Strait of Corea ; and W. the Yellow Sea. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 353. 

Q. Where is the Peninsula of Malacca ? 

A. The Malay peninsula is a long and narrow territory, form- 
ing a part of India beyond the Burrampooter, and the most S. 
portion of continental Asia. It has, N., Lower Siam, with which 
it is connected by the Isthmus of Kraw ; and is on all other sides 
surrounded by the sea, called on the W. and S. the Straits of 
Malacca and Singapore ; and on the E. the China Sea and Gulf 
of Siam. (M. A.) 

This peninsula lies chiefly between the 1st and 8th degs. of N. lat., and 
the 98th and 104th degs. of E. long : length, N.N.W. to S.S. E., 450 ms.; 
breadth, varying from 50 to 150 ms. Area estimated at 45,000 sq. ms* 
Pop., 374,266. 

Q. Where is the Peninsula of Hindoostan ? 
A. It is in the S. of Asia, having S. E. the Bay of Bengal, S. 
the Indian Ocean, and S.W. the Arabian Sea. (M. A.) 
For a further description, see Key, pages 348-9. 

Q. Where is the Peninsula of Arabia ? 

A. It is an extensive peninsula, comprising the S.W. portion 
of the Asiatic continent, situated between the rest of Asia and 
Africa ; having N. E. the Gulfs of Persia and Oman ; E., S. E., 
and S., the Arabian Sea ; and W. the Red Sea. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, pages 346-7. 

Q. What two seas form the western part of Turkey into a 
peninsula ? 

A. The Black Sea, and the Mediterranean. (M. A.) 

Q. What seas and gulf form Arabia into a peninsula? 

A. The Red and Arabian Sea, and the Persian Gulf. (M. A.) 



asia. 383 

ISTHMUSES. 

Q. Where is the Isthmus of Suez ? 

A. It separates the Mediterranean from the Red Sea, and unites 
the continents of Asia and Africa. (M. A.) 
Q. Where is the Isthmus of Kraw ? 
A. It unites Lower Siam and the Malay Peninsula. (M. A.) 

DESERTS. 

Q. Where is the Desert of Cobi ? 

A. The Desert of Shamo, or Cobi, is situated in the central 
portion of Chinese Tartary, extending in a south-westerly and 
north-easterly direction, almost entirely across it ; separating, like 
a great inland sea, the countries upon which it borders^ (M. A.) 

According to the best of those imperfect accounts which we yet possess, 
it reaches about 2000 ras. from south-west to north-east. According to the 
report of Marco Polo, it is crossed, like the African deserts, by caravans with 
camels ; and the real terrors of the journey are heightened by superstitious 
alarms, natural to those who find themselves bewildered in the depth of such 
an awful solitude. The traveller who chanced to straggle from the main 
body imagined that he heard the sound of march, sometimes like that of the 
caravan, sometimes like that of music and warlike instruments echoing 
through the air ; when, following these delusive indications, he was led 
astray into some perilous, and, perhaps, fatal situation. The only precise 
account of it is given by the Russian embassies to China, particularly that 
of Lange, narrated by Bell. Though a month was spent in crossing it, the 
breadth does not appear to have exceeded 400 ms. The ground was covered 
with short and thin grass, which, owing perhaps to the saline quality of the 
soil, maintained a greater number of cattle than could have been supposed. 
There is, indeed, a considerable number of springs and lakes, but the water 
is so brackish as to be scarcely potable ; so that a single pure spring which 
occurred, tasted as delicious as burgundy or champagne. A space of 20 ms. 
in extent, immediately beyond the Chinese wall, was composed of shifting 
and sinking sand, formed into waves 20 ft. high, and the crossing of which 
was an operation of the greatest labour. The ground along this tract is 
covered with pebbles of considerable beauty, and even of value. 

Q. Where is the Desert of Akhaf? 

A. It is in Arabia, stretching from Mecca to Muscat, and lying 
between Yemen and Hadramaut, on the S. and W., and between 
Nedsjed and Oman, on the N. and E. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Great Salt Desert ? 

A. It is in Persia, lying S. of the Elborz Mts., extending from 
about the 51st to the 60th degs. of E. long., occupying all the 
centre and E. portion of the country. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Great Sandy Desert 1 

A. It is situated towards the N.W. quarter of Hindoostan, in 
its largest province of Rajpootana. The desert extends in a 
south-westerly and north-easterly direction. (M. A.) 



381 SIBERIA. 

LATITUDE, LONGITUDE, &C. 

Q. In what latitude is Asia ? 

A. North. 

Q. In what longitude ? 

A. East. 

Q. In which zone is the northern part ? 

A. North Frigid. 

Q. The centre ? 

.#. North Temperate. 

Q. Southern? 

A. Torrid. 



SIBERIA. 

Pages 281-2.— Lesson 187.— Map No. 23. 

Q. What bounds Siberia on the north ? 
.#. Arctic Ocean. 
Q. South? 
^. Great Altai Mts. 
Q. East? 

A. Sea of Kamtschatka. 

$. What great rivers flow into the Arctic Ocean ? 
A. Obi, Yenisei, and Lena. 
Q. How long is each of these ? 

A. Obi is 2500 ms. long ; Yenisei, 2300 ; Lena, 2600. (M. A.) 
Q. Which is the most northern cape of Siberia ? 
A. Cevero Vostochnoi. (M. A.) 
Q. Eastern ? 

A. East Cape. (M. A.) 
Q. Southern? 

A. Lopatka. (M. A.) _ . 

Q. What strait between Siberia and North America ? 
A. Bhering's. 
Q. How wide is it ? 
A. 40 ms. (M. A.) 
Q. What lakes are in Siberia ? 
A. Baikal, and Tchany. 
Q. How long are they ? 
4. Baikal, 370 ms. ; Tchany, 180. (M. A.) 
Q. What peninsula lies east of the Sea of Ochotsk ? 
A. Kamtschatka. 
Q. What tribes are in Siberia ? 

A. Samoieds, Ostiaks, Tungouses, Buraits, Yakoutes, Koriaks, 
and Tchuktchi. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Tobolsk ? 
A. 15,000. (M. A.) 



SIBERIA. 385 

Q. Irkoutsk? 

A. 12,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Tomsk? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Barnaule? 

A. 8000. (M. A.) 

Q. Omsk? 

A. 8000. (M. A.) 

Q. On what rivers are these towns ? 

A. Tobolsk is on the Irtysh ;* Irkoutsk, on the Angara ;f 
Tomsk, on the Tom, a tributary of the Obi -,% Barnaule, on the 
Obi ;§ Omsk, on the Irtysh.|| (M. A.) 

Q. What rivers flow into the Caspian Sea ? 

A. Volga, Ural, and Kur. 

Q. How long are the first two ? 

A. Volga, 2000 ms. ; Ural, 900. (M. A.) 

Q. What mountains separate Circassia and Georgia ? 

A. Caucasus. 

Q. What countries bound Georgia on the south ? 

A. Turkey, and Persia. 

Q. What is the population of Orenburg ? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Astrachan? 

A. 31,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Derbent? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Teflis. 

A. 30,000. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, pages 344r-5. 

* Tobolsk, a city of Asiatic Russia, the cap. of W. Siberia, and of the 
government of its own name, and, indeed, of the whole of N. Asia ; on the 
Irtysh, close to its junction with the Tobol, lat. 58'° II' N., long. 68° 6' E. 

j- Irkoutsk (properly Irkutsk), a city of Asiatic Russia, cap. of Eastern 
Siberia, on the Angara, at its confluence with the Irkut, about 30 ms. from 
the N. W. shore of Lake Baikal, 500 ms. S. E. from Krasnojarsk, and 1450 
ms. in nearly the same direction from Tobolsk; lat. 52° 16' N., long. 104° 
19' E. 

t Tomsk, a town of Asiatic Russia, cap, of the government of same 
name, on the Tom, a tributary of the Obi, 650 ms. E. by S. from Tobolsk. 
Lat. 56° 29' N., long. 85° 10' E. 

§ Barnaule, or Barnaoul, a mining town of Siberia, government of 
Tobolsk, circle of Tomsk, situated at the mouth of a r. of the same name, 
falling into the Obi, near the Altai" Mts., lat. 53 3 20' N., long, 83° 26' E. It 
is the seat of a board for the administration of the mines, and large quantities 
of lead and silver ore are smelted here. 

|| Omsk, a small but well-fortified town of Siberia, cap. of a province of 
the same name, on the Irtysh, lat. about 55° N., long. 73° 30' E. 

38 



386 TURKEY IN ASIA. 

TURKEY IN ASIA. 
Pages 283-4.— Lesson 188.— Maps No. 23 and 24. 

Map No. 23.— #. How is Turkey bounded. ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Russian Empire (from which it is 
partially separated by the Black Sea) ; E. by Persia ; S. by 
Arabia and by the Mediterranean ; W. by the iEgean Sea or 
Archipelago, and the Strait of the Dardanelles ; and N. W. by the 
Sea of Marmora. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, page 346. 

Q. What river flows into the Persian Gulf? 

A. Euphrates. (M. A.) 

Q. What river flows into the Euphrates ? 

A. Tigris. 

Q. How long are these rivers ? 

A. Euphrates is 1400 ms. ; Tigris, 800. (M. A.) 

Q. What mountains lie north of the Mediterranean Sea ? 

A. Taurus. 

Q. How high are they ? 

A. 9000 ft. (M. A.) 

Q. What mountain in the N. E. ? 

A. Ararat. 

Q. What is the population of Smyrna ? 

A. 130,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Erzerum ?t 

A. 80,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Brusa?J 

A. 60,000. (M. A.) 

* Smyrna (Turk. Izmeer), an ancient and celebrated sea-port on the W. 
coast of Asia Minor, at the head of a gulf of its own name ; 38° 28' N. 
Iat., 27° 7' E. long. It has a fine appearance from the sea, but the interior 
consists of mean wooden houses, with narrow, crooked, dirty streets. Its 
trade in figs and raisins is very considerable. 

| Erzerum or Erzeroum, once an important, but now declining city of 
Turkish Armenia, cap. of a pashalic of the same name, situated near the W. 
branch of the Euphrates; 39° 57' N. Iat., 41° 15' E. long. It stands at 
an elevation of 6000 or 7000 ft. above the sea, in consequence of which the 
winters are very severe. The environs are entirely destitute of wood, and 
fuel is scarce. 

t Brusa or Bursa is a flourishing city of Asiatic Turkey, situated at the 
foot of Mount Olympus, in Asia Minor. It is famous for its warm baths, 
and is one of the cleanest and most pleasant cities in the empire ; 40° 1 1/ N. 
Iat., 29° 12' E. long. Brusa is a very ancient city, and was founded by 
Prusias, the protector of Hannibal. It was long the capital of Bithynia. 
Previous to the capture of Constantinople, it was the cap. of the Turks. 



TURKEY IN ASIA. 387 

Q. Trebisonde?* 

A. 50,000. (M. A.) # 

Q. Bussorah?t 

A. 60,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Diarbekir?J 

A. 40,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Mosul ?§ 

A. 35,000. (M.A.) 

Q. Bagdad ?|| 

A. 70,000. (M. A.) 

SYRIA. 

Q. How is Syria bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the pachalics of Itchil and Marash, in 
Asia Minor; N. E. and E. by the R. Euphrates; S. E. and S. 
by the Arabian Desert ; and W. by the Mediterranean Sea. 

Q. What is the population of Damascus ?^[ 

A. 120,000. (M. A.) 

* Trebisond is the chief sea-port of Asiatic Turkey on the Black Sea, on 
the S. coast of which it is situated ; 41° 3' N. lat., 39° 28' E. long. In the 
middle ages it was an important city ; latterly it declined greatly from its 
former importance, but it is now reviving. Large quantities of British and 
other European goods are now sent into Persia and the adjacent regions 
from this port. 

f Bussorah or Bassorah is an important city of the southern part of Asiatic 
Turkey, situated on the right bank of the Euphrates, or more properly the 
Shat-ul-Arab, or united stream of the Euphrates and Tigris ; 30° 25' N. 
lat., 47° 35' E. long. It is not far from the head of the Persian Gulf, and 
has considerable trade with Bombay, in British and India goods. 

t Diarbekir, a city of Asiatic Turkey, in Mesopotamia, on the right bank 
of the Tigris ; in 37° 55' N. lat., 39° 54' E. long. It was once a place of 
great commerce by caravans with the adjacent regions, but that is now nearly 
extinct; the surrounding country is harassed by the Kurds of the neighbour- 
ing mountains, and the government is too weak to repress their depredations. 

§ Mosul is a decayed city, on the W. bank of the Tigris, in 36° 21/ N. 
lat., 43° E. long. On the opposite side of the river are some extensive 
mounds, supposed to mark the site of the ancient Nineveh. The cotton 
manufactures of Mosul were once important. From the name of this place 
the word muslin has been derived. 

|| Bagdad is a celebrated city, once the cap. of the Caliphs, and now of a 
pashalic of its own name, situated on both sides of the Tigris, about 200 
miles above its junction with the Euphrates. Lat. 33° 19' N., long. 44° 25' 
E. It was once a place of great trade; but, like all the noted cities in the 
Turkish empire, its importance has declined. 

1 Damascus (Arab. Sham El Keber, i.e. Damascus the Great), a cele- 
brated city of Syria, capital of a pashalic of the same name, situated near 
the E. base of the Antilibanus Mountains, about 60 ms. E. of the Mediter- 
ranean Sea, in lat. 33° 33' N., long. 36° 20' E. It is one of the most 



388 PALESTINE. 

Q. Aleppo?* 

A. 70,000. (M.A.) 

Palestine, Map No. 24. 

Q. What sea bounds Palestine on the west ? 

A. Mediterranean. 

Q. What river flows into the Dead Sea ? 

A. Jordan. 

Q. How long is it? 

A. 150 ms. (M.A. 

Q. How long is the Dead Sea ? 

A. 50 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Jerusalem ?t 

A. 12,000. (M. A.) 

Q. The other towns? 

A. Saphet, 3000 ; Nazareth, 3000 ; Naplouse, 10,000 ; Beth- 
lehem, 3000; Gaza, 4000; Hebron, 1000; Joppa, or Jaffa, 4000. 
(M. A.) 

Syria and Palestine or Judea, two of the most celebrated regions of 
the E. hemisphere : the former includes the ancient Phoenicia ; and the latter 
is sometimes called the Holy Land, from its being the theatre of most of the 
great events recorded in sacred history. These famous countries have, for 
many centuries, ceased to be independent, and have, for a lengthened period, 
formed a portion of Asiatic Turkey. They extend principally between the 
31st and 37th degs. N. lat., and the 34th and 41st E. long. ; having N. the 
pachalics of Itchil and Marash, in Asia Minor ; N. E. and E. the Euphra- 
tes ; S. E. and S. the Arabian desert ; and W. the Mediterranean. Previously 
to the subjugation of the country by Mehemet AH, it was divided into the 

ancient towns in the world, having been in existence in the days of Abraham. 
It is noted for its fine gardens and orchards, and the excellence of its fruits. 
The Arabs regard Damascus as one of the four terrestrial paradises. 

* Aleppo (Arab. Haleb ; Anc. Bertxa), called by the natives Kara Veria, 
is a city in the northern part of Syria, about 60 ms. E. of the Mediterranean 
Sea; lat. 36° ll 7 N., long. 37° 10' E. In the middle ages, it was a great 
emporium of the India overland trade. The discovery of the passage to the 
East by the Cape of Good Hope affected its prosperity ; it still, however, 
continued to be a large city until it was nearly all destroyed by an earth- 
quake, in 1822. It is reviving slowly, and contains about a third of the 
population it had previous to that event. 

f Jerusalem (Arab. El Kads ; Lat. Hierosolyrna), a celebrated city of 
Palestine, remarkable as the ancient capital of Judea, and as the cradle of 
the Christian religion. It is about 40 miles E. of the Mediterranean Sea, 
in lat. 30° 48' N., long. 35° 20' E. The splendour of its first and second 
temples, the destruction of the city by Titus, and the dispersion of the Jews 
by Adrian, are events known to every reader of history. The recovery of 
Jerusalem and the Holy Land from the Saracens, was the great object of 
the Crusaders. It was taken, in 1099, by Godfrey de Bouillon, who was 
created king of Jerusalem, and retaken by Saladin in 1187. 



ARABIA. 389 

four pachalics of Aleppo, Tripoli, Acre, and Damascus. Palestine, or the 
Holy Land, comprised in the two latter pachalics, forms the S. portion of the 
region, being about 200 ms. in length by 80 ms. in its extreme breadth. 
The entire length of Syria and Palestine may be about 450 ms., N. and S. ; 
its breadth varying from 100 to 280 ms. Its area has been loosely estimated 
at 60,000 sq. ms. ; and its population at from 1£ to 2, and even 3 millions; 
but probably 2,000,000 may not be far from the mark. Colonel Campbell, 
a few years since, estimated it at 1,864,000; of whom 997,000 were sup- 
posed to be Mussulmans (Turks, Arabs, &c), 22,000 Ansarians, or Bedouins, 
17,000 Metualis and Yezidis, 48,000 Druses, 260,000 Maronites and Chris- 
tians of the Romish Church, 345,000 Christians of the Greek Church, and 
175,000 Jews. The practice of polygamy among several of these tribes, 
aided by the extensive conscriptions of Mehemet AH, is said to have produced 
a great excess of females over males. 



ARABIA. 

Page 285.— Lesson 189— Map No. 23. 

Q. What bounds Arabia on the north ? 
A. Turkey. 
Q. South? 
A. Arabian Sea. 
Q. East? 

A. Persian Gulf and Gulf of Oman. 
q. West? 
A. Red Sea. 

Q. What isthmus joins Arabia to Africa ? 
A. Suez. 

Q. What mountains are in Arabia ? 
A. Sinai, and Ramleah. 

Q. What desert lies between Yemen and Oman ? 
A. Desert of Akhaf. 
Q. What race inhabits it? 
A. Bedouins. 

Q. What divisions of Arabia lie on the Red Sea ? 
A. The Hedjaz, and Yemen. 
Q. What on the Arabian Sea ? 
A. Hadramaut, and Oman. 
Q. On the Persian Gulf? 
A. Lahsa. 

Q. How long is the Red Sea ? 
A. 1500 ms. (M. A.) 
Q. The Persian Gulf? 
A. 520 ms. (M. A.) 
Q. What is the population of Muscat ? 
A. 10,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Sana? 

A. 40,000. (M. A.) 
33* 



390 ARABIA. 

Q. Mocha? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. Mecca? 

A. 28,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Medina? 

A. 18,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Jidda? 

A. 7000. (M. A.) 

Q. Yambo? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. In what part of Arabia are these places situated 1 

A. Muscat is situated on the E. side of Arabia, in Oman ;* 
Sana, in the S. W. portion of Arabia, in Yemen ;t Mocha, in the, 
S. W. portion of Arabia, in Yemen ;± Mecca, on the W. side of 
Arabia ;§ Medina, on the W. side of Arabia ;|| Jidda, on the W. 
side of Arabia ;^[ Yambo, on the W. side of Arabia. The four 
last-mentioned towns are all in the province of the Hedjaz. (M. A.) 

Q. Between what seas is Petra situated ? 

A. Red, and Dead. 

* Muscat, a city and sea-port, on the E. side of Arabia, the cap. of Oman, 
lies about 96 ms. N. W. from Cape Ras-al-gat, Iat. 23° 38' N., long. 58° 37' 
E. This city is a great entrepot for the commerce of India and the Persian 
Gulf, and for the trade in pearls. The Imam of Muscat is a prince of some 
importance ; besides his territories in Oman, he possesses the island of Zan- 
zibar, a district on the adjacent coast of Africa, and some islands in the Per- 
sian Gulf. His navy, which comprises some fine ships of war, is the most 
powerful maritime force in the Indian Seas belonging to a native sovereign. 

j- Sana, a city of Arabia, the cap. of Yemen, and the residence of the 
Imam, in a valley from 6 to 9 ms. in breadth, and 4000 ft. above the level 
of the ocean, near the head of the Shab R., and 150 ms. N. N. E. from 
Mocha. 

$ Mocha, the principal port in the Red Sea frequented by Europeans, is in 
Yemen, about 40 ms. N. from the Strait of Babelmandeb ; Iat. 13° 19' N., 
long. 43° 20' E. It is the entrepot of the coffee trade. 

§ Mecca, one of the most famous cities .of the eastern world, the birth-place 
of Mohammed, and the great centre of attraction to all the pilgrims or Hadjis 
of the Mohammedan faith ; in the Hedjaz, 51 ms. E. from the port of Jidda, 
on the Red Sea ; and 270 ms. S. by E. from Medina; Iat. 21° 28' N., long. 
40° 15' E. 

|| Medina, or Medinet-el-Nabi, " the town of the prophet," one of the sa- 
cred cities of Arabia, the burial-place of Mohammed, and, next to Mecca, the 
great centre of attraction to Mohammedan pilgrims ; in the Hedjaz, 100 ms. 
N. E. of its port of Yambo, on the Red Sea, and 260 ms. N. of Mecca. 
Lat. 25° 13' N., long. 40° 3' E. 

% Jidda, or Djidda, a maritime city of Arabia, in the Hedjaz, being the 
port of Mecca, and one of the chief entrepots for foreign commerce on the 
Red Sea. Lat. 21° 32' N„ long. 39° 6' E. 



ARABIA. 291 

Religion. — Antecedent to the earliest records, the city of Mecca had been 
sacred ground ; and its holy temple, the Kaaba, identified in the minds of the 
Arabs with every sacred feeling. The legends with respect to it, to which 
it is unnecessary more particularly to allude, show that the religion of the 
early Arabs was, to a considerable extent, mixed up with that of the He- 
brews. They acknowledged one supreme God, regarding, however, the sun, 
moon, planets, and stars, as inferior and subordinate intelligences. This 
religion has been called Sabianism, either from Sabi, a supposed son of 
Seth, or, as is more probable, from the word Saba, signifying the Host of 
Heaven. The supreme God was called Allah Taala (Most High God), the 
subordinate deities, Al-Slahat (the Powers). It was these titles (one parti- 
cular, the other general) that led Herodotus to affirm that the Arabians wor- 
shipped only two gods, namely, Urotalt and Alilat ,• the former of whom he 
identifies with the Bacchus (Atowpoj) of the Greeks, the latter with Urania, 
the muse of astronomy. The Sabian religion can scarcely be deemed irra- 
tional, when professed by a rude people, inhabiting an open country, under 
a clear sky ; who must have connected the changes of the seasons, and the 
returns of the periodic rains and droughts, that rendered their plains alter- 
nately fertile and sterile, with the revolutions of the heavenly bodies. But 
the Arabs also worshipped angels, and their images, which last they believed 
to be inspired by the supreme Divinity with life and intelligence. This sort 
of idolatry having been once introduced, gradually spread ; and in the sixth 
century, and long before, the number of these deities was very great, each 
tribe having chosen one to be its peculiar intercessor with the Supreme 
Being ; and 360 were enshrined in the Kaaba, as tutelary guardians of the 
days of the Arab year. 

The Arabs seem, indeed, to have admitted, without hesitation, all deities ; 
and thus, in the sixth century, a figure of the Virgin Mary, with the infant 
Jesus, was sculptured on one of the principal pillars of the Kaaba as an 
object of adoration. It is most probable that this indiscriminate adoption of 
the objects of veneration of all sects, was intended to render the sacred city 
sacrjd to all men, and thus to increase the resort of pilgrims. 

After the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus, A. D. 70, many Jews fled 
into Arabia. These exiles made many proselytes among the natives, whole 
tribes embracing the Hebrew faith; so that, in a century or two, the Jewish 
Arabs became a very powerful section of the whole people. A similar 
cau <e, the persecution early in the third century of the Christian era, drove 
many Christians to Arabia, whose zeal, unchecked by former sufferings, led 
them to preach their doctrines in their new homes, and that with such suc- 
cess that in a short time they had made a very great progress in the country. 
The faith of the Persian Magi, or the religion of Zoroaster, had, at a very 
early period, found its way into the peninsula ; had been embraced with 
avidity by many tribes ; and thus, in the middle of the sixth century, the 
population of Arabia was divided, perhaps not very unequally, into Sabians, 
Jews, Christians, and Magians. 

Such was the state of religion in Arabia at the birth - of Mohammed ; an 
epoch which may be regarded as the commencement of one of the most 
extraordinary revolutions that history has to record. It occurred at Mecca, 
in the month of May, A. D. 571, or 570. This founder of a new religion, 
and of a political power, which, even in his lifetime, extended over his 
native country, and which, under his successors, threatened to embrace the 
empire of the world, traced his genealogy in a direct line through eleven 



392 ARABIA. 

descents from Koreish, the founder of the powerful tribe that bore his name. 
Koreish again was affirmed to be the tenth in direct descent from Adnan ; 
and Adnan the third, seventh, or eighth (which is doubtful) from Ishmael, 
the son of Abraham. 

The future prophet sprang, therefore, from the noblest tribe of the Ish- 
maelitish Arabs, and his grandfather was, at the time of his birth, sovereign of 
Mecca, and guardian of the Kaaba ; consequently, from the sacredness of his 
territory, and the holiness of his office, a prince of great power and influence. 

Yet, notwithstanding his high connexions, Mohammed's early life was 
passed in comparative poverty. His father, a younger son of the Sovereign 
of Mecca, dying before Mohammed was two years old, the latter, and his 
mother, were left with no other provision than five camels and a female slave. 
To his grandfather, Abdal-Motalleb, in the first instance, and subsequently 
to his uncle, Abu-Taleb, the future prophet was, therefore, indebted for his 
infant protection ; and this guardianship was exercised with the greatest 
kindness, the uncle especially (for Abdal-Motalleb died "when Mohammed 
was only eight years old) continuing the firm friend of his ward throughout 
his life, and protecting him in the dangers and difficulties which beset his 
first attempts to disseminate his doctrines. Under the auspices of his uncle, 
Mohammed began life as a merchant, accompanying a trading caravan to 
Syria, in his thirteenth year. Subsequently, and at a very early age, Abu- 
Taleb recommended him as a factor to Khadija, a rich widow, to whom his 
skill in commerce, or his other accomplishments, so far endeared him, that, 
in a short time, he exchanged the name of servant for that of husband ; rais- 
ing himself by this alliance to an equality with the richest, if not the most 
powerful men of Mecca. At the time of his marriage he was twenty-five, 
and his wife forty years of age. It would be useless now to attempt to dis- 
cover the proximate cause that led Mohammed to attack a system of idolatry, 
of which his own family was at the head. It was not, however, as some 
have surmised, a sudden outbreak of enthusiasm ; for, after his marriage, he 
continued to live in all the privacy compatible with the station of a rich and 
highly connected individual for thirteen years. At the termination of this 
period, he withdrew from society, and resorted to a cave in the neighbourhood 
of Mecca, where, for two years, he gave out that he was in daily communica- 
tion with the Divinity. At the end of this time, being then forty years of 
age, he assumed the character of a prophet, sent by the Almighty to establish 
a new religion ; or, if we may take his own words, to restore the ancient 
one, professed by Adam, Noah, Abraham, the prophets, and Jesus Christ, 
by destroying the gross idolatries of his countrymen, and weeding out the 
corruptions and superstitions by which, as he alleged, the Jews and Chris- 
tians had deformed the beautiful simplicity of the true faith. 

His first convert was his wife Khadija, of whose merits, in this and other 
instances, he always entertained the highest sense, uniformly speaking of 
her with an affection bordering upon reverence ; and placing her, after her 
death, among the only four perfect women the world had ever seen. The 
other three were Miriam, the sister of Moses and Aaron, the Virgin Mary, 
and his own daughter Fatima. The progress of the new sect was at first 
very slow. It is usually stated, that nine converts only were made in the 
first three years ; but this is scarcely consistent with the fact that, in the 
fourth, Mohammed felt himself strong enough to abandon his private preach- 
ing, and to proclaim his doctrines publicly. 

Nothing can well exceed the simplicity of the Mohammedan doctrines, as 



ARABIA. 393 

delivered by the founder and his immediate successors ; and as they are im- 
bodied in the 114 chapters of the Koran : — the unity of God ; the divine mis- 
sion of Mohammed; the stated observance of prayer; the giving of alms; 
the observance of an annual fast, and the pilgiimage to Mecca, comprise, 
under five heads, the principal points, whether doctrinal or practical, which 
were to be enforced. The resurrection of the body was proclaimed, and a 
future state, in which men will receive the reward of their good actions and 
obedience to the law of the prophet, or be subjected to a purifying punish- 
ment for their evil deeds and infidelity. The final admission of aLl believers 
to a state of bliss, is an article of Mohammedan faith. The supposed divine 
legation of Mohammed is the principal novelty introduced. The stated 
prayers were only adaptations of customs already existing among the Sabians, 
Jews, Christians, and Magians ; the annual fast was a very ancient practice 
among the old Arabs ; and the only change effected by Mohammed in its 
observance, was, by prohibiting the intercalation of a month in the lunar 
year, to make the sacred season fixed instead of ambulatory. The pilgrimage 
to Mecca was, as has been shown, a practice followed from the very earliest 
times ; and the rewards and punishments in another life were adopted, but 
with much adulteration, from the Christian doctrines. The grossly sensual 
character of Mohammed's paradise is, in fact, the great blemish in his re- 
ligious system ; and has had a most debasing and degrading influence over 
the countries where it has acquired an ascendency. 

The new religion being in most parts little more than an adaptation of 
various parts of the religions previously existing in Arabia, was well fitted 
to attract all by the respect it professed for the peculiar tenets of each, except- 
ing the idolatrous worship of the Sabians. Accordingly, Mohammed was 
heard with patience by the people of Mecca, till he denounced the idols of 
the Kaaba. This, however, raised so strong a feeling against him, that his 
ruin was prevented, and his life preserved, only by the firm friendship of his 
uncle, Abu-Taleb, who, although unconvinced by the preaching of his 
nephew, protected him against his enemies. In the sixth year of his mission, 
the persecutions to which he was exposed became so severe, that many of his 
followers sought, by his permission, refuge in other lands, chiefly in Abys- 
sinia ; where they became the first instruments for planting the new faith in 
Africa. This event is called, by Eastern writers, the first Hegira or flight 

The protection of Abu-Taleb, though it preserved Mohammed from per- 
sonal danger, could not prevent a very strong manifestation of hostility, in 
which i\bu-Taleb himself and all his family were sharers. The other 
Koreishites bound themselves to hold no communion with the family of 
Hashem, the great-grandfather of Mohammed ; and to give the greater force 
to their act, it was reduced to writing, and laid up in the Kaaba. At the 
end of three years, however, Mohammed, having, no doubt, previously con- 
certed his measures, proclaimed, that God had sent a worm to eat out every 
word in the parchment except his own holy name ; and the writing being, on 
inspection, found to be destroyed, the league was put an end to, and Mo- 
hammed's reputation considerably increased. In the same year, being the 
tenth of his mission, Abu-Taleb and Khadija died ; and their deaths were by 
far the greatest blow which Mohammed experienced during his career. In 
the Mussulman calendar, this year is commemorated as the year of mourn- 
ing. The death of Abu-Taleb removed the only check to the virulent 
enmity of the Koreishites 5 and a stranger having succeeded to the sovereign- 
ty of Mecca, after a troubled residence of three years— marked, however, by 



394 ARABIA. 

the accession of many proselytes— Mohammed, on the invitation of a depu- 
tation from Medina, fled to that city ; and instantly, as if by magic, the 
proscribed and condemned exile became a powerful, and, as it soon appeared, 
an all but invincible monarch. The flight from Mecca to Medina, the second 
Hegira, or Hejira, par excellence, is the epoch from which the Mussulmans 
date their era. It occurred in the fifty-third year of Mohammed's age, and 
thirteenth of his mission; and coincides with the 16th July, A.D. 622. 
Down to this point, Mohammed had propagated his religion by means of 
persuasion only : throughout eighty-five chapters of the Koran, published at 
Mecca, there is nothing said of a compulsory power being given to the 
prophet: on the contrary, he exhorts his disciples to bear with patience the 
evils inflicted by unbelievers, declaring he has no authority to compel any 
one to embrace his religion. But his doctrines breathe a very different 
spirit after his establishment in regal and sacerdotal power at Medina. The 
eighteen chapters of the Koran, published at that city, declare, that since 
man had perversely rejected the missions of Abraham, Moses, the prophets, 
Christ, and even the mild pleadings of Mohammed himself, God had now 
commanded him to extirpate idolatry from the earth, and to bring all man- 
kind into submission to his will. The sword, however, was first drawn 
against Mohammed, and not by him. Abu-Sophian, the new sovereign of 
Mecca, led an army of 900 or 1000 men against the supposititious prophet, 
who, with a force of only 319 enthusiasts, met his enemies in the valley of 
Beder, near Medina, and gained a complete victory, with the loss of only 
forty men, who were immediately canonized, as the first martyrs in the cause 
of God and his prophet. 

From this time the progress of Mohammed was, if not a continued 
triumph — for he sustained some defeats — an example of the most rapid suc- 
cess upon record. During the next six years he fought twenty-seven battles, 
exclusive of those fought by his generals, in which he was not personally 
present; and, at the end of that period, he entered Mecca in triumph, on the 
20th Ramadan, in the 8th Hegira, or December 31, A.D. 629. The conquest of 
Mecca may be regarded as the final establishment of Mohammedanism in 
Arabia. The few contests that followed were merely the last struggles of an 
expiring opposition ; and were mostly terminated by Mohammed's generals, 
while the prophet himself was employed in destroying the idols in and around 
the Kaaba, and in sending embassies, inviting the Arabs to embrace his 
faith, which invitations were now attended with complete success. The follow- 
ing year, the 9th Hegira, is called, by Eastern writers, the year of embassies : 
missions from all parts of Arabia poured in, bringing the adhesion of the 
various tribes to the now triumphant faith ; and the victorious founder of the 
new religion made a solemn pilgrimage to the temple of the Kaaba, to return 
thanks to Heaven for his success, and the final overthrow of idolatry. 

All Arabia was now united in one faith ; but Mohammed did not live long 
to enjoy his triumph. Some years previously, or in the 7th Hegira, A.D. 628, 
he was poisoned by a Jewess of Chaibar, who, on his entering that town in 
triumph, offered him some eggs, previously drugged, professedly to test the 
reality of his divine knowledge. Henceforward his strength declined ; but 
his death was caused by a fever* which having, at intervals, deprived him 

* The epilepsy, or falling sickness, to which he is said to have been sub- 
ject, is nowhere so much as hinted at by the native writers. It is strongly 
insisted on by Prideaux, and by Hottinger, but their authorities are wholly 
Latin ; namely, Ximenes, Theophanus, Zonaras, &c. 



ARABIA. 305 

of his reason, terminated his existence in the space of fourteen days, on the 
12th of the 1st month, Rebizah, in the 11th Hegira (6th June 632), in his 
63d, or according to some authorities, 65th year. He was buried at Medina ; 
and the Mohammedan doctors differ as to which is the most sacred — Mecca, 
which gave birth to their apostle, or Medina, which received him in his 
flight, and contains his mortal remains. 

During Khadija's life, Mohammed abstained entirely from the right of 
polygamy ; after her death he took nine wives, alleging, of ccurse, that a 
special revelation authorized him in exceeding the number four, to which his 
law restricted his followers ! By Khadija, he had four sons and as many 
daughters ; and by an Egyptian concubine he had a fifth son ; all his other 
wives being barren. His five sons died in infancy, and of his daughters, 
Fatima only, who was married to her cousin Ali, survived her father. From 
Ali and Fatima a numerous and illustrious progeny descended, the ancestors 
of the numerous existing Sheriffs, or Sons of the Prophet. 

Mohammed died in the midst of preparations to carry his spiritual faith 
and temporal power into other countries. His death scarcely, however, sus- 
pended the completion of his great designs : a momentary state of confusion 
was followed by the election of Abu-Beker, father-in-law of Mohammed, to 
the office of supreme head of the Mussulman religion and power, under the 
title of " Caliph," or " Successor of the Prophet." Under his reign, and that 
of his two successors, the Arab arms were carried triumphantly into all the 
neighbouring countries ; and, by the 26th year of the Hegira, or within less 
than ten years from the death of Mohammed, the conquest of Syria, Persia, 
and Egypt, was completed. In the 13th year of the Hegira, Damascus was 
taken ; in the 16th, Jerusalem ; in the 17th, Antioch ; in the 19th, Ispahan ; 
and in the 20th, Alexandria. 

The caliphate continued elective for four successive elections ; the last who 
held the power by public suffrage, being Ali, the cousin and son-in-law of 
Mohammed. This first believer had been thus long passed by in con- 
sequence of his refusing to hold as sacred anything not contained in the 
Koran, or the immediate traditions of the prophet. From this circumstance 
arose the division of the Mohammedans into two great sects, the SomriTES 
and the Schiites, or Sheeahs ; the latter, the disciples of Ali, whom they 
denominate the vicar of God, receiving only those doctrines which he admitted 
to be sacred ; while their adversaries (the Orthodox Mussulmans) hold, at 
least in equal reverence, the 7275 Sonna, or oral laws, which, within the first 
200 years of Mohammedanism, had grown into respect and veneration. 

Ali fell by the hand of an assassin, after a troubled reign of five years ; 
and Moawijah, son of Abu-Sophian, the greatest enemy of Mohammed, 
usurped the throne ; and, what is more remarkable, had the power or art to 
make the caliphate hereditary in his own family. His descendants are called 
the Ommiade race of caliphs, from Ommiyah, the grandfather of Abu- 
Sophian; and they possessed the regal and sacerdotal power through fourteen 
successive princes, and for nearly 100 years. 

Under the sway of this family the whole of Africa was subdued ; and so 
far colonized by tribes of Bedouins that it has ever since remained, in lan- 
guage, manners, and religion, essentially an Arab country. The Oxus 
(Amoo) was very early crossed ; the shepherd tribes of Turks and Tartars 
brought under the triumphant faith of the Arabian prophet ; and, within 
eighty years from Mohammed's death, the sceptre of his representative ex 



396 ARABIA. 

tended over all the countries between the Indus and the Atlantic, and (east- 
ward of the Mediterranean) from the Indian Ocean to the Steppes of Cen- 
tral Asia. 

Spain was the last and most remote of the conquests of the caliphs. It 
was subdued in the beginning of the 8th century ; Roderic, the Gothic king, 
being defeated and slain in the battle of Xeres, July 19, A. D. 7L 1. Subse- 
quently to this, though the Arabs were for a short time masters of the S. of 
France, they made no farther impression on Europe; and, in the year 732, 
they were completely defeated by Charles Martel, and driven beyond the 
Pyrenees, which barrier they never recrossed. 

The Ommiade caliphs were, in the 133d Hegira (A. D. 750), superseded 
by the descendants of Abbas, one of the uncles of Mohammed. The 
Ommiade dynasty had never received the cheerful submission of the pro- 
phet's family ; and, after a lengthened struggle, the last Ommiade caliph 
was completely defeated in Mesopotamia, and again in Egypt, where he was 
slain. Abul-Abus-Saffa, and the princes, his descendants, are known in his- 
tory as the Abbasside caliphs. 

The seat of government had, in the meanwhile, been removed from Medina 
to Damascus, and from the latter to Bagdad. It was in this new seat of 
empire that the Arab claim to literary and scientific eminence was first 
raised. It was here that the splendid courts of Haroun-al-Raschid, and his 
sons, Al-Mansour and Motassem, were held. It was here that, under their 
patronage, the Greek sages and philosophers were translated, that the native 
Arab genius raised its head, and carried the sciences, physical and meta- 
physical, together with the useful arts, to a point of grandeur unknown in 
former times. The names alone of the Saracen philosophers, mathemati- 
cians, astronomers, physicians, botanists, chemists, and architects, who illus- 
trated this period of Arab history, would fill a volume. Of chemistry, they 
may be called the inventors ; and although, in astronomy, they did not pre- 
sume to depart from the Ptolemaic hypothesis, they carried out the views 
of the Alexandrian philosopher, and attained results marvellous for their 
accuracy, when the erroneous nature of the data on which they were founded 
is considered. To the astronomical tables of Bagdad, Cordova, and Samar- 
cand, subsequent observers owe a large debt of gratitude ; and many of the 
common terms in modern astronomy, and most of the names applied to the 
fixed stars, attest the source whence Europe drew the elements of astrono- 
mical science. The Arabs, if they did not invent, at least were the great 
improvers of algebra* (the name sufficiently attests its origin), which placed 
in the hands of the analyst an instrument of vast and apparently unlimited 
power. Perhaps, however, the most important invention we owe to the 
Arabs is that of the arithmetical characters, now in common use, which 
banished at once and forever the cumbrous and unwieldy notation of the 
Romans. In medicine, the Arabs were pre-eminently great : and the mag- 
nificent remains of their public and private buildings, in Syria, Egypt, and 
Spain, evince their skill in architecture. The Arab court of Bagdad, was, 

* This science was, certainly, originally discovered by Diophantus of 
Alexandria, but its power, as an instrument of analysis, lay dormant and 
unknown, till developed by the ingenuity of the Arab mathematicians. The 
first systematic work on this subject came from the court of the Caliph Al- 
Mamoon, and from the pen of the Arab, Mohammed-Ben-Musa. 



ARABIA. 397 

in fact, the centre of the knowledge and refinement of the period in which 
it existed ; and, by a singular contrast, that period corresponded with the 
darkest and most degraded portion of European History. 

The caliphate shared the fate of all gigantic empires, especially of such as 
rise suddenly to immense power. It fell by its own unwieldiness. Spain 
first, and then Egypt and Africa, effected their independence. The wild 
Turk and Tartar tribes, among whom the Mohammedan faith had been im- 
perfectly introduced, became dangerous* neighbours to their nominal sove- 
reigns ; and, in their decreasing power, the caliphs had recourse to the des- 
perate expedient of forming from these wild warriors a body of mercenary 
troops to guard their frontiers, and protect their persons. The result was 
identical with that which attended a similar experiment among the Romans. 
\i a few generations the servants became the masters ; and though, as in the 
parallel case of Rome, the destruction of this overgrown empire occupied 
some centuries, yet piece by piece it crumbled away, till, in the 656th Hegira 
(A. D. 1258), a Tartar army, having captured Bagdad, put an end to the 
nominal existence of the caliphate, all real power having, long before, passed 
into the hands of the Turkish Sultans of Asia Minor. 

The foreign conquests of the Arabs made no change in the political state 
of the peninsula. The heads of tribes still governed their subjects, as they 
had governed them from time immemorial ; acknowledging, in the distant 
caliph no more than a general head of the Arab people, and the sacred chief 
of the prophet's faith. As the downfall of the caliphate was unattended by 
any shock to Mohammedanism, merely transferring the office of " Com- 
mander of the Faithful" from the caliph of Bagdad to the Turkish sultan, it 
may be easily imagined that the Arabs had little difficulty in changing the 
objects of their veneration. Their holy cities were visited as before, and by 
larger caravans, as their faith was more diffused. Though they sent forth a 
host of conquerors, who subdued more countries in a shorter time than 
almost any by whom they had been preceded, their country escaped the fate 
of most victorious nations — that of being conquered in turn. Two revolu- 
tions only are recorded as having shaken Arabia since the era of Moham- 
med ; and both of them, like his, were of native growth, and of a religious 
character. 

A tribe of fanatics, under the influence of a leader named Earmath, 
attempted, in the 297th Hegira (A. D. 890), to effect a change in the cere- 
monial part of Mohammed's institutions, by rescinding the prohibition of 
wine, and preventing the pilgrimages to the holy cities ; slaughter and deso- 
lation marked the progress of the sect for more than sixty years ; but, finally, 
it vanished, leaving no record of its existence, but the memory of its cruelties 
and enormities. 

The other revolution had its rise in the beginning of the last century. 
Abdul- Waheb, a native of Nedsjed, proclaimed himself a prophet sent from 
God, to reform the abuses which, in the lapse of years, had crept into the 
pure doctrines of Mohammed. The Koran, in the creed of Waheb, is the 
only rule of life, and the Mussulman traditions are entirely rejected. God 
is to be worshipped in the strictest unity, and every species of adoration paid 
to Mohammed, or any other created being, is denounced as idolatrous. Sim- 
plicity, or, rather, asceticism, seems to be the distinguishing characteristic of 
the new sect: they acknowledge no saints; they bury their dead without 
pomp or ceremonv : their clothes and houses are as plain as possible ; their 
34 



398 ARABIA. 

mosques have no ornaments whatever ; and they interdict the use of coffee, 
tobacco, and opium. 

The Wahabee doctrine, so called from its founder, found a protector in 
Ebn Saoud, a Bedouin sheik of Nedsjed. The preacher was proclaimed 
supreme spiritual head, the soldier, prince, and general of the new worship ; 
extermination was threatened to all opposers, and, for a while, the progress 
of the Wahabees was a continued triumph. Mecca was subdued in 1802, 
Medina in 1804 ; and it seemed as though a repetition of Mohammed's vic- 
torious career was about to be enacted by the sons of the first establisher and 
supporter of the new sect. But in 1813 Mehemet Ali drove them from the 
western coast, and restored the holy cities to the nominal protection of the 
Porte. Since that time, the progress of the. Wahabees appears to be at a 
stand ; and though they are still strong in Nedsjed, there is reason to believo 
that their power is on the decline, and that their numbers are decreasing. 

Schools and Education. — The learning which gave celebrity to the court 
of Bagdad in the middle ages does not appear ever to have been naturalized 
in Arabia. Before the era of Mohammed, ignorance (that is, ignorance of 
written learning) was so far from being accounted disgraceful, that we learn 
from the Koran that Mohammed, though of the royal house of Hedjaz, could 
neither read nor write ; and in the present day, judges are frequently illite- 
rate. It cannot, therefore, be supposed that education in Arabia is either 
very good or widely diffused. According to Niebuhr, " the Arab princes by 
no means encourage science ; and, throughout the East, you meet few who 
merit the title of learned." 

Public provision is, however, made for the education of youth ; and a 
teacher for the children and young slaves is no uncommon part of the do- 
mestic establishment of distinguished families ; so that, in the cities, the 
greater part of the population can read and write — attainments which are 
also found commonly enough among the sheikhs of tribes in the neighbour- 
hood of the settled districts. 

To almost every mosque there is (or was") attached a school, where the 
poorer children may be taught gratuitously ; besides which, there are in 
every great town more or fewer private establishments where the children of 
the middle classes are received. The education is of a limited kind, com- 
prising little more than reading, writing, the simple rules of arithmetic, and 
the doctrines of the Mohammedan religion. School-houses, like the shops, 
are open to the street, so that the whole process of education is conducted 
in public; and, to prevent the distraction incident to such a situation, the 
readers and repeaters speak in the highest possible key, and accompany their 
delivery with violent gesticulations. 

Besides these, there are in many of the greater towns schools of a higher 
character ; colleges, in fact, in which the higher sciences — mathematics, 
astronomy, astrology, and medicine are taught. In the Imanat of Yemen 
(which is but a small part of the district so called) there are two of these 
colleges. One of the chief studies in them is the ancient Arabic, now a 
dead language ; for their learned men are expected to understand clearly, not 
only the Koran in its original tongue, but also all the ancient commentators, 
of whom the number is very considerable. Candidates for offices, civil or 
ecclesiastical, are said to undergo a very rigorous public examination as to 
their literary and scientific attainments ; but this is mere pretence, the most 
illiterate persons being frequently appointed to the highest posts, while the 
best instructed get a precarious living as scribes, teachers, and public reciters 



PERSIA. 399 

or poets. Hence the wish to acquire a high degree of scholastic knowledge 
is very weak in the majority of Arabs ; and the profession of teacher is far 
from respectable or lucrative. In many of the towns, the public schools are 
falling to decay ; and those qualified to conduct them prefer wandering over 
the country like the bards and troubadours of the middle ages, as poets and 
orators ; in which characters, as the reciters or singers of the glories of the 
nation, they are welcomed and rewarded alike by the sheriffs and sheiks. 
There is no public provision whatever for female education ; and, among the 
Bedouins, whole tribes can neither read nor write. A very great obstacle to 
the advancement of education in Arabia is the prejudice of the natives 
against printing. From the nature of the Arabic characters, interlacing 
each other, and frequently placed vertically, they appear more handsome, when 
well written, than when printed. There was not, a few years ago, and per- 
haps there is not at present, a single printing-press in the country. 
For a further description, see Key, pages 346-7. 



PERSIA, &c. 
Page 287.— Lesson 190.-— Map No. 23. 

Q. How is Persia bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Russian province of Georgia, the 
Caspian Sea, and Independent Tartary ; E. by Afghanistan and 
Beloochistan ; S. and S.W. by the Persian Gulf, and that part of 
the Indian Ocean called the Arabian Sea ; and W. by Asiatic 
Turkey. (M. A.) 

Q. What river separates it from Tartary ? 

A. Attruck. 

Q. From Turkey? 

A. Tigris, and Euphrates. 

Q. What sea on the north ? 

A. Caspian. 

Q. Gulf on the south ? 

A. Persian. 

Q. What mountains extend across Persia ? 

A. Elborz. 

Q. What desert south of the Elborz Mts. ? 

A. Great Salt. 

Q. What is the population of Teheran ?* 

A. 60,000. (M. A.) 

* Teheran, the cap. of Persia, is situated in the N. part of the empire, at 
the southern base of the Elborz Mts., lat. 35° 40' N., long. 51° 23' E. It 
is surrounded with a high and strong earthen wall, flanked with numerous 
towers. The streets are narrow, and the houses have generally a mean 
appearance. During the summer months, Teheran is hot and unhealthy, 
and the court, the army, and nearly all the inhabitants encamp on the plains 
to the southward. 



m 






AFGHANISTAN 


& 


Ispahan ?* 




A. 


150,000. 


(M 


:.a.) 


Q. 


Tabreez ?t 




A. 


30,000. 


(M. 


A.) 


Q. 


Reshd ? 






A. 


60,000. 


(M. 


A.) 


Q- 


Meshid ?: 


\ 




A. 


50,000. 


(M. 


A.) 


Q. 


Yezd?§ 






A. 


40,000. 


(M. 


A.) 


Q. 


Shiraz ?|| 






A. 


30,000. 


(M. 


A.) 


Q- 


Kerman 


? 




A. 


30,000. 


'(M. 


A.) 



For a further description of Persia, see Key, page 347. 
AFGHANISTAN. 

Q. What bounds Afghanistan on the north ? 

A. Hindoo Koo Mts. 

Q. South? 

A. Beloochistan. 

Q. East? 

A. Indus River. 

* Ispahan is situated nearly in the centre of the empire, on the Zenderoud, 
a small river which loses itself in the desert, in lat. 32° 24/ N., long. 5i° 
50' E. It was once the cap. of Persia, and was one of the most splendid 
cities in the east. Though much decayed, it is still an important place, and 
has considerable trade and manufactures. 

-j- Tabreez, Tabris or Tauris, is in the N. part of Persia, about 90 ms. W. 
of the Caspian Sea. It was once a city of great extent, with half a million 
of inhabitants, but is now greatly reduced in population and importance. It 
is surrounded with orchards, which are said to extend 30 miles in circum- 
ference. 

£ Meshid, or Mushed, is a fortified city in the N. E. part of Persia, in lat. 
36° 18' N., long. 59° 35' E. It is considered holy on account of its con- 
taining a splendid sepulchre, in which are deposited the remains of the Imam 
Resa, and of the Caliph Haroun al Raschid, which is visited annually by 
many thousand pilgrims. Meshid has some commerce, and the inhabitants 
manufacture velvets and fine pelisses. 

§ Yezd is a city in the E. part of Persia, in lat. 32° 40' N., long. 55° 
40' E. Though situated in a sandy desert, it is an important town, and has 
considerable manufactures and trade ; a part of the pop. consists of Parsees, 
Guebres, or fire-worshippers. 

|| Shiraz, the cap. of Fars, is in the S. part of Persia, lat. 29° 37' N., 
long. 52° 42' E. It is beautifully situated amid fine gardens, and is noted as 
the birth-place of Hafiz, the celebrated Persian poet. This city was greatly 
injured by the earthquake of 1824. It has been long celebrated for its wine. 



BELOOCHISTAN. 401 

Q. West? 

A. Persia. 

Q. What lake in the west? 

A. Zurrah. 

What river flows into it ? 

Helmund. 
Q. What is the population of Cabul ?* 
A. 60,000. (M. A.) 
Q. CandaharTt 
A. 50,000. (M. A.) 
q. Herat \% 
A. 60,000. (M. A.) 
Q. Peshawur? 
A. 50,000. (M. A.) 
For a further description of Afghanistan, see Key, page 347. 

BELOOCHISTAN. 

Q. What bounds Beloochistan on the north ? 

A. Afghanistan. 

Q. South? 

A. Arabian Sea. 

Q. East? 

A. Indus River. 

Q. West? 

A. Persia, 

Q. What is the population of Kelat ?§ 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

* Cabul, the cap. of Afghanistan, is on the Cabul River, in lat. 34° 26' N., 
Jong. 69° 5' E. It is situate 6000 ft. above the sea, and surrounded with 
gardens abounding in the choicest fruits. The houses are mostly of wood. 
The city is surrounded with walls, and is fortified. 

-j- Candahar, the cap. of the province of the same name, is about 200 ms, 
S. E. of Cabul. It is situated in a fertile district, abounding in fine fruits, 
and is well supplied with water. This city is built on the site of a more 
ancient town, said to have been founded by Alexander the Great. Lat. 32° 
44' N., long. 65° 32' E. 

{ Herat is in the W. part of Cabu'. It formerly belonged to Persia, but 
is now the cap. of a small and recently formed independent state, whose 
extent is not precisely known. It is an ancient city, and has long been 
important on account of its commerce and manufactures, but has suffered 
much of late from the inroads of the Afghans and Persians. It is noted for 
the abundance of the roses produced in the vicinity, and for the excellence 
of its rose-water. The country around the city excels in fertility. 

§ Kelat, the cap. of the most powerful Khan of Beloochistan, is a fortified 
town of some strength for that part of the world, being surrounded with a 
strong mud wall of 20 feet high, strengthened with bastions at short inter- 
vals. It stands at an elevation of from 7000 to 8000 feet above the sea, and 
34* 



402 INDEPENDENT TARTARY. 

Q. Gundava ? 

A. 16,000. (M.A.) 

For a further description of Beloochistan, see Key, page 348. 



INDEPENDENT TARTARY, &c. 
Page 289.— Lesson 191.— Map No. 23. 

Q. How is Independent Tartary bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Russian dominions (Siberia) ; E. 
and S.E. by the Chinese Empire ; S. by Afghanistan and Persia ; 
and W. and N. W. by the Russian Empire, from which it is 
separated by the Caspian Sea and Ural River. (M. A.) 

Q. What sea on the west ? 

A. Caspian. 

Q. In the centre ? 

A. Aral. 

Q. How long are these ? 

A. Caspian is 800 ms. ; Aral, 240. (M. A.) 

Q. What rivers flow into the Caspian Sea ? 

A. Ural and Attruck. 

Q. Into the Sea of Aral ? 

A. Sihon and Amoo. 

Q. How long are these rivers ? 

A. Ural is 900 ms. long ; Attruck, 300 ; Sihon, 700 ; Amoo, 
1000. (M. A.) 

Q. What mountains are in the country ? 

A. Hindoo-Koosh, Beloor, and Little Altai. 

Q. What is the population of Tashkent ? 

A. 100,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Bokhara?* 

A. 150,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Khokan? 

A. 60,000. (M. A.) 

is so cold in winter that the Khan and the principal people leave the town 
and descend to the lower country. 

* Bokhara, cap. of the Khanate of the same name, is a walled and fortified 
town. It is situated in a rich plain, embosomed in gardens and trees. Lat. 
39° 48' N., long. 64° 26' E. It is a celebrated seat of Mohammedan learn- 
ing, and has several hundred colleges, which are attended, it is supposed, by 
10,000 pupils. The mosques are numerous, and some of them are large and 
massive structures. This city has an extensive commerce, by means of cara- 
vans, with the surrounding countries. It is noted for the abundance and 
excellence of its fruits, and for the fondness of the inhabitants for tea, which 
they use in various ways, and at all hours of the day. 



CHINESE TARTARY. 403 

Q. Samarcand?* 
A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

For a further description of Independent Tartary, see Key, 
pages 345-6. 

CHINESE TARTARY. 

Q. How is Chinese Tartary bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Asiatic Russia (Siberia) ; E. and S. E. 
by those arms of the Pacific known as the Channel of Tartary, 
the Sea of Japan, the Strait of Corea, and the Yellow Sea ; S. by 
China and Thibet ; S. W. by Little Thibet ; and W. and N. W. 
by Independent Tartary. (M. A.) 

Q. What are its chief mountains ? 

A. Little Altai, Beloor, Thsoung-ling, Thian-chan, Great Altai, 
and Kuen-lun. (M. A.) 

Q. How high are the last three ? 

A. Thian-chan, 20,000 ft. high ; Great Altai, 12,000 ; Kuen- 
lun, 16,000. 

Q. Which are the principal lakes ? 

A. Balcash, Zaizan Nor, and Lop Nor. (M. A.) 

Q. The principal rivers ? 

A. Cashgar, Irtysh, Selinga, Amoor, Songari, and Usuri. 
(M. A.) 

Q. What great desert in the south ? 

A. Desert of Cobi. (M. A.) 

Q. How long is it ? 

A. 2000 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Goulja ? 

A. 75,000. . (M. A.) 

Q. Cashgar ? 

A. 40,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Yarkand? 

A. 50,000. (M. A.) 

History, Government, and Laws of China. — The most conflicting state- 
ments have been made with respect to the government of China : while 
some writers have represented the whole empire as trembling under the yoke 
of a capricious despot, others have represented the government as admin- 
istered according to the inflexible rules of justice, and with the greatest mo- 
deration and humanity ! Both these representations seem to be alike incon- 
sistent with the facts. According to the theory of the government, the emperor 
is absolute ; his will is law ; and he is not responsible to any earthly tribunal. 
In China, as in ancient Rome, fathers have full power over their families, and, 

* Samarcand, a once celebrated, but now decayed city, is situated in a fer- 
tile valley, surrounded with hills, 120 miles E. of Bokhara. Lat. 39° 50' 
N., long. 67° E. It was once the capiflrof the vast empire of Tamerlane, 
and the remains of that renowned conqueror and his family repose there. 



404 CHINESE TARTARY. 

on the same principle, the emperor is held to be the father of the entire 
Chinese people, and to have the same unlimited power over them that each 
individual has over his own children. Practically, however, his power is 
comparatively circumscribed. In China everything ia determined by custom, 
or by immemorial practice, from which it would be highly dangerous for 
even the emperor to depart. The Chinese is emphatically a government of 
precedent ; and his celestial majesty is, in reality, the creature of custom and 
etiquette. All employments are bestowed, according to fixed rules, on those 
who have obtained certificates of proficiency after passing their examinations. 

Although the government of China be despotical in its form, and every 
device be employed to give to the emperor not merely a paternal, but a 
sacred character, he in fact governs according to long-established rules ; and 
with probably as little admixture of despotism as is to be found in most 
governments. 

Some authors affirm that oppression and mal-governmant exist in China ; 
but this cannot be true to any considerable extent. It seems almost certain 
that " the most cheerfully industrious, and orderly, and the most wealthy 
nation of Asia," cannot be greatly misgoverned. The taxation to which 
the Chinese are subject is trifling compared with that imposed on the Hin- 
doos by the East India Company ; and the unceasing industry of the 
Chinese, and their desire to save and accumulate, prove beyond dispute, 
that, generally speaking, property is secure. 

The emperor is called " the son of heaven" (Teen-tsye), and the man- 
darins and other natives not only prostrate themselves when in his presence, 
but also before a tablet with the inscription " the lord of a myriad years" 
(Wan-suy-yay). In his character of patriarch, his imperial majesty is not 
only looked upon as the father of that multitudinous family, the population 
of his empire, but is also considered the sole dispenser of the blessings of 
heaven ; for the prime canon of belief is, that " the duty of affording to the 
people sustenance and instruction is imposed on The One Man ,•" while, on 
occasions of national calamity, he publicly confesses his errors, and ac- 
knowledges his misconduct to be the cause of the divine displeasure. The 
parallel between the relations in which every person stands to his own parents 
and to the emperor is carried out from the most important functions of the 
legislature, down to the minutest observances of ceremony, all of which are 
regularly prescribed by law. 

In approaching the imperial throne, every device is employed to create 
the impression of awe. Dressed in a robe of yellow, the colour worn, 
say the Chinese, by the sun, the emperor is surrounded by all the pageant- 
ry of the highest dignity in the world. All ranks must bow the head 
to a yellow screen of silk; in the great man's presence no one dares speak 
but in a whisper, though his person is too sacred to be often exhibited in 
public, and an imperial despatch is received by the burning of incense and 
prostration. But with all this he is not allowed to lean back in public; to 
smoke, to change his dress, or, in fact, to indulge in the least relaxation from 
the fatiguing support of his dignity. 

Next, after the emperor, the court is composed of four principal ministers, 
two Tartars and two Chinese, who form the great council of state, assisted 
by certain assessors from the Han-lijr or Great College, who have studied the 
sacred books of Confucius, which fowrl the basis of Chinese law. These may 
be considered as the cabinet ; but the real business of the empire is executed 



CHINESE TARTARY. 405 

by the Le-poo, or Six Boards. No. 1. Li-poo is the Board of Official Ap- 
pointments, which has cognisance of the conduct of all civil officers ; 2. Hoo- 
poo, the Board of Revenue, which regulates all fiscal matters ; 3. Le-poo, 
Board of Rites and Ceremonies, which, enforces the customs to be observed 
by the people ; 4. Ping-poo, Military Board ; 5. Hing-poo, or Supreme 
Court of Criminal Jurisdiction ; 6. Kung-poo, Board of Public Works. 
There is also a colonial office, composed of Manchoos and Monguls, so that 
the respective tributary princes may have confidence in referring whatever 
concerns their interests to their own countrymen. To each of the provinces 
a viceroy is appointed by the chief, or Le-poo Board ; and every town is pre- 
sided over by a magistrate, who takes rank according as he is at the head of 
a J bo, tchoo, or keen. Subordinate officers superintend the lesser divisions. 
All these functionaries are removed every three years ; and that no ties of 
kindred may interfere with the strict discharge of their duties, the viceroys 
and magistrates are forbidden to form any matrimonial connexion with a 
family within the limits of their rule. It is honourable to the Chinese that, 
for these and other state officers, merit alone is the qualification ; the son of 
the poorest peasant or artificer may offer himself as a candidate, and, by talent 
and application, rise to the highest employments. 

Nothing can be more lucid and methodical than the code of laws pro- 
mulgated for the guidance of the boards and their subordinate officers. Each 
district has a separate code, adapted to the habits and disposition of those for 
whom it is framed ; and offences, with their punishments, are classed under 
six different heads, corresponding with the six boards, so that each case is 
referred to the tribunal against whose authority the offence may have been 
committed, unless it be one admiting of summary punishment. 

The Thsing Leu Lee, being the fundamental laws, and a selection from 
the supplemental statutes of the penal code of China, has been ably translated 
by Sir George Staunton. " The most remarkable thing in this code is its 
great reasonableness, clearness, and consistency; the business-like brevity 
and directness of the various provisions, and the plainness and moderation 
of the language in which they are expressed. It consists of a clear, concise, 
and distinct series of enactments, savouring throughout of practical judg- 
ment and European good sense ; and if not always conformable to our 
improved notions of expediency in this country, in general approaching to 
them more nearly than the codes of most other nations." 

This is high, but not undeserved praise. At the same time, however, the 
Chinese code is not without very serious defects. There is an elaborate at- 
tention to trifles ; and a perpetual interference on the part of the legislator to 
enforce duties and observances of no importance, or that had better be left to 
the discretion of individuals. The frequency of corporal punishment seems 
extraordinary to Europeans. It is, in fact, the universal penalty : offences 
the most trivial, and the gravest, whether committed by persons in the highest 
or the lowest walks of life, being visited by so many strokes of the bamboo ! 
Indeed, the bamboo seems in universal requisition, from the emperor down to 
the meanest of his subjects ; and not only the number of blows, but the length 
and thickness of the instrument to be used for each offence, are minutely 
prescribed. The prerogative of mercy is not unfrequently extended, with, 
however, one exception. In a country which has preserved its institutions 
unchanged, and its laws unaltered, for 2000 years, it is not surprising that 
seditious offences should be severely dealt with. The crime of treason, 
therefore, is visited with remorseless severity. There is much in use a sort 



406 CHINESE TARTARY. 

of pillory, called the cangue ; and torture is employed to extort confession. 
The police of China is said to be vigilant and efficient ; but, as a safe- 
guard against oppression, the name of every person in any way connected 
with the government is published in a sort of Red Book, of which a cor- 
rected edition appears four times a year. 

Another type of the patriarchal form of the Chinese government is to be 
found in the mode in which the state revenue is produced; it consists prin- 
cipally of tithes ; not paid in the nature of taxation, but as rent, the emperor 
uniting the character of universal landlord with that of king and father : but 
though the whole population be tenants-at-will, ejectment is seldom resorted 
to. There are here no great estates ; but if any one happen to hold 
more land than he can conveniently cultivate, he lets it to another, 
on condition of his receiving half the produce, out of which he pays the 
whole taxes. A great part of the poorer peasantry hold lands in this way. 
The revenue is paid partly in money and partly in kind. The greatest pos- 
sible discrepancy exists among the estimates that have been given of its 
amount. It is believed, however, that the entire revenue remitted to the im- 
perial treasury may amount to about £12,000,000 sterling, that is, £10,000,000 
in money, and £2,000,000 in produce. 

The military service of China is nominally composed of 1,000,000 soldiers, 
besides the militia and numerous standards of Mongul cavalry ; but from this 
vast number many names must be deducted which are merely entered in the 
books, and perhaps the whole force does not exceed 700,000 or 800,000. The 
soldiers are enrolled in the corps quartered in the provinces in which they 
are born, and which are never quartered anywhere else. The troops are only 
embodied at certain seasons, being at other periods their own masters. The 
Tartar troops, inasmuch as they belong to a standing army at a distance from 
home, receive higher pay, and are more efficient soldiers than the native Chi- 
nese ; though they also seem to be enervated by their long residence in this 
tranquil region. The whole army is divided into standards, distinguished 
by their different borders and colours. The principal weapons are bows and 
arrows ; but they also use clumsy match-locks, and iron guns without car- 
riages. The theory of tactics is well understood ; but the practice is very 
deficient. In so peaceful a country there is but little occasion for military 
skill ; and without intelligent officers, or improved weapons, it is not to be 
supposed that they should make any effectual opposition to European 
troops. 

The Chinese navy includes, perhaps, 1000 sail, but is very inefficient; 
the men-of-war are mere junks, which mount a few guns ; and there 
are few large vessels. This imperial navy is commanded by three high 
admirals and their inferior officers, all of whom are so profoundly ignorant 
of their business, that the merchant junks are better managed than the 
imperial cruisers. Gutzlaff draws a deplorable picture of the condition and 
discipline of the mercantile navy. Few sailors are regularly bred to the 
service, but are chiefly wretches who have been obliged to flee from their 
homes. Though there be a nominal commander in every junk, his autho- 
rity is uniformly disregarded. Every one having the liberty of putting a 
certain quantity of goods on board, is a certain shareholder, and does nearly 
what he pleases. The Chinese make use of a compass, invented by them- 
selves, divided into twenty-four parts, beginning at the S., the needle moving 
freely in a box placed upon a bed of sand. Their pilots having been accus- 
tomed to the sea from their youth, and always performing the same voyage, 



CHINESE TARTARY. 40T 

have a perfect knowledge of the various localities. In the construction of 
river craft, the Chinese are more skilful ; many of these vessels are indeed 
floating habitations, and thousands of families live in them during their 
whole lives. 

The Chinese, their Social Condition, <SfC. — The Chinese are said, by Mr. 
Davis, to be a nation of " incurable conservatives" Their rule is to adhere 
to all that is established, and to reject all that is new. They are the very 
transcript of the ancient world living in the present day ; they wear the 
same costume, are subject to the same laws, which are administered precisely 
in the same way, and they exist to all intents and purposes in the same social 
and intellectual condition as their forefathers did 2000 years ago. This uni- 
formity may be almost said to have been ordained by nature, for it is a 
remarkable fact that the Chinese are so much like each other in personal 
appearance, that it is difficult for a European to distinguish between them. 
We find no diversity in the colour of their hair, no variety of eye, no promi- 
nent and striking feature which indicates the place of their birth. They 
have black, stiff, and strong hair, shaved so as to leave a much-cherished tail 
depending from the crown ; a depressed face, wherein the distinguishing fea- 
tures are not strongly marked, a flat nose, small angular eyes, round and 
prominent cheeks, a pointed chin, thin eyelids, small beards, middle stature, 
and strong bones. Long ears and plumpness form their beau-ideal of beauty; 
consequently, to attain the latter, they exercise but little agility. 

The aristocracy of rank and wealth are unknown in China. Distinction 
is solely to be obtained by learning ,- and dignity is only conferred by office. 
Even the sons of the emperor and their families merge into the common mass, 
should they not study, so as to become qualified for some official employ- 
ment. The mandarins, or literary aristocrats, do not obtain their rank except 
by passing repeated examinations, as to the fairness of which no doubt has 
ever been surmised, and establishing their superiority over their competitors 
to the satisfaction of the board of examination. There are nine degrees of 
mandarins, the highest being viceroys, or governors, and the lowest, collectors 
of the revenue, &c. : promotion can only be obtained by superior proficiency 
in the study of the law. The different functionaries are distinguished by 
the number of buttons in their caps, and other variations of costume. 

The natural characteristics of the Chinese are summed up in these 
words : " The advantageous features of their characters, as mildness, docility, 
industry, subordination, and respect for the aged, are accompanied by the vices 
of specious insincerity, falsehood, mutual distrust, and jealousy." The lower 
orders are passionately addicted to gambling, for which they have their pecu- 
liar cards and dice. That honesty is more valued than practised has been 
inferred from the notification to be frequently seen in shop windows, that 
" there is no cheating here," and from a caution placarded in the public con- 
veyances for travellers, to « take care of their purses." The insincerity and 
falsehood laid to their charge, in so far as they really exist, are the natural con- 
sequences of the restraints under which they are laid from infancy ; of the 
interference of the law with ail their actions ; and of their being obliged to 
suppress those feelings to which, in other countries, full vent would be given. 
Their attention to etiquette is a consequence of the same principle. Even 
when peasants visit each other, complimentary cards — the size of which 
determines the rank of the sender — and polite answers are exchanged. " On 
the arrival of the guest, considerable difficulty is found in arranging who 
shall make the lowest bow, or first enter the door, or take the highest seat, 



408 CHINESE TARTARY. 

or assume precedency at table, though the host contrives to place his guest 
in the most elevated position. When conversation commences, the mutual 
assent to every proposition, the scrupulous avoidance of all contradiction, 
and the entire absence of every offensive expression or melancholy allusion, 
show what a sense these people entertain of politeness." The condition of 
the poor is wretched in the extreme ; they are frequently destitute of food, 
and many are said to perish in the winter season from cold for want of fuel. 
Begging is common in the large cities, but not more so than in Europe. It 
is a curious fact, that though the Chinese be remarkable for assisting each 
other, particularly their own relations, with money or food, they will on no 
account step out of their way, in case of accident, to save a fellow-creature's 
life ; but this arises from their laws making the person last seen near a 
corpse answerable for the death. -Robbery is not uncommon, but is very 
seldom accompanied with murder. The drowning of infants, particularly 
of females, has been said to be customary in China ; but this is a most 
unfounded statement. That an enormity of this sort is sometimes committed, 
is certainly true ; but we believe that it is of exceedingly rare occurrence. 

The whole of the Chinese nation is divided into families, each of which 
bear the same surname, and consider each other cousins. These clans are 
bound to assist each other in any way that may be required ; and the most 
powerful of them act as a salutary check upon local despotism. The women 
of China occupy a lower scale in the estimation of their countrymen than 
those of other nations. A broad face, diminutive waist, pale features, and 
feet small to deformity, constitute female beauty in the eyes of a Chinese. 
To ensure the last, their feet are confined from tender age in shoes calcu- 
lated to stop their growth, so that the feet of some ladies only measure three 
inches from toe to heel. Females are universally objects of traffic. When 
young they are purchased by dealers for the harems of the great, where they 
remain in splendid seclusion. Marriages depend entirely upon the will of 
the parents, who sell their daughters at from 5000 to 6000 dollars apiece, 
according to the beauty or rank of the female. Early marriages are uni- 
versal ; no man who can afford the expenses of the ceremony deferring it 
after the age of 20, and parents get rid of their daughters as soon as they can ; 
even at the early age of 14. 

The Chinese may be said to be an omnivorous people. The principal part 
of their food consists of rice, which is generally eaten dry ; but in the S. 
provinces it is mixed with the sweet potatoe in a sort of soup. Vegetables 
are the chief provision of all ranks, who do not consume a fifth part of 
the animal food that Europeans do. Pork is the favourite dish, and the 
head of the ass is esteemed a great delicacy. To eat everything which can 
possibly give nourishment is the comprehensive principle upon which Chi- 
nese diet is regulated ; so that dogs, cats, and even rats and mice, are not 
rejected by them. They are the most expert fishermen in the world ; no 
aquatic creature escapes their vigilance, whether it inhabit the sea, lake, 
canal, or river ; even pools and the ridges of fields are searched for fish. 
Every kind of meat is minced into small pieces, and is eaten with chop- 
sticks. The Chinese epicure delights in soups made of edible birds' nests, 
of the swallow species (Hirundo esculenta), and imported in great quantities 
from the E. Islands. 

The favourite beverage is tea, drunk out of small cups, which are sel- 
dom washed, for that process is thought to diminish the flavour. In this 
article the Chinese are as great connoisseurs as Europeans are in wines. 



HINDOOSTAN. 409 

Distilled liquors are chiefly made from rice; rum is much used, but grape 
wine has not been met with. Drunkenness prevails, especially in the N. 
provinces ; but the worst species of debauchery is opium smoking, which, 
when carried to excess, deprives the victim of strength ; he becomes a walk- 
ing shadow ; his eyes are vacant and staring ; his whole frame is deranged, 
and he soon sinks into a premature grave. But it should be observed that 
these are the consequences of the abuse of the practice : when used in 
moderation, it is said to be comparatively innoxious. The fumes of the drug 
are inhaled through a peculiar pipe, in a recumbent position, and the smoker 
soon sleeps. When he awakes, he drinks a cup of tea, and smokes again. 
The Chinese delight in the drama : they will attend a play for a whole night 
without being wearied, and recount with ecstacy what they have seen. In 
their pastimes the women are never associated. 



HINDOOSTAN. 
Page 293.— Lesson 191.— Map No. 14. 

Q. How is Hindoostan bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the highest mts. in the world, the Him- 
maleh, which separate it from Thibet and Little Thibet ; N.E. by 
the Burrampooter R., which separates it from British Birmah ; 
S. E. by the Bay of Bengal ; S. by the Indian Ocean ; S. W. by 
the Arabian Sea ; and N. W. by the Indus R. which separates it 
from Afghanistan and Beloochistan. (M. A.) 

Q. What rivers flow into the Arabian Sea ? 

A. Indus, and Nerbuddah. 

Q. Into the Bay of Bengal ? 

A. Ganges, Burrampooter, Godavery, and Krishna. 

Q. How long are these ? 

A. Indus is 1700 ms. long; Nerbuddah, 800; Ganges, 1600; 
Burrampooter, 1500; Godavery, 600; Krishna, 500. (M. A.) 

Q. What mountains are in the north-east ? 

A. Himmaleh. 

Q. In the south-west ? 

A. Ghaut. 

Q. How long and high are the first ? 

A. 1400 ms. long, and 5£ ms. high. (M. A.) 

Q. What island lies south of Hindoostan ? 

A. Ceylon. 

Q. How long and wide is it ? 

A. 300 ms. long, and 150 wide. (M. A.) 

Q. What gulf separates it from Hindoostan ? 

A. Manaar. 

Q. What islands lie west and south-west of Hindoostan ? 

A. Coralline Isles ? 

Q. What is the population of Benares ? 

A. 630,000. (M. A.) 
35 



IU 


HINDOOSTAN 


Q. Calcutta? 




A. 260,000. 


(M. A.) 


Q. Surat? 




A. 160,000. 


(M. A.) 


q. Delhi ? 




A. 200,000. 


(M. A.) 


(?. Lucknow 


? 


A. 200,000. 


(M. A.) 


#. Patna? 




A. 300,000. 


(M. A.) 


Q. Madras? 




A. 400,000. 


(M. A.) 


Q. Bombay? 




A. 230,000. 


(M. A.) 



Q. The other large cities ? 

A. Dacca, 200,000 ; Masulipatam, 75,000 ; Poonah, 110,000 ; 
Hyderabad, 20,000 ; Na^pore, 125,000 ; Baroda, 100,000 ; Oojein, 
100,000; Ahmedabad, 100,000 ; Umritsir, 100,000 ; Agra, 60,000. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Point out the capitals named in the text. 

A. Calcutta, Lahore, Madras, and Bombay. 

Q. What is the south-east coast of Hindoostan called ? 

A. Coromandel Coast. 

Q. The south-west ? 

A. Malabar Coast. 

Q. On what rivers are the principal cities ? 

A. Calcutta is on the E. side of the Hoogly R., an arm of the 
Ganges ;* Surat, on the Tapty (properly Taptee) ;t Delhi, on the 
Jumna ;j Lucknow, on the Goomty, a tributary of the Ganges ;§ 

* Calcutta, a celebrated city of Hindoostan, province Bengal, capital of 
the British dominion in the East, and seat of the supreme government, in a 
level tract on the E. side of the Hoogly R., an arm of the Ganges, about 
100 ms. N. of the Bay of Bengal ; lat. 22° 23' N., long. 88° 28' E. 

■j- Surat, a large town of Hindoostan, cap. of the province of Gujrat, and of 
the British district of its own name, under the presidency of Bombay, on the 
Taptee, about 20 ms. above its mouth, in the Gulf of Cambay, and 128 ms. 
N. by E. from Bombay 5 lat. 21° 11' N., long. 73° 7' E. 

J Delhi (Sanscr. Indraprast-ha), a celebrated city of Hindoostan, presi- 
dency of Bengal, lieutenancy of Agra, cap. of the province of its own name, 
and anciently the metropolis of the Patan and Mogul Empires, on the 
Jumna, 112 ms. N. N. W. from Agra, 425 ms. N. W. from Benares, and 
830 ms. in the same direction from Calcutta ; lat. 28° 41' N., long. 77° 
5' E. 

§ Lucknow (Hind. Lakshmanavate), a large city of Hindoostan, province 
and kingdom of Oude, of which it is the capital, on the Goomty, a tributary 
of the Ganges, about 150 ms. N. W. from Benares, and 265 ms. S. E. by E. 
from Delhi ; lat. 26° 51' N., long. 80° 50' E. 



HINDOOSTAN. 411 

Patna, on the Ganges ;* Benares, on the Ganges ;t Dacca, ex- 
tending along a river which unites with the Ganges on the one 
hand, and the Burrampooter on the other ;% Poonah, on the 
Moo 11a, a tributary of the Beemah ;§ Hyderabad, on the Musah, 
a tributary of the Krishna ;j| Baroda, on the Wiswamitra ;% Oojein, 
on the Siprah, a tributary of the Chumbul ;** Ahmedabad, on 
the Sabermatty ;tt Agra, on the Jumna.JI 

* Patna, a city of British India, presidency of Bengal, and province of 
Bahar, of which it is the capital ; on the S. bank of the Ganges, 144 ms. E. 
N. E. from Benares, and about 300 ms. N. W. from Calcutta ; lat. 25° 
37' N., long. 85° 15' E. 

-j- Benares (Varanashi, Sanscr., or Kasi, the splendid), a large and cele- 
brated city, and the most populous in Hindoostan, presidency of Bengal, and 
capital of the province and district of same name; seat of a court of circuit 
and appeal, and one of the six chief provincial cities in the presidency ; at 
the head of a judicial division ; lat. 25° 30' N., long. 83° 1' E. ; on the N. 
W. bank of the Ganges, about 300 ft. above the level of the sea ; 65 ms. 
E. from Allahabad, and 400 ms. N. W. from Calcutta. 

t Dacca, an inland city of Hindoostan, province of Bengal ; formerly 
very extensive, populous, and rich, and still one of the principal cities 
of the Bengal presidency, and the seat of a court of circuit and appeal, for 
the seventh E. district of Bengal. It extends, with its suburbs, for 6 ms. 
along a r., which, uniting with the Ganges on the one hand, and the Bur- 
rampooter on the other, affords the greatest facilities to commerce; lat. 23° 
42' N., long. 90° 17' E. ; 127 ms. N.E. from Calcutta, and 116 ms. E. S. 
E. from Moorshedabad. 

§ Poonah, a city of British India, presidency of Bombay, formerly the 
capital of the Mahratta dominions, but now the capital of the district of its 
own name ; on the Moolla, a tributary of the Beemah, 80 ms. E. S. E. from 
Bombay ; lat. 18° 30' N., long. 74° 2' E. 

H Hyderabad, a city of the Deccan, Hindoostan, capital of the Nizam's 
dominions ; on the Musah, a tributary of the Krishna, 197 ms. W.N. W. 
from Masulipatam, 270 ms. S. E. from Aurungabad, and 190 ms. W. S. W. 
from Bejapoor ; lat. 17° 15' N., long. 78° 35' E. 

^ Baroda, an inland city of Hindoostan, capital of the district of its own 
name, and of the Guicowar's dominions ; it is also the seat of a British 
resident ; lat. 22° 21' N., long. 73° 23' E. ; 45 ms. N. N. W.from Baroach, 
and 230 ms. from Bombay. 

** Oojein (Hindoo Ujjayini, or Avanti, the Ozene of Ptolemy and the 
.Periplus), a city of Central India, province of Malwah, and the former capital 
of Scindia's dominion, on the Siprah, a tributary of the Chumbul, 34 ms. 
N. by W. from Indore, and 1698 ft. above the sea; lat. 23° 11' N., long. 
75° 51' E. 

|f Ahmedabad, a town of Hindoostan, presidency of Bombay, province 
of Gujerat, capital of a district of the same name, on the navigable K. Saber- 
matty ; lat. 22° 58' N., long. 72° 37' E. 

tt Agra, a city of Hindoostan, capital province and. district of the same 
name, on the S. W. bank of the Jumna, which, during the season of the 



412 CHIN INDIA, OR FARTHER INDIA. 

N. B. It will be recollected that several of the rivers on which 
the above cities are situated, are not given on the Map. 
For a further description., see Key, pages 348-9. 



CHIN INDIA, OR FARTHER INDIA. 
Page 295.— Lesson IM.—Map No. 23. 

Q. How is Birmah bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Thibet and China ; E. by China, Ton- 
quin, and Siam ; and S. and W. by the Bay of Bengal and Hin- 
doostan. (M. A.) 

For a further description of Birmah, see Key, page 349. 

Q. How is Siam bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Birman Empire ; E. by the Em- 
pire of Anam ; S. by the Gulf of Siam and Independent Malacca ; 
and W. by the Bay of Bengal and Birman Empire. (M. A,) 

For a further description of Siam, see Key, page 349. 

Q. How is Anam bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by China ; W. by Siam, and in the rest 
of its extent by those arms of the Pacific Ocean, known as the 
Gulf of Tonquin, the China Sea, and the Gulf of Siam. (M. A.) 

For a further description of Anam, see Key, page 350. 

Q. How is Malacca bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Lower Siam, with which it is con- 
nected by the Isthmus of Kraw ; and is on all other sides sur- 
rounded by the Sea, called on the W. the Straits of Malacca ; 
and on the E. the China Sea, and Gulf of Siam. (M. A.) 

For a farther description of Malacca, see Key, page 382. 

Q. What rivers flow into the Gulf of Martaban ? 

A. The Irrawaddy, and Salwen. 

Q. Into the Gulf of Siam ? 

A. The Meinam. 

Q. Into the China Sea ? 

A. The Cambodia. 

Q. How long are all these rivers ? 

A. The Irrawaddy is 1700 ms, long ; Salwen, 900 ; Meinam, 
*00 ; Cambodia, 2000. (M. A.) 

Q. What isthmus connects Malacca with Siam ? 

A. Kraw. 

Q. What, strait separates it from Sumatra? 

A. Malacca. (M. A.) 

floods, is here about half a mile broad, and at no season fordable, in lat. 27° 
1 1' N., long. 77° 53' E. It is distant from Calcutta 950 ms., Madras,! 190, 
and Bombay 850. 



CHINA. 413 

Q. Which is the south cape of Birmah ? 

A. Negrais. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Malacca? 

A. Romania. (M. A.) 

q. Of Cambodia ? 

A. Cambodia. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Bankok? 

A. 50,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Ava? 

A. 50,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Hue? 

A. 60,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Saigon ? 

A. 100,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Umerapoora ? 

A. 30,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Arracan? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Singapore? 

A. 50,000. (M. A.) 

Q. What islands lie west of Siam ? 

A. Andaman, and Nicobar. The Nicobar Islands belong to 
Denmark: there are no Europeans on them at present. (M. G. 
p. 295.) 



CHINA. 
Page 209.— Lesson 196.— Map No. 23. 

Q. How is China bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Chinese Tartary ; E., S. E., and S., b)^ 
those arms of the Pacific Ocean known as the Yellow Sea, the 
Eastern Sea, the Strait of Formosa, the China Sea, and the Gulf 
of Tonquin ; on the land side by Tonquin, Laos, and Birmah ; and 
W. by Thibet and Chinese Tartary. (M. A.) 

For a farther description, see Key, pages 350-1. 

Q. What sea lies between China and Corea ? 

A. Yellow. 

Q. What rivers flow into the Eastern Sea ? 

A. The Hoang-Ho, Yang-tse-Kiang, and Hoang-Kiang. 

Q. How long are they ? 

A. The Hoang-Ho is' 2500 ms. long ; Yang-tse-Kiang, 2800; 
Hoang-Kiang, 700. (M. A.) 

Q. What islands lie east of China ? 

A. The Loochoo group, and the Island of Formosa. 
35* 



414 CHINA. 

Q. What island south \ 

A. Hainan. 

Q. How long are Formosa and tlainan ? 

A. Formosa is 220 ms. long ; Hainan, 200. (M. A.) 

Q. What mountains are in China ? 

A. Peling, and Meling. (M. A.) 

Q. What lakes? 

A. The Tonting, Poyang, and Koko Nor. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Pekin ? 



A. 1,500,000. 


(M. A.) 


q. Canton? 




A. 1,000,000. 


(M. A.) 


Q. Teentsin? 




A. 700,000. 


(M. A.) 


Q. Nankin? 




A. 500,000. 


(M.A.) 



Q. Voutchang 

A. 400,000. (M. A.) 

O. Soutchow ? 

A. 700,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Hangtchow ? 

Q. 600,000. (M. A.) 

q. Kingteching ? 

A. 500,000. (M.A.) 

q. On what rivers are the five first of the foregoing cities ? 

A. Pekin, or Peking, is between the Pei-Ho, and its important 
affluent the Hoen-Ho ;* Canton, on the Hoang-Kiang, and 
the E. bank of its affluent, the Pe-Kiang ;t Teentsin on the 
Pei-Ho, at the influx of the Eu-Ho ;| Nankin near the S. 

* Pekin, or Peking (Chin. Pih-King, meaning " the northern capital "), 
the modern metropolis of the Chinese Empire, is situated in the province of 
Petchelee, in a vast sandy plain, between the Pei-Ho (which empties into the 
Gulf of Petchelee) and its affluent the Hoen-Ho, within about 5 or 6 ms. 
of each, and being united to the Pei-Ho by a canal, 562 ms. N. by W. from 
Nankin, and 100 W. N. W. from the Gulf of Petchelee, in the Yellow Sea ; 
lat. (observatory) 39° 54' N., long. 116° 27' E. 

j- Canton (called by the Chinese Sang-Ching, the provincial city), a 
maritime city of China, on its S. coast, cap. province Quang-tong, residence 
of the provincial authorities, and the principal emporium of the south. 
Until recently, it was the only port in China at which Europeans or Ameri- 
cans were allowed to reside. It stands on the N. bank of the Hoang-Kiang, 
and" the E. bank of its affluent, the Pe-Kiang, 60 ms. N. N. W. from the 
China Sea, and 1200 ms. S. by W. from Pekin. Lat. 23° 7' N., long. 
114° 14/ E. 

$ Teentsin, a city of China, province of Petchelee, which has a great trade 
in salt. It is seated on the Pei-Ho, at the influx of the Eu-Ho, 90 ms. from 
its mouth, and 90 ms. S. E. from Pekin. 



THIBET AND COREA. 415 

bank of the Yang-tse-Kiang ;* Vou-tchang, on the Yang-tse- 
Kiang.t 

Q. Point out the Free Ports. 

A. Canton, Amoy, Foutchow, Ningpo, and Shanghae. 

Q. Point out Hongkong. 

A. This island, ceded by the Chinese to Great Britain, is sit- 
uated at the mouth of Hoang-Kiang River. 

Q. How is Thibet bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Kuen-lun and Thsoung-ling Mts., 
which separate it .from Little Bokhara) and the Desert of Cobi ; 
E. by China ; S. and S. W. by the great Himmaleh Mts., sep- 
arating it from Birmah, Assam, and Hindoostan. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, pages 352-3. 

Q. What rivers take their rise in it ? 

A. The Burrampooter, Irrawaddy, Cambodia, and Yang-tse- 
Kiang. (M. A.) 

THIBET AND COREA. 
Page 300.— Lesson 197.— Map No. 23. 

Q. How is Thibet bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Kuen-lun and Thsoung-ling Mts., 
which separate it from Little Bokhara and the Desert of Cobi ; 
E. by China ; S. and S. W. by the great Himmaleh Mts., separat- 
ing it from Birmah, Assam, and Hindoostan. (M. A.) 

For a further description of Thibet, see Key, pages 352-3. 

Q. What rivers rise in it ? 

A. The Burrampooter, Irrawaddy, Cambodia, and Yang-tse- 
Kiang. (M. A.) 

Q. How long are these ? 

A. The Burrampooter is 1500 ms. long; Irrawaddy, 1700; 
Cambodia, 2000 ; Yang-tse-Kiang, 2800. (M. A.) 

Q. What mountains on the north ? 

. ->. Kuen-lun. 

Q. South-west? 

.1. Himmaleh. 



* Nankin, a city of China, in the province of Keang-soo, near the S. bank 
of the Yang-tse-Kiang, and about 110 ms. from its mouth, lat. 32° 4' N., 
long. 118° 24' E. 

j- Vou-tchang, a city of China, capital of the province of Hou-quang, 
and the chief resort of all the commercial people in the empire. As 
every branch of trade is carried on here, its port, on the Kian-ku, is always 
crowded with vessels, the r. being sometimes covered with them to the dis- 
tance of two leagues. It is 655 ms. S. from Pekin. Lat. 30° 3' N., long. 
112° 25' E. 



416 EMPIRE OF JAPAN. 

Q. How high are these? 

A. Kuen-lun, 16,000 ft. ; Himmaleh, 5£ ms. high. (M. A.) 

Q. What mountain west of Lassa ? 

A. Mt. Chouraalarie. 

Q. How high is it? 

A. 29,000 ft.— The highest mountain in the world. (M. A.) 

Q. What river in Little Thibet ? 

A. Indus. 

Q. What town is on it ? 

A. Ladak. 

Q. What is the population of Jigagungar ? 

A. 100,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Of Lassa? 

A. 24,000. (M. A.) 

Q. What sea bounds Corea on the west ? 

A. Yellow. 

Q. East? 

A. Sea of Japan. 

Q. How wide is the Sea of Japan ? 

A. 600 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What country bounds Corea on the north ? 

A, Mantchooria. 

Q. What sea south? 

A. Eastern. 

For a further description of Corea, see Key, page 353. 



EMPIRE OF JAPAN. 

Page 302.— Lesson 198.— Map No. 23. 

Q. What strait separates Corea from Niphon ? 

A. Corea. 

Q. Which is the largest of the Japan Islands ? 

A. Niphon. 

Q. The next in extent? 

A. Jesso. 

Q. How long is each of these islands ? 

A. Niphon is 850 ms. long ; Jesso is 320. (M. A.) 

Q. What strait separates Niphon and Jesso ? 

A. Matsmay. (M. A.) 

Q. What island lies north of Jesso ? 

A. Seghalien. 

Q. How long is Seghalien ? 

A. 600 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What channel separates it from Mantchooria ? 

A. Channel of Tartary. (M. A.) 



EMPIRE OL' JAPAN. 417 

ty. What islands lie north-east of Jesso ? 

A. Kurile. 

Q. Which is the largest of these ? 

A. Staten Island. (M. A.) 

Q. What bounds Japan on the east ? 

A. Pacific Ocean. 

Q. How long and wide is the Pacific Ocean ? 

A. 11,000 ms. long, and 7000 wide. (M. A.) 

Q. How far from Japan to Mexico ? 

A. 5100 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. How many inhabitants has Jedo ?* 

A. 1,300,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Miaco?t 

A. 500,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Osaca?t 

A. 150,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Matsmay? 

A. 50,000. (M. A.) 

For a further description, see Key, pages 353-4. 

* Jedo or Yedo, the cap. of Japan, on the S. E. shore of the Island of 
Niphon, at the head of the Bay of Jedo, in lat. 36° 39' N., long. 140 E., 
has long been considered one of the largest cities in the world, ranking in 
extent and population with Pekin and London. It is surrounded by a ditch 
and intersected by numerous canals and branches of the River Toniak, which 
are navigable for vessels of moderate burden. Its streets and squares are nu- 
merous, and are kept very clean, and some of the former are of great length. 
Each street is appropriated to persons of one trade only ; lined with covered 
arcades, and closed at night by gates at each extremity. The houses are 
mostly two stories high, but built wholly of wood, and destructive fires are 
very frequent. Jedo has many temples, Buddhist convents, and other large 
public buildings: the emperor's palace covers a large extent of ground. It 
has an extensive commerce, but its amount is uncertain. 

-j- Miaco, or Kio, a large city in the Island of Niphon, in the interior, 160 
ins. YV. of Jedo ; lat. 35° 10' N., long. 153° 30' E. It was once the me- 
tropolis of the whole empire, and is still the ecclesiastical capital, being the 
residence of the dairi or spiritual sovereign, and the centre of the literature 
and science of Japan. It is situated in a fertile and spacious plain, surrounded 
by mountains, covered for the most part with numerous temples, monasteries, 
burying-places, and pleasure-houses. When in full splendour, this city ap- 
pears to have been about 20 miles in length and 9 or 10 in breadth. It has 
extensive manufactures and considerable commerce. 

J Osaca is a flourishing sea-port on the S. coast of Niphon, 255 miles W, 
of Jedo ; in lat. 34° 56' N., long. 134° 50' E. It is intersected, like Venice, 
by numerous canals, which are crossed by bridges of cedar. 



418 * AFRICA. 

AFRICA. 

Page 305.— Lesson 200.— Map J\ T o. 25. 

Q. How is Africa bounded? 

A. It is bounded on the W. by the Atlantic Ocean ; N. by the 
Mediterranean Sea ; E. by the Red Sea and Indian Ocean ; while 
its S. touches the great Southern Ocean. (M. A.) 

Africa is a vast peninsula, comprising nearly a third of the world known 
to the ancients. Its shape is an irregular pyramid, at the southern extremity 
diminishing almost to a point; so that it has, properly speaking, only three 
sides. 

Africa forms one of the great divisions of the globe ; situated to the S. of 
Europe, and to the W. and S. W. of Asia. It is separated from the former 
by the Mediterranean Sea and the Strait of Gibraltar ; the two continents 
approaching at the latter within about 15 ms. of each other. It is separated 
from Asia by the Red Sea, at whose southern extremity, the Strait of Babel- 
mandeb, the shores of the two continents are only 16 ms. apart. But at the 
most northerly extremity of the Red Sea, Asia and Africa are united by the 
Isthmus of Suez; the Mediterranean being there about 50 ms. from the Red 
Sea. 

The most northerly point of Africa, Cape Bon, or, according to some 
writers, Ras-el-Kroon, or "Cape Horn," is in about 37° 21' N. lat. ; its 
most southern, Cape Agulhas, or Cape Needles, is about 34° 50' S. lat. The 
distance between these two points is nearly 5000 ms. Cape Guardafui, in 
long. 51° 22' E., is the most easterly point of Africa; and Cape Verde, in 
long. 17° 32' W., the most westerly. The distance between these capes is 
about 4500 ms. It contains an area of about 11,000,000 sq. ms. The 
pop. of this division of the earth is variously estimated at from 50,000,000 
to 100,000,000— Mitchell has stated it at 57,000,000. On the whole, Africa 
seems to be less liberally supplied with moisture than any of the other great 
divisions of the globe. But while in some parts it has immense tracts of 
burning desert, in others it is marshy and flooded with water. In those re- 
gions which are exempt from these extremes, animal and vegetable life 
appear in remarkable variety and luxuriance. Of the central portion of this 
continent, little or nothing is known. 

Q. How is Morocco bounded? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Mediterranean Sea, and Strait of 
Gibraltar; E. by Algiers, the Beled-el-Jerid, and the Sahara desert ; 
S. by the Sahara Desert ; and W. and N. W. by the Atlantic 
Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Morocco. 

The Empire of Morocco (called by the natives Moghrib ul Acsa, i. c. 
the " farthest west ;" the Mauritania Tingitana of the ancient Romans,) is 
situated in the N.W. part of Africa, between the 28th and 36th degs. of N. 
lat., and the 1st and 12th of W. long. Length, from N. E. to S.W., above 700 
ms. ; greatest breadth, perhaps 300 ms. Area estimated at 190,000 sq. ms. 
Pop. 6,000,000. 



AFRICA. 419 

Q. How is Algiers bounded ? 

Jl. It is bounded N. by the Mediterranean Sea ; E. by Tunis ; 
S. by the Atlas Mts., which separate it from the Beled-el-Jerid, or 
Country of Dates ; and W. by Morocco, from which it is divided 
by the Desert of Angad. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A, Algiers. 

Algiers (called by the Arabs Al-Jez-air, and by the French Algeria) is 
a territory of N. Africa, forming one of the Barbary States, between 34° and 
37° 7' N. lat., and 8° 40' E. and 2° W. long. It includes the greater part 
of the Numidia and Mauritania Tingitana of the ancients. Length, above 
500 ms. ; its breadth, which is greater in the E, than in the W., varies from 
about 40 to about 200 ms. Area estimated at 90,000 sq. ms. The pop. has 
been variously estimated at from 1,500,000 to 2,300,000. 

Q. How is Tunis bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. and E. by the Mediterranean Sea and 
Tripoli ; S. by the Beled-el-Jerid ; and W. by Algiers. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Tunis. 

Tunis (called by the inhabitants Too-nis) is a state or regency of N. 
Africa, nominally dependent on the Turkish empire, between 33° and 37° 
20' N. lat., and 8° 30' and 11° 20' E. long. Length, from N. to S., about 
300 ms. ; greatest breadth, from E. to W., near 170 ms. Area, vaguely 
estimated at about 50,000 sq. ms. Pop., estimated at from 1,000,000 to 
1,800,000. 

Q. How is Tripoli bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. and N. E. by the Mediterranean Sea ; S. 
E. and S. by the Great Desert ; and S.W. and W. by the Beled- 
el-Jerid and Tunis. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Tripoli. 

Tripoli (Anc. Tripolis) is the most easterly of the Barbary States, be- 
tween 29° and 33° N. lat., and 10° and 22° E. long* Area, estimated 
at 100,000 sq. ms. Pop. estimated at from 500,000 to 2,000,000. 

Barbary is that portion of N. Africa which includes the foregoing states, 
together with the interior region called Beled-el-Jerid, or Country of Dates. 
It extends westward from Egypt to the shores of the Atlantic. The area is 
probably about 570,000 sq. ms., and the pop. 10,000,000. 

Q. How is Egypt bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Mediterranean ; E. by the little r. 
El Arish, on the border of Palestine, the Desert of Idumea and 
the Red Sea ; S. by Nubia, its southern limit, from the oldest 
time, having been fixed at the cataracts of Assouan ; and W. by 
the Libyan Desert. (M. A.) 

* This includes the district of Barca, which forms the E. portion of 
Tripoli. 



420 AFRICA. 

Q. Capital? 

Ji. Cairo. 

There have been very discordant statements as to the boundaries of this 
famous country. There cannot, of course, be any doubt as to its N. limit, 
which is formed by the Mediterranean ; and it seems to have been generally 
agreed from a very remote period that its S. limit should be fixed at Syene, now 
Assouan, or rather at Philse, in lat. 24° 3' 45" N. But the difficult point is to 
determine its breadth. From Philae to near Cairo, the Nile, in most parts, flows 
through a narrow valley, bounded on either side by a ridge of hills, or infe- 
rior mountains: at Cairo these ridges diverge, that on the E. to Suez, and 
that on the W. in a N.W. direction to the Mediterranean. Some authors 
identify Egypt with the tract lying between the mountain-chains now referred 
to ; while others, regarding the Nile as the source of life and vegetation in 
Egypt, restrict its territory within the limits covered by the inundation of the 
river. But from the age of the Ptolemies down to the present day, the desert 
country lying between the valley of the Nile and the Red Sea has been uni- 
formly included in Egypt. On the W. side the mountain ridge already 
noticed seems to be its only natural boundary. Still, however, it has been 
usual to reckon the oases that lie within 100, or even 200 ms. of this limit, 
as belonging to Egypt. 

From Cape Bourlos, on the coast, lat. 31° 36' N., to Philae, the distance 
N. and S. in 70° 32' : about 452 geographical, or 520 English ms. But 
the distance by water and the extent of the alluvial territory are considerably 
greater than would appear from this, because of the many and considerable 
bends of the river. The breadth of the Egyptian coast is 160 ms. ; but in 
ascending to Cairo (104 ms. from Cape Bourlos) the cultivated tract tapers 
off to a point, and the rest of the country is chiefly comprised in the narrow 
valley of the Nile ; which, however, at Beni-souf, 83 (by water) ms. higher, 
spreads to the W. to form the vale of Fai'oum, a circular valley of great fer- 
tility and beauty, measuring about. 40 ms. from E. to W., and 30 ms. from 
N. to S. Thence to Assouan, the valley of the Nile is mostly confined within 
very narrow limits. The whole cultivable territory of Egypt, including its 
lateral valleys, has been estimated at 16,000 sq. ms., or about half the area 
of Ireland. 

Egypt is naturally divided into — 1. The Delta, or Lower Egypt. 2. The 
Valley of the Nile, comprising Central and Upper Egypt. 3. The E. De- 
sert. 4. The W. Desert, and Oases. The political divisions are the Bahari, 
or Lower Egypt (identical with the Delta) ; the Vostani, or Central \ and 
the Said, or Upper Egypt. 

Q. How is Nubia bounded ? 

Ji. It is bounded N. by Egypt ; E. by the Red Sea ; S. by 
Abyssinia and the country of the Shilluks ; and W. by the Desert 
of Libya. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

Ji. NewDongola. 

Nubia (Anc. N. Ethiopia) is an extensive tract of E. Africa, between the 
S: boundary of Egypt and the N. limit of Abyssinia, between lat. 13° and 
24° N., and long. 30° and 39° E. Estimated area, 360,000 sq. ms. Pop. 
unknown. The country is divided into Lower Nubia, or Nubia Proper, 
extending from Egypt to the N. frontier of Dongola, arjd thence to the 



\FRICA. 421 

junction of the river Atbara or Tacazze with the Nile : and Upper Nubia, 
which includes Shendy, Halfay (anc. Meroe), and Sennaar. 

Q. How is Abyssinia bounded ? 

A, It is bounded N. by Nubia ; E. by the Red Sea ; S. partly 
by the Mohammedan kingdom of Adel and the country of the 
Somaulies, and partly by unknown regions occupied by the bar- 
barous Galla tribes ; and W. by the country of the Shilluks and 
other imperfectly known regions.* (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Gondar. 

Abyssinia is an extensive country bordering on the Red Sea, the boun- 
daries of which are but imperfectly known. It stretches from about lat. 9° 
to 15° 40' N., and from long. 34° to the Red Sea. From W. S. W. to E. 
N. E. it extends about 600 ms. ; and from E. S. E. to W. N. W., about 400 
ms. Area estimated at about 280,000 sq. ms. Pop. variously reckoned at 
from 2,500,000 to 5,000,000. 

It was included in the Ethiopia (from alOto^, a man burned by 
the sun, or of a dark colour} of the ancients. The name Abyssinia, or 
more properly Habessina, from the Arabic Habesch, signifying a mixture or 
confusion, has been given to the country by the Arabic and Portuguese 
geographers, and indicates the supposed Arabic origin of "the people, and 
their subsequent intermixture with the Africans. The Abyssinians do not 
use this name ; and either assume that of the provinces in which they live, 
or call themselves Itjopians, and their country Manghesta Itfopia, or king- 
dom of Ethiopia, a name given it by the Greeks during their ascendancy at 
Axum. 

This country comprised, when it became first known to the Portuguese, 
350 years ago, a single state or empire, under the government of an absolute 
and despotic sovereign, of considerable power and influence. It was repeat- 
edly visited from time to time, but public curiosity had gradually subsided in 
regard to this part of the world for almost a century, when it was revived, in 
the year 1790, by the publication of Bruce's Travels. Many of the statements 
of this individual were so extraordinary that their authenticity was very ge- 
nerally doubted : subsequent investigations have, however, confirmed most 
of the leading features of his work, although some are still considered of 
doubtful accuracy. 

The ancient government of Abyssinia is now extinct ; its force has been 
gradually weakened, partly by the rebellion of the governments of the dif- 
ferent provinces, and partly by the irruptions of the Galla and other savage 
hordes, who have conquered and settled some of its finest provinces. The 
whole region is now split into an endless variety of petty states, the limits 
of which are perpetually changing, and between which interminable contests 
constantly prevail. The most important states of Abyssinia at the present 
time are, Tigre, in the E.; Amhara, in the W. ; and Shoa or Shwa, in the 

* The greater part of the frontier lands on the W. and S. consists of wild 
regions occupied by the Galla, who always ravaged, and have recently con- 
quered a large portion of the Abyssinian monarchy. It is difficult even to 
guess the dimensions of a region of which there are no fixed limits, mea- 
surements, or survevs. 
36 



422 



AFRICA. 



S. The latter seems to be the most flourishing, and to be under a more 
stable government than any of the others. It has recently excited some at- 
tention on account of an embassy having been sent to its sovereign in the 
year 1841 by the British East India Company. 

Q. How is Liberia bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. and N. E. by Senegambia ; E. by Upper 
Guinea ; and S. and S. W. by the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Monrovia. 

Liberta is a district on the W. coast of Africa, lying on both sides- of the 
R. St. Paul, which falls into the Atlantic in about 6° 20' N. lat., and 10° 46' 
W. long. A portion of this country was purchased by the American Colo- 
nization Society, in 1821, for the purpose of colonizing such of the African 
race as had been, or thereafter should be, manumitted in different parts of the 
United States* 

Q. How is Ashantee bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Mts. of Kong ; E. by Dahomey ; 
S. b}r the Gold Coast of the Gulf of Guinea ; and W. by the 
Assinee, a large r., which is usually reckoned the line of demarca- 
tion between the Gold and Ivory Coast, and forms, for some miles 
from its mouth, the W. limit of Ashantee. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Coomassie. 

Ashantee is an extensive kingdom of W. Africa, lying along the Gold 
Coast of Guinea; extending from 4° 37' to 9° 50' N. lat., and from 4° 48' 
W. to 1° 10' E. long., being about 280 ms. in length, and 250 ms. in 
breadth. It may contain about 60,000 sq. ms. Bowditch estimates the 
pop. of Ashantee Proper at 1,000,000 ; and that of the whole empire 
at about 3,000,000. The men are well made, more muscular on the 
coast than in the interior, free from the more revolting peculiarities of 
negro form and feature, and some of them have even aquiline countenances. 
The higher order of females (those not subject to hard labour) may be said 
to be handsome, with features rather of an Indian than an African mould. 
Both sexes are cleanly, washing from head to foot every day, and afterwards 
anointing themselves with the grease of the shea or butter-tree ; a good cos- 
metic, and a preservative of the skin in this hot climate. The clothes of the 
better classes are convenient, and not ungraceful, consisting of immense 
cloaks, exactly like the Roman toga, manufactured of the most costly silks. 

* The most contradictory accounts respecting the present condition and 
prospects of this colony, are to be found in works of a highly respectable 
character. McCulloch represents them in a very unfavourable light, while 
Balbi, who appears to base his statements on the testimony of impartial ob- 
servers, says that they are tolerably prosperous (assez prospere), and that the 
noble object for which the colony was established — that of diffusing civiliza- 
tion and Christianity among the benighted Africans — has, to a considerable 
extent, already been attained. If wc turn from these works to the publica- 
tions of our own country, we shall find a still more striking discrepancy to 
prevail. 



AFRICA. 423 

The war-dress substitutes for this a close vest, covered with metal ornaments 
and scraps of Moorish writing, as spells against danger, loose cotton drawers, 
and large boots of dull red leather. The superior chiefs have gold breast- 
plates; and all who can procure them wear gold ornaments in profusion. 
Some of these are well wrought, others are merely lumps of rock-gold hung 
to the wrist ; the war cap consists of gold or gilded rams'-horns, supporting 
an extravagant plume of eagle's feathers. In peace, the head-dress is usually 
a fillet. The lower orders wear nothing but a piece of cloth fastened round 
the waist. Bosman enumerates five degrees, or orders of society — the king, 
the caboceers, the gentry, the traders, and the slaves. Besides the king, how- 
ever, there is, in fact, but one distinction, that of slave and freeman ; to the 
latter appertain, of course, all the better employments of war, state, &c. ; to* 
the former, all the meaner and more laborious occupations, of which the 
women get much more than their fair share. The caboceers (magistrates of 
towns and villages) are taken indiscriminately from the gentry ; and these, 
again, are merely such as have enriched themselves by trade or inheritance, 
and who, not unfrequently, were born slaves. The occupations of trade are 
practised alike by the poorer freemen and the better class of slaves. The 
intercourse between the sexes is on the worst possible footing. Marriage is 
effected by paying a sum of money to the parents of the girl, and a family 
feast. The property of the man and woman (if she have any) does not 
become common. Polygamy is allowed ; the king's wives amounting to the 
extravagant number of 3333, a mystical number which is carefully kept up, 
to enable him to reward any distinguished caboceer by the present of a 
woman, but never exceeded. Few, however, except the richest individuals, 
have more than one wife, and very many have none. The food of the higher 
classes is very various ; soup of dried fish, owls, beef, or mutton ; wild hog, 
deer, and monkey's flesh ! together with the whole host of vegetables which 
the soil produces. Well-stocked and well-regulated markets are held in the 
towns, for the supply of these necessaries as well as for articles of clothing 
and European manufacture. The poorer classes, excepting household slaves, 
live almost exclusively on fish and dhourrah. The common drink is palm- 
wine, one species of which is -said to create a ravenous appetite. 

Q. How is Dahomey bounded ? 

«#. It is bounded N. by the Mts. of Kong; N. E. and E. by 
Yarriba and Benin ; S. by the Slave Coast ; and W. by the Rio 
Volta and Logos Rivers, which separate it from the kingdom of 
Ashantee. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Abomey. 

Dahomey consists of an immense plain rising gradually from the sea to 
the Kong Mountains, which are here from 150 to 200 ms. inland. The 
Volta and Logos Rivers, bound it on the W., but, excepting these, there seems 
to be no stream of any considerable importance. The country is, however, 
well watered, and interspersed with small marshes. The soil is wholly allu- 
vial ; and the surface is covered with a vegetation of unbounded luxuriance ; 
Oranges, limes, guavas, and other tropical fruits, melons, pine-apples, yams, 
&c, grow wild ; and maize, millet, and other grains, potatoes, indigo, cotton, 
sugar, tobacco, and spices are successfully cultivated. In some parts the 
country is covered with dense forests, the retreat of lions, hyenas, leopards, 



424 * AFRICA. 

elephants, and overgrown serpents. Deer and domestic animals are plentiful. 
Previously to the early part of the last century this country was divided into 
a number of petty states. The Dahomans, by whom it was overrun and laid 
waste, came from the interior of the continent. They are said to be hospitable 
to strangers, brave and resolute ; and these, if they exist, would appear to 
make up the whole amount of their good qualities. Their disposition seems, 
from their conduct, to be a compound of that of the tiger and the spaniel, 
exhibiting the utmost ferocity and thirst for blood with the most abject ser- 
vility. All the most arbitrary forms of Eastern despotism seem to be mild 
and free, when compared with that established in this wretched country. It 
is singular, too, that this despotism is not founded upon force and terror, nor 
is it connected with anything timid or effeminate in the character of the 
people. It rests on a blind and idolatrous veneration for the person of the 
sovereign, as for that of a superior being. He is the absolute master of the 
lives and properties of his subjects, and disposes of them at pleasure. It is a 
crime in the latter to suppose that the king eats, drinks, sleeps, or performs 
any of the functions of an ordinary mortal. 

Q. How is Benin bounded ? 

Ji. It is bounded N. by Yarriba ; E. by the Lower Niger ; S. 
by the Gulf of Guinea ; and W. by Dahomey. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Benin. 

Bejtin is situated near the E. extremity of the Gulf of Guinea, between 
4° and 6° 30' N. lat., and 4° and 8° E. long. Benin is about 250 ms. in 
length by 200 ms. in extreme width, and contains probably not less than 
40,000 sq. ms. On the coast, the country is level, but it rises gradually, 
till, on the northern frontier, the continuation of the Kong Mountains attains 
an elevation of 2500 ft. It is well watered by the delta of the Niger. The 
W. branch of this delta is the stream which has always been called the 
River of Benin ; farther E. is the main limb, formerly called the Nun ; but 
demonstrated by Lander to be the Niger. Under the influence of abundant 
irrigation and a tropical sun, the productions of the earth are very numerous. 
They do not, however, differ from those of other parts of the same coast, 
except that wood is rather more abundant. The hippopotamus is more 
common than in other countries of Guinea ; but, in other respects, the 
animals of Benin are the same as those of Guinea generally ; and the same 
remark will apply to the habits and customs of the natives ; the same arts, 
with the exception of gold working, for gold is not found in Benin, the same 
government ; the same religion (Fetichism) ; the same festivals, marked by 
the same disgusting cruelties, are observed here as in Ashantee, with one addi- 
tional aggravation, namely, the annual sacrifice of human victims to the 
power of the sea. Benin is well peopled ; the capital contains 15,000 in- 
habitants, and the town of Warre 5000. Clapperton also found the N. fron- 
tier, very populous, as did Lander that of the E., upon the banks of the 
Niger. Previously to the nominal abolition of the slave-trade, this country 
was the great theatre of that traffic ; and is now said to be carried on to a 
greater extent than ever. An annual fair is held at Bonny, on the coast, at 
which not fewer than 20,000 slaves are sold, of whom it is alleged 16,000 
are brought from the single district of Eboe, a port of Benin, on the right 
bank of the Niger. Some few of these are sold to native masters, as the 
chiefs of Old and New Calabar. But the vast majority are disposed of to 



AFRICA. 425 

foreign traders, and are shipped principally for Brazil and Cuba. A more 
harmless trade, and to a considerable extent, is carried on in salt, palm oil, 
and blue coral. 

Q. How is Congo bounded 1 

Ji. It is bounded N. by the R. Congo or Zaire, which separates 
it from Loango ; S. by the R. Dande, dividing it from Angola ; 
W. by the S. Atlantic Ocean ; and E. by the Crystal Mts. or Mts. 
of the Sun, &c. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. St. Salvador. 

Congo is a country in Lower Guinea, to which various boundaries have 
been assigned by the old and more recent travellers. The Portuguese, who 
discovered it in 1487, included in Congo all the coast of W. Africa from 
cape Lopez Gonsalvo (Loango), in lat. 0° 37' S., long. 8° 35' E., to cape 
Negro, in lat. 15° 50' S., long. 11° 55' E. ; for they found the whole of that 
tract inhabited by negro tribes, resembling each other in every respect, and 
subject to one paramount chief, called Mani-Congo (Sovereign of Congo) 5 
but in process of time this empire became dismembered ; inferior chiefs threw 
off their allegiance and erected separate kingdoms, which are at present 
known as Angola, Loango, Benguela, and, lastly, Congo Proper, the subject 
of this article. 

According to Ritter, Congo consists of two distinct regions: that next to 
the sea, or the littoral, is low and fiat, is traversed by many streams, and 
abounds in sandy deserts, but is elsewhere very fertile. The climate in this 
region is exceedingly unfavourable ; and pestilential emanations, and swarms 
of noxious animals, expose the lives of the inhabitants to perpetual danger. 
The other region consists of the terraces, or acclivities, ascending from the 
plain to the high table-land in the interior. This is by far the finest part 
of the country, and the richest, and most populous. The River Zaire, which 
descends from the interior, has its great cataracts in passing through this 
region. 

Government, Population, SfC. — If we may depend on the traditions of the 
people, who have neither annals nor history, Congo was formerly a powerful 
empire under a single sovereign, or rather absolute despot. But it is evident 
from the accounts of the early travellers, that, when first visited by Europeans, 
the government of Congo did not differ materially from its present form ; 
and that it consisted of a sort of confederacy of small states under a principal 
sovereign. It appears, however, pretty certain that the power of the superior 
monarch has materially declined during the last 200 years. Congo is now 
split into an infinite number of petty states, each governed by a chenou or 
chief. These chieftainships would, in Europe, be called fiefs, held under a 
principal sovereign, called lindy or blindy N' Congo, residing at Banza 
Congo (St. Salvador). Most of these chiefs affect, however, a nearly total 
independence ; and being all despots, and frequently at war with each other, 
and with the principal sovereign, the country is almost always in a state of 
frightful anarchy. At the death of a chenou, it is not his son, but his brother 
or maternal uncle that succeeds him. 

The inhabitants are said by Tuckey to be a mixed race; but the Portu- 
guese never visited the country in such numbers as to produce any impres- 
sion on the physical character of the people -, and the Congoese are certainly 
36 * 



426 AFRICA. 

one of the least favoured negro varieties. Generally, they seem to be sunk 
in the lowest state of degradation. They are incorrigibly indolent ; have 
little or no clothing ; and though they raise Indian corn, agriculture is in 
the lowest state, and they frequently suffer the extremity of famine. Their 
religion is the grossest species of Fetichism. The Portuguese having esta- 
blished missions in different parts of the country, the natives sometimes 
exhibit in their religion an odious mixture of Christianity and idolatry. 
They are prone to all sorts of excesses and debauchery, and the women are 
degraded to the condition of beasts of burden. Still, however, they are not 
wholly destitute of good qualities ; and are said to be sincere, hospitable, and 
compassionate. Having been long a principal seat of the slave trade, most 
of the disorders that prevail are doubtless owing to the enormities growing 
out of that traffic. This is said to occasion perpetual wars ; the slaves being 
mostly prisoners taken in battle, or kidnapped on the public roads. The 
Congoese are said frequently to decapitate their prisoners, and burn their 
bodies ; and if such barbarity be practised when the prisoners may be sold, 
the presumption would seem to be that it would become much more prevalent 
were the traffic put an end to. 

The country has been represented as very populous. Carli, one of the early 
missionaries, gravely reports that a king of Congo marched against the Por- 
tuguese with an army of 900,000 men. But it is evident that a country in 
the state we have described cannot be thickly peopled ; and, in point of fact, 
Tuckey states that the capital of a petty state that he visited, did not contain 
more than 100 huts and 600 persons. In Embomma he found 60 huts, 
with 500 inhabitants ; and at Inga 70 houses, in which not more than 300 
persons resided. His observations, however, in the interior were limited ; 
and he admits that the upper banks of the Zaire were considerably more 
populous than those towards the coast ; but still it is certain that the accounts 
of the extraordinary population of the country have little better foundation 
than the imagination of the writers. According to the missionaries, the 
capital of the country, which they divided into six provinces, was built on a 
mountain about 150 ms. from the sea, and was called by them St. Salvador. 
They speak in extravagant terms of the beauty and salubrity of the situa- 
tion. Carli states that it contained 40,000 inhabitants ; and had several 
Christian churches, and a school under the direction of the Jesuits. But 
Merolla reports that in 1668 St. Salvador had suffered so much from the 
ravages of war, that the sovereign had transferred his residence to Lemba, 
and that the former had become a den of robbers. There are no subsequent 
accounts of St. Salvador on which it would be safe to place any reliance. 

Q. How is Angola bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Dande R., which separates it from 
Congo ; E. by the interior kingdom of Matemba ; S. by the 
Coanza R. ; and W. by the S. Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. St. Paul de Loando. 

Angola, Dongo, or Ambonde, a kingdom of the W. coast of Africa, ex- 
tending from 8° 25' to 9° 20' S. lat, and from 14° to 18° or 19° E. long. 
On the N. it is separated from Congo by the Dande ; on the S. the Coanza 
divides it from Benguela ; on the W. it has the Atlantic Ocean ; and on the 
E. the W. portion of the interior kingdom of Matemba. It lies nearly paral- 



AFRICA. 427 

lei to the equator, being about 350 ms. in length, from E. to W., about 60 
ms. in width, from N. to S. ; containing an area of probably 1 7,000 or 18,000 
sq. ms. 

This country is properly a part of Congo, from which, however, it has 
been politically separated since the middle of the 16th century, when a chief, 
whose name or title was Angola, made himself independent of the King of 
Congo, and gave its present designation to his new kingdom, the native 
name of which was Dongo, or Ambonde. It is very powerful among the 
neighbouring states, the paramount authority of its monarch being acknow- 
ledged by several districts, some of them greatly exceeding itself in extent. 

Physical Character.— Angola is generally mountainous, with few plains, 
except upon the sea-shore. The land appears, however, to be making ad- 
vances on the sea, and forming islands, which are wholly of an alluvial and 
level character ; such is the Isle of Loanda, lying a mile from the coast, and 
forming, with the Palmareinho, one of the most convenient harbours on the 
W. coast of Africa. The cape itself is also a plain of the same nature, 
and very evidently in a state of progress westward. 

The country is extremely well watered ; the principal streams are the 
Coanza, Benga, and Danda, which run nearly parallel to each other, and to 
the equator ; the first and last forming the S. and N. boundary of the country. 

Population, Customs, fyc The population is dense for a barbarous coun- 
try, the monarch being called Incue, from the great number of subjects under 
his command. The pop. is estimated at from 2,000,000 to 3,000,000. The 
capital, St. Paul de Loanda, contains only 3000. The natives have few of the 
negro peculiarities in form or feature : they are of ordinary stature, well limbed, 
and, but for their colour, very like the Portuguese, by whom they are sur- 
rounded. Blue eyes and red hair are not uncommon among them. Society 
is divided into four classes, two free and two slaves ; the first two consisting 
of nobles and husbandmen or artificers ; the others of slaves, native born, 
and those acquired by war or foreign purchase. Marriage is an extremely 
simple ceremony, a mere agreement between the husband and the father of 
the woman. The appearance of the first tooth in children is an important 
epoch, the infant being then carried from house to house, and gifts extorted 
from friends and strangers. For the rest, they do not differ much from other 
negroes. Dancing is a favourite diversion, and a religious rite ; and, like 
other African people, their ceremonies are defiled with blood and cruelty. 
Money is of several kinds : marked cloths, the shell of a small fish called 
simbo, a red wood brought from Matemba, and iron, which last was intro- 
duced by the Portuguese. The year is divided into 12 months, and the 
week into 4 days, of which the last is observed as a sabbath. The country 
is parcelled out into a number of little lordships, each under a magistrate 
called a sova. The religion of the bulk of the people is Fetichism, differ- 
ing in nothing from that on the coast of Guinea; but there are many Chris- 
tian families among the natives, and at one time the Jesuits had converted 
nearly the whole population, and established a regular form of church go- 
vernment. But the effect of their labours has now nearly vanished, and the 
negroes have relapsed into the idolatrous rites of their ancestors. The lan- 
guage is less barbarous, and more uniform, on this coast than in most other 
parts of Africa ; the whole country between the Coanza and the Zaire speaks 
a dialect of the same tongue, which, according to Degrandpre, is extremely 
musical and flexible; with a perfect syntax, and bearing in some points a re- 



428 AFRICA. 

semblance to the Latin. He imagines that this fact may prove a guide to 
the obscure history of these countries ; may it not, however, be owing solely 
to the long intercourse which has existed between the natives and the Chris- 
tian priests from Portugal and Italy. 

Q. How is Benguela bounded 1 

A. It is bounded by the Coanza R. on the N. ; by part of Ma- 
temba on the N. E. ; on the S. and E. by unexplored regions ; 
and on the west by the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) \ 

According to this outline, it extends from 9° 20' to 16° S. lat., and from 
12° to 18° 30' E. long., having a mean length of 460 ms., a breadth of 
270 ms. and an area of considerably more than 100,000 sq. ms. 

q. Capital? 

A. St. Felipe de Benguela. 

Benguela appears to be mountainous to a considerable extent ; the land 
rising sometimes so high that a very great degree of cold is experienced ; 
but, like other African elevations, it rises in masses rather than peaks, and 
abounds in terraces, table-lands, and valleys, to their very summits. The 
rivers are numerous, and, as the direction of the mountains is from N. E. 
to S.W., most of them flow into the Atlantic Ocean. Springs are so abun- 
dant, that in almost every part of the country water may be found by digging 
to the depth of two feet. The natural consequence of this abundant mois- 
ture in tropical countries is observed in Benguela, and nowhere is vegetation 
more abundant or more varied. Dense forests of cedars, palms, baobab, 
date-trees, tamarinds, with every other tropical tree, and some that belong to 
more temperate climates, clothe the sides and tops of the mountains, inter- 
mixed with vines, bananas, ananas, and all the finest species of tropical fruit. 
Grain is not very abundant ; but this arises from the want of skill or in- 
dustry in the natives, since there is no species of corn that might not be 
successfully cultivated upon some part of the high or low lands. Lions, tigers, 
elephants, rhinoceroses, hippopotami, and other large animals, are extremely 
numerous ; in addition to which, the zebra is very commonly met with, and, 
in short, every wild animal for which Africa is noted is found within the 
limits of Benguela, The elk (which is also a native here) is particularly 
prized, from its being supposed that one of its hoofs has power to cure the 
epilepsy ; deer and antelopes are abundant. Cattle, sheep, and goats, are very 
numerous, but it does not seem that horses are at all plentiful. Of birds, 
Battel reports that peacocks are found wild in the interior as numerous as 
any other kind: that they are accounted sacred and kept tame, about the 
graves of the great chiefs. The ostrich is also found here, with all the rep- 
tiles, dangerous and harmless, for which this part of Africa is so much 
reputed, crocodiles being especially numerous and powerful. The mountains 
are known to yield copper, sulphur, petroleum, and crystals, and are sup- 
posed to possess gold and silver. Some of the rivers unquestionably bring 
down the former, but probably in small quantities, which the natives work 
into the handles of their hatchets. 

A large portion of Benguela is inhabited by petty tribes of independent 
and very savage barbarians, whose habits and manners do not differ from 
those of other negroes, with the exception of one — the Gagas, Giagas or 
Iagas, a wandering horde of robbers, which appear to approximate nearer 
to perfect barbarism than any other, even of the African races. Travellers 



AFRICA. 429 

of 200 years ago describe these savages as follows, and nothing more recent 
is known of them : — They are of no tribe nor nation, destroy all their own 
children, and keep up their strength and numbers by stealing those of 12 
or 13 years of age from the countries which they overrun. They are bold 
and skilful warriors, but ruthless cannibals, without the slightest idea of art 
or industry, so that wherever they encamp, they destroy all around, and then 
depart to inflict the same desolation on some other district. They appear 
frequently to cause a famine, where such a calamity would otherwise seem to 
be impossible, verifying the animated description of the locust : « Before 
them is a garden, behind them a barren desert." Battel, who was their 
prisoner for more than two years, has left a full and curious account of these 
savages, which carries the impress of truth on every line. Benguela was 
formerly subject to Angola, at least nominally, and was accounted one of 
the 17 provinces of that kingdom. The Portuguese have long had settle- 
ments on the coast and the interior, but their power does not seem to extend 
far beyond their forts. 

Q. How is Cape Colony bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the country of the Hottentots, from 
which it is separated N. W. by the Koussie R. ; E. by CafFraria, 
from which it is separated by the Great Kei R. ; and S. and W. 
by the Indian and Atlantic Oceans. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Cape Town. 

Cape of Good Hope (Coloxy of), or Cape Colony, an extensive terri- 
tory, so called from the above cape, belonging to Great Britain, in S. Africa; 
comprising the greater portion of the extremity of that continent S. of lat. 
29° 30' S., and between long. 17° and 27° 30' E. It has a coast line of about 
1150 ms., broken by numerous bays, the principal of which are St. Helena, 
Saldanha, and Table bays on the W., and False bay, St. Sebastian's, Mossel, 
Plettenburg, St. Francis, and Algoa bays on the S. coast. Length of the 
territory, E. to W., about 550 ms. ; average breadth, N. to S., 240 ms., 'giv- 
ing an area of nearly 130,000 sq. ms. Pop. in 1838, 156,616. 

Q. How is Mozambique bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Zanguebar; E. by that part of the In- 
dian Ocean known as the Channel of Mozambique ; S. E. by 
Delagoa Bay ; S. by the country of the Boshuanas ; and W. by 
unexplored regions. (M. A.) 

Q. Capital? 

A. Mozambique. 

This territory, which takes its name from its chief city, extends along the 
E. coast of Africa for a distance of 1400 ms. Though it has belonged to 
Portugal since the beginning of the 16th century, it is yet but little known. 
It formerly extended almost to the equator, but Cape Delgado, in lat. 10° 6' 
S., is now its N. boundary. Besides the capital, Mozambique, which was 
once an important city, but is now greatly declined, the Portuguese have a 
few small settlements along the coast, and in the interior, on the Zambese R. 
Their authority is, for the most part, merely nominal, and they maintain 
themselves with difficulty in the inland districts against the native tribes. 
Nearly all the colonial functionaries, both civil and military, are convicts 



430 AFRICA. 

from Portugal, and their administration is very corrupt. The city of Mo- 
zambique was visited by Vasco de Gama, in 1498, on his voyage to India. 
In 1506, Albuquerque made it the cap. of the Portuguese colonies in E. Africa. 



Q. Where is the Gulf of Sidra ? 

Ji. It is a spacious gulf of the Mediterranean, between Tripoli 
and Barca. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Guinea ? 

Ji. It is a spacious gulf of the Atlantic Ocean, on the W. coast 
of Africa, lying S. of Upper, and W. of Lower Guinea. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Gulf of Aden ? 

Ji. It is in the N. W. part of Africa, between Berbera and Ara- 
bia; formed by the Indian Ocean. (M. A.) 

STRAITS, &C. 

Q. Where is the Strait of Gibraltar ? 

Ji. It separates Africa, on the N. W., from Europe, and con- 
nects the Mediterranean Sea with the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Strait of Babelmandeb ? 

Ji. It separates Abyssinia from Arabia, and connects the Red 
Sea with the Indian Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Channel of Mozambique ? 

Ji. It is a channel of the Indian Ocean, on the E. coast of 
Africa, separating Madagascar from Mozambique. (M. A.) 

BAYS. 

Q. Where is Great Fish Bay ? 

Ji. It is on the W. coast of Africa, formed by the Atlantic 
Ocean. (M. A.) Lat. 16° 31' S., long. 11° 54' E. 

Q. Where is Walwisch Bay ? 

Ji. It is on the W. coast of Africa, S. E. of Great Fish Bay, 
formed by the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Santa Cruz Bay ? 

Ji. It is on the W. coast of Africa, S. of Walwisch Bay, formed 
by the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is St. Helena Bay ? 

Ji. It is on the W. coast of Cape Colony, S. E. of Santa Cruz 
Bay, formed by the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Delagoa Bay ? 

Ji. It is on the E. coast of Africa, at the S. extremity of Mo- 
zambique, formed by the Indian Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Bombetok Bay ? 

Ji. It is on the W. coast of Madagascar, formed by the Channel 
of Mozambique. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Anton Gils Bay ? 

Ji. It is on the E. coast of Madagascar, opposite Bombetok Bay, 
on the W. coast ; formed by the Indian Ocean. (M. A.) 



AFRICA. 431 

Q. Where is Vohemaire Bay ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Madagascar, N. of Anton Gils Bay ; 
formed by the Indian Ocean. (M. A.) 

CAPES. 

Q. Where is Cape Bon ? 

A. It is the most northerly point of Africa. Lat. 37° 21' N., 
long. 11° 4' E. 

Q. Where is Cape Guardafui 1 

A. It is the most easterly point of Africa. Lat. 1 1° 50' N., 
long. 51° 22' E. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Bassas ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Africa, at the N. extremity of Zan- 
guebar. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Delgado ? 

A. It is on the E. coast of Africa, at the N. extremity of Mo- 
zambique. Lat. 10° 6' S., long. 40° 50' E. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Corrientes ? 

A. It is the S. E. extremity of Mozambique. Lat. 24° 1' S., 
long. 35° 51' E. 

Q. Where is Cape Agulhas ? 

A. It is the most southerly point of Africa. Lat. 34° 50' S. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Cape of Good Hope ? 

A. It is a celebrated promontory near the S. W. extremity of 
the African continent. Lat. 34° 29' S., long. 18° 23' E. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Cross ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Africa. Lat. 20° 6' S. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Frio ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Africa. Lat. 18° 37' S. long. 12° 
25' E. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Palmas ? 

A. It is the most southerly point of Liberia. Lat. 4° 23' N., 
long. 7° 38' W. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Verde ? 

A. It is the most westerly point of Africa. Lat 14° 43' N. t 
long. 17° 32' W. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Blanco ? 

A. It is on the W. coast of Africa. Lat. 20° 46' N., long. 17° 
V W. (M.A.) 

Q. Where is Cape Bojador? 

A. It is a celebrated promontory of the W. coast of Africa, 
Desert of Sahara ; lat. 26° 12' N., long. 14° 26' W. (M. A.) . 

Q. Where is Cape Ambro ? 

A. It forms the northern extremity of Madagascar. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Cape St. Mary ? 

A. It forms the southern extremity of Madagascar. (M. A.) 



432 * AFRICA, 

RIVERS. 

Q. Where is the River Nile ? 

t#. It is a great and celebrated r. of N. E. Africa, flowing 
northerly through Abyssinia, Nubia, and Egypt, and emptying 
into the Mediterranean Sea by two principal mouths at Rosetta 
and Damietta, forming an extensive delta. (M. A.) 

The Nile is formed by the junction of two streams (in 15° 34/ N. iat., and 
32° 31' E. long.), of which one, called the Blue River (Bahr-el-Azrek), rises 
in Abyssinia, in about 11° N. Iat., and 36° 55' E. long; the other, named 
the White River (Bahr-el-Abiad), has its sources considerably farther W., 
probably on the N. declivity of the Mts. of the Moon. These branches, which 
are sometimes denominated the Blue and White Nile, derive their names 
from the colour of their. respective waters ;. those of the Bahr-el-Abiad being 
coloured by a fine white clay which is usually suspended in them. The 
Nile, in the upper part of its course, makes two extensive circuits, which, to- 
gether, rudely resemble on the Map the form of the letter S ; but below the 
cataracts, its general direction is almost N., with comparatively few deviations 
to its entrance in the Mediterranean. 

The whole length of this r., from the highest sources with which we are 
acquainted, is estimated at 2800 ms. From its junction with the Tacazze 
(in 17° 45' N. Iat.) to its termination, a distance of about 1350 ms., the Nile 
does not receive a single affluent on either side ; an instance which is with- 
out a parallel in the geography of the globe. 

Q. Where is the Senegal River ? 

A. It is a large r. of W. Africa, formed by the union of the 
Ba-fing (black-water), and the Ba Woolima, which takes place 
near 14° 10' N. Iat., and 10° 30' W. long. (M. A.) 

The general course of the r. is at first N. W., and afterwards W. : it en- 
ters the Atlantic between 16° and 16° 40' N. Iat., and near 16o 30' W. long., 
a little below the French settlement of St. Louis, after a course estimated at 
1200 ms. 

Till the time of Delisle and D'Anville, the Senegal was considered iden- 
tical with the Niger of the ancients, but it is now ascertained to be wholly 
unconnected either with the Quorra, or Niger, or with the Nilotic system 
of the African continent. Its sources have not been explored ; but Mungo 
Park ascertained that they were separated from the basin of the Niger by, 
most probably, the northern prolongation of the Kong range. 

Q. Where is the Gambia River? 

Ji. It is a r. of W. Africa, which flows through Senegambia 
in a westerly direction, and empties itself into the Atlantic, between 
13° and 14° N. Iat., and near 16° W. long. (M. A.) 

The upper course of this r. has not been explored, but, from information 
obtained from the natives, it is probable that the entire stream has a course 
of about 700 miles. 

Q. Where is the Rio Grande? 

A. It is a r. of W. Africa : it flows W. through Senegambia, 
and enters the Atlantic Ocean by a wide estuary. (M. A.) 
This r., as its name imports, was supposed to be of some magnitude ; but 



AFRICA. 433 

Captain Owen found it a mere inlet, receiving some inconsiderable streams. 
At its mouth occur a number of islands, which, with a group opposite to them, 
in the open sea, form the Archipelago of the Bissagos. 

Q. Where is St. Paul's River ? 

A. It is a r. of W. Africa ; flowing S. W., it forms the boun- 
dary between Senegambia and Upper Guinea, and after passing 
through Liberia, it falls into the Atlantic in about 6° 20' N. lat., 
and 10° 46' W. long. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Niger River ? 

A. The Niger, or duorra, is a r. in the W. part of Africa, hav- 
ing its remote sources in the Kong Mts., in about 9° 30' N. lat., 
and 11° W. long. It thence pursues a general N. E. course to 
Timbuctoo, below which it turns S. E., and afterwards S. and S. 
W., and falls into the Gulf of Guinea, by numerous mouths, in 
about 5° N. lat., and 6° E. long., forming an extensive delta. Its 
supposed length is about 2700 ms. 

This river has been rendered celebrated on account of our ignorance of its 
course and termination, and the various theories which have been formed 
relative to them. The appellation Niger is unknown to the natives, and is 
derived from the ancients. Herodotus, 450 years B. C, speaks of it ; but 
whether it was the river known to the moderns, or some smaller stream in 
the region of the Atlas, is uncertain; and hardly any geographical question 
has excited so much controversy, or has been the cause of so much learned 
disquisition. 

The upper part of the Niger, called by the natives the Joliba, was first 
discovered by Mungo Park, who was sent out in 1795 by the African Asso- 
ciation. He describes it at Sego, the cap. of Bambarra, as " glittering in 
the morning sun, broad as the Thames at Westminster, and flowing slowly 
to the eastward." He ascended it as far as Bammakoo, 250 ms. above 
Sego. In a subsequent journey, made 10 years later, he sailed from San- 
sanding, a short distance below Sego, down the stream probably 1400 ms. to 
Boussa, where, unfortunately, he was killed by the natives. Major Laing con- 
cluded, from information obtained when in Soolimana, that the Niger rises 
on the N. side of the Kong Mountains, at a height of 1600 ft. above the sea, 
and at a distance of about 320 ms. E. N. E. from Sierra Leone. Richard 
Lander, the servant of Captain Clapperton, who died near Saccatoo, pene- 
trated from the coast in company with his brother John, to Boussa, in 1830 ; 
thence they sailed with the stream, to the mouth of the river, previously called 
the Nun, in the bight of Benin ; and thus finally identified the Niger and the 
Quorra, and put an end to the doubts and theories that existed as to its 
course and termination. According to Caillie, it is navigable for large canoes 
within 100 ms. of its source : for 200 ms. below that point it has not been 
navigated by Europeans; but from Bammakoo to Timbuctoo it has been 
pretty accurately laid down, both by Park and Caillie. The current of the 
river is not strong ; and both travellers saw flotillas of canoes of 60 tons and 
upwards, frequently passing up and down the river, which, in the rainy sea- 
son, is flooded on both banks to a considerable distance. In about lat. 16° 
N., the stream expands, forming a lake, called Dibbie or Debo, which is from 
12 to 15 ft. deep. Hence to Timbuctoo the valley becomes still wider ; the 
37 



434 . AFRICA, 

pasturage of cattle, the tillage of rice, millet, maize, <fec, is extensively pur» 
s-ued, and along tbe banks are numerous villages, which export rural pro- 
duce. It has already been observed tbat the course of the river below Tim- 
buctoo was traversed by Park as far down as Boussa ; but, as that traveller 
was killed tbere, and bis papers were lost, we know nothing of this portion of 
the river, except that it is navigable for vessels of considerable size. 

The highest point of what may be called the Lower Niger hitherto visited 
by Europeans is the neighbourhood of Youri (lat. 11° 20 7 X., and 5° E. 
long.). Lower down, the river enters the defiles of a mountain range, sup- 
posed to be the Kong. The direction of the stream from Youri, for about 
150 ms., is nearly due S. ; but it is full of rocks, sand-banks, &c, and wholly 
unnavigable, except at the time of the rains, and immediately after. Eelow 
Boussa, the banks on both sides are generally high and rocky ; cultivated 
plains intervene in many places between the river and the mountains, but in 
others the offsets come closedown to the water's edge. From Boussa down- 
wards, the Niger is navigable for moderate sized vessels ; in lat. 6° X., it 
leaves the hilly country, and enters an alluvial plain, the lower part of which 
is an unhealthy swamp, covered with jungle : many branches here diverge 
from the main stream, and form an extensive delta, which, however, is as 
yet very imperfectly known. At Atta, 150 ms. from the sea, the river is 
about 2 ms. wide, and some distance lower down it attains a width of 5 ms.; 
but its breadth, close to the mouth, is somewhat less than a mile. The tide 
extends about 120 ms. from the sea. The only branch of the Xiger hitherto 
explored is the Tsadda or Cbadda, which joins it on the left bank in about 
400 ms. from the sea. Captain Allen and Mr. Laird sailed 100 ms. up this 
tributary, and found it equal in width, though not in depth, to the parent 
river. It has many shoals and sand-banks. The only other known tribu- 
taries of the Lower Niger are the Saccatoo, MayarTow, and Coodonia, all 
joining it on the E. bank. 

Q. Where is the Congo River ? 

A. The Congo, or Zaire, flows into the Atlantic, in about 6° 
S. lat. In its course it forms the boundary between the kingdoms 
of Loango and Congo PropeT. (M. A.) 

This r. was partially explored by Captain Tuckey, in 1816. Its breadth, 
for some distance from the sea, is not less than 5 or 6 ms. ; at the mouth, no 
bottom was found in the middle of the stream with a line of 160 fathoms. 
He ascended it to the length of 280 ms., and found that it did not receive 
the water of any other stream in the whole of that distance ; hence he was 
inclined to believe that there must be some under-ground communication, 
by which it was supplied with water. 

Q. Where is the Ambriz River ? 

A. It is in the S. W. part of Africa, flows a little S. of W. 
through Congo, and empties into the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Coanza River ? 

A. It is in the S. W. part of Africa, crosses Matemba and An- 
gola, and enters the Atlantic Ocean, in lat. 9° 20' S. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Bembaroughe River ! 

A. It is in the S. W. part of Africa, flows N. W.. and empties 
into the Atlantic Ocean, at Cape Negro. (M. A.) 



AFRICA. 



435 



Q. Where is the Orange River ? 

A. It is in the S. part of Africa, and rises in the Snow Mts., 
whence, having flowed, first S. W. and then W., through rude 
and desert territories, falls into the Atlantic Ocean in about 28° 
30' S. lat., after a course of 1000 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Manice River ? 

A. It is a r. of S. E. Africa, of which but little is known, it 
empties into Delagoa Bay. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Zambeze River ? 

A. It is in the S. E. part of Africa, its upper course is almost 
unknown as far as it has been explored, it flows first N. E., then 
E. S. E., and enters the Channel of Mozambique by four mouths. 
(M. A.) 

The Zambeze may rank in the first class of African rivers, and, according 
to probable information and conjecture, appears to flow across nearly the 
entire breadth of the continent. 

Q. Where is the Ozee River ? 

A. It flows S. E. across Zanguebar, and empties into the 
Indian Ocean. (M. A.) This r. is only known a few miles 
inward. 

Q. Where is the Webbe River ? 

A. It flows S. E. across the N. part of Zanguebar, and empties 
into the Indian Ocean. (M. A.) Its early course is unknown. 

Q. Where is the Yeou River ? 

A. It is in Soudan, rises in the S. part of Houssa, flows first 
N. then E., and falls into Tchad on the W. side. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Shary River ? 

A. It is in the E. part of Soudan. Of its upper course nothing 
is known. As far as it has been explored, it flows first N., and 
then N. W., till it enters Tchad by several mouths. 

Major Denham saw this r. at its mouth, where it was about half a mile 
broad, and flowed at the rate of between two and three miles an hour. Forty 
miles above, it was seen rolling in great majesty and beauty ; but was not 
traced any higher. 

Q. Where is the Misselad River ? 

A. It traverses the country of Bergoo, or Waday, in a north- 
westerly direction, and empties, according to report, into Lake 
Fittre. (M. A.) 

This river is supposed by some to be the Gir of the ancient geographers, 
but by those who believe that the Greeks and Romans had no knowledge of 
Africa, S. of the Great Desert, the Gir is supposed to be a stream in the 
region of the Atlas. The Misselad, or Bahr Misselad, has not been visited 
by any European traveller, consequently nothing is known of it except by 
report. Mr. Browne, when in Dai fur, heard of it as a large river flowing 
N. W. into Lake Fittre; and Burckhardt, when in Sennaar, collected in- 
formation of a considerable stream in the interior, which seems to be the 



436 AFRICA. 

same, he ascertained that a district on its banks is called Dyjr, which has 
some resemblance to the ancient name. 

MOUNTAINS. 

Q. Where are the Atlas Mts. ? 

A. They are a chain of mountains running through the N. W. 
part of Africa, at a distance of from 100 to 130 ms. from the sea. 
(M. A.) 

Its loftiest pinnacles are a short distance E. of the city of Morocco, where 
they appear to rise above the limit of perpetual snow. Mt. Miltsin, the 
highest summit, is estimated to be 11 ,900 ft. above the level of the sea. 

This famous range, which ancient fable represented as supporting the 
heavens, with numerous chains branching from it across the continent, dif- 
fuses moisture and fertility over sands which would otherwise have been 
totally unproductive. 

Q. Where are the Mts. of Kong ? 

A. This chain commences in the interior of Senegambia, and 
appears to stretch across the continent, till it connects with the Mts. 
of the Moon, on the opposite side of Africa. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Mts. of the Moon ? 

A. They are an extensive chain of mts., which cross the cen- 
tral part of Africa, from E. to W. (M. A.) 

The ancient geographers, 2000 years ago, were acquainted with these 
mountains by report, and gave them the name by which they have ever 
since been known. The Arabs have long called them Jibbel-el-Kumri, a 
term which signifies Mts. of the Moon, and which they also perhaps derived 
from the ancient geographical writers. These mts. have not been explored 
by Europeans, hence their exact position is not known. A recent traveller 
doubts their very existence. 

Q. Where are the Crystal Mts. ? 

A. They are in the E. part of Lower Guinea. (M. A.) 
Q. Where are the Lupata Mts. ? 

Ji. They consist of a long chain, in Eastern Africa, which runs 
parallel to the coast. (M. A.) 

The existence of these mts. has been doubted : it is, however, certain, 
that 200 or 300 ms. in the interior, considerable ranges of mountains arise ; 
but Mr. Salt is of opinion that their prolongation beyond the Zambeze is 
arbitrary. 

Q. Where are the Snow Mts. ? 

A. They are in the N. part of Cape Colony, in Southern 
Africa, and extend from 180 to 210 ms. from the coast. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Red Mts. ? 

A. In the S. part of Madagascar. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Radama Mts. ? 

Ji. They are in the N. part of Madagascar, and uniting with the 
Red Mts., intersect the island throughout its whole extent. 
(M. A.) 



AFRICA. 437 

ISLANDS. 

Q. Where are the Azores Islands ? 

A. The Azores, or Western Islands, are situated in the Atlan- 
tic Ocean, W. of Portugal. They consist of three distinct 
groups, lying in the direction of W. N. W. and E. S. E. (M. A.) 

These Islands comprise an archipelago in the Atlantic Ocean, belonging 
to Portugal, from which the nearest island is 900 ms. distant, occupying a 
line of about 320 ms. from E. S. E. to W. N. W., between 36° 59' and 
390 44' N. lat., and 31° 7' and 25° 10' W. long. They form three sub- 
ordinate groups. The first, or Western group, includes Flores and Corvo ; 
the second, or central, Fayal, Pico, St. George, Graciosa, and Terceira ; and 
the third, or Eastern, St. Michael's, the largest of the whole, and St. Mary's. 
The name (Ilhos dos Aqores) is said to be derived from the vast number 
of hawks, called by the natives agor, by which they were frequented at the 
epoch of their discovery. 

The population of these islands is about 250,000. They are divided into 
three departments, and are governed by a governor-general and two lieu- 
tenant-governors. The seat of government is at Angra, in Terceira, but 
Ponte Belgada, in St. Michael's, is the principal town. 

Q. Where are the Madeira Islands ? 

A. They are in the Atlantic Ocean, lying off the W. coast of 
Morocco, and S. W. of Portugal. (M. A.) 

Of the above islands, Madeira is the principal. It is situated between 32° 
36' and 32° 53' N. lat., and 16= 40' and 17° 20' W. long. It is about 37 
ms. in length, and 15 ms. in its greatest breadth. Area computed at above 
300 sq. ms. Pop. estimated at 112,000. The Madeiras belong to Portugal. 

Q. Where are the Canary Islands ? 

A. The Canaries are a group in the Atlantic Ocean, belonging 
to Spain, lying N. and N. W. of Cape Bojador, on the desert 
coast. (M. A.) 

These islands (believed to be the Forlunatse Insulse of the ancients) lie 
between lat. 27° 40' and 29° 30' N., and long. 13° 30' and 18° 20' W. 
Fortaventura, the nearest, is about 80 ms. from the African coast; and 
Palma, the farthest, 260 ms. The principal islands are Teneriffe, Grand 
Canary, Palma, Lanzarota, Fortaventura, Gomera, and Ferro. The area of 
the whole is estimated at 3256 sq. ms. Pop. about 234,000. Santa Cruz, 
in Teneriffe, and Las Palmas, in Grand Canary, are the chief sea-ports ; the 
former is the capital of the whole group. Oratava and Lagunas are the 
other chief towns. 

Besides the foregoing, several small islands, viz., Graciosa, Clara, Alle- 
granza, &c, called the Little Canaries, are situated to the N. W. of Lanza- 
rota, Ferro, or Hiero, the most southerly and westerly of the Canaries, ha^ 
acquired considerable celebrity, from its having been selected by the early 
geographers as the first meridian, or the point from which they began to 
reckon longitude. 

Q. Where are the Cape Verde Islands ? 
A. They are in the Atlantic Ocean, lying off the W. coast of 
Africa, opposite Cape Verde. (M. A.) 
37* 



438 * AFRICA. 

The Cape Verde Islands (Ilhas Verdas), so called by the Portuguese, be- 
cause the sea to the W. of them is covered with gulf-weed, so as to present 
some resemblance to extensive meadows. This group is about 300 ms. from 
the W. coast of Africa, between 14° 17' and 17° 19' N. lat., and 22° 10' 
and 25° 30' W. long. There are 14 islands; 9 of them are inhabited, of 
which St. Jago, St. Nicolas, Bonavista, and St. Antonio, are the most im- 
portant. They belong to Portugal. Pop. 88,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Fernando Po Island ? 

A. It is in the Gulf of Guinea, lying about 20 ms. W. from 
Lower Guinea. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Prince's Island ? 

A. It is in the Gulf of Guinea, lying S. S. W. from Fernando 
Po Island. It belongs to Portugal. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is St. Thomas's Island ? 

A. It is in the Gulf of Guinea, lying S. S. W. of Prince's 
Island, and under the Equator. It belongs to Portugal. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Annobon Island ? 

A. It is in the Gulf of Guinea, lying S. S. W. of St. Thomas's 
Island. It belongs to Portugal. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Ascension Island 1 

A. It is in the S. Atlantic Ocean, lying W. of Africa and 
N. W. of St. Helena. It belongs to Great Britain. (M. A.) 

Ascension, an island in the Atlantic Ocean, 1200 ms. W. of the coast of 
Africa, about 8 ms. in length, by 6 in breadth, its fort being in lat. 7° 26' N., 
long. 14° 24' W. It is of volcanic formation, and one of its hills, of tufous 
limestone, rises to the height of about 2800 ft. It has a bleak and barren 
appearance ; and was uninhabited till the imprisonment of Napoleon at St. 
Helena, when it was garrisoned by a small British force, through whose 
exertions it has been partly cultivated and wonderfully improved. Springs 
of fresh water have been discovered. Vast numbers of turtle are taken on 
its shores. The climate is remarkably healthy, and the anchorage, though 
open, is said to be good. The object in occupying it is, that it may serve as 
a depot for stores, and a place for watering ships cruising on the coast of 
Brazil or in the South Atlantic Ocean. Its name is derived from its having 
been discovered on Ascension-day, the 20th of May, 1501, by a Spanish 
navigator in the service of Portugal. 

Q. Where is the Island of St. Helena ? 

A. It is in the S. Atlantic Ocean, lying W. from the coast of 
Benguela, and S. E. from Ascension Island. It belongs to Great 
Britain. (M. A.) 

This island will be always famous as the scene of Napoleon's imprison- 
ment and death. It belongs to Great Britain, and is situated 1200 ms. 
W. from the S. part of Benguela, in lat. 15° 15' S., long. 5° 46' W. 
Length, 10^ ms.; breadth, 6^ ms. ; area, 47 sq. ms. Pop. about 5000, of 
whom nearly a half are whites. 

Q. Where is the Ethiopian Archipelago 1 
A. It is in the Indian Ocean, off the E. coast of Africa. 
(M. A.) 



AFRICA. 439 

Q. Where are the Mascarenha Islands ? 

A. They are in the Indian Ocean, off the E. coast of Mada- 
gascar. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Island of Mauritius ? 

A. It is one of the Mascarenhas, situated in the Indian Ocean, 
E. of Madagascar, and N. E. of the Isle of Bourbon. (M. A.) 

This island, which belongs to Great Britain, is between 19° 58' and 20° 
32' S. lat., and 57° 17' and 57° 46' E. long., 80 ms. E. N.E. of Bour- 
bon Island, and 500 ms. E. of Madagascar. It is an irregular oval ; length, 
about 36 ms. ; breadth varying from 18 to 27 ms. Area estimated at 780 
sq. ms. Pop. about 95,000. 

Q. Where is Bourbon Island ? 

A. It is one of the Mascarenhas, situated in the Indian Ocean, 
E. of Madagascar, and S. W. of the Island of Mauritius. (M. A.) 

Bourbon, an island belonging to France, lies between lat. 20° 50' and 
21° 24' S., being 440 ms. E. of Madagascar. Shape, oval; greatest length, 
40 ms. ; greatest breadth, 27 ms. ; area near 900 sq. ms. Pop. about 110,000. 

Q. Where are the Seychelle Islands ? 

Ji. They consist of a small group, belonging to Great Britain, 
in the Indian Ocean, off the E. coast of Africa. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Almirante Islands 1 

A. They are a small group, belonging to Great Britain, in the 
Indian Ocean, lying S. W. from the Seychelle Islands. (M. A.) 

Q. Where are the Comoro Islands 1 

A. They are a group of four islands in the Indian Ocean, lying 
between the N. end of the Island of Madagascar and.the African 
continent. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Monfia Island ? 

A. It is in the Indian Ocean, near the coast of Zanguebar ; it 
is subject to Muscat. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Zanzibar Island 1 

A. It is in the Indian Ocean, near the coast of Zanguebar, 
situated between the Islands of Pemba and Monfia. It is subject 
to Muscat. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Pemba Island ? 

A. It is in the Indian Ocean, near the coast of Zanguebar, and 
N. of Zanzibar. It is subject to Muscat. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is Socotra Island ? 

Ji. It is in the Indian Ocean, lying S. of Arabia, and E. of 
Cape Guardafui, in Africa. It is subject to Keshin. (M. A.) 

Socotra (anc. Dioscoridas Insula), is situated about 230 ms. from the E. 
coast of Arabia, and 120 ms. E. of Cape Guardafui, in Africa; its chief 
town being in lat. 12° 39' N., long. 54° 6' E. Area estimated by Mr. Well- 
sted at 1000 sq. ms. Pop. probably 5000, principally Bedouins, with some 
Arabs, African slaves, and descendants of Portugese. 



440 AFRICA. 

DESERTS. 

Q. Where is the Great Desert ? 

A, It is an immense ocean of sand which overspreads nearly 
the whole northern half of Africa. Its actual and almost uninter- 
rupted extent maybe stated as reaching from the 15th to the 30th 
deg. of N. lat., and from the 30th of E. to the 15th of W. long. 
It may thus amount to nearly 3000 ms. in length, and 1000 in 
breadth. (M. A.) 

The Sahara, or Great Desert, forms an immense range of territory, which 
would, indeed, cover the whole northern half of Africa, but for the partial 
exemption produced by the mountain range of Atlas, and the course of the 
Nile. This vast expanse, the most dreary and terrible on the face of the 
earth, forms an obstacle to the intercourse of nations greater than is opposed 
by the widest oceans. Yet the daring spirit of enterprise has induced human 
beings to occupy every extremity or corner in which subsistence could by any 
means be procured ; and they have formed routes by which, though amid 
suffering and deadly peril, regular journeys may be performed across this vast 
and desolate region. 

The surface of the Sahara does not consist entirely of one uniform plain 
of sand. In the most level tracts it has been blown into heaps or hillocks, 
steep on one side, which remarkably increase both the dreary aspect of the 
region, and the difficulties with which the traveller has to contend. In other 
places it is traversed by dark ranges of naked rock, which sometimes ap- 
proach so close as to leave only a narrow path for caravans to march through. 
The terrible spectacle of human bones which strew the ground, and some- 
times crackle unexpectedly beneath the tread of the traveller or his camel, 
lends, at intervals, additional horror to the scene. The most dangerous en- 
counter is that of the sand wind, when the sand, blown up by tempests from 
an extensive moving surface, fills and darkens the air, and threatens to suffo- 
cate the passenger. Yet some covert can generally be found during its fury ; 
and the disasters indicated by the bones which whiten the desert appear to 
arise almost solely from the failure of provisions, and particularly of water. 
The privation falls always first upon the slaves, who on such occasions perish 
in great numbers. 

The most remarkable and important feature, however, which diversifies 
the Great African Desert, consists in the Oases. This eastern term, which 
signifies island, is very appropriately given to those detached spots, over 
which springs, bursting forth amid the desert, diffuse some partial verdure and 
fertility. The view of these spots inspires travellers with emotions peculiarly 
pleasing ; sometimes from mere contrast with the encircling desolation, but 
sometimes also from the peculiarly elegant landscape which they themselves 
present. They are embellished with flowering shrubs of singular beauty ; 
whole tracts are covered with forests of acacia, from which rich gums distil, 
and with groves of the date and lotus, yielding sweet fruits and berries, 
which form the food of whole tribes. These districts on a great scale, 
occur chiefly on the northern and southern borders, where the desert gene- 
rally mitigates its stern aspect, and imbibes some portion of that moisture 
which fertilizes Central Africa and the region of Atlas. 



MOROCCO. 441 

Q. Where is the Libyan Desert ? 

A. It is in the N. E. part of Africa, lying between Egypt and 
the Oasis of Fezzan. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Nubian Desert ? 

A. It is in Nubia, situated between the R. Nile and the Red 
Sea. (M. A.) 

Q. Where is the Desert of Challahengah ?* 

A. It is in the S. part of Africa, extending N. W. from the 
Boshuana country, and crossed by the Tropic of Capricorn. 
(M. A.) 

TROPICS, ZONES, &C 

Q. What three great circles pass through Africa ? 

A. Tropic of Cancer, Equator, and Tropic of Capricorn ? 

Q. In what zones is Africa situated ? 

A. Torrid, and Temperate. 

Q. In what zone is it mostly ? 

A. Torrid. 

Africa contains 37 degrees of north and 35 of south latitude. 

Q. In what latitude then is it mostly ? 

A. North. 

It contains 50 degrees of east and 18 of west longitude. 

Q. In what longitude then is it chiefly ? 

A. East. 



MOROCCO. 
Page 308.— Lesson 201.— Map No. 25. 

Q. What bounds Morocco on the north ? 

A. Mediterranean Sea. 

Q. South? 

A. Great Desert. 

Q. East? 

A. Algiers, the Beled-el-Jerid, and the Great Desert. 

Q. What strait separates it from Spain ? 

A. Gibraltar. 

Q. What islands lie west of Morocco ? 

A. Madeira, and Canary. 

Q. What mountains extend through Morocco ? 

A. Atlas. 

Q. Which is the principal peak ? 

A. Mt. Miltsin. 

Q. How high is it ? 

A. 11,900 ft. (M. A.) 

* Called also the Karri-Harri Desert. (M. G.) 



44*2 ALGIERS TUNIS. 

Q. What is the population of Morocco ? 

A. 76,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Fez ? 

A. 80,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Mequinez? 

A. 60,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Rabat? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Mogadore ? 

^. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Santa Cruz? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. How far is it from Morocco to Florida ? 

A. 4200. (M. A.) 

For a further description of Morocco, see Key, page 418, 



ALGIERS, OR ALGERIA. 
Page 310.— Lesson 202.— Map No. 25. 

Q. What bounds Algiers on the north ? 

.#. Mediterranean Sea. 

Q. South? 

./?. Beled-elJerid. 

Q. East? 

^. Tunis. 

<£. West? 

A. Morocco. 

Q. What mountains are in the south ? 

A. Atlas. 

Q. How long are they ? 

^. 1400 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Algiers ? 

A. 60,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Constantine ? 

^. 25,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Bona? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

<?. Oran ? 

A. 6000. (M. A.) 
For a further description of Algiers, see Key, page 419. 

TUNIS, &c. 

Q. What bounds Tunis on the north ? 

A. Mediterranean Sea. 

Q. South? 

A. Beled-elJerid. 



TRIPOLI BARCA. 443 

Q. East? 

A. Mediterranean Sea, and Tripoli. 

Q. West? 

A, Algiers. 

Q. What cape on the north ? 

A. Bon. (M. A.) 

Q. What lake in the south ? 

A, Lowdeah. 

Q. What is the population of Tunis ? 

A. 100,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Kairwan? 

A. 30,000. (M. A.) 

For a further description of Tunis, see Key, page 419. 

TRIPOLI. 

Q. What bounds Tripoli on the north ? 

A. Mediterranean Sea. 

Q. South? # 

A. Great Desert. 

Q. West? 

A. Tunis, and Beled-el-Jerid. 

Q. What gulf separates Tripoli from Barca ? 

A. Sidra. 

Q. What is the population of Tripoli ? 

A. 25,000. (M. A.) 

For a further description of Tripoli, see Key, page 419. 

BARCA. 

Q. What bounds Barca on the north ? 

A. Mediterranean Sea. 

Q. South? 

A. Libyan Desert. 

Q. East? 

A. Egypt. 

Q. West? 

A. Gulf of Sidra. 

Barca is a district of North Africa, forming the E. portion of Tripoli, 
extending from 30|° to nearly 33o N. lat., and from 20° to 25^° E. long. 
The limits are, however, uncertain towards the S. and E. ; in the former 
direction, terminating in the Libyan desert, and in the latter, being divided 
from Egypt by tribes of Bedouins. On the N. Barca is bounded by the 
Mediterranean Sea, and on the W. by the Gulf of Sidra (the Syrtis Magna 
of the ancients). It extends 200 ms. from N. to S., but the cultivated portion 
terminates at about the 31st parallel, or 120 ms. only, from the farthest N. 
point of the coast. The greatest length, from E. to W., is about 330 ms. j 
and the area may be estimated at about 48,000 sq. ms. 



444 BELED-EL-JER1D EGYPT. 

BELED-EL JERID, &c. 

Page 312.— Lesson 200.— Map No. 16. 

Q. How is the Beled-el-Jerid bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Algiers ; E. by Tunis and Tripoli ; S. 
by the Sahara Desert ; and W. by Morocco. (M. A.) 

Q. How is the Great Desert bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. W. and N. by the Barbary States ; E. by 
Egypt and Nubia ; S. by Darfur, Bergoo or Waday, Soudan, and 
Senegambia ; and W. by the Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. What tribes are in the centre ? 

A. Tuaricks, and Tibboos. 

Q. On the west ? 

A. The Mongearts, Wadelims, Trasarts, and Braknaks. 

Q. What salt-mines are in the Great Desert ? 

A. Taudeny, Tisheet, and Aroan. 

Q. What Oases are in the Great Desert ? 

A. Fezzan, Tibesty, Bilmah, AgdassfiTuat, Augela, Siwah, El 
Dakhel, and El Khargeh. 

Q. What country in the south ? 

A. Ludamar. 

Q. How long and wide is the Great Desert ? 

A. 3000 ms. long, and 1000 wide. (M. A.) 

Q. What capes are on the coast ? 

A. Bojador, and Blanco. 

Q. How far is it to Mexico ? 

A. 5200 ms. 

Q. To Cuba? 

A. 3600 ms. 



EGYPT. 
Page 314.— Lesson 204.— Map No. 26. 

Q. What bounds Egypt on the north ? 

A. Mediterranean Sea. 

Q. South? 

A. Nubia. 

Q. East? 

A. Red Sea. 

Q. West? 

A. Great Desert. 

Q. What river flows through Egypt ? 

A. Nile. 

Q. How long is it ? 

A. 2800 ms. (M. A.) 



NUBIA. 445 

Q. What isthmus connects Egypt with Arabia ? 

A. Suez. 

Q. How wide is it ? 

A. 50 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the country at the mouth of the Nile called ? 

A. Delta. 

Q. What is a Delta I 

A. It is a term applied to those districts embraced by the out- 
lets of rivers. (M. G., p. 72.) 

Q. What is the population of Cairo ? 

A. 300,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Damietta? 

A. 25,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Alexandria? 

A. 60,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Siout? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Rosetta? 

A. 15,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cosseir ? 

A. 6000. (M. A.) 

Q. Suez? 

^. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. What three oases are included in Egypt ? 

A. Siwah, El Dakhel, and El Khargeh. 

Q. What do you observe on the west side of the Nile near 
Cairo ? * 

A. The Pyramids. 

Q. What ruins are in the south part of Egypt ? 

A. Ruins of Thebes. 

For a further description of Egypt, see Key, page 420, 



NUBIA, &c. 
Page 316.— Lesson 205.— Map No. 25. 

Q. How is Nubia bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by Egypt ; E. by the Red Sea ; S. by 
Abyssinia and the country of the Shilluks ; and W. by the Desert 
of Libya. (M. A.) 

For a further description of Nubia, see Key, page 420. 

Q. What river in Nubia ? 

A. The Nile. 

Q. What desert? 

A. Nubian. 

Q. What is the population of Khartoom 7 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 
38 



416 



ABYSSINIA. 



Q. Sennaar? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Suakem ? 

A. 5000. (M.A.) 

Q. Shendy? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. New Dongola ? 

A. 5000. (M. A.) 

Q. Derr? 

A. 2000. (M. A.) 

ABYSSINIA. 

Q. What bounds Abyssinia on the north ? 
A. Nubia. 
Q. South? 

A. Ethiopia, and the kingdom of Adel. 
Q. East? 
A. Red Sea. 
Q. West? 

A. The country of the Shilluks. 
Q. What lake in the centre ? 
.#. Dembea. 

Q. What river flows from it? 
A. The Bahr-el Azrek (or Abawi) . 
Q. What is the population of Gondar? 
A. 6000. (M.A.) 
Q. Antaio? 
A. 10,000. (M. A.) 
#. Massuah? 
A. 8000. (M. A.) 
Q. Axum? 
A. 3000. (M.A.) 

Q. What countries lie west of the Nile? 
A. Kordofan, Darfur, and Bergoo. 
Q. South of Darfur? 
A. Fertit, and Donga. 
Q. What river flows through Bergoo ? 
A. Misselad. 

Q. The capitals of these countries ? 

A. Kordofan, Ibeit ; Darfur, Cobbe ; Bergoo, Wara. (M. A.) 
Q. The population of Cobbe ? 
A. 4000. (M. A.) 
Q. What towns are on the Nile ? 

A. In Nubia there are Derr, New Dongola, Old Dongola, 
Meravve, El Makkarif, and Shendy. (M. A.) 



SENEGAMBIA. 



447 



Q. On the Bahr-el-Azrek ? (or Abawi.) 

A. In Nubia there is Sennaar and Khartoom. (M. A.) 

For a further description of Abyssinia, see Key, page 421. 



SENEGAMBIA,&c. 
Page 318.— Lesson 206.— Maps Nos. 25 and 27. 

Map No. 25. — Q. How is Senegambia bounded ? 

.#. It is bounded N. by the Sahara Desert ; E. by Soudan ; 
S. E. and S. by Upper Guinea, and Liberia ; and S. W. and W. 
by the British Colony of Sierra Leone, and the Atlantic Ocean. 
(M. A.) 

Q. Which rivers are the principal ? 

A. Senegal, Gambia, Niger, and Rio Grande. 

Q. How long are the first three ? 

A. The Senegal is 1200 ms. long ; Gambia, 700 ; Niger, 2700. 
(M.A.) 

Q. What cape on the west ? 

A. Verde. 

Q. On the south ? 

A. Palmas. (This forms the S. extremity of Liberia). 

Q. What French settlement on the Senegal River ? 

A. St. Louis. 

Q. British settlement on the Gambia ? 

A. Bathurst. 

Q. What settlement on the Rio Grande ? 

A. Portuguese. 

Q. What islands lie west of Cape Verde ? 

A. Cape Verde Islands ? 

Q. What British Colony in the south ? 

A. Sierra Leone. 

Senegambia is a name given by geographers to a region on the W. coast 
of Africa. Originally it was applied to the countries settled by Europeans, 
between the Senegal and Gambia Rivers ; but it is now used to designate the 
whole of that part of Africa which is W. of Soudan, and between the Great 
Desert and Guinea, lying between the I Oth and 17th parallels of N. lat., 
and the 6th and 18th meridians of W. long. 

It would be difficult and almost idle to attempt to fix the limits of this 
vast territory ; but they may be stated at about 250 ms. along the coast, and 
reaching 500 into the interior. It is divided among a vast variety of little 
kingdoms, whose boundaries and condition are continually varying. This 
part of Africa is most remarkable for the great negro races who inhabit it, 
and who are in general more peaceable, more industrious, and more amiable 
than any of the others upon the western coast. They are chiefly three, the 
Foulahs, the Mandingoes, and the Jalofs. 



448 



^ERIA UPPER AND LOWER GUINEA. 



LIBERIA.— M*p No.%7. 

Q. What are the principal rivers of Liberia ? 

A. Gallinas, Pissou, St. Paul's, St. John's, Cestros, and Sinou. 

Q. How long is the St. Paul's River ? 

A. 300 ms. 

Q. Which is the most northern cape ? 

A. Mount. 

Q. Southern ? 

A. Palmas. 

There are nine colonial towns. 

Q. Which are they ? 

A. Caldwell, Millsburg, New Georgia, Edina, Bexley, Bassa 
Cove, Louisiana Colony, Greenville, and Harper. (M. A.) 

Q. Native towns ? 

A. Sugaree, Trade Town, and the three Kroo towns, belonging 
to the Kroos or Krooraen. (M. A.) 

Q. What Colony at Cape Palmas ? 

A. Maryland Colony. 

Q. At the St. John's River ? 

A. Pennsylvania Colony. 

Q. Near what cape is the town of Monrovia ? 

A. Cape Mesurado. 

For a further description of Liberia, see Key, page 422, 



UPPER AND LOWER GUINEA. 

Page 320.— Lesson 207.— Map No. 25. 

Q. What bounds Upper Guinea on the north ? 

A. Soudan. 

Q. South? 

A. Gulf of Guinea. 

Q. East? 

A. Lower Guinea. 

Q. West? 

A. Senegambia, and Liberia. 

Q. What mountains on the north ? 

A. Kong. 

Q. What is the population of Coomassie ? 

A. 25,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Abomey? 

A. 24,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Benin? 

A. 15,000. (M. A.) 

Q. How is Lower Guinea bounded ? 

A, It is bounded N. by Soudan ; E. and S. by unexplored 



SOUTHERN AFRICA. 449 

'tjgions ; and W. by Upper Guinea, the Gulf of Guinea, and the 
Atlantic Ocean. (M. A.) 

Q. Which are its rivers? 

A. Congo, Ambriz, Coanza, and Bembaroughe. (M. A.) 

Q. Mountains. 

A. Crystal. 

Q. What islands in the Gulf of Guinea ? 

A. Fernando Po, Prince's, St. Thomas's, and Annobon. 

Q. To what power do the last three belong? 

A. To Portugal. 

Q. What river divides Upper from Lower Guinea ? 

A. The Niger. 

Q. What is the population of Loango ? 

A. 15,000. (M. A.) 

Q. St. Salvador ? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

Q. St. Paul de Loando ? 

A. 3000. (M. A.) 

Q. How far is it from Guinea to Brazil ? 

A. 4200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From Angola to Brazil ? 

A. 3300 ms. (M. A.) 

Guinea is a name applied by European geographers to designate a por- 
tion of the W. coast of Africa. The origin of the word is not certainly as- 
certained, nor are writers agreed respecting the limits of coast to which the 
name should extend. D'Anville, and the older geographers, apply it to the 
line of coast from the Gambia to the Niger; whereas Ritter, and other more 
modern authors, extend its confines from C. Verga, lat. 10° 3(K N., to the 
mouth of Nourse's River, lat. 17° S., and call the district S. of C. Lopez, 
lat. 5° S., comprising Congo, Angola, and Benguela, by the name of S. 
Guinea; while under N. Guinea, or Guinea Proper, are comprehended 
Sierra Leone, Liberia, the Grain, Ivory and slave Coast, Ashantee, Dahomey, 
Benin, and Biafra. The description of this extensive line of coast, will be 
found under the heads of the countries above mentioned, in this Key. 



SOUTHERN AFRICA. 

Page 322.— Lesson WS.—Map No. 25. 

Q. What countries lie south of the Tropic of Capricorn ? 

A. Hottentots, Boshuanas, Cape Colony, and Caffraria. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the most southern cape ? 

A. Agulhas. 

Q. What other cape ? 

A. Good Hope. 

Q. What rivers in this region ? 

A. Orange, Koussie, Great Kei, St. Lucia, and Manice. (M. A.) 
38* 



450 EASTERN AFRICA. 

Q. How long is the first ? 

A. 1000 ms. (Orange R.) (M. A.) 

Q. What mountains ? 

A. Snow. 

Q. How high are they ? 

A. 10,000 ft. (M. A.) 

Q. What desert extends N. W. from the Boshuana country ? 

A. Desert of Challahengah, or Karri-Harri. (M. A.) 

Q. How far from Cape Colony to Swan River Colony ? 

A. 5200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What is the population of Kurreechane ? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Mashow? 

A. 10,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Lattakoo? 

A. 6000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cape Town ? 

A. 25,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Graham's Town? 

A. 3000. (M. A.) 

EASTERN AFRICA. 

Page 324.— Lesson 209.— -Map No. 25. 

Q. What gulf separates Berbera from Arabia ? 

A. Gulf of Aden. 

Q. What capes on the coast of Ajan ? 

A. Guardafui, Orfui, and Bassas. 

Q. How far is it from Ajan to Ceylon ? 

A. 1800 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What country of Zanguebar lies north of the Equator ? 

A. Magadoxa. 

Q. Which lie south ? 

A. Melinda, Mombas, and Gluiloa. 

Q. How far from Zanguebar to Sumatra ? 

A. 4000 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What rivers are in Zanguebar ? 

A. Webbe, and Ozee. 

Q. In Mozambique 1 

A. Zambeze, and Manice. 

Q. What mountains ? 

A. Lupata. 

Q. Capes? 

A. Delgado, and Corrientes. 

Q. What Channel separates Mozambique from Madagascar ? 

A. The Channel of Mozambique. 



SOUDAN AFRICAN ISLANDS, 



451 



SOUDAN. 
Page 326.— Lesson 210.— Map No. 25. 

Q. How is Soudan bounded ? 

A. It is bounded N. by the Great Desert ; E. by Bergoo or 
Waday, and other unknown countries ; S. by the Mts. of the 
Moon, and Lower and Upper Guinea ; and W. by Senegambia. 
(M. A.) 

Soudan, or Bel-ed es Sou-dan, i. e. the " country of the blacks," a name 
employed to designate all the countries along the S. border of the Great 
Desert, from Darfur on the E. to Senegambia on the W., extending from 
about 25° E. to 10° W. long. Its limits, on the N. and S., are almost 
entirely unknown. 

Q. What are its rivers ? 

A. Niger, Yeou, Shary, Tsadda, and Bagoe or White. (M. A.) 

Q. How long is the first ? 

A. 2700 ms. (Niger.) (M. A.) 

Q. What lakes are in Soudan ? 

A. Tchad, Fittre, and Dibbie. 

Q. How long is the first ? 

A. 200 ms. (Tchad.) (M. A.) 

Q. What mountains ? 

A. Kong, and Moon. 

Q. What is the population of Sego ? 

A. 30,000. (M. A.) 

Jenne ? 

15,000. (M. A.) 

Timbuctoo ? 

12,000. (M. A.) 

Soccatoo ? 

60,000. (M. A.) 



A. 

Q. 
A. 

Q. 
A. 

Q- 
A. 

Q- 
A. 

Q- 
A. 

Q- 
A. 

Q. 
A. 



Kano? 
30,000. 
Zaria ? 
40,000. 
Boussa 1 
12,000. 
Bornou ? 
10,000. 
Angornou ? 
30,000. 



(M. A.) 

(M. A.) 
(M. A.) 



AFRICAN ISLANDS. 
Page 327. —Lesson 211.— Map No. 25. 

Q. Tell the population of the following islands, and the nations 
to which they belong: Azores, Madeira, Canary, Cape Verde, 



452 OCEANICA — MALAYSIA. 

Ascension, St. Helena, Mauritius, Bourbon, Almirante, and Sey- 
chelle. 

A. Azore Islands, 250,000 — to Portugal; Madeira Islands, 
112,000— to Portugal ; Canary Islands, 234,000— to Spain ; Cape 
Verde Islands, 88,000 — to Portugal ; Ascension Islands, 250 — to 
Great Britain; St. Helena, 5000 — to Great Britain; Mauritius 
Islands, 95,000 — to Great Britain ; Bourbon Islands, 1 10,000 — to 
France ; Almirante Islands, 7000 — to Great Britain ; Seychelle 
Islands, 7000 — to Great Britain. 

The above pop. is taken from Mitchell's Atlas. 

Q. What is the population of Madagascar ? 

A. 4,500,000. (M. A.) 

Q. How long is it ? 

A. 1000 ms. (M.A.) 

Q. What is its northern cape ? 

A. Ambro. 

Q. Southern? 

A. St. Mary. 

Q. How far from Madagascar to Australia? 

A. 5200 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What islands lie west of Madagascar ? 

A. Comoro. 

Q. What islands belong to Muscat ? 

A. Pemba, Zanzibar, and Monfia. 

Q. What island belongs to Keshin ? 

A. Socotra. 



OCEANICA. 

Oceanica is considered the fifth great division of the globe. It comprises 
nearly all the islands lying S. of Asia, together with the greater part of those 
in the Pacific Ocean, situated between Asia and America. It extends from 
lat. 40° N. to 50° S. ; and long. 95° E. to 108° W. ; including 90° of lati- 
tude, and 160° of longitude; being 11,000 miles in length, from E. to W., 
and 6200 in width, from N. to S. Oceanica comprehends more than a fourth 
part of the entire surface of the globe. Its land surface is estimated at 
4,500,000 sq. ms. Pop. upwards of 20,000,000. The chief divisions of 
Oceanica are Malaysia, Australasia, and Polynesia. 



MALAYSIA. 
Page 331.— Lesson 213.— Map No. 28. 

Malaysia, or the East Indian Archipelago, is the N. W. division of 
Oceanica. It comprises the islands lying immediately S. and S. E. of Asia, 
the principal of which are the Sunda Isles, or Sumatra, Java, and Borneo, 



MALAYSIA- 



453 



the Celebes, the Moluccas or Spice Islands, and the Philippines, besides other 
smaller groups and islands. Area estimated at 730,000 sq. ms. Pop. almost 
19,000,000. 



A. 

Q- 

A. 

Q. 

A. 

Q- 

A. 

Q- 
A. 

Q. 

A. 

Q. 
A. 

Q. 

A. 

Q- 

A. 

Q. 

A. 

Q- 
A. 

Q- 

A. 

Q- 
A. 



What great circle passes through the middle of Ma' 

Equator. 

In what Zone is Malaysia ? 

Torrid. 

ISLANDS. 

How long is Sumatra ? 

1000 ms. (M. A.) 

Java ? 

600 ms. (M. A.) 

Celebes ? 

700 ms. (M. A.) 

Luzon ? 

460 ms. (M. A.) 

Mindanao ? 

340 ms. (M. A.) 

How long and wide is Borneo ? 

800 ms. long, 700 wide. (M. A.) 

What is the population of Sumatra ? 

4,000,000. (M. A.) 

Java? 

7,000,000. (M. A.) 

Borneo ? 

3,000,000. (M. A.) 

Celebes ? 

1,000,000. (M. A.) 

Philippine Islands ? 

2,500,000. (M. A.) 



POPULATION OF TOWNS, &C. 

(M. A.) 
A.) 



Q, Manilla? 

A. 180,000. 

Q. Batavia? 

A. 60,000. (M. 

Q. Samarang? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Acheen? 

A. 30,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Palambang? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

STRAITS. 

Q. What strait separates Sumatra from Malacca ? 

A. Malacca. 

Q. Sumatra from Java ? 

A, Straits of Sunda, 



454 AUSTRALASIA. 

Q. Borneo from Celebes ? 

A. Macassar. 

Q. How wide are the straits of Sunda ? 

A. 30 ms. (M. A.) 



AUSTRALASIA. 

Page 334.— Lesson 2H.—Map No. 28. 

Attstb.ai.asia is the S. W. division of Oceanica. It contains about three- 
fourths of its land surface, and lies wholly S. of the equator. It includes 
Australia, or New Holland, Van Dieman's Land, or Tasmania, New Zea- 
land, New Guinea, New Britain, New Ireland, Solomon's Archipelago, New 
Hebrides, New Caledonia, besides others of less importance. Area estimated 
at 3,500,000 sq. ms. Pop. 1,335,000. About a fifth part of the inhabitants 
of Australasia are of European origin. 

Q. What great circle forms the north boundary of Australasia ? 

A. Equator. 

Q. What tropic crosses Australasia ? 

A. Tropic of Capricorn 1 

Q. In what zones is Australasia? 

A. Torrid, and South Temperate. 

Q. How long and wide are Australia and V. Diemen's Land ? 

A. Australia is 2600 ms. long, and 1900 wide ; Van Diemen's 
Land, 200 ms. long, and 150 wide. (M. A.) 

Australia, now often called the Australian Continent, and formerly known 
as New Holland, is the largest island in the world. It extends from lat. 1 1° 
to 39° S., and from long. 113° to 153° E. ; being twenty-five times larger 
than the British Islands; and but little inferior in area to the whole of Eu- 
rope. Of a large portion of this great region we are acquainted only with 
the coasts. In the S. W. and S. E. parts of the Island the British Australian 
settlements are established ; but a small portion of the country, however, is 
actually occupied by the colonists. 

Q. How long are New Guinea and the two largest islands of 
New Zealand ? 

A. New Guinea is 1200 ms. long ; Tavai Poenammoo, 500 ; 
Eahei Nomauwe, 450. (M. A.) 

Q. What strait separates Australia and New Guinea ? 

A. Torres'. 

Q. Australia and Van Diemen's Land ? 

A. Bass'. 

Q. How wide are they ? 

A. Torres' Strait is 120 ms. wide ; Bass', 130. (M. A.) 

Q. What island is inhabited by convicts from N. South Wales ? 

A. Norfolk. 

Q. What is the population of the Botany Bay Colony ? 

A. 120,000. (M. A.) 



TOLYNESIA. 455 

Q. Van Diemen's Land ? 

A. 50,000. (M. A.) 

Q. South Australia ? 

A. 16,000. (M. A.) 

Q. New Hebrides ? 

^. 200,000. (M. A.) 

Q. New Caledonia ? 

w£. 50,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Swan River Colony ? 

A. 4000. (M. A.) 

#. Sydney ? 

^. 30,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Hobart Town ? 

A. 13,000. (M. A.) 

#. How far is it from Hobart Town to London ? 

A. 13,000. (M. A.) 

Q. To New York? 

A. 13,600. (M. A.) 

Q. Name the New Zealand Isles ? 

A, New Ulster, New Munster, and New Leinster. 



POLYNESIA. 
Page 336.— Lesson 215.— Map No. 28. 
Polynesia, « many islands" is the term used to designate that division 
of Oceanica which extends nearest to America. This region lies on both 
sides of the equator, and comprises a vast number of groups and single islands. 
It is the largest section of Oceanica, and comprises almost two-thirds of its 
area, but consists mostly of water ; in actual land surface and population it 
is greatly inferior to either of the other divisions. The area of all the islands 
of Polynesia is estimated at 150,000 sq. ms. Pop. 640,000. 

Q. What great circles pass through Polynesia ? 

A. Tropic of Cancer, Equator, and Tropic of Capricorn. 

Q. In what zones is Polynesia ? 

A. North Temperate, Torrid, and South Temperate. 

Q. What is the population of the Sandwich Islands ? 

A. 150,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Washington Islands ? 

A. 8000. (M. A.) 

Q. Marquesas Islands ? 

A. 7000. (M. A.) 

Q. Society and Georgian Islands ? 

A. 20,000. (M. A.) 

Q. Paumotu Islands ? 

A. 4000. (M. A.) 

Q. Cook's Islands ? 

A. 18,000. (M. A.) 



456 ' POLYNESIA. 

Q. Austral Islands ? 

A. 4000. (M. A.) 

Q. Navigator's Islands ? 

A. 160,000. (M.A.) 

Q. Vavou ? 

A. 4000. (M. A.) 

Q. Habaii Islands ? 

.#. 4000. (M. A.) 

Q. Tonga Islands? 

A. 10,000. (M.A.) 

Q. Fejee Islands ? 

^. 100,000. (M.A.) 

Q. Gambier Islands ? 

.#. 1000. (M. A.) 

Q. Pitcairn's Island ? 

A. 100. (M. A.) 

Q. Easter Island ? 

A. 1200. (M. A.) 

Q. How far is it from the Sandwich Islands to London ? 

A. 15,000 ms. (M.A.) 

Q. To New York ? 

A. 15,600 ms. (M.A.) 

Q. To the coast of Mexico ? 

A. 3200ms. (M.A.) 

Q. To the Columbia River ? 

A. 2500 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. To China ? 

A. 600 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. From the Marquesas to the coast of Peru ? 

A. 4100 ms. (M. A.) 

Q. What islands have been converted to the Christian religion ? 

A. Habaii Is., Vavou, Cook's or Hervey's Is., Society Is.,Geor= 
gian Is., Austral Is., Palliser's Is., Pitcairn's Is., and Sandwich Is, 
(M. A.) 

Q. Which have been partially converted ? 

A. Navigator's Is., Tonga Is., Paumotu or Pearl Is., and Ton- 
gataboo Is. (M. A.) 

Q. How many miles does the Pacific extend from east to west ? 

A. 11,000 ms. (M.A.) 

Q. From north to south ? 

A. 7000 ms. (M. A.) 



THE END 

721 "f 












^ & 


















'V 






























^ 









» 8 I 1 






•^ A^ 



>"% 









